0001167831lbk:InterestRateMemberlbk:DepositsFromCustomersMemberlbk:TheGroupMemberifrs-full:CashFlowHedgesMember2020-01-012020-12-310001167831lbk:PriorToOffsettingOfBalancesWithinSameTaxingJurisdictionMemberlbk:TheBankMember2019-12-310001167831lbk:RetailUKMotorFinanceMemberlbk:FairValueHedgesMemberlbk:FixedRateMortgagesMemberlbk:InterestRateMember2021-12-310001167831lbk:LoansAndAdvancesToCustomersAndReverseRepurchaseAgreementsMemberlbk:Stage3Memberlbk:TheBankMember2021-01-012021-12-310001167831lbk:DerivativeLiabilitiesMemberlbk:UnfavourableChangesMemberifrs-full:OptionPricingModelMemberlbk:InterestRateVolatilityMember2020-12-310001167831lbk:TheGroupMemberlbk:ExpectedCreditLossesInRespectOfDrawnExposuresMemberlbk:RMS16Member2020-12-310001167831lbk:CommercialMemberlbk:CMS1518Memberlbk:RetailOtherMemberlbk:Stage2Memberlbk:ExpectedCreditLossesInRespectOfDrawnExposuresMember2021-12-310001167831lbk:TheGroupMemberlbk:GrossUndrawnExposuresMember2020-12-310001167831lbk:PurchasedOrOriginatedCreditimpairedMemberlbk:OtherMemberlbk:GrossUndrawnExposuresMemberlbk:CMS1114Memberlbk:Stage2Member2021-12-310001167831lbk:TheGroupMemberlbk:RMSMemberlbk:ExpectedCreditLossesInRespectOfDrawnExposuresMemberlbk:OtherMember2019-12-310001167831lbk:Stage2Memberlbk:RetailMortgagesMemberlbk:ExpectedCreditLossesInRespectOfUndrawnExposuresMemberlbk:RMS10Memberlbk:Stage2Member2020-12-310001167831lbk:RMS14Memberlbk:GrossDrawnExposuresMemberlbk:TheBankMemberlbk:RetailMortgagesMember2020-12-310001167831lbk:CommercialMemberlbk:TheBankMemberlbk:RetailLoansAndOverdraftsMemberlbk:TheBankMember2021-12-310001167831lbk:OtherMemberlbk:CMSMemberlbk:GrossUndrawnExposuresMemberlbk:Stage1Member2020-12-310001167831lbk:RMS79Memberlbk:RetailLoansAndOverdraftsMemberlbk:TheBankMember2021-12-310001167831lbk:RetailOtherMemberlbk:GrossUndrawnExposuresMemberlbk:TheBankMemberlbk:Stage1Member2019-12-310001167831lbk:UndiscountedFutureCashFlowBasisMemberlbk:OutflowsMemberifrs-full:LaterThanOneYearAndNotLaterThanFiveYearsMemberlbk:TheBankMember2020-12-31RMS16Memberlbk:TheBankMember2020-12-310001167831ifrs-full:LaterThanFiveYearsMemberlbk:TheBankMemberifrs-full:OtherContingentLiabilitiesMember2020-12-31








Lloyds Bank plc


2020 Annual Report on Form 20-F















lbk-20201231_g1.jpg



As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 118 March 20212022
UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
FORM 20-F
☐ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
OR
☒ ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the fiscal year ended 31 December 20202021 OR
☐ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
OR
☐ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
Commission file number 001-35079
LLOYDS BANK plc
(Exact name of Registrant as Specified in Its Charter)
England
(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)
25 Gresham Street
London EC2V 7HN
United Kingdom
(Address of Principal Executive Offices)
Kate Cheetham, Company Secretary
Tel +44 (0) 20 7356 2104, Fax +44 (0) 20 7356 1808
25 Gresham Street
London EC2V 7HN
United Kingdom
(Name, telephone, e-mail and/or facsimile number and address of Company contact person)
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:
Title of each classTrading symbolName of each exchange on which registered
$1,250,000,000 3.5% Senior Notes due 2025LYG25LYG/25The New York Stock Exchange
$1,500,000,000 2.25% Senior Notes due 2022LYG22The New York Stock Exchange
$1,250,000,000 3.3% Senior Notes due 2021LYG21AThe New York Stock Exchange
$1,000,000,000 Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2021LYG21BLYG/22The New York Stock Exchange
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:
None
Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:
None
The number of outstanding shares of each of Lloyds Bank plc’s classes of capital or common stock as of 31 December 20202021 was:
Ordinary shares, nominal value 1 pound each1,574,285,752
Preference shares, nominal value 1 pound each100 
Preference shares, nominal value 25 pence eachNaN
Preference shares, nominal value 25 cents eachNaN
Preference shares, nominal value 25 euroEuro cents eachNaN
Preference shares, nominal value 25 yenYen eachNaN
Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.
Yes ☐  No ☒
If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
Yes ☐  No ☒
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
Yes ☒  No ☐
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).
Yes ☒  No ☐
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):
Large accelerated filer ☐  Accelerated filer ☐  Non-Accelerated filer ☒  Emerging Growth Company ☐
If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ☐
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management's assessment of the effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ☐
Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:
U.S. GAAP ☐  International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board ☒ Other ☐
If ‘Other’ has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:
Item 17 ☐   Item 18 ☐
If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).
Yes☐   No ☒
The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.
As a wholly-owned subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc, a public company with limited liability incorporated in the United Kingdom and which has its registered office in Scotland, Lloyds Bank plc meets the conditions set forth in General Instructions I(1)(a) and I(1)(b) of Form 10-K, as applied to reports on Form 20-F and is therefore filing its Form 20-F with a reduced disclosure format.


FORM 20-F CROSS REFERENCE SHEET
Form 20-F item numberPage and caption references in this document*
1Identity of Directors, Senior Management and AdvisersNot applicable
2Offer Statistics and Expected TimetableNot applicable
3Key Information
A.Selected financial dataOmitted
B.Capitalization and indebtednessNot applicable
C.Reason for the offer and use of proceedsNot applicable
D.Risk factors
89-100
4Information on the Company
A.History and development of the companyOmitted
B.Business overview
2-12, 84-86, F-31-F-34
C.Organizational structure
D.Property, plant and equipment
10, F-65-F-66
4AUnresolved staff commentsNot applicable
5Operating and Financial Review and Prospects
A.Operating results
B.Liquidity and capital resourcesOmitted
C.Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.Not applicable
D.Trend informationOmitted
E.Off-balance sheet arrangementsOmitted
F.Tabular disclosure of contractual obligationsOmitted
G.Safe harbor
6Directors, Senior Management and Employees
A.Directors and senior managementOmitted
B.CompensationOmitted
C.Board practices
77-82
D.EmployeesOmitted
E.Share ownershipOmitted
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions
A.Major shareholdersOmitted
B.Related party transactionsOmitted
C.Interests of experts and counselNot applicable
8Financial Information
A.Consolidated statements and other financial information
F-1-F-148
B.Significant changesNot applicable
9The Offer and Listing
A.Offer and listing details
B.Plan of distributionNot applicable
C.Markets
D.Selling shareholdersNot applicable
E.DilutionNot applicable
F.Expenses of the issueNot applicable
10Additional Information
A.Share capitalNot applicable
B.Memorandum and Articles of Association
C.Material contractsNot applicable
D.Exchange controls
E.Taxation
F.Dividends and paying assetsNot applicable
G.Statement by expertsNot applicable
H.Documents on display
I.Subsidiary information
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk
22-74
Form 20-F item numberPage and caption references in this document*
1Identity of Directors, Senior Management and AdvisersNot applicable
2Offer Statistics and Expected TimetableNot applicable
3Key Information
A.Reserved by the Securities and Exchange CommissionNot applicable
B.Capitalization and indebtednessNot applicable
C.Reason for the offer and use of proceedsNot applicable
D.Risk factors
108-119
4Information on the Company
A.History and development of the companyOmitted
B.Business overview
2-22, 99-101, F-32-F-35
C.Organisational structure
D.Property, plant and equipmentNot applicable
4AUnresolved staff commentsNot applicable
5Operating and Financial Review and Prospects
A.Operating results
B.Liquidity and capital resourcesOmitted
C.Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.Not applicable
D.Trend informationOmitted
E.Critical accounting estimates
24, F-23-F-31
6Directors, Senior Management and Employees
A.Directors and senior managementOmitted
B.CompensationOmitted
C.Board practices
92-98
D.EmployeesOmitted
E.Share ownershipOmitted
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions
A.Major shareholdersOmitted
B.Related party transactionsOmitted
C.Interests of experts and counselNot applicable
8Financial Information
A.Consolidated statements and other financial information
F-1-F-134
B.Significant changesNot applicable
9The Offer and Listing
A.Offer and listing details
B.Plan of distributionNot applicable
C.Markets
D.Selling shareholdersNot applicable
E.DilutionNot applicable
F.Expenses of the issueNot applicable
10Additional Information
A.Share capitalNot applicable
B.Memorandum and Articles of Association
103-106
C.Material contracts
D.Exchange controls
E.Taxation
F.Dividends and paying assetsNot applicable
G.Statement by expertsNot applicable
H.Documents on display
I.Subsidiary information
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk
31-89
12Description of Securities Other than Equity SecuritiesNot applicable
13Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of ProceedsNot applicable
15Controls and Procedures


FORM 20-F CROSS REFERENCE SHEET
1216Description ofReserved by the Securities Other than Equity Securities
A.Debt Securitiesand Exchange CommissionNot applicable
B.Warrants and RightsNot applicable
C.Other SecuritiesNot applicable
D.American Depositary SharesNot applicable
13Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of ProceedsNot applicable
15Controls and Procedures
A.Disclosure controls and procedures
B.Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting
C.Attestation report of the registered public accounting firmNot applicable
D.Changes in internal control over financial reporting
16AAudit Committee Financial Expertcommittee financial expertOmitted
16BCode of EthicsethicsOmitted
16CPrincipal Accountant Feesaccountant fees and Servicesservices
16DExemptions from the Listing Standardslisting standards for Audit Committeesaudit committeesNot applicable
16EPurchases of Equity Securitiesequity securities by the Issuerissuer and Affiliated Purchasersaffiliated purchasersNot applicable
16FChange in Registrant’s Certifying Accountantregistrant’s certifying accountant
83Not applicable
16GCorporate Governancegovernance
16HMine safety disclosureNot applicable
16IDisclosure regarding foreign jurisdictions that prevent inspectionsNot applicable
17Financial StatementsstatementsSee Itemitem 8
18Financial StatementsstatementsSee Itemitem 8
19ExhibitsExhibit Index
*Certain items are indicated as omitted as Lloyds Bank plc is a wholly owned subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc, which is a reporting company under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and meets the conditions set forth in General Instruction I(1)(a) and (b) of Form 10-K, as applied to annual reports on Form 20-F, and is therefore filing this Form 20-F with a reduced disclosure format.



TABLE OF CONTENTS

PRESENTATION OF INFORMATION

In this annual report, references to the ‘Bank’ are to Lloyds Bank plc; references to ‘Lloyds Bank Group’ or the ‘Group’ are to Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary and associated undertakings; and references to the ‘consolidated financial statements’ or ‘financial statements’ are to Lloyds Bank consolidated financial statements included in this annual report. References to ‘Lloyds Banking Group’ and ‘Parent Group’ are to Lloyds Banking Group plc, the parent company of Lloyds Bank plc, and its subsidiaries and associated undertakings. References to LBCM are to Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc, a fellow subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group, and its subsidiaries. References to the ‘Financial Conduct Authority’ or ‘FCA’ and to the ‘Prudential Regulation Authority’ or ‘PRA’ are to the United Kingdom (the UK) Financial Conduct Authority and the UK Prudential Regulation Authority. References to the ‘Financial Services Authority’ or ‘FSA’ are to their predecessor organisation, the UK Financial Services Authority.
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Certain disclosures required by IFRS have been included in sections highlighted as ‘Audited’ within the Operating and financial review and prospects section of this Annual Report on Form 20-F on pages 1323 to 76.91. Disclosures marked as audited indicate that they are within the scope of the audit of the financial statements taken as a whole; these disclosures are not subject to a separate opinion.
Lloyds Bank Group publishes its consolidated financial statements expressed in British pounds (‘pounds sterling’Sterling’, ‘sterling’‘Sterling’ or ‘£’), the lawful currency of the UK. In this annual report, references to ‘pence’ and ‘p’ are to one-hundredth of one pound sterling;Sterling; references to ‘US dollars’Dollars’, ‘US$’ or ‘$’ are to the lawful currency of the United States (the US); references to ‘cent’ or ‘c’ are to one-hundredth of one US dollar;Dollar; references to ‘euro’‘Euro’ or ‘€’ are to the lawful currency of the member states of the European Union (EU) that have adopted a single currency in accordance with the Treaty establishing the European Communities, as amended by the Treaty of European Union; references to ‘euro‘Euro cent’ are to one-hundredth of one euro;Euro; and references to ‘Japanese yen’Yen’, ‘Japanese ¥’ or ‘¥’ are to the lawful currency of Japan. Solely for the convenience of the reader, this annual report contains translations of certain pounds sterlingSterling amounts into US dollarsDollars at specified rates. These translations should not be construed as representations by Lloyds Bank Group that the pounds sterlingSterling amounts actually represent such US dollarDollar amounts or could be converted into US dollarsDollars at the rate indicated or at any other rate. Unless otherwise stated, the translations of pounds sterlingSterling into US dollarsDollars have been made at the noon buying rateNoon Buying Rate in New York City for cable transfers in pounds sterlingSterling as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the Noon Buying Rate) in effect on 31 December 2020.2021. The Noon Buying Rate on 31 December 20202021 differs from certain of the actual rates used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, which are expressed in pounds sterling,Sterling, and therefore US dollarDollar amounts appearing in this annual report may differ significantly from actual US dollarDollar amounts which were translated into pounds sterlingSterling in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with IFRS.
The information included in the consolidated financial statements presented in this Form 20-F for the two comparative years differs from the information provided in Lloyds Bank Group’s UK results for the year ended 31 December 2020. As reported in the Bank’s 2018 Form 20-F, an adjusting post balance sheet event that occurred between the signing of the Bank’s 2018 UK Annual Report and Accounts and its 2018 Form 20-F resulted in the charge recognised in respect of PPI complaints in the 2018 Form 20-F being £649 million greater than that recorded in the 2018 UK Annual Report and Accounts. Consequently, the charge recognised by the Lloyds Bank Group in its UK basis results for 2019 was £649 million greater than on a US basis. The Lloyds Bank Group has reported the same net assets on a US basis and on a UK basis since 30 June 2019.
1

BUSINESS OVERVIEW
The Lloyds Bank Group is a leading provider of financial services to individual and business customers in the UK. At 31 December 2020,2021, Lloyds Bank Group had 60,67257,180 employees (on a full-time equivalent basis) and its total assets were £599,939£602,849 million. The Lloyds Bank Group reported a profit before tax for the 12 months toyear ended 31 December 20202021 of £1,329£5,785 million, and its capital ratios at that date were 23.5 per cent for total capital, 19.819.7 per cent for tier 1 capital and 15.516.7 per cent for common equity tier 1 capital.
Set out below is the Lloyds Bank Group’s summarised income statement for each of the last two years:
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
Net interest incomeNet interest income10,770 12,220 Net interest income11,036 10,770 
Other incomeOther income3,815 4,388 Other income3,637 3,815 
Total incomeTotal income14,585 16,608 Total income14,673 14,585 
Total operating expenses(9,196)(11,123)
Impairment(4,060)(1,362)
Operating expensesOperating expenses(10,206)(9,196)
Impairment credit (charge)Impairment credit (charge)1,318 (4,060)
Profit before taxProfit before tax1,329 4,123 Profit before tax5,785 1,329 
The Lloyds Bank Group’s main business activities are retail and commercial banking and it operates primarily in the UK. Services are offered through a number of well recognised brands including Lloyds Bank, Halifax and Bank of Scotland, and through a range of distribution channels including the largest branch network and digital bank in the UK.
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Lloyds Bank Group’s two primary operating divisions, which are also reporting segments, were Retail and Commercial Banking. Retail provides current accounts, savings, mortgages, credit cards, motor finance and unsecured loans to personal and business banking customers. Commercial Banking provides lending, transactional banking, working capital management, risk management and debt capital markets services to commercial customers.
Profit before tax is analysed on pages 1524 and 1627 and the table below shows the results of the Lloyds Bank Group’s segments in the last two fiscal years.
2020
20191
£m£m
Retail1,856 2,204 
Commercial Banking20 1,430 
Other(547)489 
Profit before tax1,329 4,123 
1Segmental analysis restated, as explained on page F-31.
20212020
£m£m
Retail5,024 1,856 
Commercial Banking1,536 20 
Other(775)(547)
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 
Lloyds Bank plc was incorporated as a public limited company and registered in England under the UK Companies Act on 20 April 1865 with the registered number 2065. Lloyds Bank plc’s registered office and its principal executive offices in the UK are located at 25 Gresham Street, London EC2V 7HN, United Kingdom, telephone number + 44 (0) 20 7626 1500. Lloyds Bank maintains a website at www.lloydsbank.com.
2

BUSINESS
STRATEGY OF LLOYDS BANK GROUP
The Lloyds Bank Group is a leading provider of financial services to individual and business customers in the UK. The Lloyds Bank Group’s main business activities are retail and commercial banking. Services are provided through a number of well recognised brands including Lloyds Bank, Halifax and Bank of Scotland and through a range of distribution channels, including the largest branch network and digital bank in the UK. The Lloyds Bank Group strategy is directly aligned to the strategy of its parent, Lloyds Banking Group plc.
Today's environment continues to evolve and provide new challenges. The macroeconomic environment remains uncertain, whilst Lloyds Banking Group is witnessing increasing societal expectations, an accelerated shift to digital and new technology capabilities in the context of the pandemic driving a step change in ways of working.
Throughout 2020 the management team, in conjunction with the Board, have worked on developing an evolution of Lloyds Banking Group's strategy to address these issues. The Group has made significant progress in recent years, leveraging its unique strengths and assets, including its purpose driven and customer focused business model, low risk approach to business, market leading efficiency and leading multi-channel propositions, including the largest digital bank and branch networksole integrated provider of banking, insurance and wealth propositions in the UK. ThisThe Group's strong foundations have created distinctive competitive strengths. It has createdleading customer franchises with trusted brands, significant data assets and leading market shares. Alongside this, the platform for Strategic Review 2021, the next stageGroup has a strong balance sheet, disciplined risk management and an efficient business model, operating at scale with strong cost discipline.
The Group’s purpose of the Group's journey.
Strategic Review 2021 is focused on Helping Britain Recover and building the UK’s preferred financial partner for personal customers and the best bank for business. Strategic Review 2021 will deliver co-ordinated growth opportunities in the Group’s two core customer segments, supported by enhanced capabilities in four areas:
Preferred financial partner for personal customers, through leveraging the Group’s unique competitive advantages to significantly deepen customer relationships
Best bank for business, through building a leading digital SME proposition, with a disciplined and strengthened business for Corporate and Institutional clients
Further develop and leverage the Group’s core capabilities, including delivering a modernised technology architecture, building integrated payment solutions, creating a data driven organisation and implementing reimagined ways of working
Clear execution outcomes for the coming year are outlined for all these areas and underpinned by long-term strategic vision. Strategic Review 2021 will thus enable the Group to deliver revenue generation and diversification whilst unlocking further efficiency gains, within the Group’s low risk and capital efficient business. Lloyds Banking Group's purpose, uniqueProsper drives its business model and ambitiousstrategic participation choices. The Group’s new strategy will allowhas a clear vision to be a UK-customer focused digital leader and integrated financial services provider, capitalising on new opportunities, at scale. To this end the Group is embedding delivery of broader stakeholder outcomes in its strategy and the way it creates value to Help Britain Recoverbe a truly purpose-driven organisation.
The Group aims to deliver for all its stakeholders by helping build an inclusive society and deliver long-termsupporting the transition to a low carbon economy. To support the transition to a low carbon economy, the Group is reinforcing its prior commitments, reducing the carbon emissions the Group finances by more than 50 per cent by 2030, on the path to net zero by 2050 or sooner, with the Group’s own operations being net zero by 2030 and sustainability outcomes embedded across business priorities.
Through its new strategy, Lloyds Banking Group will transform its business, creating higher, more sustainable returnsvalue for all stakeholders. The Group will drive revenue growth and diversification across all its shareholders.main businesses, focusing on strengthening cost and capital efficiency, together built off a powerful enabling platform maximising the potential of people, technology and data to support the business ambitions.
BUSINESS AND ACTIVITIES OF LLOYDS BANK GROUP
The Lloyds Bank Group’s activities are organised into two financial reporting segments: Retail and Commercial Banking. During 2020, the Group migrated certain customer relationships from the SME business within Commercial Banking to Business Banking within Retail; the Group has also revised its approach to internal funding charges, including the adoption of the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) interest rate benchmark in place of LIBOR. Comparatives have been restated accordingly.
Further information on the Lloyds Bank Group’s segments is set out in note 4 to the financial statements.
MATERIAL CONTRACTS
The Bank and its subsidiaries are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business.
3

BUSINESS
ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS
Lloyds Banking Group sets the environmental goals and measures the environmental achievements of the Lloyds Banking Group as a whole.
Accordingly, the disclosures below are for Lloyds Banking Group as a whole and not specific to the Group. Throughout this section, references to "we" are to the Lloyds Banking Group.
Helping Britain transition to a sustainable low carbon economy
This section contains certain disclosures in alignment with the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD).
The Group is making good progress in better understanding the risks and opportunities that climate change presents for our business and our customers, but there is still a lot of work to be done.
A high level summary of disclosure aligned to the TCFD recommendations is provided below.
Further detailed information can be found in our 2021 Climate Report.
This section contains forward-looking statements, please refer to page 120 for our forward looking statements.
Overview
Summary of TCFD recommendations and our progress against these
We have been continually making progress against the TCFD recommendations and enhancing our climate-related financial disclosures since our 2018 Annual Report on Form 20-F. We comply with the FCA’s Listing Rule 9.8.6R(8) and make disclosures consistent with the 2017 TCFD recommendations and recommended disclosures across all four of the TCFD pillars: Strategy; Governance; Risk Management; and Metrics and Targets.
We will continue to assess and develop our disclosures against the TCFD recommendations and recommended disclosures in 2022, taking into account relevant TCFD guidance and materials and evolving best practice. Key areas of focus in 2022 include the following:
Strategy
We explored the resilience of our credit portfolios under three different climate scenarios as a result of our participation in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario (CBES), as well as undertaking other internal activity developing initial quantitative insight for key sectors. We will undertake further climate scenario analysis in 2022 that leverages learnings from the CBES exercise and access to improved data and analytical capabilities. This will allow us to better understand the resilience of the Group’s unique positionbusiness model to climate risks. In particular, the aim is to support the development of new business plans and sector ambitions to achieve the Group's net zero ambitions and to examine the resilience of these to physical and transition risks.
Metrics and targets
We have developed metrics to assess climate-related risks and opportunities that include current and projected financed emissions, emissions intensity, sustainable finance and sectors with increased climate risk (exposure, limit, maturity). We have evolved our Group Balanced Scorecard so that it now includes two ESG measures that are aligned to climate change to reflect our net zero ambitions. The additional climate scenario analysis we will conduct in 2022 will lead to enhancements to the physical and transition risk assessment of our high carbon sectors and clients within these that will allow for improved management information and reporting to the UK economy meansBoard as well as Net Zero Banking Alliance (NZBA) sector target setting.
We have disclosed our Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions for our own operations, along with our initial Scope 3 financed emissions for most of our banking and Scottish Widows activity. Our future focus will be on disclosing our Scope 3 supply chain emissions and extending the coverage of Scope 3 financed emissions by including additional asset classes where data and methodologies exist and engaging across the industry on calculation approaches for asset classes where methods do not exist.
We have developed ambitions to achieve net zero for our own operations by 2030 and for the activities of those we finance by 2050, with interim ambitions set for 2030. We have also developed 2030 ambitions for our operational energy, water and waste and an initial set of our highest emitting sectors. We are on track to disclose further ambitions for high emitting sectors in line with our NZBA commitments, along with a net zero transition plan that further communicates our decarbonisation strategy.


4

BUSINESS
Progress against the TCFD recommendations
RecommendationRecommended disclosuresSummary of progress
StrategyDisclose the actual and potential impacts of climate-related risks and opportunities on the organisation's business, strategy and financial planning where such information is materialA: Describe the climate-related risks and opportunities the organisation has identified over the short, medium and long term
We have prioritised our activities around net zero ambitions associated with achieving net zero in our own operations by 2030 and for the activities of those we finance by 2050, with interim ambitions set for 2030
We have defined four sustainability strategic pillars that will help us to achieve our ambitions in a manner that engages across the whole of our organisation and also across our wider stakeholder network
We have described the key climate-related risks and opportunities identified to date and defined our short, medium and long-term time horizons
In preparing the Group's financial statements, we have considered the impact of climate-related risks on our financial position and performance
In 2021, the Group started to incorporate initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks and opportunities as part of our financial planning process
We are continuing to develop climate modelling and scenario analysis capabilities to quantify climate risk
We participated in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario, which created a foundation capability that we are extending further as we embed climate into risk management and other processes
We have developed initial climate scenario analysis quantitative insights for key sectors
B: Describe the impact of climate-related
risks and opportunities on the organisation's
business, strategy and financial planning
C: Describe the resilience of the organisation’s strategy, taking into consideration different climate-related scenarios, including a 2°C or lower scenario
Metrics and TargetsDisclose the metrics and targets used to assess and manage relevant climate-related risks and
opportunities where such information is material
A: Disclose the metrics used by the organisation to assess climate-related risks and opportunities in line with its strategy and risk management process
We have developed several initial metrics to measure our progress against our net zero ambitions, which include measures related to our financed emissions, sustainable finance and own operations
We have provided details of our Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions for our own operations, calculated an initial 2019 financed emissions baseline for Scottish Widows and provided both an updated 2018 financed emissions baseline and 2019 financed emissions for our banking activity
We have specific sector ambitions for our banking activity related to power1, oil & gas, thermal coal1 and UK motor, and Scottish Widows has developed its first Climate Action Plan (published February 2022)
We have introduced new 2024 sustainable finance strategic outcomes across the Group2
More than £6.9 billion of green/ESG related finance3 was delivered in 2021
We also estimate that through Scottish Widows we will make discretionary investment of £20-25 billion into climate-aware investment strategies by 2025, with at least £1 billion invested in climate solutions investments
We developed three new operational climate pledges in 2021 that are designed to accelerate our plan to achieve net zero carbon operations and we continue to measure progress against those and our wider environmental ambitions for our own operations
B: Disclose Scope 1, Scope 2, and if appropriate, Scope 3 greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, and the related risks
C: Describe the targets used by the organisation to manage climate-related risks and opportunities and performance against targets
5

BUSINESS
RecommendationRecommended disclosuresSummary of progress
GovernanceDisclose the
organisation’s
governance around
climate-related risks
and opportunities
A: Describe the board’s oversight of
climate-related risks and opportunities
Our governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the Group’s sustainability strategy and management of climate risk at Board and Executive levels
The Board is engaged on a regular basis on our sustainability agenda and in 2021 received training to continue to develop understanding of climate risk
In 2021, we established the Group Net Zero Committee to provide Executive direction and oversight of the Group environmental sustainability strategy
Key committee decisions include approval of our sector ambitions and external sector statements
B: Describe management’s role in assessing and managing climate-related
risks and opportunities
Risk ManagementDisclose how the
organisation identifies, assesses, and manages climate-related risks
A: Describe the organisation’s process for identifying and assessing climate-related risks
We have continued to embed climate risk into our activities and Enterprise Risk Management Framework, through consideration of climate risk as its own principal risk, and integration into other principal risks materially impacted
In 2021 we have introduced the Group Climate Risk Policy to provide an overarching framework for the management of climate risks and opportunities across the Group
We have undertaken detailed analysis of our portfolios and the pathways required to reduce emissions, including deep dives into sectors at increased risk from impacts of climate change
Ongoing development of climate risk assessment tools and methodologies, including our qualitative climate risk assessment tool in Commercial Banking
B: Describe the organisation’s process for managing climate-related risks
C: Describe how processes for identifying, assessing, and managing climate-related risks are integrated into the organisation’s overall risk management
1Our power sector ambition was set prior to us joining the NZBA and will be updated in 2022 to align with NZBA guidance. Our thermal coal ambition is a commitment to exit all entities that operate thermal coal facilities by 2030 (see page 32 of our 2021 Climate Report) and will currently be tracked through lending exposure to the sector as opposed to annual emissions estimates.
2See page 41 of our 2021 Climate Report for more detail on our 2024 sustainable finance strategic outcomes.
3Includes Clean Growth Finance Initiative, Commercial Real Estate Green Lending, Renewable Energy Financing, Sustainability Linked Loans and Green/ESG/Social Bond facilitation.


6

BUSINESS
Our Strategy
We believe that the successful transition to a more sustainable, low carbon economy isrepresents an opportunity to build a resilient future, creating new businesses and jobs. The transition will require transformation of strategic importance. The Group supportsevery sector at scale.
We want to play our part in supporting the transition and support the aims of the 2015 Paris Climate Agreement, the UK Government’s Net Zeronet zero target, andthe Ten Point Plan for athe Green Industrial Revolution and the recommendations of the TCFD.
The economic recovery required post COVID-19 providesSupporting an effective transition is a criticalpriority for us and an integral part of our new strategy. Our Board is fully engaged in key decisions and ensuring continued progress. We have prioritised our activities around net zero ambitions associated with achieving net zero in our own operations by 2030 and for the activities of those we finance by 2050, with interim ambitions set for 2030.
Our priority areas are greening the built environment, supporting the energy transition, low carbon transportation, sustainable farming and natural capital, and sustainable investments and pensions. These form a fundamental part of our overall approach to net zero and represent where we see the greatest challenge and opportunity to drive clean growthhelp accelerate the transition to a low carbon economy for the UK. Our ambitions and ensurepriority areas are underpinned by four pillars of our sustainability strategy that will help us to achieve our ambitions in a manner that engages the UK’s decarbonisation requirements sitwhole of our organisation and across our wider stakeholder network.
As signatories to Net-Zero Banking Alliance, we have committed to setting sector-based ambitions across our highest emitting sectors. We have now published ambitions covering Power, Thermal Coal, Oil and Gas and Retail (Motor) vehicles.
We will report additional sector ambitions in 2022 for parts of our remaining carbon intensive sectors, including residential mortgages, transportation and automotive activity beyond Retail (Motor) vehicles. We will also develop further ambitions and a transition plan in accordance with the timelines stipulated by the NZBA. Our sector ambitions for our banking activities complement our Scottish Widows Climate Action Plan, which covers our approach for our investing activity through Scottish Widows.
With our strategic update, we have published new sustainable lending and investment ambitions with £10 billion lending for green mortgages by 2024, £8 billion financing for electric and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles by 2024, and £15 billion sustainable financing for corporate and institutional clients by 2024, and £20-25 billion in climate aware investment strategies through Scottish Widows by 2025. In-year targets are part of the 2022 Group balanced scorecard, supplementing the measure on reducing own operational carbon emissions.
lbk-20211231_g1.jpg

7

BUSINESS
Reducing our financed emissions
Central to our ambitions is the alignment of our lending and investment activities with the 2015 Paris Agreement. The need to reorient financial flows in line with a 1.5ºC pathway means that we will have to fundamentally reshape our approach to the types of investments and lending we undertake across the Group.
Progress update
Net zero ambitions2021 achievements2022 plans
BankWork with customers, government and the market to help reduce the carbon emissions we finance by more than 50% by 2030 on the path to net zero by 2050 or sooner
Updated our 2018 financed emissions baseline and calculated 2019 financed emissions
Completed initial analysis on the pathways required for the Group’s portfolio to achieve the ambition of reducing the carbon emissions financed by more than 50% by 2030, focused on the key hard to abate sectors
Expanded the funding available under the Group's discounted green finance initiatives1 from £3 billion to £5 billion to support businesses as they transition to a low carbon economy
More than £6.9 billion of green and ESG related finance2 was delivered in 2021
Published a 2030 ambition for the power sector
Engaged across leading industry initiatives to contribute to key thought leadership and public advocacy positions
Publish additional sector ambitions related to our high carbon sectors, beyond the four sector ambitions in this report on power, thermal coal, oil and gas and UK motor
Develop an understanding of approaches for integrating the preservation of natural capital into our sector-specific net zero strategies
Key areas of focus
We are developing a strategic portfolio alignment approach across our key sectors. It is clear that the challenges facing each of our sectors vary considerably and that each sector is at a differing scale of maturity in its transition journey
Our immediate focus is to work closely with our most heavy emitting sectors to support their progressive decarbonisation
We believe that a pure divestment strategy is not in line with our purpose. We want to finance the changes needed to live and do business more sustainably, in line with a just transition
The sectors where we have to focus the most to help ensure they can transition are agriculture, energy, housing and transportation. This has been informed by detailed sector reviews that have been conducted over the past 18 months on the carbon-intensive sectors where we have lending to customers that are likely to be higher carbon emitters or be exposed to higher levels of physical or transition risks (see Risk management section for more details)
Scottish Widows
Target halving the carbon footprint5 of Scottish Widows investments by 2030 on the path to net zero by 2050
Calculated an initial 2019 financed emissions baseline for Scottish Widows
Announced a 2025 target to invest between £20–25 billion in climate-aware investment strategies3, with at least £1 billion invested into climate solutions investments4
In 2020 we collaborated with BlackRock to design and launch the Climate Transition World Equity Fund, which Scottish Widows seeded and has continued to invest in, reaching more than £5 billion by end 2021
Overhauled the Scottish Widows Environmental Fund to become fossil fuel-free, not investing in any companies that derive revenue from fossil fuels and targeting a positive environmental impact by focusing on companies solving environmental challenges and establishing the infrastructure we need to support a lower carbon world6
Continue to progress against our Climate Action Plan (published February 2022) and take meaningful actions against our net zero ambitions
Further ESG integration into our pension default funds
Increase our investment in the BlackRock Climate Transition World Equity fund over the course of 2022
Enhance the information provided through the Scottish Widows Find Your Impact tool within the Scottish Widows mobile app
Continue our active stewardship with action on voting and engagement of material investee companies
Key areas of focus
Scottish Widows' position as a large investor presents us with opportunities to participate in and influence the transition for the long-term benefit of our customers and society
We are supporting investments that back climate solutions for real-world impact by incorporating climate objectives into our strategic asset allocation and increasing discretionary investment into climate-aware investment strategies
We are also using our engagement and shareholder voting power to drive companies to make the changes necessary to align with a 1.5°C pathway and excluding high carbon investments that run the risk of becoming stranded assets through our Exclusions Policy
1Funding provided by Commercial Banking under the Clean Growth Finance Initiative and Commercial Real Estate Green Lending.
2Includes Clean Growth Finance Initiative, Commercial Real Estate Green Lending, Renewable Energy Financing, Sustainability Linked Loans and Green/ESG/Social Bond facilitation.
3Climate-aware investment strategies: we’re working closely with our strategic fund management partners BlackRock and Schroders to develop and refine a range of funds that have a bias towards investing in companies that are adapting their businesses to be less carbon-intensive and/or developing climate solutions.
4We will invest in climate solution investments within climate-aware investment strategies or other funds. To define climate solution investments, we look at the heartportion of company revenue associated with activities such as alternative energy, energy efficiency, green building, sustainable agriculture, sustainable water, and pollution prevention. We use MSCI Environmental Impact Revenue data to help with this classification.
5Carbon footprint is a measure of carbon intensity calculated as absolute value of emissions applicable to an investment divided by the value of investment.
6See page 44 of our 2021 ESG Report page for full description of the UK’s policy framework. fund and its exclusions.
8

BUSINESS
Reducing our own operations and supply chain emissions
Our own operations
In 2020,2021, we announced a new set of operational climate pledges, including a commitment to achieve net zero carbon operations across Scope 1 and 2 by 2030, against a 2018/19 baseline, while at the same time halving our energy consumption and maintaining travel related carbon emissions from business travel and commuting below 50% of a pre-COVID 19 baseline. We are also embedding our response to natural capital preservation as part of our approach to sustainable operations by protecting our operational green spaces, through restoring natural ecosystems, decreasing human intervention and encouraging native species.
Our supply chain
For our suppliers, we have focused our efforts on understanding the carbon emissions generated through our sourcing activities and how we can positively influence a sustainable supply chain. We know that we cannot achieve our net zero ambitions without the support of our suppliers and in 2021 we have been developing our methodology for measuring our supply chain emissions. We are building our programme to further enhance sustainability considerations in our sourcing approach and to engage those suppliers that have the biggest impact on our carbon emissions with the aim of developing specific ambitions for reducing supply chain emissions and working collaboratively to achieve them.
Progress Update
Net zero ambitions2021 achievements2022 plans
Net zero carbon operations by 2030
Achieved a cumulative 22.5% reduction in Scope 1 and 2 carbon emissions to date compared to our 2018/19 baseline (measured using the market-based method)
Continued to purchase 100% renewable electricity across our global operations, meeting our RE100 commitment
Completed our first three net zero carbon operations branches and started the installation of a ground source heat pump at our largest gas consuming office
Proudly remained Carbon Trust Standard certification holders for carbon reduction for the twelfth consecutive year1
Continue to purchase 100% renewable electricity and work towards our ambition to increase the percentage of our electricity sourced directly from additional renewable developments (via Power Purchase Agreements) or onsite generation, to at least 60% by 2025
Invest in our buildings to keep eliminating the use of natural gas, replacing gas boilers with electric heating systems such as heat pumps
Improve our air conditioning systems, switching to more energy efficient technology using less harmful refrigerant gases
Reduce total energy consumption by 50% by 2030
Reduced total building energy consumption by 5.7% compared to 2019/20 and 14.8% compared to our 2018/19 baseline
Continued our energy optimisation programme, resulting in a 101.5 GWh cumulative saving in 2021
Worked with our supply chain to continue our LED lighting installation programme across our offices and branches. This year we have completed 170 installs, resulting in expected savings of 1,280 MWh, the equivalent to powering 360 UK homes
Upgraded Building Management Systems at 101 of our branches, which are now remotely controlled so energy usage is optimised by a dedicated team, ensuring minimal energy wastage and resulting in savings of 610 MWh
Continued our Climate Group EP100 campaign, confirming our commitment to improve energy productivity through our use of the UK Green Building Council’s Net Zero Carbon Buildings framework; reducing the direct emissions generated from our buildings and operations to net zero by 2030
Continue our energy optimisation programme, which is being delivered by energy managers across our estate, ensuring savings are sustained for the future
Continue to accelerate our investment in energy efficiency, installing LED lighting in our branches and offices as well as replacing and improving building management systems
Build awareness with our colleagues and suppliers via energy management behaviour change campaigns
Test new ideas and innovative technologies, collaborating with our partners and suppliers to deliver transformational clean energy solutions across our estate
Maintain travel carbon emissions below 50% pre-COVID 19 levels
Launched the 3Ps of sustainable travel as part of colleagues’ new ways of working: Purpose, Planet and Planning
Invested in sustainable travel facilities across 13 sites, investing in new cycle racks, bicycle maintenance stands, e-bike charging stations and electric vehicle (EV) charging points
Installed 133 EV charging points at 34 of our sites, meaning over 36,000 of our colleagues have access to EV charging at work, at no cost to them
Launched a carbon footprint calculator to support our colleagues to explore the environmental impact of both their business and personal travel choices and provide offers and engagement programmes to help them switch to greener modes of travel
Achieved Cycling UK's Cycle Friendly Employer accreditation at 13 of our offices
Launched a cycling mileage rate, enabling colleagues who cycle for business to claim cycling mileage just as they would for car mileage
Launched a new Ultra-Low Emissions Vehicle (ULEV) salary sacrifice scheme for colleagues
Created co-working hubs above our branches to minimise unnecessary business travel to further afield city hubs
Continue our programme of work to improve cycling facilities for colleagues, seeking Cycle Friendly Employer accreditation from Cycling UK at each of our main offices
Continue our commitment to The Climate Group’s EV100 campaign, making a commitment to install charging points across all our colleague car parks by 2030. We currently have EV charging facilities at 60% of our office car parks
Continue to embed new ways of working developed during the pandemic, having already launched the 3Ps of sustainable business travel where colleagues travel with purpose, to connect and collaborate, with the planet in mind, making trips that are worth the carbon, and planning ahead combining meetings and keeping journeys to a minimum
1The Carbon Trust Standard recognises organisations that follow best practice in measuring, managing, and reducing their environmental impact.


9

BUSINESS
Carbon credits and offsetting on the journey to net zero
Net zero strategies should prioritise carbon reduction in line with science, ahead of considering the use of carbon credits to offset emissions. While carbon credits can be an important tool in combatting climate change if used responsibly, it is important that such credits are deployed as part of an ambitious, science-based decarbonisation plan.
Use of carbon credits in our financed emissions
Our financed emissions capture the emissions attributed to the Group joined over 200 businesses, investors,from our lending and business organisationsinvestment activities. We do not currently plan to use carbon credits to offset our financed emissions and we will monitor and contribute to emerging industry standards in callingthis area as they develop. However, we will engage with our clients to encourage them to develop their own net zero plans, which may involve them using carbon credits for offsetting residual emissions for some of their activity, where applicable and in line with science.
Use of carbon credits in our own operations
Our priority as a Group remains focused on reducing our emissions, in a responsible way, before considering the Governmentuse of carbon credits to deliver a clean, inclusive,offset emissions from our own operations. We have committed to achieve net zero carbon operations by 2030, reducing our direct Scope 1 and resilient recovery plan.The Group has produced a separate document outlining its belief that prioritising a green recovery is critical2 emissions by at least 75 per cent (compared to 2018/19 levels). In 2030, we will purchase carbon credits to offset the remainder of our direct emissions. We intend to use certified neutralisation carbon credits from high-quality carbon removal projects.
Metrics and Targets
We have developed several initial metrics to measure our progress against our net zero ambitions and the priority areas that the Group thought should feature within any economic stimulus plan.activities required to achieve them. These include measures related to our financed emissions, sustainable finance and own operations.
LloydsWe expect these metrics to evolve as we develop additional sector-based ambitions in line with our Net Zero Banking Group StrategyAlliance commitments and further expand our sustainable finance and own operations activity.
Lloyds Financed emissions ambitions
Banking Group’s goal and approachambitions
As a signal of commitment, the Group set an ambitious goal in 2020: workingIn addition to our ambition to work with customers, Government,government and the market to help reduce the emissions we finance by more than 50% by 2030 on the path to net zero by 2050 or sooner, we joined the NZBA in April 2021 as a founding member.
We are now committed to developing 2030 sector-specific ambitions for the most GHG intensive and GHG emitting sectors within our portfolio that will be key to the transition to a net zero economy and will complement our existing ambition.
We have made good progress to date, having now set 2030 ambitions for four sectors, including power, thermal coal, oil and gas, and motor. We are working to develop additional 2030 sector ambitions in 2022 for our residential mortgages, transportation and automotive activity beyond Retail motor vehicle loans with further ambitions following in 2023. Sector ambitions will be set using up to date science-based decarbonisation scenarios which are aligned with a 1.5°C pathway. Examples include the International Energy Agency (IEA) Net Zero Emissions by 2050 (IEA NZE 2050) scenario and the UK Committee on Climate Change's Balanced Net Zero Pathway scenario. As climate science evolves and scenarios are updated we will review our methodologies and ambitions.
Table 1. Bank sector-based ambitions
2030 sector ambitions
Sector
Financed emissions (MtCO2e)
Physical emissions intensityScenario
Power1,2
n/a
75gCO2e/kWh
Aligned to
government policies
Oil and Gas2
3.9 (50% reduction)3
n/aIEA NZE 2050
UK Motor Finance2
n/a
Cars – 65gCO2e/km
Vans – 85gCO2e/km
CCC Balanced
Net Zero Pathway
Thermal coal2,4
Full exit from all entities that operate thermal coal facilities by 2030
1Power sector ambition was published prior joining the NZBA and will be updated in 2022, to align with NZBA guidance.
2Additional detail on ambitions is on page 33 (Power and oil and gas) and page 34 (UK Motor) of our 2021 Climate Report.
3Our ambition is reduce the absolute financed emissions from the oil and gas sector by 50% from a 2019 baseline. The 2030 absolute financed emissions value may change if the baseline is updated in future years as better data becomes available.
4This ambition is only applicable to our corporate and institutional clients (clients with a turnover >£100m) and excludes any clients within our SME portfolio that would form part of the supply chain to the Energy and Coal Mining entities. The ambition relating to thermal coal mining excludes commodities trading activities. This ambition is a commitment to exit all entities that operate thermal coal facilities by 2030 and will currently be tracked through lending exposure to the sector as opposed to annual emissions estimates.
Financed emissions baseline and progress
In 2021, we have estimated our financed emissions producing two separate baselines to align to the individual ambitions to reduce our financed emissions as outlined in the Strategy section. The first baseline is for our banking operations, which covers Lloyds Banking Group, excluding Scottish Widows (the Bank). The second is for our Scottish Widows activity which is reported separately. In measuring financed emissions, the Bank and Scottish Widows have both applied the Partnership for Carbon Accounting Financials (PCAF) standard. Additional detail on approach has been included in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Methodology and approach
Lloyds Banking Group, including Scottish Widows, has continued to apply the emerging industry-led standard developed by the PCAF in measuring and disclosing our greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions financed by loans and investments. The PCAF is now recognised as the most widely adopted global standard for measuring and accounting for Scope 3 emissions by the financial sector, referred to here and across industry as 'financed emissions'. Where possible, we have adopted the guidance afforded by the PCAF standard across all material asset classes where published methodologies have been made available.

10

BUSINESS
What emissions are covered?
Our baseline represents Scope 3 financed emissions which is calculated from the Scope 1 and 2 emissions generated from our investments or lending.
Scope 3 (value chain) emissions are also calculated and reported separately for certain sectors, aligning to the PCAF standard phased approach. Scope 3 includes all other indirect GHG emissions of the reporting company not included in Scope 2, and can be broken down into upstream emissions that occur in the supply chain (for example, from production or extraction of purchased materials) and downstream emissions that occur as a consequence of using the organisation‘s products or services. The comparability, coverage, transparency and reliability of Scope 3 data still varies greatly by sector and data source.
Attribution
Aligning to the PCAF standard, we have adopted an attribution factor at a single client or asset class level to measure our share of financed emissions. Where necessary, hierarchies of best-available data and approximations have been used to resolve certain data gaps. We have incorporated additional detail and explanation on the variations to our approach within the individual business sections below.
Data quality score
Where sourcing of emission data by client or by asset type was challenging, adaptations to our approach reflected the hierarchy of options outlined in the PCAF data scoring framework. We used a range of internal and external data sources to determine the Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions for each asset class and calculated our average data quality scores across all business lines and sectors, using the classification opposite, which can be found in the PCAF methodology.
Evolution of approach
Throughout 2021, we have continued to mature and refine our measurement of financed emissions across the Group. Progress has been made to extend the scope of our emissions baseline, refine our methodologies and improve data quality, recognising there is still more to do. This includes working in partnership with government, industry and policymakers to improve our approach and calculation estimates. Further, we have started to embed our emissions calculation process, governance and controls via a Group-wide financed emissions framework which follows the Group’s three lines of defence model.
Looking ahead
In order to extend the coverage of our baseline, we will continue to develop our calculation approach to consider equity, non-UK mortgages and corporate bonds. We will also review any new PCAF asset class methodologies as they are released to consider applicability to our portfolios. Continued refinement of our emissions baseline is expected as data availability and quality improves in line with industry developments and as methodologies evolve.
Recognising the Bank‘s commercial lending portfolio composition, it is also anticipated that the Group financesimpact of increased lending to customers as part of the Government supported Bounce Back Loan Scheme and Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme is likely to have a proportionate increase to our financed emissions reporting from 2020. For future reporting periods, we will consider how best to disclose such lending in our financed emissions reporting.
Extending our scope to calculating more of our clients’ Scope 3 emissions will continue to be monitored in line with the PCAF published timelines, and we will continue to report separately from our Scope 1 and 2 financed emissions.
Furthermore, in light of the regulatory plans to scale up mandatory TCFD-aligned disclosures across a broader range of reporting entities, we expect our emissions calculations to include more reported emissions with a higher PCAF score over time. We also recognise the need to provide support to our consumers and SME clients to help them understand their carbon footprint and how they can reduce it.
Bank financed emissions baseline
Aligned to our commitment to report a consistent, and transparent financed emissions disclosure and following our enhancements to data, methodology and scope, we have recalculated our 2018 baseline estimates as previously stated in our 2020 Annual Report, in addition to calculating our financed emissions for the year ended 2019. These calculations are based on Bank own lending activity and provide an early starting position on our ambition to reduce the emissions we finance by more than 50 per cent by 2030 on the path to net zero by 2050, or sooner,sooner.
Bank aggregated emissions is supported by estimates by divisional asset class and are found in the Bank financed emissions table, which will supportis followed by commentary on material design choices, limitations and recognised drivers to changes in our financed emissions. Of specific note, the UK Government's ambition and2018 baseline re-calculation has formed the 2015 Paris Agreement. Duringfoundation of target-setting in accordance with the course of 2020,NZBA commitment made by the Group has calculated an initial estimateduring 2021.
Scope
Our 2019 balance sheet coverage extends to 71 per cent of its 2018 financedthe Group’s Balance Sheet Assets, excluding Scottish Widows, and includes all material exposures across our Mortgages, Motor Finance (which includes finance and leasing activity), Business Banking and Commercial Banking portfolios. Cash is represented in our balance sheet coverage as zero emissions, baseline and has developed its first emission intensity reduction ambition fornoting the power sector, the decarbonisationPCAF standard remains silent on treatment. Exclusions to measurement totals 29 per cent, 25 per cent of which is critical to the UK achieving its climate targets. The Group will continue to develop additional sector specific ambitions throughout 2021.
In addition, the Insurance and Wealth division (excluding Wealth Private Banking) has published a target to reach net zero across the full portfolio of investments by 2050, halving the investments’ carbon footprint by 2030.
In order to meet its overall 2030 and 2050 goals, the Group will continue to:
Identify new ways to support customers and clients with the management of opportunities and risks associated with climate change, and the transition to a low carbon economy.
Identify, manage, and disclose material sustainability and climate-related risks across the Group and their impacts on the Group and its financial planning processes,are in line with PCAF methodology where no methodologies exist, such as derivatives, sovereign bonds and green bonds. The minimal remaining 4 per cent of the TCFD framework. This includes working with industry bodies, specialist consultanciesbalance sheet is excluded due to existing data gaps which we will look to resolve in 2022.
Aligned to the PCAF requirement to phase in Scope 3 (value chain) emissions from 2021, we have established an approach to include Scope 3 estimated emissions for clients in the oil and leading academics to develop a robust climate risk measurement capability.gas sector within our financed emissions calculations and have reported these separately in the Bank financed emissions table. The Group's mining exposures have been excluded from Scope 3 reporting reflecting nominal residual exposure.


Use the scale and reach of the Group to help drive progress towards a sustainable and resilient UK economy through engagement with customers, communities, industry, Government, shareholders, and suppliers.
Embed sustainability into the way the Group does business and manages its own operations in a more sustainable way. To support this the Group has updated the operational climate pledges, setting a new net zero goal for 2030.
The Group participates in several industry initiatives and has signed up to key principles that drive action on climate change and sustainability.
411

BUSINESS
The Lloyds Banking Group AmbitionsBank financed emissions
The Group set seven leadership ambitionsWe have continued to supportbuild appropriate controls into our calculation approach, including:
(i)additional data checks within calculations by first-line business owners;
(ii)enhanced risk oversight of alignment to the UK’s transitionPCAF framework on a comply or explain basis, and the calculation methodology and boundaries used for client, asset or sector inclusion; and
(iii)Internal Audit reviews to help identify further enhancements.
As a sustainable future. In 2020, the Group has focused on enhancing its green finance products and services to achieve its ambitions. Examplesresult of this includework, the following:
Lloyds Banking Group AmbitionHow the Group are delivering against the ambitions
Business
Become a leading UK commercial bank for sustainable growth, supporting clients to transition to sustainable business models and operations, and to pursue new clean growth opportunities
Since 2018 the Group has supported renewable energy projects that power the equivalent of 10.1 million homes, significantly exceeding the Helping Britain Prosper Plan 2020 target.
The Group launched several new green finance products, tools, and services: a Lloyds Bank and Bank of Scotland Green Buildings Tool; a Sustainability Fixed Term Deposit and 95 Day Notice Account; and the Group also structured and co-ordinated the first Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) Sustainability Linked Loan for Affinity Water
Homes
Be a leading UK provider of customer support for energy efficient, sustainable homes
The Group launched the Green Living and Eco Home Hub for Halifax and Lloyds customers
To support Halifax customers with the cost of green home improvements, the Group has also introduced a Green Living Reward under the UK Department for Business, Energy, and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) Green Home Finance Innovation Fund
Vehicles
Be a leading UK provider of low emission/green vehicle fleets
In 2020, the Group more than doubled the number of electric vehicles financed through its Motor Finance and Leasing subsidiaries, Lex Autolease and Blackhorse
Pensions and investments
Be a leading UK pension provider that offers customers and colleagues sustainable investment choices, and challenges the companies the Group invest in to behave more sustainably and responsibly
Scottish Widows has launched a Responsible Investment Framework in March 2020 and supporting Stewardship Policy.
The Scottish Widows Exclusions Policy focuses on companies that have failed to meet Scottish Widows environmental, social and governance standards, namely manufacturers of controversial weapons, UN Global Compact violators and those deriving more than 10 per cent of their revenue from thermal coal and tar sands extraction. Scottish Widows is currently divesting an initial £440 million from these companies, starting with those investments where Scottish Widows has direct control and is working to expand the application of this policy into external pooled funds that underpin the multi-asset funds as well. Early success of engagement activity with one of the partner asset managers has led the investment manager to introduce an exclusions policy for all its Europe-domiciled passive funds totalling over £20 billion, leading to an additional divestment of approximately £280 million within customer pension portfolios.
Through shareholder investments, Scottish Widows provides direct loans for renewable energy, including for offshore wind and solar energy.
Scottish Widows is also investing £2 billion of Pension and Retirement Portfolio Pension Funds capital into a new fund, the ACS Climate Transition World Equity Fund, co-created with BlackRock that looks to increase investment in companies that are well prepared for the low carbon transition and to reduce exposure to those that are less so
Insurance
Be a leading UK insurer in improving the resilience of customers’ lives against extreme weather exacerbated by climate change
The Group continues to partner with RedArc to operate a trauma helpline that aids customers needing extra help after a traumatic claim such as a fire or flood
The Group is also investing in ways to minimise the impact of flooding on customers. For example, the Group continues to provide a Rapid Response Vehicle to quickly assess claims and release funds to customers in the worst affected areas
Green bonds
Be a leading UK bank in the green/sustainable bonds market
Since the launch of this ambition in 2016, the Group has maintained the role as a leader for UK corporate clients between 2016 and 2020, raising around £2.9 billion.
Lloyds Banking Group’s own footprint
Be a leading UK bank in reducing Lloyds Banking Group’s own carbon footprint and challenging our suppliers to ensure Lloyds Banking Group’s own consumption of resources, goods and services is sustainable
The Group continues to improve the sustainability of its own operations and has recently updated the Group’s operational climate pledges.
This year, the Group has calculated and disclosed the emissions associated with increased homeworking as a result of COVID-19 and sponsored a white paper in this area.
The Group has continued to reduce the energy and carbon intensity of its properties and has supported low carbon travel
Lloyds Banking Group’s overall location-based carbon emissions were 159,487 tonnes CO2e; a 24 per cent decrease since 2019 and 72 per cent since its 2009 baseline (legacy scope).
5

BUSINESS
Governance
Lloyds Banking Group’s governance structure provides clear oversightBank 2018 baseline has been refreshed reporting an increased position of 28.0MtCO2e, for our assets in-scope, which reflects a 10.3 per cent increase on our 2018 estimate disclosed in our 2020 ESG Report. The recalculation incorporated the positive enhancements made to data quality and ownershipavailability, and alignment to PCAF methodology outlined in the asset class summaries on page 38. Recognising the progressive nature of the Group’s sustainability strategy and management of climate-related risks. Governance for climate-related risks is embedded into the Group’s existing governance structure and is complementary to governance of the sustainability strategy.
lbk-20201231_g2.jpg
Risk management
The Group has adopted a comprehensive approach to embedding climate-related risks into its Enterprise Risk Management Framework through:
Creation of a new principal risk for climate risk, in order to drive dedicated focus and a consistent approach, whilst enhancing Board-level insight.
Integration of climate risk into the Group’s existing principal risks, to ensure comprehensive consideration across all aspects of its business activity.
Climate Risk is included as both a principal and emerging risk this year given it is such a new and fast-moving area. The Group continues to ensure its approach for climate risk management has suitable Board- level visibility. The Board has approved a Risk Appetite Statement for climate risk, as well as an interim metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace, supported by Board-level risk reporting.
As the understanding and importance of climate risk progresses, climate scenario analysis is becoming an essential capability and risk management tool. Scenario analysis assists the identification, measurement,emissions data enhancements and ongoing assessment of climate risks over the longer-term,updates to industry standards and the potential threats to the Group’s strategic objectives. In 2020, the Group has developed its climate scenario analysis framework and will see outputs from this in 2021.
To further accelerate progress, the Group has engaged with third-party consultants to support the development of its climate risk management framework and high priority sector analysis, thereby extending its modelling and assessment capabilities for quantifying climate risk.
Climate risk and sustainability has been a key consideration in the credit assessment process in recent years, and in 2020 the Group has deepened the integration of sustainability into its credit risk processes and appetite statements. Lloyds Banking Group continues to refine the Group’s external sector statements, which help articulate appropriate areas of climate-related risk appetite and the Group’s approach to the risk assessment of its customers.
As part of the Group's credit risk policy, the Group has mandatory requirements to consider environmental risks in key risk management activities. In Commercial Banking, Relationship Managers must continue to ensure that sustainability risk is considered for all new and renewal facilities, and specifically commented on where credit limits exceed £500,000. The Group has also developed and is piloting a tool in Commercial Banking to help qualitatively assess clients’ physical and transition risks.
In Retail, the Group considers exposure to physical risks, such as flooding, in mortgages origination criteria and the Group has also introduced sustainability related criteria into its motor finance businesses. Within Insurance, an assessment of climate-related risks to General Insurance (GI) liabilities is integrated into the internal model governance process. The Group further developed its weather modelling capabilities in 2020 through completion of a research partnership between the Group's GI Weather Modelling Team and the University of Reading on extreme wind and flood risk in the UK.
6

BUSINESS
Sectors with increased climate risk
The Group has identified those sectors where it has lending to customers that may likely contribute a higher share of Lloyds Banking Group’s financed emissions (see Table 1). Not all customers in these sectors have high emissions or are exposed to significant transition risks.
The Group continues to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as it looks to support customers' responses to climate change.
Table 1. Lending1 to customers in sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change
Commercial Banking Sector4
Lending to Commercial
Banking customers (£m)2
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customers3
Dec 2020Dec 2019Dec 2020Dec 2019
Energy Use in BuildingsReal Estate (including Housing Associations)25,426 27,124 5.04%5.44%
Agriculture
Agriculture, Forestry & Fishing5
7,464 7,219 1.48%1.45%
TransportPassenger Transport1,135 1,120 0.22%0.22%
Industrial Transport1,374 1,674 0.27%0.34%
Automotives6
1,485 1,272 0.29%0.26%
Energy Use in IndustryHousebuilders870 1,168 0.17%0.23%
Construction7
1,210 1,179 0.24%0.24%
Cement, Construction Materials, Chemicals & Steel Manufacture317 391 0.06%0.08%
General Manufacturing1,301 1,285 0.26%0.26%
Food Manufacturing and Wholesalers1,312 1,844 0.26%0.37%
Energy Supply
Oil & Gas8
1,099 1,393 0.22%0.28%
Utilities1,638 1,779 0.32%0.36%
Coal Mining8 21 0.002%0.004%
Total44,639 47,469 8.85%9.53%
Loans and advances to
customers (£m)
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customers3
Retail Division areas9
Dec 2020Dec 2019Dec 2020Dec 2019
UK Mortgages294,806 289,198 58.42%58.04%
UK Motor Finance15,201 15,976 3.01%3.21%
Total310,007 305,174 61.44%61.25%
1Commercial Banking and Retail divisions only. Excludes Insurance and Wealth division.
2Commercial Banking division only, excludes Commercial Finance. Drawn lending is gross of significant risk transfers. Excludes Business Banking lending, which sits within Retail division. 2019 restated on a consistent basis with 2020.
3Percentages calculated using total Group loans and advances to customers, before allowance for impairment losses (£504,603 million at 31 December 2020 and £498,247 million at 31 December 2019).
4Commercial lending classified using ONS SIC codes at legal entity level.
5Agriculture lending includes Agricultural Mortgage Corporation (AMC) based on loans and advances to customers £4,186 million (2019: £3,998 million).
6Includes Automotive manufacture, retail and wholesale trade, rentals and parts but excludes finance captives and securitisations.
7Construction excludes 41100 Development of building projects (included within Real Estate) and 41202 Construction of domestic buildings (reported separately as Housebuilders).
8Excludes Commodity Traders.
9Based on loans and advances to customers within Retail Division.
Metrics and targets
Financed emissions
Lloyds Banking Group believes it is appropriate to provide more financial information on its financed emissions, although the Group also recognises this is a rapidly developing area, with evolving and sometimes limiting data availability, data completeness and calculation methodologies. The Group expects these to continue to improve in 2021 and beyond, helping it to refine the Group's approaches, estimates and understanding of the climate risk within its portfolios. However, in order to enhance disclosure, whilst recognising these limitations, the Group details in Table 2 an initial estimated view of the 2018 financed emissions baseline across the Group’s own lending activity (excluding Insurance and Wealth).
This will serve as an initial basis for the Group’s goal of helping to reduce the emissions that the Group finances by more than 50 per cent by 2030 and to help it better support customers in their transition plans to a low-carbon economy (see Table 2). The Group selected 2018 as there is more comprehensive company emissions reporting and UK Government Office of National Statistics (ONS) emissions data available at that time.
The Group has used the emerging industry standard for calculating financed emissions developed by the Partnership for Carbon Accounting Financials (PCAF). The baseline is an estimate, as client or asset level emissions data is currently not available in all cases and where appropriate, the Group has used internal and external data and proxies to fill these data gaps. Given this is a new discipline that will continue to develop and evolve,guidance, it is expected that its baseline will changefurther refinement may be necessary, which provides a challenging foundation to our approach to target-setting in line with our NZBA commitment.
Financed emissions for the future (perhaps materially), which may require restatement. The Group expects methodologiesyear ended December 2019 were calculated for calculating financedthe first time and reported a positive reduction in absolute emissions in borrower scope 1 and 2 emissions to mature, with data availability25.0 MtCO2e based on >£490 billion of in-scope assets.
The year-on-year movement equated to a 10.8 per cent reduction in emissions and quality also improving from clientswas largely driven by a combination of client decarbonisation, and Government sources.lending contraction in certain sectors.
7

BUSINESS
An early estimate of scope 3 emissions was conducted for the Oil and Gas sector, in alignment to the PCAF phased in approach for reporting.
The initial estimated viewOil and Gas portfolio (including Commodity Traders – Energy of the 2018 financed emissions baseline covers approximately 70 per cent of the Group’s balance sheet (excluding Insurancesupermajors and Wealth)excluding Support Services) is estimated to be 7.0 MtCO12 comprised of:
Motor vehicle loans (Lexe for 2019, and Black Horse) – at individual vehicle level, vehicle emission intensity and contracted (or estimated) miles driven per annum
Mortgages (Retail UK Mortgages) – from Energy Performance Certificates (EPCs)was based on actual reported data, where available, with estimates used for properties without EPC ratings
Business loans (Commercial Banking only) – on client-level emissionsestimated data and asset-based estimates using ONS UK sector emissions
Cash balances – with no associated emissions
For the remaining balance sheet, 26 per cent currently have no method for calculating emissions and 4 per cent do not have data readily available to enable emissions to be calculated.2
As currently recommended by PCAF, the baseline only includesfrom S&P Trucost, or through a ratio of company Scope 1 and 2 emissions of clients and does not include undrawn lending commitments, off balance sheet contingents or areas where there is no methodology.other available data. Reported data, especially for the category of "use of sold products", is very sparse and is reflected by a PCAF score of 4.0. It is recognised that we will update our approach as data, standards and methodologies evolve.
Insurance and Wealth financed emissionsData quality progression
The financedBank’s weighted average PCAF data score has moved from 3.9 to 3.8 reflecting improved data sourcing and enhanced consistency in methodology approach. While progress has been made during 2021, the ongoing challenges to data sourcing gaps remain significant particularly in measuring emissions for the InsuranceSME clients, which require an industry-wide shift to address this, and Wealth division are not included in the Group’s total financed emissions or the Group’s targetwill be required to reduce financed emissions by 50help inform future NZBA targets.
Table 2. Bank financed emissions
Scope 1 and 22019 financed emissions2018 baseline
PCAF asset class
Financed emissions (MtCO2e)²
Economic
emission
intensity
(tCO2e/£m
invested)
Physical
emission intensity
PCAF data
quality
score
Equivalent
share of
sector or
UK total
emissions1,7
Financed
emissions
(MtCO2e)²
Economic
emissions
intensity
(tCO2e/£m
invested)
Physical
emission intensity
PCAF data
quality score
UK mortgages3
5.619
46kgCO2e/m2
3.76%5.921
47kgCO2e/m2
3.9
UK Motor Finance4
3.1154
129gCO2e/km (cars)
168gCO2e/km (vans)
2.34%3.2167
129gCO2e/km (cars)
170gCO2e/km (vans)
2.3
Business Loans
Business Banking5
0.3208n/a5.0<1%0.4219n/a5.0
Commercial Banking6
16.0151n/a4.46%18.5164n/a4.3
Total25.03.86%28.03.9
1Represents estimated 5.5 per cent of UK emissions of 454.8MtCO2e by 2030. Due to the different nature of bankingsector reported in 2019 UK Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Final Figures dated 2nd February 2021 by Department for Business, Energy and investment activity, the Insurance and Wealth division will be further developing its approach to reporting appropriate climate metrics and targets during 2021.
Table 2. Initial estimated view of the 2018 financed emissions baseline for the Group’s own lending
(excluding the Insurance and Wealth division)
Asset ClassIndustrial Strategy.
Estimated MtCO2e
(Scope 1 & 2 emissions)
Equivalent share of UK
total emissions by
sector/asset class6
Motor vehicle loans3
3.2c.4%
Mortgages4
6.3c.6%
Business loans5
15.9c.6%
Total
25.41,2
c.5.6%
Notes to table:
12Includes Nil emissions for cash balanceswhich accountedaccounts for 88.4 per cent of the Group's balance sheet.
23Examples2019 emissions calculation covers 99 per cent of areas where there is no current methodin-scope UK mortgages. Excludes £3.4bn of newly acquired assets. Uses EPC emissions estimates for calculating53 per cent of properties. Where EPCs are unknown, property archetypes are aligned to average emissions include: government securities, derivatives, personal loans, credit cards and reverse repos. Areas where data was not readily available, but coverage may be expandedintensity of properties in the future include: business banking, non-UK mortgages, loans and advancesEPC bandings C to banks and some assets at fair value through profit and loss.G.
34Covers 952019 emissions calculation covers 87 per cent of motor vehicle loans and operating lease assets.assets in-scope. Excludes assets that do not have a motor, ,loans for forecourt dealership stock, specialist vehicles and vehicles where mileage is difficult to estimate. Currently does not apply a loan-to-value ratio for emissions.
45Covers 972019 emissions calculation covers 85 per cent of mortgages. Excludes non-UK mortgages. Uses EPCBusiness Banking drawn lending balances in scope applying Business Loan asset class. Exclusions include for example Cards, Invoice Discounting, Hire Purchase and Loans which are either out of scope or had no readily available data. Emissions calculations applied tCO2e/assets intensity ratio from UK Government of National Statistics as no client level financial and emissions estimatesdata is readily available for 45% of properties and average emission intensity profiles of EPC C to G properties to calculate emissions for the balance of properties where EPCs are not available. Property index value as at end 2018 is used for current property value in PCAF emission attribution calculations.small business customers across industry.
56Includes 992019 emissions calculation covers >99 per cent of Commercial Banking business loans, based on drawn lending. The PCAF sector-based approach has been used for the majoritylending in scope, applying Business Loan asset class Emissions calculated using granular client level financial and emissions data from S&P, covering 20 per cent of the business loans baseline, usingemissions, with remaining 80 per cent applying tCO2e/asset intensity ratio from UK Government Office of National Statistics (ONS) UK emissions. The business loans method has been appliedStatistics. Exceptions to project finance (excluding Power project finance)Commercial Banking coverage include for example government bonds, green bonds, derivatives and commercial real estate assets,reverse repos which will be refined in the future as better data becomes available.are currently out of PCAF scope.
67Total UK emissions in 20182019 were: 88 MtCO87MtCO2e from cars and vans; c.100 MtCO2ec.97MtCO2e from homes, including emissions from both electricity and heating; and 263 MtCO2e271 MtCO2e from business (excluding emissions from electricity used in residential property). Source: Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy - 20182019 UK Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Final Figures.
Power sector ambition
In Commercial Banking, the Group has been working to develop a power sector ambition as power sector decarbonisation is critical for the UK to achieve its Net Zero goal.
The Group has determined that its power generation portfolio, comprising Commercial Banking large corporate and project finance portfolio facilities, generated financed emissions of 0.7MtCO2e in 2018, with an emission intensity of 141gCO2e/kWh on a drawn basis, covering both UK and EU exposures. This is lower than the UK average grid emissions intensity of 283 gCO2e/kWh in 2018, due to market leading support for UK offshore and renewable energy.
Having assessed the Commercial Banking large corporate and project finance power generation portfolio against decarbonisation plans and its commitment to Help Britain Prosper, the Group is now setting an ambition to reduce the portfolio’s emission intensity to less than 75gCO2e/kWh by 20301 This is in line with the UK’s net zero ambition but takes into account the combination of UK and European clients in its portfolio.
Achieving the Group’s ambition will be dependent on the UK and European countries putting in place the policy frameworks to meet decarbonisation goals and major utilities achieving their decarbonisation objectives. The Group will work with the Government and its clients to help support this transition.
1The Group has followed the PCAF recommendation to only account for drawn lending exposure in our financed emission disclosure. It is important to highlight that the undrawn portion of the power generation portfolio could result in fluctuations to the emission and power intensity baseline.
Green finance
In 2020, the Group provided over £2.3 billion of green finance in Commercial Banking, through its Clean Growth Finance Initiative, Commercial Real Estate Green Lending Initiative, Renewable Energy Financing and Green Bond facilitation. This increased the Group’s total green finance to over £7.3 billion since 2016. In addition, the Group has supported clients with over £1.8 billion of Sustainability Linked Loans since 2017.
812

BUSINESS
New climate pledges
Scope 32019 baseline
Sector
Financed
emissions
(MtCO2e)¹
Economic
emissions
intensity
ktCO2e/£m
invested
PCAF data
quality score
Oil and gas2
7.04.04.0
1Mining excluded from PCAF-aligned scope 3 reporting reflecting nominal residual exposure.
2Oil and gas Scope 3 estimates are based on drawn lending for primary sector clients in extraction, refining, transport via pipeline, including commodities trading arms of supermajor oil and gas clients, and not including support services.
In comparison to reported UK emissions, Bank 2019 emissions represented 5.5 per cent (25.0MtCO2e/454.8MtCO2e) of the UK emissions reported in the 2019 UK Greenhouse Gas Emissions Final Figures dated 2nd Feb 2021 issued by the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy.
Scottish Widows’ financed emissions baseline
Our investments’ carbon footprint is the principal metric for measuring our investment portfolio’s financed emissions and monitoring progress towards our 2030 and 2050 targets. The footprint is the tonnes of GHG emissions ‘owned’ by the portfolio. This is measured as carbon dioxide equivalents (CO2e) ‘owned’ per £1 million invested.
Baseline
We have selected 2019 to be the baseline year in line with the science-based recommendations of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) and guidance from the Institutional Investors Group on Climate Change (IIGCC). To calculate a reduction of emissions produced by the companies in our investment portfolios, we’ve used the emerging industry standard for calculating financed emissions developed by the PCAF.
To establish emissions data for corporate bonds and equities, we matched our investments against the published emissions data available on those companies from S&P Global Trucost’s data and analytics tool. Trucost provides carbon and environmental data and risk analysis for more than 15,000 companies. There is a lack of published emissions data on loan investments.
Therefore, we adopted an alternative PCAF aligned approach to calculate emissions using estimates from Office for National Statistics (ONS) and Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS) sector averages.
Limitations of the PCAF methodology
Due to the nature of the calculations we would expect short-term variation of the carbon intensity number generated by the PCAF standard. In any given year the metric is impacted by a) changes in reported emissions, b) changes in enterprise value and c) our own investment activity.
In the example where equity markets are strong and the value of our investment increases in line with the enterprise value, this would drive a material reduction in carbon intensity even in the absence of any underlying change in the reported emissions of the company in which we are invested. Therefore, acknowledging this is a long-term target, it is important to study the medium-term trend from future reporting.
Baseline measurement
Our baseline represents Scottish Widows’ Scope 3 financed emissions which is calculated from the Scope 1 and 2 emissions generated from our investment or lending.
Total assets under management includes:
Policyholder: unitised and with-profit fund assets held in life and pension funds of Scottish Widows Limited (SWL) and Scottish Widows Europe (SWE); mutual funds managed by Scottish Widows Unit Trust Managers Limited (SWUTM) and HBOS Investment Fund Managers Limited (HIFML); and the workplace savings business of Scottish Widows Administration Services Limited (SWAS). In-scope assets include investment funds structured as insurance contracts. Assets under administration for customers of Schroders Personal Wealth (SPW) and Halifax Share Dealing Limited (HSDL) are not included
Shareholder: assets held by Scottish Widows Limited (SWL) and Scottish Widows Europe (SWE) backing annuities and non-unitised liabilities. Investment balances in other Scottish Widows group companies including the General Insurance business
Policyholder and shareholder investments are governed by the Responsible Investment and Stewardship Framework, Stewardship Policy and Exclusions Policy, while the direct lending part of Shareholder investments are also covered by Lloyds Banking Group’s own operationsGroup External Sector Statements.
In 2019
Table 3. Scottish Widows' Scope 3 financed emissions
2019Total
assets under
management
(AUM)
£bn
AUM in-scope
according to PCAF methodology
£bn
In-scope AUM
for which
emissions data
is available
%
Estimated total
MtCO2e (Scope
1 & 2 emissions,
for investments
where data is
available)
Emissions per
£1m invested
(where data is
available)
(tCO2/£m
invested)
PCAF data
quality score
Policyholder143.1126.776%11.0116.62.1
Shareholder26.717.881%1.5112.33.7
Total169.8144.577%12.5116.12.3
13

BUSINESS
Table 4. Scottish Widows' financed emissions by PCAF methodology
Policyholder
PCAF methodology appliedEmissions data£bn% of
reported
portfolio
Financed
emissions
MtCO2e
Emissions
per £1m invested
PCAF data
quality score
5.1 Listed equity and corporate bondsReported emissions96.6100%11.0116.62.1
Total96.6100%11.0116.62.1
Shareholder
5.1 Listed equity and corporate bondsReported emissions7.049%0.576.72.1
5.2 Business loans and unlisted equityEconomic activity based5.135%0.482.65.0
5.3 Project financeEconomic activity based2.316%0.6257.25.0
Total14.4100%1.5112.33.7
Total Shareholder and Policyholder
5.1 Listed equity and corporate bondsReported emissions103.693%11.5114.22.1
5.2 Business loans and unlisted equityEconomic activity based5.15%0.482.65.0
5.3 Project financeEconomic activity based2.32%0.6257.25.0
Total111.0100%12.5116.12.3
Notes on tables
Only asset types where a PCAF-aligned methodology exists, and which we have access to the Group announceddata required to meet the PCAF standard, have been included within the above emissions baseline
For listed equities and corporate bonds, we have followed PCAF methodology 5.1 'Listed equity and corporate bonds' to calculate emissions
For emissions data associated with loan investments we have followed PCAF methodology 5.2 'Business loans and unlisted equity'. The exception to this is our infrastructure loans where PCAF methodology 5.3 “Project Finance” has been followed
There are some assets where, despite a PCAF methodology being available, we do not currently have access to the data to meet the PCAF standard
Emissions per £1 million invested has been calculated with reference to Equity market values and Bond nominal values, in line with PCAF methodology
We have excluded our Commercial Real Estate (CRE) and Equity Release Mortgage loan investments from the calculations until we have sourced the asset-specific emissions data required to meet the current PCAF-aligned methodology. CRE loans are included in the Bank's published financed emissions
Where there is no current PCAF methodology for calculating emissions those asset types have been excluded from the scope of the baseline at this time. Asset types excluded on this basis are government bonds, derivatives, and cash. Collateralised securities (securitised loans) are also excluded on this basis unless data on the underlying loan portfolio is available enabling an alternative PCAF methodology to be followed.
Table 5. Assets not in scope for PCAF methodology 2019
Policyholder
£bn
Shareholder
£bn
Total
£bn
Collateralised securities1.00.91.9
Derivatives(0.5)1.20.7
Government bonds12.25.918.1
Cash3.70.94.6
Total16.48.925.3

14

BUSINESS
Scope 3 emissions
When it comes to Scope 3 of the companies we invest in, at this time we do not feel the data is robust enough or has wide enough coverage for us to be able to set targets using it. We will continue to monitor the developments in data quality and will consider extending our portfolio targets to cover Scope 3 of our underlying holdings when there is market consensus on the appropriateness of available data.
Table 6. 2019 Scope 3 emissions
Total
Assets
Under
Management
(AUM)
£bn
Estimated
total MtCO2e
(Scope 3
emissions, for
investments
where data is
available)
Data
Quality
Score
Policyholder
Oil and Gas6.826.02.7
Mining3.514.52.9
Total10.340.52.7
Shareholder
Oil and Gas0.10.33.1
Mining0.10.43.0
Total0.20.73.0
Policyholder and Shareholder Total
Oil and Gas6.926.32.7
Mining3.614.92.9
Total10.541.22.7
Sustainable Finance
Commercial Banking
£15 billion - Sustainable financing for corporate and institutional clients by 2024
With the support of our Sustainability and ESG Financing team, created in 2021, we will help clients with an increasing volume of Sustainability and ESG-linked loan transactions, underpinned by our range of sustainable finance tools and propositions. The £15 billion ambition by 2024 will include:
Green use of proceeds - funding that can support a broad range of investments in sustainable business, including our Clean Growth Finance Initiative (CGFI), Real Estate & Housing green lending initiative, and renewables funding including refinance and acquisitions.
Sustainability and ESG Linked Loans - general corporate purpose lending where a margin ratchet is linked to achievement of its 2030 carbon emission reduction goalambitious, pre agreed company level ESG sustainability performance targets (SPT's).
Green, ESG, Transition, and Social bonds - which have a defined use of proceeds aligned to one or more of these activities.
Sustainability linked bond facilitation - where bond proceeds are for itsgeneral corporate purposes, and the coupon increases if specific Key Performance Indicators ("KPI's") are not met.
Retail
£8 billion – Financing for electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles by 20241
We will enhance our transport offering with more flexible finance solutions, expanded manufacturer partnerships and services. We will also extend digital channels to include new direct to consumer leasing and financing solutions for EV charge points to meet emerging customer needs.
£10 billion – Green mortgage lending by 20242
As the largest UK mortgage lender, we will continue our commitment to supporting customers grow their understanding of home energy efficiency, as well as providing innovative products that drive greater customer consideration for energy efficiency when purchasing their homes.
1Includes new lending advances for Black Horse and operating lease for Lex Autolease (gross);includes cars and vans.
2New mortgage lending on new and existing residential property that meets an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) rating of B or higher.
Scottish Widows
We estimate we’ll make discretionary investment of £20–25 billion into climate-aware investment strategies by 2025, with at least £1 billion invested in climate solutions investments.
We’re working closely with our core strategic fund management partners to develop and refine a range of funds that have a bias towards investing in companies that are adapting their businesses to be less carbon-intensive and/or developing climate solutions. We’ll invest in climate solutions investments either within these strategies or other funds. To define climate solution investments, we look at company revenue associated with activities such as alternative energy, energy efficiency, green building, sustainable agriculture, sustainable water and pollution prevention. We use MSCI Environmental Impact Revenue data to help with this classification.


15

BUSINESS
Own Operations
Our own operations, 11 years early, having reduced carbon emissions by 63 per cent between 2009 and 2019, and exceeding its 60 per cent reduction target. The Group is now able to announceenvironmental footprint
Since 2020, we have been tracking against three new operational climate pledges, which were announced early in 2021. They are designed to accelerate the Group’sour plan to tackle climate change and apply across itsour own operations.
Net zero and operational climate pledges
The Group expects toWe will achieve net zero carbon operations by 2030. The Group plansWe plan to reduce itsour direct emissions (known as Scope 1 and 2 emissions) by at least 75 per cent (compared to 2018/919 levels)
The Group expects to reduce its total energy consumption by 50 per cent by 2030 (compared to 2018/9). Whilst the Group already procures zero carbon electricity, it remains crucial that the Group reduces the amount of power it consumes to support the UK in meeting an increasing demand for renewable energy
The Group expects toWe will maintain travel carbon emissions below 50 per cent of pre COVID-19pre-COVID-19 (2018/9)19) levels, embedding for the long-term the reduced levels of commuting and business travel seen during the pandemic and supporting colleagues to switch to low carbon transport.transport
We will reduce our total energy consumption by 50 per cent by 2030 (compared to 2018/19). While we already procure 100 per cent renewable electricity, it remains crucial that we reduce the amount of power we consume to support the UK in meeting an increasing demand for renewable energy
Achieving these goals will not be easy, and the Groupwe will need to invest in itsour buildings over the next decade, supporting the UK to makein the transition towards a green recovery. The Groupgreener future. We will continue to deploy energy efficient technology including LED lighting and improved building controls. The GroupWe will remove all use of natural gas from itsour estate, replacing its gas boilers with zerolow carbon heating technologies and creatingcreate more sustainable branches in communities across the UK. Many of the technologies that the Groupwe will need to use are still new and itwe will need to work closely with itsour partners and supply chain to innovate.
We proudly remained Carbon Trust Standard certification holders for carbon reduction for the twelfth year in a row. We are also members of the UK Green Buildings Council and we have recently renewed our commitment to the World Green Building Council Net Zero Carbon Buildings Commitment to include the new embodied carbon reduction requirement for new build and major refurbishment by 2030. This renewed commitment, along with those we’ve already made by joining The Climate Group’s campaigns on renewable electricity (RE100), energy productivity (EP100) and electric vehicles (EV100), underpins our new climate pledges.
Additional operational sustainability and environmental ambitions
We also have broader environmental ambitions for our own operations, which focus on reducing waste and improving water efficiency, which include:
Reduce our operational waste by 80% by 2025, from a 2014/15 baseline
Reduce water consumption by 40% by 2030, from a 2009 baseline
We also achieved certification to the Carbon Trust Standard for Waste for the first time in 2021. The standard recognises organisations that follow best practice in measuring, managing, and reducing their waste impact.
Further information on operational carbon and sustainability performance can be located in our Lloyds Banking Group ESG Report 2021.
Scope 1,21, 2 and 3 Greenhouse gas emissions reporting for own operations
The Group has reported greenhouse gas emissions and environmental performance since 2009, and since 2013 this has been reported in line with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and its applicable regulations. The Group’sregulations and the Large and Medium Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended) (i.e. Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (`SECR').
Our total emissions, in tonnes of CO2 equivalent, are reported in the table 7 below. Deloitte LLP has provided limited level ISAE 3000 (Revised) assurance over selected non-financial indicators as noted by ☑ . Deloitte's full, independent assurance statement is available online in the 2020 ESG Report at https://www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/who-we-are/responsible-business/downloads.html
Methodology
The Group follows the principles of the Greenhouse Gas (GHG)GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard to calculate Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions from itsour worldwide operations. The reporting period is 1 October 20192020 to 30 September 2020.2021, which is different to that of our Directors’ report (January to December 2021). This is in line with the regulations in that most of the emissions reporting year falls within the period of the Directors’ Report. Emissions are reported based on the operational control approach.
Reported Scope 1 emissions are those generated from gas and oil used in buildings, emissions from fuels used in UK company owned vehicles used for business travel and fugitive emissions from the use of air conditioning and chiller/refrigerant plant. plants.
Reported Scope 2 emissions are generated from the use of electricity and are calculated using both the location and market-based methodologies.
Reported Scope 3 emissions relate to business travel and commuting undertaken by colleagues, emissions from colleagues working from home, operational waste and the extraction and distribution of each of the Group’sour energy sources – electricity, gas and oil. This year, in light of the coronavirus pandemic’s impacts on Group operations, the Group has included the emissions of colleagues working from home before and during the pandemic in the Group’s Scope 3 totals.
Intensity ratio
Legacy ScopeOct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
Oct17-
Sep18
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based)1
10.411.513
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based)1
4.75.66.2
Expanded ScopeOct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
Oct17-
Sep181
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based) - expanded scope2
13.615.817.3
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based) - expanded scope2
7.99.910.6
Table 7. Intensity ratio*
Legacy ScopeOct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based)1
11.613.515.8
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based)1
7.37.89.9
1Intensities have been restated for 2017-20182018–2019 and 2018-20192019–2020 to reflect changes to emissions data only, replacing estimated data with actuals; underlying income figures for those years have not changed.
2Scope 3 emissions have been expanded to include additional elements within the Group’sGroup's own operations including emissions fromfor waste, colleague commuting and additional elements of business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). We have disclosed these figures parallel to legacy scope numbers to allow fairer comparison to numbers previously disclosed and to demonstrate performance versus our previous targets. Additionally, October 19-September19–September 20 scopeand October 20-September 21 Scope 3 figures include an allowance for emissions from homeworkers not previously accounted for, owing to the significant increase in materiality year to yearyear-on-year due to the impacts of coronavirus.COVID-19. Previous years have not been restated.
*Underlying income has been selected as the most accurate representation of value add in terms of measuring intensity ratio by the Group

16

BUSINESS
This year, the Group’sour overall location-based carbon emissions were 159,487 tCO188,806 tonnes CO2e; a 24an 8.5 per cent since decrease since 2019 and 72 per cent against its 2009 baseline (legacy scope). Significant reductions were achieved between October and March of2019/20. We have seen a continued reduction in our carbon emissions this reporting year. These are attributable to the Group’s programme of environmental action since 2010, which has delivered a reduction in gas and electricity consumption through extensive energy management, alongside decarbonisation of the UK electricity grid from October to March 2020. Further reductions have been causedyear, mainly driven by the impact of coronavirus on the Group’s operations and reported emissions.our operations. A large proportion of the Lloyds Banking Groupour colleagues workedcontinued to work from home in 20202021 in line with travel restrictions and advice, which has led to a considerable reduction in both scope 1 and 3 business travel numbers reported.
Group building energy consumption, electricity and gas, and electricity,has also reduced in partmainly due to the impactsimpact of this operational shift, though impacts are not as significant.shift. However, most of our buildings have still been operational and subject to our continued energy management and optimisation programme. Throughout winter months we have seen a small increase in our gas consumption due to additional fresh air requirements in our operational buildings. Overall, we have seen building energy consumption and associated carbon emissions reduced.
The GroupSince January 2019, our scope 2 market-based emissions figure is zero tCO2e, as it haswe have procured renewable energyelectricity mainly through our PPA and Green Tariff, and renewable certificates equal to itsthe remainder to make up the total electricity consumption in each of the markets in which the Group operates since January 2019.we operate.
Omissions
Emissions associated with joint ventures and investments are not included in this disclosure as they fall outside the scope of the Lloyds Banking Groupour operational boundary. The Group does not have any emissions associated with imported heat, steam or imported cooling and is not aware of any other material sources of omissions from itsour reporting.
9

BUSINESS
Carbon Emissions (tonnes CO2e)
Legacy ScopeOct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep191
Oct17-
Sep181
Total CO2e (market-based) ☑
71,704101,856116,100
Total CO2e (location-based) ☑
159,487208,495243,028
Total Scope 1 & 2 (location-based) ☑126,890155,270178,378
Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)
126,209152,893176,676
Total Scope 1 & 2 (market-based) ☑39,10748,63151,450
Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)
38,80647,94649,213
Total Scope 1☑39,10748,24649,505
Total Scope 2 (market-based) ☑3851,945
Total Scope 2 (location-based) ☑32,59753,22564,650
Expanded scopeOct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep191
Oct17-
Sep181
Total CO2e (market-based) ☑
120,308180,153197,623
Total CO2e (location-based) ☑
208,092286,792324,551
Total Scope 3 ☑81,202131,522146,173
Global Energy Use (kWhs)Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep191
Oct17-
Sep181
Total Global Energy Use ☑524,024,822591,341,929623,467,500
Of Which UK Energy Use
518,717,523585,136,101617,185,723
Total Building Energy503,709,548551,778,914577,606,213
Total Company Owned Vehicle Energy14,436,43629,987,90634,889,251
Total Grey Fleet Vehicle Energy2
5,878,8389,575,10910,972,036
Table 8. Carbon Emissions (tonnes CO2e)
Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
Total CO2e (market-based)118,057119,878180,002
Total CO2e (location-based)188,806206,236286,363
Total Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,401125,387154,917
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,084124,708152,546
Total Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,65339,02948,556
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,33638,72847,872
Total Scope 137,65339,02948,171
Total Scope 2 (market-based)385
Total Scope 2 (location-based)70,74886,358106,745
Total Scope 380,40480,849131,446
Global Energy Use (kWhs)Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep201
Oct18-
Sep191
Total Global Energy Use474,364,203517,459,510589,853,483
– Of Which UK Energy Use469,425,422512,208,678583,662,870
Total Building Energy468,594,150497,144,236550,290,468
Total Company Owned Vehicle Energy2,796,07314,436,43629,987,906
Total Grey Fleet Vehicle Energy2
2,973,9805,878,8389,575,109
1Restated 2018/20172019 and 2019/20 emissions data to improve the accuracy of reporting, using actual data to replace estimates.
2Grey fleet refers to colleague and hired road vehicles being used for a business purpose. Emissions in tonnes CO2e in line with the GHG Protocol Corporate Standardc (2004). We are reporting to the revised Scope 2 guidance, disclosing a market-based figure in addition to the location-based figure.
The measure and reportmethodology to derive reported Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions is provided in the Lloyds Banking Group Reporting Criteria statement available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/who-we-are/responsible-business.htmlstatement.
Scope 1 emissions includeare emissions from activities for which the Group is responsible, including mobile and stationary combustion of fuel and& operation of facilities.
Scope 2 emissions are emissions from the purchase of electricity, heat, steam, or cooling by the Group for its own use and have been calculated in accordance with GHG Protocol guidelines, in both location and market basedmarket-based methodologies.
Scope 3 emissions reported are disclosed in line with our legacy target, per the expanded to include additional elements within the Group’sGroup's own operations includingsuch as emissions from waste, colleague commuting and additional elements of business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). We have also disclosed legacy scope numbers to allow fairer comparison to numbers previously disclosed and to demonstrate performance versus our previous targets.
☑ Indicator is subject to Limited ISAE3000 (revised) assurance by Deloitte LLP for the 2020 Annual Responsible Business Reporting. Deloitte’s 2020 assurance statement and the 2020 Reporting Criteria are available online at www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/who-we-are/responsible-business.html

17

BUSINESS
Energy Efficiencyefficiency
Whilst coronavirusWhile COVID-19 has significantly impacted Lloyds Banking Group'shad an impact on our energy performance year on year, the Group did see a 4 per cent year to year energywe have also seen consumption reduction achieved in a 6-month period prior to the impacts of coronavirus, largely due to the Group’sdriven by our continued energy reductionefficiency initiatives. These initiatives includeThis workstream includes an energy optimisation programme; an energy intervention schemeprogramme that includes remote and on-siteimplements onsite optimisation and strategic alterations of building management systemsBuilding Management System (BMS) and controls systems to match the run hours of plant to core operating hours and ensureensures temperature settings are aligned with Group comfort guidelines. In 2020, 892021, 45 deep-dives, 88 on-site80 onsite optimisations, 139 remote optimisations and 550531 bank holiday programming were completed, which resulted in a 105101.5 GWh saving. Additionally,We have also run a programme of LED lighting upgrades throughout our estate, leading to an estimated 1,280 MWh electricity saving.
Governance
Given the strategic importance of our sustainability ambitions and commitment in managing the impacts arising from climate change, our governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the Group’s environmental sustainability strategy and management of climate risk.
lbk-20211231_g2.jpg
Further information with respect to entity governance and executive oversight can be located in the Lloyds Banking Group sawClimate Report 2021.
Managing climate risks
The Group defines climate risk as, ‘the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a 14 per cent yearresult of climate change, either directly or through our customers’. These may be realised from physical weather events, the impacts of the transition to year energy reduction innet zero or as a consequence of the Group's response to managing this transition.
The Group’s response to managing climate risk affects many different stakeholder groups, including: our company owned vehicles energy usagecustomers; colleagues; suppliers; regulators and policymakers; investors and NGOs and wider society. Our response will have a long-term bearing on these stakeholders and the Group’s business model.
Climate risk is considered a principal risk within the Group’s Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), reflecting its importance and the focus required. This ensures a consistent approach to embedding the consideration of climate risk in the 6-month period priorGroup’s activities, while also enhancing Board-level insight.
Climate risk also impacts many of the financial and non-financial risks the Group faces. Therefore, the Group has also taken steps to April 2020, duebuild and embed the consideration of climate-related risks throughout our ERMF to ensure comprehensive consideration across our ongoing focusbusiness activities.
The Group and the wider industry continue to develop both the understanding and capabilities for managing climate risk, therefore, the Group’s approach will evolve significantly in the coming years.
18

BUSINESS
In addition to the risks already facing the Group, new risks will continue to emerge as a consequence of the transition to net zero. Further information on reducing business travel.the emerging risks facing the Group, including those relating to climate change, can be found in the Risk overview section of this document.
Looking forwardEmbedding climate risk management
In 2021, the Group established the Group Climate Risk Policy to provide an overarching framework for managing climate risks and opportunities. The policy is structured around seven principles, setting out clear requirements to help meet the Group’s ambitions relating to climate change, the TCFD recommendations and relevant regulatory expectations.
The policy is intended to support appropriate consideration of climate risks and opportunities across key activities. However, it also recognises that understanding of and capability for managing climate risk will continue to evolve. As such, some areas of the policy cannot currently be fully embedded at this time, with ongoing activity to implement these expectations continuing into 2022.
Principle 1
The Group will ensure climate risk is fully embedded through effective policies, procedures, processes, systems and controls.
Principle 2
The Group will identify and assess potential climate risks and opportunities, including how these could impact on the Group’s strategy, external commitments, operating model and customer journeys.
Principle 3
The Group will embed appropriate scenario analysis capabilities to support its understanding and proactive management of climate risk and opportunities.
Principle 4
The Group’s strategy will consider climate risks and opportunities to support our customers and meet our strategic objectives.
Principle 5
The Group will set an appropriate risk appetite for climate risk against which it will operate.
Principle 6
The Group’s governance structure will provide oversight of climate risk impacts, effective decision-making and timely escalation to senior management.
Principle 7
The Group’s reporting will support monitoring and management of climate risks as well as the Group’s relevant strategic commitments, alongside appropriate disclosures to inform our external stakeholders.
We have incorporated the consideration of climate risk into a number of key processes to ensure suitable Board-level visibility.
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board. This is currently focused on a qualitative assessment against external expectations and the Group's external commitments. This is supported by monitoring relevant information to track key climate risks throughout the Group. Although this remains in its infancy, reporting will continue to be enhanced as understanding and capabilities improve.
A Board approved Risk Appetite Statement for climate risk is in place, supported by an initial metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace. We are developing our approach to setting further quantitative and qualitative risk appetite metrics as our capabilities evolve, including appropriate consideration across our sub-groups.
The Group’s 2021 financial planning process captured an initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks and opportunities. We also piloted forecasting approaches to provide a high-level view of the Group’s lending financed emissions out to 2030. Both these areas are expected to evolve for future planning cycles, to ensure climate-related consideration is fully embedded.
We have considered and included commentary on climate-related risks as part of our annual Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). We have used expert judgement to assess the financial impacts for key risk types that are sensitive to climate change, under a number of different climate scenarios. We will enhance our approach further as our scenario analysis capabilities develop.
Key climate risks across the Group’s risk taxonomy
We have mapped how examples of the Group's key risks from climate change impact across the different risk types within the Group’s risk taxonomy.
While the majority of the Group’s principal risks are impacted in different ways, we have focused on the impact for the most material risk types, outlined in the table below.
These examples are useful to understand some of the key risks for the Group across its risk taxonomy; however, this is not an exhaustive view of all the potential climate risks across the Group’s other principal risks.







19

BUSINESS
Table 9. Examples of climate change impacts across other principal risks
Key risk types impactedDriverExamples of key risks for Lloyds Banking Group
StrategicReputation
Failure to deliver or sufficiently drive change through the Group’s net zero strategy, relating to its financed activities and own operations
CreditPolicy & Legal
Technology
Market
Reputation
Physical (Acute / Chronic)
Impacts from new and existing government policies, for example, around energy efficiency standards or the transition to electric vehicles
New technology and availability of electric vehicles reduce valuation of existing vehicles
Unproven new technologies required across other sectors in order to reduce emissions
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s lending
Increased costs from sustainable materials for Commercial Banking customers
Adverse coverage of the Group’s exposure to high emissions sectors
Flood damage to properties or coastal erosion, impacting our Retail Mortgage business or Commercial Real Estate portfolio
Reduced production for Commercial Banking customers as result of higher temperatures and/or changing weather patterns, for example, lower food or crop yields
MarketMarket
Physical (Chronic)
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s markets/trading business, investments and equities
Changes in longevity of the Group’s pension scheme members
Insurance underwritingPhysical (Acute / Chronic)
Potential for increased levels of General Insurance claims due to damage to property caused by changes to weather patterns and climate (e.g. flood, storm, coastal erosion)
ConductReputation
Policy & Legal
Conduct risk implications from the Group’s role in the transition, including potential impacts on mortgage customers, specific sectors, insurance and investment products
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Operational resiliencePhysical (Acute)
Damage to properties and systems within the Group estate, resulting in disruption to the Group’s services to customers
Disruption to services provided by the Group’s suppliers
Regulatory and legalPolicy & Legal
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Evolving regulatory standards for the Group’s operations
We are continuing to integrate consideration of climate risk as part of activity and processes for managing other principal risks in our enterprise Risk Management Framework. This has focused on the most material risks impacting the Group. We have refined our analysis of lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk, and over 2020 and 2021, we have completed sector deep dives.
Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk
We have refined our analysis of the sectors where we have lending to customers that may likely contribute a higher share of the Group's financed emissions. Not all customers in these sectors have high emissions or are exposed to significant transition risks. We continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
20

BUSINESS
Table 10. Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk1
Commercial Banking Sectors5
Total utilisation of Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Total limits of
Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customer3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)4
Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
Energy Use in BuildingsReal Estate17,711 19,461 22,218 24,875 3.5%3.9%57 62 
Social Housing5,538 5,966 10,556 11,137 1.1%1.2%84 91 
Agriculture6
Agriculture7,526 7,429 8,074 8,012 1.5%1.5%101 103 
Forestry10 10 15 16 —%—%67 65 
Fishing31 26 50 50 —%—%59 49 
TransportationPassenger Transport1,231 1,135 2,216 2,264 0.2%0.2%41 47 
Industrial Transport1,058 1,374 2,297 2,507 0.2%0.3%42 46 
Automotives7
1,007 1,485 5,452 6,315 0.2%0.3%26 25 
Energy Use in Industry8
Housebuilders655 870 2,872 3,023 0.1%0.2%28 28 
Cement, Construction Materials, Chemicals & Steel Manufacture279 317 814 1,098 0.1%0.1%27 25 
General Manufacturing1,167 1,300 3,745 4,329 0.2%0.3%35 33 
Food Manufacturing and Wholesalers762 1,002 2,802 3,069 0.2%0.2%18 22 
Other Construction9
921 1,052 2,094 2,457 0.2%0.2%35 37 
Energy Supply8
Oil & Gas10
987 1,099 2,520 3,815 0.2%0.2%39 35 
Utilities1,791 900 4,372 3,820 0.4%0.2%74 76 
Coal Mining<1<122 <0.1%<0.1%3 
Total40,674 43,434 70,097 76,809 8.1%8.6% — 
Loans and advances to
Retail customers (£m)
Undrawn loans and advances to Retail customers (£m)
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customers3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)10
Retail Division areasDec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
UK Mortgages308,344 294,806 17,151 19,456 61.2%58.4%232 224 
UK Motor Finance14,276 15,201 1,985 1,660 2.8%3.0%28 28 
Business Banking11
3,804 4,281  — 0.8%0.8%73 74 
Total326,424 314,288 19,136 21,116 64.8%62.3% — 
1Commercial Banking and Retail divisions only. Excludes Insurance & Wealth division.
2Commercial Banking division only, excludes Commercial Finance. All values are gross of significant risk transfers. 2020 restated on a consistent basis with 2021.
3Percentages calculated using total Group loans and advances to customers on a statutory basis, before allowance for impairment losses (£503,608 million at 31 December 2021, £504,603 million at 31 December 2020).
4Weighted average maturity calculated using total limits in Commercial Banking and loans and advances in Retail.
5Commercial lending classified using Office for National Statistics. Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes at legal entity level.
6Agriculture total utilisation includes Agricultural Mortgage Corporation (AMC) based on loans and advances to customers (2021: £4,246 million, 2020: £4,186 million). AMC total limits aligned to total utilisation.
7Includes automotive manufacture, retail and wholesale trade, rentals and parts but excludes finance captives and securitisations.
8Certain SIC codes have been removed from the table in 2021 to better represent the activities in the descriptions; Architectural, planning and consulting from Other construction, Water and sewerage from Utilities and Wholesaling activities from Food manufacturing.
9Construction excludes 41100 Development of building projects (included within Real estate) and 41202 Construction of domestic buildings (reported separately as Housebuilders).
10Excludes commodity traders.
11Sectors with increased climate risk only, as seen in Commercial Banking above. Undrawn loans and advances excluded.


21

BUSINESS
Sector reviews
We are committed to supporting the UK Government's vision of a sustainable low carbon future, so in line with our purpose of Helping Britain Prosper we have undertaken an analysis of how the Group’s principal risks are impacted by climate change.
As detailed in the table 10, we have identified sectors where we have lending to customers that are likely to be higher carbon emitters or be exposed to higher levels of physical or transition risks and continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
Across 2020 and 2021, we completed bespoke deep dives into each of these sectors which has been supported by external third-party consultants and sector experts. A summary of the sectors identified and the progress achieved to date is detailed in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
The follow-up actions as a result of these sector deep dives are to:
Develop sector business cases to identify and implement levers and opportunities, including any required changes to strategy
Identify any implications on credit risk appetite and policies by sector
Continue to improve Group financed emissions calculations by sector
Define business strategy by sector, including targets and metrics
Continue to embed climate risk into all sector reviews, including sectors not prioritised in this exercise, in 2022
Climate Scenario Analysis
As the understanding and importance of climate risk progresses, climate scenario analysis is becoming an increasingly important risk management tool assisting the identification, measurement and ongoing assessment of climate risks that pose threats to Lloyds Banking Group’s strategic objectives.
In a first generation exercise, the Group analysed the impact of three scenarios on a sample of the balance sheet compromising credit portfolios in Commercial Banking, Retail Mortgage and Motor businesses prior to the wider Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario (CBES) exercise undertaken for the Bank of England. The Group ran workshops with subject matter experts providing an assessment of the scenario analysis results. This helped to advance the understanding of the risks and financial implications in different sectors and business areas resulting from climate change, as well as suggesting what potential management actions might be required under the different scenarios.
Climate scenario analysis is a fast-evolving discipline, requiring new skills and capabilities to be established with appropriate levels of governance. Participating in the Bank of England’s CBES exercise enabled the Group to explore the resilience of its credit portfolios under three different climate scenarios (early policy action, late policy action, no additional policy action) over the next 30 years to 2050. The CBES exercise was intended to be a learning exercise and the Group took away key learnings. These, along with further details on Climate Scenario Analysis, are described in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Looking Forward
The Group has made good progress in further incorporating climate change into the Group strategy and business operations as well as prioritising the areas of our businesses where we see the greatest opportunity to support and accelerate the transition to a low carbon economy.
We are enhancing our disclosures with our inaugural standalone Climate Report and have published key sector ambitions for high-emissions and fossil fuel sectors, committing to a full phase-out from thermal coal.
In 2022, we will continue to develop additional sector-based ambitions to support its goalpropositions and tools for our customers to help them reduce their emissions, while further advancing our work on reducing our own operational and supply chain emissions.
We will also look to report additional sector ambitions in 2022 for parts of our remaining carbon-intensive sectors, including residential mortgages, transportation and automotive activity beyond Retail (Motor). In addition, we will be developing further ambitions and a transition plan in accordance with the emissions it financestimelines stipulated by more than 50 per cent by 2030. The Groupthe NZBA.
Given this progress and the evolving best practice for climate votes, we do not intend at present to bring a climate vote to the 2022 AGM. We will continue to consider a vote on a year-by-year basis.
Managing the risk from climate change remains a key priority for the Group. We expect to enhance its methodologiesour capabilities by leveraging the learnings from our participation in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario and frameworkundertaking further climate scenario analysis in 2022. This will allow us to better understand the resilience of the Group's business model to climate risks.
We will continue to develop our assessment of the sectors at increased risk from climate change or the transition to net zero, and augment our climate related policies as our capabilities strengthen. Focused Board level reviews will consider how our strategy and credit portfolios will evolve as we transition to net zero, including the further development of our risk management capabilities.
Continued embedding of climate risk is essential for reporting climatethe Group to achieve our strategy in transitioning to net zero. Our understanding of climate-related risks and opportunities taking into account relevant industry guidelinescontinues to develop and regulatory reporting requirements. Thisour strategy and risk management activities will further advance the Group disclosures and respondevolve accordingly in order to the evolving needs of both its shareholders and other stakeholders.best respond.
PROPERTIES
At 31 December 2020, Lloyds Bank Group occupied 1,724 properties in the UK. Of these, 367 were held as freeholds and 1,357 as leasehold. The majority of these properties are retail branches, widely distributed throughout England, Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland. Other buildings include the Lloyds Bank’s head office in the City of London with other customer service and support centres located to suit business needs but clustered largely in eight core geographic conurbations – London, Edinburgh, Glasgow, Midlands (Birmingham), Northwest (Chester and Manchester), West Yorkshire (Halifax and Leeds), South (Brighton and Andover) and Southwest (Bristol and Cardiff).
In addition, there are 103 properties which are either sub-let or vacant. There are also a number of Automated Teller Machine (ATM) units situated throughout the UK, the majority of which are held as leasehold. The Group also has business operations elsewhere in the world, primarily holding property on a leasehold basis.
10

BUSINESS
LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS
During the ordinary course of business the Lloyds Bank Group is subject to threatened or actual legal proceedings and regulatory reviews and investigations both in the UK and overseas. SetFurther discussion on the Group's regulatory and legal provisions is set out below is a summary ofin note 29 to the more significant matters.
PROVISIONS FOR FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES
Provisions are recognised for expected credit lossesfinancial statements and on undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees.
PAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE (EXCLUDING MBNA)
The Group has made provisions for PPI costs totalling £21,906 million; of which £85 million was recognised in the final quarter of the year ended 31 December 2020. Of the approximately six million enquiries received pre-deadline, more than 99 per cent have now been processed. The £85 million charge in the fourth quarter was driven by the impact of coronavirus delaying operational activities during 2020, the final stages of work to ensure operational completeness ahead of an orderly programme close and final validation of information requests and complaints with third parties that resulted in a limited number of additional complaints to be handled. A small part of the costs incurred during the year also reflect the costs associated with litigation activity to date.
At 31 December 2020, a provision of £198 million remained unutilisedits contingent liabilities relating to complaints and associated administration costs excluding amounts relating to MBNA. Total cash payments were £1,459 million during the year ended 31 December 2020.
PAYMENT PROTECTION INSURANCE (MBNA)
As announced in December 2016, the Group's exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under the terms of the MBNA sale and purchase agreement. No additional charge has been made by MBNA to its PPI provision in the year ended 31 December 2020; total cash payments in the year were £241 million and the remaining provision at 31 December 2020 was £61 million (31 December 2019: £302 million).
OTHER PROVISIONS FOR LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS
In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities on a range of matters. The Group also receives complaints in connection with its past conduct and claims brought by or on behalf of current and former employees, customers, investors and other third parties and is subject to legal proceedings and other legal actions. Where significant, provisions are held against the costs expected to be incurred in relation to these matters and matters arising from related internal reviews. During the year ended 31 December 2020 the Group charged a further £329 million in respect of legal actions and other regulatory matters and the unutilised balance at 31 December 2020 was £261 million (31 December 2019: £395 million). The most significant items are as follows.
HBOS Reading – review
The Group completed its compensation assessment for those within the Customer Reviewis set out in 2019 with more than £109 million of compensation paid, in addition to £15 million for ex-gratia payments and £6 million for the reimbursement of legal fees. The Group is applying the recommendations from Sir Ross Cranston’s review, issued in December 2019, including a reassessment of direct and consequential losses by an independent panel, an extension of debt relief and a wider definition of de facto directors. Further details of the panel were announced on 3 April 2020 and the panel's full scope and methodology was published on 7 July 2020. The panel’s stated objective is to consider cases via a non-legalistic and fair process, and to make their decisions in a generous, fair and common-sense manner. Details of an appeal process for the further assessments of debt relief and de facto director status have also been announced. The Group continues to make progress on its assessment of claims for further debt relief and de facto director status, completing preliminary assessments for 98 per cent of claims on both debt relief and de facto directors. As part of these activities the Group has recorded charges in relation to compensation payments and associated costs (projectednote 39 to the fourth quarter of 2021) in 2020 in applying the recommendations, in respect of debt relief and de facto director status. During 2021, decisions from the independent panel re-review on direct and consequential losses will start to be issued, which is likely to result in further charges but it is not possible to estimate the potential impact at this stage. The Group is committed to implementing Sir Ross' recommendations in full.
The Dame Linda Dobbs review, which is considering the Group’s handling of HBOS Reading between January 2009 and January 2017, is now expected to complete towards the end of 2021. The cost of undertaking the review is included in the revised provision.
The 2020 charge of £159 million, and lifetime cost of £435 million, includes both compensation payments and operational costs.
Arrears handling related activities
The Group has provided an additional £35 million in the year ended 31 December 2020 for arrears handling related activities, bringing the total provided to date to £1,016 million; the unutilised balance at 31 December 2020 was £62 million.
INTERCHANGE FEES
With respect to multi-lateral interchange fees (MIFs), the Lloyds Banking Group is not involved in the ongoing litigation which involves card schemes such as Visa and Mastercard (as described below). However, the Group is a member/licensee of Visa and Mastercard and other card schemes. The litigation in question is as follows:
litigation brought by retailers against both Visa and Mastercard continues in the English Courts (and includes a judgment of the Supreme Court in June 2020 upholding the Court of Appeal's finding in 2018 that historic interchange arrangements of Mastercard and Visa infringed competition law); and
litigation brought on behalf of UK consumers in the English Courts against Mastercard, which the Supreme Court has now confirmed can proceed.
Any impact on the Group of the litigation against Visa and Mastercard remains uncertain at this time, such that it is not practicable for the Group to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect. Insofar as Visa is required to pay damages to retailers for interchange fees set prior to June 2016, contractual arrangements to allocate liability have been agreed between various UK banks (including the Lloyds Banking Group) and Visa Inc, as part of Visa Inc’s acquisition of Visa Europe in 2016. These arrangements cap the maximum amount of liability to which the Lloyds Banking Group may be subject and this cap is set at the cash consideration received by the Lloyds Banking Group for the sale of its stake in Visa Europe to Visa Inc in 2016. In 2016, the Group received Visa preference stock as part of the consideration for the sale of its shares in Visa Europe. In 2020, some of these Visa preference shares were converted into Visa Inc Class A common stock (in accordance with the provisions of the Visa Europe sale documentation) and they were subsequently sold by the Group. The sale had no impact on this contingent liability.statements.
11

BUSINESS
LIBOR AND OTHER TRADING RATES
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies, together with other panel banks, have been named as defendants in private lawsuits, including purported class action suits, in the US in connection with their roles as panel banks contributing to the setting of US Dollar, Japanese Yen and Sterling London Interbank Offered Rate and the Australian BBSW reference rate. Certain of the plaintiffs' claims have been dismissed by the US Federal Court for the Southern District of New York (subject to appeals).
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies are also named as defendants in (i) UK based claims; and (ii) two Dutch class actions, raising LIBOR manipulation allegations. A number of the claims against the Lloyds Banking Group in relation to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products also include allegations of LIBOR manipulation.
Furthermore, the Swiss Competition Commission concluded its investigation against Lloyds Bank plc in June 2019. However, the Lloyds Banking Group continues to respond to litigation arising out of the investigations into submissions made by panel members to the bodies that set LIBOR and various other interbank offered rates.
It is currently not possible to predict the scope and ultimate outcome on the Lloyds Banking Group of the various outstanding regulatory investigations not encompassed by the settlements, any private lawsuits or any related challenges to the interpretation or validity of any of the Lloyds Banking Group's contractual arrangements, including their timing and scale. As such, it is not practicable to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect.
TAX AUTHORITIES
The Lloyds Banking Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary, which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013, HMRC informed the Lloyds Banking Group that its interpretation of the UK rules means that the group relief is not available. In 2020, HMRC concluded their enquiry into the matter and issued a closure notice. The Lloyds Banking Group's interpretation of the UK rules has not changed and hence it has appealed to the First Tier Tax Tribunal, with a hearing expected in early 2022. If the final determination of the matter by the judicial process is that HMRC’s position is correct, management estimate that this would result in an increase in current tax liabilities of approximately £700 million (including interest) and a reduction in deferred tax assets of approximately £270 million. The Lloyds Banking Group, having taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due.
There are a number of other open matters on which the Group is in discussions with HMRC (including the tax treatment of certain costs arising from the divestment of TSB Banking Group plc), none of which is expected to have a material impact on the financial position of the Group.
CONTINGENT LIABILITIES RELATING TO OTHER LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS
In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other complaints and threatened or actual legal proceedings (including class or group action claims) brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, as well as legal and regulatory reviews, challenges, investigations and enforcement actions, both in the UK and overseas. All material such matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established to management's best estimate of the amount required at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, for example because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed properly to assess the merits of the case, and no provisions are held in relation to such matters. In these circumstances, specific disclosure in relation to a contingent liability will be made where material. However the Group does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position, operations or cash flows.
1222

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The results discussed below are not necessarily indicative of Lloyds Bank Group’s results in future periods. The following information contains certain forward looking statements. For a discussion of certain cautionary statements relating to forward looking statements, see Forward looking statements.
The following discussion is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this annual report. For a discussion of the accounting policies used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, see Accounting policies in note 2 to the financial statements.


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Loan portfolio
1323

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIESJUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect amounts reported therein. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates.
TheCritical accounting policies that are deemed critical to the Lloyds Bank Group’s results and financial position, based upon materiality and significant judgements and estimates,key sources of estimation uncertainty are set outdiscussed in note 3 to the financial statements.
FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
Future developments in relation to the Lloyds Bank Group’s IFRS reporting are discussed in note 4746 to the financial statements.
14

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 20202021 AND 2019
SUMMARY
20202019
£m£m
Net interest income10,770 12,220 
Other income3,815 4,388 
Total income14,585 16,608 
Total operating expenses(9,196)(11,123)
Impairment(4,060)(1,362)
Profit before tax1,329 4,123 
Tax credit (expense)137 (1,287)
Profit for the year1,466 2,836 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders1,023 2,515 
Profit attributable to other equity holders417 281 
Profit attributable to equity holders1,440 2,796 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests26 40 
Profit for the year1,466 2,836 
2020
INCOME STATEMENT COMMENTARY
20212020
£m£m
Net interest income11,036 10,770 
Other income3,637 3,815 
Total income14,673 14,585 
Operating expenses(10,206)(9,196)
Impairment credit (charge)1,318 (4,060)
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 
Tax (expense) credit(583)137 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders4,826 1,023 
Profit attributable to other equity holders344 417 
Profit attributable to equity holders5,170 1,440 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests32 26 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
During the year ended 31 December 2020,2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a profit before tax of £5,785 million, an increase of £4,456 million compared with £1,329 million a reduction of £2,794 million, or 68 per cent, compared with £4,123 million in 2019;2020; the decreaseincrease reflected, in particular, the Group's revisedimproved economic outlook for the UK following the outbreak of the coronavirus pandemic.Thein 2021. The Lloyds Bank Group profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 20202021 included a profit before tax of £1,856£5,024 million from its Retail division a 16 per cent decrease compared to 2019, as lower income and a higher impairment charge have more than offset reduced provisions for conduct risk; and a profit before tax of £20£1,536 million from its Commercial Banking division.
Total income decreasedincreased by £2,023£88 million, or 121 per cent, to £14,673 million in 2021 compared with £14,585 million in 2020, compared with £16,608reflecting an increase of £266 million in 2019, reflecting reductions in both net interest income andpartly offset by a decrease of £178 million in other income.
Net interest income was £10,770£11,036 million in 2020, a decrease2021, an increase of £1,450£266 million, or 122 per cent compared to £12,220£10,770 million in 2019.2020. Average interest earning banking assets increased by £19,263£2,762 million or 3 per cent,to £576,276 million in 2021 compared to £573,514 million in 2020 compared to £554,251 million in 2019 as a result of increased placings with central banks and growth in reverse repurchase agreement balances. Average customernew mortgage lending was stable; the impact of increased balances due from SMEs under the UK Government-backed coronavirus support schemes and growth in the open mortgage book was offset by lower balances in the closed mortgage book, and credit cards and motor finance, as well as the continued optimisation of the Corporate and Institutional book within Commercial Banking. The net interest margin decreased, reflectingincreased as the benefit of lower rate environment, actions taken duringfunding costs more than offset the year to support customers andimpact of a change in asset mix, largely as a result of reduced levels of customer demand during the coronavirus pandemic.mix.
Other income was £573£178 million, or 135 per cent, lower at £3,637 million in 2021 compared to £3,815 million in 2020 compared to £4,388 million in 2019.2020.
Fee and commission income was £439 million, or 19 per cent, lower at £1,924 million compared to £2,363 million in 2019 as a result of decreases across most categories of fees reflecting reductions in business and transaction volumes as a result of the coronavirus pandemic as well as the impact of the transfer of business into the Lloyds Banking Group’s wealth management joint venture in 2019. Fee and commission expense decreased by £118 million, or 11 per cent, to £909 million compared with £1,027 million in 2019; interchange fees were lower as a result of reduced customer usage of ATMs during the pandemic and there were reductions in card and other fees payable. Net trading income was £390£365 million higherlower at £385 million in 2021 compared with £750 million in 2020, compared with £360 million in 2019, reflecting the change in fair value of interest rate derivatives and foreign exchange contracts in the banking book not mitigated through hedge accounting. Other operating income was £642£51 million, or 242 per cent, lower at £1,999 million in 2021 compared to £2,050 million in 2020, compared to £2,692 million in 2019, reflecting a lower levellevels of operating lease rental income, followingas a result of a reduction in the Lex vehicle fleet size, increased lossesand reduced gains on liability management exercises and a lowerdisposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, partly offset by increases in the level of cost recharges to other Lloyds Banking Group entities. Fee and commission income was £271 million, or 14 per cent, higher at £2,195 million compared to £1,924 million in 2020 as a result of increases across most fee categories as customer activity increased and the economy improved. Fee and commission expense increased by £33 million, or 4 per cent, to £942 million compared with £909 million in 2020, as a consequence of increased customer activity.
Operating expenses decreasedincreased by £1,927£1,010 million, or 1711 per cent to £10,206 million in 2021 compared with £9,196 million in 2020 compared with £11,123 million in 2019primarily reflecting a decrease of £1,776 million inhigher charges for redress payments to customers in respect of PPIregulatory and other conduct related matters legal provisions (see below). Excluding these charges from both years, operating expensesStaff costs were £151£77 million, or 2 per cent, lowerhigher at £8,782£3,692 million in 20202021 compared to £8,933 million in 2019. Staff costs were £370 million, or 9 per cent, lower atwith £3,615 million in 2020 compared with £3,985 million in 2019. This reflects a reduction in staff numbers, significantly lower accruals in respect2020; as the impact of staff bonusesreductions and reducedlower levels of agency staff only partlyredundancy costs has been offset by higher redundancy costs.bonus accruals following the recovery in the Group's profitability. Premises and equipment costs were £21£210 million lower at £215 million in 2021 compared with £425 million in 2020, compared with £446 million in 2019 reflecting increasedhigher gains on the disposal of tangible fixedoperating lease assets only partly offset byat the costend of making the Group's premises COVID-secure.contract term and gains on disposal of Group premises. Other expenses were £168£1,040 million, or 942 per cent, higher at £2,068£3,522 million in 2021 compared with £2,482 million in 2020, compared with £1,900 milliondriven by the increase in 2019 mainly reflecting increased investment spendcharges for regulatory and cost recharges from Lloyds Bankinglegal provisions and higher communications and data processing costs as the Group plc.develops and maintains its information technology infrastructure. Depreciation and amortisation costs were £68£107 million, or 34 per cent, higher at £2,777 million in 2021 compared to £2,670 million in 2020, compared to £2,602 million in 2019 due to increased levelspart reflecting a software asset write-off as a result of software capitalisation.investment in new technology and systems infrastructure.
The Group incurred a regulatory and legal provisions charge in operating expenses of £1,177 million in 2021 compared to £414 million in 2020 compared to £2,190 million in 2019. Of this amount £85 million related to payment protection insurance; this charge was driven by the impact of coronavirus delaying operational activities during 2020, the final stages of work to ensure operational completeness and final validation of information requests and complaints with third parties that resulted in a limited number of additional complaints to be handled. Of the approximately six million enquiries received pre-deadline, more than 99 per cent have now been processed. A small part of the costs incurred during the year also reflect the costs associated with litigation activity to date. The unutilised provision, excluding MBNA, at 31 December 2020 was £198 million2020. The charge in relation to other conduct issues was £329 million in 2020, compared to £395 million in 2019. During2021 includes the year additional charges, both redress and operational costs of £159 million, have been taken in relation to HBOS Reading as well as furtherand litigation costs and redress and operational costs in respect of litigation and other ongoing legacy programmes. During 2021, £790 million has been recognised in relation to HBOS Reading estimated future awards and operational costs, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth quarter. This reflects the Group's estimate of its full liability and includes the expected future cost in relation to the independent Foskett Panel re-review, operational costs in relation to arrears handling, packaged bank account complaints and various settlements in relationDame Linda Dobbs' review which is considering whether the issues relating to historic claims. A number of programmes are now close to conclusion. Others, such as HBOS Reading includingwere investigated and appropriately reported by the conclusion ofGroup during the recommendations fromperiod January 2009 to January 2017 and other programme costs. The final outcome could be significantly different once the Cranston Review, are still ongoing and further costs are likely to be incurred.re-review is concluded.
1524

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Impairment losses increasedimproved by £2,698£5,378 million to a credit of £1,318 million in 2021 compared with a charge of £4,060 million in 2020, largely reflecting the improved UK macroeconomic outlook. Overall the Group’s loan portfolio continues to be well-positioned, reflecting a prudent through-the-cycle approach to credit risk with high levels of security. The Group's ECL allowance reduced in the year by £2,132 million to £4,000 million, compared with £1,362to £6,132 million in 2019. Impairment losses in respect of loans and advancesat 31 December 2020, following the improvements to customers were £2,458 million higher due primarily to an increase in expected credit loss (ECL) allowances taken to reflect the deterioration in the UK economic outlook as a consequence of the coronavirus pandemic and further charges taken on existing distressed clients whose recovery strategies were affected more immediately. Aside from these distressed cases, observedoutlook. Observed credit performance has remained stable,robust in part as a result of the continued effectiveness of government support schemes and payment holidays extended by the Group. Additional funding has been made available to businesses impacted by lockdown restrictions which has prevented a more material increase in business failures and unemployment.
Whilst these measures have resulted inyear, with the flow of assets into arrears, defaultdefaults and write-offwrite-offs remaining at low levels, significant ECL provisions have been built up in anticipation that these support schemes will unwind with a consequent increase in unemployment and insolvencies. The Group's total ECL allowance has therefore increased from £3,380 million to £6,132 million in the year, with the majority of the increase in provisions for up to date assets in Stage 1 and Stage 2. A central overlay of £400 million has been included in recognition of the significant uncertainty that remains as to the efficacy of the vaccine, the vaccination programme, potential virus mutation, further lockdowns and economic performance post lockdown restrictions and Government support, recognising that the full range of these risks is not captured in the Group's method of generating alternative scenarios around its base case. The scale of the current uncertainty overlay approximately equates to a c.1 percentage point increase in unemployment allied with a 5 per cent lower HPI in 2021, or a c.10 percentage point higher weighting of the severe downside scenario.levels.
The Group’s closingbase case economic scenario used to calculate the ECL allowance assumes that unemployment will remain close to the reduced level of c.4.3 per cent observed in the fourth quarter following the end of the coronavirus job retention scheme. The ECL allowance continues to reflect a probability-weighted view of future economic scenarios built out from the base case and its associated conditioning assumptions, with a 30 per cent weighting applied to base case, upside and downside scenarios and a 10 per cent weighting to the severe downside. All scenarios have deterioratedimproved since the start of the year, following the changes made to the base case. They also reflect a widening of the range of potential outcomes, following changes to the generation of scenarios around the base case. Overall the Group’s loan portfolio continues to be well-positioned, reflecting a prudent through-the-cycle approach to credit risk and high levels of security. The Retail portfolio is heavily weighted toward high quality mortgage lending where low loan-to-value ratios provide security against potential risks. The prime consumer finance portfolio also benefits from high quality growth in past periods in the context of the Group’s prudent risk appetite. The commercial portfolio reflects a diverse client base with relatively limited exposure to the most vulnerable sectors so far affected by the coronavirus outbreak. Within Commercial Banking, the Group’s management of concentration risk includes single name and country limits as well as controls over the overall exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors or asset classes.case outlook.
In 2020,2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a tax creditexpense of £137£583 million compared to a tax expensecredit of £1,287£137 million in 2019.2020. The tax creditcharge in 2020 arose primarily as a result of2021 includes a credit of £435£1,168 million arising on the remeasurement of the Group’s deferred tax balancesassets following the substantive enactment by the UK Government’s decision to maintainGovernment of an increase in the corporation tax rate atfrom 19 per cent which was substantively enactedto 25 per cent, effective on 17 March 2020.1 April 2023.
The Lloyds Bank Group’s post-tax return on average total assets reducedincreased to 0.240.86 per cent compared to 0.480.24 per cent in the year ended 31 December 2019.

2020.
1625

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
BALANCE SHEET AND CAPITAL COMMENTARY
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
AssetsAssetsAssets
Cash and balances at central banksCash and balances at central banks49,888 38,880 Cash and balances at central banks54,279 49,888 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,674 2,284 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,798 1,674 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments8,341 8,494 Derivative financial instruments5,511 8,341 
Loans and advances to banks5,950 4,852 
Loans and advances to customers480,141 474,470 
Loans and advances to banks1
Loans and advances to banks1
4,478 4,324 
Loans and advances to customers1
Loans and advances to customers1
430,829 425,694 
Reverse repurchase agreements1
Reverse repurchase agreements1
49,708 56,073 
Debt securitiesDebt securities5,137 5,325 Debt securities4,562 5,137 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings738 1,854 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 738 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost491,966 486,501 Financial assets at amortised cost490,316 491,966 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,260 24,617 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,786 27,260 
Other assets20,810 20,592 
Other assets1
Other assets1
23,159 20,810 
Total assetsTotal assets599,939 581,368 Total assets602,849 599,939 
LiabilitiesLiabilitiesLiabilities
Deposits from banks24,997 23,593 
Customer deposits434,569 396,839 
Deposits from banks1
Deposits from banks1
3,363 6,230 
Customer deposits1
Customer deposits1
449,373 425,152 
Repurchase agreements1
Repurchase agreements1
30,106 28,184 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings6,875 4,893 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 6,875 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,831 7,702 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,537 6,831 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments8,228 9,831 Derivative financial instruments4,643 8,228 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue59,293 76,431 Debt securities in issue48,724 59,293 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities9,242 12,586 Subordinated liabilities8,658 9,242 
Other liabilitiesOther liabilities8,786 10,594 Other liabilities9,183 8,786 
Total liabilitiesTotal liabilities558,821 542,469 Total liabilities562,077 558,821 
Shareholders’ equity35,105 33,973 
EquityEquity
Ordinary shareholders’ equityOrdinary shareholders’ equity36,410 35,105 
Other equity instrumentsOther equity instruments5,935 4,865 Other equity instruments4,268 5,935 
Non-controlling interestsNon-controlling interests78 61 Non-controlling interests94 78 
Total equityTotal equity41,118 38,899 Total equity40,772 41,118 
Total equity and liabilitiesTotal equity and liabilities599,939 581,368 Total equity and liabilities602,849 599,939 
1See note 1 regarding changes to presentation.
Total assets were £18,571£2,910 million or 3 per cent, higher at £602,849 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £599,939 million at 31 December 2020 compared to £581,368 million at 31 December 2019.2020. Cash and balances at central banks were £11,008£4,391 million, or 289 per cent, higher at £49,888£54,279 million compared to £38,880£49,888 million at 31 December 2019,2020 reflecting increased liquidity holdings followingas a result of the inflow of customer deposits.deposits; and retirement benefit assets were £2,817 million higher at £4,531 million compared to £1,714 million at 31 December 2020 as a result of actuarial gains and employer contributions. Financial assets at amortised cost decreased by £1,650 million to £490,316 million compared to £491,966 million at 31 December 2020. Loans and advances to customers increased in the year by £5,671£5,135 million to £480,141£430,829 million, compared to £474,470£425,694 million at 31 December 2019, due to an increase2020, however this was more than offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements, held for liquidity purposes, growthof £6,365 million, or 11 per cent, from £56,073 million at 31 December 2020 to £49,708 million at 31 December 2021. The increase in lendingloans and advances to SMEs andcustomers reflected growth in the open mortgage book, which was in partpartly offset by lower levels ofreductions in the closed mortgage book, other commercial lending, lower credit cardRetail balances and unsecured loans and the continued reduction in the Group's closed mortgage book.
Total liabilitiesCommercial lending (in part due to optimisation activities). Derivative financial instruments were £16,352£2,830 million or 3 per cent, higherlower at £558,821£5,511 million compared to £542,469 million at 31 December 2019. Customer deposits were £37,730 million, or 10 per cent, higher at £434,569£8,341 million at 31 December 2020, driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total liabilities were £3,256 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £562,077 million compared to £396,839£558,821 million at 31 December 2019.2020. Customer deposits were £24,221 million, or 6 per cent, higher at £449,373 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £425,152 million at 31 December 2020. There has been significantcontinued growth in retail current account and savings balances, reflecting reduced consumer spending during the coronavirus pandemic, and in commercial current accounts, as businesses have built up funds to cope with the pandemic, which has only been partly been offset by lower levels of other commercial deposits. Repurchase agreement balances were £1,922 million, or 7 per cent, higher at £30,106 million compared to £28,184 million at 31 December 2020 however deposits from banks were £2,867 million lower at £3,363 million compared to £6,230 million at 31 December 2020 reflecting a reduced need for this source of funding. Debt securities in issue were £17,138£10,569 million lower at £48,724 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £59,293 million at 31 December 2020 compared to £76,431 million at 31 December 2019 as the availability of Government support and liquidity measures and increased levels of customer deposits have reduced the need for new funding issuance. Amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings were £5,385 million lower at £1,490 million compared to £6,875 million at 31 December 2020 and derivative liabilities were £3,585 million lower at £4,643 million compared to £8,228 million at 31 December 2020, again driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total equity has increaseddecreased by £2,219£346 million, or 61 per cent, from £38,899 million at 31 December 2019 to £41,118 million at 31 December 2020 as a result of retained profits and the issuance of £1,070to £40,772 million of other equity instruments.
Lloyds Bank Group’s common equity tier 1 capital ratio increased to 15.5 per cent from 14.3 per cent at 31 December 2019 largely reflecting2021 as retained profits for the year withhave been offset by dividends paid and a net redemption of other equity instruments; and a negative movement on the impactGroup's cash flow hedging reserve has been offset by a positive remeasurement in respect of the impairment charge partially mitigated through the increase in IFRS 9 transitional relief for capital. The introduction of the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets also resulted in a significant reduction in intangible assets deducted from capital. In addition, risk-weighted assets reduced and excess expected losses reduced to nil as they absorbed part of the increase in IFRS 9 expected credit losses. The resultant increases in capital were offset in part by pension contributions made during the year, an increase in deferred tax assets deducted from capital and the accrual for foreseeable dividends.
The tier 1 capital ratio increased to 19.8 per cent from 18.3 per cent at 31 December 2019, primarily reflecting the increase in common equity tier 1 capital and new AT1 issuances, offset in part by the annual reduction in the transitional limit applied to grandfathered AT1 capital.
The total capital ratio increased to 23.5 per cent from 22.1 per cent at 31 December 2019, which largely reflected the increase in tier 1 capital.
Risk-weighted assets reduced by £1,078 million, or 1 per cent, to £170,862 million at 31 December 2020, compared to £171,940 million at 31 December 2019. Increases reflecting the impact of credit migrations, model calibrations and updates, the full implementation of the new securitisation framework and the introduction of the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets were more than offset by reductions in lending balances outside Government-backed schemes, optimisation activity undertaken in Commercial Banking and the impact of the revised SME supporting factor. In addition operational risk-weighted assets have reduced.Group's post-retirement defined benefit schemes.
1726

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The PRA is consulting on a proposal to reverse the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets (which currently follows EU capital regulations), thereby reinstating the original requirement to deduct in full. Excluding the impact of the revised capital treatment Lloyds Bank Group'sGroup’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio would be 15.0has increased to 16.7 per cent.cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year and a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment credit through profits.
Risk-weighted assets reduced by £9,286 million, or 5 per cent, from £170,862 million at 31 December 2020 to £161,576 million at 31 December 2021. This was primarily as a result of optimisation activity undertaken in Commercial Banking, partially offset by balance sheet growth in the business. Credit migrations have had a limited impact on the risk-weighted asset position, in part due to the increase in house prices.
The transitional total capital ratio remained at 23.5 per cent, with the benefit of the increase in CET1 capital and reduction in risk-weighted assets broadly offset by reductions in Additional Tier 1 (AT1) and Tier 2 capital instruments. The latter largely reflected the reduction in transitional limits applied to legacy tier 1 and tier 2 capital instruments and calls made on both AT1 and tier 2 capital instruments, partially offset by new issuances.
The UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 5.5 per cent) as a result of the reduction in the fully loaded total tier 1 capital position which was partially offset by the reduction in the leverage exposure measure, the latter primarily reflecting movements in securities financing transactions and off-balance sheet items, net of increased balance sheet lending.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 20182019
The Lloyds Bank Group’s results for the year ended 31 December 2018,2019, and a discussion of the results for the year ended 31 December 20192020 compared to those for the year ended 31 December 2018,2019, were included on pages 13 to 15 ofin the 20192020 Annual Report on Form 20-F, filed on 2311 March 2020.2021.
1827

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND INTEREST INCOME AND EXPENSE – CONTINUING OPERATIONS
202020192018202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
income
YieldAverage
balance
Interest
income
YieldAverage
balance
Interest
income
YieldAverage
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%
Assets1
Assets1
Assets1
Financial assets at amortised cost:Financial assets at amortised cost:Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks57,610 114 0.20 47,490 269 0.57 60,692 462 0.76 
Loans and advances to customers483,906 13,358 2.76 475,385 15,281 3.21 466,560 15,049 3.23 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements62,704 70 0.11 57,610 114 0.20 47,490 269 0.57 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements482,767 12,334 2.55 483,906 13,358 2.76 475,385 15,281 3.21 
Debt securitiesDebt securities5,046 92 1.82 5,223 118 2.26 4,111 66 1.61 Debt securities4,725 74 1.57 5,046 92 1.82 5,223 118 2.26 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income26,952 302 1.12 26,153 430 1.64 32,206 639 1.98 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income26,080 442 1.69 26,952 302 1.12 26,153 430 1.64 
Total interest-earning assets of banking bookTotal interest-earning assets of banking book573,514 13,866 2.42 554,251 16,098 2.90 563,569 16,216 2.88 Total interest-earning assets of banking book576,276 12,920 2.24 573,514 13,866 2.42 554,251 16,098 2.90 
Total interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or lossTotal interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or loss2,319 26 1.12 8,354 73 0.87 34,759 434 1.25 Total interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 16 0.98 2,319 26 1.12 8,354 73 0.87 
Total interest-earning assetsTotal interest-earning assets575,833 13,892 2.41 562,605 16,171 2.87 598,328 16,650 2.78 Total interest-earning assets577,907 12,936 2.24 575,833 13,892 2.41 562,605 16,171 2.87 
Allowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised costAllowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised cost(5,332)(3,354)(2,994)Allowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised cost(5,115)(5,332)(3,354)
Non-interest earning assetsNon-interest earning assets34,375 30,671 38,986 Non-interest earning assets29,767 34,375 F30,671 
Total average assets and interest incomeTotal average assets and interest income604,876 13,892 2.30 589,922 16,171 2.74 634,320 16,650 2.62 Total average assets and interest income602,559 12,936 2.15 604,876 13,892 2.30 589,922 16,171 2.74 
1.1The line items below are included on the face of the Group's balance sheet.
202020192018202120202019
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%
Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:
Banking businessBanking business573,514 10,770 1.88 554,251 12,220 2.20 563,569 12,754 2.26 Banking business576,276 11,036 1.92 573,514 10,770 1.88 554,251 12,220 2.20 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or lossTrading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss2,319 (80)(3.45)8,354 (77)(0.92)34,759 (63)(0.18)Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 (77)(4.72)2,319 (80)(3.45)8,354 (77)(0.92)
575,833 10,690 1.86 562,605 12,143 2.16 598,328 12,691 2.12 577,907 10,959 1.90 575,833 10,690 1.86 562,605 12,143 2.16 
1928

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
202020192018202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
expense
CostAverage
balance
Interest
expense
CostAverage
balance
Interest
expense
CostAverage
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds1
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds1
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds1
Deposits by banksDeposits by banks6,866 82 1.19 6,262 87 1.39 5,973 81 1.36 Deposits by banks4,939 66 1.34 6,866 82 1.19 6,262 87 1.39 
Customer depositsCustomer deposits316,071 1,270 0.40 315,717 2,054 0.65 331,006 1,997 0.60 Customer deposits324,058 386 0.12 316,071 1,270 0.40 315,717 2,054 0.65 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreementsLiabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements32,189 117 0.36 27,935 301 1.08 28,163 245 0.87 Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements22,415 22 0.10 32,189 117 0.36 27,935 301 1.08 
Debt securities in issue2
Debt securities in issue2
67,239 761 1.13 67,096 476 0.71 67,233 66 0.10 
Debt securities in issue2
54,333 746 1.37 67,239 761 1.13 67,096 476 0.71 
Lease liabilitiesLease liabilities1,656 39 2.36 1,617 39 2.41 41 2.44 Lease liabilities1,494 30 2.01 1,656 39 2.36 1,617 39 2.41 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities11,510 827 7.19 9,315 921 9.89 10,531 1,072 10.18 Subordinated liabilities9,046 634 7.01 11,510 827 7.19 9,315 921 9.89 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking bookTotal interest-bearing liabilities of banking book435,531 3,096 0.71 427,942 3,878 0.91 442,947 3,462 0.78 Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking book416,285 1,884 0.45 435,531 3,096 0.71 427,942 3,878 0.91 
Total interest-bearing financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossTotal interest-bearing financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss7,824 106 1.35 10,053 150 1.49 38,133 497 1.30 Total interest-bearing financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,689 93 1.39 7,824 106 1.35 10,053 150 1.49 
Total interest-bearing liabilitiesTotal interest-bearing liabilities443,355 3,202 0.72 437,995 4,028 0.92 481,080 3,959 0.82 Total interest-bearing liabilities422,974 1,977 0.47 443,355 3,202 0.72 437,995 4,028 0.92 
Interest-free liabilitiesInterest-free liabilitiesInterest-free liabilities
Non-interest bearing customer accountsNon-interest bearing customer accounts95,629 74,130 72,428 Non-interest bearing customer accounts119,712 95,629 74,130 
Other interest-free liabilitiesOther interest-free liabilities24,867 37,147 35,883 Other interest-free liabilities18,289 24,867 37,147 
Non-controlling interests, other equity instruments and shareholders’ fundsNon-controlling interests, other equity instruments and shareholders’ funds41,025 40,650 44,929 Non-controlling interests, other equity instruments and shareholders’ funds41,584 41,025 40,650 
Total average liabilities and interest expenseTotal average liabilities and interest expense604,876 3,202 0.53 589,922 4,028 0.68 634,320 3,959 0.62 Total average liabilities and interest expense602,559 1,977 0.33 604,876 3,202 0.53 589,922 4,028 0.68 
1The line items below are included on the face of the Group’s balance sheet except for liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements, which are disclosed in note 42;41; and lease liabilities which are disclosed in note 27.26.
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.30 per cent (2020: 2.42 per cent (2019:cent; 2019: 2.25 per cent; 2018: 2.74 per cent).
Average balances are based on daily averages for the principal areas of the Group’s banking activities with monthly or less frequent averages used elsewhere. Management believes that the interest rate trends are substantially the same as they would be if all balances were averaged on the same basis.
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis between UK and non-UK activities is not provided.
2029

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME – VOLUME AND RATE ANALYSIS – CONTINUING OPERATIONS
The following table allocates changes in net interest income between volume, rate and their combined impact for 2021 compared with 2020 and for 2020 compared with 2019 and for 2019 compared with 2018.2019.
2020 compared with 2019
increase/(decrease)
2019 compared with 2018
increase/(decrease)
2021 compared with 2020
increase/(decrease)
2020 compared with 2019
increase/(decrease)
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
£m£m£m£m
Interest incomeInterest incomeInterest income
At amortised cost:At amortised cost:At amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks(155)57 (175)(37)(193)(100)(119)26 
Loans and advances to customers(1,923)274 (2,158)(39)232 285 (52)(1)
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements(44)37 (61)(20)(155)57 (175)(37)
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements(1,024)207 (1,212)(19)(1,923)274 (2,158)(39)
Debt securitiesDebt securities(26)(4)(23)1 52 18 27 Debt securities(18)(9)(10)1 (26)(4)(23)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(128)13 (137)(4)(209)(121)(109)21 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income140 (1)141  (128)13 (137)(4)
Total banking book interest incomeTotal banking book interest income(2,232)340 (2,493)(79)(118)82 (253)53 Total banking book interest income(946)234 (1,142)(38)(2,232)340 (2,493)(79)
Total interest income on financial assets at fair value through profit or lossTotal interest income on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss(47)(53)21 (15)(361)(330)(130)99 Total interest income on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss(10)(21)56 (45)(47)(53)21 (15)
Total interest incomeTotal interest income(2,279)287 (2,472)(94)(479)(248)(383)152 Total interest income(956)213 (1,086)(83)(2,279)287 (2,472)(94)
Interest expenseInterest expense

Interest expense

Deposits by banksDeposits by banks(5)8 (12)(1)— Deposits by banks(16)(23)10 (3)(5)(12)(1)
Customer depositsCustomer deposits(784)2 (785)(1)57 (92)156 (7)Customer deposits(884)34 (894)(24)(784)(785)(1)
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreementsLiabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements(184)45 (199)(30)56 (2)58 — Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements(95)(36)(85)26 (184)45 (199)(30)
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue285 1 283 1 410 — 411 (1)Debt securities in issue(15)(145)160 (30)285 283 
Lease liabilitiesLease liabilities 1 (1) 38 38 — — Lease liabilities(9)(3)(6) — (1)— 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities(94)217 (252)(59)(151)(124)(31)Subordinated liabilities(193)(24)(174)5 (94)217 (252)(59)
Total banking book interest expenseTotal banking book interest expense(782)274 (966)(90)416 (176)596 (4)Total banking book interest expense(1,212)(197)(989)(26)(782)274 (966)(90)
Total interest expense on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossTotal interest expense on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(44)(33)(14)3 (347)(366)72 (53)Total interest expense on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(13)(35)33 (11)(44)(33)(14)
Total interest expenseTotal interest expense(826)241 (980)(87)69 (542)668 (57)Total interest expense(1,225)(232)(956)(37)(826)241 (980)(87)
2130

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK OVERVIEW
EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL
Our approach to risk
Lloyds Bank Group adopts the Lloyds Banking Group enterprise risk management framework supplemented by additional management and control activities to address the Lloyds Bank Group's specific requirements.
The Group seeks to protect our customers, colleagues, the Group, investors and society, while enabling sustainable growth. This is achieved throughEmploying informed risk decision-making and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.culture; striving to protect the Group and its stakeholders.
A prudent approach to risk is fundamental to our business model and drives our participation choices.
The risk management section from pages 2436 to 7489 provides an in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, including the approach to stress testing,risk appetite, risk governance, committee structure, risk appetitestress testing and detailed analysis of the principal risk categories including the framework by which these risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Our enterprise risk management framework
Risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored using Lloyds Banking Group'sGroup’s comprehensive enterprise risk management framework. Thisframework, that applies to Lloyds Bank Group, is the foundation for the delivery of effective risk control. It enables proactive identification, active management and monitoring of the Group’s risks, which is supported by our One Risk and Control Self-Assessment approach.
The Group'sGroup’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated when needed to ensure they remain fully in line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The Board is responsible for approving the Group'sGroup’s Board risk appetite statement at least annually. Board-level risk appetite metrics are augmented by further sub-Board level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits. Regular close monitoring and comprehensive reporting to all levels of management and the Board ensures appetite limits are maintained and subject to stress analysis at a risk type and portfolio level, as appropriate.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board down to individuals. Senior executives are supported by a committee basedcommittee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and enable effective decision making.Board engagement and decision-making. More information on our Risk committees can be found on pages 28 to 29.
Simplified approach to managing risks
Over the course of the year, there has been a strong focus on simplifying and enhancing the enterprise risk management framework. A One Risk and Control Self-Assessment (One RCSA) approach to managing risks across Lloyds Banking Group has been adopted, which supports the proactive identification of risks to customers and the Group’s business objectives, as well as enabling a strong control framework. More information on One RCSA is available on page 26.pages 40 to 41.
lbk-20211231_g3.jpg
Risk culture and the customer
AFollowing the successful transition between the previous, interim and new Lloyds Banking Group Chief Executives, a transparent risk culture resonatescontinues to resonate across the organisation and is supported by the Board and its tone from the top.
Risk management requires all colleagues to play their part, with individuals taking responsibility for their actions.
Within our approach there is a strong focus on building The Group aims to support this through ongoing investment in infrastructure and sustaining long-term
relationships with customers through the economic cycle.developing colleagues’ capabilities.
Senior Managementmanagement articulate the core risk values to which the Group aspires, based on the Group's conservativeGroup’s prudent business model prudentand approach to risk management andwith the Board'sBoard’s guidance.
As aThe Group we areis open, honest and transparent with colleagues working in collaboration with business areas to:
supportSupport effective risk management and provide constructive challenge
shareShare lessons learned and understand root causes when things go wrong
considerConsider horizon risks and opportunities
The Group aims to maintain a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers through the economic cycle.

31

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Connectivity of risks and our strategic risk management framework
The unprecedented events of this year haveCOVID-19 has demonstrated how individual risks in aggregate, through their interconnectivity, can place significant pressure on the Group'sGroup’s strategy, business model and performance. It is essential that we not only manage our individual risks, but understand how emerging andIn response to these unprecedented events, a new strategic risks are connected, and how they impact either existing principal risks or create new risks. By doing so we can ensure we continuerisk management framework was approved.
Extensive work has been undertaken in 2021 to respond dynamically and protect our customers and support our colleagues and stakeholders.
Connectivity of risks is very much at the forefrontbuild a deeper analytical understanding of the Group’s thinkingkey strategic risk themes and additional workrisk connectivity. The Group is being launchedcommitted to advancing these capabilities in 20212022, while further integrating strategic risk into Group-wide business planning, placing it at the heart of our strategic priorities and Group-wide risk management.
The risks can be defined as:
Principal: The Board-approved enterprise-wide risk categories, including strategic risk, used to further embed this intomonitor and report the risk exposures posing the greatest impact to the Group.
Strategic: A principal risk arising from:
A failure to understand the potential impact of strategic responses on existing risk types
Incorrect assumptions about internal or external operating environments
Inappropriate strategic responses and business plans
Emerging: A future internal or external event or trend, which could have a material positive or adverse impact on the Group and our risk management framework.
customers, but where the probability, timescale and/or materiality may be difficult to accurately assess.
lbk-20201231_g3.jpg
22

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
LLOYDS BANK GROUP’S PRINCIPAL RISKS
2020Despite a resilient recovery, 2021 has been aanother year of significant uncertainty, with COVID-19 accelerating broad structural changes, including the spreadways of COVID-19working and its impact onimpacts to global and domestic economies and the UK's exit from the European Union.economies.
COVID-19 has hadcontinued to have a significant impact on all risk types in 2020.2021. Understanding and managing its impacts dynamically has beenremained a major area of focus. The Group has responded quickly to the challenges faced, putting in place risk mitigation strategies and refining its investment and strategic plans.
All of the Group'sGroup’s principal risks, which are outlined onin this page,section, are reported regularly to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
As part of a review of the Group’s risk categories, governance risk is no longer a principal risk and is now classified as a secondary risk category. A detailed review of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework is planned for 2022, which may result in further changes to our principal risks.
The risk management section from pages 2436 to 3089 provides a more in-depth picture of how each principal risk is managed within the Group.
Key focus areas in 2020Risk trends: è Stable risk é Increased risk ê Decreased risk y New risk embedding
Climate - New
The Group recognises the evolving pace of Climate Risk and has adopted a comprehensive approach to embedding thisMarket risk within its enterprise risk management framework. This includes the creation of a new principal risk as well as its integration into our existing principal risks. Work has also continued to develop scenario modelling and other analytical tools and to increase the level of external disclosure to further align to the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations.
Marketè
The Group’s structural hedge nominal balancehas increased to £235 billion (2020: £181 billion (2019: £173 billion), provides protection against margin compression caused by falling interest rates. In addition, customer deposits have seen mostly due to a significant growth in 2020 which creates near term interest rate exposure. Customercustomer deposits. Both customer behaviour and hedging of these balances are reviewed regularly.regularly to ensure near-term interest rate exposure is managed.
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes have seen an improvement in IAS19IAS 19 accounting surplus to £1.6£4.3 billion, (2019: £0.5(2020: £1.5 billion), as a result of Deficit Reduction Contributions and greater than expected. This is due to strong asset returns, an increase in the discount rate and deficit reduction contributions, partially offset by higher gilt yields and inflation.
Key mitigating actions:
Structural hedge programmes implemented to stabilise earnings
Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset and liability matching is undertaken
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes continue to monitor their credit allocation and longevity hedge as well as the impact of the Retail Price Index (RPI) reform announced by the Chancellor of the Exchequerhedges in November 2020.place against nominal rate and inflation movements
Credit risk ê
AThe Group continued to actively support its customers throughout 2021, with a range of measures have been deployed to help support customers, including around 1.3 millionflexible options and payment holidays, c.£12 billion of additional government support schemeas well as lending through the Bounce Back Loan (BBLS) and Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan (CBILS) schemes, together with liquidity facilities for larger clients.
UK Government support schemes. This support, together withalongside the wide array ofother public policy interventions, such ashas contributed to the job retention scheme, has limited the increaseeconomic recovery in unemployment,2021 and helped to suppresskeep credit defaults and business failures.failures at low levels.
The Group has responded dynamicallyimproved economic outlook was a key driver of the 2021 impairment credit of £1,318 million, which compares to mitigate and address credit risk, with specific focus on higher risk segments, sectors and
counterparties, as well as undertaking extensive preparation to support the expected increase in customers who may experience financial difficulty.
The 2020 full year impairment charge of £4,060 million (2019: £1,362taken in 2020 in light of anticipated losses resulting from the pandemic. Although reduced in 2021, the Group still holds appropriate customer related expected credit loss allowances of £3,998 million (2020: £6,127 million) reflects the deteriorating economic outlook, with reserves built.
Key mitigating actions:
Prudent, through-the-cycle risk appetite
Robust risk assessment, models and credit sanctioning
Sector and asset class concentrations closely monitored and controlled
Group-wide Road to Recovery programme established to manage and support increases in anticipation of an increase in losses during 2021 as unemployment increases and more business failures are seen.businesses experiencing financial difficulties

32

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Funding and liquidity risk ê
The Group maintained its strongrobust funding and liquidity position throughout 2020. Customer deposits increased significantly as spending reduced and customers deposited government lending scheme balances. During2021.
Ahead of the year, the Group repaid all outstanding amountsclosure of its Term Funding Scheme (TFS) and Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) drawings and drew £13.7 billion from the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME).
Capital
The CET1 ratio increased in October 2021, the Group drew additional funds, taking the total amount outstanding to 15.51 per cent (14.41 per cent excluding IFRS 9 transitional relief) from 14.3 per cent£30 billion as at 31 December 2019,2021, facilitating a significant reduction in money market and wholesale funding.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements
Significant customer deposit base, driven by inflows to trusted brands
Capital risk ê
The Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to 16.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year with the adverse impactand a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment charge partially mitigatedcredit through profits.
The implementation of regulatory changes on 1 January 2022 reduced the increase in IFRS9 transitional relief. CET1 capital ratio to 14.1 per cent which remains above internal risk appetite levels and minimum regulatory capital requirements.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group has a capital position benefited frommanagement framework that includes the introductionsetting of capital risk appetite and capital planning and stress testing activities
The Group monitors early warning indicators and maintains a Capital Contingency Framework as part of the revisedLloyds Banking Group Recovery Plan which are designed to identify emerging capital treatment of intangible software assets and lower RWAs and excess expected losses. The resultant increases in capital were offset in part by the accrual for foreseeable dividends and other movements.concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken, if needed
Lloyds Bank Group’s capital requirements have reduced in 2020 due to lower Pillar 2A requirements and the reduction in the UK countercyclical capital buffer rate in response to the impact of COVID-19. The Group therefore has significant headroom to absorb further potential losses and to continue to support households and businesses as they recover from the COVID-19 pandemic.
Change/execution risk è
The Change/change/execution risk profile has remained stable inwith proactive reprioritisation and management of the year. The Group’s change portfolio was reprioritised at pacecontinuing through 2021. Focus has remained on the ongoing evolution and strengthening of the control framework and change capability required to support criticalthe Group’s business and COVID-19 related activities. Enhanced, targeted control monitoring was implemented to ensure safe delivery of change during the year.technology transformation plans.
ConductKey mitigating actions:
The Group has adapted quickly to the impactsContinued evolution and enhancement of the pandemic, providing significantGroup change policy, method and control environment
Measurement and reporting of change/execution risk
Providing sufficient skilled resources to safely deliver and embed the change portfolio and support future transformation plans
Conduct risk ê
Overall improvement in conduct risk as a result of the Group’s continued support to customers impacted customers. Comprehensive preparations have been undertaken to help identify and furtherby COVID-19, with focus on outcomes for customers with UK Government support thoseschemes, treating customers in financial difficulty.difficulty fairly and working through legacy issues.
DataKey mitigating actions:
The GroupRobust conduct risk framework in place to support delivery of fair customer outcomes, market integrity and competition requirements
Active engagement with regulatory bodies and key stakeholders to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus continues to improve itsmeet evolving stakeholder expectations
Data risk è
Investment continues to be made to enhance the maturity of data risk management, data capabilities inand focus on the end-to-end management of data risk, with an improvement seenincluding our suppliers.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivered a data strategy and enhanced capability in the regular half yearly capability assessment. Areasdata management and privacy, assurance of improvement include delivery of a newsuppliers and data riskcontrols and control library, embeddingprocesses
Embedded data by
design and data ethics principles into the data science lifecycle increasing capabilities and data culture.
GovernancePeople risk è
Governance riskIn 2021, there has remained stable, despite the need for accelerated decision-making and a significant increase in the amount of remote working, together with a number changes to GEC and Board members throughout the year. Ensuring appropriate and efficient governance remains a key priority.
People
2020 has seen increasedbeen continued pressure on colleague workloads and further significant changes to ways of working, as colleagues who worked from home during the pandemic transition into a workstyle based on their role. Colleague feedback has been provided via the annual colleague survey, and work is underway to address the key themes identified.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people with up to 50,000 colleagues working from home. Improved colleague sentiment demonstrates that the extensive support measures deployed by the Group,required capabilities, together with a continuedimplementation of rigorous succession planning for our senior leaders
Continued focus on colleague wellbeingthe Group’s culture by developing and resilience, are helping to mitigate these risks.delivering initiatives that reinforce appropriate behaviours

33

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience risk ê
BusinessDespite ongoing heightened risks from COVID-19, business continuity plans have proved resilient, with particular attention appliedremained resilient. Policy statements published by the regulators in March 2021 have driven further activity to heightened risksenhance the existing approach to operational resilience. Technology resilience remains a key area of focus.
Key mitigating actions:
Refreshed operational resilience strategy to deliver against new regulation and improve the Group’s ability to respond to incidents while delivering key services to customers
Investment in technology improvements, including enhancements to the supply chain.resilience of systems that support critical business processes
Operational risk è
Despite anticipated heightenedAgainst the backdrop of COVID-19, economic uncertainty and changes in senior management throughout the year, the operational risks in cyber, fraud and technology, the volume of operational loss eventsrisk profile has remained broadly consistentstable with operational losses in 2020 comparedline with previous years. Cyber and security, technology and sourcing continue to 2019.be the most material operational risk areas.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherent risks faced
The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance
Model risk é
Model risk has increased due to the nature and uncertainty of the economic outlook.remains above pre-pandemic levels. The effect of government ledgovernment-led customer support initiatives haveschemes weakened established relationships between model inputs and outputs, reducingand there remains a reliance on the ability to forecast using models alone. While underlyinguse of judgement, particularly in the areas of forecasting and impairment. However, recent months have seen more stable patterns for model outputs, and model drivers are expected to remain valid in the longer term, year-end impairment reporting containsterm.
In common with the rest of the industry, changes required to capital models following new regulations will create a greater elementtemporary increase in the risk relating to these models during the period of governed judgement to reflect current conditions.transition.
Key mitigating actions:
The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the Group
Regulatory and legal risk è
Regulatory engagement through 2021 has focused on the Group’s response to COVID-19, strategic transformation and regulatory initiatives. Proactive engagement on emerging focus areas has helped the regulatory risk has beenprofile remain broadly stable, despite the previously announced regulatory fine relating to the past communication of historical home insurance renewals.
Legal risk continues to be impacted by a small number of instances of non-compliancethe evolving UK legal and implementation of regulatory change, requiring forbearance from regulators. Forbearance requirements have beenlandscape due to the re-prioritisation of resource to support the provision of essential services to customers and to respond to new regulatory requirements, such as payment holidays. Legal risk has been impacted by the UK’s exit from the EU in particular continuedand other changing regulatory standards as well as uncertainty ofarising from the current and future UK legallitigation landscape.
Key mitigating actions:
Lloyds Banking Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to Lloyds Banking Group risk appetite
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory financial services framework.requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance
Strategic risk y
Strategic risk is a significant source of risk for the Group, influencing the Group’s strategy, business model, performance and risk profile.
Significant work has been undertaken during 2021 to understand the risk implications of the Group’s strategy and the key drivers of strategic risk. These are outlined in more detail on the following pages.
Key mitigating actions:
Considering the strategic implications of emerging trends and addressing them through our strategy
Integration of strategic risk into business planning process and embedding into day-to-day risk management
Climate risk y
The Group continued to embed climate risk into its activities, including undertaking detailed analysis of its portfolios and the pathways required to reduce the emissions that the Group finances. This included deep dives into sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change.
The Group has continued to develop scenario modelling capabilities and Lloyds Banking Group completed Part I of the Bank of England’s 2021 Biennial Exploratory Scenario on the Financial Risks for Climate Change.
Key mitigating actions:
Established Lloyds Banking Group climate risk policy in place
Ongoing development of climate assessment tools and methodologies
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board
Initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks undertaken as part of Lloyds Banking Group's financial planning process
Continued progress against the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations, enhancing our climate related financial disclosures
34

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
EMERGING RISKS
Horizon scanning and emerging risks are important considerations for the Group, enabling our business to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities and respond through our strategic planning and long-term risk frameworkmitigation framework.
Internal working groups have been established to regularly scan the horizon and identify emerging risks. This is supplemented by consultation with external experts, to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
Progress has been made this year on a key prioritydata-driven approach, piloting a methodology for interrogating industry news and other external data sources, using available technology to further expand our insight. It is intended to develop this further in 2022, to incorporate more sophisticated technology and innovation practices.
In many cases, the Group.Group’s most notable emerging risks are aligned with the themes identified. These emerging risks themes raise questions in respect of our participation choices, HR policies, recruitment and retention strategies in response to the changing socio-economic, competitive and technological landscape.
1Includes a 0.5 per cent benefit followingThe emerging risks that the implementationGroup has monitored during 2021 are outlined in more detail in pages 42 to 44 of the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets which the PRA is proposing to reverse.
risk management section.
2335

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK MANAGEMENT
All narrative and quantitative tables are unaudited unless otherwise stated. The audited information is required to comply with the requirements of relevant International Financial Reporting Standards.
Risk management is at the heart of Helping Britain RecoverProsper and building the UK's preferred financial partner.creating a more sustainable and inclusive future for people and businesses.
Our mission is to protect our customers, shareholders, colleagues and the Group, while enabling sustainable growth in targeted segments. This is achieved through informed risk decisions and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.
The risk overview (pages 2231 to 23)35) provides a summary of risk management within the Group and the key focus areas for 2020,2021, including the significant impact that COVID-19 has hadcontinues to have on all principal risks faced by the Group. The risk overview also highlights the importance of the connectivity of principal, emerging and strategic risks.risks and how they are embedded into the Group's strategic risk management framework.
This full risk management section provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk and a full analysis of the principal risk categories (pages 3044 to 74)89), the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Each principal risk category is described and managed using the following standard headings: definition, exposures, measurement, mitigation and monitoring.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK
The Group operates a prudent approach to risk with rigorous management controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function (Risk division), a robust control framework is maintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks, support sustainable growth within the Group's risk appetite, and to drive and inform good risk reward decision-making.
To meet ring-fencing requirements, core UK retail and commercial financial services and ancillary retail activities are ring-fenced from other activities of the Lloyds Banking Group. Lloyds BankThe Group has adopted the enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) of the Parent Group. Lloyds BankBanking Group hasand supplemented the Parent Group enterprise risk management framework with additional risk management relatedtailored practices to ring fencing requirements as required. The Parent Group’s Governance framework, which is tailored to meetaddress the entity specific needs of Lloyds Bank Group, is adopted by Lloyds Bank Group to ensure effective corporate governance within Lloyds Bank Group.ring-fencing requirements.
The Group’s ERMF is structured to align with the industry-accepted internal control framework standards.
The ERMF applies to every area of the business and covers all types of risk. It is reviewed, updated and approved by the Board at least annually to reflect any changes in the nature of the Group's business and external regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The ERMF provides the Group with an effective mechanism for developing and embedding risk policies and risk management strategies which are aligned with the risks faced by its businesses. It also seeks to facilitate effective communication on these matters across the Group.
Role of the Lloyds Bank Group Board and senior management
Key responsibilities of the Board and senior management include:
approvalApproval of the ERMF and Board risk appetite
approvalApproval of Group-wide risk principles and policies
theThe cascade of delegated authority (for example to Board sub- committeessub-committees and the Group Chief Executive)
effectiveEffective oversight of risk management consistent with risk appetite
Risk appetite
The Group's approach to setting, governing, embedding and monitoring risk appetite is detailed in the risk appetite framework, a key component of the ERMF.
Risk appetite is defined within the Group as ‘thethe amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate’tolerate in delivering its strategy.
Group strategy and risk appetite are developed in tandem. Business planning aims to optimise value within the Group's risk appetite parameters and deliver on its promise to Help Britain Prosper.
The Group’s risk appetite statement details the risk parameters within which the Group operates. The statement forms part of the Group's control framework and is embedded into its policies, authorities and limits, to guide decision-making and risk management. Group risk appetite is regularly reviewed and refreshed to ensure appropriate coverage across our principal risks and any emerging risks, and to align with internal or external change.
The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s Board risk appetite statement at least annually. Group Board-level metrics are augmented by further sub-Board-level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits.
Group risk appetite includes theThe following areas:
Climate: areas are currently included in the Group takes action to identify, manage and mitigate its climateBoard risk and support the Group and its customers in transitioning to a low carbon economyappetite:
Market: the the Group has robusteffective controls in place to identify and manage its inherentthe market risk inherentin our customer and does not engage in any proprietary trading, reflecting the customerclient focused nature of the Group’s activities
Credit: the Group has a conservative and well balanced credit portfolio through the economic cycle, generating an appropriate return on equity, in line with the Group’s target return on equity in aggregate
Funding and liquidity: the Group maintains a prudent liquidity profile and a balance sheet structure that limits its reliance on potentially volatile sources of funding
Capital: the Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency to achieve financial resilience and market confidence
Change/execution: the Group has limited appetite for negative impacts on customers, colleagues, or the Group as a result of change activity
Conduct: the Group delivers fair outcomes for its customers
Data: the Group has zero appetite for materialdata related regulatory breaches and material legal incidentsfines or enforcement actions
People: the Group leads responsibly and proficiently, manages people resource effectively, supports and develops colleague skills and talent, creates and nurtures the right culture and meets legal and regulatory obligations related to its people
2436

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience: the Group has a limited appetite for disruption to services to customers and stakeholders from significant unexpected events
Operational: the Group has robust controls in place to manage operational losses, reputational events and regulatory breaches. It identifies and assesses emerging risks and acts to mitigate these
Model: material models are performing in line with expectations
Regulatory and legal: the Group interprets and complies with all relevant regulation and all applicable laws (including codes of conduct which could have legal implications) and/or legal obligations
Climate: the Group takes action to identify, manage and mitigate its climate risk and support the Group and its customers in transitioning to a low carbon economy
Governance frameworks
The Group’s approach to risk is foundedbased on a robust control framework and a strong risk management culture which are the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management and guide the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board to individuals through the management hierarchy. Senior executives are supported where required by a committee basedcommittee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and support effective decision-making.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated where needed to ensure they remain fully in-linein line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.
Board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in Group-wide risk issues at Group Executive Committee level, ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed and remediation plans are initiated where required.
Line managers are directly accountable for identifying and managing risks in their individual businesses, ensuring that business decisions strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward and are consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.
Clear responsibilities and accountabilities for risk are defined across the Group through a three lines of defence model which ensures effective independent oversight and assurance in respect of key decisions.
The risk committeeRisk Committee governance framework is outlined on page 27.39.
Three lines of defence model
The ERMF is implemented through a ‘three lines of defence’ model which defines clear responsibilities and accountabilities and ensures effective independent oversight and assurance activities take place covering key decisions.
Business lines (first line) have primary responsibility for risk decisions, identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling risks within their areas of accountability. They are required to establish effective governance and control frameworks for their business to be compliant with Lloyds Banking Group policy requirements, to maintain appropriate risk management skills, mechanisms and toolkits, and to act within Group risk appetite parameters set and approved by the Board.
Risk division (second line) is a centralised function, headed by the Chief Risk Officer, providing oversight and independent constructive challenge to the effectiveness of risk decisions taken by business management, providing proactive advice and guidance, reviewing, challenging and reporting on the risk profile of the Group and ensuring that mitigating actions are appropriate.
It also has a key role in promoting the implementation of a strategic approach to risk management reflecting the risk appetite and ERMF agreed by the Board that encompasses:
overseeingOverseeing embedding of effective risk management processes
transparent,Transparent, focused risk monitoring and reporting
provisionProvision of expert and high quality advice and guidance to the Board, executives and management on strategic issues and horizon scanning, including pending regulatory changes
aA constructive dialogue with the first line through provision of advice, development of common methodologies, understanding, education, training, and development of new risk management tools
The primary role of Group Internal Audit (third line) is to help the Board and executive management protect the assets, reputation and sustainability of the Group. The internal audit functionGroup Internal Audit is led by the Group Chief Internal Auditor. The internal audit functionGroup Internal Audit provides independent assurance to the Audit Committee and the Board through performing reviews and engaging with committees and executive management, providing opinion, challenge and informal advice on risk and the state of the control environment. The internal audit functionGroup Internal Audit is a single independent internal audit function, reporting to the Board Audit Committee of Lloyds Bankingthe Group and the Board Audit Committees of the key subsidiaries.
Risk and control cycle from identification to reporting
To allow senior management to make informed risk decisions, the business follows a continuous risk management approach which includes producing appropriate, accurate and focused risk reporting. The risk and control cycle sets out how this should be approached, with the appropriate controls and processes in place.approached. This cycle, from identification to reporting, ensures consistency and is intended to manage and mitigate the risks impacting the Group.
The process for risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the overall framework for risk governance. Risk identification processes are forward-looking to ensure emerging risks are identified. Risks are captured and measured using robust and consistent quantification methodologies. The measurement of risks includes the application of stress testing and scenario analysis, and considers whether relevant controls are in place before risks are incurred.
Identified risks are reported on a monthly basis or as frequently as necessary to the appropriate committee. The extent of the risk is compared to the overall risk appetite as well as specific limits or triggers. When thresholds are breached, committee minutes are clear on the actions and time frames required to resolve the breach and bring risk within tolerances. There is a clear process for escalation of risks and risk events.
2537

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
All key controls are recorded and assessed on a regular basis, in response to triggers or minimum annually. Control assessments consider both the adequacy of the design and operating effectiveness. Where a control is not effective, the root cause is established and action plans implemented to improve control design or performance. Control Effectivenesseffectiveness against all residual risks isare aggregated by risk category and reported and monitored via the monthly Consolidated Risk Report (CRR). The CRR is reviewed and independently challenged by the Risk Divisiondivision and provided to the Risk Divisiondivision Executive Committee and Group Risk Committee. On an annual basis, a point in time assessment is made for control effectiveness against each risk category and across sub-groups.subgroups. The CRR data is the primary source used for this point in timepoint-in-time assessment and a year on yearyear-on-year comparison on control effectiveness is reported to the Board.
One Risk and Control Self-Assessment (One RCSA) is part of the Group’s RiskGroup's risk and Control Strategycontrol strategy to deliver a stronger risk culture and simplified risk and control environment. The three lines of defence have worked together to identifyFollowing improvements made to the Group’sGroup's approach to risk management. Following pilot activity, this new approach (One RCSA) is being adoptedmanagement, implementation was completed at the end of 2021 across Divisional and Sub-Group Risk Profiles. One RCSA will continue to embed across the Group through a phased implemented plan. All aspects of the 2020 Plan for implementation of One RCSA have been delivered. The 2021 plans capture the remaining highest risks to customersas risk practices, data quality, culture and the business, and the Board will continue to review progress with embedding the cultural change and improving the risk and control environment.capability mature.
Risk culture
Based on the Group’s prudent business model, prudent approach to risk management, and guided by the Board, the senior management articulates the core risk values to which the Group aspires, and sets the tone at the top. Senior Managementmanagement establishes a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers, through the economic cycle. Lloyds Banking Group’s Code of Responsibility reinforces colleagues’ accountability for the risks they take and their responsibility to prioritise their customers’ needs.
Risk resources and capabilities
Appropriate mechanisms are in place to avoid over-reliance on key personnel or system/technical expertise within the Group. Adequate resources are in place to serve customers both under normal working conditions and in times of stress, and monitoring procedures are in place to ensure that the level of available resource can be increased if required. Colleagues undertake appropriate training to ensure they have the skills and knowledge necessary to enable them to deliver fair outcomes for customers.
There is ongoing investment in risk systems and models alongside the Group’s investment in customer and product systems and processes. This drives improvements in risk data quality, aggregation and reporting leading to effective and efficient risk decisions.
Financial reporting risk management systems and internal controls
The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting process which are designed to:
ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied, transactions are recorded accurately, and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly stated
enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements
enable certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer relating to maintenance of appropriate tax accounting and in accordance with the 2009 Finance Act
ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements (for example UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the US Sarbanes Oxley Act)
ensure ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting
ensure an accurate view of the Group’s performance to allow the Board and senior management to appropriately manage the affairs and strategy of the business as a whole
Risk decision-making and reporting
Risk analysis and reporting enables better understanding of risks and returns, supporting the identification of opportunities as well as better management of risks.
An aggregate view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, and performance against risk appetite, including the CRR, is reported to and discussed monthly at the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring Fenced-Banks Risk CommitteeCommittees with regular reporting to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
Rigorous stress testing exercises are carried out to assess the impact of a range of adverse scenarios with different probabilities and severities to inform strategic planning.
The Chief Risk Officer regularly informs the Board Risk Committee of the aggregate risk profile and has direct access to the Chair and members of Board Risk Committee.
Financial reporting risk management systems and internal controls
The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting process which are designed to:
Ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied, transactions are recorded accurately, and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly stated
Enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements
Enable certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer relating to maintenance of appropriate tax accounting and in accordance with the 2009 Finance Act
Ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements (for example UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act)
Ensure ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting
Ensure an accurate view of the Group’s performance to allow the Board and senior management to appropriately manage the affairs and strategy of the business as a whole
The Audit Committee reviews the quality and acceptability of Lloyds Bank Group's financial disclosures. In addition, the Lloyds Banking Group Disclosure Committee assists the Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer in fulfilling their disclosure responsibilities under relevant listing and other regulatory and legal requirements.

2638

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK GOVERNANCE
The risk governance structure below is integral to effective risk management across Lloyds Banking Group, including Lloyds Bank Group. To meet ring-fencing requirements the Boards and Board Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks (Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc) as well as relevant Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks will sit concurrently, referred to as the Aligned Board Model. The Risk division is appropriately represented on key committees to ensure that risk management is discussed in these meetings. This structure outlines the flow and escalation of risk information and reporting from business areas and the Risk division to the Group Executive Committee and Board. Conversely, strategic direction and guidance is cascaded down from the Board and Group Executive Committee.
The Company Secretariat supports senior and Board-level committees, and supports the Chairs in agenda planning. This gives a further line of escalation outside the three lines of defence.
Risk governance structure
lbk-20211231_g4.jpg
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Customer First Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks SustainabilityNet Zero Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations CommitteeCommittees
Risk Division Committees and Governance
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group Fraud and FinancialRing-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Capital Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance Committee
Ring-Fence Compliance Committee


2739

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Board, Executive and Risk Committees
The Group’s risk governance structure strengthens risk evaluation and management, while also positioning the Group to manage the changing regulatory environment in an efficient and effective manner.
Assisted by the Lloyds Banking Group Board Risk and Audit Committees, the Board approves Lloyds Bankthe Group’s overall governance, risk and control frameworks and risk appetite. Refer to the Corporate Governancecorporate governance section on pages 7792 to 82,98, for further information on Board committees.Committees.
The sub-group, divisional and functional risk committees review and recommend sub-group, divisional and functional risk appetite and monitor local risk profile and adherence to appetite.
Executive and Risk Committees
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive is supported by the following:
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)Assists the Group Chief Executive in exercising their authority in relation to material matters having strategic, cross-business area or Group-wide implications.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)Responsible for the development, implementation and effectiveness of theLloyds Banking Group’s enterprise risk management framework, the clear articulation of the Group’s risk appetite and monitoring and reviewing of the Group’s aggregate risk exposures, control environment and concentrations of risk.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)Responsible for the strategic direction of the Group’s assets and liabilities and the profit and loss implications of balance sheet management actions. The committee reviews and determines the appropriate allocation of capital, funding and liquidity, and market risk resources and makes appropriate trade-offs between risk and reward.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Customer First CommitteesProvides a Group-wide perspective of customer experience and the governing body of customer plans and targets including governing targets and plans, oversight of customer outcomes and experience, and learning through best practice externally and leveraging Group memberships and partnerships.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management CommitteesLeads and shapes the Group’s approach to cost management, ensuring appropriate governance and process over Group-wide cost management activities and effective control of the Group’s cost base.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review CommitteesProvides senior management oversight, challenge and accountability in connection with the Group’s engagement with conduct review matters as agreed with the Group Chief Executive.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People CommitteesSupporting Lloyds Banking Group's People &and Property Director in exercising their responsibilities in relation to the Group’s people and colleague policies, overseeing the development of and monitoring adherence to the remuneration policy, oversees compliance with Senior ManagerManagers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and other regulatory requirements, monitors colleague engagement surveys, progress of the Group towards its culture targets and oversees the implementation of action plans.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks SustainabilityNet Zero CommitteesRecommends and implements the strategy and plans for delivering the Group’s aspiration to be viewed as a trusted responsible business as part of the purpose of Helping Britain Prosper, reporting to the GEC, GRC, Responsible Business Committee where appropriate on material sustainability related risk and opportunities across the Group; and recommending to the GEC and Responsible Business Committee the Group's Responsible Business Report and Helping Britain Prosper Plan.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations CommitteeResponsible for providing recommendations regarding performance adjustment, including the individual risk-adjustment process and risk-adjusted performance assessment, and making final decisions on behalf of the Group on the appropriate course of action relating to conduct breaches, under the formal scope of the SM&CR.
In addition, the Strategic Review 2021 Forum provides strategic deep dives across priority areas to support the Group Chief Executive and accountable executives in monitoring strategic progress and challenges in focus areas.
The Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committee is supported through escalation and ongoing reporting by business area risk committees, cross-divisional committees addressing specific matters of Group-wide significance and the following second line of defence Risk committees which ensure effective oversight of risk management:
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk CommitteeResponsible for monitoring, oversight and challenge of market risk exposures across the Group. Reviews and proposes changes to the market risk management framework, and reviews the adequacy of data quality needed for managing market risks. It is also responsible for escalating issues of Group level significance to GEC level (usually via GALCO) relating to the management of the Group's market risks.
Lloyds Banking Group Fraud and FinancialRing-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention CommitteeBrings together accountable stakeholders and subject matter experts to ensure that the development and application of fraud and financialeconomic crime risk management complies with the Group's Strategic Aims,strategic aims, Group Corporate Responsibility,corporate responsibility, Group Risk Appetiterisk appetite and Group Fraudeconomic crime prevention (fraud, anti-money laundering, anti-bribery and Financial Crime (AML, Anti-bribery and Sanctions) policies.sanctions) policy. It provides direction and appropriate focus on priorities to enhance the Group's fraud and financialeconomic crime risk management capabilities in line with business and customer objectives while aligning to the Group's target operating model.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for overseeing, reviewing, challenging and recommending to GEC/Board Risk Committee/Board for Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Bank (i) annual internal stress Tests, (ii) all Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and any other regulatory stress tests, (iii) annual liquidity stress tests, (iv) reverse stress tests, (v) Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment (ILAA), (vi) Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), (vii) Pillar 3, (viii) recovery/resolution plans, and (ix) relevant ad hoc stress tests or other analysis as and when required by the Committee.
2840

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for overseeing, reviewing, challenging and recommending to GEC / Board Risk Committee / Board for Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Bank (i) Annual Internal Stress Tests, (ii) All Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) / European Banking Authority (EBA) and any other regulatory stress tests, (iii) Annual Liquidity Stress Tests, (iv) Reverse Stress Tests, (v) Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment (ILAA), (vi) Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), (vii) Pillar 3, (viii) Recovery / Resolution Plans, and (ix) relevant ad hoc Stress Tests or other analysis as and when required by the Committee.
Lloyds Banking GroupBanks Capital Risk CommitteeResponsible for providing oversight of all relevant capital matters within the Lloyds Banking Group, Ring-Fenced Bank and material subsidiaries, including latest capital position and plans, capital risk appetite proposals, Pillar 2 developments (including stress testing), Recoveryrecovery and Resolutionresolution matters and the impact of regulatory reforms and developments specific to capital.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance CommitteeResponsible for supporting the Model Risk and Validation Director in fulfilling their responsibilities, from a Group-wide perspective, under the Lloyds Banking Group Model Governance Policymodel governance policy through provision of debate, challenge and support of decisions. The committee will be held as required to facilitate approval of models, model changes and model related items as required by Model Policy,model policy, including items related to the governance framework as a whole and its application.
Ring-Fence Compliance CommitteeThis Committeecommittee is designed to provide executive sponsorship and strategic direction to ongoing Perimeter Compliance,perimeter compliance, the closure and remediation of breaches, monitoring and reporting of new breaches and associated governance and delivery enhancements to the Ring-Fencing Compliance Risk Framework.
CAPITAL STRESS TESTING
Overview
Stress testing is recognised as a key risk management tool by the Boards, senior management, the businesses and the Risk and Finance functions of all parts of the Group and its legal entities. It is fully embedded in the planning process of the Group and its key legal entities as a key activity in medium-term planning, and senior management is actively involved in stress testing activities via a strictthe governance process.
Scenario stress testing is used for:
Risk Identification:identification:
Understand key vulnerabilities of the Group and its key legal entities under adverse economic conditions
Risk Appetite:appetite:
Assess the results of the stress test against the risk appetite of all parts of the Group to ensure the Group and its legal entities are managed within their risk parameters
Inform the setting of risk appetite by assessing the underlying risks under stress conditions
Strategic and Capital Planning:capital planning:
Allow senior management and the Boards of the Group and its applicable legal entities to adjust strategies if the plan does not meet risk appetite in a stressed scenario
Support the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) by demonstrating capital adequacy, and meet the requirements of regulatory stress tests that are used to inform the setting of the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and management buffers (see capital risk on pages 5669 to 61)76) of the Group and its separately regulated legal entities
Risk Mitigation:mitigation:
Drive the development of potential actions and contingency plans to mitigate the impact of adverse scenarios. Stress testing also links directly to the recovery planning process of the Group and its legal entities
Internal stress tests
On at least an annual basis, the Group conducts macroeconomic stress tests of the operating plan, which are supplemented with higher-level refreshes if necessary. The exercise aims to highlight the key vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its legal entities’ business plans to adverse changes in the economic environment, and to ensure that there are adequate financial resources in the event of a downturn.
Reverse stress testing
Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its key legal entities’ strategies and plans to extreme adverse events that would cause the businesses to fail. Where this identifies plausible scenarios with an unacceptably high risk, the Group or its entities will adopt measures to prevent or mitigate that and reflect these in strategic plans.
Other stress testing activity
The Group’s stress testing programme also involves undertaking assessments of liquidity scenarios, market risk sensitivities and scenarios, and business specificbusiness-specific scenarios (see the principal risk categories on page 23pages 32 to 34 for further information on risk-specific stress testing). If required, ad hoc stress testing exercises are also undertaken to assess emerging risks, as well as in response to regulatory requests. This wide rangingwide-ranging programme provides a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group is exposed and reflects the nature, scale and complexity of the Group. Lloyds Banking Group will undertakeparticipated in Part 1 of the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Stress test in 2021 and will leverage the experience gained through that exercise to further embed climate risk into risk management and stress testing activities.
Methodology
The stress tests at all levels must comply with all regulatory requirements, achieved through the comprehensive construction of macroeconomic scenarios and a rigorous divisional, functional, risk and executive review and challenge process, supported by analysis and insight into impacts on customers and business drivers.
The engagement of all required business, Risk and Finance teams is built into the preparation process, so that the appropriate analysis of each risk category’s impact upon the business plans is understood and documented. The methodologies and modelling approach used for stress
29

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
testing ensure that a clear link is shown between the macroeconomic scenarios, the business drivers for each area and the resultant stress testing outputs. All material assumptions used in modelling are documented and justified, with a clearly communicated review and sign-off process. Modelling is supported by expert judgement and is subject to Lloyds Banking Group Model Governance Policy.model governance policy.
41

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Governance
Clear accountabilities and responsibilities for stress testing are assigned to senior management and the Risk and Finance functions throughout the Group and its key legal entities. This is formalised through the Lloyds Banking Group Business Planningbusiness planning and Stress Testing Policystress testing policy and Procedure,procedure, which are reviewed at least annually.
The Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and attended by the Chief Financial Officer and other senior Risk and Finance colleagues, is the committee that has primary responsibility for overseeing the development and execution of the Group’s stress tests.
The review and challenge of the Group’s detailed stress forecasts, the key assumptions behind these, and the methodology used to translate the economic assumptions into stressed outputs conclude with the appropriate Finance and Risk Directors’ sign-off. The outputs are then presented to GFRC and the Board Risk Committee for review and challenge, before being approved by the Board.
EMERGING RISKS
lbk-20211231_g5.jpg
Background and framework
Understanding emerging risks is an essential component of the Group’s risk management approach, enabling the Group to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities, and to respond through strategic planning and appropriate risk mitigation.
Although emerging risk is not a principal risk, if left undetected emerging risks have the potential to adversely impact the Group or result in missed opportunities.
Impacts from emerging risks on the Group’s principal risks can materialise via two different routes:
Emerging risks can impact the Group’s principal risks directly in the absence of an appropriate strategic response.
Alternatively, emerging risks can be a source of new strategic risks, dependent on our chosen response and the underlying assumptions on how given emerging risks may manifest.
Where an emerging risk is considered material enough in its own right, the Group may choose to recognise the risk as a principal risk. Recent examples of this include climate risk and strategic risk. Such elevations are considered and approved through the Board as part of the annual refresh of Lloyds Banking Group's enterprise risk management framework.
Risk identification
The basis for risk identification is founded on collaboration between functions across the Group. The activity incorporates internal horizon scanning and engagement with external experts to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
This activity is inherently linked with and builds upon the annual strategic planning cycle and is used to identify key external trends, risks and opportunities for the Group.
The Group is evolving its methodology in respect of the identification and prioritisation of emerging risks. 2021 saw the development of a quantitative risk assessment methodology for understanding the connectivity of strategic risk. The Group has drawn on this methodology and findings to expand its insights.

42

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Notable emerging risks and their implications
The Group considers the following emerging risk themes as having the potential to increase in significance and affect the performance of the Group.
Emerging risk themeKey considerations
Breakdown of the EUWide-ranging risks associated with dissolution of the European Union, with member states choosing to function independently.
Climate change transition riskRisks arising from the Group's participation choices, policies and investments to support transition to a zero carbon economy and its ability to meet published climate targets.
Data-driven propositionsHarnessing real-time data, emerging technologies and communication channels, to meet consumer appetite for bespoke products and services.
Digital currenciesRisks and opportunities posed by introduction of new, or wider adoption of existing, digital currencies, associated supporting infrastructure and subsequent management.
Evolving regulationChanging regulatory standards and possibility of retrospective application, driving reputational damage, fines, litigation and remediation activity.
Future pandemics and the world’s ability to respondEconomic, political, social and technological impacts caused by mutations of existing viruses, new viruses, or resistance to treatments for existing illnesses.
Inequality and changing demographicWidening wealth and opportunity gap, increasing diversity and changing age mix within society, resulting in changing demands on banking.
Long term impact of the UK’s exit from the EULong-term macro-economic, regulatory and social impacts on the UK as a result of the UK’s exit from the EU.
Modern skills and recruitment diversityDiversification of recruitment approach in respect of candidate backgrounds, skills and avenues of attainment, to adapt to a modern technology-driven landscape.
Pace of technological changeAbility to keep pace with accelerating technological change, evolving technology landscape, changing customer expectations and new product and service propositions.
Populism, de-globalisation and supply chainsDisenfranchisement driving geopolitical tensions between states, diminishing integration and adverse effects on supply chains.
Science, technology, engineering and mathematics (STEM) qualification supply vs demandRisks posed by the balance of STEM degree qualification in the UK lagging behind the accelerating demands for STEM qualified candidates in the workforce.
Scottish independenceWide-ranging consequences arising from the movement for Scotland to become a sovereign state, independent from the United Kingdom.
Ways of workingAbility to provide a colleague proposition enabling flexible location and agile working, aligning to individual requirements, together with associated risks of such arrangements (e.g. Operational, People and Data risk).
Risk mitigation
Emerging risks are managed through the Group’s strategic risk framework, detailed on page 88. Pertinent emerging risks are considered as part of the Group’s strategic and business planning processes and primarily addressed through the Group’s strategy.
Key actions to tackle the emerging challenges and capitalise on opportunities as part of the Group’s strategy include the following:
Purpose: At the heart of the Group’s purpose are the themes of inclusion, sustainability and being people-first. As such, the Group’s strategy aims to fully embed a purpose that supports a more inclusive and sustainable future for the Group’s customers and colleagues.
Outcomes will see products, services and activities, aligning to societal and regulatory expectations, which drive impacts across housing, financial wellbeing, businesses and jobs, communities, regions, and sustainability.
Customer proposition: As part of its strategy, the Group aims to enhance its proposition, better aligning to its purpose, while supporting transition to a low carbon economy and adapting to the changing demographic of both its customer base and that of the UK.
Key components include:
Creating better engagement, improving customer journeys and enhancing experiences and tools to drive greater financial resilience and well-being for customers
Supporting customers and businesses in respect of making their homes, vehicles, properties and activities more sustainable
Capitalising on the Group’s existing asset and product capabilities for corporate and institutional clients to play a leading role in the transition to Net Zero, addressing regional inequalities and supporting UK prosperity by helping corporates trade internationally
Talent: The Group is firmly committed to being diverse, employing new ways of working, where colleagues are supported in having a growth mindset and empowered to make decisions at pace.
The strategy places focus on a colleague proposition that can attract and retain the best people, while leveraging talent pools across the UK and exploring in-house skills growth strategies, alongside partnerships with universities and businesses, to supplement scarce skill sets.
For the long term, the Group intends to use its strategic workforce planning capability for understanding and meeting the evolving demand of skills from its businesses and functions. This will also act as the bedrock for key strategic decisions and interventions in respect of important elements of the Group’s talent strategy in the future.
Technology: Simplification of the Group’s estate and leveraging contemporary technologies are core components of the Group’s strategy.
The Group aims to manage the challenges of a rapidly evolving landscape by employing technology that is aligned to industry best practice refresh rates, while promoting autonomy and empowerment within teams by streamlining governance.
This will be supplemented with an aligned business and technology vision and a rationalised hybrid cloud technology estate and modern engineering standards.
43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Data: Being data-driven is central to the Group’s transformation activity. More than one third of the benefits from the Group’s business strategies are reliant on the ability to successfully leverage data. As such managing data risk and employing strong data ethics are key considerations for the strategy.
The Group has developed a data management strategy to provide the common framework and direction by uplifting data quality, simplifying data architecture, enhancing data governance and implementing market leading tools to improve its ability to deliver a data-first culture. The Group has also invested in data ethics framework and strong governance for its advanced analytics and cloud programmes.
In addition to the strategic actions detailed above, the Group works closely with regulatory authorities and industry bodies to ensure that the Group can monitor external developments (e.g. potential regulatory divergence from EU) and identify and respond to the evolving landscape, particularly in relation to regulatory and legal risk.

FULL ANALYSIS OF RISK CATEGORIES
The Group’s risk framework covers all types of risk which affect the Group and could impact on the achievement of its strategic objectives. A detailed description of each category is provided on pages 3145 to 74.89.
Risk categories recognised by the Group are periodically reviewed to ensure that they reflect the Group risk profile in light of internal and external factors, such as the Group strategy and the regulatory environment in which it operates. The only changeChanges include the recategorisation of governance risk, from a principal risk type to a secondary risk under operational risk, plus enhancement to the naming of some secondary risk categories during 2020 has been the addition of Climate risk.categories.
Principal risk categoriesSecondary risk categories
Climate risk– Climate
Page 31
Market risk– Trading book– Pensions
Page 3245
– Banking book
Credit risk– Retail credit– Commercial credit
Page 3649
Funding and liquidity risk– Funding and liquidity
Page 5265
Capital risk– Capital
Page 5669
Change/execution risk– Change/execution
Page 6277
Conduct risk– Conduct
Page 6378
Data risk– Data
Page 65
Governance risk– Governance
Page 6680
People risk– People– Health and safety
Page 6781
Operational resilience risk– Operational resilience
Page 6882
Operational risk– Business process– Financial reportingPhysical security/health and safetySecurity
Page 7084
Cyber and information securityEconomic crime financialFraudGovernance– Sourcing and supply chain management
External service provisionEconomic crime fraud– Internal service provision
Financial crimeExternal service provision– IT systems
Model risk– Model
Page 7286
Regulatory and legal risk– Regulatory compliance– Legal
Page 7387
Strategic risk– Strategic
Page 7488
Climate risk– Climate
Page 89
Lloyds BankThe Group considers both reputational and financial impact in the course of managing all its risks and therefore does not classify reputational impact as a separate risk category.
3044

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CLIMATE RISK
DEFINITION
Climate risk is defined as the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a result of climate change, either directly or through its customers. These losses may be realised from physical events, the required adaptation in transitioning to a low carbon economy, or as a consequence of the responses to managing these changes.
EXPOSURES
Climate risk can arise from:
Physical risks - changes in climate or weather patterns which are acute, event driven (e.g. flood), or chronic, longer term shifts (e.g. rising sea levels)
Transition risks - associated with the move towards a low carbon economy, e.g. changes to policy, legislation and regulation, technology and changes to customer preferences. Failure to manage these changes and adapt to climate change could then result in legal risks
Climate risk manifests through, and has potential to impact, the Group’s existing principal financial and non-financial risks. The Group has undertaken an analysis of how its principal risks are impacted by climate change.
MEASUREMENT
The Group is continuing to develop its modelling and assessment capabilities for quantifying climate risk, including building a greater understanding through climate scenario analysis.
In 2020, the Group has approved a Risk Appetite Statement for climate risk, as well as an interim metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace, and also included commentary on climate-related risks as part of the Group's annual ICAAP, using expert judgement to assess the financial impacts under a number of different climate scenarios.
The Group has also developed and is piloting a tool in Commercial Banking to qualitatively assess the physical and transition risks relating to the Group's clients.
MITIGATION
Lloyds Banking Group has twelve external sector statements that help articulate appropriate areas of climate related risk appetite and the Group's approach to the risk assessment of its customers. Lloyds Banking Group is continuing to refine and enhance these statements.
As part of Lloyds Banking Group’s credit risk policy, we have mandatory requirements to consider environmental risks in key risk management activities. In Commercial Banking, Relationship Managers must ensure that sustainability risk is considered for all new and renewal facilities, and specifically commented on where credit limits exceed £500,000.
Other initiatives to further embed climate risk factors into the risk management activities across the Group include development of a risk mitigation strategy for vehicle finance and home loans in Retail.
The Group is continuing to develop its climate risk management framework to ensure all activities consider the appropriate climate-related risks and opportunities and the Group’s processes will continue to evolve as it embeds its approach.
MONITORING
Governance for climate-related risk is embedded into the Group’s existing governance structure and is complementary to governance of the Group’s sustainability strategy.
Climate risk is monitored in the Group’s risk reporting and more detailed updates are provided regularly to the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Board Risk Committees regarding the Group’s climate risk management activities and key developments.
31

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
MARKET RISK
DEFINITION
Market risk is defined as the risk that the Group's capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates or prices, in particular interest rates and credit spreads in both the Banking business interest rates, and credit spreads in the Group’s Defined Benefit Pension Schemes.defined benefit pension schemes.
MEASUREMENT
The Lloyds Bank Group risk appetite is calibrated primarily to fivea number of multi-risk Lloyds Banking Group economic scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the worst case for banking activities, defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across Lloyds Bankthe Group as a whole.
The Lloyds Bank Group risk appetite is cascaded first to the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the Chief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to the Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub-allocated by division. These metrics are reviewed regularly by senior management to inform effective decision-making.
MITIGATION
GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring groupGroup market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across Lloyds Bankthe Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.
MONITORING
GALCO and GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Board concerning overall market risk appetite and Lloyds Banking Group's Market Risk Policy.market risk policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk and appropriate escalation procedures are in place.
How market risks arise and are managed across Lloyds Bankthe Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.
BANKING ACTIVITIES
Exposures
The Lloyds Bank Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market rates or prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market rates or prices can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or instrument.
Interest rate risk
Yield curve risk in Lloyds Bankthe Group’s divisional portfolios, and in Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital and funding activities, arises from the different repricing characteristics of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet positions.
Basis risk arises from the potential changes in spreads between indices, for example where the bankBank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to LIBOR,a market rate, e.g. SONIA, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.
Optionality risk arises predominantly from embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either Lloyds Bankthe Group or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to customers’ response to changes in economic conditions.
Foreign exchange risk
Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from Lloyds Bankthe Group’s investment in its overseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 4544 on page F-141)F-105). In addition, Lloyds Bankthe Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer-facing divisions, Lloyds Bankthe Group’s debt and capital management programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-sterling- denominated RWAs.non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets.
Equity risk
Equity risk arises primarily from exposure to the Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.
Credit spread risk
Credit spread risk arises largely fromfrom: (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Lloyds Bank Group'sGroup liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and DebtDebit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; (iii) a number of the Lloyds Bank Group’s structured medium-term notes where Lloyds Bankthe Group has elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account; and (iv) banking book assets in Commercial Banking held at fair value under IFRS 9.
Measurement
Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:
Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve. GBPSterling interest rates are modelled with a floor atbelow zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-GBPnon-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk freerisk-free rate.
Interest income sensitivity: this measures the 12 month impact on future net interest income arising from various economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis point parallel shifts in all yield curves and the five Lloyds Banking Group economic scenarios. GBPSterling interest rates are modelled with a floor atbelow zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-GBPnon-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve.
3245

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Additional negative rate scenarios are also used, where floors are removed, or lowered, to ensure that this risk is monitored; however, these are not measured against the limit framework for the purposes of Risk Appetite.risk appetite.
Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to changing rates. In addition a dynamic balance sheet is used which includes the run-off of current assets and liabilities and the addition of planned new business.
Reported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the net interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the net interest income.
Structural hedge: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on assumptions made around customer behaviour. A number of metrics are in place to monitor the risks within the portfolio.
Lloyds BankingThe Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non-traded asset and liability management of Lloyds Bankthe Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. Lloyds BankThe Group is aware that any assumptions basedassumptions-based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under the Lloyds Banking Group Model Governance Policy.Group's model governance policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:
embeddedEmbedded optionality within products
theThe duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of Lloyds Bankthe Group
theThe re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities, such as variable rate savings
The table below shows, split by material currency, Lloyds Bankthe Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity (audited)
2020201920212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
SterlingSterling66.3 7.3 265.3 10.4 15.5 (15.8)60.7 (51.8)Sterling26.1 (27.6)98.4 (129.8)66.3 7.3 265.3 10.4 
US DollarUS Dollar(2.2)3.7 (8.6)7.9 (2.1)2.2 (7.9)9.1 US Dollar(0.3)0.9 (1.1)4.0 (2.2)3.7 (8.6)7.9 
EuroEuro(6.3)(5.0)(24.1)(9.0)(7.0)2.2 (26.5)11.1 Euro(5.1)(2.9)(19.3)(11.5)(6.3)(5.0)(24.1)(9.0)
OtherOther0.0 0.0 (0.2)0.0 (0.1)0.1 (0.3)0.3 Other(0.2)0.3 (1.0)0.8 — — (0.2)— 
TotalTotal57.8 6.0 232.4 9.3 6.3 (11.3)26.0 (31.3)Total20.5 (29.3)77.0 (136.5)57.8 6.0 232.4 9.3 
This is a risk basedrisk-based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.
The market value sensitivity is driven by temporary customer flow positions not yet hedged plus other positions occasionally held, within limits, in order to minimise overall funding and hedging costs.a down 100 basis points shock has increased due to rates being higher than at year end 2020 leading to a larger downshock being applied before hitting the modelled interest rate floor. The sensitivity to an up 100bps, increased in 2020 due100 basis points shock has decreased as a result of hedging activity and changes to customer balance sheet changes and the associated hedging, in particular growth in fixed rate mortgages. The level of risk remains low relative to the size of the total balance sheet.mortgage prepayment assumptions.
The table below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the 3 yearthree-year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve (audited)
2020201920212020
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
SterlingSterling(53.2)14.3 40.7 (41.6)Sterling85.8 (114.4)(53.2)14.3 
US DollarUS Dollar(6.4)7.5 (9.6)10.3 US Dollar(7.0)8.2 (6.4)7.5 
EuroEuro(16.4)(3.9)(15.6)9.9 Euro(13.8)(6.9)(16.4)(3.9)
OtherOther(0.1 )0.5 (0.0)(0.0)Other0.2 (0.2)(0.1)0.5 
TotalTotal(76.1)18.4 15.5 (21.4)Total65.2 (113.3)(76.1)18.4 
The table below shows the banking book one year net interest income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)
2020201920212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Client facing activity and associated hedgesClient facing activity and associated hedges254.6 (142.5)1,030.2 (148.0)92.8 (133.8)375.4 (658.8)Client facing activity and associated hedges174.9 (406.7)254.6 (142.5)
Income sensitivity is measured on a rolling 12 month basis.
Net interest income sensitivity, to up 100bps, has increased year-on-year in part due to the growth in customer deposits and account management activity during 2020. This would result in widening margins in a rates up scenario, increasing net interest income.
3346

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The decreasetable below shows supplementary income sensitivity on a one to three-year forward-looking basis to an instantaneous parallel up 25, down 25 and up 50 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: three year net interest income sensitivity (audited)
2021
Up 25bpsDown 25bpsUp 50bps
Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Client-facing activity and associated hedges174.9 269.8 397.3 (406.7)(512.0)(639.0)348.7 526.9 782.1 
Year 1 net interest income sensitivity, to up 25 basis points, has decreased year-on-year mostly due to the additional structural hedging that has been transacted in 2021 in addition to the use of simpler illustrative pass through assumptions. The increase in risk sensitivity year-on-year, to down 100bps,25 basis points, is driven by a reduction ingreater modelled margin compression risk following the fallrise in interest rates in 2020.December 2021. This isresults in the full 25 basis points downshock being applied at December 2021 whereas a 10 basis points shock was applied at December 2020 due to Lloyds Bankthe Group’s assumptionsassumption, at the time, for modelling GBPSterling interest rates with a floor of zero per cent (product-specific floors apply) which limits the down-shock applied..
The three year net interest income sensitivity to a down 25 basis points shock is driven predominantly by margin compression on Retail and Commercial Bank savings products as well as structural hedge maturities to be reinvested in years two and three. The sensitivity to an up 25 basis points and 50 basis points shock is largely due to reinvestment of structural hedge maturities.
The sensitivities are illustrative and do not reflect new business margin implications and/or pricing actions, other than as outlined.
The following assumptions have been applied:
Instantaneous parallel shift in interest rate curve, including bank base rate
Balance sheet remains constant
Illustrative 50 per cent deposit pass-through
Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12 month12-month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board risk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.
Mitigation
Lloyds BankThe Group’s policy is to optimise reward whilstwhile managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. Lloyds Banking Group Market Risk PolicyGroup's market risk policy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into GCT,Group Corporate Treasury (GCT), e.g. via the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of matching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the residual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. The hedges are externalised to the market by derivative desks within GCT and the Commercial Bank. Lloyds BankThe Group mitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from Lloyds Bankthe Group’s economic hedging activities and any hedge accounting ineffectiveness is continuously monitored.
The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through Lloyds Bankthe Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with Lloyds Bankthe Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO.
WhilstWhile the bankBank faces margin compression in low rate environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).
Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non-Sterling asset values with currency borrowing. Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. Lloyds BankingThe Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to risk-weighted assets equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.
Monitoring
The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive committees within the bankingBanking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.
DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES
Exposures
Lloyds BankThe Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate exposes Lloyds Bankthe Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes Lloyds Bankthe Group to longevity risk. Increases to pensions in deferment and in payment expose the Group to inflation risk.
For further information on defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to note 2827 on page F-69.F-66.
Measurement
ManagementThe Group's management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for setting the investment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with Lloyds Bankthe Group. Lloyds BankThe Group will be liable for meeting any funding deficit that may arise. As part of the triennial valuation process, Lloyds Bankthe Group will agree with the Trustees a funding strategy to eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.
Longevity risk is measured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).
47

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Mitigation
Lloyds BankThe Group takes an active involvement in agreeing mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. The schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets. The Trustees have put in place a longevity swapswaps to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.
Monitoring
In addition to the wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees.
The surplus, or deficit, in the schemes is tracked monthly along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. Key metrics are monitored monthly including Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital resources of the scheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, and the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions.
TRADING PORTFOLIOS
Exposures
Lloyds BankThe Group’s trading activity is small relative to its peers and does not engage in any proprietary trading activities. Lloyds Bankpeers. The Group’s trading activity is undertaken solely to meet the financial requirements of commercial and retail customers for foreign exchange and interest rate products. These activities support customer flow and market making activities.
All trading activities are performed within the Commercial Banking division. While the trading positions taken are generally small, any extreme moves in the main risk factors and other related risk factors could cause significant losses in the trading book depending on the positions at the time. The average 95 per cent 1-day trading VaR (Value at Risk; diversified across risk factors) was £0.1 million for 31 December 2021.
Trading market risk measures are applied to all of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s regulatory trading books and they include daily VaR, sensitivity basedsensitivity-based measures, and stress testing calculations.
Measurement
Lloyds BankThe Group internally uses VaR as the primary risk measure for all trading book positions.
The risk of loss measured by the VaR model is the minimum expected loss in earnings given the 95 per cent confidence. The total and average trading VaR numbers reported below have been obtained after the application of the diversification benefits across the five risk types. The maximum and minimum VaR reported for each risk category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the maximum and minimum VaR reported at Group level.
The Group’s closing VaR, allowing for diversification, at 31 December 2021 across interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk, equity risk, credit spread risk and inflation risk was less than £0.05 million. During the year ended 31 December 2021, the Group’s minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million and its average and maximum VaR was £0.1 million.
For the year ended 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, the maximum total VaR for all of the above risks was £0.2 million, the average total VaR was £0.1 million and minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million. The closing VaR at 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, was less than £0.06 million.
34

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
For the year ended 31 December 2021, the maximum and average interest rate risk VaR was £0.1 million and the minimum interest rate VaR was less than £0.05 million. The minimum, maximum and average VaR for all other risk types was less than £0.05 million. As at 31 December 2021, the closing VaR for all risk types was less than £0.05 million.
The market risk for the trading book continues to be low with respectrelative to the size of Lloyds Bankthe Group and in comparison to peers. This reflects the fact that Lloyds Bankthe Group’s trading operations are customer-centric and focused on hedging and recycling client risks.
Although it is an important market standard measure of risk, VaR has limitations. One of them is the use of a limited historical data sample which influences the output by the implicit assumption that future market behaviour will not differ greatly from the historically observed period. Another known limitation is the use of defined holding periods which assumes that the risk can be liquidated or hedged within that holding period. Also calculating the VaR at the chosen confidence interval does not give enough information about potential losses which may occur if this level is exceeded. Lloyds BankThe Group fully recognises these limitations and supplements the use of VaR with a variety of other measurements which reflect the nature of the business activity. These include detailed sensitivity analysis, position reporting and a stress testing programme.
Trading book VaR (1-day 99 per cent) is compared daily against both hypothetical and actual profit and loss at underlying legal entity level (HBOS and Lloyds Bank).
Mitigation
The level of exposure is controlled by establishing and communicating the approved risk limits and controls through policies and procedures that define the responsibility and authority for risk taking. Market risk limits are clearly and consistently communicated to the business. Any new or emerging risks are brought within risk reporting and defined limits.
Monitoring
Trading risk appetite is monitored daily with 1-day 95 per cent VaR and stress testing limits. These limits are complemented with position level action triggers and profit and loss referrals. Risk and position limits are set and managed at both desk and overall trading book levels. They are reviewed at least annually and can be changed as required within the overall Lloyds Bank Group risk appetite framework.
3548

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CREDIT RISK
DEFINITION
Credit risk is defined as the risk that parties with whom the Group has contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on and off- balance sheet).
EXPOSURES
The principal sources of credit risk within the Group arise from loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives to customers, financial institutions and sovereigns. The credit risk exposures of the Group are set out in note 4544 on page F-115.F-105.
In terms of loans and advances (for example mortgages, term loans and overdrafts) and contingent liabilities (for example credit instruments such as guarantees and documentary letters of credit), credit risk arises both from amounts advanced and commitments to extend credit to a customer or bank. With respect to commitments to extend credit, the Group is also potentially exposed to an additional loss up to an amount equal to the total unutilised commitments. However, the likely amount of loss may be less than the total unutilised commitments, as most retail and certain commercial lending commitments may be cancelled based on regular assessment of the prevailing creditworthiness of customers. Most commercial term commitments are also contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards.
Credit risk also arises from debt securities and derivatives. Credit risk exposure for derivatives is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 4544 on page F-115.F-105.
Additionally, credit risk arises from leasing arrangements where the Group is the lessor. Note 2(J) on page F-19F-20 provides details on the Group’s approach to the treatment of leases.
The investments held in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes also expose the Group to credit risk. Note 2827 on page F-69F-66 provides further information on the defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities.
Loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives also expose the Group to refinance risk. Refinance risk is the possibility that an outstanding exposure cannot be repaid at its contractual maturity date. If the Group does not wish to refinance the exposure then there is refinance risk if the obligor is unable to repay by securing alternative finance. This may occur for a number of reasons which may include: the borrower is in financial difficulty, because the terms required to refinance are outside acceptable appetite at the time or the customer is unable to refinance externally due to a lack of market liquidity. Refinance risk exposures are managed in accordance with the Group’s existing credit risk policies, processes and controls, and are not considered to be material given the Group’s prudent and through the cyclethrough-the-cycle credit risk appetite. Where heightened refinance risk exists exposures are minimised through intensive account management and, where appropriate, are classed as impaired and/or forborne.
MEASUREMENT
The process for credit risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the Board-approved framework for credit risk appetite and governance.
Credit risk is measured from different perspectives using a range of appropriate modelling and scoring techniques at a number of levels of granularity, including total balance sheet, individual portfolio, pertinent concentrations and individual customer - for both new business and existing lending.Keyexposure. Key metrics, such aswhich may include total exposure, expected credit loss (ECL), risk-weighted assets, new business quality, concentration risk and portfolio performance, are reported monthly to Risk Committees and Forums.
Measures such as ECL, risk-weighted assets, observed credit performance, predicted credit quality (usually from predictive credit scoring models), collateral cover and quality, and other credit drivers (such as cash flow, affordability, leverage and indebtedness) have been incorporated into the Group's credit risk management practices to enable effective risk measurement across the Group.
The Group has also continued to strengthen its capabilities and abilities for identifying, assessing and managing climate-related risks and opportunities, recognising that Climate change is likely to result in changes in the risk profile and outlook for the Group's customers, the sectors the Group operates in and collateral/asset valuations. For further information, please refer to LBG’s 2021 Climate Report.
In addition, stress testing and scenario analysis are used to estimate impairment losses and capital demand forecasts for both regulatory and internal purposes and to assist in the formulation of credit risk appetite.
As part of the ‘three lines of defence’ model, the Risk division is the second line of defence providing oversight and independent challenge to key risk decisions taken by business management. The Risk division also tests the effectiveness of credit risk management and internal credit risk controls. This includes ensuring that the control and monitoring of higher risk and vulnerable portfolios and sectors is appropriate and confirming that appropriate loss allowances for impairment are in place. Output from these reviews helps to inform credit risk appetite and credit policy.
As the third line of defence, Group Internal Audit undertakes regular risk-based reviews to assess the effectiveness of Creditcredit risk management and controls.
MITIGATION
The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate Creditcredit risk.
Prudent, through the cyclethrough-the-cycle credit principles, risk policies and appetite statements: the independent Risk division sets out the credit principles, credit risk policies and credit risk appetite statements. These are subject to regular review and governance, with any changes subject to an approval process. Risk teams monitor credit performance trends and the outlook. Risk teams also test the adequacy of and adherence to credit risk policies and processes throughout the Group. This includes tracking portfolio performance against an agreed set of credit risk appetite tolerances.
Robust models and controls: see model risk on page 72.86.
Limitations on concentration risk:there are portfolio controls on certain industries, sectors and products to reflect risk appetite as well as individual, customer and bank limit risk tolerances. Credit policies and appetite statements are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite and restrict exposure to higher risk countries and potentially vulnerable sectors and asset classes. Note 4644 on page F-117F-107 provides an analysis of loans and advances to customers by industry (for commercial customers) and product (for retail customers). Exposures are monitored to prevent both an excessive concentration of risk and single name concentrations. These concentration risk controls are not necessarily in the form of a maximum limit on exposure, but may instead require new business in concentrated sectors to fulfil additional minimum policy and/or guideline
49

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
requirements. The Group’s largest credit limits are regularly monitored by the Board Risk Committee and reported in accordance with regulatory requirements.
Defined country risk management framework: the BoardGroup sets a broad maximum country risk appetite. Risk basedRisk-based appetite for all countries is set within the independent Risk division, taking into account economic, financial, political and social factors as well as the approved business and strategic plans of the Group.
36

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Specialist expertise: credit quality is managed and controlled by a number of specialist units within the business and Risk division, which provide for example: intensive management and control; security perfection; maintenance of customer and facility records; expertise in documentation for lending and associated products; sector-specific expertise; and legal services applicable to the particular market segments and product ranges offered by the Group.
Stress testing: the Group’s credit portfolios are subject to regular stress testing. In addition to the Group led,Group-led, PRA and other regulatory stress tests, exercises focused on individual divisions and portfolios are also performed. For further information on stress testing process, methodology and governance see page 29.41.
Frequent and robust Creditcredit risk assurance: assurance of credit risk is undertaken by an independent function operating within the Risk division which are part of the Group’s second line of defence. Their primary objective is to provide reasonable and independent assurance and confidence that credit risk is being effectively managed and to ensure that appropriate controls are in place and being adhered to. Group Internal Audit also provides assurance to the Audit Committee on the effectiveness of credit risk management controls across the Group’s activities.
Collateral
The principal types of acceptable collateral include:
residentialResidential and commercial properties
chargesCharges over business assets such as premises, inventory and accounts receivable
financialFinancial instruments such as debt securities vehicles
cashCash
guaranteesGuarantees received from third-partiesthird parties
The Group maintains appetite parameters on the acceptability of specific classes of collateral.
For non-mortgage retail lending to small businesses, collateral may include second charges over residential property and the assignment of life cover.
Collateral held as security for financial assets other than loans and advances is determined by the nature of the underlying exposure. Debt securities, including treasury and other bills, are generally unsecured, with the exception of asset-backed securities and similar instruments such as covered bonds, which are secured by portfolios of financial assets. Collateral is generally not held against loans and advances to financial institutions. However, securities are held as part of reverse repurchase or securities borrowing transactions or where a collateral agreement has been entered into under a master netting agreement. Derivative transactions with financial counterparties are typically collateralised under a Credit Support Annex (CSA) in conjunction with the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) Master Agreement. Derivative transactions with non-financial customers are not usually supported by a CSA.
The requirement for collateral and the type to be taken at origination will be based upon the nature of the transaction and the credit quality, size and structure of the borrower. For non-retail exposures, if required, the Group will often seek that any collateral includeincludes a first charge over land and buildings owned and occupied by the business, a debenture over the assets of a company or limited liability partnership, personal guarantees, limited in amount, from the directors of a company or limited liability partnership and key man insurance. The Group maintains policies setting out which types of collateral valuation are acceptable, maximum loan to value (LTV) ratios and other criteria that are to be considered when reviewing an application. The fundamental business proposition must evidence the ability of the business to generate funds from normal business sources to repay a customer or counterparty’s financial commitment, rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided.
The extent to which collateral values are actively managed will depend on the credit quality and other circumstances of the obligor and type of underlying transaction. Although lending decisions are primarily based on expected cash flows, any collateral provided may impact the pricing and other terms of a loan or facility granted. This will have a financial impact on the amount of net interest income recognised and on internal loss given default estimates that contribute to the determination of asset quality and returns.
The Group requires collateral to be realistically valued by an appropriately qualified source, independent of both the credit decision process and the customer, at the time of borrowing. In certain circumstances, for Retail residential mortgages this may include the use of automated valuation models based on market data, subject to accuracy criteria and LTV limits. Where third-partiesthird parties are used for collateral valuations, they are subject to regular monitoring and review. Collateral values are subject to review, which will vary according to the type of lending, collateral involved and account performance. Such reviews are undertaken to confirm that the value recorded remains appropriate and whether revaluation is required, considering, for example, account performance, market conditions and any information available that may indicate that the value of the collateral has materially declined. In such instances, the Group may seek additional collateral and/or other amendments to the terms of the facility. The Group adjusts estimated market values to take account of the costs of realisation and any discount associated with the realisation of the collateral when estimating credit losses.
The Group considers risk concentrations by collateral providers and collateral type with a view to ensuring that any potential undue concentrations of risk are identified and suitably managed by changes to strategy, policy and/or business plans.
The Group seeks to avoid correlation or wrong-way risk where possible. Under the Group’s repurchase (repo) policy, the issuer of the collateral and the repo counterparty should be neither the same nor connected. The same rule applies for derivatives. The Risk division has the necessary discretion to extend this rule to other cases where there is significant correlation. Countries with a rating equivalent to AA- or better may be considered to have no adverse correlation between the counterparty domiciled in that country and the country of risk (issuer of securities).
Refer to note 4544 on page F-140F-126 for further information on collateral.
Additional mitigation for Retail customers
The Group uses a variety of lending criteria when assessing applications for mortgages and unsecured lending. The general approval process uses credit acceptance scorecards and involves a review of an applicant’s previous credit history using internal data and information held by Credit Reference Agencies (CRA).
50

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group also assesses the affordability and sustainability of lending for each borrower. For secured lending this includes use of an appropriate stressed interest rate scenario. Affordability assessments for all lending are compliant with relevant regulatory and conduct guidelines. The Group takes reasonable steps to validate information used in the assessment of a customer’s income and expenditure.
37

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
In addition, the Group has in place quantitative limits such as maximum limits for individual customer products, the level of borrowing to income and the ratio of borrowing to collateral. Some of these limits relate to internal approval levels and others are policy limits above which the Group will typically reject borrowing applications. The Group also applies certain criteria that are applicable to specific products, for example applications for buy-to-let mortgages.
For UK mortgages, the Group’s policy permits owner occupier applications with a maximum loan to value (LTV)LTV of 95 per cent. This can increase to 100 per cent for specific products where additional security is provided by a supporter of the applicant and held on deposit by the Group. Applications with an LTV above 90 per cent are subject to enhanced underwriting criteria, including higher scorecard cut-offs and loan size restrictions.
Buy-to-let mortgages within Retail are limited to a maximum loan size of £1,000,000 and 75 per cent LTV. Buy-to-let applications must pass a minimum rental cover ratio of 125 per cent under stressed interest rates, after applicable tax liabilities. Portfolio landlords (customers with four or more mortgaged buy-to-let properties) are subject to additional controls including evaluation of overall portfolio resilience.
The Group’s policy is to reject any application for a lending product where a customer is registered as bankrupt or insolvent, or has a recent County Court Judgment or financial default registered at a CRA used by the Group above de minimis thresholds. In addition, the Group typically rejects applicants where total unsecured debt, debt-to-income ratios, or other indicators of financial difficulty exceed policy limits.
Where credit acceptance scorecards are used, new models, model changes and monitoring of model effectiveness are independently reviewed and approved in accordance with the governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.
Additional mitigation for Commercial customers
Individual credit assessment and independent sanction of customer and bank limits: with the exception of small exposures to SME customers where certain relationship managers have limited delegated sanctioning authority, credit risk in commercial customer portfolios is subject to sanction by the independent Risk division, which considers the strengths and weaknesses of individual transactions, the balance of risk and reward, and how credit risk aligns to the Group and Divisionaldivisional risk appetite. Exposure to individual counterparties, groups of counterparties or customer risk segments is controlled through a tiered hierarchy of delegated sanctioning authoritiescredit authority delegations and risk based recommended maximumrisk-based credit limit parameters.guidances per client group for larger exposures. Approval requirements for each decision are based on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the transaction amount, the customer’s aggregate facilities, any risk mitigation in place, credit policy, risk appetite, credit risk ratings and the nature and term of the risk. The Group’s credit risk appetite criteria for counterparty and customer loan Underwritingunderwriting is generally the same as that for loans intended to be held to maturity. All hard loan/bond Underwritingunderwriting must be sanctioned by the Risk division. A pre-approved credit matrix may be used for ‘best efforts’ underwriting.
Counterparty credit limits: limits are set against all types of exposure in a counterparty name, in accordance with an agreed methodology for each exposure type. This includes credit risk exposure on individual derivatives and securities financing transactions, which incorporates potential future exposures from market movements against agreed confidence intervals. Aggregate facility levels by counterparty are set and limit breaches are subject to escalation procedures.
Daily settlement limits: settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash, securities or equities is made in the expectation of a corresponding receipt in cash, securities or equities. Daily settlement limits are established for each relevant counterparty to cover the aggregate of all settlement risk arising from the Group’s market transactions on any single day. Where possible, the Group uses Continuous Linked Settlement in order to reduce foreign exchange (FX) settlement risk.
Master netting agreements
It is credit policy that a Group approvedGroup-approved master netting agreement must be used for all derivative and traded product transactions and must be in place prior to trading, with separate documentation required for each Group entity providing facilities. This requirement extends to trades with clients and the counterparties used for the Bank’s own hedging activities, which may also include clearing trades with Central Counterparties (CCPs).
Any exceptions must be approved by the appropriate credit sanctioner. Master netting agreements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis. However, within relevant jurisdictions and for appropriate counterparty types, master nettingsnetting agreements do reduce the credit risk to the extent that, if an event of default occurs, all trades with the counterparty may be terminated and settled on a net basis. The Group’s overall exposure to credit risk on derivative instruments subject to master netting agreements can change substantially within a short period, since this is the net position of all trades under the master netting agreement.
Other credit risk transfers
The Group also undertakes asset sales, credit derivative based transactions, securitisations (including Significant Risk Transfersignificant risk transfer transactions), purchases of credit default swaps and purchase of credit insurance as a means of mitigating or reducing credit risk and/or risk concentration, taking into account the nature of assets and the prevailing market conditions.
MONITORING
In conjunction with the Risk division, businesses identify and define portfolios of credit and related risk exposures and the key behaviours and characteristics by which those portfolios are managed and monitored. This entails the production and analysis of regular portfolio monitoring reports for review by senior management. The Risk division in turn produces an aggregated view of credit risk across the Group, including reports on material credit exposures, concentrations, concerns and other management information, which is presented to the divisional risk committees and forums, Group Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee.
Models
The performance of all models used in credit risk is monitored in line with the Group’s model governance framework - see model risk on page 72.86.
Intensive care of customers in financial difficulty
The Group operates a number of solutions to assist borrowers who are experiencing financial stress. The material elements of these solutions through which the Group has granted a concession, whether temporarily or permanently, are set out below.
Forbearance
The Group’s aim in offering forbearance and other assistance to customers in financial distress is to benefit both the customer and the Group by supporting its customers and acting in their best interests by, where possible, bringing customer facilities back into a sustainable position.
3851

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group offers a range of tools and assistance to support customers who are encountering financial difficulties. Cases are managed on an individual basis, with the circumstances of each customer considered separately and the action taken judged as being appropriate and sustainable for both the customer and the Group.
Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting its financial commitments. This can include modification of the previous terms and conditions of a contract or a total or partial refinancing of a troubled debt contract, either of which would not have been required had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties.
The provision and review of such assistance is controlled through the application of an appropriate policy framework and associated controls. Regular review of the assistance offered to customers is undertaken to confirm that it remains appropriate, alongside monitoring of customers’ performance and the level of payments received.
The Group classifies accounts as forborne at the time a customer in financial difficulty is granted a concession. However, where customers have beenwere temporarily impacted by COVID-19, the Group has looked to follow regulator principles and guidance on the granting of concessions resulting from the impact of the pandemic.
Balances in default or classified as Stage 3 are always considered to be non-performing. Balances aremay be non-performing but not in default or Stage 3, if they are greater than 90 days past due (compared with 180 days past duewhere for Stage 3 mortgages) or ifexample they are within their 12 month non-performing forbearance cure period.
Non-performing exposures can be reclassified as Performing Forborneperforming forborne after a minimum 12 month12-month cure period, providing there are no past due amounts or concerns regarding the full repayment of the exposure. A minimum of a further 24 months must pass from the date the forborne exposure was reclassified as Performing Forborneperforming forborne before the account can exit forbearance. If conditions to exit forbearance are not met at the end of this probation period, the exposure shall continue to be identified as forborne until all the conditions are met.
The Group’s treatment of loan renegotiations is included in the impairment policy in note 2((H)2(H) on page F-18.F-19.
Customers receiving support from UK Government sponsored programmes
To assist customers in financial distress, the Group participates in UK Government sponsored programmes for households, including the Income Support for Mortgage Interest programme, under which the Governmentgovernment pays the Group all or part of the interest on the mortgage on behalf of the customer. This is provided as a government loan which the customer must repay.
Support for customers during the COVID-19 pandemic
Working closely with the UK Government and regulators, the Group has continued to supportsupported its retail, small business and commercial customers through a comprehensive and unprecedented range of flexible measures to help alleviate temporary financial pressure on customers during the crisis.
For retail customers, the Group has provided payment holidays of up to three months across a range of products including mortgages, personal loans, credit cards and motor finance, with extensions available of up to six6 months in total should customers request them.
The Group has also supported its retail customers with access to a £500 interest free overdraft facility and access to fixed term savings accounts without charge.were available.
Similarly, the Group is providingprovided significant support for its small business and commercial customers and has providedas well as providing loans to businesses under the different government schemes, including Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS), Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) and Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS). These schemes closed in March 2021, replaced by the Recovery Loan Scheme through which the Group is also providing support. The Group hascontinues to provide ongoing support to BBLS customers through the Pay As You Grow (PAYG) scheme, where customers are able to access a number of options including repayment holidays and term extensions. The Group also supported its customers through repayment holidays and its own COVID-19 fund which includesincluded fee-free lending for new overdrafts or overdraft limit increases as well as new or increased invoice discounting and finance facilities. The Group is also offeringoffered SME customers a mentoring service to help navigate a path beyond the pandemic.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP CREDIT RISK PORTFOLIO IN 20202021
Overview
Performance across the Group’s lending portfolios has been robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions to address the financial impacts of COVID-19, including government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited the increase in unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low
Portfolios have also benefitted from the Group’s proactive risk management and prudent credit risk appetite, with robust cashflow criteria and LTVs in the Group's secured portfolios
However, looking forward some portfolio deterioration may be expected, especially considering the withdrawal of government COVID-19 support measures and effects from a number of downside risks, including higher inflation and rising interest rates
Repayments under the government-backed lending schemes began in the second half of 2021, with arrears levels being carefully monitored, alongside continued review of customer trends and indicators to ensure early signs of customer distress are quickly identified
The Group has continuedcontinues to actively support its customers during the crisis through a range of flexible options and payment holidays across major products, as well as lending through the various UK Government support schemes
With c.85 per centhold appropriate expected credit loss (ECL) allowances in light of the Group's lending secured, with robust LTVs,uncertainties and a prudent approach to credit risk appetite and risk management, the credit portfolios were well positioned entering the crisis. Considering the external environment, flows of accounts into arrears and defaults remain low
However, the Group recognises and has provisioned on the basis that payment holidays granted and other Government support measures mean that the true underlying risk is not reflected and there is an expectation of increased arrears and defaults as these various arrangements, designed to alleviate short-term financial pressure, come to an endprotect against downside risks
The impairment credit in 2021 was £1,318 million, compared to a charge for the year has increased significantly toof £4,060 million (2019: £1,362 million). This is due to higherin 2020. The full-year credit resulted from a release of expected credit loss allowances taken predominantly inbased upon improvements to the first half ofmacroeconomic outlook for the year. These reflected the deterioration in economic outlook asUK, combined with robust observed credit performance, with a consequence of the coronavirus pandemic, as well as the charges taken on restructuring cases in the Commercial Business Support Unit (BSU)low run rate impairment charge
As a result, expected credit losses on loans and advances to customers increased tothe Group’s customer related ECL allowances reduced in the period from £6,127 million at 31 December 2020 (31 December 2019: £3,336 million). Notwithstanding the likelihood of rising defaults, the impairment impacts are expected largely to be covered by the forward looking provisions built up£3,998 million. Reductions in 2020, subjectCommercial Banking ECL allowances also reflected improved outcomes on restructuring cases, reduction in Stage 2 exposures and lower flows to there being no material changes to the Group's overall expectations of the severity of the pandemic impact on the economydefault
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers reduced from £51,280 million to £34,884 million and as a percentage of total lending have increasedreduced by 4.63.4 percentage points to 10.67.2 per cent at 31 December 2020 (31 December 2019: 6.02020: 10.6 per cent), predominantly reflecting the deterioration ofimprovement in the Group’s forward looking economicforward-looking macroeconomic assumptions. Of these, 91.689.0 per cent arewere up to date (31 December 2019: 83.92020: 91.6 per cent). Stage 2 coverage increasedreduced to 4.63.4 per cent (31 December 2019: 3.82020: 4.6 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances increased by £796 million to £6,443customers reduced in the period to £6,406 million (31 December 2019: £5,6472020: £6,443 million), although but remained stable as a percentage of total lending remained stable at around 1.3 per cent. Stage 3 coverage increased by 6.6 percentage points to 31.6 per cent (31 December 2019: 25.12020: 1.3 per cent). Stage 3 coverage reduced by 5.0 percentage points to 27.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 32.4 per cent), largely driven by additional provisions predominantly raised against pre-existing restructuring casesan increase in Commercial Banking’s BSU and to a lesser extent in Retail BBLS assets which hold zero ECL allowances due to the changeUK Government guarantee in place, the Group’s economic forecastimproved macroeconomic outlook, and a small number of collateral values for UK Mortgages and UK Motor Finance

single name releases in Commercial Banking, including coronavirus impacted restructuring cases
3952

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
LowPrudent risk cultureappetite and prudent risk appetitemanagement
The Group continues to take a prudent approach to credit risk and has a through the cyclethrough-the-cycle credit risk appetite, whilstwhile working closely with customers to help and support them over this challenging periodthrough and recover from the crisis
Although not immune,Sector and asset class concentrations within the Group's credit portfolios are well positioned against an uncertain economic outlookclosely monitored and potential market volatilitycontrolled, with mitigating actions taken where appropriate. Sector and product caps and policies limit exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors and asset classes
The Group’s effective risk management seeks to ensure early identification and management of customers and counterparties who may be showing signs of distress
SectorThe Group will continue to work closely with its customers throughout the recovery to ensure they receive the appropriate level of support, including where repayments under the UK Government scheme lending fall due
Impairment (credit) charge by division
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to banksFinancial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Undrawn
balances
20212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages(271)  (2)(273)478 
Credit cards29   (78)(49)800 
Loans and overdrafts83   (44)39 739 
UK Motor Finance(149)  (2)(151)226 
Other(7)  (14)(21)141 
Retail(315)  (140)(455)2,384 
SME(218)  (19)(237)264 
Corporate and other1
(541)(4)(3)(72)(620)1,016 
Commerical Banking(759)(4)(3)(91)(857)1,280 
Other(7) 1  (6)396 
Total impairment (credit) charge(1,081)(4)(2)(231)(1,318)4,060 
1Corporate and asset class concentrations within the portfolios are closely monitoredother primarily comprises Mid Corporates and controlled, with mitigating actions taken where appropriate. SectorCorporate and product caps limit exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors and asset classesInstitutional.
Group impairment charge
Loans
and
advances
to customers
Loans and advances to banksFinancial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Undrawn
balances
2020
2019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Retail
UK Mortgages475   3 478 (167)
Credit cards721   79 800 503 
Loans and overdrafts702   37 739 445 
UK Motor Finance224   2 226 203 
Other117   24 141 54 
2,239   145 2,384 1,038 
Commercial Banking
SME244   20 264 (65)
Other921 4 4 87 1,016 378 
1,165 4 4 107 1,280 313 
Other394  1 1 396 11 
Total impairment charge3,798 4 5 253 4,060 1,362 
53

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group loans and advances to customers
The following pages contain analysis of the Group’s loans and advances to customers by sub-portfolio. Loans and advances to customers are categorised into the following stages:
Stage 1 assets comprise of newly originated assets (unless purchased or originated credit impaired), as well as those which have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses that result from those default events that are possible within 12 months of the reporting date (12 month expected credit losses).
Stage 2 assets are those which have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses arising over the lifetime of the asset (lifetime expected credit losses).
Stage 3 assets have either defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired. These assets carry a lifetime expected credit loss.
Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets (POCI) are those that have been originated or acquired in a credit impaired state. This includes within the definition of credit impaired the purchase of a financial asset at a deep discount that reflects impaired credit losses.
Total expected credit loss allowance
At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020
£m£m
Customer related balances
Drawn3,804 5,701 
Undrawn194 426 
3,998 6,127 
Other assets2 
Total expected credit loss allowance4,000 6,132 
Movements in total expected credit loss allowance
Opening ECL at 31 Dec 2020
Write-offs
and other1
Income
statement
charge (credit)
Net ECL
decrease
Closing ECL at 31 Dec 2021
£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages1,027 83 (273)(190)837 
Credit cards923 (353)(49)(402)521 
Loans and overdrafts715 (309)39 (270)445 
UK Motor Finance501 (52)(151)(203)298 
Other229 (43)(21)(64)165 
Retail3,395 (674)(455)(1,129)2,266 
SME502 (10)(237)(247)255 
Corporate and other1,813 (132)(620)(752)1,061 
Commercial Banking2,315 (142)(857)(999)1,316 
Other422 2 (6)(4)418 
Total2
6,132 (814)(1,318)(2,132)4,000 

1
Contains adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.

2

Total ECL includes £2 million relating to other non customer-related assets (31 December 2020: £5 million).
4054

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group’s total expected credit loss allowance
At 31 Dec
2020
At 31 Dec
2019
£m£m
Loans and advances to customers
Drawn5,701 3,163 
Undrawn426 173 
6,127 3,336 
Loans and advances to banks4 — 
Debt securities1 
Amounts due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings 43 
Total expected credit loss allowance6,132 3,380 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements and expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgages273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 7.1 0.6 
Credit cards12,148 2,077 292  14,517 14.3 2.0 
Loans and overdrafts8,181 1,105 271  9,557 11.6 2.8 
UK Motor Finance12,247 1,828 201  14,276 12.8 1.4 
Other16,414 1,959 778  19,151 10.2 4.1 
Retail322,619 28,767 3,482 10,977 365,845 7.9 1.0 
SME27,260 3,002 843  31,105 9.7 2.7 
Corporate and other32,056 3,081 2,019  37,156 8.3 5.4 
Commercial Banking59,316 6,083 2,862  68,261 8.9 4.2 
Other1
47,143 34 62  47,239 0.1 0.1 
Total gross lending429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 7.2 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(909)(1,112)(1,573)(210)(3,804)
Net balance sheet carrying value428,169 33,772 4,833 10,767 477,541 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)
UK mortgages49 394 184 210 837 
Credit cards144 249 128  521 
Loans and overdrafts136 170 139  445 
UK Motor Finance2
108 74 116  298 
Other45 65 55  165 
Retail482 952 622 210 2,266 
SME61 104 90  255 
Corporate and other63 140 857  1,060 
Commercial Banking124 244 947  1,315 
Other406 2 9  417 
Total1,012 1,198 1,578 210 3,998 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements3
UK mortgages 1.8 9.5 1.9 0.3 
Credit cards1.2 12.0 56.9  3.6 
Loans and overdrafts1.7 15.4 67.5  4.7 
UK Motor Finance0.9 4.0 57.7  2.1 
Other0.3 3.3 13.8  0.9 
Retail0.1 3.3 20.9 1.9 0.6 
SME0.2 3.5 12.7  0.8 
Corporate and other0.2 4.5 42.5  2.9 
Commercial Banking0.2 4.0 34.8  1.9 
Other0.9 5.9 14.5  0.9 
Total0.2 3.4 27.4 1.9 0.8 
Movements in Group's total expected credit loss allowance
At 31 December 2020Net ECL
increase
Write-offs
and other
Income
statement
charge
At 31 December 2019
£m£m£m£m£m
Retail
UK Mortgages1,027 458 (20)478 569 
Credit cards923 377 (423)800 546 
Loans and overdrafts715 254 (485)739 461 
UK Motor Finance501 114 (112)226 387 
Other229 102 (39)141 127 
3,395 1,305 (1,079)2,384 2,090 
Commercial Banking2,315 1,052 (228)1,280 1,263 
Other422 395 (1)396 27 
Total1
6,132 2,752 (1,308)4,060 3,380 
1Includes reverse repos of £46.7 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 Total ECL includes £5and 2 include £95 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn balances exclude loans in recoveries in credit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £65 million, Retail other non customer-related assets (31 December 2019: £44 million).of £379 million, SME of £135 million and Corporate and other of £4 million.
4155

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowances
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers
Retail
UK Mortgages251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 9.8 0.6 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgagesUK mortgages251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 9.8 0.6 
Credit cardsCredit cards11,496 3,273 340  15,109 21.7 2.3 Credit cards11,496 3,273 340 — 15,109 21.7 2.3 
Loans and overdraftsLoans and overdrafts7,710 1,519 307  9,536 15.9 3.2 Loans and overdrafts7,710 1,519 307 — 9,536 15.9 3.2 
UK Motor FinanceUK Motor Finance12,786 2,216 199  15,201 14.6 1.3 UK Motor Finance12,786 2,216 199 — 15,201 14.6 1.3 
OtherOther17,879 1,304 184  19,367 6.7 1.0 Other17,879 1,304 184 — 19,367 6.7 1.0 
301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 10.5 0.8 
RetailRetail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 10.5 0.8 
SMESME27,015 4,500 791 — 32,306 13.9 2.4 
Corporate and otherCorporate and other29,882 9,438 2,694 — 42,014 22.5 6.4 
Commercial BankingCommercial BankingCommercial Banking56,897 13,938 3,485 — 74,320 18.8 4.7 
SME27,015 4,500 791  32,306 13.9 2.4 
Other29,882 9,438 2,694  42,014 22.5 6.4 
56,897 13,938 3,485  74,320 18.8 4.7 
Other1
Other1
57,422 12 69  57,503  0.1 
Other1
57,422 12 69 — 57,503 — 0.1 
Total gross lendingTotal gross lending415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 10.6 1.3 Total gross lending415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 10.6 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balancesECL allowance on drawn balances(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)ECL allowance on drawn balances(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)
Net balance sheet carrying valueNet balance sheet carrying value414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 Net balance sheet carrying value414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 
Group ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)
Retail
UK Mortgages107 468 191 261 1,027 45.6 18.6 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn)
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn)
UK mortgagesUK mortgages107 468 191 261 1,027 
Credit cardsCredit cards240 530 153  923 57.4 16.6 Credit cards240 530 153 — 923 
Loans and overdraftsLoans and overdrafts224 344 147  715 48.1 20.6 Loans and overdrafts224 344 147 — 715 
UK Motor Finance2
UK Motor Finance2
197 171 133  501 34.1 26.5 
UK Motor Finance2
197 171 133 — 501 
OtherOther46 124 59  229 54.1 25.8 Other46 124 59 — 229 
RetailRetail814 1,637 683 261 3,395 
SMESME142 234 126 — 502 
Corporate and otherCorporate and other172 475 1,161 — 1,808 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking314 709 1,287 — 2,310 
OtherOther410 — 12 — 422 
TotalTotal1,538 2,346 1,982 261 6,127 
814 1,637 683 261 3,395 48.2 20.1 
Commercial Banking
SME142 234 126  502 46.6 25.1 
Other172 475 1,161  1,808 26.3 64.2 
314 709 1,287  2,310 30.7 55.7 
Other410  12  422  2.8 
Total ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)1,538 2,346 1,982 261 6,127 38.3 32.3 
Group ECL allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a % of loans and advances to customers3
Retail
UK Mortgages 1.6 10.3 2.1 0.3 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to
customers and reverse repurchase agreements
3
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to
customers and reverse repurchase agreements
3
UK mortgagesUK mortgages— 1.6 10.3 2.1 0.3 
Credit cardsCredit cards2.1 16.2 56.0  6.1 Credit cards2.1 16.2 56.0 — 6.1 
Loans and overdraftsLoans and overdrafts2.9 22.6 64.2  7.6 Loans and overdrafts2.9 22.6 64.2 — 7.6 
UK Motor FinanceUK Motor Finance1.5 7.7 66.8  3.3 UK Motor Finance1.5 7.7 66.8 — 3.3 
OtherOther0.3 9.5 39.3  1.2 Other0.3 9.5 39.3 — 1.2 
0.3 4.4 25.2 2.1 1.0 
RetailRetail0.3 4.4 25.2 2.1 1.0 
SMESME0.5 5.2 19.1 — 1.6 
Corporate and otherCorporate and other0.6 5.0 43.2 — 4.3 
Commercial BankingCommercial BankingCommercial Banking0.6 5.1 38.5 — 3.1 
SME0.5 5.2 15.9  1.6 
Other0.6 5.0 43.1  4.3 
0.6 5.1 36.9  3.1 
OtherOther0.7  17.4  0.7 Other0.7 — 17.4 — 0.7 
TotalTotal0.4 4.6 31.6 2.1 1.3 Total0.4 4.6 32.4 2.1 1.3 
1Includes reverse repos of £54.4 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £192 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowancesallowance as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excludingexclude loans in recoveries in Creditcredit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £78 million, in Loans and overdrafts andRetail other of £34 million, in Business Banking within Retail other.SME of £132 million and Corporate and other of £6 million.

4256

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowances
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 20191
Loans and advances to customers
Retail
UK Mortgages257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 5.9 0.5 
Credit cards16,132 1,681 385 — 18,198 9.2 2.1 
Loans and overdrafts8,788 1,131 293 — 10,212 11.1 2.9 
UK Motor Finance13,884 1,942 150 — 15,976 12.2 0.9 
Other9,904 845 150 — 10,899 7.8 1.4 
305,751 22,534 2,484 13,714 344,483 6.5 0.7 
Commercial Banking
SME27,206 2,507 720 — 30,433 8.2 2.4 
Other43,032 3,418 2,415 — 48,865 7.0 4.9 
70,238 5,925 3,135 — 79,298 7.5 4.0 
Other2
53,778 46 28 — 53,852 0.1 0.1 
Total gross lending429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 6.0 1.2 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(669)(993)(1,359)(142)(3,163)
Net balance sheet carrying value429,098 27,512 4,288 13,572 474,470 
Group ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)
Retail
UK Mortgages24 281 122 142 569 49.4 21.4 
Credit cards203 218 125 — 546 39.9 22.9 
Loans and overdrafts160 193 108 — 461 41.9 23.4 
UK Motor Finance3
216 87 84 — 387 22.5 21.7 
Other36 40 51 — 127 31.5 40.2 
639 819 490 142 2,090 39.2 23.4 
Commercial Banking
SME45 127 101 — 273 46.5 37.0 
Other60 123 763 — 946 13.0 80.7 
105 250 864 — 1,219 20.5 70.9 
Other16 10 — 27 3.7 37.0 
Total ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)760 1,070 1,364 142 3,336 32.1 40.9 
Group ECL allowances (drawn and undrawn) as a % of loans and advances to customers4
Retail
UK Mortgages— 1.7 8.1 1.0 0.2 
Credit cards1.3 13.0 41.0 — 3.0 
Loans and overdrafts1.8 17.1 57.1 — 4.6 
UK Motor Finance1.6 4.5 56.0 — 2.4 
Other0.4 4.7 39.5 — 1.2 
0.2 3.6 21.5 1.0 0.6 
Commercial Banking
SME0.2 5.1 14.0 — 0.9 
Other0.1 3.6 31.6 — 1.9 
0.1 4.2 27.6 — 1.5 
Other— 2.2 35.7 — 0.1 
Total0.2 3.8 25.1 1.0 0.7 
1Prior period segmental comparatives restated. See note 4 on page F-31.
2Includes reverse repos of £51.6 billion.
3UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £201 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
4Total and Stage 3 ECL allowances as a percentage of drawn balances are calculated excluding loans in recoveries in Credit cards of £80 million and £104 million in Loans and overdrafts and £21 million in Business Banking within Retail other.

43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group Stage 2 loans and advances to customers
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowanceStage 2 loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowance
Up to date
1-30 days past due2
Over 30 days past dueTotalUp to date
1-30 days past due2
Over 30 days past dueTotal
PD movements
Other1
PD movements
Other1
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
At 31 December 2020
Retail
UK Mortgages22,569 215 1.0 3,078 131 4.3 1,648 43 2.6 1,723 79 4.6 29,018 468 1.6 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
UK mortgagesUK mortgages14,845 132 0.9 4,133 155 3.8 1,433 38 2.7 1,387 69 5.0 21,798 394 1.8 
Credit cardsCredit cards2,924 408 14.0 220 76 34.5 93 27 29.0 36 19 52.8 3,273 530 16.2 Credit cards1,755 176 10.0 210 42 20.0 86 20 23.3 26 11 42.3 2,077 249 12.0 
Loans and overdraftsLoans and overdrafts959 209 21.8 388 68 17.5 126 45 35.7 46 22 47.8 1,519 344 22.6 Loans and overdrafts505 82 16.2 448 43 9.6 113 30 26.5 39 15 38.5 1,105 170 15.4 
UK Motor FinanceUK Motor Finance724 62 8.6 1,321 55 4.2 132 37 28.0 39 17 43.6 2,216 171 7.7 UK Motor Finance581 20 3.4 1,089 26 2.4 124 19 15.3 34 9 26.5 1,828 74 4.0 
OtherOther512 56 10.9 651 44 6.8 69 14 20.3 72 10 13.9 1,304 124 9.5 Other538 41 7.6 990 15 1.5 294 6 2.0 137 3 2.2 1,959 65 3.3 
27,688 950 3.4 5,658 374 6.6 2,068 166 8.0 1,916 147 7.7 37,330 1,637 4.4 
RetailRetail18,224 451 2.5 6,870 281 4.1 2,050 113 5.5 1,623 107 6.6 28,767 952 3.3 
SMESME2,689 96 3.6 192 5 2.6 41 2 4.9 80 1 1.3 3,002 104 3.5 
Corporate and otherCorporate and other2,966 138 4.7 69 2 2.9 8   38   3,081 140 4.5 
Commercial
Banking
Commercial
Banking
Commercial
Banking
5,655 234 4.1 261 7 2.7 49 2 4.1 118 1 0.8 6,083 244 4.0 
SME4,229 219 5.2 150 6 4.0 40 5 12.5 81 4 4.9 4,500 234 5.2 
Other9,151 469 5.1 83 3 3.6 28 2 7.1 176 1 0.6 9,438 475 5.0 
13,380 688 5.1 233 9 3.9 68 7 10.3 257 5 1.9 13,938 709 5.1 
OtherOther1   11         12   Other18   6 1 16.7 2   8 1 12.5 34 2 5.9 
TotalTotal41,069 1,638 4.0 5,902 383 6.5 2,136 173 8.1 2,173 152 7.0 51,280 2,346 4.6 Total23,897 685 2.9 7,137 289 4.0 2,101 115 5.5 1,749 109 6.2 34,884 1,198 3.4 
At 31 December 2019
Retail
UK Mortgages10,846 83 0.8 2,593 107 4.1 1,876 33 1.8 1,620 58 3.6 16,935 281 1.7 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
UK mortgagesUK mortgages22,569 215 1.0 3,078 131 4.3 1,648 43 2.6 1,723 79 4.6 29,018 468 1.6 
Credit cardsCredit cards1,093 129 11.8 423 47 11.1 124 26 21.0 41 16 39.0 1,681 218 13.0 Credit cards2,924 408 14.0 220 76 34.5 93 27 29.0 36 19 52.8 3,273 530 16.2 
Loans and overdraftsLoans and overdrafts569 88 15.5 348 42 12.1 158 41 25.9 56 22 39.3 1,131 193 17.1 Loans and overdrafts959 209 21.8 388 68 17.5 126 45 35.7 46 22 47.8 1,519 344 22.6 
UK Motor FinanceUK Motor Finance543 27 5.0 1,232 30 2.4 135 21 15.6 32 28.1 1,942 87 4.5 UK Motor Finance724 62 8.6 1,321 55 4.2 132 37 28.0 39 17 43.6 2,216 171 7.7 
OtherOther324 14 4.3 363 12 3.3 80 11.3 78 6.4 845 40 4.7 Other512 56 10.9 651 44 6.8 69 14 20.3 72 10 13.9 1,304 124 9.5 
13,375 341 2.5 4,959 238 4.8 2,373 130 5.5 1,827 110 6.0 22,534 819 3.6 
RetailRetail27,688 950 3.4 5,658 374 6.6 2,068 166 8.0 1,916 147 7.7 37,330 1,637 4.4 
SMESME4,229 219 5.2 150 4.0 40 12.5 81 4.9 4,500 234 5.2 
Corporate and otherCorporate and other9,151 469 5.1 83 3.6 28 7.1 176 0.6 9,438 475 5.0 
Commercial
Banking
Commercial
Banking
Commercial
Banking
13,380 688 5.1 233 3.9 68 10.3 257 1.9 13,938 709 5.1 
SME2,014 104 5.2 410 17 4.1 56 10.7 27 — — 2,507 127 5.1 
Other1,881 75 4.0 1,238 45 3.6 61 3.3 238 0.4 3,418 123 3.6 
3,895 179 4.6 1,648 62 3.8 117 6.8 265 0.4 5,925 250 4.2 
OtherOther— — — 42 2.4 — — — — 46 2.2 Other— — 11 — — — — — — — — 12 — — 
TotalTotal17,270 520 3.0 6,649 301 4.5 2,491 138 5.5 2,095 111 5.3 28,505 1,070 3.8 Total41,069 1,638 4.0 5,902 383 6.5 2,136 173 8.1 2,173 152 7.0 51,280 2,346 4.6 
1Includes forbearance, client and product-specific indicators not reflected within quantitative PD assessments.
2Includes assets that have triggered PD movements, or other rules, given that being 1-29 days in arrears in and of itself is not a Stage 2 trigger.
3Expected credit loss allowancesallowance on loans and advances to customers (drawn and drawn)undrawn).
The Group’s assessment of a significant increase in credit risk, and resulting categorisation of Stage 2, includes customers moving into early arrears as well as a broader assessment that an up to date customer has experienced a level of deterioration in credit risk since origination. A more sophisticated assessment is required for up to date customers, which varies across divisions and product type. This assessment incorporates specific triggers such as a significant proportionate increase in probability of default relative to that at origination, recent arrears, forbearance activity, internal watch lists and external bureau flags. Up to date exposures in Stage 2 are likely to show lower levels of expected credit loss (ECL) allowance relative to those that have already moved into arrears given that an arrears status typically reflects a stronger indication of future default and greater likelihood of credit losses.
Retail
The Retail portfolio has remained robust and well positioned throughout the COVID-19 pandemic. Risk management has been enhanced since the last financial crisis, with strong affordability and indebtedness controls for both new and existing lending and a prudent risk appetite approach. This is evident in the significant improvement in credit quality and low arrears rates. However, customers have been significantly impacted by the pandemic and credit performance is expected to worsen as a result
The Group has provided significant levels of support to Retail customers through 2020. Since March 2020, the Group has approved over 1.3 million payment holidays, while personal current accounts customers have had access to up to £500 interest free arranged overdrafts and repossession activity has been suspended
As a result of payment holidays, the arrears rate across the portfolios is below pre-crisis levels
The Group has taken targeted steps across the Retail product offering to implement tighter credit quality controls on key risk indicators such as indebtedness and credit scores to ensure that customers and the bank are protected
The Group has participated fully in the Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) and the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) for Retail Business Banking customers, where government guarantees are in place at 100 per cent and 80 per cent, respectively
The Retail impairment charge increased to £2,384 million for 2020 compared to £1,038 million for 2019, largely driven by updates to the Group’s economic forecast following the coronavirus outbreak
4457

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Retail
Performance in the Retail portfolio has remained robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions, government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low. The portfolio has also benefitted from proactive risk management and the continued low interest rate environment
New business quality remains strong
Early arrears rates remain below pre-pandemic levels on personal lending products
Coverage across all IFRS 9 stages has decreased largely due to the improved macroeconomic outlook
Strong credit performance and an improved economic outlook have allowed the Group to progressively unwind many of the additional precautionary credit quality controls introduced during the pandemic, whilst continuing to ensure that customers and the Group remain protected against any remaining uncertainty in the economy and cost of living increases
A Retail impairment credit of £455 million for 2021 compares to a charge of £2,384 million for 2020. This significant decrease resulted from a release of customer related expected credit loss (ECL) allowances driven by the Group's improved macroeconomic outlook, combined with robust observed credit performance, with charges relating to flows to arrears and defaults remaining low despite expiry of all payment holidays
Existing IFRS 9 staging rules and triggers have been maintained across Retail, with additional tightening onthe exception of minor changes to the Loans & Overdraft portfolios to tighten criteria and align to the credit cards portfolio. Transfers between stages have been primarily driven by credit risk rating movements and the estimated impact of the economic factors on a customer’s forward lookingforward-looking default risk
Total Retail expected credit loss (ECL)customer related ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn loans and advances (coverage) increaseddecreased to 1.00.6 per cent (31 December 2019: 0.62020: 1.0 per cent) due to the favourable updates in the Group’s economic forecast. As at 31 December 2020,2021 the majority of ECL increasesdecreases are reflected within Stage 2 under IFRS 9, representing cases which have observed a Significant Increasesignificant increase in Credit Riskcredit risk since origination (SICR). As such the proportion of
Stage 2 loans and advances comprises 10.57.9 per cent of the Retail portfolio (31 December 2019: 6.52020: 10.5 per cent), of which 89.387.2 per cent are up to date, performing loans (31 December 2020: 89.3 per cent)
Stage 2 ECL coverage increasedhas decreased to 4.43.3 per cent (31 December 2019: 3.62020: 4.4 per cent), following updates toreflecting the Group’s economic forecast. This was offset by a slight reduction in UK Mortgages Stage 2 ECL coverage where a greater proportion of Stage 2 balances was from lower risk and up to date accounts, transferred into Stage 2 based on the forward looking view of their credit performanceimproved macroeconomic outlook
Stage 3 loans and advances have remained broadly flat at 0.81.0 per cent of total loans and advances (31 December 2019: 0.72020: 0.8 per cent and Stage 3 ECL coverage increaseddecreased to 25.220.9 per cent (31 December 2019: 21.52020: 25.2 per cent) due to a combination of the UK Mortgages and Motor Finance portfolios where the impact of the coronavirus outbreak on collateral values is expected to resultan increase in increased loss given default (LGD), in additionBBLS assets which hold zero ECL due to the impact of changes to collections processes withingovernment guarantee in place, and the credit cards portfolioimproved macroeconomic outlook
Portfolios
UK Mortgagesmortgages
The UK Mortgagesmortgages portfolio is well positioned with low arrears and a strong Loanloan to Valuevalue (LTV) profile. The Group has actively improved the quality of the portfolio over the years using robust affordability and credit controls, whilstwhile the balances of higher risk portfolios originated prior to 2008 have continued to reduce
WhilstWhile the housing market has remained resilient throughout 20202021 with strong customer demand, the Group has taken action to protect credit quality and participates in the government guarantee scheme for example by reducing the maximum LTV on new lending to 85greater than 90 per cent forLTVs, which provides risk mitigation at the majority of 2020highest exposures
Total loans and advances increased to £294.8£308.3 billion (31 December 2019: £289.22020: £294.8 billion), with a small reduction in average LTV to 43.542.1 per cent (31 December 2019: 44.92020: 43.5 per cent). The proportion of balances with an LTV greater than 90 per cent decreased to 0.60.5 per cent (31 December 2019: 2.52020: 0.6 per cent). The average LTV of new business decreased to 63.963.3 per cent (31 December 2019: 64.32020: 63.9 per cent)
TheThere was an impairment credit of £273 million for 2021 compared to a charge wasof £478 million for 2020, compared to a release of £167 million for 2019, reflecting charges dueimprovements to the weaker economic outlook.UK's macroeconomic outlook and improved house prices. Total ECL coverage increased toremained stable at 0.3 per cent (31 December 2019: 0.22020: 0.3 per cent)
Stage 2 loans and advances increaseddecreased to 9.87.1 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2019: 5.92020: 9.8 per cent) which has contributed to a slight reduction inand Stage 2 ECL coverage has increased to 1.61.8 per cent (31 December 2019: 1.72020: 1.6 per cent) given. These impacts also reflect improvements in the UK's macroeconomic outlook, with a greater proportion of Stage 2reduction in balances from lower risk up to date accounts, transferred into Stage 2 based on the forward lookingforward-looking view of their credit performance, in addition to favourable experience and house price assumptions
Stage 3 loans and advances remained stable at 0.6 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 0.6 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL Coverage increasedcoverage decreased to 10.39.5 per cent (31 December 2019: 8.12020: 10.3 per cent) largely due. This reflects favourable credit performance, in addition to the revised outlook forfavourable house prices across the multiple economic scenarios utilised for IFRS 9 provisioningprice assumptions (both observed and forecast)
Credit cards
Credit cards balances decreased to £15.1£14.5 billion (31 December 2019: £18.22020 £15.1 billion) due to reduced levels of customer spend resulting in a reduction in the volume of customers with highly utilised cards
TheThere was an impairment credit card book has performed well in recent years, with lower arrears ratesof £49 million for 2021, compared to the High Street Bank peer group
The impairmenta charge wasof £800 million for 2020, (2019: £503 million), with overallreflecting lower than anticipated arrears emergence and improvements in the macroeconomic outlook. Total ECL coverage increasingdecreased to 6.13.6 per cent (31 December 2019: 3.02020: 6.1 per cent)
This favourability is reflected in Stage 2 loans and advances which decreased to 14.3 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 21.7 per cent) and Stage 2 ECL coverage increasingwhich has reduced to 16.2 per cent (31 December: 13.0 per cent). The increases were largely due to the weaker outlook within our economic forecasts
In addition to increases caused by the weakening economic outlook, Stage 2 loans and advances also increased due to a stricter criteria adopted to trigger movements from Stage 1 to Stage 2. As a result, Stage 2 loans and advances as a percentage of total loans and advances increased to 21.712.0 per cent (31 December 2019: 9.22020: 16.2 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances decreased to 2.0 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 2.3 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage increased to 56.056.9 per cent (31 December 2019: 41.02020: 56.0 per cent). This resulted from a refresh of data used to calculate loss rates that reflects changes in collections policy, some realignment of coverage across stages and a strengthening of coverage given the current environment
4558

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Loans and overdrafts
Loans and advances for personal current account and the personal loans portfolios decreased to £9.5remained broadly flat at £9.6 billion (31 December 2019: £10.22020: £9.5 billion) due to reduced, reflecting recovering customer spend and demand for creditwith rising economic activity
The impairment charge was £39 million for the full year 2021 compared to £739 million for the full year 2020 compared to £445 million for the full year 2019.2020. This increasedecrease is primarily due to the weakerimproved outlook within our economicthe Group's macroeconomic forecasts, increasingin addition to favourable credit performance, reducing both Stage 2 ECL coverage to 22.615.4 per cent (31 December 2019:17.12020: 22.6 per cent) and overall ECL coverage to 7.64.7 per cent (31 December 2019: 4.62020: 7.6 per cent)
Commercial Banking
£15 billion - Sustainable financing for corporate and institutional clients by 2024
With the support of our Sustainability and ESG Financing team, created in 2021, we will help clients with an increasing volume of Sustainability and ESG-linked loan transactions, underpinned by our range of sustainable finance tools and propositions. The £15 billion ambition by 2024 will include:
Green use of proceeds - funding that can support a broad range of investments in sustainable business, including our Clean Growth Finance Initiative (CGFI), Real Estate & Housing green lending initiative, and renewables funding including refinance and acquisitions.
Sustainability and ESG Linked Loans - general corporate purpose lending where a margin ratchet is linked to achievement of ambitious, pre agreed company level ESG sustainability performance targets (SPT's).
Green, ESG, Transition, and Social bonds - which have a defined use of proceeds aligned to one or more of these activities.
Sustainability linked bond facilitation - where bond proceeds are for general corporate purposes, and the coupon increases if specific Key Performance Indicators ("KPI's") are not met.
Retail
£8 billion – Financing for electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles by 20241
We will enhance our transport offering with more flexible finance solutions, expanded manufacturer partnerships and services. We will also extend digital channels to include new direct to consumer leasing and financing solutions for EV charge points to meet emerging customer needs.
£10 billion – Green mortgage lending by 20242
As the largest UK Motor Financemortgage lender, we will continue our commitment to supporting customers grow their understanding of home energy efficiency, as well as providing innovative products that drive greater customer consideration for energy efficiency when purchasing their homes.
1Includes new lending advances for Black Horse and operating lease for Lex Autolease (gross);includes cars and vans.
2New mortgage lending on new and existing residential property that meets an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) rating of B or higher.
Scottish Widows
We estimate we’ll make discretionary investment of £20–25 billion into climate-aware investment strategies by 2025, with at least £1 billion invested in climate solutions investments.
We’re working closely with our core strategic fund management partners to develop and refine a range of funds that have a bias towards investing in companies that are adapting their businesses to be less carbon-intensive and/or developing climate solutions. We’ll invest in climate solutions investments either within these strategies or other funds. To define climate solution investments, we look at company revenue associated with activities such as alternative energy, energy efficiency, green building, sustainable agriculture, sustainable water and pollution prevention. We use MSCI Environmental Impact Revenue data to help with this classification.


15

BUSINESS
Own Operations
Our own environmental footprint
Since 2020, we have been tracking against three operational climate pledges, which were announced early in 2021. They are designed to accelerate our plan to tackle climate change and apply across our own operations.
Net zero and operational climate pledges
We will achieve net zero carbon operations by 2030. We plan to reduce our direct emissions (known as Scope 1 and 2 emissions) by at least 75 per cent (compared to 2018/19 levels)
We will maintain travel carbon emissions below 50 per cent of pre-COVID-19 (2018/19) levels, embedding for the long-term the reduced levels of commuting and business travel seen during the pandemic and supporting colleagues to switch to low carbon transport
We will reduce our total energy consumption by 50 per cent by 2030 (compared to 2018/19). While we already procure 100 per cent renewable electricity, it remains crucial that we reduce the amount of power we consume to support the UK in meeting an increasing demand for renewable energy
Achieving these goals will not be easy, and we will need to invest in our buildings over the next decade, supporting the UK in the transition towards a greener future. We will continue to deploy energy efficient technology including LED lighting and improved building controls. We will remove all use of natural gas from our estate, replacing gas boilers with low carbon heating technologies and create more sustainable branches in communities across the UK. Many of the technologies we will need to use are still new and we will work closely with our partners and supply chain to innovate.
We proudly remained Carbon Trust Standard certification holders for carbon reduction for the twelfth year in a row. We are also members of the UK Green Buildings Council and we have recently renewed our commitment to the World Green Building Council Net Zero Carbon Buildings Commitment to include the new embodied carbon reduction requirement for new build and major refurbishment by 2030. This renewed commitment, along with those we’ve already made by joining The Climate Group’s campaigns on renewable electricity (RE100), energy productivity (EP100) and electric vehicles (EV100), underpins our new climate pledges.
Additional operational sustainability and environmental ambitions
We also have broader environmental ambitions for our own operations, which focus on reducing waste and improving water efficiency, which include:
Reduce our operational waste by 80% by 2025, from a 2014/15 baseline
Reduce water consumption by 40% by 2030, from a 2009 baseline
We also achieved certification to the Carbon Trust Standard for Waste for the first time in 2021. The standard recognises organisations that follow best practice in measuring, managing, and reducing their waste impact.
Further information on operational carbon and sustainability performance can be located in our Lloyds Banking Group ESG Report 2021.
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions reporting for own operations
The Group has reported greenhouse gas emissions and environmental performance since 2009, and since 2013 this has been reported in line with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and its applicable regulations and the Large and Medium Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended) (i.e. Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (`SECR').
Our total emissions, in tonnes of CO2 equivalent, are reported in the table 7 below.
Methodology
The Group follows the principles of the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard to calculate Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions from our worldwide operations. The reporting period is 1 October 2020 to 30 September 2021, which is different to that of our Directors’ report (January to December 2021). This is in line with the regulations in that most of the emissions reporting year falls within the period of the Directors’ Report. Emissions are reported based on the operational control approach.
Reported Scope 1 emissions are those generated from gas and oil used in buildings, emissions from fuels used in UK company owned vehicles used for business travel and fugitive emissions from the use of air conditioning and chiller/refrigerant plants.
Reported Scope 2 emissions are generated from the use of electricity and are calculated using both the location and market-based methodologies.
Reported Scope 3 emissions relate to business travel and commuting undertaken by colleagues, emissions from colleagues working from home, operational waste and the extraction and distribution of each of our energy sources – electricity, gas and oil.
Table 7. Intensity ratio*
Legacy ScopeOct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based)1
11.613.515.8
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based)1
7.37.89.9
1Intensities have been restated for 2018–2019 and 2019–2020 to reflect changes to emissions data only, replacing estimated data with actuals; underlying income figures for those years have not changed. Scope 3 emissions include elements within the Group's own operations including emissions for waste, colleague commuting and business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). Additionally, October 19–September 20 and October 20-September 21 Scope 3 figures include an allowance for emissions from homeworkers not previously accounted for, owing to the significant increase in materiality year-on-year due to the impacts of COVID-19. Previous years have not been restated.
*Underlying income has been selected as the most accurate representation of value add in terms of measuring intensity ratio by the Group

16

BUSINESS
This year, our overall location-based carbon emissions were 188,806 tonnes CO2e; an 8.5 per cent since decrease since 2019/20. We have seen a continued reduction in our carbon emissions this reporting year, mainly driven by the impact of coronavirus on our operations. A large proportion of our colleagues continued to work from home in 2021 in line with travel restrictions and advice, which has led to a considerable reduction in both scope 1 and 3 business travel numbers reported.
Group energy consumption, electricity and gas, has also reduced mainly due to the impact of this operational shift. However, most of our buildings have still been operational and subject to our continued energy management and optimisation programme. Throughout winter months we have seen a small increase in our gas consumption due to additional fresh air requirements in our operational buildings. Overall, we have seen building energy consumption and associated carbon emissions reduced.
Since January 2019, our scope 2 market-based emissions figure is zero tCO2e, as we have procured renewable electricity mainly through our PPA and Green Tariff, and renewable certificates equal to the remainder to make up the total electricity consumption in each of the markets we operate.
Omissions
Emissions associated with joint ventures and investments are not included in this disclosure as they fall outside the scope of our operational boundary. The Group does not have any emissions associated with imported heat, steam or imported cooling and is not aware of any other material sources of omissions from our reporting.
Table 8. Carbon Emissions (tonnes CO2e)
Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
Total CO2e (market-based)118,057119,878180,002
Total CO2e (location-based)188,806206,236286,363
Total Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,401125,387154,917
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,084124,708152,546
Total Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,65339,02948,556
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,33638,72847,872
Total Scope 137,65339,02948,171
Total Scope 2 (market-based)385
Total Scope 2 (location-based)70,74886,358106,745
Total Scope 380,40480,849131,446
Global Energy Use (kWhs)Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep201
Oct18-
Sep191
Total Global Energy Use474,364,203517,459,510589,853,483
– Of Which UK Energy Use469,425,422512,208,678583,662,870
Total Building Energy468,594,150497,144,236550,290,468
Total Company Owned Vehicle Energy2,796,07314,436,43629,987,906
Total Grey Fleet Vehicle Energy2
2,973,9805,878,8389,575,109
1Restated 2018/2019 and 2019/20 emissions data to improve the accuracy of reporting, using actual data to replace estimates.
2Grey fleet refers to colleague and hired road vehicles being used for a business purpose. Emissions in tonnes CO2e in line with the c (2004). We are reporting to the revised Scope 2 guidance, disclosing a market-based figure in addition to the location-based figure. The methodology to derive reported Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions is provided in the Lloyds Banking Group Reporting Criteria statement.
Scope 1 emissions are emissions from activities for which the Group is responsible, including mobile and stationary combustion of fuel & operation of facilities.
Scope 2 emissions are emissions from the purchase of electricity, heat, steam, or cooling by the Group for its own use and have been calculated in accordance with GHG Protocol guidelines, in both location and market-based methodologies.
Scope 3 emissions include elements within the Group's own operations such as emissions from waste, colleague commuting and business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels).


17

BUSINESS
Energy efficiency
While COVID-19 has had an impact on our energy performance year on year, we have also seen consumption reduction driven by our continued energy efficiency initiatives. This workstream includes an energy optimisation programme that implements onsite optimisation and strategic alterations of Building Management System (BMS) and controls systems to match the run hours of plant to core operating hours and ensures temperature settings are aligned with Group comfort guidelines. In 2021, 45 deep-dives, 80 onsite optimisations, 9 remote optimisations and 531 bank holiday programming were completed, which resulted in a 101.5 GWh saving. We have also run a programme of LED lighting upgrades throughout our estate, leading to an estimated 1,280 MWh electricity saving.
Governance
Given the strategic importance of our sustainability ambitions and commitment in managing the impacts arising from climate change, our governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the Group’s environmental sustainability strategy and management of climate risk.
lbk-20211231_g2.jpg
Further information with respect to entity governance and executive oversight can be located in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Managing climate risks
The Group defines climate risk as, ‘the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a result of climate change, either directly or through our customers’. These may be realised from physical weather events, the impacts of the transition to net zero or as a consequence of the Group's response to managing this transition.
The Group’s response to managing climate risk affects many different stakeholder groups, including: our customers; colleagues; suppliers; regulators and policymakers; investors and NGOs and wider society. Our response will have a long-term bearing on these stakeholders and the Group’s business model.
Climate risk is considered a principal risk within the Group’s Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), reflecting its importance and the focus required. This ensures a consistent approach to embedding the consideration of climate risk in the Group’s activities, while also enhancing Board-level insight.
Climate risk also impacts many of the financial and non-financial risks the Group faces. Therefore, the Group has also taken steps to build and embed the consideration of climate-related risks throughout our ERMF to ensure comprehensive consideration across our business activities.
The Group and the wider industry continue to develop both the understanding and capabilities for managing climate risk, therefore, the Group’s approach will evolve significantly in the coming years.
18

BUSINESS
In addition to the risks already facing the Group, new risks will continue to emerge as a consequence of the transition to net zero. Further information on the emerging risks facing the Group, including those relating to climate change, can be found in the Risk overview section of this document.
Embedding climate risk management
In 2021, the Group established the Group Climate Risk Policy to provide an overarching framework for managing climate risks and opportunities. The policy is structured around seven principles, setting out clear requirements to help meet the Group’s ambitions relating to climate change, the TCFD recommendations and relevant regulatory expectations.
The policy is intended to support appropriate consideration of climate risks and opportunities across key activities. However, it also recognises that understanding of and capability for managing climate risk will continue to evolve. As such, some areas of the policy cannot currently be fully embedded at this time, with ongoing activity to implement these expectations continuing into 2022.
Principle 1
The Group will ensure climate risk is fully embedded through effective policies, procedures, processes, systems and controls.
Principle 2
The Group will identify and assess potential climate risks and opportunities, including how these could impact on the Group’s strategy, external commitments, operating model and customer journeys.
Principle 3
The Group will embed appropriate scenario analysis capabilities to support its understanding and proactive management of climate risk and opportunities.
Principle 4
The Group’s strategy will consider climate risks and opportunities to support our customers and meet our strategic objectives.
Principle 5
The Group will set an appropriate risk appetite for climate risk against which it will operate.
Principle 6
The Group’s governance structure will provide oversight of climate risk impacts, effective decision-making and timely escalation to senior management.
Principle 7
The Group’s reporting will support monitoring and management of climate risks as well as the Group’s relevant strategic commitments, alongside appropriate disclosures to inform our external stakeholders.
We have incorporated the consideration of climate risk into a number of key processes to ensure suitable Board-level visibility.
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board. This is currently focused on a qualitative assessment against external expectations and the Group's external commitments. This is supported by monitoring relevant information to track key climate risks throughout the Group. Although this remains in its infancy, reporting will continue to be enhanced as understanding and capabilities improve.
A Board approved Risk Appetite Statement for climate risk is in place, supported by an initial metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace. We are developing our approach to setting further quantitative and qualitative risk appetite metrics as our capabilities evolve, including appropriate consideration across our sub-groups.
The Group’s 2021 financial planning process captured an initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks and opportunities. We also piloted forecasting approaches to provide a high-level view of the Group’s lending financed emissions out to 2030. Both these areas are expected to evolve for future planning cycles, to ensure climate-related consideration is fully embedded.
We have considered and included commentary on climate-related risks as part of our annual Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). We have used expert judgement to assess the financial impacts for key risk types that are sensitive to climate change, under a number of different climate scenarios. We will enhance our approach further as our scenario analysis capabilities develop.
Key climate risks across the Group’s risk taxonomy
We have mapped how examples of the Group's key risks from climate change impact across the different risk types within the Group’s risk taxonomy.
While the majority of the Group’s principal risks are impacted in different ways, we have focused on the impact for the most material risk types, outlined in the table below.
These examples are useful to understand some of the key risks for the Group across its risk taxonomy; however, this is not an exhaustive view of all the potential climate risks across the Group’s other principal risks.







19

BUSINESS
Table 9. Examples of climate change impacts across other principal risks
Key risk types impactedDriverExamples of key risks for Lloyds Banking Group
StrategicReputation
Failure to deliver or sufficiently drive change through the Group’s net zero strategy, relating to its financed activities and own operations
CreditPolicy & Legal
Technology
Market
Reputation
Physical (Acute / Chronic)
Impacts from new and existing government policies, for example, around energy efficiency standards or the transition to electric vehicles
New technology and availability of electric vehicles reduce valuation of existing vehicles
Unproven new technologies required across other sectors in order to reduce emissions
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s lending
Increased costs from sustainable materials for Commercial Banking customers
Adverse coverage of the Group’s exposure to high emissions sectors
Flood damage to properties or coastal erosion, impacting our Retail Mortgage business or Commercial Real Estate portfolio
Reduced production for Commercial Banking customers as result of higher temperatures and/or changing weather patterns, for example, lower food or crop yields
MarketMarket
Physical (Chronic)
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s markets/trading business, investments and equities
Changes in longevity of the Group’s pension scheme members
Insurance underwritingPhysical (Acute / Chronic)
Potential for increased levels of General Insurance claims due to damage to property caused by changes to weather patterns and climate (e.g. flood, storm, coastal erosion)
ConductReputation
Policy & Legal
Conduct risk implications from the Group’s role in the transition, including potential impacts on mortgage customers, specific sectors, insurance and investment products
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Operational resiliencePhysical (Acute)
Damage to properties and systems within the Group estate, resulting in disruption to the Group’s services to customers
Disruption to services provided by the Group’s suppliers
Regulatory and legalPolicy & Legal
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Evolving regulatory standards for the Group’s operations
We are continuing to integrate consideration of climate risk as part of activity and processes for managing other principal risks in our enterprise Risk Management Framework. This has focused on the most material risks impacting the Group. We have refined our analysis of lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk, and over 2020 and 2021, we have completed sector deep dives.
Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk
We have refined our analysis of the sectors where we have lending to customers that may likely contribute a higher share of the Group's financed emissions. Not all customers in these sectors have high emissions or are exposed to significant transition risks. We continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
20

BUSINESS
Table 10. Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk1
Commercial Banking Sectors5
Total utilisation of Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Total limits of
Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customer3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)4
Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
Energy Use in BuildingsReal Estate17,711 19,461 22,218 24,875 3.5%3.9%57 62 
Social Housing5,538 5,966 10,556 11,137 1.1%1.2%84 91 
Agriculture6
Agriculture7,526 7,429 8,074 8,012 1.5%1.5%101 103 
Forestry10 10 15 16 —%—%67 65 
Fishing31 26 50 50 —%—%59 49 
TransportationPassenger Transport1,231 1,135 2,216 2,264 0.2%0.2%41 47 
Industrial Transport1,058 1,374 2,297 2,507 0.2%0.3%42 46 
Automotives7
1,007 1,485 5,452 6,315 0.2%0.3%26 25 
Energy Use in Industry8
Housebuilders655 870 2,872 3,023 0.1%0.2%28 28 
Cement, Construction Materials, Chemicals & Steel Manufacture279 317 814 1,098 0.1%0.1%27 25 
General Manufacturing1,167 1,300 3,745 4,329 0.2%0.3%35 33 
Food Manufacturing and Wholesalers762 1,002 2,802 3,069 0.2%0.2%18 22 
Other Construction9
921 1,052 2,094 2,457 0.2%0.2%35 37 
Energy Supply8
Oil & Gas10
987 1,099 2,520 3,815 0.2%0.2%39 35 
Utilities1,791 900 4,372 3,820 0.4%0.2%74 76 
Coal Mining<1<122 <0.1%<0.1%3 
Total40,674 43,434 70,097 76,809 8.1%8.6% — 
Loans and advances to
Retail customers (£m)
Undrawn loans and advances to Retail customers (£m)
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customers3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)10
Retail Division areasDec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
UK Mortgages308,344 294,806 17,151 19,456 61.2%58.4%232 224 
UK Motor Finance14,276 15,201 1,985 1,660 2.8%3.0%28 28 
Business Banking11
3,804 4,281  — 0.8%0.8%73 74 
Total326,424 314,288 19,136 21,116 64.8%62.3% — 
1Commercial Banking and Retail divisions only. Excludes Insurance & Wealth division.
2Commercial Banking division only, excludes Commercial Finance. All values are gross of significant risk transfers. 2020 restated on a consistent basis with 2021.
3Percentages calculated using total Group loans and advances to customers on a statutory basis, before allowance for impairment losses (£503,608 million at 31 December 2021, £504,603 million at 31 December 2020).
4Weighted average maturity calculated using total limits in Commercial Banking and loans and advances in Retail.
5Commercial lending classified using Office for National Statistics. Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes at legal entity level.
6Agriculture total utilisation includes Agricultural Mortgage Corporation (AMC) based on loans and advances to customers (2021: £4,246 million, 2020: £4,186 million). AMC total limits aligned to total utilisation.
7Includes automotive manufacture, retail and wholesale trade, rentals and parts but excludes finance captives and securitisations.
8Certain SIC codes have been removed from the table in 2021 to better represent the activities in the descriptions; Architectural, planning and consulting from Other construction, Water and sewerage from Utilities and Wholesaling activities from Food manufacturing.
9Construction excludes 41100 Development of building projects (included within Real estate) and 41202 Construction of domestic buildings (reported separately as Housebuilders).
10Excludes commodity traders.
11Sectors with increased climate risk only, as seen in Commercial Banking above. Undrawn loans and advances excluded.


21

BUSINESS
Sector reviews
We are committed to supporting the UK Government's vision of a sustainable low carbon future, so in line with our purpose of Helping Britain Prosper we have undertaken an analysis of how the Group’s principal risks are impacted by climate change.
As detailed in the table 10, we have identified sectors where we have lending to customers that are likely to be higher carbon emitters or be exposed to higher levels of physical or transition risks and continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
Across 2020 and 2021, we completed bespoke deep dives into each of these sectors which has been supported by external third-party consultants and sector experts. A summary of the sectors identified and the progress achieved to date is detailed in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
The follow-up actions as a result of these sector deep dives are to:
Develop sector business cases to identify and implement levers and opportunities, including any required changes to strategy
Identify any implications on credit risk appetite and policies by sector
Continue to improve Group financed emissions calculations by sector
Define business strategy by sector, including targets and metrics
Continue to embed climate risk into all sector reviews, including sectors not prioritised in this exercise, in 2022
Climate Scenario Analysis
As the understanding and importance of climate risk progresses, climate scenario analysis is becoming an increasingly important risk management tool assisting the identification, measurement and ongoing assessment of climate risks that pose threats to Lloyds Banking Group’s strategic objectives.
In a first generation exercise, the Group analysed the impact of three scenarios on a sample of the balance sheet compromising credit portfolios in Commercial Banking, Retail Mortgage and Motor Financebusinesses prior to the wider Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario (CBES) exercise undertaken for the Bank of England. The Group ran workshops with subject matter experts providing an assessment of the scenario analysis results. This helped to advance the understanding of the risks and financial implications in different sectors and business areas resulting from climate change, as well as suggesting what potential management actions might be required under the different scenarios.
Climate scenario analysis is a fast-evolving discipline, requiring new skills and capabilities to be established with appropriate levels of governance. Participating in the Bank of England’s CBES exercise enabled the Group to explore the resilience of its credit portfolios under three different climate scenarios (early policy action, late policy action, no additional policy action) over the next 30 years to 2050. The CBES exercise was intended to be a learning exercise and the Group took away key learnings. These, along with further details on Climate Scenario Analysis, are described in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Looking Forward
The Group has made good progress in further incorporating climate change into the Group strategy and business operations as well as prioritising the areas of our businesses where we see the greatest opportunity to support and accelerate the transition to a low carbon economy.
We are enhancing our disclosures with our inaugural standalone Climate Report and have published key sector ambitions for high-emissions and fossil fuel sectors, committing to a full phase-out from thermal coal.
In 2022, we will continue to develop propositions and tools for our customers to help them reduce their emissions, while further advancing our work on reducing our own operational and supply chain emissions.
We will also look to report additional sector ambitions in 2022 for parts of our remaining carbon-intensive sectors, including residential mortgages, transportation and automotive activity beyond Retail (Motor). In addition, we will be developing further ambitions and a transition plan in accordance with the timelines stipulated by the NZBA.
Given this progress and the evolving best practice for climate votes, we do not intend at present to bring a climate vote to the 2022 AGM. We will continue to consider a vote on a year-by-year basis.
Managing the risk from climate change remains a key priority for the Group. We expect to enhance our capabilities by leveraging the learnings from our participation in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario and undertaking further climate scenario analysis in 2022. This will allow us to better understand the resilience of the Group's business model to climate risks.
We will continue to develop our assessment of the sectors at increased risk from climate change or the transition to net zero, and augment our climate related policies as our capabilities strengthen. Focused Board level reviews will consider how our strategy and credit portfolios will evolve as we transition to net zero, including the further development of our risk management capabilities.
Continued embedding of climate risk is essential for the Group to achieve our strategy in transitioning to net zero. Our understanding of climate-related risks and opportunities continues to develop and our strategy and risk management activities will evolve accordingly in order to best respond.
LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS
During the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to threatened or actual legal proceedings and regulatory reviews and investigations both in the UK and overseas. Further discussion on the Group's regulatory and legal provisions is set out in note 29 to the financial statements and on its contingent liabilities relating to other legal actions and regulatory matters is set out in note 39 to the financial statements.
22

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The results discussed below are not necessarily indicative of Lloyds Bank Group’s results in future periods. The following information contains certain forward looking statements. For a discussion of certain cautionary statements relating to forward looking statements, see Forward looking statements.
The following discussion is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this annual report. For a discussion of the accounting policies used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, see Accounting policies in note 2 to the financial statements.


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Loan portfolio
23

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty are discussed in note 3 to the financial statements.
FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
Future developments in relation to the Lloyds Bank Group’s IFRS reporting are discussed in note 46 to the financial statements.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2021 AND 2020
INCOME STATEMENT COMMENTARY
20212020
£m£m
Net interest income11,036 10,770 
Other income3,637 3,815 
Total income14,673 14,585 
Operating expenses(10,206)(9,196)
Impairment credit (charge)1,318 (4,060)
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 
Tax (expense) credit(583)137 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders4,826 1,023 
Profit attributable to other equity holders344 417 
Profit attributable to equity holders5,170 1,440 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests32 26 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
During the year ended 31 December 2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a profit before tax of £5,785 million, an increase of £4,456 million compared with £1,329 million in 2020; the increase reflected, in particular, the improved economic outlook for the UK in 2021. The Lloyds Bank Group profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 2021 included a profit before tax of £5,024 million from its Retail division and a profit before tax of £1,536 million from its Commercial Banking division.
Total income increased by £88 million, or 1 per cent, to £14,673 million in 2021 compared with £14,585 million in 2020, reflecting an increase of £266 million in net interest income partly offset by a decrease of £178 million in other income.
Net interest income was £11,036 million in 2021, an increase of £266 million, or 2 per cent compared to £10,770 million in 2020. Average interest earning assets increased by £2,762 million to £576,276 million in 2021 compared to £573,514 million in 2020 as growth in new mortgage lending was offset by lower balances in the closed mortgage book, credit cards and motor finance, as well as the continued optimisation of the Corporate and Institutional book within Commercial Banking. The net interest margin increased as the benefit of lower funding costs more than offset the impact of a change in asset mix.
Other income was £178 million, or 5 per cent, lower at £3,637 million in 2021 compared to £3,815 million in 2020.
Net trading income was £365 million lower at £385 million in 2021 compared with £750 million in 2020, reflecting the change in fair value of interest rate derivatives and foreign exchange contracts in the banking book not mitigated through hedge accounting. Other operating income was £51 million, or 2 per cent, lower at £1,999 million in 2021 compared to £2,050 million in 2020, reflecting lower levels of operating lease rental income, as a result of a reduction in the Lex vehicle fleet size, and reduced gains on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, partly offset by increases in the level of cost recharges to other Lloyds Banking Group entities. Fee and commission income was £271 million, or 14 per cent, higher at £2,195 million compared to £1,924 million in 2020 as a result of increases across most fee categories as customer activity increased and the economy improved. Fee and commission expense increased by £33 million, or 4 per cent, to £942 million compared with £909 million in 2020, as a consequence of increased customer activity.
Operating expenses increased by £1,010 million, or 11 per cent to £10,206 million in 2021 compared with £9,196 million in 2020 primarily reflecting higher charges for regulatory and legal provisions (see below). Staff costs were £77 million, or 2 per cent, higher at £3,692 million in 2021 compared with £3,615 million in 2020; as the impact of staff reductions and lower levels of redundancy costs has been offset by higher bonus accruals following the recovery in the Group's profitability. Premises and equipment costs were £210 million lower at £215 million in 2021 compared with £425 million in 2020, reflecting higher gains on disposal of operating lease assets at the end of the contract term and gains on disposal of Group premises. Other expenses were £1,040 million, or 42 per cent, higher at £3,522 million in 2021 compared with £2,482 million in 2020, driven by the increase in charges for regulatory and legal provisions and higher communications and data processing costs as the Group develops and maintains its information technology infrastructure. Depreciation and amortisation costs were £107 million, or 4 per cent, higher at £2,777 million in 2021 compared to £2,670 million in 2020, in part reflecting a software asset write-off as a result of investment in new technology and systems infrastructure.
The Group incurred a regulatory and legal provisions charge in operating expenses of £1,177 million in 2021 compared to £414 million in 2020. The charge in 2021 includes the costs in relation to HBOS Reading and litigation costs and redress and operational costs in respect of litigation and other ongoing legacy programmes. During 2021, £790 million has been recognised in relation to HBOS Reading estimated future awards and operational costs, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth quarter. This reflects the Group's estimate of its full liability and includes the expected future cost in relation to the independent Foskett Panel re-review, operational costs in relation to Dame Linda Dobbs' review which is considering whether the issues relating to HBOS Reading were investigated and appropriately reported by the Group during the period January 2009 to January 2017 and other programme costs. The final outcome could be significantly different once the re-review is concluded.
24

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Impairment improved by £5,378 million to a credit of £1,318 million in 2021 compared with a charge of £4,060 million in 2020, largely reflecting the improved UK macroeconomic outlook. Overall the Group’s loan portfolio decreased slightlycontinues to be well-positioned, reflecting a prudent through-the-cycle approach to credit risk with high levels of security. The Group's ECL allowance reduced in the year by £2,132 million to £4,000 million, compared to £6,132 million at 31 December 2020, following the improvements to the UK economic outlook. Observed credit performance remained robust in the year, with the flow of assets into arrears, defaults and write-offs remaining at low levels.
The Group’s base case economic scenario used to calculate the ECL allowance assumes that unemployment will remain close to the reduced level of c.4.3 per cent observed in the fourth quarter following the end of the coronavirus job retention scheme. The ECL allowance continues to reflect a probability-weighted view of future economic scenarios built out from £16.0 billion for 2019the base case and its associated conditioning assumptions, with a 30 per cent weighting applied to £15.2 billion forbase case, upside and downside scenarios and a 10 per cent weighting to the severe downside. All scenarios have improved since the start of the year, following the changes made to the base case outlook.
In 2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a tax expense of £583 million compared to a tax credit of £137 million in 2020. The tax charge in 2021 includes a credit of £1,168 million arising on the remeasurement of deferred tax assets following the substantive enactment by the UK Government of an increase in the corporation tax rate from 19 per cent to 25 per cent, effective on 1 April 2023.
The Lloyds Bank Group’s post-tax return on average total assets increased to 0.86 per cent compared to 0.24 per cent in the year ended 31 December 2020.
25

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
BALANCE SHEET AND CAPITAL COMMENTARY
20212020
£m£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks54,279 49,888 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,798 1,674 
Derivative financial instruments5,511 8,341 
Loans and advances to banks1
4,478 4,324 
Loans and advances to customers1
430,829 425,694 
Reverse repurchase agreements1
49,708 56,073 
Debt securities4,562 5,137 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 738 
Financial assets at amortised cost490,316 491,966 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,786 27,260 
Other assets1
23,159 20,810 
Total assets602,849 599,939 
Liabilities
Deposits from banks1
3,363 6,230 
Customer deposits1
449,373 425,152 
Repurchase agreements1
30,106 28,184 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 6,875 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,537 6,831 
Derivative financial instruments4,643 8,228 
Debt securities in issue48,724 59,293 
Subordinated liabilities8,658 9,242 
Other liabilities9,183 8,786 
Total liabilities562,077 558,821 
Equity
Ordinary shareholders’ equity36,410 35,105 
Other equity instruments4,268 5,935 
Non-controlling interests94 78 
Total equity40,772 41,118 
Total equity and liabilities602,849 599,939 
1See note 1 regarding changes to presentation.
Total assets were £2,910 million higher at £602,849 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £599,939 million at 31 December 2020. Cash and balances at central banks were £4,391 million, or 9 per cent, higher at £54,279 million compared to £49,888 million at 31 December 2020 due to reduced market activityreflecting increased liquidity holdings as a result of the inflow of customer deposits; and retirement benefit assets were £2,817 million higher at £4,531 million compared to £1,714 million at 31 December 2020 as a result of actuarial gains and employer contributions. Financial assets at amortised cost decreased by £1,650 million to £490,316 million compared to £491,966 million at 31 December 2020. Loans and advances to customers increased in the year by £5,135 million to £430,829 million, compared to £425,694 million at 31 December 2020, however this was more than offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements, held for liquidity purposes, of £6,365 million, or 11 per cent, from £56,073 million at 31 December 2020 to £49,708 million at 31 December 2021. The increase in loans and advances to customers reflected growth in the open mortgage book, partly offset by reductions in the closed mortgage book, other Retail balances and Commercial lending (in part due to optimisation activities). Derivative financial instruments were £2,830 million lower at £5,511 million compared to £8,341 million at 31 December 2020, driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total liabilities were £3,256 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £562,077 million compared to £558,821 million at 31 December 2020. Customer deposits were £24,221 million, or 6 per cent, higher at £449,373 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £425,152 million at 31 December 2020. There has been continued growth in retail current account and savings balances, reflecting reduced consumer spending during the coronavirus pandemic, which has only been partly offset by lower levels of commercial deposits. Repurchase agreement balances were £1,922 million, or 7 per cent, higher at £30,106 million compared to £28,184 million at 31 December 2020 however deposits from banks were £2,867 million lower at £3,363 million compared to £6,230 million at 31 December 2020 reflecting a reduced need for this source of funding. Debt securities in issue were £10,569 million lower at £48,724 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £59,293 million at 31 December 2020 as the availability of Government support and liquidity measures and increased levels of customer deposits have reduced the need for new funding issuance. Amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings were £5,385 million lower at £1,490 million compared to £6,875 million at 31 December 2020 and derivative liabilities were £3,585 million lower at £4,643 million compared to £8,228 million at 31 December 2020, again driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total equity has decreased by £346 million, or 1 per cent, from £41,118 million at 31 December 2020 to £40,772 million at 31 December 2021 as retained profits for the year have been offset by dividends paid and a net redemption of other equity instruments; and a negative movement on the Group's cash flow hedging reserve has been offset by a positive remeasurement in respect of the Group's post-retirement defined benefit schemes.
26

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to 16.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year and a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment credit through profits.
Risk-weighted assets reduced by £9,286 million, or 5 per cent, from £170,862 million at 31 December 2020 to £161,576 million at 31 December 2021. This was primarily as a result of optimisation activity undertaken in Commercial Banking, partially offset by balance sheet growth in the business. Credit migrations have had a limited impact on the risk-weighted asset position, in part due to the increase in house prices.
The transitional total capital ratio remained at 23.5 per cent, with the benefit of the increase in CET1 capital and reduction in risk-weighted assets broadly offset by reductions in Additional Tier 1 (AT1) and Tier 2 capital instruments. The latter largely reflected the reduction in transitional limits applied to legacy tier 1 and tier 2 capital instruments and calls made on both AT1 and tier 2 capital instruments, partially offset by new issuances.
The UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 5.5 per cent) as a result of the reduction in the fully loaded total tier 1 capital position which was partially offset by the reduction in the leverage exposure measure, the latter primarily reflecting movements in securities financing transactions and off-balance sheet items, net of increased balance sheet lending.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2019
The Lloyds Bank Group’s results for the year ended 31 December 2019, and a discussion of the results for the year ended 31 December 2020 compared to those for the year ended 31 December 2019, were included in the 2020 Annual Report on Form 20-F, filed on 11 March 2021.
27

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND INTEREST INCOME AND EXPENSE
202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Assets1
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements62,704 70 0.11 57,610 114 0.20 47,490 269 0.57 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements482,767 12,334 2.55 483,906 13,358 2.76 475,385 15,281 3.21 
Debt securities4,725 74 1.57 5,046 92 1.82 5,223 118 2.26 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income26,080 442 1.69 26,952 302 1.12 26,153 430 1.64 
Total interest-earning assets of banking book576,276 12,920 2.24 573,514 13,866 2.42 554,251 16,098 2.90 
Total interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 16 0.98 2,319 26 1.12 8,354 73 0.87 
Total interest-earning assets577,907 12,936 2.24 575,833 13,892 2.41 562,605 16,171 2.87 
Allowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised cost(5,115)(5,332)(3,354)
Non-interest earning assets29,767 34,375 F30,671 
Total average assets and interest income602,559 12,936 2.15 604,876 13,892 2.30 589,922 16,171 2.74 
1The line items below are included on the face of the Group's balance sheet.
202120202019
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:
Banking business576,276 11,036 1.92 573,514 10,770 1.88 554,251 12,220 2.20 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 (77)(4.72)2,319 (80)(3.45)8,354 (77)(0.92)
577,907 10,959 1.90 575,833 10,690 1.86 562,605 12,143 2.16 
28

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds1
Deposits by banks4,939 66 1.34 6,866 82 1.19 6,262 87 1.39 
Customer deposits324,058 386 0.12 316,071 1,270 0.40 315,717 2,054 0.65 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements22,415 22 0.10 32,189 117 0.36 27,935 301 1.08 
Debt securities in issue2
54,333 746 1.37 67,239 761 1.13 67,096 476 0.71 
Lease liabilities1,494 30 2.01 1,656 39 2.36 1,617 39 2.41 
Subordinated liabilities9,046 634 7.01 11,510 827 7.19 9,315 921 9.89 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking book416,285 1,884 0.45 435,531 3,096 0.71 427,942 3,878 0.91 
Total interest-bearing financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,689 93 1.39 7,824 106 1.35 10,053 150 1.49 
Total interest-bearing liabilities422,974 1,977 0.47 443,355 3,202 0.72 437,995 4,028 0.92 
Interest-free liabilities
Non-interest bearing customer accounts119,712 95,629 74,130 
Other interest-free liabilities18,289 24,867 37,147 
Non-controlling interests, other equity instruments and shareholders’ funds41,584 41,025 40,650 
Total average liabilities and interest expense602,559 1,977 0.33 604,876 3,202 0.53 589,922 4,028 0.68 
1The line items below are included on the face of the Group’s balance sheet except for liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements, which are disclosed in note 41; and lease liabilities which are disclosed in note 26.
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.30 per cent (2020: 2.42 per cent; 2019: 2.25 per cent).
Average balances are based on daily averages for the principal areas of the Group’s banking activities with monthly or less frequent averages used elsewhere. Management believes that the interest rate trends are substantially the same as they would be if all balances were averaged on the same basis.
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis between UK and non-UK activities is not provided.
29

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME – VOLUME AND RATE ANALYSIS
The following table allocates changes in net interest income between volume, rate and their combined impact for 2021 compared with 2020 and for 2020 compared with 2019.
2021 compared with 2020
increase/(decrease)
2020 compared with 2019
increase/(decrease)
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Interest income
At amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements(44)37 (61)(20)(155)57 (175)(37)
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements(1,024)207 (1,212)(19)(1,923)274 (2,158)(39)
Debt securities(18)(9)(10)1 (26)(4)(23)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income140 (1)141  (128)13 (137)(4)
Total banking book interest income(946)234 (1,142)(38)(2,232)340 (2,493)(79)
Total interest income on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss(10)(21)56 (45)(47)(53)21 (15)
Total interest income(956)213 (1,086)(83)(2,279)287 (2,472)(94)
Interest expense

Deposits by banks(16)(23)10 (3)(5)(12)(1)
Customer deposits(884)34 (894)(24)(784)(785)(1)
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements(95)(36)(85)26 (184)45 (199)(30)
Debt securities in issue(15)(145)160 (30)285 283 
Lease liabilities(9)(3)(6) — (1)— 
Subordinated liabilities(193)(24)(174)5 (94)217 (252)(59)
Total banking book interest expense(1,212)(197)(989)(26)(782)274 (966)(90)
Total interest expense on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(13)(35)33 (11)(44)(33)(14)
Total interest expense(1,225)(232)(956)(37)(826)241 (980)(87)
30

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK OVERVIEW
EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL
Our approach to risk
Lloyds Bank Group adopts the Lloyds Banking Group enterprise risk management framework supplemented by additional management and control activities to address the Lloyds Bank Group's specific requirements.
Employing informed risk decision-making and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture; striving to protect the Group and its stakeholders.
A prudent approach to risk is fundamental to our business model and drives our participation choices.
The risk management section from pages 36 to 89 provides an in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, including the approach to risk appetite, risk governance, stress testing and detailed analysis of the principal risk categories including the framework by which these risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Our enterprise risk management framework
Lloyds Banking Group’s comprehensive enterprise risk management framework, that applies to Lloyds Bank Group, is the foundation for the delivery of effective risk control. It enables proactive identification, active management and monitoring of the Group’s risks, which is supported by our One Risk and Control Self-Assessment approach.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated to ensure they remain fully in line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s Board risk appetite statement annually. Board-level risk appetite metrics are augmented by further sub-Board level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business metrics and limits. Regular close monitoring and comprehensive reporting to all levels of management and the Board ensures appetite limits are maintained and subject to stress analysis at a risk type and portfolio level, as appropriate.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board down to individuals. Senior executives are supported by a committee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and enable effective Board engagement and decision-making. More information on our Risk committees is available on pages 40 to 41.
lbk-20211231_g3.jpg
Risk culture and the customer
Following the successful transition between the previous, interim and new Lloyds Banking Group Chief Executives, a transparent risk culture continues to resonate across the organisation and is supported by the Board and its tone from the top.
Risk management requires all colleagues to play their part, with individuals taking responsibility for their actions. The Group aims to support this through ongoing investment in infrastructure and developing colleagues’ capabilities.
Senior management articulate the core risk values to which the Group aspires, based on the Group’s prudent business model and approach to risk management with the Board’s guidance.
The Group is open, honest and transparent with colleagues working in collaboration with business areas to:
Support effective risk management and provide constructive challenge
Share lessons learned and understand root causes when things go wrong
Consider horizon risks and opportunities
The Group aims to maintain a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers through the economic cycle.

31

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Connectivity of risks and our strategic risk management framework
COVID-19 has demonstrated how individual risks in aggregate, through their interconnectivity, can place significant pressure on the Group’s strategy, business model and performance. In response to these unprecedented events, a new strategic risk management framework was approved.
Extensive work has been undertaken in 2021 to build a deeper analytical understanding of the Group’s key strategic risk themes and risk connectivity. The Group is committed to advancing these capabilities in 2022, while further integrating strategic risk into Group-wide business planning, placing it at the heart of our strategic priorities and Group-wide risk management.
The risks can be defined as:
Principal: The Board-approved enterprise-wide risk categories, including strategic risk, used to monitor and report the risk exposures posing the greatest impact to the Group.
Strategic: A principal risk arising from:
A failure to understand the potential impact of strategic responses on existing risk types
Incorrect assumptions about internal or external operating environments
Inappropriate strategic responses and business plans
Emerging: A future internal or external event or trend, which could have a material positive or adverse impact on the Group and our customers, but where the probability, timescale and/or materiality may be difficult to accurately assess.

PRINCIPAL RISKS
Despite a resilient recovery, 2021 has been another year of significant uncertainty, with COVID-19 accelerating broad structural changes, including ways of working and impacts to global and domestic economies.
COVID-19 has continued to have a significant impact on all risk types in 2021. Understanding and managing its impacts dynamically has remained a major area of focus. The Group has responded quickly to the challenges faced, putting in place risk mitigation strategies and refining its investment and strategic plans.
All of the Group’s principal risks, which are outlined in this section, are reported regularly to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
As part of a review of the Group’s risk categories, governance risk is no longer a principal risk and is now classified as a secondary risk category. A detailed review of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework is planned for 2022, which may result in further changes to our principal risks.
The risk management section from pages 36 to 89 provides a more in-depth picture of how each principal risk is managed within the Group.
Risk trends: è Stable risk é Increased risk ê Decreased risk y New risk embedding
Market risk è
The Group’s structural hedge has increased to £235 billion (2020: £181 billion) mostly due to a significant growth in customer deposits. Both customer behaviour and hedging of these balances are reviewed regularly to ensure near-term interest rate exposure is managed.
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes have seen an improvement in IAS 19 accounting surplus to £4.3 billion, (2020: £1.5 billion). This is due to strong asset returns, an increase in the discount rate and deficit reduction contributions, partially offset by higher gilt yields and inflation.
Key mitigating actions:
Structural hedge programmes implemented to stabilise earnings
Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset and liability matching is undertaken
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes continue to monitor their credit allocation and longevity hedge as well as the hedges in place against nominal rate and inflation movements
Credit risk ê
The Group continued to actively support its customers throughout 2021, with a range of flexible options and payment holidays, as well as lending through the UK Government support schemes. This support, alongside the other public policy interventions, has contributed to the economic recovery in 2021 and helped keep credit defaults and business failures at low levels.
The improved economic outlook was a key driver of the 2021 impairment credit of £1,318 million, which compares to the full year impairment charge of £4,060 million taken in 2020 in light of anticipated losses resulting from the pandemic. Although reduced in 2021, the Group still holds appropriate customer related expected credit loss allowances of £3,998 million (2020: £6,127 million).
Key mitigating actions:
Prudent, through-the-cycle risk appetite
Robust risk assessment, models and credit sanctioning
Sector and asset class concentrations closely monitored and controlled
Group-wide Road to Recovery programme established to manage and support increases in businesses experiencing financial difficulties

32

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Funding and liquidity risk ê
The Group maintained its robust funding and liquidity position throughout 2021.
Ahead of the closure of the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME) in October 2021, the Group drew additional funds, taking the total amount outstanding to £30 billion as at 31 December 2021, facilitating a significant reduction in money market and wholesale funding.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements
Significant customer deposit base, driven by inflows to trusted brands
Capital risk ê
The Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to £226 million for 2020 compared to £203 million for 2019, due to the weaker outlook within our economic forecasts. ECL coverage increased to 3.316.7 per cent (31 December 2019: 2.42020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year and a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment credit through profits.
The implementation of regulatory changes on 1 January 2022 reduced the CET1 capital ratio to 14.1 per cent which remains above internal risk appetite levels and minimum regulatory capital requirements.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group has a capital management framework that includes the setting of capital risk appetite and capital planning and stress testing activities
UpdatesThe Group monitors early warning indicators and maintains a Capital Contingency Framework as part of the Lloyds Banking Group Recovery Plan which are designed to Residual Value (RV)identify emerging capital concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken, if needed
Change/execution risk è
The change/execution risk profile has remained stable with proactive reprioritisation and Voluntary Termination (VT)management of the Group’s change portfolio continuing through 2021. Focus has remained on the ongoing evolution and strengthening of the control framework and change capability required to support the Group’s business and technology transformation plans.
Key mitigating actions:
Continued evolution and enhancement of the Group change policy, method and control environment
Measurement and reporting of change/execution risk held
Providing sufficient skilled resources to safely deliver and embed the change portfolio and support future transformation plans
Conduct risk ê
Overall improvement in conduct risk as a result of the Group’s continued support to customers impacted by COVID-19, with focus on outcomes for customers with UK Government support schemes, treating customers in financial difficulty fairly and working through legacy issues.
Key mitigating actions:
Robust conduct risk framework in place to support delivery of fair customer outcomes, market integrity and competition requirements
Active engagement with regulatory bodies and key stakeholders to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus continues to meet evolving stakeholder expectations
Data risk è
Investment continues to be made to enhance the maturity of data risk management, data capabilities and focus on the end-to-end management of data risk, including our suppliers.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivered a data strategy and enhanced capability in data management and privacy, assurance of suppliers and data controls and processes
Embedded data by design and data ethics principles into the data science lifecycle
People risk è
In 2021, there has been continued pressure on colleague workloads and further significant changes to ways of working, as colleagues who worked from home during the pandemic transition into a workstyle based on their role. Colleague feedback has been provided via the annual colleague survey, and work is underway to address the key themes identified.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people with the required capabilities, together with implementation of rigorous succession planning for our senior leaders
Continued focus on the Group’s culture by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce appropriate behaviours

33

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience risk ê
Despite ongoing heightened risks from COVID-19, business continuity plans have remained resilient. Policy statements published by the regulators in March 2021 have driven further activity to enhance the existing approach to operational resilience. Technology resilience remains a key area of focus.
Key mitigating actions:
Refreshed operational resilience strategy to deliver against Personal Contract Purchase (PCP)new regulation and Hire Purchase (HP) lending includedimprove the Group’s ability to respond to incidents while delivering key services to customers
Investment in technology improvements, including enhancements to the resilience of systems that support critical business processes
Operational risk è
Against the backdrop of COVID-19, economic uncertainty and changes in senior management throughout the year, the operational risk profile has remained broadly stable with operational losses in line with previous years. Cyber and security, technology and sourcing continue to be the most material operational risk areas.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherent risks faced
The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance
Model risk é
Model risk remains above pre-pandemic levels. The effect of government-led customer support schemes weakened relationships between model inputs and outputs, and there remains a reliance on the use of judgement, particularly in the areas of forecasting and impairment. However, recent months have seen more stable patterns for model outputs, and model drivers are expected to remain valid in the longer term.
In common with the rest of the industry, changes required to capital models following new regulations will create a temporary increase in the risk relating to these models during the period of transition.
Key mitigating actions:
The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the impairment charge, however becauseGroup
Regulatory and legal risk è
Regulatory engagement through 2021 has focused on the Group’s response to COVID-19, strategic transformation and regulatory initiatives. Proactive engagement on emerging focus areas has helped the regulatory risk profile remain broadly stable, despite the previously announced regulatory fine relating to the past communication of historical home insurance renewals.
Legal risk continues to be impacted by the evolving UK legal and regulatory landscape due to the UK’s exit from the EU and other changing regulatory standards as well as uncertainty arising from the current and future litigation landscape.
Key mitigating actions:
Lloyds Banking Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to Lloyds Banking Group risk appetite
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance
Strategic risk y
Strategic risk is a significant source of risk for the Group, influencing the Group’s strategy, business model, performance and risk profile.
Significant work has been undertaken during 2021 to understand the risk implications of the Group’s strategy and the key drivers of strategic risk. These are outlined in more detail on the following pages.
Key mitigating actions:
Considering the strategic implications of emerging trends and addressing them through our strategy
Integration of strategic risk into business planning process and embedding into day-to-day risk management
Climate risk y
The Group continued to embed climate risk into its activities, including undertaking detailed analysis of its portfolios and the pathways required to reduce the emissions that the Group finances. This included deep dives into sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change.
The Group has continued to develop scenario modelling capabilities and Lloyds Banking Group completed Part I of the Bank of England’s 2021 Biennial Exploratory Scenario on the Financial Risks for Climate Change.
Key mitigating actions:
Established Lloyds Banking Group climate risk policy in place
Ongoing development of climate assessment tools and methodologies
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board
Initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks undertaken as part of Lloyds Banking Group's financial planning process
Continued progress against the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations, enhancing our climate related financial disclosures
34

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
EMERGING RISKS
Horizon scanning and emerging risks are important considerations for the Group, enabling our business to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities and respond through our strategic planning and long-term risk mitigation framework.
Internal working groups have been established to regularly scan the horizon and identify emerging risks. This is supplemented by consultation with external experts, to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
Progress has been made this year on a data-driven approach, piloting a methodology for interrogating industry news and other external data sources, using available technology to further expand our insight. It is intended to develop this further in 2022, to incorporate more sophisticated technology and innovation practices.
In many cases, the Group’s most notable emerging risks are aligned with the themes identified. These emerging risks themes raise questions in respect of our participation choices, HR policies, recruitment and retention strategies in response to the changing socio-economic, competitive and technological landscape.
The emerging risks that the Group has adoptedmonitored during 2021 are outlined in more detail in pages 42 to 44 of the risk management section.
35

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK MANAGEMENT
All narrative and quantitative tables are unaudited unless otherwise stated. The audited information is required to comply with the requirements of relevant International Financial Reporting Standards.
Risk management is at the heart of Helping Britain Prosper and creating a more sustainable and inclusive future for people and businesses.
Our mission is to protect our customers, shareholders, colleagues and the Group, while enabling sustainable growth in targeted segments. This is achieved through informed risk decisions and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.
The risk overview (pages 31 to 35) provides a summary of risk management within the Group and the key focus areas for 2021, including the significant impact that COVID-19 continues to have on all principal risks faced by the Group. The risk overview also highlights the importance of the connectivity of principal, emerging and strategic risks and how they are embedded into the Group's strategic risk management framework.
This full risk management section provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk and a full analysis of the principal risk categories (pages 44 to 89), the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Each principal risk category is described and managed using the following standard headings: definition, exposures, measurement, mitigation and monitoring.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK
The Group operates a prudent approach to modelling this risk with rigorous management controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function (Risk division), a robust control framework is maintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks, support sustainable growth within the Group's risk appetite, and to drive and inform good risk reward decision-making.
To meet ring-fencing requirements, core UK retail and commercial financial services and ancillary retail activities are ring-fenced from other activities of the Lloyds Banking Group. The Group has adopted the enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) of Lloyds Banking Group and supplemented with additional tailored practices to address the ring-fencing requirements.
The Group’s ERMF is structured to align with the industry-accepted internal control framework standards.
The ERMF applies to every area of the business and covers all types of risk. It is reviewed, updated and approved by the Board at least annually to reflect any changes in recent years, the updatesnature of the Group's business and external regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The ERMF provides the Group with an effective mechanism for developing and embedding risk policies and risk management strategies which are aligned with the risks faced by its businesses. It also seeks to facilitate effective communication on these matters across the Group’s economic outlook have not resulted in a material change to provisions, which remained relatively unchanged at £192 million as at 31 December 2020 (31 December 2019: £201 million)Group.
Role of the Lloyds Bank Group Board and senior management
Key responsibilities of the Board and senior management include:
Approval of the ERMF and Board risk appetite
Stage 2 ECL coverage increased to 7.7 per cent (31 December 2019: 4.5 per cent)Approval of Group-wide risk principles and Stage 3 ECL coverage increased to 66.8 per cent (31 December 2019: 56.0 per cent) both of which were due principally to the impact on Credit ECL from updates to the Group’s outlook on used car prices. Credit and RV provisioning are aligned in the assumption of an anticipated near-term reduction in car prices, with an expected slow recovery until 2024
Other
Other loans and advances increased to £19.4 billion (31 December 2019: £10.9 billion). The increase was largely driven by increased lending to Retail Business Banking customers; £7.1 billion Bounce Back Loans, which are fully guaranteed by the UK Government, and £254 million Coronavirus Business Interruption Loans which are 80 per cent guaranteedpolicies
The impairment charge was £141 millioncascade of delegated authority (for example to Board sub-committees and the Group Chief Executive)
Effective oversight of risk management consistent with risk appetite
Risk appetite
The Group's approach to setting, governing, embedding and monitoring risk appetite is detailed in the risk appetite framework, a key component of the ERMF.
Risk appetite is defined within the Group as the amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate in delivering its strategy.
Group strategy and risk appetite are developed in tandem. Business planning aims to optimise value within the Group's risk appetite parameters and deliver on its promise to Help Britain Prosper.
The Group’s risk appetite statement details the risk parameters within which the Group operates. The statement forms part of the Group's control framework and is embedded into its policies, authorities and limits, to guide decision-making and risk management. Group risk appetite is regularly reviewed and refreshed to ensure appropriate coverage across our principal risks and any emerging risks, and to align with internal or external change.
The Board is responsible for 2020approving the Group’s Board risk appetite statement annually. Group Board-level metrics are augmented by further sub-Board-level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits.
The following areas are currently included in the Group Board risk appetite:
Market: the Group has effective controls in place to identify and manage the market risk inherentin our customer and client focused activities
Credit: the Group has a conservative and well balanced credit portfolio through the economic cycle, generating an appropriate return on equity, in line with the Group’s target return on equity in aggregate
Funding and liquidity: the Group maintains a prudent liquidity profile and a balance sheet structure that limits its reliance on potentially volatile sources of funding
Capital: the Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency to achieve financial resilience and market confidence
Change/execution: the Group has limited appetite for negative impacts on customers, colleagues, or the Group as a result of change activity
Conduct: the Group delivers fair outcomes for its customers
Data: the Group has zero appetite for data related regulatory fines or enforcement actions
People: the Group leads responsibly and proficiently, manages people resource effectively, supports and develops colleague skills and talent, creates and nurtures the right culture and meets legal and regulatory obligations related to its people
36

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience: the Group has limited appetite for disruption to services to customers and stakeholders from significant unexpected events
Operational: the Group has robust controls in place to manage operational losses, reputational events and regulatory breaches. It identifies and assesses emerging risks and acts to mitigate these
Model: material models are performing in line with expectations
Regulatory and legal: the Group interprets and complies with all relevant regulation and all applicable laws (including codes of conduct which could have legal implications) and/or legal obligations
Climate: the Group takes action to identify, manage and mitigate its climate risk and support the Group and its customers in transitioning to a low carbon economy
Governance frameworks
The Group’s approach to risk is based on a robust control framework and a strong risk management culture which are the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management and guide the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board to individuals through the management hierarchy. Senior executives are supported where required by a committee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and support effective decision-making.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated where needed to ensure they remain fully in line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.
Board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in Group-wide risk issues at Group Executive Committee level, ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed and remediation plans are initiated where required.
Line managers are directly accountable for identifying and managing risks in their individual businesses, ensuring that business decisions strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward and are consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.
Clear responsibilities and accountabilities for risk are defined across the Group through a three lines of defence model which ensures effective independent oversight and assurance in respect of key decisions.
The Risk Committee governance framework is outlined on page 39.
Three lines of defence model
The ERMF is implemented through a ‘three lines of defence’ model which defines clear responsibilities and accountabilities and ensures effective independent oversight and assurance activities take place covering key decisions.
Business lines (first line) have primary responsibility for risk decisions, identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling risks within their areas of accountability. They are required to establish effective governance and control frameworks for their business to be compliant with Group policy requirements, to maintain appropriate risk management skills, mechanisms and toolkits, and to act within Group risk appetite parameters set and approved by the Board.
Risk division (second line) is a centralised function, headed by the Chief Risk Officer, providing oversight and constructive challenge to the effectiveness of risk decisions taken by business management, providing proactive advice and guidance, reviewing, challenging and reporting on the risk profile of the Group and ensuring that mitigating actions are appropriate.
It also has a key role in promoting the implementation of a strategic approach to risk management reflecting the risk appetite and ERMF agreed by the Board that encompasses:
Overseeing embedding of effective risk management processes
Transparent, focused risk monitoring and reporting
Provision of expert and high quality advice and guidance to the Board, executives and management on strategic issues and horizon scanning, including pending regulatory changes
A constructive dialogue with the first line through provision of advice, development of common methodologies, understanding, education, training, and development of new risk management tools
The primary role of Group Internal Audit (third line) is to help the Board and executive management protect the assets, reputation and sustainability of the Group. Group Internal Audit is led by the Group Chief Internal Auditor. Group Internal Audit provides independent assurance to the Audit Committee and the Board through performing reviews and engaging with committees and executive management, providing opinion, challenge and informal advice on risk and the state of the control environment. Group Internal Audit is a single independent internal audit function, reporting to the Audit Committee of the Group and the Audit Committees of the key subsidiaries.
Risk and control cycle from identification to reporting
To allow senior management to make informed risk decisions, the business follows a continuous risk management approach which includes producing appropriate, accurate and focused risk reporting. The risk and control cycle sets out how this should be approached. This cycle, from identification to reporting, ensures consistency and is intended to manage and mitigate the risks impacting the Group.
The process for risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the overall framework for risk governance. Risk identification processes are forward-looking to ensure emerging risks are identified. Risks are captured and measured using robust and consistent quantification methodologies. The measurement of risks includes the application of stress testing and scenario analysis, and considers whether relevant controls are in place before risks are incurred.
Identified risks are reported on a monthly basis or as frequently as necessary to the appropriate committee. The extent of the risk is compared to £54 millionthe overall risk appetite as well as specific limits or triggers. When thresholds are breached, committee minutes are clear on the actions and time frames required to resolve the breach and bring risk within tolerances. There is a clear process for 2019,escalation of risks and risk events.
37

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
All key controls are recorded and assessed on a regular basis, in response to triggers or minimum annually. Control assessments consider both the adequacy of the design and operating effectiveness. Where a control is not effective, the root cause is established and action plans implemented to improve control design or performance. Control effectiveness against all residual risks are aggregated by risk category and reported and monitored via the monthly Consolidated Risk Report (CRR). The CRR is reviewed and independently challenged by the Risk division and provided to the Risk division Executive Committee and Group Risk Committee. On an annual basis, a point in time assessment is made for control effectiveness against each risk category and across subgroups. The CRR data is the primary source used for this point-in-time assessment and a year-on-year comparison on control effectiveness is reported to the Board.
One Risk and Control Self-Assessment (One RCSA) is part of the Group's risk and control strategy to deliver a stronger risk culture and simplified risk and control environment. Following improvements made to the Group's approach to risk management, implementation was completed at the end of 2021 across Divisional and Sub-Group Risk Profiles. One RCSA will continue to embed across the Group as risk practices, data quality, culture and capability mature.
Risk culture
Based on the Group’s prudent business model, prudent approach to risk management, and guided by the Board, the senior management articulates the core risk values to which the Group aspires, and sets the tone at the top. Senior management establishes a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers, through the economic cycle. Lloyds Banking Group’s Code of Responsibility reinforces colleagues’ accountability for the risks they take and their responsibility to prioritise their customers’ needs.
Risk resources and capabilities
Appropriate mechanisms are in place to avoid over-reliance on key personnel or system/technical expertise within the Group. Adequate resources are in place to serve customers both under normal working conditions and in times of stress, and monitoring procedures are in place to ensure that the level of available resource can be increased if required. Colleagues undertake appropriate training to ensure they have the skills and knowledge necessary to enable them to deliver fair outcomes for customers.
There is ongoing investment in risk systems and models alongside the Group’s investment in customer and product systems and processes. This drives improvements in risk data quality, aggregation and reporting leading to effective and efficient risk decisions.
Risk decision-making and reporting
Risk analysis and reporting enables better understanding of risks and returns, supporting the identification of opportunities as well as better management of risks.
An aggregate view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, and performance against risk appetite, including the CRR, is reported to and discussed monthly at the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring Fenced-Banks Risk Committees with regular reporting to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
Rigorous stress testing exercises are carried out to assess the impact of a range of adverse scenarios with different probabilities and severities to inform strategic planning.
The Chief Risk Officer regularly informs the Board Risk Committee of the aggregate risk profile and has direct access to the Chair and members of Board Risk Committee.
Financial reporting risk management systems and internal controls
The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting process which are designed to:
Ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied, transactions are recorded accurately, and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly stated
Enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements
Enable certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer relating to maintenance of appropriate tax accounting and in accordance with the 2009 Finance Act
Ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements (for example UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act)
Ensure ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting
Ensure an accurate view of the Group’s performance to allow the Board and senior management to appropriately manage the affairs and strategy of the business as a whole
The Audit Committee reviews the quality and acceptability of Lloyds Bank Group's financial disclosures. In addition, the Lloyds Banking Group Disclosure Committee assists the Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer in fulfilling their disclosure responsibilities under relevant listing and other regulatory and legal requirements.

38

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK GOVERNANCE
The risk governance structure below is integral to effective risk management across Lloyds Banking Group, including Lloyds Bank Group. To meet ring-fencing requirements the Boards and Board Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks (Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc) as well as relevant Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks will sit concurrently, referred to as the Aligned Board Model. The Risk division is appropriately represented on key committees to ensure that risk management is discussed in these meetings. This structure outlines the flow and escalation of risk information and reporting from business areas and the Risk division to the Group Executive Committee and Board. Conversely, strategic direction and guidance is cascaded down from the Board and Group Executive Committee.
The Company Secretariat supports senior and Board-level committees, and supports the Chairs in agenda planning. This gives a further line of escalation outside the three lines of defence.
Risk governance structure
lbk-20211231_g4.jpg
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Net Zero Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations Committees
Risk Division Committees and Governance
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Capital Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance Committee
Ring-Fence Compliance Committee


39

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Board, Executive and Risk Committees
The Group’s risk governance structure strengthens risk evaluation and management, while also positioning the Group to manage the changing regulatory environment in an efficient and effective manner.
Assisted by the Board Risk and Audit Committees, the Board approves the Group’s overall governance, risk and control frameworks and risk appetite. Refer to the corporate governance section on pages 92 to 98, for further information on Board Committees.
The sub-group, divisional and functional risk committees review and recommend sub-group, divisional and functional risk appetite and monitor local risk profile and adherence to appetite.
Executive and Risk Committees
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive is supported by the following:
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)Assists the Group Chief Executive in exercising their authority in relation to material matters having strategic, cross-business area or Group-wide implications.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)Responsible for the development, implementation and effectiveness of Lloyds Banking Group’s enterprise risk management framework, the clear articulation of the Group’s risk appetite and monitoring and reviewing of the Group’s aggregate risk exposures, control environment and concentrations of risk.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)Responsible for the strategic direction of the Group’s assets and liabilities and the profit and loss implications of balance sheet management actions. The committee reviews and determines the appropriate allocation of capital, funding and liquidity, and market risk resources and makes appropriate trade-offs between risk and reward.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management CommitteesLeads and shapes the Group’s approach to cost management, ensuring appropriate governance and process over Group-wide cost management activities and effective control of the Group’s cost base.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review CommitteesProvides senior management oversight, challenge and accountability in connection with the Group’s engagement with conduct review matters as agreed with the Group Chief Executive.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People CommitteesSupporting Lloyds Banking Group's People and Property Director in exercising their responsibilities in relation to the Group’s people and colleague policies, overseeing the development of and monitoring adherence to the remuneration policy, oversees compliance with Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and other regulatory requirements, monitors colleague engagement surveys, progress of the Group towards its culture targets and oversees the implementation of action plans.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Net Zero CommitteesRecommends and implements the strategy and plans for delivering the Group’s aspiration to be viewed as a trusted responsible business as part of the purpose of Helping Britain Prosper, reporting to the GEC, GRC, Responsible Business Committee where appropriate on material sustainability related risk and opportunities across the Group; and recommending to the GEC and Responsible Business Committee the Group's Responsible Business Report and Helping Britain Prosper Plan.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations CommitteeResponsible for providing recommendations regarding performance adjustment, including the individual risk-adjustment process and risk-adjusted performance assessment, and making final decisions on behalf of the Group on the appropriate course of action relating to conduct breaches, under the formal scope of the SM&CR.
The Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committee is supported through escalation and ongoing reporting by business area risk committees, cross-divisional committees addressing specific matters of Group-wide significance and the following second line of defence Risk committees which ensure effective oversight of risk management:
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk CommitteeResponsible for monitoring, oversight and challenge of market risk exposures across the Group. Reviews and proposes changes to the market risk management framework, and reviews the adequacy of data quality needed for managing market risks. It is also responsible for escalating issues of Group level significance to GEC level (usually via GALCO) relating to the management of the Group's market risks.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention CommitteeBrings together accountable stakeholders and subject matter experts to ensure that the development and application of economic crime risk management complies with the Group's strategic aims, Group corporate responsibility, Group risk appetite and Group economic crime prevention (fraud, anti-money laundering, anti-bribery and sanctions) policy. It provides direction and appropriate focus on priorities to enhance the Group's economic crime risk management capabilities in line with business and customer objectives while aligning to the Group's target operating model.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for overseeing, reviewing, challenging and recommending to GEC/Board Risk Committee/Board for Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Bank (i) annual internal stress Tests, (ii) all Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and any other regulatory stress tests, (iii) annual liquidity stress tests, (iv) reverse stress tests, (v) Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment (ILAA), (vi) Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), (vii) Pillar 3, (viii) recovery/resolution plans, and (ix) relevant ad hoc stress tests or other analysis as and when required by the Committee.
40

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Capital Risk CommitteeResponsible for providing oversight of all relevant capital matters within the Lloyds Banking Group, Ring-Fenced Bank and material subsidiaries, including latest capital position and plans, capital risk appetite proposals, Pillar 2 developments (including stress testing), recovery and resolution matters and the impact of regulatory reforms and developments specific to capital.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance CommitteeResponsible for supporting the Model Risk and Validation Director in fulfilling their responsibilities, from a Group-wide perspective, under the Lloyds Banking Group model governance policy through provision of debate, challenge and support of decisions. The committee will be held as required to facilitate approval of models, model changes and model related items as required by model policy, including items related to the governance framework as a whole and its application.
Ring-Fence Compliance CommitteeThis committee is designed to provide executive sponsorship and strategic direction to ongoing perimeter compliance, the closure and remediation of breaches, monitoring and reporting of new breaches and associated governance and delivery enhancements to the Ring-Fencing Compliance Risk Framework.
STRESS TESTING
Overview
Stress testing is recognised as a key risk management tool by the Boards, senior management, the businesses and the Risk and Finance functions of all parts of the Group and its legal entities. It is fully embedded in the planning process of the Group and its key legal entities as a key activity in medium-term planning, and senior management is actively involved in stress testing activities via the governance process.
Scenario stress testing is used for:
Risk identification:
Understand key vulnerabilities of the Group and its key legal entities under adverse economic conditions
Risk appetite:
Assess the results of the stress test against the risk appetite of all parts of the Group to ensure the Group and its legal entities are managed within their risk parameters
Inform the setting of risk appetite by assessing the underlying risks under stress conditions
Strategic and capital planning:
Allow senior management and the Boards of the Group and its applicable legal entities to adjust strategies if the plan does not meet risk appetite in a stressed scenario
Support the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) by demonstrating capital adequacy, and meet the requirements of regulatory stress tests that are used to inform the setting of the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and management buffers (see capital risk on pages 69 to 76) of the Group and its separately regulated legal entities
Risk mitigation:
Drive the development of potential actions and contingency plans to mitigate the impact of adverse scenarios. Stress testing also links directly to the recovery planning process of the Group and its legal entities
Internal stress tests
On at least an annual basis, the Group conducts macroeconomic stress tests of the operating plan, which are supplemented with higher-level refreshes if necessary. The exercise aims to highlight the key vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its legal entities’ business plans to adverse changes in the economic environment, and to ensure that there are adequate financial resources in the event of a downturn.
Reverse stress testing
Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its key legal entities’ strategies and plans to extreme adverse events that would cause the businesses to fail. Where this identifies plausible scenarios with an unacceptably high risk, the Group or its entities will adopt measures to prevent or mitigate that and reflect these in strategic plans.
Other stress testing activity
The Group’s stress testing programme also involves undertaking assessments of liquidity scenarios, market risk sensitivities and scenarios, and business-specific scenarios (see the principal risk categories on pages 32 to 34 for further information on risk-specific stress testing). If required, ad hoc stress testing exercises are also undertaken to assess emerging risks, as well as in response to regulatory requests. This wide-ranging programme provides a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group is exposed and reflects the nature, scale and complexity of the Group. Lloyds Banking Group participated in Part 1 of the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Stress test in 2021 and will leverage the experience gained through that exercise to further embed climate risk into risk management and stress testing activities.
Methodology
The stress tests at all levels must comply with all regulatory requirements, achieved through the comprehensive construction of macroeconomic scenarios and a rigorous divisional, functional, risk and executive review and challenge process, supported by analysis and insight into impacts on customers and business drivers.
The engagement of all required business, Risk and Finance teams is built into the preparation process, so that the appropriate analysis of each risk category’s impact upon the business plans is understood and documented. The methodologies and modelling approach used for stress testing ensure that a clear link is shown between the macroeconomic scenarios, the business drivers for each area and the resultant stress testing outputs. All material assumptions used in modelling are documented and justified, with a clearly communicated review and sign-off process. Modelling is supported by expert judgement and is subject to Lloyds Banking Group model governance policy.
41

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Governance
Clear accountabilities and responsibilities for stress testing are assigned to senior management and the Risk and Finance functions throughout the Group and its key legal entities. This is formalised through the Lloyds Banking Group business planning and stress testing policy and procedure, which are reviewed at least annually.
The Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and attended by the Chief Financial Officer and other senior Risk and Finance colleagues, is the committee that has primary responsibility for overseeing the development and execution of the Group’s stress tests.
The review and challenge of the Group’s detailed stress forecasts, the key assumptions behind these, and the methodology used to translate the economic assumptions into stressed outputs conclude with the appropriate Finance and Risk sign-off. The outputs are then presented to GFRC and the Board Risk Committee for review and challenge, before being approved by the Board.
EMERGING RISKS
lbk-20211231_g5.jpg
Background and framework
Understanding emerging risks is an essential component of the Group’s risk management approach, enabling the Group to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities, and to respond through strategic planning and appropriate risk mitigation.
Although emerging risk is not a principal risk, if left undetected emerging risks have the potential to adversely impact the Group or result in missed opportunities.
Impacts from emerging risks on the Group’s principal risks can materialise via two different routes:
Emerging risks can impact the Group’s principal risks directly in the absence of an appropriate strategic response.
Alternatively, emerging risks can be a source of new strategic risks, dependent on our chosen response and the underlying assumptions on how given emerging risks may manifest.
Where an emerging risk is considered material enough in its own right, the Group may choose to recognise the risk as a principal risk. Recent examples of this include climate risk and strategic risk. Such elevations are considered and approved through the Board as part of the annual refresh of Lloyds Banking Group's enterprise risk management framework.
Risk identification
The basis for risk identification is founded on collaboration between functions across the Group. The activity incorporates internal horizon scanning and engagement with external experts to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
This activity is inherently linked with and builds upon the annual strategic planning cycle and is used to identify key external trends, risks and opportunities for the Group.
The Group is evolving its methodology in respect of the identification and prioritisation of emerging risks. 2021 saw the development of a quantitative risk assessment methodology for understanding the connectivity of strategic risk. The Group has drawn on this methodology and findings to expand its insights.

42

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Notable emerging risks and their implications
The Group considers the following emerging risk themes as having the potential to increase in significance and affect the performance of the Group.
Emerging risk themeKey considerations
Breakdown of the EUWide-ranging risks associated with dissolution of the European Union, with member states choosing to function independently.
Climate change transition riskRisks arising from the Group's participation choices, policies and investments to support transition to a zero carbon economy and its ability to meet published climate targets.
Data-driven propositionsHarnessing real-time data, emerging technologies and communication channels, to meet consumer appetite for bespoke products and services.
Digital currenciesRisks and opportunities posed by introduction of new, or wider adoption of existing, digital currencies, associated supporting infrastructure and subsequent management.
Evolving regulationChanging regulatory standards and possibility of retrospective application, driving reputational damage, fines, litigation and remediation activity.
Future pandemics and the world’s ability to respondEconomic, political, social and technological impacts caused by mutations of existing viruses, new viruses, or resistance to treatments for existing illnesses.
Inequality and changing demographicWidening wealth and opportunity gap, increasing diversity and changing age mix within society, resulting in changing demands on banking.
Long term impact of the UK’s exit from the EULong-term macro-economic, regulatory and social impacts on the UK as a result of the UK’s exit from the EU.
Modern skills and recruitment diversityDiversification of recruitment approach in respect of candidate backgrounds, skills and avenues of attainment, to adapt to a modern technology-driven landscape.
Pace of technological changeAbility to keep pace with accelerating technological change, evolving technology landscape, changing customer expectations and new product and service propositions.
Populism, de-globalisation and supply chainsDisenfranchisement driving geopolitical tensions between states, diminishing integration and adverse effects on supply chains.
Science, technology, engineering and mathematics (STEM) qualification supply vs demandRisks posed by the balance of STEM degree qualification in the UK lagging behind the accelerating demands for STEM qualified candidates in the workforce.
Scottish independenceWide-ranging consequences arising from the movement for Scotland to become a sovereign state, independent from the United Kingdom.
Ways of workingAbility to provide a colleague proposition enabling flexible location and agile working, aligning to individual requirements, together with associated risks of such arrangements (e.g. Operational, People and Data risk).
Risk mitigation
Emerging risks are managed through the Group’s strategic risk framework, detailed on page 88. Pertinent emerging risks are considered as part of the Group’s strategic and business planning processes and primarily addressed through the Group’s strategy.
Key actions to tackle the emerging challenges and capitalise on opportunities as part of the Group’s strategy include the following:
Purpose: At the heart of the Group’s purpose are the themes of inclusion, sustainability and being people-first. As such, the Group’s strategy aims to fully embed a purpose that supports a more inclusive and sustainable future for the Group’s customers and colleagues.
Outcomes will see products, services and activities, aligning to societal and regulatory expectations, which drive impacts across housing, financial wellbeing, businesses and jobs, communities, regions, and sustainability.
Customer proposition: As part of its strategy, the Group aims to enhance its proposition, better aligning to its purpose, while supporting transition to a low carbon economy and adapting to the changing demographic of both its customer base and that of the UK.
Key components include:
Creating better engagement, improving customer journeys and enhancing experiences and tools to drive greater financial resilience and well-being for customers
Supporting customers and businesses in respect of making their homes, vehicles, properties and activities more sustainable
Capitalising on the Group’s existing asset and product capabilities for corporate and institutional clients to play a leading role in the transition to Net Zero, addressing regional inequalities and supporting UK prosperity by helping corporates trade internationally
Talent: The Group is firmly committed to being diverse, employing new ways of working, where colleagues are supported in having a growth mindset and empowered to make decisions at pace.
The strategy places focus on a colleague proposition that can attract and retain the best people, while leveraging talent pools across the UK and exploring in-house skills growth strategies, alongside partnerships with universities and businesses, to supplement scarce skill sets.
For the long term, the Group intends to use its strategic workforce planning capability for understanding and meeting the evolving demand of skills from its businesses and functions. This will also act as the bedrock for key strategic decisions and interventions in respect of important elements of the Group’s talent strategy in the future.
Technology: Simplification of the Group’s estate and leveraging contemporary technologies are core components of the Group’s strategy.
The Group aims to manage the challenges of a rapidly evolving landscape by employing technology that is aligned to industry best practice refresh rates, while promoting autonomy and empowerment within teams by streamlining governance.
This will be supplemented with an aligned business and technology vision and a rationalised hybrid cloud technology estate and modern engineering standards.
43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Data: Being data-driven is central to the Group’s transformation activity. More than one third of the benefits from the Group’s business strategies are reliant on the ability to successfully leverage data. As such managing data risk and employing strong data ethics are key considerations for the strategy.
The Group has developed a data management strategy to provide the common framework and direction by uplifting data quality, simplifying data architecture, enhancing data governance and implementing market leading tools to improve its ability to deliver a data-first culture. The Group has also invested in data ethics framework and strong governance for its advanced analytics and cloud programmes.
In addition to the strategic actions detailed above, the Group works closely with regulatory authorities and industry bodies to ensure that the Group can monitor external developments (e.g. potential regulatory divergence from EU) and identify and respond to the evolving landscape, particularly in relation to regulatory and legal risk.

FULL ANALYSIS OF RISK CATEGORIES
The Group’s risk framework covers all types of risk which affect the Group and could impact on the achievement of its strategic objectives. A detailed description of each category is provided on pages 45 to 89.
Risk categories recognised by the Group are periodically reviewed to ensure that they reflect the Group risk profile in light of internal and external factors, such as the Group strategy and the regulatory environment in which it operates. Changes include the recategorisation of governance risk, from a principal risk type to a secondary risk under operational risk, plus enhancement to the naming of some secondary risk categories.
Principal risk categoriesSecondary risk categories
Market risk– Trading book– Pensions
Page 45
– Banking book
Credit risk– Retail credit– Commercial credit
Page 49
Funding and liquidity risk– Funding and liquidity
Page 65
Capital risk– Capital
Page 69
Change/execution risk– Change/execution
Page 77
Conduct risk– Conduct
Page 78
Data risk– Data
Page 80
People risk– People– Health and safety
Page 81
Operational resilience risk– Operational resilience
Page 82
Operational risk– Business process– Financial reporting– Security
Page 84
– Economic crime financial– Governance– Sourcing and supply chain management
– Economic crime fraud– Internal service provision
– External service provision– IT systems
Model risk– Model
Page 86
Regulatory and legal risk– Regulatory compliance– Legal
Page 87
Strategic risk– Strategic
Page 88
Climate risk– Climate
Page 89
The Group considers both reputational and financial impact in the course of managing all its risks and therefore does not classify reputational impact as a separate risk category.
44

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
MARKET RISK
DEFINITION
Market risk is defined as the risk that the Group's capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates or prices, in particular interest rates and credit spreads in both the Banking business and the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.
MEASUREMENT
Group risk appetite is calibrated primarily to a number of multi-risk Group economic scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the worst case for banking activities, defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across the Group as a whole.
The Group risk appetite is cascaded first to the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the Chief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to the Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub-allocated by division. These metrics are reviewed regularly by senior management to inform effective decision-making.
MITIGATION
GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring Group market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across the Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.
MONITORING
GALCO and GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Board concerning overall market risk appetite and market risk policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk and appropriate escalation procedures are in place.
How market risks arise and are managed across the Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.
BANKING ACTIVITIES
Exposures
The Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market rates or prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market rates or prices can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or instrument.
Interest rate risk
Yield curve risk in the Group’s divisional portfolios, and in the Group’s capital and funding activities, arises from the different repricing characteristics of the Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet positions.
Basis risk arises from the potential changes in spreads between indices, for example where the Bank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to a market rate, e.g. SONIA, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.
Optionality risk arises predominantly from embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either the Group or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to customers’ response to changes in economic conditions.
Foreign exchange risk
Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from the Group’s investment in its overseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 44 on page F-105). In addition, the Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer-facing divisions, the Group’s debt and capital management programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the weaker outlook within our economic forecastsimpact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets.
Retail UK Mortgages loans and advances to customers
At 31 Dec
2020
1
At 31 Dec
2019
1
£m£m
Mainstream234,273 227,975 
Buy-to-let49,634 49,086 
Specialist10,899 12,137 
Total294,806 289,198 
Equity risk
1Balances includeEquity risk arises primarily from exposure to the Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.
Credit spread risk
Credit spread risk arises largely from: (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Group liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; (iii) a number of the Group’s structured medium-term notes where the Group has elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account; and (iv) banking book assets in Commercial Banking held at fair value under IFRS 9.
Measurement
Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:
Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve. Sterling interest rates are modelled with a floor below zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk-free rate.
Interest income sensitivity: this measures the impact on future net interest income arising from various economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis point parallel shifts in all yield curves and the Group economic scenarios. Sterling interest rates are modelled with a floor below zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of HBOS related acquisition adjustments.parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve.
45

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Additional negative rate scenarios are also used, where floors are removed, to ensure that this risk is monitored; however, these are not measured against the limit framework for the purposes of risk appetite.
Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to changing rates.
Reported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the net interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the net interest income.
Structural hedge: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on assumptions made around customer behaviour. A number of metrics are in place to monitor the risks within the portfolio.
The Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non-traded asset and liability management of the Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. The Group is aware that any assumptions-based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under Lloyds Banking Group's model governance policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:
Embedded optionality within products
The duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the Group
The re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities, such as variable rate savings
The table below shows, split by material currency, the Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity (audited)
20212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Sterling26.1 (27.6)98.4 (129.8)66.3 7.3 265.3 10.4 
US Dollar(0.3)0.9 (1.1)4.0 (2.2)3.7 (8.6)7.9 
Euro(5.1)(2.9)(19.3)(11.5)(6.3)(5.0)(24.1)(9.0)
Other(0.2)0.3 (1.0)0.8 — — (0.2)— 
Total20.5 (29.3)77.0 (136.5)57.8 6.0 232.4 9.3 
This is a risk-based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.
The market value sensitivity to a down 100 basis points shock has increased due to rates being higher than at year end 2020 leading to a larger downshock being applied before hitting the modelled interest rate floor. The sensitivity to an up 100 basis points shock has decreased as a result of hedging activity and changes to mortgage prepayment assumptions.
The table below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the three-year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve (audited)
20212020
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Sterling85.8 (114.4)(53.2)14.3 
US Dollar(7.0)8.2 (6.4)7.5 
Euro(13.8)(6.9)(16.4)(3.9)
Other0.2 (0.2)(0.1)0.5 
Total65.2 (113.3)(76.1)18.4 
The table below shows the banking book one year net interest income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)
20212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Client facing activity and associated hedges174.9 (406.7)254.6 (142.5)

46

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Interest only mortgagesThe table below shows supplementary income sensitivity on a one to three-year forward-looking basis to an instantaneous parallel up 25, down 25 and up 50 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: three year net interest income sensitivity (audited)
2021
Up 25bpsDown 25bpsUp 50bps
Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Client-facing activity and associated hedges174.9 269.8 397.3 (406.7)(512.0)(639.0)348.7 526.9 782.1 
Year 1 net interest income sensitivity, to up 25 basis points, has decreased year-on-year mostly due to the additional structural hedging that has been transacted in 2021 in addition to the use of simpler illustrative pass through assumptions. The increase in risk sensitivity year-on-year, to down 25 basis points, is driven by greater modelled margin compression risk following the rise in interest rates in December 2021. This results in the full 25 basis points downshock being applied at December 2021 whereas a 10 basis points shock was applied at December 2020 due to the Group’s assumption, at the time, for modelling Sterling interest rates with a floor of zero per cent (product-specific floors apply).
The three year net interest income sensitivity to a down 25 basis points shock is driven predominantly by margin compression on Retail and Commercial Bank savings products as well as structural hedge maturities to be reinvested in years two and three. The sensitivity to an up 25 basis points and 50 basis points shock is largely due to reinvestment of structural hedge maturities.
The sensitivities are illustrative and do not reflect new business margin implications and/or pricing actions, other than as outlined.
The following assumptions have been applied:
Instantaneous parallel shift in interest rate curve, including bank base rate
Balance sheet remains constant
Illustrative 50 per cent deposit pass-through
Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12-month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board risk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.
Mitigation
The Group’s policy is to optimise reward while managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. Lloyds Banking Group's market risk policy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into Group provides interest only mortgages to owner occupier mortgage customers whereby only paymentsCorporate Treasury (GCT), e.g. via the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of interest are made for the termmatching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the mortgageresidual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. The hedges are externalised to the market by derivative desks within GCT and the Commercial Bank. The Group mitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from the Group’s economic hedging activities and any hedge accounting ineffectiveness is continuously monitored.
The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with the Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO.
While the Bank faces margin compression in low rate environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).
Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non-Sterling asset values with currency borrowing. Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. The Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to risk-weighted assets equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.
Monitoring
The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive committees within the Banking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.
DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES
Exposures
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate exposes the Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes the Group to longevity risk. Increases to pensions in deferment and in payment expose the Group to inflation risk.
For further information on defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to note 27 on page F-66.
Measurement
The Group's management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for repayingsetting the principal outstanding atinvestment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with the endGroup. The Group will be liable for meeting any funding deficit that may arise. As part of the loan term. At 31 December 2020, owner occupier interest only balances astriennial valuation process, the Group will agree with the Trustees a proportion of total owner occupier balances had reducedfunding strategy to 21.6 per cent (31 December 2019: 23.9 per cent). The average indexed loan to value remained low at 39.0 per cent (31 December 2019: 41.2 per cent).eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.
For existing interest only mortgages, a contact strategyLongevity risk is in place during the term of the mortgage to ensure that customers are aware of their obligations to repay the principal upon maturity of the loan.
Treatment strategies are in place to help customers anticipatemeasured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and plan for repayment of capital at maturity and support those who may have difficulty in repaying the principal amount. A dedicated specialist team supports customers who have passed their contractual maturity date and are unable to fully repay the principal. A range of treatments are offered to customers based on their individual circumstances to create fair and sustainable outcomes.
Analysis of owner occupier interest only mortgages
At 31 Dec
2020
At 31 Dec
2019
TotalTotal
Interest only balances (£m)53,077 57,437 
Stage 1 (%)69.0 75.6 
Stage 2 (%)16.3 10.0 
Stage 3 (%)1.7 1.2 
Purchased or originated credit-impaired (%)13.0 13.2 
Average loan to value (%)1
39.0 41.2 
Maturity profile (£m)
Due1,626 1,459 
1 year2,045 1,968 
2-5 years9,450 9,852 
6-10 years18,351 18,606 
>11 years21,605 25,552 
Past term interest only balances (£m)2
1,715 1,677 
Stage 1 (%)0.7 0.9 
Stage 2 (%)28.9 23.9 
Stage 3 (%)24.2 21.8 
Purchased or originated credit-impaired (%)46.2 53.4 
Average loan to value (%)1
34.4 35.7 
Negative equity (%)2.5 2.8 
12020 interest only LTVs (loan to value) use Markit’s 2019 Halifax House Price Index; 2019 LTVs have been restated on the same basis.
2Balances where all interest only elements have moved past term. Some may subsequently have had a term extension, so are no longer classed as due.1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).
47

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Retail forbearanceMitigation
The basisGroup takes an active involvement in agreeing mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. The schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets. The Trustees have put in place longevity swaps to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of disclosure for forbearance is alignedlongevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.
Monitoring
In addition to definitions usedthe wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees.
The surplus, or deficit, in the Europeanschemes is tracked monthly along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. Key metrics are monitored monthly including the Group’s capital resources of the scheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, and the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions.
TRADING PORTFOLIOS
Exposures
The Group’s trading activity is small relative to its peers. The Group’s trading activity is undertaken solely to meet the financial requirements of commercial and retail customers for foreign exchange and interest rate products. These activities support customer flow and market making activities.
All trading activities are performed within the Commercial Banking Authority’s FINREP reporting. Total forbearancedivision. While the trading positions taken are generally small, any extreme moves in the main risk factors and other related risk factors could cause significant losses in the trading book depending on the positions at the time. The average 95 per cent 1-day trading VaR (Value at Risk; diversified across risk factors) was £0.1 million for 31 December 2021.
Trading market risk measures are applied to all of the Group’s regulatory trading books and they include daily VaR, sensitivity-based measures, and stress testing calculations.
Measurement
The Group internally uses VaR as the primary risk measure for all trading book positions.
The risk of loss measured by the VaR model is the minimum expected loss in earnings given the 95 per cent confidence. The total and average trading VaR numbers reported below have been obtained after the application of the diversification benefits across the five risk types. The maximum and minimum VaR reported for each risk category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the maximum and minimum VaR reported at Group level.
The Group’s closing VaR, allowing for diversification, at 31 December 2021 across interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk, equity risk, credit spread risk and inflation risk was less than £0.05 million. During the year ended 31 December 2021, the Group’s minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million and its average and maximum VaR was £0.1 million.
For the year ended 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, the maximum total VaR for all of the above risks was £0.2 million, the average total VaR was £0.1 million and minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million. The closing VaR at 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, was less than £0.06 million.
For the year ended 31 December 2021, the maximum and average interest rate risk VaR was £0.1 million and the minimum interest rate VaR was less than £0.05 million. The minimum, maximum and average VaR for all other risk types was less than £0.05 million. As at 31 December 2021, the closing VaR for all risk types was less than £0.05 million.
The market risk for the major retail portfolios has improved by £259 milliontrading book continues to £5.9 billion driven primarily by a reduction in customers where arrears are written onbe low relative to the loan balance (capitalisations)size of the Group and in comparison to peers. This reflects the fact that the Group’s trading operations are customer-centric and focused on hedging and recycling client risks.
Although it is an important market standard measure of risk, VaR has limitations. One of them is the use of a limited historical data sample which influences the output by the implicit assumption that future market behaviour will not differ greatly from the historically observed period. Another known limitation is the use of defined holding periods which assumes that the risk can be liquidated or hedged within that holding period. Also calculating the VaR at the chosen confidence interval does not give enough information about potential losses which may occur if this level is exceeded. The Group fully recognises these limitations and supplements the use of VaR with a variety of other measurements which reflect the nature of the business activity. These include detailed sensitivity analysis, position reporting and a stress testing programme.
Trading book VaR (1-day 99 per cent) is compared daily against both hypothetical and actual profit and loss at underlying legal entity level (HBOS and Lloyds Bank).
Mitigation
The main customer treatments included are: repair, where arrearslevel of exposure is controlled by establishing and communicating the approved risk limits and controls through policies and procedures that define the responsibility and authority for risk taking. Market risk limits are written onclearly and consistently communicated to the loanbusiness. Any new or emerging risks are brought within risk reporting and defined limits.
Monitoring
Trading risk appetite is monitored daily with 1-day 95 per cent VaR and stress testing limits. These limits are complemented with position level action triggers and profit and loss referrals. Risk and position limits are set and managed at both desk and overall trading book levels. They are reviewed at least annually and can be changed as required within the overall Group risk appetite framework.
48

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CREDIT RISK
DEFINITION
Credit risk is defined as the risk that parties with whom the Group has contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on and off- balance sheet).
EXPOSURES
The principal sources of credit risk within the Group arise from loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives to customers, financial institutions and sovereigns. The credit risk exposures of the arrears position cancelled; instances where thereGroup are suspensions of interest and/or capital repayments; past term interest only mortgages; and refinance personal loans.set out in note 44 on page F-105.
As a percentageIn terms of loans and advances forbearance(for example mortgages, term loans improvedand overdrafts) and contingent liabilities (for example credit instruments such as guarantees and documentary letters of credit), credit risk arises both from amounts advanced and commitments to 1.7 per centextend credit to a customer or bank. With respect to commitments to extend credit, the Group is also potentially exposed to an additional loss up to an amount equal to the total unutilised commitments. However, the likely amount of loss may be less than the total unutilised commitments, as most retail and certain commercial lending commitments may be cancelled based on regular assessment of the prevailing creditworthiness of customers. Most commercial term commitments are also contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards.
Credit risk also arises from debt securities and derivatives. Credit risk exposure for derivatives is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 44 on page F-105.
Additionally, credit risk arises from leasing arrangements where the Group is the lessor. Note 2(J) on page F-20 provides details on the Group’s approach to the treatment of leases.
The investments held in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes also expose the Group to credit risk. Note 27 on page F-66 provides further information on the defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities.
Loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives also expose the Group to refinance risk. Refinance risk is the possibility that an outstanding exposure cannot be repaid at 31 December 2020 (31 December 2019: 1.8 per cent).its contractual maturity date. If the Group does not wish to refinance the exposure then there is refinance risk if the obligor is unable to repay by securing alternative finance. This may occur for a number of reasons which may include: the borrower is in financial difficulty, because the terms required to refinance are outside acceptable appetite at the time or the customer is unable to refinance externally due to a lack of market liquidity. Refinance risk exposures are managed in accordance with the Group’s existing credit risk policies, processes and controls, and are not considered to be material given the Group’s prudent and through-the-cycle credit risk appetite. Where heightened refinance risk exists exposures are minimised through intensive account management and, where appropriate, are classed as impaired and/or forborne.
TotalMEASUREMENT
The process for credit risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the Board-approved framework for credit risk appetite and governance.
Credit risk is measured from different perspectives using a range of appropriate modelling and scoring techniques at a number of levels of granularity, including total balance sheet, individual portfolio, pertinent concentrations and individual customer - for both new business and existing exposure. Key metrics, which may include total exposure, expected credit loss (ECL), risk-weighted assets, new business quality, concentration risk and portfolio performance, are reported monthly to Risk Committees and Forums.
Measures such as ECL, risk-weighted assets, observed credit performance, predicted credit quality (usually from predictive credit scoring models), collateral cover and quality, and other credit drivers (such as cash flow, affordability, leverage and indebtedness) have been incorporated into the Group's credit risk management practices to enable effective risk measurement across the Group.
The Group has also continued to strengthen its capabilities and abilities for identifying, assessing and managing climate-related risks and opportunities, recognising that Climate change is likely to result in changes in the risk profile and outlook for the Group's customers, the sectors the Group operates in and collateral/asset valuations. For further information, please refer to LBG’s 2021 Climate Report.
In addition, stress testing and scenario analysis are used to estimate impairment losses (ECL)and capital demand forecasts for both regulatory and internal purposes and to assist in the formulation of credit risk appetite.
As part of the ‘three lines of defence’ model, the Risk division is the second line of defence providing oversight and independent challenge to key risk decisions taken by business management. The Risk division also tests the effectiveness of credit risk management and internal credit risk controls. This includes ensuring that the control and monitoring of higher risk and vulnerable portfolios and sectors is appropriate and confirming that appropriate loss allowances for impairment are in place. Output from these reviews helps to inform credit risk appetite and credit policy.
As the third line of defence, Group Internal Audit undertakes regular risk-based reviews to assess the effectiveness of credit risk management and controls.
MITIGATION
The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate credit risk.
Prudent, through-the-cycle credit principles, risk policies and appetite statements: the independent Risk division sets out the credit principles, credit risk policies and credit risk appetite statements. These are subject to regular review and governance, with any changes subject to an approval process. Risk teams monitor credit performance trends and the outlook. Risk teams also test the adequacy of and adherence to credit risk policies and processes throughout the Group. This includes tracking portfolio performance against an agreed set of credit risk appetite tolerances.
Robust models and controls: see model risk on page 86.
Limitations on concentration risk: there are portfolio controls on certain industries, sectors and products to reflect risk appetite as a proportionwell as individual, customer and bank limit risk tolerances. Credit policies and appetite statements are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite and restrict exposure to higher risk countries and potentially vulnerable sectors and asset classes. Note 44 on page F-107 provides an analysis of loans and advances whichto customers by industry (for commercial customers) and product (for retail customers). Exposures are forborne has increasedmonitored to 7.0 per cent (31 December 2019: 5.0 per cent).
Retail forborne loans and advances (audited)
TotalOf which
Stage 2
Of which
Stage 3
Of which
purchased or
originated
credit-
impaired
Expected
credit losses
as a % of
total loans
and advances
which are
foreborne1
£m£m£m£m%
At 31 December 20202
UK Mortgages5,106 1,192 823 3,081 3.6 
Credit cards356 130 191  40.0 
Loans and overdrafts353 154 146  36.5 
UK Motor Finance88 50 34  36.3 
Total5,903 1,526 1,194 3,081 7.0 
At 31 December 2019
UK Mortgages5,559 1,156 736 3,659 2.1 
Credit cards321 65 210 — 32.8 
Loans and overdrafts219 103 95 — 28.8 
UK Motor Finance63 35 26 — 30.4 
Total6,162 1,359 1,067 3,659 5.0 
1Expected credit loss allowance asprevent both an excessive concentration of risk and single name concentrations. These concentration risk controls are not necessarily in the form of a percentage of total loans and advances which are forborne is calculated excluding loansmaximum limit on exposure, but may instead require new business in recoveries for Credit cards, Loans and overdrafts (31 December 2020: £75 million; 31 December 2019: £82 million).
2In line with FINREP reporting and regulatory guidelines, Retail forborne loans and advances do not include COVID-19 moratoria.concentrated sectors to fulfil additional minimum policy and/or guideline
4849

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
requirements. The Group’s largest credit limits are regularly monitored by the Board Risk Committee and reported in accordance with regulatory requirements.
Defined country risk management framework: the Group sets a broad maximum country risk appetite. Risk-based appetite for all countries is set within the independent Risk division, taking into account economic, financial, political and social factors as well as the approved business and strategic plans of the Group.
Specialist expertise: credit quality is managed and controlled by a number of specialist units within the business and Risk division, which provide for example: intensive management and control; security perfection; maintenance of customer and facility records; expertise in documentation for lending and associated products; sector-specific expertise; and legal services applicable to the particular market segments and product ranges offered by the Group.
Stress testing: the Group’s credit portfolios are subject to regular stress testing. In addition to the Group-led, PRA and other regulatory stress tests, exercises focused on individual divisions and portfolios are also performed. For further information on stress testing process, methodology and governance see page 41.
Frequent and robust credit risk assurance: assurance of credit risk is undertaken by an independent function operating within the Risk division which are part of the Group’s second line of defence. Their primary objective is to provide reasonable and independent assurance and confidence that credit risk is being effectively managed and to ensure that appropriate controls are in place and being adhered to. Group Internal Audit also provides assurance to the Audit Committee on the effectiveness of credit risk management controls across the Group’s activities.
Collateral
The principal types of acceptable collateral include:
Residential and commercial properties
Charges over business assets such as premises, inventory and accounts receivable
Financial instruments such as debt securities vehicles
Cash
Guarantees received from third parties
The Group maintains appetite parameters on the acceptability of specific classes of collateral.
For non-mortgage retail lending to small businesses, collateral may include second charges over residential property and the assignment of life cover.
Collateral held as security for financial assets other than loans and advances is determined by the nature of the underlying exposure. Debt securities, including treasury and other bills, are generally unsecured, with the exception of asset-backed securities and similar instruments such as covered bonds, which are secured by portfolios of financial assets. Collateral is generally not held against loans and advances to financial institutions. However, securities are held as part of reverse repurchase or securities borrowing transactions or where a collateral agreement has been entered into under a master netting agreement. Derivative transactions with financial counterparties are typically collateralised under a Credit Support Annex (CSA) in conjunction with the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) Master Agreement. Derivative transactions with non-financial customers are not usually supported by a CSA.
The requirement for collateral and the type to be taken at origination will be based upon the nature of the transaction and the credit quality, size and structure of the borrower. For non-retail exposures, if required, the Group will often seek that any collateral includes a first charge over land and buildings owned and occupied by the business, a debenture over the assets of a company or limited liability partnership, personal guarantees, limited in amount, from the directors of a company or limited liability partnership and key man insurance. The Group maintains policies setting out which types of collateral valuation are acceptable, maximum loan to value (LTV) ratios and other criteria that are to be considered when reviewing an application. The fundamental business proposition must evidence the ability of the business to generate funds from normal business sources to repay a customer or counterparty’s financial commitment, rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided.
Although lending decisions are primarily based on expected cash flows, any collateral provided may impact the pricing and other terms of a loan or facility granted. This will have a financial impact on the amount of net interest income recognised and on internal loss given default estimates that contribute to the determination of asset quality and returns.
The Group requires collateral to be realistically valued by an appropriately qualified source, independent of both the credit decision process and the customer, at the time of borrowing. In certain circumstances, for Retail residential mortgages this may include the use of automated valuation models based on market data, subject to accuracy criteria and LTV limits. Where third parties are used for collateral valuations, they are subject to regular monitoring and review. Collateral values are subject to review, which will vary according to the type of lending, collateral involved and account performance. Such reviews are undertaken to confirm that the value recorded remains appropriate and whether revaluation is required, considering, for example, account performance, market conditions and any information available that may indicate that the value of the collateral has materially declined. In such instances, the Group may seek additional collateral and/or other amendments to the terms of the facility. The Group adjusts estimated market values to take account of the costs of realisation and any discount associated with the realisation of the collateral when estimating credit losses.
The Group considers risk concentrations by collateral providers and collateral type with a view to ensuring that any potential undue concentrations of risk are identified and suitably managed by changes to strategy, policy and/or business plans.
The Group seeks to avoid correlation or wrong-way risk where possible. Under the Group’s repurchase (repo) policy, the issuer of the collateral and the repo counterparty should be neither the same nor connected. The same rule applies for derivatives. The Risk division has the necessary discretion to extend this rule to other cases where there is significant correlation. Countries with a rating equivalent to AA- or better may be considered to have no adverse correlation between the counterparty domiciled in that country and the country of risk (issuer of securities).
Refer to note 44 on page F-126 for further information on collateral.
Additional mitigation for Retail customers
The Group uses a variety of lending criteria when assessing applications for mortgages and unsecured lending. The general approval process uses credit acceptance scorecards and involves a review of an applicant’s previous credit history using internal data and information held by Credit Reference Agencies (CRA).
50

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group also assesses the affordability and sustainability of lending for each borrower. For secured lending this includes use of an appropriate stressed interest rate scenario. Affordability assessments for all lending are compliant with relevant regulatory and conduct guidelines. The Group takes reasonable steps to validate information used in the assessment of a customer’s income and expenditure.
In addition, the Group has in place quantitative limits such as maximum limits for individual customer products, the level of borrowing to income and the ratio of borrowing to collateral. Some of these limits relate to internal approval levels and others are policy limits above which the Group will typically reject borrowing applications. The Group also applies certain criteria that are applicable to specific products, for example applications for buy-to-let mortgages.
For UK mortgages, the Group’s policy permits owner occupier applications with a maximum LTV of 95 per cent. This can increase to 100 per cent for specific products where additional security is provided by a supporter of the applicant and held on deposit by the Group. Applications with an LTV above 90 per cent are subject to enhanced underwriting criteria, including higher scorecard cut-offs and loan size restrictions.
Buy-to-let mortgages within Retail are limited to a maximum loan size of £1,000,000 and 75 per cent LTV. Buy-to-let applications must pass a minimum rental cover ratio of 125 per cent under stressed interest rates, after applicable tax liabilities. Portfolio landlords (customers with four or more mortgaged buy-to-let properties) are subject to additional controls including evaluation of overall portfolio resilience.
The Group’s policy is to reject any application for a lending product where a customer is registered as bankrupt or insolvent, or has a recent County Court Judgment or financial default registered at a CRA used by the Group above de minimis thresholds. In addition, the Group typically rejects applicants where total unsecured debt, debt-to-income ratios, or other indicators of financial difficulty exceed policy limits.
Where credit acceptance scorecards are used, new models, model changes and monitoring of model effectiveness are independently reviewed and approved in accordance with the governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.
Additional mitigation for Commercial customers
Individual credit assessment and independent sanction of customer and bank limits: with the exception of small exposures to SME customers where certain relationship managers have limited delegated sanctioning authority, credit risk in commercial customer portfolios is subject to sanction by the independent Risk division, which considers the strengths and weaknesses of individual transactions, the balance of risk and reward, and how credit risk aligns to the Group and divisional risk appetite. Exposure to individual counterparties, groups of counterparties or customer risk segments is controlled through a tiered hierarchy of credit authority delegations and risk-based credit limit guidances per client group for larger exposures. Approval requirements for each decision are based on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the transaction amount, the customer’s aggregate facilities, any risk mitigation in place, credit policy, risk appetite, credit risk ratings and the nature and term of the risk. The Group’s credit risk appetite criteria for counterparty and customer loan underwriting is generally the same as that for loans intended to be held to maturity. All hard loan/bond underwriting must be sanctioned by the Risk division. A pre-approved credit matrix may be used for ‘best efforts’ underwriting.
Counterparty credit limits: limits are set against all types of exposure in a counterparty name, in accordance with an agreed methodology for each exposure type. This includes credit risk exposure on individual derivatives and securities financing transactions, which incorporates potential future exposures from market movements against agreed confidence intervals. Aggregate facility levels by counterparty are set and limit breaches are subject to escalation procedures.
Daily settlement limits: settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash, securities or equities is made in the expectation of a corresponding receipt in cash, securities or equities. Daily settlement limits are established for each relevant counterparty to cover the aggregate of all settlement risk arising from the Group’s market transactions on any single day. Where possible, the Group uses Continuous Linked Settlement in order to reduce foreign exchange (FX) settlement risk.
Master netting agreements
It is credit policy that a Group-approved master netting agreement must be used for all derivative and traded product transactions and must be in place prior to trading, with separate documentation required for each Group entity providing facilities. This requirement extends to trades with clients and the counterparties used for the Bank’s own hedging activities, which may also include clearing trades with Central Counterparties (CCPs).
Any exceptions must be approved by the appropriate credit sanctioner. Master netting agreements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis. However, within relevant jurisdictions and for appropriate counterparty types, master netting agreements do reduce the credit risk to the extent that, if an event of default occurs, all trades with the counterparty may be terminated and settled on a net basis. The Group’s overall exposure to credit risk on derivative instruments subject to master netting agreements can change substantially within a short period, since this is the net position of all trades under the master netting agreement.
Other credit risk transfers
The Group also undertakes asset sales, credit derivative based transactions, securitisations (including significant risk transfer transactions), purchases of credit default swaps and purchase of credit insurance as a means of mitigating or reducing credit risk and/or risk concentration, taking into account the nature of assets and the prevailing market conditions.
MONITORING
In conjunction with the Risk division, businesses identify and define portfolios of credit and related risk exposures and the key behaviours and characteristics by which those portfolios are managed and monitored. This entails the production and analysis of regular portfolio monitoring reports for review by senior management. The Risk division in turn produces an aggregated view of credit risk across the Group, including reports on material credit exposures, concentrations, concerns and other management information, which is presented to the divisional risk committees and forums, Group Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee.
Models
The performance of all models used in credit risk is monitored in line with the Group’s model governance framework - see model risk on page 86.
Intensive care of customers in financial difficulty
The Group operates a number of solutions to assist borrowers who are experiencing financial stress. The material elements of these solutions through which the Group has granted a concession, whether temporarily or permanently, are set out below.
Forbearance
The Group’s aim in offering forbearance and other assistance to customers in financial distress is to benefit both the customer and the Group by supporting its customers and acting in their best interests by, where possible, bringing customer facilities back into a sustainable position.
51

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group offers a range of tools and assistance to support customers who are encountering financial difficulties. Cases are managed on an individual basis, with the circumstances of each customer considered separately and the action taken judged as being appropriate and sustainable for both the customer and the Group.
Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting its financial commitments. This can include modification of the previous terms and conditions of a contract or a total or partial refinancing of a troubled debt contract, either of which would not have been required had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties.
The provision and review of such assistance is controlled through the application of an appropriate policy framework and associated controls. Regular review of the assistance offered to customers is undertaken to confirm that it remains appropriate, alongside monitoring of customers’ performance and the level of payments received.
The Group classifies accounts as forborne at the time a customer in financial difficulty is granted a concession. However, where customers were temporarily impacted by COVID-19, the Group looked to follow regulator principles and guidance on the granting of concessions resulting from the impact of the pandemic.
Balances in default or classified as Stage 3 are always considered to be non-performing. Balances may be non-performing but not in default or Stage 3, where for example they are within their non-performing forbearance cure period.
Non-performing exposures can be reclassified as performing forborne after a minimum 12-month cure period, providing there are no past due amounts or concerns regarding the full repayment of the exposure. A minimum of a further 24 months must pass from the date the forborne exposure was reclassified as performing forborne before the account can exit forbearance. If conditions to exit forbearance are not met at the end of this probation period, the exposure shall continue to be identified as forborne until all the conditions are met.
The Group’s treatment of loan renegotiations is included in the impairment policy in note 2(H) on page F-19.
Customers receiving support from UK Government sponsored programmes
To assist customers in financial distress, the Group participates in UK Government sponsored programmes for households, including the Income Support for Mortgage Interest programme, under which the government pays the Group all or part of the interest on the mortgage on behalf of the customer. This is provided as a government loan which the customer must repay.
Support for customers during the COVID-19 pandemic
Working closely with the UK Government and regulators, the Group supported its retail, small business and commercial customers through a comprehensive and unprecedented range of flexible measures to help alleviate temporary financial pressure on customers during the crisis.
For retail customers, the Group provided payment holidays of up to three months across a range of products including mortgages, personal loans, credit cards and motor finance, extensions of up to 6 months in total were available.
Similarly, the Group provided significant support for its small business and commercial customers as well as providing loans to businesses under the different government schemes, including Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS), Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) and Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS). These schemes closed in March 2021, replaced by the Recovery Loan Scheme through which the Group is also providing support. The Group continues to provide ongoing support to BBLS customers through the Pay As You Grow (PAYG) scheme, where customers are able to access a number of options including repayment holidays and term extensions. The Group also supported its customers through repayment holidays and its own COVID-19 fund which included fee-free lending for new overdrafts or overdraft limit increases as well as new or increased invoice discounting and finance facilities. The Group also offered SME customers a mentoring service to help navigate a path beyond the pandemic.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP CREDIT RISK PORTFOLIO IN 2021
Overview
Performance across the Group’s lending portfolios has been robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions to address the financial impacts of COVID-19, including government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited the increase in unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low
Portfolios have also benefitted from the Group’s proactive risk management and prudent credit risk appetite, with robust cashflow criteria and LTVs in the Group's secured portfolios
However, looking forward some portfolio deterioration may be expected, especially considering the withdrawal of government COVID-19 support measures and effects from a number of downside risks, including higher inflation and rising interest rates
Repayments under the government-backed lending schemes began in the second half of 2021, with arrears levels being carefully monitored, alongside continued review of customer trends and indicators to ensure early signs of customer distress are quickly identified
The Group continues to hold appropriate expected credit loss (ECL) allowances in light of the uncertainties and to protect against downside risks
The impairment credit in 2021 was £1,318 million, compared to a charge of £4,060 million in 2020. The full-year credit resulted from a release of expected credit loss allowances based upon improvements to the macroeconomic outlook for the UK, combined with robust observed credit performance, with a low run rate impairment charge
As a result, the Group’s customer related ECL allowances reduced in the period from £6,127 million to £3,998 million. Reductions in Commercial Banking ECL allowances also reflected improved outcomes on restructuring cases, reduction in Stage 2 exposures and lower flows to default
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers reduced from £51,280 million to £34,884 million and as a percentage of total lending reduced by 3.4 percentage points to 7.2 per cent (31 December 2020: 10.6 per cent), predominantly reflecting the improvement in the Group’s forward-looking macroeconomic assumptions. Of these, 89.0 per cent were up to date (31 December 2020: 91.6 per cent). Stage 2 coverage reduced to 3.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 4.6 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances to customers reduced in the period to £6,406 million (31 December 2020: £6,443 million) but remained stable as a percentage of total lending at 1.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.3 per cent). Stage 3 coverage reduced by 5.0 percentage points to 27.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 32.4 per cent), largely driven by an increase in Retail BBLS assets which hold zero ECL allowances due to the UK Government guarantee in place, the improved macroeconomic outlook, and a small number of single name releases in Commercial Banking, including coronavirus impacted restructuring cases
52

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Prudent risk appetite and risk management
The Group continues to take a prudent approach to credit risk and has a through-the-cycle credit risk appetite, while working closely with customers to help and support them through and recover from the crisis
Sector and asset class concentrations within the portfolios are closely monitored and controlled, with mitigating actions taken where appropriate. Sector and product caps and policies limit exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors and asset classes
The Group’s effective risk management seeks to ensure early identification and management of customers and counterparties who may be showing signs of distress
The Group will continue to work closely with its customers throughout the recovery to ensure they receive the appropriate level of support, including where repayments under the UK Government scheme lending fall due
Impairment (credit) charge by division
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to banksFinancial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Undrawn
balances
20212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages(271)  (2)(273)478 
Credit cards29   (78)(49)800 
Loans and overdrafts83   (44)39 739 
UK Motor Finance(149)  (2)(151)226 
Other(7)  (14)(21)141 
Retail(315)  (140)(455)2,384 
SME(218)  (19)(237)264 
Corporate and other1
(541)(4)(3)(72)(620)1,016 
Commerical Banking(759)(4)(3)(91)(857)1,280 
Other(7) 1  (6)396 
Total impairment (credit) charge(1,081)(4)(2)(231)(1,318)4,060 
1Corporate and other primarily comprises Mid Corporates and Corporate and Institutional.
53

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group loans and advances to customers
The following pages contain analysis of the Group’s loans and advances to customers by sub-portfolio. Loans and advances to customers are categorised into the following stages:
Stage 1 assets comprise of newly originated assets (unless purchased or originated credit impaired), as well as those which have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses that result from those default events that are possible within 12 months of the reporting date (12 month expected credit losses).
Stage 2 assets are those which have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses arising over the lifetime of the asset (lifetime expected credit losses).
Stage 3 assets have either defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired. These assets carry a lifetime expected credit loss.
Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets (POCI) are those that have been originated or acquired in a credit impaired state. This includes within the definition of credit impaired the purchase of a financial asset at a deep discount that reflects impaired credit losses.
Total expected credit loss allowance
At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020
£m£m
Customer related balances
Drawn3,804 5,701 
Undrawn194 426 
3,998 6,127 
Other assets2 
Total expected credit loss allowance4,000 6,132 
Movements in total expected credit loss allowance
Opening ECL at 31 Dec 2020
Write-offs
and other1
Income
statement
charge (credit)
Net ECL
decrease
Closing ECL at 31 Dec 2021
£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages1,027 83 (273)(190)837 
Credit cards923 (353)(49)(402)521 
Loans and overdrafts715 (309)39 (270)445 
UK Motor Finance501 (52)(151)(203)298 
Other229 (43)(21)(64)165 
Retail3,395 (674)(455)(1,129)2,266 
SME502 (10)(237)(247)255 
Corporate and other1,813 (132)(620)(752)1,061 
Commercial Banking2,315 (142)(857)(999)1,316 
Other422 2 (6)(4)418 
Total2
6,132 (814)(1,318)(2,132)4,000 
1Contains adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.
2Total ECL includes £2 million relating to other non customer-related assets (31 December 2020: £5 million).
54

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements and expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgages273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 7.1 0.6 
Credit cards12,148 2,077 292  14,517 14.3 2.0 
Loans and overdrafts8,181 1,105 271  9,557 11.6 2.8 
UK Motor Finance12,247 1,828 201  14,276 12.8 1.4 
Other16,414 1,959 778  19,151 10.2 4.1 
Retail322,619 28,767 3,482 10,977 365,845 7.9 1.0 
SME27,260 3,002 843  31,105 9.7 2.7 
Corporate and other32,056 3,081 2,019  37,156 8.3 5.4 
Commercial Banking59,316 6,083 2,862  68,261 8.9 4.2 
Other1
47,143 34 62  47,239 0.1 0.1 
Total gross lending429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 7.2 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(909)(1,112)(1,573)(210)(3,804)
Net balance sheet carrying value428,169 33,772 4,833 10,767 477,541 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)
UK mortgages49 394 184 210 837 
Credit cards144 249 128  521 
Loans and overdrafts136 170 139  445 
UK Motor Finance2
108 74 116  298 
Other45 65 55  165 
Retail482 952 622 210 2,266 
SME61 104 90  255 
Corporate and other63 140 857  1,060 
Commercial Banking124 244 947  1,315 
Other406 2 9  417 
Total1,012 1,198 1,578 210 3,998 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements3
UK mortgages 1.8 9.5 1.9 0.3 
Credit cards1.2 12.0 56.9  3.6 
Loans and overdrafts1.7 15.4 67.5  4.7 
UK Motor Finance0.9 4.0 57.7  2.1 
Other0.3 3.3 13.8  0.9 
Retail0.1 3.3 20.9 1.9 0.6 
SME0.2 3.5 12.7  0.8 
Corporate and other0.2 4.5 42.5  2.9 
Commercial Banking0.2 4.0 34.8  1.9 
Other0.9 5.9 14.5  0.9 
Total0.2 3.4 27.4 1.9 0.8 
1Includes reverse repos of £46.7 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £95 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn balances exclude loans in recoveries in credit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £65 million, Retail other of £379 million, SME of £135 million and Corporate and other of £4 million.
55

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgages251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 9.8 0.6 
Credit cards11,496 3,273 340 — 15,109 21.7 2.3 
Loans and overdrafts7,710 1,519 307 — 9,536 15.9 3.2 
UK Motor Finance12,786 2,216 199 — 15,201 14.6 1.3 
Other17,879 1,304 184 — 19,367 6.7 1.0 
Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 10.5 0.8 
SME27,015 4,500 791 — 32,306 13.9 2.4 
Corporate and other29,882 9,438 2,694 — 42,014 22.5 6.4 
Commercial Banking56,897 13,938 3,485 — 74,320 18.8 4.7 
Other1
57,422 12 69 — 57,503 — 0.1 
Total gross lending415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 10.6 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)
Net balance sheet carrying value414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn)
UK mortgages107 468 191 261 1,027 
Credit cards240 530 153 — 923 
Loans and overdrafts224 344 147 — 715 
UK Motor Finance2
197 171 133 — 501 
Other46 124 59 — 229 
Retail814 1,637 683 261 3,395 
SME142 234 126 — 502 
Corporate and other172 475 1,161 — 1,808 
Commercial Banking314 709 1,287 — 2,310 
Other410 — 12 — 422 
Total1,538 2,346 1,982 261 6,127 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to
customers and reverse repurchase agreements
3
UK mortgages— 1.6 10.3 2.1 0.3 
Credit cards2.1 16.2 56.0 — 6.1 
Loans and overdrafts2.9 22.6 64.2 — 7.6 
UK Motor Finance1.5 7.7 66.8 — 3.3 
Other0.3 9.5 39.3 — 1.2 
Retail0.3 4.4 25.2 2.1 1.0 
SME0.5 5.2 19.1 — 1.6 
Corporate and other0.6 5.0 43.2 — 4.3 
Commercial Banking0.6 5.1 38.5 — 3.1 
Other0.7 — 17.4 — 0.7 
Total0.4 4.6 32.4 2.1 1.3 
1Includes reverse repos of £54.4 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £192 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn balances exclude loans in recoveries in credit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £78 million, Retail other of £34 million, SME of £132 million and Corporate and other of £6 million.

56

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowance
Up to date
1-30 days past due2
Over 30 days past dueTotal
PD movements
Other1
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
At 31 December 2021
UK mortgages14,845 132 0.9 4,133 155 3.8 1,433 38 2.7 1,387 69 5.0 21,798 394 1.8 
Credit cards1,755 176 10.0 210 42 20.0 86 20 23.3 26 11 42.3 2,077 249 12.0 
Loans and overdrafts505 82 16.2 448 43 9.6 113 30 26.5 39 15 38.5 1,105 170 15.4 
UK Motor Finance581 20 3.4 1,089 26 2.4 124 19 15.3 34 9 26.5 1,828 74 4.0 
Other538 41 7.6 990 15 1.5 294 6 2.0 137 3 2.2 1,959 65 3.3 
Retail18,224 451 2.5 6,870 281 4.1 2,050 113 5.5 1,623 107 6.6 28,767 952 3.3 
SME2,689 96 3.6 192 5 2.6 41 2 4.9 80 1 1.3 3,002 104 3.5 
Corporate and other2,966 138 4.7 69 2 2.9 8   38   3,081 140 4.5 
Commercial
Banking
5,655 234 4.1 261 7 2.7 49 2 4.1 118 1 0.8 6,083 244 4.0 
Other18   6 1 16.7 2   8 1 12.5 34 2 5.9 
Total23,897 685 2.9 7,137 289 4.0 2,101 115 5.5 1,749 109 6.2 34,884 1,198 3.4 
At 31 December 2020
UK mortgages22,569 215 1.0 3,078 131 4.3 1,648 43 2.6 1,723 79 4.6 29,018 468 1.6 
Credit cards2,924 408 14.0 220 76 34.5 93 27 29.0 36 19 52.8 3,273 530 16.2 
Loans and overdrafts959 209 21.8 388 68 17.5 126 45 35.7 46 22 47.8 1,519 344 22.6 
UK Motor Finance724 62 8.6 1,321 55 4.2 132 37 28.0 39 17 43.6 2,216 171 7.7 
Other512 56 10.9 651 44 6.8 69 14 20.3 72 10 13.9 1,304 124 9.5 
Retail27,688 950 3.4 5,658 374 6.6 2,068 166 8.0 1,916 147 7.7 37,330 1,637 4.4 
SME4,229 219 5.2 150 4.0 40 12.5 81 4.9 4,500 234 5.2 
Corporate and other9,151 469 5.1 83 3.6 28 7.1 176 0.6 9,438 475 5.0 
Commercial
Banking
13,380 688 5.1 233 3.9 68 10.3 257 1.9 13,938 709 5.1 
Other— — 11 — — — — — — — — 12 — — 
Total41,069 1,638 4.0 5,902 383 6.5 2,136 173 8.1 2,173 152 7.0 51,280 2,346 4.6 
1Includes forbearance, client and product-specific indicators not reflected within quantitative PD assessments.
2Includes assets that have triggered PD movements, or other rules, given that being 1-29 days in arrears in and of itself is not a Stage 2 trigger.
3Expected credit loss allowance on loans and advances to customers (drawn and undrawn).
The Group’s assessment of a significant increase in credit risk, and resulting categorisation of Stage 2, includes customers moving into early arrears as well as a broader assessment that an up to date customer has experienced a level of deterioration in credit risk since origination. A more sophisticated assessment is required for up to date customers, which varies across divisions and product type. This assessment incorporates specific triggers such as a significant proportionate increase in probability of default relative to that at origination, recent arrears, forbearance activity, internal watch lists and external bureau flags. Up to date exposures in Stage 2 are likely to show lower levels of expected credit loss (ECL) allowance relative to those that have already moved into arrears given that an arrears status typically reflects a stronger indication of future default and greater likelihood of credit losses.
57

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Retail
Performance in the Retail portfolio has remained robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions, government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low. The portfolio has also benefitted from proactive risk management and the continued low interest rate environment
New business quality remains strong
Early arrears rates remain below pre-pandemic levels on personal lending products
Coverage across all IFRS 9 stages has decreased largely due to the improved macroeconomic outlook
Strong credit performance and an improved economic outlook have allowed the Group to progressively unwind many of the additional precautionary credit quality controls introduced during the pandemic, whilst continuing to ensure that customers and the Group remain protected against any remaining uncertainty in the economy and cost of living increases
A Retail impairment credit of £455 million for 2021 compares to a charge of £2,384 million for 2020. This significant decrease resulted from a release of customer related expected credit loss (ECL) allowances driven by the Group's improved macroeconomic outlook, combined with robust observed credit performance, with charges relating to flows to arrears and defaults remaining low despite expiry of all payment holidays
Existing IFRS 9 staging rules and triggers have been maintained across Retail, with the exception of minor changes to the Loans & Overdraft portfolios to tighten criteria and align to the credit cards portfolio. Transfers between stages have been primarily driven by credit risk rating movements and the estimated impact of the economic factors on a customer’s forward-looking default risk
Retail customer related ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn loans and advances (coverage) decreased to 0.6 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.0 per cent) due to the favourable updates in the Group’s economic forecast. As at 31 December 2021 the majority of ECL decreases are reflected within Stage 2 under IFRS 9, representing cases which have observed a significant increase in credit risk since origination (SICR)
Stage 2 loans and advances comprises 7.9 per cent of the Retail portfolio (31 December 2020: 10.5 per cent), of which 87.2 per cent are up to date, performing loans (31 December 2020: 89.3 per cent)
Stage 2 ECL coverage has decreased to 3.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 4.4 per cent), reflecting the improved macroeconomic outlook
Stage 3 loans and advances have remained broadly flat at 1.0 per cent of total loans and advances (31 December 2020: 0.8 per cent and Stage 3 ECL coverage decreased to 20.9 per cent (31 December 2020: 25.2 per cent) due to an increase in BBLS assets which hold zero ECL due to the government guarantee in place, and the improved macroeconomic outlook
Portfolios
UK mortgages
The UK mortgages portfolio is well positioned with low arrears and a strong loan to value (LTV) profile. The Group has actively improved the quality of the portfolio over the years using robust affordability and credit controls, while the balances of higher risk portfolios originated prior to 2008 have continued to reduce
While the housing market has remained resilient throughout 2021 with strong customer demand, the Group has taken action to protect credit quality and participates in the government guarantee scheme for greater than 90 per cent LTVs, which provides risk mitigation at the highest exposures
Total loans and advances increased to £308.3 billion (31 December 2020: £294.8 billion), with a small reduction in average LTV to 42.1 per cent (31 December 2020: 43.5 per cent). The proportion of balances with an LTV greater than 90 per cent decreased to 0.5 per cent (31 December 2020: 0.6 per cent). The average LTV of new business decreased to 63.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 63.9 per cent)
There was an impairment credit of £273 million for 2021 compared to a charge of £478 million for 2020, reflecting improvements to the UK's macroeconomic outlook and improved house prices. Total ECL coverage remained stable at 0.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 0.3 per cent)
Stage 2 loans and advances decreased to 7.1 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 9.8 per cent) and Stage 2 ECL coverage has increased to 1.8 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.6 per cent). These impacts also reflect improvements in the UK's macroeconomic outlook, with a reduction in balances transferred into Stage 2 based on the forward-looking view of their credit performance, in addition to favourable experience and house price assumptions
Stage 3 loans and advances remained stable at 0.6 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 0.6 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage decreased to 9.5 per cent (31 December 2020: 10.3 per cent). This reflects favourable credit performance, in addition to favourable house price assumptions (both observed and forecast)
Credit cards
Credit cards balances decreased to £14.5 billion (31 December 2020 £15.1 billion) due to reduced levels of customer spend
There was an impairment credit of £49 million for 2021, compared to a charge of £800 million for 2020, reflecting lower than anticipated arrears emergence and improvements in the macroeconomic outlook. Total ECL coverage decreased to 3.6 per cent (31 December 2020: 6.1 per cent)
This favourability is reflected in Stage 2 loans and advances which decreased to 14.3 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 21.7 per cent) and Stage 2 ECL coverage which has reduced to 12.0 per cent (31 December 2020: 16.2 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances decreased to 2.0 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 2.3 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage increased to 56.9 per cent (31 December 2020: 56.0 per cent)
58

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Loans and overdrafts
Loans and advances for personal current account and the personal loans portfolios remained broadly flat at £9.6 billion (31 December 2020: £9.5 billion), reflecting recovering customer demand with rising economic activity
The impairment charge was £39 million for the full year 2021 compared to £739 million for the full year 2020. This decrease is due to the improved outlook within the Group's macroeconomic forecasts, in addition to favourable credit performance, reducing both Stage 2 ECL coverage to 15.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 22.6 per cent) and overall ECL coverage to 4.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 7.6 per cent)
Commercial Banking
£15 billion - Sustainable financing for corporate and institutional clients by 2024
With the support of our Sustainability and ESG Financing team, created in 2021, we will help clients with an increasing volume of Sustainability and ESG-linked loan transactions, underpinned by our range of sustainable finance tools and propositions. The £15 billion ambition by 2024 will include:
Green use of proceeds - funding that can support a broad range of investments in sustainable business, including our Clean Growth Finance Initiative (CGFI), Real Estate & Housing green lending initiative, and renewables funding including refinance and acquisitions.
Sustainability and ESG Linked Loans - general corporate purpose lending where a margin ratchet is linked to achievement of ambitious, pre agreed company level ESG sustainability performance targets (SPT's).
Green, ESG, Transition, and Social bonds - which have a defined use of proceeds aligned to one or more of these activities.
Sustainability linked bond facilitation - where bond proceeds are for general corporate purposes, and the coupon increases if specific Key Performance Indicators ("KPI's") are not met.
Retail
£8 billion – Financing for electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid electric vehicles by 20241
We will enhance our transport offering with more flexible finance solutions, expanded manufacturer partnerships and services. We will also extend digital channels to include new direct to consumer leasing and financing solutions for EV charge points to meet emerging customer needs.
£10 billion – Green mortgage lending by 20242
As the largest UK mortgage lender, we will continue our commitment to supporting customers grow their understanding of home energy efficiency, as well as providing innovative products that drive greater customer consideration for energy efficiency when purchasing their homes.
1Includes new lending advances for Black Horse and operating lease for Lex Autolease (gross);includes cars and vans.
2New mortgage lending on new and existing residential property that meets an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) rating of B or higher.
Scottish Widows
We estimate we’ll make discretionary investment of £20–25 billion into climate-aware investment strategies by 2025, with at least £1 billion invested in climate solutions investments.
We’re working closely with our core strategic fund management partners to develop and refine a range of funds that have a bias towards investing in companies that are adapting their businesses to be less carbon-intensive and/or developing climate solutions. We’ll invest in climate solutions investments either within these strategies or other funds. To define climate solution investments, we look at company revenue associated with activities such as alternative energy, energy efficiency, green building, sustainable agriculture, sustainable water and pollution prevention. We use MSCI Environmental Impact Revenue data to help with this classification.


15

BUSINESS
Own Operations
Our own environmental footprint
Since 2020, we have been tracking against three operational climate pledges, which were announced early in 2021. They are designed to accelerate our plan to tackle climate change and apply across our own operations.
Net zero and operational climate pledges
We will achieve net zero carbon operations by 2030. We plan to reduce our direct emissions (known as Scope 1 and 2 emissions) by at least 75 per cent (compared to 2018/19 levels)
We will maintain travel carbon emissions below 50 per cent of pre-COVID-19 (2018/19) levels, embedding for the long-term the reduced levels of commuting and business travel seen during the pandemic and supporting colleagues to switch to low carbon transport
We will reduce our total energy consumption by 50 per cent by 2030 (compared to 2018/19). While we already procure 100 per cent renewable electricity, it remains crucial that we reduce the amount of power we consume to support the UK in meeting an increasing demand for renewable energy
Achieving these goals will not be easy, and we will need to invest in our buildings over the next decade, supporting the UK in the transition towards a greener future. We will continue to deploy energy efficient technology including LED lighting and improved building controls. We will remove all use of natural gas from our estate, replacing gas boilers with low carbon heating technologies and create more sustainable branches in communities across the UK. Many of the technologies we will need to use are still new and we will work closely with our partners and supply chain to innovate.
We proudly remained Carbon Trust Standard certification holders for carbon reduction for the twelfth year in a row. We are also members of the UK Green Buildings Council and we have recently renewed our commitment to the World Green Building Council Net Zero Carbon Buildings Commitment to include the new embodied carbon reduction requirement for new build and major refurbishment by 2030. This renewed commitment, along with those we’ve already made by joining The Climate Group’s campaigns on renewable electricity (RE100), energy productivity (EP100) and electric vehicles (EV100), underpins our new climate pledges.
Additional operational sustainability and environmental ambitions
We also have broader environmental ambitions for our own operations, which focus on reducing waste and improving water efficiency, which include:
Reduce our operational waste by 80% by 2025, from a 2014/15 baseline
Reduce water consumption by 40% by 2030, from a 2009 baseline
We also achieved certification to the Carbon Trust Standard for Waste for the first time in 2021. The standard recognises organisations that follow best practice in measuring, managing, and reducing their waste impact.
Further information on operational carbon and sustainability performance can be located in our Lloyds Banking Group ESG Report 2021.
Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions reporting for own operations
The Group has reported greenhouse gas emissions and environmental performance since 2009, and since 2013 this has been reported in line with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and its applicable regulations and the Large and Medium Sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended) (i.e. Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (`SECR').
Our total emissions, in tonnes of CO2 equivalent, are reported in the table 7 below.
Methodology
The Group follows the principles of the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard to calculate Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions from our worldwide operations. The reporting period is 1 October 2020 to 30 September 2021, which is different to that of our Directors’ report (January to December 2021). This is in line with the regulations in that most of the emissions reporting year falls within the period of the Directors’ Report. Emissions are reported based on the operational control approach.
Reported Scope 1 emissions are those generated from gas and oil used in buildings, emissions from fuels used in UK company owned vehicles used for business travel and fugitive emissions from the use of air conditioning and chiller/refrigerant plants.
Reported Scope 2 emissions are generated from the use of electricity and are calculated using both the location and market-based methodologies.
Reported Scope 3 emissions relate to business travel and commuting undertaken by colleagues, emissions from colleagues working from home, operational waste and the extraction and distribution of each of our energy sources – electricity, gas and oil.
Table 7. Intensity ratio*
Legacy ScopeOct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Location Based)1
11.613.515.8
GHG emissions (CO2e) per £m of underlying income (Market Based)1
7.37.89.9
1Intensities have been restated for 2018–2019 and 2019–2020 to reflect changes to emissions data only, replacing estimated data with actuals; underlying income figures for those years have not changed. Scope 3 emissions include elements within the Group's own operations including emissions for waste, colleague commuting and business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels). Additionally, October 19–September 20 and October 20-September 21 Scope 3 figures include an allowance for emissions from homeworkers not previously accounted for, owing to the significant increase in materiality year-on-year due to the impacts of COVID-19. Previous years have not been restated.
*Underlying income has been selected as the most accurate representation of value add in terms of measuring intensity ratio by the Group

16

BUSINESS
This year, our overall location-based carbon emissions were 188,806 tonnes CO2e; an 8.5 per cent since decrease since 2019/20. We have seen a continued reduction in our carbon emissions this reporting year, mainly driven by the impact of coronavirus on our operations. A large proportion of our colleagues continued to work from home in 2021 in line with travel restrictions and advice, which has led to a considerable reduction in both scope 1 and 3 business travel numbers reported.
Group energy consumption, electricity and gas, has also reduced mainly due to the impact of this operational shift. However, most of our buildings have still been operational and subject to our continued energy management and optimisation programme. Throughout winter months we have seen a small increase in our gas consumption due to additional fresh air requirements in our operational buildings. Overall, we have seen building energy consumption and associated carbon emissions reduced.
Since January 2019, our scope 2 market-based emissions figure is zero tCO2e, as we have procured renewable electricity mainly through our PPA and Green Tariff, and renewable certificates equal to the remainder to make up the total electricity consumption in each of the markets we operate.
Omissions
Emissions associated with joint ventures and investments are not included in this disclosure as they fall outside the scope of our operational boundary. The Group does not have any emissions associated with imported heat, steam or imported cooling and is not aware of any other material sources of omissions from our reporting.
Table 8. Carbon Emissions (tonnes CO2e)
Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep20
Oct18-
Sep19
Total CO2e (market-based)118,057119,878180,002
Total CO2e (location-based)188,806206,236286,363
Total Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,401125,387154,917
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (location-based)108,084124,708152,546
Total Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,65339,02948,556
– Of Which UK Scope 1 & 2 (market-based)37,33638,72847,872
Total Scope 137,65339,02948,171
Total Scope 2 (market-based)385
Total Scope 2 (location-based)70,74886,358106,745
Total Scope 380,40480,849131,446
Global Energy Use (kWhs)Oct20-
Sep21
Oct19-
Sep201
Oct18-
Sep191
Total Global Energy Use474,364,203517,459,510589,853,483
– Of Which UK Energy Use469,425,422512,208,678583,662,870
Total Building Energy468,594,150497,144,236550,290,468
Total Company Owned Vehicle Energy2,796,07314,436,43629,987,906
Total Grey Fleet Vehicle Energy2
2,973,9805,878,8389,575,109
1Restated 2018/2019 and 2019/20 emissions data to improve the accuracy of reporting, using actual data to replace estimates.
2Grey fleet refers to colleague and hired road vehicles being used for a business purpose. Emissions in tonnes CO2e in line with the c (2004). We are reporting to the revised Scope 2 guidance, disclosing a market-based figure in addition to the location-based figure. The methodology to derive reported Scope 1, 2 and 3 emissions is provided in the Lloyds Banking Group Reporting Criteria statement.
Scope 1 emissions are emissions from activities for which the Group is responsible, including mobile and stationary combustion of fuel & operation of facilities.
Scope 2 emissions are emissions from the purchase of electricity, heat, steam, or cooling by the Group for its own use and have been calculated in accordance with GHG Protocol guidelines, in both location and market-based methodologies.
Scope 3 emissions include elements within the Group's own operations such as emissions from waste, colleague commuting and business travel (including taxis, tube, well to tank emissions of business travel and hotels).


17

BUSINESS
Energy efficiency
While COVID-19 has had an impact on our energy performance year on year, we have also seen consumption reduction driven by our continued energy efficiency initiatives. This workstream includes an energy optimisation programme that implements onsite optimisation and strategic alterations of Building Management System (BMS) and controls systems to match the run hours of plant to core operating hours and ensures temperature settings are aligned with Group comfort guidelines. In 2021, 45 deep-dives, 80 onsite optimisations, 9 remote optimisations and 531 bank holiday programming were completed, which resulted in a 101.5 GWh saving. We have also run a programme of LED lighting upgrades throughout our estate, leading to an estimated 1,280 MWh electricity saving.
Governance
Given the strategic importance of our sustainability ambitions and commitment in managing the impacts arising from climate change, our governance structure provides clear oversight and ownership of the Group’s environmental sustainability strategy and management of climate risk.
lbk-20211231_g2.jpg
Further information with respect to entity governance and executive oversight can be located in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Managing climate risks
The Group defines climate risk as, ‘the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a result of climate change, either directly or through our customers’. These may be realised from physical weather events, the impacts of the transition to net zero or as a consequence of the Group's response to managing this transition.
The Group’s response to managing climate risk affects many different stakeholder groups, including: our customers; colleagues; suppliers; regulators and policymakers; investors and NGOs and wider society. Our response will have a long-term bearing on these stakeholders and the Group’s business model.
Climate risk is considered a principal risk within the Group’s Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), reflecting its importance and the focus required. This ensures a consistent approach to embedding the consideration of climate risk in the Group’s activities, while also enhancing Board-level insight.
Climate risk also impacts many of the financial and non-financial risks the Group faces. Therefore, the Group has also taken steps to build and embed the consideration of climate-related risks throughout our ERMF to ensure comprehensive consideration across our business activities.
The Group and the wider industry continue to develop both the understanding and capabilities for managing climate risk, therefore, the Group’s approach will evolve significantly in the coming years.
18

BUSINESS
In addition to the risks already facing the Group, new risks will continue to emerge as a consequence of the transition to net zero. Further information on the emerging risks facing the Group, including those relating to climate change, can be found in the Risk overview section of this document.
Embedding climate risk management
In 2021, the Group established the Group Climate Risk Policy to provide an overarching framework for managing climate risks and opportunities. The policy is structured around seven principles, setting out clear requirements to help meet the Group’s ambitions relating to climate change, the TCFD recommendations and relevant regulatory expectations.
The policy is intended to support appropriate consideration of climate risks and opportunities across key activities. However, it also recognises that understanding of and capability for managing climate risk will continue to evolve. As such, some areas of the policy cannot currently be fully embedded at this time, with ongoing activity to implement these expectations continuing into 2022.
Principle 1
The Group will ensure climate risk is fully embedded through effective policies, procedures, processes, systems and controls.
Principle 2
The Group will identify and assess potential climate risks and opportunities, including how these could impact on the Group’s strategy, external commitments, operating model and customer journeys.
Principle 3
The Group will embed appropriate scenario analysis capabilities to support its understanding and proactive management of climate risk and opportunities.
Principle 4
The Group’s strategy will consider climate risks and opportunities to support our customers and meet our strategic objectives.
Principle 5
The Group will set an appropriate risk appetite for climate risk against which it will operate.
Principle 6
The Group’s governance structure will provide oversight of climate risk impacts, effective decision-making and timely escalation to senior management.
Principle 7
The Group’s reporting will support monitoring and management of climate risks as well as the Group’s relevant strategic commitments, alongside appropriate disclosures to inform our external stakeholders.
We have incorporated the consideration of climate risk into a number of key processes to ensure suitable Board-level visibility.
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board. This is currently focused on a qualitative assessment against external expectations and the Group's external commitments. This is supported by monitoring relevant information to track key climate risks throughout the Group. Although this remains in its infancy, reporting will continue to be enhanced as understanding and capabilities improve.
A Board approved Risk Appetite Statement for climate risk is in place, supported by an initial metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace. We are developing our approach to setting further quantitative and qualitative risk appetite metrics as our capabilities evolve, including appropriate consideration across our sub-groups.
The Group’s 2021 financial planning process captured an initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks and opportunities. We also piloted forecasting approaches to provide a high-level view of the Group’s lending financed emissions out to 2030. Both these areas are expected to evolve for future planning cycles, to ensure climate-related consideration is fully embedded.
We have considered and included commentary on climate-related risks as part of our annual Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). We have used expert judgement to assess the financial impacts for key risk types that are sensitive to climate change, under a number of different climate scenarios. We will enhance our approach further as our scenario analysis capabilities develop.
Key climate risks across the Group’s risk taxonomy
We have mapped how examples of the Group's key risks from climate change impact across the different risk types within the Group’s risk taxonomy.
While the majority of the Group’s principal risks are impacted in different ways, we have focused on the impact for the most material risk types, outlined in the table below.
These examples are useful to understand some of the key risks for the Group across its risk taxonomy; however, this is not an exhaustive view of all the potential climate risks across the Group’s other principal risks.







19

BUSINESS
Table 9. Examples of climate change impacts across other principal risks
Key risk types impactedDriverExamples of key risks for Lloyds Banking Group
StrategicReputation
Failure to deliver or sufficiently drive change through the Group’s net zero strategy, relating to its financed activities and own operations
CreditPolicy & Legal
Technology
Market
Reputation
Physical (Acute / Chronic)
Impacts from new and existing government policies, for example, around energy efficiency standards or the transition to electric vehicles
New technology and availability of electric vehicles reduce valuation of existing vehicles
Unproven new technologies required across other sectors in order to reduce emissions
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s lending
Increased costs from sustainable materials for Commercial Banking customers
Adverse coverage of the Group’s exposure to high emissions sectors
Flood damage to properties or coastal erosion, impacting our Retail Mortgage business or Commercial Real Estate portfolio
Reduced production for Commercial Banking customers as result of higher temperatures and/or changing weather patterns, for example, lower food or crop yields
MarketMarket
Physical (Chronic)
Reduction in asset and company valuations reflecting changes in customer demand, impacting the Group’s markets/trading business, investments and equities
Changes in longevity of the Group’s pension scheme members
Insurance underwritingPhysical (Acute / Chronic)
Potential for increased levels of General Insurance claims due to damage to property caused by changes to weather patterns and climate (e.g. flood, storm, coastal erosion)
ConductReputation
Policy & Legal
Conduct risk implications from the Group’s role in the transition, including potential impacts on mortgage customers, specific sectors, insurance and investment products
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Operational resiliencePhysical (Acute)
Damage to properties and systems within the Group estate, resulting in disruption to the Group’s services to customers
Disruption to services provided by the Group’s suppliers
Regulatory and legalPolicy & Legal
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are considered to be either insufficient or misleading, including potential 'greenwashing’ in product communications
Evolving regulatory standards for the Group’s operations
We are continuing to integrate consideration of climate risk as part of activity and processes for managing other principal risks in our enterprise Risk Management Framework. This has focused on the most material risks impacting the Group. We have refined our analysis of lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk, and over 2020 and 2021, we have completed sector deep dives.
Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk
We have refined our analysis of the sectors where we have lending to customers that may likely contribute a higher share of the Group's financed emissions. Not all customers in these sectors have high emissions or are exposed to significant transition risks. We continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
20

BUSINESS
Table 10. Lending to customers in sectors with increased climate risk1
Commercial Banking Sectors5
Total utilisation of Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Total limits of
Commercial Banking customers (£m)2
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customer3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)4
Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
Energy Use in BuildingsReal Estate17,711 19,461 22,218 24,875 3.5%3.9%57 62 
Social Housing5,538 5,966 10,556 11,137 1.1%1.2%84 91 
Agriculture6
Agriculture7,526 7,429 8,074 8,012 1.5%1.5%101 103 
Forestry10 10 15 16 —%—%67 65 
Fishing31 26 50 50 —%—%59 49 
TransportationPassenger Transport1,231 1,135 2,216 2,264 0.2%0.2%41 47 
Industrial Transport1,058 1,374 2,297 2,507 0.2%0.3%42 46 
Automotives7
1,007 1,485 5,452 6,315 0.2%0.3%26 25 
Energy Use in Industry8
Housebuilders655 870 2,872 3,023 0.1%0.2%28 28 
Cement, Construction Materials, Chemicals & Steel Manufacture279 317 814 1,098 0.1%0.1%27 25 
General Manufacturing1,167 1,300 3,745 4,329 0.2%0.3%35 33 
Food Manufacturing and Wholesalers762 1,002 2,802 3,069 0.2%0.2%18 22 
Other Construction9
921 1,052 2,094 2,457 0.2%0.2%35 37 
Energy Supply8
Oil & Gas10
987 1,099 2,520 3,815 0.2%0.2%39 35 
Utilities1,791 900 4,372 3,820 0.4%0.2%74 76 
Coal Mining<1<122 <0.1%<0.1%3 
Total40,674 43,434 70,097 76,809 8.1%8.6% — 
Loans and advances to
Retail customers (£m)
Undrawn loans and advances to Retail customers (£m)
Percentage of total Group loans and advances to customers3
Weighted
Average Maturity
(No. Months)10
Retail Division areasDec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020Dec 2021Dec 2020
UK Mortgages308,344 294,806 17,151 19,456 61.2%58.4%232 224 
UK Motor Finance14,276 15,201 1,985 1,660 2.8%3.0%28 28 
Business Banking11
3,804 4,281  — 0.8%0.8%73 74 
Total326,424 314,288 19,136 21,116 64.8%62.3% — 
1Commercial Banking and Retail divisions only. Excludes Insurance & Wealth division.
2Commercial Banking division only, excludes Commercial Finance. All values are gross of significant risk transfers. 2020 restated on a consistent basis with 2021.
3Percentages calculated using total Group loans and advances to customers on a statutory basis, before allowance for impairment losses (£503,608 million at 31 December 2021, £504,603 million at 31 December 2020).
4Weighted average maturity calculated using total limits in Commercial Banking and loans and advances in Retail.
5Commercial lending classified using Office for National Statistics. Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes at legal entity level.
6Agriculture total utilisation includes Agricultural Mortgage Corporation (AMC) based on loans and advances to customers (2021: £4,246 million, 2020: £4,186 million). AMC total limits aligned to total utilisation.
7Includes automotive manufacture, retail and wholesale trade, rentals and parts but excludes finance captives and securitisations.
8Certain SIC codes have been removed from the table in 2021 to better represent the activities in the descriptions; Architectural, planning and consulting from Other construction, Water and sewerage from Utilities and Wholesaling activities from Food manufacturing.
9Construction excludes 41100 Development of building projects (included within Real estate) and 41202 Construction of domestic buildings (reported separately as Housebuilders).
10Excludes commodity traders.
11Sectors with increased climate risk only, as seen in Commercial Banking above. Undrawn loans and advances excluded.


21

BUSINESS
Sector reviews
We are committed to supporting the UK Government's vision of a sustainable low carbon future, so in line with our purpose of Helping Britain Prosper we have undertaken an analysis of how the Group’s principal risks are impacted by climate change.
As detailed in the table 10, we have identified sectors where we have lending to customers that are likely to be higher carbon emitters or be exposed to higher levels of physical or transition risks and continue to enhance and refine this work at both counterparty and sector level, considering both risks and opportunities as we look to support our customers’ responses to climate change.
Across 2020 and 2021, we completed bespoke deep dives into each of these sectors which has been supported by external third-party consultants and sector experts. A summary of the sectors identified and the progress achieved to date is detailed in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
The follow-up actions as a result of these sector deep dives are to:
Develop sector business cases to identify and implement levers and opportunities, including any required changes to strategy
Identify any implications on credit risk appetite and policies by sector
Continue to improve Group financed emissions calculations by sector
Define business strategy by sector, including targets and metrics
Continue to embed climate risk into all sector reviews, including sectors not prioritised in this exercise, in 2022
Climate Scenario Analysis
As the understanding and importance of climate risk progresses, climate scenario analysis is becoming an increasingly important risk management tool assisting the identification, measurement and ongoing assessment of climate risks that pose threats to Lloyds Banking Group’s strategic objectives.
In a first generation exercise, the Group analysed the impact of three scenarios on a sample of the balance sheet compromising credit portfolios in Commercial Banking, Retail Mortgage and Motor businesses prior to the wider Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario (CBES) exercise undertaken for the Bank of England. The Group ran workshops with subject matter experts providing an assessment of the scenario analysis results. This helped to advance the understanding of the risks and financial implications in different sectors and business areas resulting from climate change, as well as suggesting what potential management actions might be required under the different scenarios.
Climate scenario analysis is a fast-evolving discipline, requiring new skills and capabilities to be established with appropriate levels of governance. Participating in the Bank of England’s CBES exercise enabled the Group to explore the resilience of its credit portfolios under three different climate scenarios (early policy action, late policy action, no additional policy action) over the next 30 years to 2050. The CBES exercise was intended to be a learning exercise and the Group took away key learnings. These, along with further details on Climate Scenario Analysis, are described in the Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report 2021.
Looking Forward
The Group has made good progress in further incorporating climate change into the Group strategy and business operations as well as prioritising the areas of our businesses where we see the greatest opportunity to support and accelerate the transition to a low carbon economy.
We are enhancing our disclosures with our inaugural standalone Climate Report and have published key sector ambitions for high-emissions and fossil fuel sectors, committing to a full phase-out from thermal coal.
In 2022, we will continue to develop propositions and tools for our customers to help them reduce their emissions, while further advancing our work on reducing our own operational and supply chain emissions.
We will also look to report additional sector ambitions in 2022 for parts of our remaining carbon-intensive sectors, including residential mortgages, transportation and automotive activity beyond Retail (Motor). In addition, we will be developing further ambitions and a transition plan in accordance with the timelines stipulated by the NZBA.
Given this progress and the evolving best practice for climate votes, we do not intend at present to bring a climate vote to the 2022 AGM. We will continue to consider a vote on a year-by-year basis.
Managing the risk from climate change remains a key priority for the Group. We expect to enhance our capabilities by leveraging the learnings from our participation in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario and undertaking further climate scenario analysis in 2022. This will allow us to better understand the resilience of the Group's business model to climate risks.
We will continue to develop our assessment of the sectors at increased risk from climate change or the transition to net zero, and augment our climate related policies as our capabilities strengthen. Focused Board level reviews will consider how our strategy and credit portfolios will evolve as we transition to net zero, including the further development of our risk management capabilities.
Continued embedding of climate risk is essential for the Group to achieve our strategy in transitioning to net zero. Our understanding of climate-related risks and opportunities continues to develop and our strategy and risk management activities will evolve accordingly in order to best respond.
LEGAL ACTIONS AND REGULATORY MATTERS
During the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to threatened or actual legal proceedings and regulatory reviews and investigations both in the UK and overseas. Further discussion on the Group's regulatory and legal provisions is set out in note 29 to the financial statements and on its contingent liabilities relating to other legal actions and regulatory matters is set out in note 39 to the financial statements.
22

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The results discussed below are not necessarily indicative of Lloyds Bank Group’s results in future periods. The following information contains certain forward looking statements. For a discussion of certain cautionary statements relating to forward looking statements, see Forward looking statements.
The following discussion is based on and should be read in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and the related notes thereto included elsewhere in this annual report. For a discussion of the accounting policies used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements, see Accounting policies in note 2 to the financial statements.


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Loan portfolio
23

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
Critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty are discussed in note 3 to the financial statements.
FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
Future developments in relation to the Lloyds Bank Group’s IFRS reporting are discussed in note 46 to the financial statements.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2021 AND 2020
INCOME STATEMENT COMMENTARY
20212020
£m£m
Net interest income11,036 10,770 
Other income3,637 3,815 
Total income14,673 14,585 
Operating expenses(10,206)(9,196)
Impairment credit (charge)1,318 (4,060)
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 
Tax (expense) credit(583)137 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders4,826 1,023 
Profit attributable to other equity holders344 417 
Profit attributable to equity holders5,170 1,440 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests32 26 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 
During the year ended 31 December 2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a profit before tax of £5,785 million, an increase of £4,456 million compared with £1,329 million in 2020; the increase reflected, in particular, the improved economic outlook for the UK in 2021. The Lloyds Bank Group profit before tax for the year ended 31 December 2021 included a profit before tax of £5,024 million from its Retail division and a profit before tax of £1,536 million from its Commercial Banking division.
Total income increased by £88 million, or 1 per cent, to £14,673 million in 2021 compared with £14,585 million in 2020, reflecting an increase of £266 million in net interest income partly offset by a decrease of £178 million in other income.
Net interest income was £11,036 million in 2021, an increase of £266 million, or 2 per cent compared to £10,770 million in 2020. Average interest earning assets increased by £2,762 million to £576,276 million in 2021 compared to £573,514 million in 2020 as growth in new mortgage lending was offset by lower balances in the closed mortgage book, credit cards and motor finance, as well as the continued optimisation of the Corporate and Institutional book within Commercial Banking. The net interest margin increased as the benefit of lower funding costs more than offset the impact of a change in asset mix.
Other income was £178 million, or 5 per cent, lower at £3,637 million in 2021 compared to £3,815 million in 2020.
Net trading income was £365 million lower at £385 million in 2021 compared with £750 million in 2020, reflecting the change in fair value of interest rate derivatives and foreign exchange contracts in the banking book not mitigated through hedge accounting. Other operating income was £51 million, or 2 per cent, lower at £1,999 million in 2021 compared to £2,050 million in 2020, reflecting lower levels of operating lease rental income, as a result of a reduction in the Lex vehicle fleet size, and reduced gains on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, partly offset by increases in the level of cost recharges to other Lloyds Banking Group entities. Fee and commission income was £271 million, or 14 per cent, higher at £2,195 million compared to £1,924 million in 2020 as a result of increases across most fee categories as customer activity increased and the economy improved. Fee and commission expense increased by £33 million, or 4 per cent, to £942 million compared with £909 million in 2020, as a consequence of increased customer activity.
Operating expenses increased by £1,010 million, or 11 per cent to £10,206 million in 2021 compared with £9,196 million in 2020 primarily reflecting higher charges for regulatory and legal provisions (see below). Staff costs were £77 million, or 2 per cent, higher at £3,692 million in 2021 compared with £3,615 million in 2020; as the impact of staff reductions and lower levels of redundancy costs has been offset by higher bonus accruals following the recovery in the Group's profitability. Premises and equipment costs were £210 million lower at £215 million in 2021 compared with £425 million in 2020, reflecting higher gains on disposal of operating lease assets at the end of the contract term and gains on disposal of Group premises. Other expenses were £1,040 million, or 42 per cent, higher at £3,522 million in 2021 compared with £2,482 million in 2020, driven by the increase in charges for regulatory and legal provisions and higher communications and data processing costs as the Group develops and maintains its information technology infrastructure. Depreciation and amortisation costs were £107 million, or 4 per cent, higher at £2,777 million in 2021 compared to £2,670 million in 2020, in part reflecting a software asset write-off as a result of investment in new technology and systems infrastructure.
The Group incurred a regulatory and legal provisions charge in operating expenses of £1,177 million in 2021 compared to £414 million in 2020. The charge in 2021 includes the costs in relation to HBOS Reading and litigation costs and redress and operational costs in respect of litigation and other ongoing legacy programmes. During 2021, £790 million has been recognised in relation to HBOS Reading estimated future awards and operational costs, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth quarter. This reflects the Group's estimate of its full liability and includes the expected future cost in relation to the independent Foskett Panel re-review, operational costs in relation to Dame Linda Dobbs' review which is considering whether the issues relating to HBOS Reading were investigated and appropriately reported by the Group during the period January 2009 to January 2017 and other programme costs. The final outcome could be significantly different once the re-review is concluded.
24

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Impairment improved by £5,378 million to a credit of £1,318 million in 2021 compared with a charge of £4,060 million in 2020, largely reflecting the improved UK macroeconomic outlook. Overall the Group’s loan portfolio continues to be well-positioned, reflecting a prudent through-the-cycle approach to credit risk with high levels of security. The Group's ECL allowance reduced in the year by £2,132 million to £4,000 million, compared to £6,132 million at 31 December 2020, following the improvements to the UK economic outlook. Observed credit performance remained robust in the year, with the flow of assets into arrears, defaults and write-offs remaining at low levels.
The Group’s base case economic scenario used to calculate the ECL allowance assumes that unemployment will remain close to the reduced level of c.4.3 per cent observed in the fourth quarter following the end of the coronavirus job retention scheme. The ECL allowance continues to reflect a probability-weighted view of future economic scenarios built out from the base case and its associated conditioning assumptions, with a 30 per cent weighting applied to base case, upside and downside scenarios and a 10 per cent weighting to the severe downside. All scenarios have improved since the start of the year, following the changes made to the base case outlook.
In 2021, the Lloyds Bank Group recorded a tax expense of £583 million compared to a tax credit of £137 million in 2020. The tax charge in 2021 includes a credit of £1,168 million arising on the remeasurement of deferred tax assets following the substantive enactment by the UK Government of an increase in the corporation tax rate from 19 per cent to 25 per cent, effective on 1 April 2023.
The Lloyds Bank Group’s post-tax return on average total assets increased to 0.86 per cent compared to 0.24 per cent in the year ended 31 December 2020.
25

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
BALANCE SHEET AND CAPITAL COMMENTARY
20212020
£m£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks54,279 49,888 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,798 1,674 
Derivative financial instruments5,511 8,341 
Loans and advances to banks1
4,478 4,324 
Loans and advances to customers1
430,829 425,694 
Reverse repurchase agreements1
49,708 56,073 
Debt securities4,562 5,137 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 738 
Financial assets at amortised cost490,316 491,966 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,786 27,260 
Other assets1
23,159 20,810 
Total assets602,849 599,939 
Liabilities
Deposits from banks1
3,363 6,230 
Customer deposits1
449,373 425,152 
Repurchase agreements1
30,106 28,184 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 6,875 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,537 6,831 
Derivative financial instruments4,643 8,228 
Debt securities in issue48,724 59,293 
Subordinated liabilities8,658 9,242 
Other liabilities9,183 8,786 
Total liabilities562,077 558,821 
Equity
Ordinary shareholders’ equity36,410 35,105 
Other equity instruments4,268 5,935 
Non-controlling interests94 78 
Total equity40,772 41,118 
Total equity and liabilities602,849 599,939 
1See note 1 regarding changes to presentation.
Total assets were £2,910 million higher at £602,849 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £599,939 million at 31 December 2020. Cash and balances at central banks were £4,391 million, or 9 per cent, higher at £54,279 million compared to £49,888 million at 31 December 2020 reflecting increased liquidity holdings as a result of the inflow of customer deposits; and retirement benefit assets were £2,817 million higher at £4,531 million compared to £1,714 million at 31 December 2020 as a result of actuarial gains and employer contributions. Financial assets at amortised cost decreased by £1,650 million to £490,316 million compared to £491,966 million at 31 December 2020. Loans and advances to customers increased in the year by £5,135 million to £430,829 million, compared to £425,694 million at 31 December 2020, however this was more than offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements, held for liquidity purposes, of £6,365 million, or 11 per cent, from £56,073 million at 31 December 2020 to £49,708 million at 31 December 2021. The increase in loans and advances to customers reflected growth in the open mortgage book, partly offset by reductions in the closed mortgage book, other Retail balances and Commercial lending (in part due to optimisation activities). Derivative financial instruments were £2,830 million lower at £5,511 million compared to £8,341 million at 31 December 2020, driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total liabilities were £3,256 million, or 1 per cent, higher at £562,077 million compared to £558,821 million at 31 December 2020. Customer deposits were £24,221 million, or 6 per cent, higher at £449,373 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £425,152 million at 31 December 2020. There has been continued growth in retail current account and savings balances, reflecting reduced consumer spending during the coronavirus pandemic, which has only been partly offset by lower levels of commercial deposits. Repurchase agreement balances were £1,922 million, or 7 per cent, higher at £30,106 million compared to £28,184 million at 31 December 2020 however deposits from banks were £2,867 million lower at £3,363 million compared to £6,230 million at 31 December 2020 reflecting a reduced need for this source of funding. Debt securities in issue were £10,569 million lower at £48,724 million at 31 December 2021 compared to £59,293 million at 31 December 2020 as the availability of Government support and liquidity measures and increased levels of customer deposits have reduced the need for new funding issuance. Amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings were £5,385 million lower at £1,490 million compared to £6,875 million at 31 December 2020 and derivative liabilities were £3,585 million lower at £4,643 million compared to £8,228 million at 31 December 2020, again driven by movements in the yield curve.
Total equity has decreased by £346 million, or 1 per cent, from £41,118 million at 31 December 2020 to £40,772 million at 31 December 2021 as retained profits for the year have been offset by dividends paid and a net redemption of other equity instruments; and a negative movement on the Group's cash flow hedging reserve has been offset by a positive remeasurement in respect of the Group's post-retirement defined benefit schemes.
26

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to 16.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year and a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment credit through profits.
Risk-weighted assets reduced by £9,286 million, or 5 per cent, from £170,862 million at 31 December 2020 to £161,576 million at 31 December 2021. This was primarily as a result of optimisation activity undertaken in Commercial Banking, partially offset by balance sheet growth in the business. Credit migrations have had a limited impact on the risk-weighted asset position, in part due to the increase in house prices.
The transitional total capital ratio remained at 23.5 per cent, with the benefit of the increase in CET1 capital and reduction in risk-weighted assets broadly offset by reductions in Additional Tier 1 (AT1) and Tier 2 capital instruments. The latter largely reflected the reduction in transitional limits applied to legacy tier 1 and tier 2 capital instruments and calls made on both AT1 and tier 2 capital instruments, partially offset by new issuances.
The UK leverage ratio reduced to 5.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 5.5 per cent) as a result of the reduction in the fully loaded total tier 1 capital position which was partially offset by the reduction in the leverage exposure measure, the latter primarily reflecting movements in securities financing transactions and off-balance sheet items, net of increased balance sheet lending.
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS – 2019
The Lloyds Bank Group’s results for the year ended 31 December 2019, and a discussion of the results for the year ended 31 December 2020 compared to those for the year ended 31 December 2019, were included in the 2020 Annual Report on Form 20-F, filed on 11 March 2021.
27

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET AND INTEREST INCOME AND EXPENSE
202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
Average
balance
Interest
income
Average
yield
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Assets1
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements62,704 70 0.11 57,610 114 0.20 47,490 269 0.57 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements482,767 12,334 2.55 483,906 13,358 2.76 475,385 15,281 3.21 
Debt securities4,725 74 1.57 5,046 92 1.82 5,223 118 2.26 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income26,080 442 1.69 26,952 302 1.12 26,153 430 1.64 
Total interest-earning assets of banking book576,276 12,920 2.24 573,514 13,866 2.42 554,251 16,098 2.90 
Total interest-earning financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 16 0.98 2,319 26 1.12 8,354 73 0.87 
Total interest-earning assets577,907 12,936 2.24 575,833 13,892 2.41 562,605 16,171 2.87 
Allowance for impairment losses on financial assets held at amortised cost(5,115)(5,332)(3,354)
Non-interest earning assets29,767 34,375 F30,671 
Total average assets and interest income602,559 12,936 2.15 604,876 13,892 2.30 589,922 16,171 2.74 
1The line items below are included on the face of the Group's balance sheet.
202120202019
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
Average
interest
earning
assets
Net
interest
income
Net
interest
margin
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Average interest-earning assets and net interest income:
Banking business576,276 11,036 1.92 573,514 10,770 1.88 554,251 12,220 2.20 
Trading securities and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,631 (77)(4.72)2,319 (80)(3.45)8,354 (77)(0.92)
577,907 10,959 1.90 575,833 10,690 1.86 562,605 12,143 2.16 
28

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
202120202019
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
Average
balance
Interest
expense
Average
cost
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
Liabilities and shareholders’ funds1
Deposits by banks4,939 66 1.34 6,866 82 1.19 6,262 87 1.39 
Customer deposits324,058 386 0.12 316,071 1,270 0.40 315,717 2,054 0.65 
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements22,415 22 0.10 32,189 117 0.36 27,935 301 1.08 
Debt securities in issue2
54,333 746 1.37 67,239 761 1.13 67,096 476 0.71 
Lease liabilities1,494 30 2.01 1,656 39 2.36 1,617 39 2.41 
Subordinated liabilities9,046 634 7.01 11,510 827 7.19 9,315 921 9.89 
Total interest-bearing liabilities of banking book416,285 1,884 0.45 435,531 3,096 0.71 427,942 3,878 0.91 
Total interest-bearing financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,689 93 1.39 7,824 106 1.35 10,053 150 1.49 
Total interest-bearing liabilities422,974 1,977 0.47 443,355 3,202 0.72 437,995 4,028 0.92 
Interest-free liabilities
Non-interest bearing customer accounts119,712 95,629 74,130 
Other interest-free liabilities18,289 24,867 37,147 
Non-controlling interests, other equity instruments and shareholders’ funds41,584 41,025 40,650 
Total average liabilities and interest expense602,559 1,977 0.33 604,876 3,202 0.53 589,922 4,028 0.68 
1The line items below are included on the face of the Group’s balance sheet except for liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements, which are disclosed in note 41; and lease liabilities which are disclosed in note 26.
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.30 per cent (2020: 2.42 per cent; 2019: 2.25 per cent).
Average balances are based on daily averages for the principal areas of the Group’s banking activities with monthly or less frequent averages used elsewhere. Management believes that the interest rate trends are substantially the same as they would be if all balances were averaged on the same basis.
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis between UK and non-UK activities is not provided.
29

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CHANGES IN NET INTEREST INCOME – VOLUME AND RATE ANALYSIS
The following table allocates changes in net interest income between volume, rate and their combined impact for 2021 compared with 2020 and for 2020 compared with 2019.
2021 compared with 2020
increase/(decrease)
2020 compared with 2019
increase/(decrease)
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
Total changeChange in
volume
Change in
rates
Change in
rates and
volume
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Interest income
At amortised cost:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements(44)37 (61)(20)(155)57 (175)(37)
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements(1,024)207 (1,212)(19)(1,923)274 (2,158)(39)
Debt securities(18)(9)(10)1 (26)(4)(23)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income140 (1)141  (128)13 (137)(4)
Total banking book interest income(946)234 (1,142)(38)(2,232)340 (2,493)(79)
Total interest income on financial assets at fair value through profit or loss(10)(21)56 (45)(47)(53)21 (15)
Total interest income(956)213 (1,086)(83)(2,279)287 (2,472)(94)
Interest expense

Deposits by banks(16)(23)10 (3)(5)(12)(1)
Customer deposits(884)34 (894)(24)(784)(785)(1)
Liabilities to banks and customers under sale and repurchase agreements(95)(36)(85)26 (184)45 (199)(30)
Debt securities in issue(15)(145)160 (30)285 283 
Lease liabilities(9)(3)(6) — (1)— 
Subordinated liabilities(193)(24)(174)5 (94)217 (252)(59)
Total banking book interest expense(1,212)(197)(989)(26)(782)274 (966)(90)
Total interest expense on financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(13)(35)33 (11)(44)(33)(14)
Total interest expense(1,225)(232)(956)(37)(826)241 (980)(87)
30

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK OVERVIEW
EFFECTIVE RISK MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL
Our approach to risk
Lloyds Bank Group adopts the Lloyds Banking Group enterprise risk management framework supplemented by additional management and control activities to address the Lloyds Bank Group's specific requirements.
Employing informed risk decision-making and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture; striving to protect the Group and its stakeholders.
A prudent approach to risk is fundamental to our business model and drives our participation choices.
The risk management section from pages 36 to 89 provides an in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, including the approach to risk appetite, risk governance, stress testing and detailed analysis of the principal risk categories including the framework by which these risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Our enterprise risk management framework
Lloyds Banking Group’s comprehensive enterprise risk management framework, that applies to Lloyds Bank Group, is the foundation for the delivery of effective risk control. It enables proactive identification, active management and monitoring of the Group’s risks, which is supported by our One Risk and Control Self-Assessment approach.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated to ensure they remain fully in line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s Board risk appetite statement annually. Board-level risk appetite metrics are augmented by further sub-Board level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business metrics and limits. Regular close monitoring and comprehensive reporting to all levels of management and the Board ensures appetite limits are maintained and subject to stress analysis at a risk type and portfolio level, as appropriate.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board down to individuals. Senior executives are supported by a committee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and enable effective Board engagement and decision-making. More information on our Risk committees is available on pages 40 to 41.
lbk-20211231_g3.jpg
Risk culture and the customer
Following the successful transition between the previous, interim and new Lloyds Banking Group Chief Executives, a transparent risk culture continues to resonate across the organisation and is supported by the Board and its tone from the top.
Risk management requires all colleagues to play their part, with individuals taking responsibility for their actions. The Group aims to support this through ongoing investment in infrastructure and developing colleagues’ capabilities.
Senior management articulate the core risk values to which the Group aspires, based on the Group’s prudent business model and approach to risk management with the Board’s guidance.
The Group is open, honest and transparent with colleagues working in collaboration with business areas to:
Support effective risk management and provide constructive challenge
Share lessons learned and understand root causes when things go wrong
Consider horizon risks and opportunities
The Group aims to maintain a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers through the economic cycle.

31

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Connectivity of risks and our strategic risk management framework
COVID-19 has demonstrated how individual risks in aggregate, through their interconnectivity, can place significant pressure on the Group’s strategy, business model and performance. In response to these unprecedented events, a new strategic risk management framework was approved.
Extensive work has been undertaken in 2021 to build a deeper analytical understanding of the Group’s key strategic risk themes and risk connectivity. The Group is committed to advancing these capabilities in 2022, while further integrating strategic risk into Group-wide business planning, placing it at the heart of our strategic priorities and Group-wide risk management.
The risks can be defined as:
Principal: The Board-approved enterprise-wide risk categories, including strategic risk, used to monitor and report the risk exposures posing the greatest impact to the Group.
Strategic: A principal risk arising from:
A failure to understand the potential impact of strategic responses on existing risk types
Incorrect assumptions about internal or external operating environments
Inappropriate strategic responses and business plans
Emerging: A future internal or external event or trend, which could have a material positive or adverse impact on the Group and our customers, but where the probability, timescale and/or materiality may be difficult to accurately assess.

PRINCIPAL RISKS
Despite a resilient recovery, 2021 has been another year of significant uncertainty, with COVID-19 accelerating broad structural changes, including ways of working and impacts to global and domestic economies.
COVID-19 has continued to have a significant impact on all risk types in 2021. Understanding and managing its impacts dynamically has remained a major area of focus. The Group has responded quickly to the challenges faced, putting in place risk mitigation strategies and refining its investment and strategic plans.
All of the Group’s principal risks, which are outlined in this section, are reported regularly to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
As part of a review of the Group’s risk categories, governance risk is no longer a principal risk and is now classified as a secondary risk category. A detailed review of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework is planned for 2022, which may result in further changes to our principal risks.
The risk management section from pages 36 to 89 provides a more in-depth picture of how each principal risk is managed within the Group.
Risk trends: è Stable risk é Increased risk ê Decreased risk y New risk embedding
Market risk è
The Group’s structural hedge has increased to £235 billion (2020: £181 billion) mostly due to a significant growth in customer deposits. Both customer behaviour and hedging of these balances are reviewed regularly to ensure near-term interest rate exposure is managed.
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes have seen an improvement in IAS 19 accounting surplus to £4.3 billion, (2020: £1.5 billion). This is due to strong asset returns, an increase in the discount rate and deficit reduction contributions, partially offset by higher gilt yields and inflation.
Key mitigating actions:
Structural hedge programmes implemented to stabilise earnings
Equity and credit spread risks are closely monitored and, where appropriate, asset and liability matching is undertaken
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes continue to monitor their credit allocation and longevity hedge as well as the hedges in place against nominal rate and inflation movements
Credit risk ê
The Group continued to actively support its customers throughout 2021, with a range of flexible options and payment holidays, as well as lending through the UK Government support schemes. This support, alongside the other public policy interventions, has contributed to the economic recovery in 2021 and helped keep credit defaults and business failures at low levels.
The improved economic outlook was a key driver of the 2021 impairment credit of £1,318 million, which compares to the full year impairment charge of £4,060 million taken in 2020 in light of anticipated losses resulting from the pandemic. Although reduced in 2021, the Group still holds appropriate customer related expected credit loss allowances of £3,998 million (2020: £6,127 million).
Key mitigating actions:
Prudent, through-the-cycle risk appetite
Robust risk assessment, models and credit sanctioning
Sector and asset class concentrations closely monitored and controlled
Group-wide Road to Recovery programme established to manage and support increases in businesses experiencing financial difficulties

32

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Funding and liquidity risk ê
The Group maintained its robust funding and liquidity position throughout 2021.
Ahead of the closure of the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME) in October 2021, the Group drew additional funds, taking the total amount outstanding to £30 billion as at 31 December 2021, facilitating a significant reduction in money market and wholesale funding.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements
Significant customer deposit base, driven by inflows to trusted brands
Capital risk ê
The Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to 16.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent) largely reflecting profits for the year and a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief which largely offset the impairment credit through profits.
The implementation of regulatory changes on 1 January 2022 reduced the CET1 capital ratio to 14.1 per cent which remains above internal risk appetite levels and minimum regulatory capital requirements.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group has a capital management framework that includes the setting of capital risk appetite and capital planning and stress testing activities
The Group monitors early warning indicators and maintains a Capital Contingency Framework as part of the Lloyds Banking Group Recovery Plan which are designed to identify emerging capital concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken, if needed
Change/execution risk è
The change/execution risk profile has remained stable with proactive reprioritisation and management of the Group’s change portfolio continuing through 2021. Focus has remained on the ongoing evolution and strengthening of the control framework and change capability required to support the Group’s business and technology transformation plans.
Key mitigating actions:
Continued evolution and enhancement of the Group change policy, method and control environment
Measurement and reporting of change/execution risk
Providing sufficient skilled resources to safely deliver and embed the change portfolio and support future transformation plans
Conduct risk ê
Overall improvement in conduct risk as a result of the Group’s continued support to customers impacted by COVID-19, with focus on outcomes for customers with UK Government support schemes, treating customers in financial difficulty fairly and working through legacy issues.
Key mitigating actions:
Robust conduct risk framework in place to support delivery of fair customer outcomes, market integrity and competition requirements
Active engagement with regulatory bodies and key stakeholders to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus continues to meet evolving stakeholder expectations
Data risk è
Investment continues to be made to enhance the maturity of data risk management, data capabilities and focus on the end-to-end management of data risk, including our suppliers.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivered a data strategy and enhanced capability in data management and privacy, assurance of suppliers and data controls and processes
Embedded data by design and data ethics principles into the data science lifecycle
People risk è
In 2021, there has been continued pressure on colleague workloads and further significant changes to ways of working, as colleagues who worked from home during the pandemic transition into a workstyle based on their role. Colleague feedback has been provided via the annual colleague survey, and work is underway to address the key themes identified.
Key mitigating actions:
Delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people with the required capabilities, together with implementation of rigorous succession planning for our senior leaders
Continued focus on the Group’s culture by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce appropriate behaviours

33

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience risk ê
Despite ongoing heightened risks from COVID-19, business continuity plans have remained resilient. Policy statements published by the regulators in March 2021 have driven further activity to enhance the existing approach to operational resilience. Technology resilience remains a key area of focus.
Key mitigating actions:
Refreshed operational resilience strategy to deliver against new regulation and improve the Group’s ability to respond to incidents while delivering key services to customers
Investment in technology improvements, including enhancements to the resilience of systems that support critical business processes
Operational risk è
Against the backdrop of COVID-19, economic uncertainty and changes in senior management throughout the year, the operational risk profile has remained broadly stable with operational losses in line with previous years. Cyber and security, technology and sourcing continue to be the most material operational risk areas.
Key mitigating actions:
The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the inherent risks faced
The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance
Model risk é
Model risk remains above pre-pandemic levels. The effect of government-led customer support schemes weakened relationships between model inputs and outputs, and there remains a reliance on the use of judgement, particularly in the areas of forecasting and impairment. However, recent months have seen more stable patterns for model outputs, and model drivers are expected to remain valid in the longer term.
In common with the rest of the industry, changes required to capital models following new regulations will create a temporary increase in the risk relating to these models during the period of transition.
Key mitigating actions:
The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the Group
Regulatory and legal risk è
Regulatory engagement through 2021 has focused on the Group’s response to COVID-19, strategic transformation and regulatory initiatives. Proactive engagement on emerging focus areas has helped the regulatory risk profile remain broadly stable, despite the previously announced regulatory fine relating to the past communication of historical home insurance renewals.
Legal risk continues to be impacted by the evolving UK legal and regulatory landscape due to the UK’s exit from the EU and other changing regulatory standards as well as uncertainty arising from the current and future litigation landscape.
Key mitigating actions:
Lloyds Banking Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across the business which are aligned to Lloyds Banking Group risk appetite
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance
Strategic risk y
Strategic risk is a significant source of risk for the Group, influencing the Group’s strategy, business model, performance and risk profile.
Significant work has been undertaken during 2021 to understand the risk implications of the Group’s strategy and the key drivers of strategic risk. These are outlined in more detail on the following pages.
Key mitigating actions:
Considering the strategic implications of emerging trends and addressing them through our strategy
Integration of strategic risk into business planning process and embedding into day-to-day risk management
Climate risk y
The Group continued to embed climate risk into its activities, including undertaking detailed analysis of its portfolios and the pathways required to reduce the emissions that the Group finances. This included deep dives into sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change.
The Group has continued to develop scenario modelling capabilities and Lloyds Banking Group completed Part I of the Bank of England’s 2021 Biennial Exploratory Scenario on the Financial Risks for Climate Change.
Key mitigating actions:
Established Lloyds Banking Group climate risk policy in place
Ongoing development of climate assessment tools and methodologies
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Board
Initial consideration of the Group’s key climate risks undertaken as part of Lloyds Banking Group's financial planning process
Continued progress against the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations, enhancing our climate related financial disclosures
34

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
EMERGING RISKS
Horizon scanning and emerging risks are important considerations for the Group, enabling our business to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities and respond through our strategic planning and long-term risk mitigation framework.
Internal working groups have been established to regularly scan the horizon and identify emerging risks. This is supplemented by consultation with external experts, to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
Progress has been made this year on a data-driven approach, piloting a methodology for interrogating industry news and other external data sources, using available technology to further expand our insight. It is intended to develop this further in 2022, to incorporate more sophisticated technology and innovation practices.
In many cases, the Group’s most notable emerging risks are aligned with the themes identified. These emerging risks themes raise questions in respect of our participation choices, HR policies, recruitment and retention strategies in response to the changing socio-economic, competitive and technological landscape.
The emerging risks that the Group has monitored during 2021 are outlined in more detail in pages 42 to 44 of the risk management section.
35

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK MANAGEMENT
All narrative and quantitative tables are unaudited unless otherwise stated. The audited information is required to comply with the requirements of relevant International Financial Reporting Standards.
Risk management is at the heart of Helping Britain Prosper and creating a more sustainable and inclusive future for people and businesses.
Our mission is to protect our customers, shareholders, colleagues and the Group, while enabling sustainable growth in targeted segments. This is achieved through informed risk decisions and robust risk management, supported by a consistent risk-focused culture.
The risk overview (pages 31 to 35) provides a summary of risk management within the Group and the key focus areas for 2021, including the significant impact that COVID-19 continues to have on all principal risks faced by the Group. The risk overview also highlights the importance of the connectivity of principal, emerging and strategic risks and how they are embedded into the Group's strategic risk management framework.
This full risk management section provides a more in-depth picture of how risk is managed within the Group, detailing the Group’s emerging risks, approach to stress testing, risk governance, committee structure, appetite for risk and a full analysis of the principal risk categories (pages 44 to 89), the framework by which risks are identified, managed, mitigated and monitored.
Each principal risk category is described and managed using the following standard headings: definition, exposures, measurement, mitigation and monitoring.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP’S APPROACH TO RISK
The Group operates a prudent approach to risk with rigorous management controls to support sustainable business growth and minimise losses. Through a strong and independent risk function (Risk division), a robust control framework is maintained to identify and escalate current and emerging risks, support sustainable growth within the Group's risk appetite, and to drive and inform good risk reward decision-making.
To meet ring-fencing requirements, core UK retail and commercial financial services and ancillary retail activities are ring-fenced from other activities of the Lloyds Banking Group. The Group has adopted the enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) of Lloyds Banking Group and supplemented with additional tailored practices to address the ring-fencing requirements.
The Group’s ERMF is structured to align with the industry-accepted internal control framework standards.
The ERMF applies to every area of the business and covers all types of risk. It is reviewed, updated and approved by the Board at least annually to reflect any changes in the nature of the Group's business and external regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The ERMF provides the Group with an effective mechanism for developing and embedding risk policies and risk management strategies which are aligned with the risks faced by its businesses. It also seeks to facilitate effective communication on these matters across the Group.
Role of the Lloyds Bank Group Board and senior management
Key responsibilities of the Board and senior management include:
Approval of the ERMF and Board risk appetite
Approval of Group-wide risk principles and policies
The cascade of delegated authority (for example to Board sub-committees and the Group Chief Executive)
Effective oversight of risk management consistent with risk appetite
Risk appetite
The Group's approach to setting, governing, embedding and monitoring risk appetite is detailed in the risk appetite framework, a key component of the ERMF.
Risk appetite is defined within the Group as the amount and type of risk that the Group is prepared to seek, accept or tolerate in delivering its strategy.
Group strategy and risk appetite are developed in tandem. Business planning aims to optimise value within the Group's risk appetite parameters and deliver on its promise to Help Britain Prosper.
The Group’s risk appetite statement details the risk parameters within which the Group operates. The statement forms part of the Group's control framework and is embedded into its policies, authorities and limits, to guide decision-making and risk management. Group risk appetite is regularly reviewed and refreshed to ensure appropriate coverage across our principal risks and any emerging risks, and to align with internal or external change.
The Board is responsible for approving the Group’s Board risk appetite statement annually. Group Board-level metrics are augmented by further sub-Board-level metrics and cascaded into more detailed business appetite metrics and limits.
The following areas are currently included in the Group Board risk appetite:
Market: the Group has effective controls in place to identify and manage the market risk inherentin our customer and client focused activities
Credit: the Group has a conservative and well balanced credit portfolio through the economic cycle, generating an appropriate return on equity, in line with the Group’s target return on equity in aggregate
Funding and liquidity: the Group maintains a prudent liquidity profile and a balance sheet structure that limits its reliance on potentially volatile sources of funding
Capital: the Group maintains capital levels commensurate with a prudent level of solvency to achieve financial resilience and market confidence
Change/execution: the Group has limited appetite for negative impacts on customers, colleagues, or the Group as a result of change activity
Conduct: the Group delivers fair outcomes for its customers
Data: the Group has zero appetite for data related regulatory fines or enforcement actions
People: the Group leads responsibly and proficiently, manages people resource effectively, supports and develops colleague skills and talent, creates and nurtures the right culture and meets legal and regulatory obligations related to its people
36

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Operational resilience: the Group has limited appetite for disruption to services to customers and stakeholders from significant unexpected events
Operational: the Group has robust controls in place to manage operational losses, reputational events and regulatory breaches. It identifies and assesses emerging risks and acts to mitigate these
Model: material models are performing in line with expectations
Regulatory and legal: the Group interprets and complies with all relevant regulation and all applicable laws (including codes of conduct which could have legal implications) and/or legal obligations
Climate: the Group takes action to identify, manage and mitigate its climate risk and support the Group and its customers in transitioning to a low carbon economy
Governance frameworks
The Group’s approach to risk is based on a robust control framework and a strong risk management culture which are the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management and guide the way all employees approach their work, behave and make decisions.
Governance is maintained through delegation of authority from the Board to individuals through the management hierarchy. Senior executives are supported where required by a committee-based structure which is designed to ensure open challenge and support effective decision-making.
The Group’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are regularly reviewed and updated where needed to ensure they remain fully in line with regulation, law, corporate governance and industry good practice.
The interaction of the executive and non-executive governance structures relies upon a culture of transparency and openness that is encouraged by both the Board and senior management.
Board-level engagement, coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in Group-wide risk issues at Group Executive Committee level, ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed and remediation plans are initiated where required.
Line managers are directly accountable for identifying and managing risks in their individual businesses, ensuring that business decisions strike an appropriate balance between risk and reward and are consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.
Clear responsibilities and accountabilities for risk are defined across the Group through a three lines of defence model which ensures effective independent oversight and assurance in respect of key decisions.
The Risk Committee governance framework is outlined on page 39.
Three lines of defence model
The ERMF is implemented through a ‘three lines of defence’ model which defines clear responsibilities and accountabilities and ensures effective independent oversight and assurance activities take place covering key decisions.
Business lines (first line) have primary responsibility for risk decisions, identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling risks within their areas of accountability. They are required to establish effective governance and control frameworks for their business to be compliant with Group policy requirements, to maintain appropriate risk management skills, mechanisms and toolkits, and to act within Group risk appetite parameters set and approved by the Board.
Risk division (second line) is a centralised function, headed by the Chief Risk Officer, providing oversight and constructive challenge to the effectiveness of risk decisions taken by business management, providing proactive advice and guidance, reviewing, challenging and reporting on the risk profile of the Group and ensuring that mitigating actions are appropriate.
It also has a key role in promoting the implementation of a strategic approach to risk management reflecting the risk appetite and ERMF agreed by the Board that encompasses:
Overseeing embedding of effective risk management processes
Transparent, focused risk monitoring and reporting
Provision of expert and high quality advice and guidance to the Board, executives and management on strategic issues and horizon scanning, including pending regulatory changes
A constructive dialogue with the first line through provision of advice, development of common methodologies, understanding, education, training, and development of new risk management tools
The primary role of Group Internal Audit (third line) is to help the Board and executive management protect the assets, reputation and sustainability of the Group. Group Internal Audit is led by the Group Chief Internal Auditor. Group Internal Audit provides independent assurance to the Audit Committee and the Board through performing reviews and engaging with committees and executive management, providing opinion, challenge and informal advice on risk and the state of the control environment. Group Internal Audit is a single independent internal audit function, reporting to the Audit Committee of the Group and the Audit Committees of the key subsidiaries.
Risk and control cycle from identification to reporting
To allow senior management to make informed risk decisions, the business follows a continuous risk management approach which includes producing appropriate, accurate and focused risk reporting. The risk and control cycle sets out how this should be approached. This cycle, from identification to reporting, ensures consistency and is intended to manage and mitigate the risks impacting the Group.
The process for risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the overall framework for risk governance. Risk identification processes are forward-looking to ensure emerging risks are identified. Risks are captured and measured using robust and consistent quantification methodologies. The measurement of risks includes the application of stress testing and scenario analysis, and considers whether relevant controls are in place before risks are incurred.
Identified risks are reported on a monthly basis or as frequently as necessary to the appropriate committee. The extent of the risk is compared to the overall risk appetite as well as specific limits or triggers. When thresholds are breached, committee minutes are clear on the actions and time frames required to resolve the breach and bring risk within tolerances. There is a clear process for escalation of risks and risk events.
37

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
All key controls are recorded and assessed on a regular basis, in response to triggers or minimum annually. Control assessments consider both the adequacy of the design and operating effectiveness. Where a control is not effective, the root cause is established and action plans implemented to improve control design or performance. Control effectiveness against all residual risks are aggregated by risk category and reported and monitored via the monthly Consolidated Risk Report (CRR). The CRR is reviewed and independently challenged by the Risk division and provided to the Risk division Executive Committee and Group Risk Committee. On an annual basis, a point in time assessment is made for control effectiveness against each risk category and across subgroups. The CRR data is the primary source used for this point-in-time assessment and a year-on-year comparison on control effectiveness is reported to the Board.
One Risk and Control Self-Assessment (One RCSA) is part of the Group's risk and control strategy to deliver a stronger risk culture and simplified risk and control environment. Following improvements made to the Group's approach to risk management, implementation was completed at the end of 2021 across Divisional and Sub-Group Risk Profiles. One RCSA will continue to embed across the Group as risk practices, data quality, culture and capability mature.
Risk culture
Based on the Group’s prudent business model, prudent approach to risk management, and guided by the Board, the senior management articulates the core risk values to which the Group aspires, and sets the tone at the top. Senior management establishes a strong focus on building and sustaining long-term relationships with customers, through the economic cycle. Lloyds Banking Group’s Code of Responsibility reinforces colleagues’ accountability for the risks they take and their responsibility to prioritise their customers’ needs.
Risk resources and capabilities
Appropriate mechanisms are in place to avoid over-reliance on key personnel or system/technical expertise within the Group. Adequate resources are in place to serve customers both under normal working conditions and in times of stress, and monitoring procedures are in place to ensure that the level of available resource can be increased if required. Colleagues undertake appropriate training to ensure they have the skills and knowledge necessary to enable them to deliver fair outcomes for customers.
There is ongoing investment in risk systems and models alongside the Group’s investment in customer and product systems and processes. This drives improvements in risk data quality, aggregation and reporting leading to effective and efficient risk decisions.
Risk decision-making and reporting
Risk analysis and reporting enables better understanding of risks and returns, supporting the identification of opportunities as well as better management of risks.
An aggregate view of the Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, and performance against risk appetite, including the CRR, is reported to and discussed monthly at the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring Fenced-Banks Risk Committees with regular reporting to the Board Risk Committee and the Board.
Rigorous stress testing exercises are carried out to assess the impact of a range of adverse scenarios with different probabilities and severities to inform strategic planning.
The Chief Risk Officer regularly informs the Board Risk Committee of the aggregate risk profile and has direct access to the Chair and members of Board Risk Committee.
Financial reporting risk management systems and internal controls
The Group maintains risk management systems and internal controls relating to the financial reporting process which are designed to:
Ensure that accounting policies are appropriately and consistently applied, transactions are recorded accurately, and undertaken in accordance with delegated authorities, that assets are safeguarded and liabilities are properly stated
Enable the calculation, preparation and reporting of financial, prudential regulatory and tax outcomes in accordance with applicable International Financial Reporting Standards, statutory and regulatory requirements
Enable certifications by the Senior Accounting Officer relating to maintenance of appropriate tax accounting and in accordance with the 2009 Finance Act
Ensure that disclosures are made on a timely basis in accordance with statutory and regulatory requirements (for example UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act)
Ensure ongoing monitoring to assess the impact of emerging regulation and legislation on financial, prudential regulatory and tax reporting
Ensure an accurate view of the Group’s performance to allow the Board and senior management to appropriately manage the affairs and strategy of the business as a whole
The Audit Committee reviews the quality and acceptability of Lloyds Bank Group's financial disclosures. In addition, the Lloyds Banking Group Disclosure Committee assists the Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer in fulfilling their disclosure responsibilities under relevant listing and other regulatory and legal requirements.

38

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
RISK GOVERNANCE
The risk governance structure below is integral to effective risk management across Lloyds Banking Group, including Lloyds Bank Group. To meet ring-fencing requirements the Boards and Board Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks (Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc) as well as relevant Committees of Lloyds Banking Group and the Ring-Fenced Banks will sit concurrently, referred to as the Aligned Board Model. The Risk division is appropriately represented on key committees to ensure that risk management is discussed in these meetings. This structure outlines the flow and escalation of risk information and reporting from business areas and the Risk division to the Group Executive Committee and Board. Conversely, strategic direction and guidance is cascaded down from the Board and Group Executive Committee.
The Company Secretariat supports senior and Board-level committees, and supports the Chairs in agenda planning. This gives a further line of escalation outside the three lines of defence.
Risk governance structure
lbk-20211231_g4.jpg
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Net Zero Committees
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations Committees
Risk Division Committees and Governance
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Capital Risk Committee
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance Committee
Ring-Fence Compliance Committee


39

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Board, Executive and Risk Committees
The Group’s risk governance structure strengthens risk evaluation and management, while also positioning the Group to manage the changing regulatory environment in an efficient and effective manner.
Assisted by the Board Risk and Audit Committees, the Board approves the Group’s overall governance, risk and control frameworks and risk appetite. Refer to the corporate governance section on pages 92 to 98, for further information on Board Committees.
The sub-group, divisional and functional risk committees review and recommend sub-group, divisional and functional risk appetite and monitor local risk profile and adherence to appetite.
Executive and Risk Committees
Lloyds Bank Group Chief Executive is supported by the following:
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Executive Committee (GEC)Assists the Group Chief Executive in exercising their authority in relation to material matters having strategic, cross-business area or Group-wide implications.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC)Responsible for the development, implementation and effectiveness of Lloyds Banking Group’s enterprise risk management framework, the clear articulation of the Group’s risk appetite and monitoring and reviewing of the Group’s aggregate risk exposures, control environment and concentrations of risk.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO)Responsible for the strategic direction of the Group’s assets and liabilities and the profit and loss implications of balance sheet management actions. The committee reviews and determines the appropriate allocation of capital, funding and liquidity, and market risk resources and makes appropriate trade-offs between risk and reward.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Cost Management CommitteesLeads and shapes the Group’s approach to cost management, ensuring appropriate governance and process over Group-wide cost management activities and effective control of the Group’s cost base.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Review CommitteesProvides senior management oversight, challenge and accountability in connection with the Group’s engagement with conduct review matters as agreed with the Group Chief Executive.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks People CommitteesSupporting Lloyds Banking Group's People and Property Director in exercising their responsibilities in relation to the Group’s people and colleague policies, overseeing the development of and monitoring adherence to the remuneration policy, oversees compliance with Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and other regulatory requirements, monitors colleague engagement surveys, progress of the Group towards its culture targets and oversees the implementation of action plans.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Net Zero CommitteesRecommends and implements the strategy and plans for delivering the Group’s aspiration to be viewed as a trusted responsible business as part of the purpose of Helping Britain Prosper, reporting to the GEC, GRC, Responsible Business Committee where appropriate on material sustainability related risk and opportunities across the Group; and recommending to the GEC and Responsible Business Committee the Group's Responsible Business Report and Helping Britain Prosper Plan.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Conduct Investigations CommitteeResponsible for providing recommendations regarding performance adjustment, including the individual risk-adjustment process and risk-adjusted performance assessment, and making final decisions on behalf of the Group on the appropriate course of action relating to conduct breaches, under the formal scope of the SM&CR.
The Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committee is supported through escalation and ongoing reporting by business area risk committees, cross-divisional committees addressing specific matters of Group-wide significance and the following second line of defence Risk committees which ensure effective oversight of risk management:
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Market Risk CommitteeResponsible for monitoring, oversight and challenge of market risk exposures across the Group. Reviews and proposes changes to the market risk management framework, and reviews the adequacy of data quality needed for managing market risks. It is also responsible for escalating issues of Group level significance to GEC level (usually via GALCO) relating to the management of the Group's market risks.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Economic Crime Prevention CommitteeBrings together accountable stakeholders and subject matter experts to ensure that the development and application of economic crime risk management complies with the Group's strategic aims, Group corporate responsibility, Group risk appetite and Group economic crime prevention (fraud, anti-money laundering, anti-bribery and sanctions) policy. It provides direction and appropriate focus on priorities to enhance the Group's economic crime risk management capabilities in line with business and customer objectives while aligning to the Group's target operating model.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Financial Risk CommitteeResponsible for overseeing, reviewing, challenging and recommending to GEC/Board Risk Committee/Board for Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Bank (i) annual internal stress Tests, (ii) all Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and any other regulatory stress tests, (iii) annual liquidity stress tests, (iv) reverse stress tests, (v) Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment (ILAA), (vi) Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), (vii) Pillar 3, (viii) recovery/resolution plans, and (ix) relevant ad hoc stress tests or other analysis as and when required by the Committee.
40

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CommitteesRisk focus
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Capital Risk CommitteeResponsible for providing oversight of all relevant capital matters within the Lloyds Banking Group, Ring-Fenced Bank and material subsidiaries, including latest capital position and plans, capital risk appetite proposals, Pillar 2 developments (including stress testing), recovery and resolution matters and the impact of regulatory reforms and developments specific to capital.
Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Model Governance CommitteeResponsible for supporting the Model Risk and Validation Director in fulfilling their responsibilities, from a Group-wide perspective, under the Lloyds Banking Group model governance policy through provision of debate, challenge and support of decisions. The committee will be held as required to facilitate approval of models, model changes and model related items as required by model policy, including items related to the governance framework as a whole and its application.
Ring-Fence Compliance CommitteeThis committee is designed to provide executive sponsorship and strategic direction to ongoing perimeter compliance, the closure and remediation of breaches, monitoring and reporting of new breaches and associated governance and delivery enhancements to the Ring-Fencing Compliance Risk Framework.
STRESS TESTING
Overview
Stress testing is recognised as a key risk management tool by the Boards, senior management, the businesses and the Risk and Finance functions of all parts of the Group and its legal entities. It is fully embedded in the planning process of the Group and its key legal entities as a key activity in medium-term planning, and senior management is actively involved in stress testing activities via the governance process.
Scenario stress testing is used for:
Risk identification:
Understand key vulnerabilities of the Group and its key legal entities under adverse economic conditions
Risk appetite:
Assess the results of the stress test against the risk appetite of all parts of the Group to ensure the Group and its legal entities are managed within their risk parameters
Inform the setting of risk appetite by assessing the underlying risks under stress conditions
Strategic and capital planning:
Allow senior management and the Boards of the Group and its applicable legal entities to adjust strategies if the plan does not meet risk appetite in a stressed scenario
Support the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) by demonstrating capital adequacy, and meet the requirements of regulatory stress tests that are used to inform the setting of the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and management buffers (see capital risk on pages 69 to 76) of the Group and its separately regulated legal entities
Risk mitigation:
Drive the development of potential actions and contingency plans to mitigate the impact of adverse scenarios. Stress testing also links directly to the recovery planning process of the Group and its legal entities
Internal stress tests
On at least an annual basis, the Group conducts macroeconomic stress tests of the operating plan, which are supplemented with higher-level refreshes if necessary. The exercise aims to highlight the key vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its legal entities’ business plans to adverse changes in the economic environment, and to ensure that there are adequate financial resources in the event of a downturn.
Reverse stress testing
Reverse stress testing is used to explore the vulnerabilities of the Group’s and its key legal entities’ strategies and plans to extreme adverse events that would cause the businesses to fail. Where this identifies plausible scenarios with an unacceptably high risk, the Group or its entities will adopt measures to prevent or mitigate that and reflect these in strategic plans.
Other stress testing activity
The Group’s stress testing programme also involves undertaking assessments of liquidity scenarios, market risk sensitivities and scenarios, and business-specific scenarios (see the principal risk categories on pages 32 to 34 for further information on risk-specific stress testing). If required, ad hoc stress testing exercises are also undertaken to assess emerging risks, as well as in response to regulatory requests. This wide-ranging programme provides a comprehensive view of the potential impacts arising from the risks to which the Group is exposed and reflects the nature, scale and complexity of the Group. Lloyds Banking Group participated in Part 1 of the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Stress test in 2021 and will leverage the experience gained through that exercise to further embed climate risk into risk management and stress testing activities.
Methodology
The stress tests at all levels must comply with all regulatory requirements, achieved through the comprehensive construction of macroeconomic scenarios and a rigorous divisional, functional, risk and executive review and challenge process, supported by analysis and insight into impacts on customers and business drivers.
The engagement of all required business, Risk and Finance teams is built into the preparation process, so that the appropriate analysis of each risk category’s impact upon the business plans is understood and documented. The methodologies and modelling approach used for stress testing ensure that a clear link is shown between the macroeconomic scenarios, the business drivers for each area and the resultant stress testing outputs. All material assumptions used in modelling are documented and justified, with a clearly communicated review and sign-off process. Modelling is supported by expert judgement and is subject to Lloyds Banking Group model governance policy.
41

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Governance
Clear accountabilities and responsibilities for stress testing are assigned to senior management and the Risk and Finance functions throughout the Group and its key legal entities. This is formalised through the Lloyds Banking Group business planning and stress testing policy and procedure, which are reviewed at least annually.
The Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and attended by the Chief Financial Officer and other senior Risk and Finance colleagues, is the committee that has primary responsibility for overseeing the development and execution of the Group’s stress tests.
The review and challenge of the Group’s detailed stress forecasts, the key assumptions behind these, and the methodology used to translate the economic assumptions into stressed outputs conclude with the appropriate Finance and Risk sign-off. The outputs are then presented to GFRC and the Board Risk Committee for review and challenge, before being approved by the Board.
EMERGING RISKS
lbk-20211231_g5.jpg
Background and framework
Understanding emerging risks is an essential component of the Group’s risk management approach, enabling the Group to identify the most pertinent risks and opportunities, and to respond through strategic planning and appropriate risk mitigation.
Although emerging risk is not a principal risk, if left undetected emerging risks have the potential to adversely impact the Group or result in missed opportunities.
Impacts from emerging risks on the Group’s principal risks can materialise via two different routes:
Emerging risks can impact the Group’s principal risks directly in the absence of an appropriate strategic response.
Alternatively, emerging risks can be a source of new strategic risks, dependent on our chosen response and the underlying assumptions on how given emerging risks may manifest.
Where an emerging risk is considered material enough in its own right, the Group may choose to recognise the risk as a principal risk. Recent examples of this include climate risk and strategic risk. Such elevations are considered and approved through the Board as part of the annual refresh of Lloyds Banking Group's enterprise risk management framework.
Risk identification
The basis for risk identification is founded on collaboration between functions across the Group. The activity incorporates internal horizon scanning and engagement with external experts to gain an external context, ensuring broad coverage.
This activity is inherently linked with and builds upon the annual strategic planning cycle and is used to identify key external trends, risks and opportunities for the Group.
The Group is evolving its methodology in respect of the identification and prioritisation of emerging risks. 2021 saw the development of a quantitative risk assessment methodology for understanding the connectivity of strategic risk. The Group has drawn on this methodology and findings to expand its insights.

42

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Notable emerging risks and their implications
The Group considers the following emerging risk themes as having the potential to increase in significance and affect the performance of the Group.
Emerging risk themeKey considerations
Breakdown of the EUWide-ranging risks associated with dissolution of the European Union, with member states choosing to function independently.
Climate change transition riskRisks arising from the Group's participation choices, policies and investments to support transition to a zero carbon economy and its ability to meet published climate targets.
Data-driven propositionsHarnessing real-time data, emerging technologies and communication channels, to meet consumer appetite for bespoke products and services.
Digital currenciesRisks and opportunities posed by introduction of new, or wider adoption of existing, digital currencies, associated supporting infrastructure and subsequent management.
Evolving regulationChanging regulatory standards and possibility of retrospective application, driving reputational damage, fines, litigation and remediation activity.
Future pandemics and the world’s ability to respondEconomic, political, social and technological impacts caused by mutations of existing viruses, new viruses, or resistance to treatments for existing illnesses.
Inequality and changing demographicWidening wealth and opportunity gap, increasing diversity and changing age mix within society, resulting in changing demands on banking.
Long term impact of the UK’s exit from the EULong-term macro-economic, regulatory and social impacts on the UK as a result of the UK’s exit from the EU.
Modern skills and recruitment diversityDiversification of recruitment approach in respect of candidate backgrounds, skills and avenues of attainment, to adapt to a modern technology-driven landscape.
Pace of technological changeAbility to keep pace with accelerating technological change, evolving technology landscape, changing customer expectations and new product and service propositions.
Populism, de-globalisation and supply chainsDisenfranchisement driving geopolitical tensions between states, diminishing integration and adverse effects on supply chains.
Science, technology, engineering and mathematics (STEM) qualification supply vs demandRisks posed by the balance of STEM degree qualification in the UK lagging behind the accelerating demands for STEM qualified candidates in the workforce.
Scottish independenceWide-ranging consequences arising from the movement for Scotland to become a sovereign state, independent from the United Kingdom.
Ways of workingAbility to provide a colleague proposition enabling flexible location and agile working, aligning to individual requirements, together with associated risks of such arrangements (e.g. Operational, People and Data risk).
Risk mitigation
Emerging risks are managed through the Group’s strategic risk framework, detailed on page 88. Pertinent emerging risks are considered as part of the Group’s strategic and business planning processes and primarily addressed through the Group’s strategy.
Key actions to tackle the emerging challenges and capitalise on opportunities as part of the Group’s strategy include the following:
Purpose: At the heart of the Group’s purpose are the themes of inclusion, sustainability and being people-first. As such, the Group’s strategy aims to fully embed a purpose that supports a more inclusive and sustainable future for the Group’s customers and colleagues.
Outcomes will see products, services and activities, aligning to societal and regulatory expectations, which drive impacts across housing, financial wellbeing, businesses and jobs, communities, regions, and sustainability.
Customer proposition: As part of its strategy, the Group aims to enhance its proposition, better aligning to its purpose, while supporting transition to a low carbon economy and adapting to the changing demographic of both its customer base and that of the UK.
Key components include:
Creating better engagement, improving customer journeys and enhancing experiences and tools to drive greater financial resilience and well-being for customers
Supporting customers and businesses in respect of making their homes, vehicles, properties and activities more sustainable
Capitalising on the Group’s existing asset and product capabilities for corporate and institutional clients to play a leading role in the transition to Net Zero, addressing regional inequalities and supporting UK prosperity by helping corporates trade internationally
Talent: The Group is firmly committed to being diverse, employing new ways of working, where colleagues are supported in having a growth mindset and empowered to make decisions at pace.
The strategy places focus on a colleague proposition that can attract and retain the best people, while leveraging talent pools across the UK and exploring in-house skills growth strategies, alongside partnerships with universities and businesses, to supplement scarce skill sets.
For the long term, the Group intends to use its strategic workforce planning capability for understanding and meeting the evolving demand of skills from its businesses and functions. This will also act as the bedrock for key strategic decisions and interventions in respect of important elements of the Group’s talent strategy in the future.
Technology: Simplification of the Group’s estate and leveraging contemporary technologies are core components of the Group’s strategy.
The Group aims to manage the challenges of a rapidly evolving landscape by employing technology that is aligned to industry best practice refresh rates, while promoting autonomy and empowerment within teams by streamlining governance.
This will be supplemented with an aligned business and technology vision and a rationalised hybrid cloud technology estate and modern engineering standards.
43

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Data: Being data-driven is central to the Group’s transformation activity. More than one third of the benefits from the Group’s business strategies are reliant on the ability to successfully leverage data. As such managing data risk and employing strong data ethics are key considerations for the strategy.
The Group has developed a data management strategy to provide the common framework and direction by uplifting data quality, simplifying data architecture, enhancing data governance and implementing market leading tools to improve its ability to deliver a data-first culture. The Group has also invested in data ethics framework and strong governance for its advanced analytics and cloud programmes.
In addition to the strategic actions detailed above, the Group works closely with regulatory authorities and industry bodies to ensure that the Group can monitor external developments (e.g. potential regulatory divergence from EU) and identify and respond to the evolving landscape, particularly in relation to regulatory and legal risk.

FULL ANALYSIS OF RISK CATEGORIES
The Group’s risk framework covers all types of risk which affect the Group and could impact on the achievement of its strategic objectives. A detailed description of each category is provided on pages 45 to 89.
Risk categories recognised by the Group are periodically reviewed to ensure that they reflect the Group risk profile in light of internal and external factors, such as the Group strategy and the regulatory environment in which it operates. Changes include the recategorisation of governance risk, from a principal risk type to a secondary risk under operational risk, plus enhancement to the naming of some secondary risk categories.
Principal risk categoriesSecondary risk categories
Market risk– Trading book– Pensions
Page 45
– Banking book
Credit risk– Retail credit– Commercial credit
Page 49
Funding and liquidity risk– Funding and liquidity
Page 65
Capital risk– Capital
Page 69
Change/execution risk– Change/execution
Page 77
Conduct risk– Conduct
Page 78
Data risk– Data
Page 80
People risk– People– Health and safety
Page 81
Operational resilience risk– Operational resilience
Page 82
Operational risk– Business process– Financial reporting– Security
Page 84
– Economic crime financial– Governance– Sourcing and supply chain management
– Economic crime fraud– Internal service provision
– External service provision– IT systems
Model risk– Model
Page 86
Regulatory and legal risk– Regulatory compliance– Legal
Page 87
Strategic risk– Strategic
Page 88
Climate risk– Climate
Page 89
The Group considers both reputational and financial impact in the course of managing all its risks and therefore does not classify reputational impact as a separate risk category.
44

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
MARKET RISK
DEFINITION
Market risk is defined as the risk that the Group's capital or earnings profile is affected by adverse market rates or prices, in particular interest rates and credit spreads in both the Banking business and the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes.
MEASUREMENT
Group risk appetite is calibrated primarily to a number of multi-risk Group economic scenarios, and is supplemented with sensitivity-based measures. The scenarios assess the impact of unlikely, but plausible, adverse stresses on income with the worst case for banking activities, defined benefit pensions, insurance and trading portfolios reported against independently, and across the Group as a whole.
The Group risk appetite is cascaded first to the Group Asset and Liability Committee (GALCO), chaired by the Chief Financial Officer, where risk appetite is approved and monitored by risk type, and then to the Group Market Risk Committee (GMRC) where risk appetite is sub-allocated by division. These metrics are reviewed regularly by senior management to inform effective decision-making.
MITIGATION
GALCO is responsible for approving and monitoring Group market risks, management techniques, market risk measures, behavioural assumptions, and the market risk policy. Various mitigation activities are assessed and undertaken across the Group to manage portfolios and seek to ensure they remain within approved limits. The mitigation actions will vary dependent on exposure but will, in general, look to reduce risk in a cost effective manner by offsetting balance sheet exposures and externalising to the financial markets dependent on market liquidity. The market risk policy is owned by Group Corporate Treasury (GCT) and refreshed annually. The policy is underpinned by supplementary market risk procedures, which define specific market risk management and oversight requirements.
MONITORING
GALCO and GMRC regularly review high level market risk exposure as part of the wider risk management framework. They also make recommendations to the Board concerning overall market risk appetite and market risk policy. Exposures at lower levels of delegation are monitored at various intervals according to their volatility, from daily in the case of trading portfolios to monthly or quarterly in the case of less volatile portfolios. Levels of exposures compared to approved limits and triggers are monitored by Risk and appropriate escalation procedures are in place.
How market risks arise and are managed across the Group’s activities is considered in more detail below.
BANKING ACTIVITIES
Exposures
The Group’s banking activities expose it to the risk of adverse movements in market rates or prices, predominantly interest rates, credit spreads, exchange rates and equity prices. The volatility of market rates or prices can be affected by both the transparency of prices and the amount of liquidity in the market for the relevant asset, liability or instrument.
Interest rate risk
Yield curve risk in the Group’s divisional portfolios, and in the Group’s capital and funding activities, arises from the different repricing characteristics of the Group’s non-trading assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet positions.
Basis risk arises from the potential changes in spreads between indices, for example where the Bank lends with reference to a central bank rate but funds with reference to a market rate, e.g. SONIA, and the spread between these two rates widens or tightens.
Optionality risk arises predominantly from embedded optionality within assets, liabilities or off-balance sheet items where either the Group or the customer can affect the size or timing of cash flows. One example of this is mortgage prepayment risk where the customer owns an option allowing them to prepay when it is economical to do so. This can result in customer balances amortising more quickly or slowly than anticipated due to customers’ response to changes in economic conditions.
Foreign exchange risk
Economic foreign exchange exposure arises from the Group’s investment in its overseas operations (net investment exposures are disclosed in note 44 on page F-105). In addition, the Group incurs foreign exchange risk through non-functional currency flows from services provided by customer-facing divisions, the Group’s debt and capital management programmes and is exposed to volatility in its CET1 ratio, due to the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the retranslation of non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets.
Equity risk
Equity risk arises primarily from exposure to the Lloyds Banking Group share price through deferred shares and deferred options granted to employees as part of their benefits package.
Credit spread risk
Credit spread risk arises largely from: (i) the liquid asset portfolio held in the management of Group liquidity, comprising of government, supranational and other eligible assets; (ii) the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA) sensitivity to credit spreads; (iii) a number of the Group’s structured medium-term notes where the Group has elected to fair value the notes through the profit and loss account; and (iv) banking book assets in Commercial Banking held at fair value under IFRS 9.
Measurement
Interest rate risk exposure is monitored monthly using, primarily:
Market value sensitivity: this methodology considers all repricing mismatches (behaviourally adjusted where appropriate) in the current balance sheet and calculates the change in market value that would result from an instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis points parallel rise or fall in the yield curve. Sterling interest rates are modelled with a floor below zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). The market value sensitivities are calculated on a static balance sheet using principal cash flows excluding interest, commercial margins and other spread components and are therefore discounted at the risk-free rate.
Interest income sensitivity: this measures the impact on future net interest income arising from various economic scenarios. These include instantaneous 25, 100 and 200 basis point parallel shifts in all yield curves and the Group economic scenarios. Sterling interest rates are modelled with a floor below zero per cent, with negative rate floors also modelled for non-Sterling currencies where appropriate (product-specific floors apply). These scenarios are reviewed every year and are designed to replicate severe but plausible economic events, capturing risks that would not be evident through the use of parallel shocks alone such as basis risk and steepening or flattening of the yield curve.
45

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Additional negative rate scenarios are also used, where floors are removed, to ensure that this risk is monitored; however, these are not measured against the limit framework for the purposes of risk appetite.
Unlike the market value sensitivities, the interest income sensitivities incorporate additional behavioural assumptions as to how and when individual products would reprice in response to changing rates.
Reported sensitivities are not necessarily predictive of future performance as they do not capture additional management actions that would likely be taken in response to an immediate, large, movement in interest rates. These actions could reduce the net interest income sensitivity, help mitigate any adverse impacts or they may result in changes to total income that are not captured in the net interest income.
Structural hedge: the structural hedging programme managing interest rate risk in the banking book relies on assumptions made around customer behaviour. A number of metrics are in place to monitor the risks within the portfolio.
The Group has an integrated Asset and Liability Management (ALM) system which supports non-traded asset and liability management of the Group. This provides a single consolidated tool to measure and manage interest rate repricing profiles (including behavioural assumptions), perform stress testing and produce forecast outputs. The Group is aware that any assumptions-based model is open to challenge. A full behavioural review is performed annually, or in response to changing market conditions, to ensure the assumptions remain appropriate and the model itself is subject to annual re-validation, as required under Lloyds Banking Group's model governance policy. The key behavioural assumptions are:
Embedded optionality within products
The duration of balances that are contractually repayable on demand, such as current accounts and overdrafts, together with net free reserves of the Group
The re-pricing behaviour of managed rate liabilities, such as variable rate savings
The table below shows, split by material currency, the Group’s market value sensitivities to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 and 100 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity (audited)
20212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
100bps
£m
Down
100bps
£m
Sterling26.1 (27.6)98.4 (129.8)66.3 7.3 265.3 10.4 
US Dollar(0.3)0.9 (1.1)4.0 (2.2)3.7 (8.6)7.9 
Euro(5.1)(2.9)(19.3)(11.5)(6.3)(5.0)(24.1)(9.0)
Other(0.2)0.3 (1.0)0.8 — — (0.2)— 
Total20.5 (29.3)77.0 (136.5)57.8 6.0 232.4 9.3 
This is a risk-based disclosure and the amounts shown would be amortised in the income statement over the duration of the portfolio.
The market value sensitivity to a down 100 basis points shock has increased due to rates being higher than at year end 2020 leading to a larger downshock being applied before hitting the modelled interest rate floor. The sensitivity to an up 100 basis points shock has decreased as a result of hedging activity and changes to mortgage prepayment assumptions.
The table below shows supplementary value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening (c.100 basis points around the three-year point) in the yield curve. This ensures there are no unintended consequences to managing risk to parallel shifts in rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: market value sensitivity to a steepening and flattening of the yield curve (audited)
20212020
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Steepener
£m
Flattener
£m
Sterling85.8 (114.4)(53.2)14.3 
US Dollar(7.0)8.2 (6.4)7.5 
Euro(13.8)(6.9)(16.4)(3.9)
Other0.2 (0.2)(0.1)0.5 
Total65.2 (113.3)(76.1)18.4 
The table below shows the banking book one year net interest income sensitivity to an instantaneous parallel up and down 25 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: net interest income sensitivity (audited)
20212020
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Up
25bps
£m
Down
25bps
£m
Client facing activity and associated hedges174.9 (406.7)254.6 (142.5)

46

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The table below shows supplementary income sensitivity on a one to three-year forward-looking basis to an instantaneous parallel up 25, down 25 and up 50 basis points change to all interest rates.
Lloyds Bank Group Banking activities: three year net interest income sensitivity (audited)
2021
Up 25bpsDown 25bpsUp 50bps
Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Client-facing activity and associated hedges174.9 269.8 397.3 (406.7)(512.0)(639.0)348.7 526.9 782.1 
Year 1 net interest income sensitivity, to up 25 basis points, has decreased year-on-year mostly due to the additional structural hedging that has been transacted in 2021 in addition to the use of simpler illustrative pass through assumptions. The increase in risk sensitivity year-on-year, to down 25 basis points, is driven by greater modelled margin compression risk following the rise in interest rates in December 2021. This results in the full 25 basis points downshock being applied at December 2021 whereas a 10 basis points shock was applied at December 2020 due to the Group’s assumption, at the time, for modelling Sterling interest rates with a floor of zero per cent (product-specific floors apply).
The three year net interest income sensitivity to a down 25 basis points shock is driven predominantly by margin compression on Retail and Commercial Bank savings products as well as structural hedge maturities to be reinvested in years two and three. The sensitivity to an up 25 basis points and 50 basis points shock is largely due to reinvestment of structural hedge maturities.
The sensitivities are illustrative and do not reflect new business margin implications and/or pricing actions, other than as outlined.
The following assumptions have been applied:
Instantaneous parallel shift in interest rate curve, including bank base rate
Balance sheet remains constant
Illustrative 50 per cent deposit pass-through
Basis risk, foreign exchange, equity and credit spread risks are measured primarily through scenario analysis by assessing the impact on profit before tax over a 12-month horizon arising from a change in market rates, and reported within the Board risk appetite on a monthly basis. Supplementary measures such as sensitivity and exposure limits are applied where they provide greater insight into risk positions. Frequency of reporting supplementary measures varies from daily to quarterly appropriate to each risk type.
Mitigation
The Group’s policy is to optimise reward while managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. Lloyds Banking Group's market risk policy and procedures outlines the hedging process, and the centralisation of risk from divisions into Group Corporate Treasury (GCT), e.g. via the transfer pricing framework. GCT is responsible for managing the centralised risk and does this through natural offsets of matching assets and liabilities, and appropriate hedging activity of the residual exposures, subject to the authorisation and mandate of GALCO within the Board risk appetite. The hedges are externalised to the market by derivative desks within GCT and the Commercial Bank. The Group mitigates income statement volatility through hedge accounting. This reduces the accounting volatility arising from the Group’s economic hedging activities and any hedge accounting ineffectiveness is continuously monitored.
The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. Consistent with the Group’s strategy to deliver stable returns, GALCO seeks to minimise large reinvestment risk, and to smooth earnings over a range of investment tenors. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by GALCO.
While the Bank faces margin compression in low rate environments, its exposure to pipeline and prepayment risk are not considered material and are hedged in line with expected customer behaviour. These are appropriately monitored and controlled through divisional Asset and Liability Committees (ALCOs).
Net investment foreign exchange exposures are managed centrally by GCT, by hedging non-Sterling asset values with currency borrowing. Economic foreign exchange exposures arising from non-functional currency flows are identified by divisions and transferred and managed centrally. The Group also has a policy of forward hedging its forecasted currency profit and loss to year end. The Group makes use of both accounting and economic foreign exchange exposures, as an offset against the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates on the value of non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets. This involves the holding of a structurally open currency position; sensitivity is minimised where, for a given currency, the ratio of the structural open position to risk-weighted assets equals the CET1 ratio. Continually evaluating this structural open currency position against evolving non-Sterling-denominated risk-weighted assets mitigates volatility in the Group’s CET1 ratio.
Monitoring
The appropriate limits and triggers are monitored by senior executive committees within the Banking divisions. Banking assets, liabilities and associated hedging are actively monitored and if necessary rebalanced to be within agreed tolerances.
DEFINED BENEFIT PENSION SCHEMES
Exposures
The Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to significant risks from their assets and liabilities. The liability discount rate exposes the Group to interest rate risk and credit spread risk, which are partially offset by fixed interest assets (such as gilts and corporate bonds) and swaps. Equity and alternative asset risk arises from direct asset holdings. Scheme membership exposes the Group to longevity risk. Increases to pensions in deferment and in payment expose the Group to inflation risk.
For further information on defined benefit pension scheme assets and liabilities please refer to note 27 on page F-66.
Measurement
The Group's management of the schemes’ assets is the responsibility of the Trustees of the schemes who are responsible for setting the investment strategy and for agreeing funding requirements with the Group. The Group will be liable for meeting any funding deficit that may arise. As part of the triennial valuation process, the Group will agree with the Trustees a funding strategy to eliminate the deficit over an appropriate period.
Longevity risk is measured using both 1-in-20 year stresses (risk appetite) and 1-in-200 year stresses (regulatory capital).
47

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Mitigation
The Group takes an active involvement in agreeing mitigation strategies with the schemes’ Trustees. An interest rate and inflation hedging programme is in place to reduce liability risk. The schemes have also reduced equity allocation and invested the proceeds in credit assets. The Trustees have put in place longevity swaps to mitigate longevity risk. The merits of longevity risk transfer and hedging solutions are reviewed regularly.
Monitoring
In addition to the wider risk management framework, governance of the schemes includes two specialist pensions committees.
The surplus, or deficit, in the schemes is tracked monthly along with various single factor and scenario stresses which consider the assets and liabilities holistically. Key metrics are monitored monthly including the Group’s capital resources of the scheme, the performance against risk appetite triggers, and the performance of the hedged asset and liability matching positions.
TRADING PORTFOLIOS
Exposures
The Group’s trading activity is small relative to its peers. The Group’s trading activity is undertaken solely to meet the financial requirements of commercial and retail customers for foreign exchange and interest rate products. These activities support customer flow and market making activities.
All trading activities are performed within the Commercial Banking division. While the trading positions taken are generally small, any extreme moves in the main risk factors and other related risk factors could cause significant losses in the trading book depending on the positions at the time. The average 95 per cent 1-day trading VaR (Value at Risk; diversified across risk factors) was £0.1 million for 31 December 2021.
Trading market risk measures are applied to all of the Group’s regulatory trading books and they include daily VaR, sensitivity-based measures, and stress testing calculations.
Measurement
The Group internally uses VaR as the primary risk measure for all trading book positions.
The risk of loss measured by the VaR model is the minimum expected loss in earnings given the 95 per cent confidence. The total and average trading VaR numbers reported below have been obtained after the application of the diversification benefits across the five risk types. The maximum and minimum VaR reported for each risk category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the maximum and minimum VaR reported at Group level.
The Group’s closing VaR, allowing for diversification, at 31 December 2021 across interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk, equity risk, credit spread risk and inflation risk was less than £0.05 million. During the year ended 31 December 2021, the Group’s minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million and its average and maximum VaR was £0.1 million.
For the year ended 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, the maximum total VaR for all of the above risks was £0.2 million, the average total VaR was £0.1 million and minimum VaR was less than £0.05 million. The closing VaR at 31 December 2021, excluding the effects of diversification, was less than £0.06 million.
For the year ended 31 December 2021, the maximum and average interest rate risk VaR was £0.1 million and the minimum interest rate VaR was less than £0.05 million. The minimum, maximum and average VaR for all other risk types was less than £0.05 million. As at 31 December 2021, the closing VaR for all risk types was less than £0.05 million.
The market risk for the trading book continues to be low relative to the size of the Group and in comparison to peers. This reflects the fact that the Group’s trading operations are customer-centric and focused on hedging and recycling client risks.
Although it is an important market standard measure of risk, VaR has limitations. One of them is the use of a limited historical data sample which influences the output by the implicit assumption that future market behaviour will not differ greatly from the historically observed period. Another known limitation is the use of defined holding periods which assumes that the risk can be liquidated or hedged within that holding period. Also calculating the VaR at the chosen confidence interval does not give enough information about potential losses which may occur if this level is exceeded. The Group fully recognises these limitations and supplements the use of VaR with a variety of other measurements which reflect the nature of the business activity. These include detailed sensitivity analysis, position reporting and a stress testing programme.
Trading book VaR (1-day 99 per cent) is compared daily against both hypothetical and actual profit and loss at underlying legal entity level (HBOS and Lloyds Bank).
Mitigation
The level of exposure is controlled by establishing and communicating the approved risk limits and controls through policies and procedures that define the responsibility and authority for risk taking. Market risk limits are clearly and consistently communicated to the business. Any new or emerging risks are brought within risk reporting and defined limits.
Monitoring
Trading risk appetite is monitored daily with 1-day 95 per cent VaR and stress testing limits. These limits are complemented with position level action triggers and profit and loss referrals. Risk and position limits are set and managed at both desk and overall trading book levels. They are reviewed at least annually and can be changed as required within the overall Group risk appetite framework.
48

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CREDIT RISK
DEFINITION
Credit risk is defined as the risk that parties with whom the Group has contracted fail to meet their financial obligations (both on and off- balance sheet).
EXPOSURES
The principal sources of credit risk within the Group arise from loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives to customers, financial institutions and sovereigns. The credit risk exposures of the Group are set out in note 44 on page F-105.
In terms of loans and advances (for example mortgages, term loans and overdrafts) and contingent liabilities (for example credit instruments such as guarantees and documentary letters of credit), credit risk arises both from amounts advanced and commitments to extend credit to a customer or bank. With respect to commitments to extend credit, the Group is also potentially exposed to an additional loss up to an amount equal to the total unutilised commitments. However, the likely amount of loss may be less than the total unutilised commitments, as most retail and certain commercial lending commitments may be cancelled based on regular assessment of the prevailing creditworthiness of customers. Most commercial term commitments are also contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards.
Credit risk also arises from debt securities and derivatives. Credit risk exposure for derivatives is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group. Such amounts are reflected in note 44 on page F-105.
Additionally, credit risk arises from leasing arrangements where the Group is the lessor. Note 2(J) on page F-20 provides details on the Group’s approach to the treatment of leases.
The investments held in the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes also expose the Group to credit risk. Note 27 on page F-66 provides further information on the defined benefit pension schemes’ assets and liabilities.
Loans and advances, contingent liabilities, commitments, debt securities and derivatives also expose the Group to refinance risk. Refinance risk is the possibility that an outstanding exposure cannot be repaid at its contractual maturity date. If the Group does not wish to refinance the exposure then there is refinance risk if the obligor is unable to repay by securing alternative finance. This may occur for a number of reasons which may include: the borrower is in financial difficulty, because the terms required to refinance are outside acceptable appetite at the time or the customer is unable to refinance externally due to a lack of market liquidity. Refinance risk exposures are managed in accordance with the Group’s existing credit risk policies, processes and controls, and are not considered to be material given the Group’s prudent and through-the-cycle credit risk appetite. Where heightened refinance risk exists exposures are minimised through intensive account management and, where appropriate, are classed as impaired and/or forborne.
MEASUREMENT
The process for credit risk identification, measurement and control is integrated into the Board-approved framework for credit risk appetite and governance.
Credit risk is measured from different perspectives using a range of appropriate modelling and scoring techniques at a number of levels of granularity, including total balance sheet, individual portfolio, pertinent concentrations and individual customer - for both new business and existing exposure. Key metrics, which may include total exposure, expected credit loss (ECL), risk-weighted assets, new business quality, concentration risk and portfolio performance, are reported monthly to Risk Committees and Forums.
Measures such as ECL, risk-weighted assets, observed credit performance, predicted credit quality (usually from predictive credit scoring models), collateral cover and quality, and other credit drivers (such as cash flow, affordability, leverage and indebtedness) have been incorporated into the Group's credit risk management practices to enable effective risk measurement across the Group.
The Group has also continued to strengthen its capabilities and abilities for identifying, assessing and managing climate-related risks and opportunities, recognising that Climate change is likely to result in changes in the risk profile and outlook for the Group's customers, the sectors the Group operates in and collateral/asset valuations. For further information, please refer to LBG’s 2021 Climate Report.
In addition, stress testing and scenario analysis are used to estimate impairment losses and capital demand forecasts for both regulatory and internal purposes and to assist in the formulation of credit risk appetite.
As part of the ‘three lines of defence’ model, the Risk division is the second line of defence providing oversight and independent challenge to key risk decisions taken by business management. The Risk division also tests the effectiveness of credit risk management and internal credit risk controls. This includes ensuring that the control and monitoring of higher risk and vulnerable portfolios and sectors is appropriate and confirming that appropriate loss allowances for impairment are in place. Output from these reviews helps to inform credit risk appetite and credit policy.
As the third line of defence, Group Internal Audit undertakes regular risk-based reviews to assess the effectiveness of credit risk management and controls.
MITIGATION
The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate credit risk.
Prudent, through-the-cycle credit principles, risk policies and appetite statements: the independent Risk division sets out the credit principles, credit risk policies and credit risk appetite statements. These are subject to regular review and governance, with any changes subject to an approval process. Risk teams monitor credit performance trends and the outlook. Risk teams also test the adequacy of and adherence to credit risk policies and processes throughout the Group. This includes tracking portfolio performance against an agreed set of credit risk appetite tolerances.
Robust models and controls: see model risk on page 86.
Limitations on concentration risk: there are portfolio controls on certain industries, sectors and products to reflect risk appetite as well as individual, customer and bank limit risk tolerances. Credit policies and appetite statements are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite and restrict exposure to higher risk countries and potentially vulnerable sectors and asset classes. Note 44 on page F-107 provides an analysis of loans and advances to customers by industry (for commercial customers) and product (for retail customers). Exposures are monitored to prevent both an excessive concentration of risk and single name concentrations. These concentration risk controls are not necessarily in the form of a maximum limit on exposure, but may instead require new business in concentrated sectors to fulfil additional minimum policy and/or guideline
49

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
requirements. The Group’s largest credit limits are regularly monitored by the Board Risk Committee and reported in accordance with regulatory requirements.
Defined country risk management framework: the Group sets a broad maximum country risk appetite. Risk-based appetite for all countries is set within the independent Risk division, taking into account economic, financial, political and social factors as well as the approved business and strategic plans of the Group.
Specialist expertise: credit quality is managed and controlled by a number of specialist units within the business and Risk division, which provide for example: intensive management and control; security perfection; maintenance of customer and facility records; expertise in documentation for lending and associated products; sector-specific expertise; and legal services applicable to the particular market segments and product ranges offered by the Group.
Stress testing: the Group’s credit portfolios are subject to regular stress testing. In addition to the Group-led, PRA and other regulatory stress tests, exercises focused on individual divisions and portfolios are also performed. For further information on stress testing process, methodology and governance see page 41.
Frequent and robust credit risk assurance: assurance of credit risk is undertaken by an independent function operating within the Risk division which are part of the Group’s second line of defence. Their primary objective is to provide reasonable and independent assurance and confidence that credit risk is being effectively managed and to ensure that appropriate controls are in place and being adhered to. Group Internal Audit also provides assurance to the Audit Committee on the effectiveness of credit risk management controls across the Group’s activities.
Collateral
The principal types of acceptable collateral include:
Residential and commercial properties
Charges over business assets such as premises, inventory and accounts receivable
Financial instruments such as debt securities vehicles
Cash
Guarantees received from third parties
The Group maintains appetite parameters on the acceptability of specific classes of collateral.
For non-mortgage retail lending to small businesses, collateral may include second charges over residential property and the assignment of life cover.
Collateral held as security for financial assets other than loans and advances is determined by the nature of the underlying exposure. Debt securities, including treasury and other bills, are generally unsecured, with the exception of asset-backed securities and similar instruments such as covered bonds, which are secured by portfolios of financial assets. Collateral is generally not held against loans and advances to financial institutions. However, securities are held as part of reverse repurchase or securities borrowing transactions or where a collateral agreement has been entered into under a master netting agreement. Derivative transactions with financial counterparties are typically collateralised under a Credit Support Annex (CSA) in conjunction with the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) Master Agreement. Derivative transactions with non-financial customers are not usually supported by a CSA.
The requirement for collateral and the type to be taken at origination will be based upon the nature of the transaction and the credit quality, size and structure of the borrower. For non-retail exposures, if required, the Group will often seek that any collateral includes a first charge over land and buildings owned and occupied by the business, a debenture over the assets of a company or limited liability partnership, personal guarantees, limited in amount, from the directors of a company or limited liability partnership and key man insurance. The Group maintains policies setting out which types of collateral valuation are acceptable, maximum loan to value (LTV) ratios and other criteria that are to be considered when reviewing an application. The fundamental business proposition must evidence the ability of the business to generate funds from normal business sources to repay a customer or counterparty’s financial commitment, rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided.
Although lending decisions are primarily based on expected cash flows, any collateral provided may impact the pricing and other terms of a loan or facility granted. This will have a financial impact on the amount of net interest income recognised and on internal loss given default estimates that contribute to the determination of asset quality and returns.
The Group requires collateral to be realistically valued by an appropriately qualified source, independent of both the credit decision process and the customer, at the time of borrowing. In certain circumstances, for Retail residential mortgages this may include the use of automated valuation models based on market data, subject to accuracy criteria and LTV limits. Where third parties are used for collateral valuations, they are subject to regular monitoring and review. Collateral values are subject to review, which will vary according to the type of lending, collateral involved and account performance. Such reviews are undertaken to confirm that the value recorded remains appropriate and whether revaluation is required, considering, for example, account performance, market conditions and any information available that may indicate that the value of the collateral has materially declined. In such instances, the Group may seek additional collateral and/or other amendments to the terms of the facility. The Group adjusts estimated market values to take account of the costs of realisation and any discount associated with the realisation of the collateral when estimating credit losses.
The Group considers risk concentrations by collateral providers and collateral type with a view to ensuring that any potential undue concentrations of risk are identified and suitably managed by changes to strategy, policy and/or business plans.
The Group seeks to avoid correlation or wrong-way risk where possible. Under the Group’s repurchase (repo) policy, the issuer of the collateral and the repo counterparty should be neither the same nor connected. The same rule applies for derivatives. The Risk division has the necessary discretion to extend this rule to other cases where there is significant correlation. Countries with a rating equivalent to AA- or better may be considered to have no adverse correlation between the counterparty domiciled in that country and the country of risk (issuer of securities).
Refer to note 44 on page F-126 for further information on collateral.
Additional mitigation for Retail customers
The Group uses a variety of lending criteria when assessing applications for mortgages and unsecured lending. The general approval process uses credit acceptance scorecards and involves a review of an applicant’s previous credit history using internal data and information held by Credit Reference Agencies (CRA).
50

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group also assesses the affordability and sustainability of lending for each borrower. For secured lending this includes use of an appropriate stressed interest rate scenario. Affordability assessments for all lending are compliant with relevant regulatory and conduct guidelines. The Group takes reasonable steps to validate information used in the assessment of a customer’s income and expenditure.
In addition, the Group has in place quantitative limits such as maximum limits for individual customer products, the level of borrowing to income and the ratio of borrowing to collateral. Some of these limits relate to internal approval levels and others are policy limits above which the Group will typically reject borrowing applications. The Group also applies certain criteria that are applicable to specific products, for example applications for buy-to-let mortgages.
For UK mortgages, the Group’s policy permits owner occupier applications with a maximum LTV of 95 per cent. This can increase to 100 per cent for specific products where additional security is provided by a supporter of the applicant and held on deposit by the Group. Applications with an LTV above 90 per cent are subject to enhanced underwriting criteria, including higher scorecard cut-offs and loan size restrictions.
Buy-to-let mortgages within Retail are limited to a maximum loan size of £1,000,000 and 75 per cent LTV. Buy-to-let applications must pass a minimum rental cover ratio of 125 per cent under stressed interest rates, after applicable tax liabilities. Portfolio landlords (customers with four or more mortgaged buy-to-let properties) are subject to additional controls including evaluation of overall portfolio resilience.
The Group’s policy is to reject any application for a lending product where a customer is registered as bankrupt or insolvent, or has a recent County Court Judgment or financial default registered at a CRA used by the Group above de minimis thresholds. In addition, the Group typically rejects applicants where total unsecured debt, debt-to-income ratios, or other indicators of financial difficulty exceed policy limits.
Where credit acceptance scorecards are used, new models, model changes and monitoring of model effectiveness are independently reviewed and approved in accordance with the governance framework set by the Group Model Governance Committee.
Additional mitigation for Commercial customers
Individual credit assessment and independent sanction of customer and bank limits: with the exception of small exposures to SME customers where certain relationship managers have limited delegated sanctioning authority, credit risk in commercial customer portfolios is subject to sanction by the independent Risk division, which considers the strengths and weaknesses of individual transactions, the balance of risk and reward, and how credit risk aligns to the Group and divisional risk appetite. Exposure to individual counterparties, groups of counterparties or customer risk segments is controlled through a tiered hierarchy of credit authority delegations and risk-based credit limit guidances per client group for larger exposures. Approval requirements for each decision are based on a number of factors including, but not limited to, the transaction amount, the customer’s aggregate facilities, any risk mitigation in place, credit policy, risk appetite, credit risk ratings and the nature and term of the risk. The Group’s credit risk appetite criteria for counterparty and customer loan underwriting is generally the same as that for loans intended to be held to maturity. All hard loan/bond underwriting must be sanctioned by the Risk division. A pre-approved credit matrix may be used for ‘best efforts’ underwriting.
Counterparty credit limits: limits are set against all types of exposure in a counterparty name, in accordance with an agreed methodology for each exposure type. This includes credit risk exposure on individual derivatives and securities financing transactions, which incorporates potential future exposures from market movements against agreed confidence intervals. Aggregate facility levels by counterparty are set and limit breaches are subject to escalation procedures.
Daily settlement limits: settlement risk arises in any situation where a payment in cash, securities or equities is made in the expectation of a corresponding receipt in cash, securities or equities. Daily settlement limits are established for each relevant counterparty to cover the aggregate of all settlement risk arising from the Group’s market transactions on any single day. Where possible, the Group uses Continuous Linked Settlement in order to reduce foreign exchange (FX) settlement risk.
Master netting agreements
It is credit policy that a Group-approved master netting agreement must be used for all derivative and traded product transactions and must be in place prior to trading, with separate documentation required for each Group entity providing facilities. This requirement extends to trades with clients and the counterparties used for the Bank’s own hedging activities, which may also include clearing trades with Central Counterparties (CCPs).
Any exceptions must be approved by the appropriate credit sanctioner. Master netting agreements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis. However, within relevant jurisdictions and for appropriate counterparty types, master netting agreements do reduce the credit risk to the extent that, if an event of default occurs, all trades with the counterparty may be terminated and settled on a net basis. The Group’s overall exposure to credit risk on derivative instruments subject to master netting agreements can change substantially within a short period, since this is the net position of all trades under the master netting agreement.
Other credit risk transfers
The Group also undertakes asset sales, credit derivative based transactions, securitisations (including significant risk transfer transactions), purchases of credit default swaps and purchase of credit insurance as a means of mitigating or reducing credit risk and/or risk concentration, taking into account the nature of assets and the prevailing market conditions.
MONITORING
In conjunction with the Risk division, businesses identify and define portfolios of credit and related risk exposures and the key behaviours and characteristics by which those portfolios are managed and monitored. This entails the production and analysis of regular portfolio monitoring reports for review by senior management. The Risk division in turn produces an aggregated view of credit risk across the Group, including reports on material credit exposures, concentrations, concerns and other management information, which is presented to the divisional risk committees and forums, Group Risk Committee and the Board Risk Committee.
Models
The performance of all models used in credit risk is monitored in line with the Group’s model governance framework - see model risk on page 86.
Intensive care of customers in financial difficulty
The Group operates a number of solutions to assist borrowers who are experiencing financial stress. The material elements of these solutions through which the Group has granted a concession, whether temporarily or permanently, are set out below.
Forbearance
The Group’s aim in offering forbearance and other assistance to customers in financial distress is to benefit both the customer and the Group by supporting its customers and acting in their best interests by, where possible, bringing customer facilities back into a sustainable position.
51

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group offers a range of tools and assistance to support customers who are encountering financial difficulties. Cases are managed on an individual basis, with the circumstances of each customer considered separately and the action taken judged as being appropriate and sustainable for both the customer and the Group.
Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting its financial commitments. This can include modification of the previous terms and conditions of a contract or a total or partial refinancing of a troubled debt contract, either of which would not have been required had the debtor not been experiencing financial difficulties.
The provision and review of such assistance is controlled through the application of an appropriate policy framework and associated controls. Regular review of the assistance offered to customers is undertaken to confirm that it remains appropriate, alongside monitoring of customers’ performance and the level of payments received.
The Group classifies accounts as forborne at the time a customer in financial difficulty is granted a concession. However, where customers were temporarily impacted by COVID-19, the Group looked to follow regulator principles and guidance on the granting of concessions resulting from the impact of the pandemic.
Balances in default or classified as Stage 3 are always considered to be non-performing. Balances may be non-performing but not in default or Stage 3, where for example they are within their non-performing forbearance cure period.
Non-performing exposures can be reclassified as performing forborne after a minimum 12-month cure period, providing there are no past due amounts or concerns regarding the full repayment of the exposure. A minimum of a further 24 months must pass from the date the forborne exposure was reclassified as performing forborne before the account can exit forbearance. If conditions to exit forbearance are not met at the end of this probation period, the exposure shall continue to be identified as forborne until all the conditions are met.
The Group’s treatment of loan renegotiations is included in the impairment policy in note 2(H) on page F-19.
Customers receiving support from UK Government sponsored programmes
To assist customers in financial distress, the Group participates in UK Government sponsored programmes for households, including the Income Support for Mortgage Interest programme, under which the government pays the Group all or part of the interest on the mortgage on behalf of the customer. This is provided as a government loan which the customer must repay.
Support for customers during the COVID-19 pandemic
Working closely with the UK Government and regulators, the Group supported its retail, small business and commercial customers through a comprehensive and unprecedented range of flexible measures to help alleviate temporary financial pressure on customers during the crisis.
For retail customers, the Group provided payment holidays of up to three months across a range of products including mortgages, personal loans, credit cards and motor finance, extensions of up to 6 months in total were available.
Similarly, the Group provided significant support for its small business and commercial customers as well as providing loans to businesses under the different government schemes, including Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS), Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) and Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS). These schemes closed in March 2021, replaced by the Recovery Loan Scheme through which the Group is also providing support. The Group continues to provide ongoing support to BBLS customers through the Pay As You Grow (PAYG) scheme, where customers are able to access a number of options including repayment holidays and term extensions. The Group also supported its customers through repayment holidays and its own COVID-19 fund which included fee-free lending for new overdrafts or overdraft limit increases as well as new or increased invoice discounting and finance facilities. The Group also offered SME customers a mentoring service to help navigate a path beyond the pandemic.
LLOYDS BANK GROUP CREDIT RISK PORTFOLIO IN 2021
Overview
Performance across the Group’s lending portfolios has been robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions to address the financial impacts of COVID-19, including government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited the increase in unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low
Portfolios have also benefitted from the Group’s proactive risk management and prudent credit risk appetite, with robust cashflow criteria and LTVs in the Group's secured portfolios
However, looking forward some portfolio deterioration may be expected, especially considering the withdrawal of government COVID-19 support measures and effects from a number of downside risks, including higher inflation and rising interest rates
Repayments under the government-backed lending schemes began in the second half of 2021, with arrears levels being carefully monitored, alongside continued review of customer trends and indicators to ensure early signs of customer distress are quickly identified
The Group continues to hold appropriate expected credit loss (ECL) allowances in light of the uncertainties and to protect against downside risks
The impairment credit in 2021 was £1,318 million, compared to a charge of £4,060 million in 2020. The full-year credit resulted from a release of expected credit loss allowances based upon improvements to the macroeconomic outlook for the UK, combined with robust observed credit performance, with a low run rate impairment charge
As a result, the Group’s customer related ECL allowances reduced in the period from £6,127 million to £3,998 million. Reductions in Commercial Banking ECL allowances also reflected improved outcomes on restructuring cases, reduction in Stage 2 exposures and lower flows to default
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers reduced from £51,280 million to £34,884 million and as a percentage of total lending reduced by 3.4 percentage points to 7.2 per cent (31 December 2020: 10.6 per cent), predominantly reflecting the improvement in the Group’s forward-looking macroeconomic assumptions. Of these, 89.0 per cent were up to date (31 December 2020: 91.6 per cent). Stage 2 coverage reduced to 3.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 4.6 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances to customers reduced in the period to £6,406 million (31 December 2020: £6,443 million) but remained stable as a percentage of total lending at 1.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.3 per cent). Stage 3 coverage reduced by 5.0 percentage points to 27.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 32.4 per cent), largely driven by an increase in Retail BBLS assets which hold zero ECL allowances due to the UK Government guarantee in place, the improved macroeconomic outlook, and a small number of single name releases in Commercial Banking, including coronavirus impacted restructuring cases
52

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Prudent risk appetite and risk management
The Group continues to take a prudent approach to credit risk and has a through-the-cycle credit risk appetite, while working closely with customers to help and support them through and recover from the crisis
Sector and asset class concentrations within the portfolios are closely monitored and controlled, with mitigating actions taken where appropriate. Sector and product caps and policies limit exposure to certain higher risk and vulnerable sectors and asset classes
The Group’s effective risk management seeks to ensure early identification and management of customers and counterparties who may be showing signs of distress
The Group will continue to work closely with its customers throughout the recovery to ensure they receive the appropriate level of support, including where repayments under the UK Government scheme lending fall due
Impairment (credit) charge by division
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to banksFinancial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Undrawn
balances
20212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages(271)  (2)(273)478 
Credit cards29   (78)(49)800 
Loans and overdrafts83   (44)39 739 
UK Motor Finance(149)  (2)(151)226 
Other(7)  (14)(21)141 
Retail(315)  (140)(455)2,384 
SME(218)  (19)(237)264 
Corporate and other1
(541)(4)(3)(72)(620)1,016 
Commerical Banking(759)(4)(3)(91)(857)1,280 
Other(7) 1  (6)396 
Total impairment (credit) charge(1,081)(4)(2)(231)(1,318)4,060 
1Corporate and other primarily comprises Mid Corporates and Corporate and Institutional.
53

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Group loans and advances to customers
The following pages contain analysis of the Group’s loans and advances to customers by sub-portfolio. Loans and advances to customers are categorised into the following stages:
Stage 1 assets comprise of newly originated assets (unless purchased or originated credit impaired), as well as those which have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses that result from those default events that are possible within 12 months of the reporting date (12 month expected credit losses).
Stage 2 assets are those which have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. These assets carry an expected credit loss allowance equivalent to the expected credit losses arising over the lifetime of the asset (lifetime expected credit losses).
Stage 3 assets have either defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired. These assets carry a lifetime expected credit loss.
Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets (POCI) are those that have been originated or acquired in a credit impaired state. This includes within the definition of credit impaired the purchase of a financial asset at a deep discount that reflects impaired credit losses.
Total expected credit loss allowance
At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020
£m£m
Customer related balances
Drawn3,804 5,701 
Undrawn194 426 
3,998 6,127 
Other assets2 
Total expected credit loss allowance4,000 6,132 
Movements in total expected credit loss allowance
Opening ECL at 31 Dec 2020
Write-offs
and other1
Income
statement
charge (credit)
Net ECL
decrease
Closing ECL at 31 Dec 2021
£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages1,027 83 (273)(190)837 
Credit cards923 (353)(49)(402)521 
Loans and overdrafts715 (309)39 (270)445 
UK Motor Finance501 (52)(151)(203)298 
Other229 (43)(21)(64)165 
Retail3,395 (674)(455)(1,129)2,266 
SME502 (10)(237)(247)255 
Corporate and other1,813 (132)(620)(752)1,061 
Commercial Banking2,315 (142)(857)(999)1,316 
Other422 2 (6)(4)418 
Total2
6,132 (814)(1,318)(2,132)4,000 
1Contains adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.
2Total ECL includes £2 million relating to other non customer-related assets (31 December 2020: £5 million).
54

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements and expected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgages273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 7.1 0.6 
Credit cards12,148 2,077 292  14,517 14.3 2.0 
Loans and overdrafts8,181 1,105 271  9,557 11.6 2.8 
UK Motor Finance12,247 1,828 201  14,276 12.8 1.4 
Other16,414 1,959 778  19,151 10.2 4.1 
Retail322,619 28,767 3,482 10,977 365,845 7.9 1.0 
SME27,260 3,002 843  31,105 9.7 2.7 
Corporate and other32,056 3,081 2,019  37,156 8.3 5.4 
Commercial Banking59,316 6,083 2,862  68,261 8.9 4.2 
Other1
47,143 34 62  47,239 0.1 0.1 
Total gross lending429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 7.2 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(909)(1,112)(1,573)(210)(3,804)
Net balance sheet carrying value428,169 33,772 4,833 10,767 477,541 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn)
UK mortgages49 394 184 210 837 
Credit cards144 249 128  521 
Loans and overdrafts136 170 139  445 
UK Motor Finance2
108 74 116  298 
Other45 65 55  165 
Retail482 952 622 210 2,266 
SME61 104 90  255 
Corporate and other63 140 857  1,060 
Commercial Banking124 244 947  1,315 
Other406 2 9  417 
Total1,012 1,198 1,578 210 3,998 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements3
UK mortgages 1.8 9.5 1.9 0.3 
Credit cards1.2 12.0 56.9  3.6 
Loans and overdrafts1.7 15.4 67.5  4.7 
UK Motor Finance0.9 4.0 57.7  2.1 
Other0.3 3.3 13.8  0.9 
Retail0.1 3.3 20.9 1.9 0.6 
SME0.2 3.5 12.7  0.8 
Corporate and other0.2 4.5 42.5  2.9 
Commercial Banking0.2 4.0 34.8  1.9 
Other0.9 5.9 14.5  0.9 
Total0.2 3.4 27.4 1.9 0.8 
1Includes reverse repos of £46.7 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £95 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn balances exclude loans in recoveries in credit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £65 million, Retail other of £379 million, SME of £135 million and Corporate and other of £4 million.
55

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 2
as % of
total
Stage 3
as % of
total
£m£m£m£m£m%%
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
UK mortgages251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 9.8 0.6 
Credit cards11,496 3,273 340 — 15,109 21.7 2.3 
Loans and overdrafts7,710 1,519 307 — 9,536 15.9 3.2 
UK Motor Finance12,786 2,216 199 — 15,201 14.6 1.3 
Other17,879 1,304 184 — 19,367 6.7 1.0 
Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 10.5 0.8 
SME27,015 4,500 791 — 32,306 13.9 2.4 
Corporate and other29,882 9,438 2,694 — 42,014 22.5 6.4 
Commercial Banking56,897 13,938 3,485 — 74,320 18.8 4.7 
Other1
57,422 12 69 — 57,503 — 0.1 
Total gross lending415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 10.6 1.3 
ECL allowance on drawn balances(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)
Net balance sheet carrying value414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn)
UK mortgages107 468 191 261 1,027 
Credit cards240 530 153 — 923 
Loans and overdrafts224 344 147 — 715 
UK Motor Finance2
197 171 133 — 501 
Other46 124 59 — 229 
Retail814 1,637 683 261 3,395 
SME142 234 126 — 502 
Corporate and other172 475 1,161 — 1,808 
Commercial Banking314 709 1,287 — 2,310 
Other410 — 12 — 422 
Total1,538 2,346 1,982 261 6,127 
Customer related ECL allowance (drawn and
undrawn) as a percentage of loans and advances to
customers and reverse repurchase agreements
3
UK mortgages— 1.6 10.3 2.1 0.3 
Credit cards2.1 16.2 56.0 — 6.1 
Loans and overdrafts2.9 22.6 64.2 — 7.6 
UK Motor Finance1.5 7.7 66.8 — 3.3 
Other0.3 9.5 39.3 — 1.2 
Retail0.3 4.4 25.2 2.1 1.0 
SME0.5 5.2 19.1 — 1.6 
Corporate and other0.6 5.0 43.2 — 4.3 
Commercial Banking0.6 5.1 38.5 — 3.1 
Other0.7 — 17.4 — 0.7 
Total0.4 4.6 32.4 2.1 1.3 
1Includes reverse repos of £54.4 billion.
2UK Motor Finance for Stages 1 and 2 include £192 million relating to provisions against residual values of vehicles subject to finance leasing agreements. These provisions are included within the calculation of coverage ratios.
3Total and Stage 3 ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn balances exclude loans in recoveries in credit cards of £67 million, loans and overdrafts of £78 million, Retail other of £34 million, SME of £132 million and Corporate and other of £6 million.

56

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Stage 2 loans and advances to customers and expected credit loss allowance
Up to date
1-30 days past due2
Over 30 days past dueTotal
PD movements
Other1
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
Gross
lending
ECL3
As
% of
gross
lending
£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%£m£m%
At 31 December 2021
UK mortgages14,845 132 0.9 4,133 155 3.8 1,433 38 2.7 1,387 69 5.0 21,798 394 1.8 
Credit cards1,755 176 10.0 210 42 20.0 86 20 23.3 26 11 42.3 2,077 249 12.0 
Loans and overdrafts505 82 16.2 448 43 9.6 113 30 26.5 39 15 38.5 1,105 170 15.4 
UK Motor Finance581 20 3.4 1,089 26 2.4 124 19 15.3 34 9 26.5 1,828 74 4.0 
Other538 41 7.6 990 15 1.5 294 6 2.0 137 3 2.2 1,959 65 3.3 
Retail18,224 451 2.5 6,870 281 4.1 2,050 113 5.5 1,623 107 6.6 28,767 952 3.3 
SME2,689 96 3.6 192 5 2.6 41 2 4.9 80 1 1.3 3,002 104 3.5 
Corporate and other2,966 138 4.7 69 2 2.9 8   38   3,081 140 4.5 
Commercial
Banking
5,655 234 4.1 261 7 2.7 49 2 4.1 118 1 0.8 6,083 244 4.0 
Other18   6 1 16.7 2   8 1 12.5 34 2 5.9 
Total23,897 685 2.9 7,137 289 4.0 2,101 115 5.5 1,749 109 6.2 34,884 1,198 3.4 
At 31 December 2020
UK mortgages22,569 215 1.0 3,078 131 4.3 1,648 43 2.6 1,723 79 4.6 29,018 468 1.6 
Credit cards2,924 408 14.0 220 76 34.5 93 27 29.0 36 19 52.8 3,273 530 16.2 
Loans and overdrafts959 209 21.8 388 68 17.5 126 45 35.7 46 22 47.8 1,519 344 22.6 
UK Motor Finance724 62 8.6 1,321 55 4.2 132 37 28.0 39 17 43.6 2,216 171 7.7 
Other512 56 10.9 651 44 6.8 69 14 20.3 72 10 13.9 1,304 124 9.5 
Retail27,688 950 3.4 5,658 374 6.6 2,068 166 8.0 1,916 147 7.7 37,330 1,637 4.4 
SME4,229 219 5.2 150 4.0 40 12.5 81 4.9 4,500 234 5.2 
Corporate and other9,151 469 5.1 83 3.6 28 7.1 176 0.6 9,438 475 5.0 
Commercial
Banking
13,380 688 5.1 233 3.9 68 10.3 257 1.9 13,938 709 5.1 
Other— — 11 — — — — — — — — 12 — — 
Total41,069 1,638 4.0 5,902 383 6.5 2,136 173 8.1 2,173 152 7.0 51,280 2,346 4.6 
1Includes forbearance, client and product-specific indicators not reflected within quantitative PD assessments.
2Includes assets that have triggered PD movements, or other rules, given that being 1-29 days in arrears in and of itself is not a Stage 2 trigger.
3Expected credit loss allowance on loans and advances to customers (drawn and undrawn).
The Group’s assessment of a significant increase in credit risk, and resulting categorisation of Stage 2, includes customers moving into early arrears as well as a broader assessment that an up to date customer has experienced a level of deterioration in credit risk since origination. A more sophisticated assessment is required for up to date customers, which varies across divisions and product type. This assessment incorporates specific triggers such as a significant proportionate increase in probability of default relative to that at origination, recent arrears, forbearance activity, internal watch lists and external bureau flags. Up to date exposures in Stage 2 are likely to show lower levels of expected credit loss (ECL) allowance relative to those that have already moved into arrears given that an arrears status typically reflects a stronger indication of future default and greater likelihood of credit losses.
57

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Retail
Performance in the Retail portfolio has remained robust, driven in part by the successful public policy interventions, government-backed lending schemes and payment holidays, which have limited unemployment and helped keep credit defaults and business failures low. The portfolio has also benefitted from proactive risk management and the continued low interest rate environment
New business quality remains strong
Early arrears rates remain below pre-pandemic levels on personal lending products
Coverage across all IFRS 9 stages has decreased largely due to the improved macroeconomic outlook
Strong credit performance and an improved economic outlook have allowed the Group to progressively unwind many of the additional precautionary credit quality controls introduced during the pandemic, whilst continuing to ensure that customers and the Group remain protected against any remaining uncertainty in the economy and cost of living increases
A Retail impairment credit of £455 million for 2021 compares to a charge of £2,384 million for 2020. This significant decrease resulted from a release of customer related expected credit loss (ECL) allowances driven by the Group's improved macroeconomic outlook, combined with robust observed credit performance, with charges relating to flows to arrears and defaults remaining low despite expiry of all payment holidays
Existing IFRS 9 staging rules and triggers have been maintained across Retail, with the exception of minor changes to the Loans & Overdraft portfolios to tighten criteria and align to the credit cards portfolio. Transfers between stages have been primarily driven by credit risk rating movements and the estimated impact of the economic factors on a customer’s forward-looking default risk
Retail customer related ECL allowance as a percentage of drawn loans and advances (coverage) decreased to 0.6 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.0 per cent) due to the favourable updates in the Group’s economic forecast. As at 31 December 2021 the majority of ECL decreases are reflected within Stage 2 under IFRS 9, representing cases which have observed a significant increase in credit risk since origination (SICR)
Stage 2 loans and advances comprises 7.9 per cent of the Retail portfolio (31 December 2020: 10.5 per cent), of which 87.2 per cent are up to date, performing loans (31 December 2020: 89.3 per cent)
Stage 2 ECL coverage has decreased to 3.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 4.4 per cent), reflecting the improved macroeconomic outlook
Stage 3 loans and advances have remained broadly flat at 1.0 per cent of total loans and advances (31 December 2020: 0.8 per cent and Stage 3 ECL coverage decreased to 20.9 per cent (31 December 2020: 25.2 per cent) due to an increase in BBLS assets which hold zero ECL due to the government guarantee in place, and the improved macroeconomic outlook
Portfolios
UK mortgages
The UK mortgages portfolio is well positioned with low arrears and a strong loan to value (LTV) profile. The Group has actively improved the quality of the portfolio over the years using robust affordability and credit controls, while the balances of higher risk portfolios originated prior to 2008 have continued to reduce
While the housing market has remained resilient throughout 2021 with strong customer demand, the Group has taken action to protect credit quality and participates in the government guarantee scheme for greater than 90 per cent LTVs, which provides risk mitigation at the highest exposures
Total loans and advances increased to £308.3 billion (31 December 2020: £294.8 billion), with a small reduction in average LTV to 42.1 per cent (31 December 2020: 43.5 per cent). The proportion of balances with an LTV greater than 90 per cent decreased to 0.5 per cent (31 December 2020: 0.6 per cent). The average LTV of new business decreased to 63.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 63.9 per cent)
There was an impairment credit of £273 million for 2021 compared to a charge of £478 million for 2020, reflecting improvements to the UK's macroeconomic outlook and improved house prices. Total ECL coverage remained stable at 0.3 per cent (31 December 2020: 0.3 per cent)
Stage 2 loans and advances decreased to 7.1 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 9.8 per cent) and Stage 2 ECL coverage has increased to 1.8 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.6 per cent). These impacts also reflect improvements in the UK's macroeconomic outlook, with a reduction in balances transferred into Stage 2 based on the forward-looking view of their credit performance, in addition to favourable experience and house price assumptions
Stage 3 loans and advances remained stable at 0.6 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 0.6 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage decreased to 9.5 per cent (31 December 2020: 10.3 per cent). This reflects favourable credit performance, in addition to favourable house price assumptions (both observed and forecast)
Credit cards
Credit cards balances decreased to £14.5 billion (31 December 2020 £15.1 billion) due to reduced levels of customer spend
There was an impairment credit of £49 million for 2021, compared to a charge of £800 million for 2020, reflecting lower than anticipated arrears emergence and improvements in the macroeconomic outlook. Total ECL coverage decreased to 3.6 per cent (31 December 2020: 6.1 per cent)
This favourability is reflected in Stage 2 loans and advances which decreased to 14.3 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 21.7 per cent) and Stage 2 ECL coverage which has reduced to 12.0 per cent (31 December 2020: 16.2 per cent)
Stage 3 loans and advances decreased to 2.0 per cent of the portfolio (31 December 2020: 2.3 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage increased to 56.9 per cent (31 December 2020: 56.0 per cent)
58

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Loans and overdrafts
Loans and advances for personal current account and the personal loans portfolios remained broadly flat at £9.6 billion (31 December 2020: £9.5 billion), reflecting recovering customer demand with rising economic activity
The impairment charge was £39 million for the full year 2021 compared to £739 million for the full year 2020. This decrease is due to the improved outlook within the Group's macroeconomic forecasts, in addition to favourable credit performance, reducing both Stage 2 ECL coverage to 15.4 per cent (31 December 2020: 22.6 per cent) and overall ECL coverage to 4.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 7.6 per cent)
UK Motor Finance
The UK Motor Finance portfolio decreased from £15.2 billion for 2020 to £14.3 billion for 2021 due to reduced market activity and new car supply issues as a result of the pandemic
There was an impairment credit of £151 million for 2021 compared to a charge of £226 million for 2020, reflecting improvements to the Group's macroeconomic outlook and higher than expected used car prices. ECL coverage decreased to 2.1 per cent (31 December 2020: 3.3 per cent)
Updates to Residual Value (RV) and Voluntary Termination (VT) risk held against Personal Contract Purchase (PCP) and Hire Purchase (HP) lending are included within the impairment charge. Observed car price gains partially driven by global supply issues, supported by better than expected disposal experience, result in combined RV and VT provisions of £95 million as at 31 December 2021 (31 December 2020: £192 million)
Stage 2 ECL coverage decreased to 4.0 per cent (31 December 2020: 7.7 per cent) and Stage 3 ECL coverage decreased to 57.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 66.8 per cent) this reflects favourable credit performance, in addition to updates to the Group's outlook on used car prices
Other
Other loans and advances decreased slightly to £19.2 billion (31 December 2020: £19.4 billion). The decrease was largely driven by a reduction in balances on the Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) and the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) as the schemes closed in March 2021 and repayments commenced from the second quarter of 2021
Bounce Back Loans benefit from Pay as You Grow (PAYG) options including repayment holidays and term extensions which have the potential to delay recognition of customer financial difficulties
Stage 3 loans and advances increased to 4.1 per cent (31 December 2020: 1.0 per cent) driven largely by BBLS assets. However, Stage 3 coverage reduced to 13.8 per cent (31 December 2020: 39.3 per cent) as these assets hold zero ECL due to government guarantees in place
There was an impairment credit of £21 million for 2021 compared to a charge of £141 million for 2020, primarily due to the improved outlook within the Group's economic forecasts
Retail UK mortgages loans and advances to customers
At 31 Dec 20211
At 31 Dec 20201
£m£m
Mainstream248,013 234,273 
Buy-to-let51,111 49,634 
Specialist9,220 10,899 
Total308,344 294,806 
1Balances include the impact of HBOS-related acquisition adjustments.
59

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Interest only mortgages
The Group provides interest only mortgages to owner occupier mortgage customers whereby only payments of interest are made for the term of the mortgage with the customer responsible for repaying the principal outstanding at the end of the loan term. At 31 December 2021, owner occupier interest only balances as a proportion of total owner occupier balances had reduced to 18.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 21.6 per cent). The average indexed loan to value remained low at 36.8 per cent (31 December 2020: 39.0 per cent).
For existing interest only mortgages, a contact strategy is in place during the term of the mortgage to ensure that customers are aware of their obligations to repay the principal upon maturity of the loan.
Treatment strategies are in place to help customers anticipate and plan for repayment of capital at maturity and support those who may have difficulty in repaying the principal amount. A dedicated specialist team supports customers who have passed their contractual maturity date and are unable to fully repay the principal. A range of treatments are offered to customers based on their individual circumstances to create fair and sustainable outcomes.
Analysis of owner occupier interest only mortgages
At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020
TotalTotal
Interest only balances (£m)48,128 53,077 
Stage 1 (%)70.7 69.0 
Stage 2 (%)17.1 16.3 
Stage 3 (%)2.8 1.7 
Purchased or originated credit-impaired (%)9.4 13.0 
Average loan to value (%)36.8 39.0 
Maturity profile (£m)
Due1,803 1,626 
1 year1,834 2,045 
2-5 years8,889 9,450 
6-10 years17,882 18,351 
>11 years17,720 21,605 
Past term interest only balances (£m)1
1,790 1,715 
Stage 1 (%)0.7 0.7 
Stage 2 (%)33.0 28.9 
Stage 3 (%)29.6 24.2 
Purchased or originated credit-impaired (%)36.7 46.2 
Average loan to value (%)33.0 34.4 
Negative equity (%)1.8 2.5 
1Balances where all interest only elements have moved past term. Some may subsequently have had a term extension, so are no longer classed as due.
60

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Retail forbearance
The basis of disclosure for forbearance is aligned to definitions used in the European Banking Authority’s FINREP reporting. Total forbearance for the major retail portfolios has improved by £476 million to £5.4 billion driven primarily by a reduction in customers where the treatment sees arrears reset and are added to the loan balance (capitalisations).
The main customer treatments included are: repair, where arrears are added to the loan balance and the arrears position cancelled; instances where there are suspensions of interest and/or capital repayments; past term interest only mortgages; and refinance personal loans.
As a percentage of loans and advances, forbearance loans improved to 1.5 per cent at 31 December 2021 (31 December 2020: 1.7 per cent).
Total expected credit losses (ECL) as a proportion of loans and advances which are forborne has increased to 7.2 per cent (31 December 2020: 7.0 per cent).
Retail forborne loans and advances (audited)
TotalOf which
Stage 2
Of which
Stage 3
Of which
purchased or
originated
credit-
 impaired
Expected
credit losses
as a % of
total loans
and advances
which are
foreborne1
£m£m£m£m%
At 31 December 20212
UK mortgages4,725 1,216 901 2,600 3.2 
Credit cards288 90 141  32.9 
Loans and overdrafts312 99 131  33.8 
UK Motor Finance102 38 62  37.0 
Total5,427 1,443 1,235 2,600 7.2 
At 31 December 2020
UK mortgages5,106 1,192 823 3,081 3.6 
Credit cards356 130 191 — 40.0 
Loans and overdrafts353 154 146 — 36.5 
UK Motor Finance88 50 34 — 36.3 
Total5,903 1,526 1,194 3,081 7.0 
1Expected credit loss allowance as a percentage of total loans and advances which are forborne is calculated excluding loans in recoveries for Credit cards, Loans and overdrafts (31 December 2021: £87 million; 31 December 2020: £75 million).
2In line with FINREP reporting and regulatory guidelines, Retail forborne loans and advances do not include COVID-19 moratoria.
61

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Commercial Banking
Portfolio Management and Supporting the Group's Customersoverview
Commercial Banking has actively supported its customers during this difficult time,throughout the pandemic, through a range of propositions including capital repayment holidays, working capital line increases and financial covenant waivers, as well as supporting small businesses and corporates through full use of the UK Government lending schemes
Credit performance across the portfolios has been robust, driven in part by the strong market liquidity and government intervention measures, which have helped to support clients and kept credit defaults and business failures at low levels. Portfolios have also benefitted from the Group’s prudent risk management and the continued low interest rate environment
As the economy continued its recovery and business’ cashflows started to normalise, there has been an improvement in customer credit risk ratings, particularly in the larger corporates segment of Commercial, partially reversing some of the downgrades seen earlier during the pandemic. The coronavirus has resulted in widespread industry disruption, withCorporate and Institutional business continues to have a predominance of investment grade clients and is well positioned against the uncertain economic outlook
While some sectors such as travel, transportation, non-essential retail, leisure and hospitality were particularly impacted although as a proportion ofby the Group’s overall lending,crisis, exposure to these sectors remainremains relatively modest.limited and, in general, sectors have been more resilient than anticipated to date. The Group still expects recovery to be slowslower in a numberfew of vulnerablethe impacted sectors and anticipates longer term structural changes in these, and a number of these.other sectors. Sector and credit risk appetite continue to be proactively managed to ensure the Group is protected, and clientscustomers are supported in the right way
AsThe SME portfolio remains largely secured and credit impacts have been relatively muted throughout the crisis has developed, Commercial Banking has continuedpandemic, recognising that Government support measures have prevented more widespread defaults and business failures. Repayments under the UK Government lending schemes began in the second half of 2021, with low arrears to date. The level of arrears continues to be carefully monitored, with early risk mitigation activities taken as appropriate
Even though economic conditions have improved, significant uncertainties remain, with a number of prevailing headwinds and the withdrawal of the Government COVID-19 support measures yet to impact portfolio performance. Some credit deterioration is therefore expected in 2022
However, the Group continues to support its more vulnerable clientscustomers early through focused risk management via the Group’sits Watchlist and Business Support framework,
With the exception of certain risk appetite extensions made to accommodate UK Government scheme guidelines, particularly Bounce Back Loans and to a lesser extent, Coronavirus Business Interruption Loans (where government guarantees are in place at 100 per cent and 80 per cent, respectively), lending continues to be in line with the usual approach to credit risk and through the cycle credit risk appetite: credit analysis is undertaken to ensure continued financial viability, notwithstanding any short-term coronavirus related pressure
Although the portfolios were well positioned pre crisis, as expected, deterioration has been seen with downgrades in credit risk ratings observed, although more so in the larger corporates segment, than in the SME book, which remains predominantly a secured portfolio. Risk rating downgrades to sub investment grade or equivalent have, however, been more modest
Credit impacts were relatively muted in the SME portfolio in 2020. Observed credit quality is likely to be influenced by the significant temporary support provided by the Government in light of the COVID-19 pandemic, which has the potential to distort underlying credit risk. The Group expects arrears and defaults to increase in 2021 as this support comes to an end. Crystallisation of these impacts is expected to start from the second quarter of 2021 as payments start to fall due, and are anticipated to be protracted over a number of years, given the flexible payment deferral options available under the various government lending schemes
Significant uncertainties remain, relating to both the coronavirus pandemic and the full impact of the UK's exit from the European Union on the portfolios. Notwithstanding this, the Group will continue to balance prudent risk appetite with ensuring support for financially viable clientscustomers on their road to recovery
Impairments
The netThere was an impairment credit of £857 million in 2021, compared to an impairment charge increased toof £1,280 million in 2020, compared with £313 million in 2019.2020. The increase largely reflects charges following updatescredit for 2021 includes a release of expected credit loss (ECL) allowances resulting from improvements to the economicGroup's view of the UK macroeconomic outlook, together with chargesand a net release on a small number of existing Stage 3 large corporatecoronavirus impacted restructuring cases inwithin the Business Support Unit (BSU), where coronavirus has directly hampered the client's existing recovery strategy. The remaining net release reflects other Stage 3 releases, credit quality improvements, reduced balance sheet lending, and impairments crystallising on a small numberlow levels of single namegross charges in the BSU
from cases flowing into default. As a result, expected credit losstotal ECL allowances increasedreduced by £1,091£995 million to £2,310£1,315 million at 31 December 2020. 2021 (31 December 2020: £2,310 million)
The Group recognises that credit quality has been partly supported by the temporary measures provided by the UK Government schemes and the existing expected credit lossECL provision balance as at 31 December 20202021 assumes some additional losses will emerge asnow that the support subsideshas ended and structural change emergesstarts to emerge in some sectors
Stage 3 loans and advances increased to £3,485 million (31 December 2019: £3,135 million) and given the overall Commercial portfolio reduction, as a proportion of total loans and advances, increased to 4.7 per cent (31 December 2019: 4.0 per cent). The increase was driven by non-SME flows to Stage 3 partially offset by repayments and write-offs. SME flows remain suppressed. Stage 3 ECL coverage increased to 36.9 per cent (31 December 2019: 27.6 per cent) predominantly driven by the additional provisions raised against the existing restructuring cases in the BSU
Stage 2 loans and advances have increasedreduced by £8,013£7,855 million to £6,083 million (31 December 2020: £13,938 million at 31 December 2020,million), largely driven by the IFRS 9 forward look PD staging trigger, rather than actual PD deterioration,improvement in the Group's forward-looking economic assumptions, with 9897.3 per cent of Stage 2 balances being current and up to date. As a result, Stage 2 loans as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers increasedreduced to 18.88.9 per cent (31 December 2019: 7.52020: 18.8 per cent). Stage 2 ECL coverage was higherlower at 5.14.0 per cent (31 December 2019: 4.22020: 5.1 per cent) with the increasereduction in coverage a direct result of the forward lookchange in the forward-look multiple economic scenarios
Stage 3 loans and advances reduced to £2,862 million (31 December 2020: £3,485 million) and as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers, reduced to 4.2 per cent (31 December 2020: 4.7 per cent). SME customer flows to Stage 3 have been lower and non-SME flows were offset by repayments and write-offs. Stage 3 ECL coverage reduced to 34.8 per cent (31 December 2020: 38.5 per cent) predominantly driven by the release of provisions on a small number of cases in Business Support, including coronavirus impacted restructuring cases, where coverage levels were relatively higher
Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate
Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate gross lending stood at £12.4£10.9 billion at 31 December 20202021 (net of exposures subject to protection through Significant Risk Transfer (SRT) securitisations). The Group has a further £1.0£0.7 billion of UK Direct Real Estate exposurereal estate lending in Business Banking within the Retail division
The Group classifies Direct Real Estate as exposure which is directly supported by cash flows from property activities (as opposed to trading activities, such as hotels, care homes and housebuilders). Exposures of £5.5£5.2 billion to social housing providers are also excluded
Recognising this is a cyclical sector, appropriatepolicies and caps are in place to control origination quality and exposure. Focusexposure levels, including in a number of asset type categories. The Group's focus remains on the UK market and business propositions have been written in line with a prudent, through the cyclethrough-the-cycle risk appetite with conservative LTVs, strong quality of income, and proven management teams and predominately in stronger sub sectors
Overall performance has remained generally acceptable, although an increase in cases moving to Watchlist has been seen, with some transfers to BSU concentrated inproved resilient despite the retail/shopping centres sub sector. This is somewhat to be expected, as overall rent collection has been impacted by COVID-19, particularly inchallenge during COVID-19. Retail and Leisure have remained the retail space given the number of closed stores throughout the lockdowns, though the officemost challenged sub sector has been reasonably resilient. Despite these challengessectors, but despite this, the portfolio is relativelyremains well positioned and proactively managed, with appropriate risk mitigants in place:
Exposures over £1 million continue to be heavily weighted towards investment real estate (c.90 per cent) overrather than development. Of these investment exposures, over 7582 per cent have an LTV of less than 60 per cent, with an average LTV of 5042 per cent
C.90Approximately 90 per cent of exposures greater than £5 million have an interest cover ratio of greater than 2.0 times and in SME, LTV at origination has been typically limited to c.55 per cent, given prudent repayment cover criteria (including(which includes a notional base rate serviceability stress)
Approximately 6555 per cent of exposures over £1 million relate to commercial real estate (with no speculative development lending) with the remainder predominantly related to residential real estate. The underlying sub-sectorsub sector split is diversified with c.13more limited exposure to higher risk sub sectors (c.14 per cent of exposures secured by Retail assets, with appetite tightened since 20182018)
In the office sub sector, risk appetite continues to be proactively managed with appropriate risk mitigation tightening seen in 2021. The Office portfolio isGroup remains focused on prime locations with strong sponsors and low LTVs, as well as no speculative commercial developmenthigh quality origination in this sector
Use of Significant Risk Transfer (SRT) securitisations also acts as a risk mitigant, with run offrun-off of these carefully managed and tracked
4962

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Both investment and development lending is subject to specific credit risk appetite criteria. Development lending criteria includes maximum loan to gross development value and maximum loan to cost, with funding typically only released against completed work, as confirmed by the Group’s monitoring quantity surveyor
LTV – UK Direct Real EstateLTV – UK Direct Real EstateLTV – UK Direct Real Estate
At 31 December 20201
At 31 December 20191
At 31 December 20211,2,3
At 31 December 20201,2,3
Stage 1/2Stage 3TotalStage 1/2Stage 3TotalStage 1/2Stage 3TotalStage 1/2Stage 3Total
£m%£m%£m%£m%
Investment Exposures > £1m
Investment exposuresInvestment exposures
Less than 60%Less than 60%5,942 48 5,990 80.2 6,136 89 6,225 79.2 Less than 60%6,461 52 6,513 83.2 5,942 48 5,990 80.2 
60% to 70%60% to 70%826 7 833 11.2 911 14 925 11.8 60% to 70%617 5 622 8.0 826 833 11.2 
70% to 80%70% to 80%143  143 1.9 117 124 1.6 70% to 80%129 13 142 1.8 143 — 143 1.9 
80% to 100%80% to 100%48 4 52 0.7 138 38 176 2.2 80% to 100%84 2 86 1.1 48 52 0.7 
100% to 120%100% to 120%69 70 139 1.9 26 37 63 0.8 100% to 120%6 102 108 1.4 69 70 139 1.9 
120% to 140%120% to 140% 40 40 0.5 12 16 0.2 120% to 140%4  4 0.1 — 40 40 0.5 
Greater than 140%Greater than 140% 47 47 0.6 18 19 0.2 Greater than 140%12 46 58 0.7 — 47 47 0.6 
Unsecured2
125 97 222 3.0 311 — 311 4.0 
Total Investment >£1m7,153 313 7,466 100.0 7,661 198 7,859 100.0 
Investment <£1m3,238 41 3,279 3,455 88 3,543 
Total Investment10,391 354 10,745 11,116 286 11,402 
Unsecured4
Unsecured4
288  288 3.7 125 97 222 3.0 
SubtotalSubtotal7,601 220 7,821 100.0 7,153 313 7,466 100.0 
Other5
Other5
1,460 27 1,487 2,809 39 2,848 
Total investmentTotal investment9,061 247 9,308 9,962 352 10,314 
DevelopmentDevelopment1,620 27 1,647 1,805 58 1,863 Development1,233 17 1,250 1,620 27 1,647 
UK Government Supported Lending6
UK Government Supported Lending6
362 5 367 429 431 
TotalTotal12,011 381 12,392 12,921 344 13,265 Total10,656 269 10,925 12,011 381 12,392 
1Excludes Commercial Banking UK Direct Real Estate exposures subject to protection through Significant Risk Transfer transactions.
2Excludes £0.7 billion in Business Banking, within the Retail division (31 December 2020: £1.0 billion).
3Increased LTV granularity provided for 2021 Investment exposures; for 2020 LTV breakdown only provided for Investment exposures >£1 million.
4Predominantly Investment grade corporate CRE lending where Lloyds Bankthe Group is relying on the corporate covenant.

5
Mainly higher volume/lower value exposure within the SME <£1 million real estate portfolio.
6Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) and Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS) lending to real estate clients, where government guarantees are in place at 100 per cent and 80 per cent, respectively.
Commercial Banking forbearance
Commercial Banking forborne loans and advances (audited)
TotalOf which
Stage 3
£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Type of forbearance
Refinancing16 15 
Modification4,271 3,470 
Total4,287 3,485 
At 31 December 2019
Type of forbearance
Refinancing70 41 
Modification3,809 2,926 
Total3,879 2,967 
Commercial Banking lending in key coronavirus-impacted sectors1
DrawnUndrawnDrawn and undrawnDrawn as a
% of Group
loans and
advances
£bn£bn£bn%
At 31 December 2020
Automotive dealerships2
1.7 2.1 3.8 0.4 
Retail non-food2.2 1.5 3.7 0.5 
Oil and gas1.1 2.5 3.6 0.2 
Construction1.2 1.6 2.8 0.3 
Passenger transport1.1 1.1 2.2 0.2 
Hotels1.9 0.3 2.2 0.4 
Leisure0.7 0.7 1.4 0.1 
Restaurants and bars0.7 0.3 1.0 0.1 
Total10.6 10.1 20.7 2.2 
1Lending classified using ONS SIC codes at legal entity level.
2Automotive dealerships includes Black Horse Motor Wholesale lending (within Retail Division).
Commercial Banking forborne loans and advances (audited)
TotalOf which
Stage 3
£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Type of forbearance
Refinancing14 11 
Modification3,624 2,851 
Total3,638 2,862 
At 31 December 2020
Type of forbearance
Refinancing16 15 
Modification4,271 3,470 
Total4,287 3,485 
5063

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
LOAN PORTFOLIO
SUMMARY OF LOAN LOSS EXPERIENCE
202020192018202120202019
IFRSIFRS£m£mIFRS£m£m
Gross lending to banks and customersGross lending to banks and customers491,796 482,485 470,757 Gross lending to banks and customers488,819 491,796 482,485 
Allowance for impairment losses in relation to loans and advances to banks and customers5,705 3,163 3,021 
Allowance for impairment losses in relation to lending to banks and customersAllowance for impairment losses in relation to lending to banks and customers3,804 5,705 3,163 
Ratio of allowance for credit losses to total loans (%)Ratio of allowance for credit losses to total loans (%)1.2 0.7 0.6 Ratio of allowance for credit losses to total loans (%)0.8 1.2 0.7 
202020192018202120202019
IFRSIFRS£m£mIFRS£m£m
Advances written off, net of recoveriesAdvances written off, net of recoveriesAdvances written off, net of recoveries
Loans and advances to banks — — 
Loans and advances to customers:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:
MortgagesMortgages(71)(38)Mortgages(55)(71)(38)
Other personal lendingOther personal lending(849)(768)(655)Other personal lending(626)(849)(768)
Property companies and constructionProperty companies and construction(65)(362)(135)Property companies and construction(124)(65)(362)
Financial, business and other servicesFinancial, business and other services(39)(146)(202)Financial, business and other services(41)(39)(146)
Transport, distribution and hotelsTransport, distribution and hotels(52)(49)(33)Transport, distribution and hotels(32)(52)(49)
ManufacturingManufacturing(6)(1)(1)Manufacturing(2)(6)(1)
OtherOther(197)(93)22 Other(55)(197)(93)
Total net advances written offTotal net advances written off(1,279)(1,457)(997)Total net advances written off(935)(1,279)(1,457)
Net write-offs during the year represented 0.30.2 per cent of average lending (2019:(2020: 0.3 per cent; 2018: 0.22019: 0.3 per cent); for mortgages, net write-offs in the year represented less than 0.030.02 per cent of average lending (2019: less than(2020: 0.02 per cent; 2019: 0.01 per cent).
Allowance for expected credit lossesAs a percentage of closing lendingAllowance for expected credit lossesAs a percentage of closing lending
202020192018202020192018202120202019202120202019
IFRSIFRS£m£m%IFRS£m£m%
Loans and advances to banks4 — 0.1 — — 
Loans and advances to customers:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements —  0.1 — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:
MortgagesMortgages1,075 611 509 0.4 0.2 0.2 Mortgages1,099 1,075 611 0.3 0.4 0.2 
Other personal lendingOther personal lending1,649 931 822 6.5 3.2 2.9 Other personal lending967 1,649 931 3.9 6.5 3.2 
Property companies and constructionProperty companies and construction825 443 765 2.7 1.4 2.4 Property companies and construction352 825 443 1.3 2.7 1.4 
Financial, business and other servicesFinancial, business and other services440 191 391 0.6 0.3 0.6 Financial, business and other services144 440 191 0.2 0.6 0.3 
Transport, distribution and hotelsTransport, distribution and hotels917 502 161 6.4 4.0 1.2 Transport, distribution and hotels798 917 502 6.0 6.4 4.0 
ManufacturingManufacturing111 58 65 2.5 1.2 1.0 Manufacturing53 111 58 1.5 2.5 1.2 
OtherOther684 427 307 2.4 1.5 1.1 Other391 684 427 1.4 2.4 1.5 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December5,705 3,163 3,021 1.2 0.7 0.6 At 31 December3,804 5,705 3,163 0.8 1.2 0.7 
5164

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY RISK
DEFINITION
Funding risk is defined as the risk that Lloyds Bankthe Group does not have sufficiently stable and diverse sources of funding or the funding structure is inefficient. Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that Lloyds Bankthe Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost.
EXPOSURE
Liquidity exposure represents the potential stressed outflows in any future period less expected inflows. Lloyds BankThe Group considers liquidity exposure from both an internal and a regulatory perspective.
MEASUREMENT
Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturities with behavioural overlays as appropriate. Lloyds BankThe Group undertakes quantitative and qualitative analysis of the behavioural aspects of its assets and liabilities in order to reflect their expected behaviour.
MITIGATION
Lloyds BankThe Group manages and monitors liquidity risks and ensures that liquidity risk management systems and arrangements are adequate with regard to the internal risk appetite, Group strategy and regulatory requirements. Liquidity policies and procedures are subject to independent internal oversight by Risk. Overseas branches and subsidiaries of Lloyds Bankthe Group may also be required to meet the liquidity requirements of the entity’s domestic country. Management of liquidity requirements is performed by the overseas branch or subsidiary in line with Lloyds Banking Group policy. Lloyds BankThe Group plans funding requirements over its planning period, combining business as usual and stressed conditions. Lloyds BankThe Group manages its liquidity position both with regard to its internal risk appetite and the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) as required by the PRA, andthe Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV) and the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) liquidity requirements.
Lloyds BankThe Group’s funding and liquidity position is underpinned by its significant customer deposit base, and is supported by strong relationships across customer segments. Lloyds BankThe Group has consistently observed that in aggregate the retail deposit base provides a stable source of funding. Funding concentration by counterparty, currency and tenor is monitored on an ongoing basis and where concentrations do exist, these are managed as part of the planning process and limited by the internal funding and liquidity risk monitoring framework, with analysis regularly provided to senior management.
To assist in managing the balance sheet, Lloyds Bankthe Group operates a Liquidity Transfer Pricing (LTP) process which: allocates relevant interest expenses from the centre to Lloyds Bankthe Group’s banking businesses within the internal management accounts; helps drive the correct inputs to customer pricing; and is consistent with regulatory requirements. LTP makes extensive use of behavioural maturity profiles, taking account of expected customer loan prepayments and stability of customer deposits, modelled on historic data.
Lloyds BankThe Group can monetise liquid assets quickly, either through the repurchase agreements (repo) market or through outright sale. In addition, Lloyds Bankthe Group has pre-positioned a substantial amount of assets at the Bank of England’s Discount Window Facility which can be used to access additional liquidity in a time of stress. Lloyds BankThe Group considers diversification across geography, currency, markets and tenor when assessing appropriate holdings of liquid assets. Lloyds BankThe Group’s liquid asset buffer is available for deployment at immediate notice, subject to complying with regulatory requirements.
MONITORING
Daily monitoring and control processes are in place to address internal and regulatory liquidity requirements. Lloyds BankThe Group monitors a range of market and internal early warning indicators on a daily basis for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to Lloyds Bankthe Group. This captures regulatory metrics as well as metrics Lloyds Bankthe Group considers relevant for its liquidity profile. These are a mixture of quantitative and qualitative measures, including: daily variation of customer balances; changes in maturity profiles; funding concentrations; changes in LCR outflows; credit default swap (CDS) spreads; and basis risks.
Lloyds BankThe Group carries out internal stress testing of its liquidity and potential cash flow mismatch position over both short (up to one month) and longer-term horizons against a range of scenarios forming an important part of the internal risk appetite. The scenarios and assumptions are reviewed at least annually to ensure that they continue to be relevant to the nature of the business, including reflecting emerging horizon risks to Lloyds Bankthe Group. For further information on Lloyds Bankthe Group’s 20202021 liquidity stress testing results refer to page 55.68.
Lloyds BankThe Group maintains a Contingency Funding Framework as part of the wider Recovery Plan which is designed to identify emerging liquidity concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken to avoid a more serious crisis developing. Contingency Funding Plan invocation and escalation processes are based on analysis of five major quantitative and qualitative components, comprising assessment of: early warning indicators; prudential and regulatory liquidity risk limits and triggers; stress testing results; event and systemic indicators; and market intelligence.
Funding and Liquidity Managementliquidity management in 20202021
Lloyds Bank Group’sThe Group has maintained its robust funding and liquidity position remainswith the loan to deposit ratio remaining stable at 96 per cent as at 31 December 2021 and customer deposit growth remaining strong andover the course of the year. Ahead of the closure of the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME) in excess ofOctober 2021, the Group drew additional funds taking the total amount outstanding to £30 billion as at 31 December 2021.
The Group's liquid assets continue to exceed the regulatory minimum and internal risk appetite, with a LCRliquidity coverage ratio (LCR) of 126 per cent (based on a monthly rolling average over the previous 12 months) as at 31 December 2020 based on2021.
The Group saw limited term funding needs over the EU Delegated Act.course of 2021 given the availability of customer deposits and TFSME, both of which are more cost effective sources of funding for the Group. Overall, wholesale funding totalled £63.2 billion as at 31 December 2021.
During 2020, Lloyds Bank Group repaid all outstanding amounts of its Term Funding Scheme (TFS) drawings of £15.4 billion and the remaining £1 billion outstanding of its Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) drawings. The Group has drawn £13.7 billion from the Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME).
The strongcredit ratings of the Bank and its rated subsidiaries continue to reflect the resilience of Lloyds Bank Group'sthe bank's business model and the strength of the balance sheet. In October, Moody's downgraded Lloyds Bank plc from Aa3/Negative to A1/Stable due to the removal of the uplift for Government support. This impacted a number of other UK peers and was triggered by the downgrade of the UK sovereign rating a few days earlier given the agency's concerns around the pandemic and the UK's exit from the European Union, but did not impact the standalone rating of the Bank. Over the year bothcourse of June and July, Moody’s, S&P and Fitch have affirmedall returned the outlook on Lloyds Bank’s credit ratings to Stable, from Negative. This reflected better underlying economic expectations for the UK and the belief that Lloyds Bank Group's ratings albeit with negative outlooksis well positioned to reflectbenefit from the macroeconomic recovery. In July, Moody’s finalised and updated their concerns overmethodology which resulted in a one notch upgrade to the UK economy.Subordinated issuances of Lloyds Bank.
5265

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Lloyds Bank Group funding position
At 31 DecAt 31 Dec
20202019
£bn£bn
Funding requirement
Loans and advances to customers1
425.6 422.8 
Other funded assets2
15.8 18.2 
Funded assets441.4 441.0 
Other assets3
44.3 28.9 
485.7 469.9 
On balance sheet LCR eligible liquid assets
Cash and balances at central banks43.6 33.3 
Debt securities at amortised cost2.1 2.4 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income26.9 24.2 
Other LCR eligible liquid assets4
41.6 51.6 
114.2 111.5 
Total Lloyds Bank Group assets599.9 581.4 
Less: other liabilities3
(35.9)(36.5)
Funding requirement564.0 544.9 
Funded by
Customer deposits5
425.2 387.3 
Wholesale funding6
79.6 100.3 
Term funding scheme7
13.7 15.4 
Deposits from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings4.4 3.0 
522.9 506.0 
Total equity41.1 38.9 
Total funding564.0 544.9 
Lloyds Bank Group funding position
At 31 DecAt 31 Dec
20212020
£bn£bn
Lloyds Bank Group Funding position
Loans and advances to customers430.8 425.6 
Loans and advances to banks4.5 4.3 
Debt securities at amortised cost4.6 5.1 
Reverse repurchase agreements – non-trading49.7 56.1 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27.8 27.3 
Cash and balances at central banks54.3 49.9 
Other assets1
31.1 31.6 
Total Lloyds Bank Group assets602.8 599.9 
Less other liabilities1
(18.2)(21.4)
Funding requirements584.6 578.5 
Customer deposits449.4 425.2 
Wholesale funding2
63.2 79.6 
Repurchase agreements – non-trading0.1 14.5 
Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME)30.0 13.7 
Deposits from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1.1 4.4 
543.8 537.4 
Total equity40.8 41.1 
Funding sources584.6 578.5 
1Excludes reverse repurchase agreements.
2Includes non-LCR eligible cash at central banks and financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income.
3Other assets and other liabilities primarily include the fair value of derivative assets and liabilities as well as non-LCR eligible repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements.liabilities.
42Other LCR-eligible assets includes LCR-eligible repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements.
5Excludes repurchase agreements.
6Lloyds Bank Group’sThe Group's definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including bank deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities. 31 December 2019 has been restated to excludeExcludes margins.
7Includes the Bank of England's Term Funding Scheme (TFS) and Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME).
Reconciliation of Lloyds Bank Group funding to the balance sheet (audited)
Included in
funding
analysis
£bn
Repos
and cash
collateral
£bn
Items due to
fellow Lloyds
Banking Group
undertakings
£bn
Fair value
and other
accounting methods
£bn
Balance
sheet
£bn
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks3.9 18.8  2.3 25.0 
Debt securities in issue66.4  (16.1)9.0 59.3 
Subordinated liabilities9.3   (0.1)9.2 
Total wholesale funding79.6 18.8 (16.1)
Customer deposits425.2 9.4   434.6 
Total504.8 28.2 (16.1)
At 31 December 20191
Deposits from banks4.3 19.6 — (0.3)23.6 
Debt securities in issue83.6 — (13.4)6.2 76.4 
Subordinated liabilities12.4 — — 0.2 12.6 
Total wholesale funding100.3 19.6 (13.4)
Customer deposits387.3 9.5 — — 396.8 
Total487.6 29.1 (13.4)
12019 restated to exclude margins.
Reconciliation of Lloyds Bank Group funding to the balance sheet (audited)
Included
in funding
analysis
Cash collateral receivedFair value
and other
accounting methods
Balance
sheet
£bn£bn£bn£bn
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks1.9 1.4 0.1 3.4 
Debt securities in issue52.4  (3.7)48.7 
Subordinated liabilities8.9  (0.2)8.7 
Total wholesale funding63.2 1.4 
Customer deposits449.4   449.4 
Total512.6 1.4 
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks3.9 1.8 0.5 6.2 
Debt securities in issue66.4 — (7.1)59.3 
Subordinated liabilities9.3 — (0.1)9.2 
Total wholesale funding79.6 1.8 
Customer deposits425.2 — — 425.2 
Total504.8 1.8 
5366

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Analysis of 2020 total wholesale funding by residual maturity
Analysis of 2021 total wholesale funding by residual maturityAnalysis of 2021 total wholesale funding by residual maturity
Less
than one
month
£bn
One
to three
months
£bn
Three
to six
months
£bn
Six
to nine
months
£bn
Nine
months to
one year
£bn
One to
two years
£bn
Two to
five years
£bn
More than
five years
£bn
Total at
31 Dec
2020
£bn
Total at
31 Dec
2019
£bn
Less
than one
month
One to
three
months
Three
to six
months
Six
to nine
months
Nine
months
to one
year
One to
two years
Two to
five years
More than
five years
Total at
31 Dec
2021
Total at
31 Dec
2020
Deposit from banks2.9 1.0       3.9 4.3 
£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn£bn
Deposits from banksDeposits from banks1.8 0.1       1.9 3.9 
Debt securities in issue:Debt securities in issue:Debt securities in issue:
Certificates of depositCertificates of deposit0.6 2.5 0.5      3.6 4.9 Certificates of deposit0.2 0.1       0.3 3.6 
Commercial paperCommercial paper1.1 2.1 2.4      5.6 7.9 Commercial paper1.7 1.8 0.1      3.6 5.6 
Medium-term notesMedium-term notes0.9 0.9 2.0 0.9 1.1 5.4 12.2 7.8 31.2 36.2 Medium-term notes0.1 1.2 0.9 1.5 1.7 5.7 12.2 6.1 29.4 31.2 
Covered bondsCovered bonds2.3  0.8 2.0 0.5 4.3 8.4 4.8 23.1 28.8 Covered bonds0.6 0.4 1.0 1.6 0.5 3.4 5.7 3.8 17.0 23.1 
SecuritisationSecuritisation0.2  0.2 0.6 0.5 0.9 0.5  2.9 5.8 Securitisation  0.2 0.6 0.2 0.5 0.1 0.5 2.1 2.9 
5.1 5.5 5.9 3.5 2.1 10.6 21.1 12.6 66.4 83.6 2.6 3.5 2.2 3.7 2.4 9.6 18.0 10.4 52.4 66.4 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities  0.5 1.1 1.6 1.4 1.7 3.0 9.3 12.4 Subordinated liabilities 1.6    0.2 1.9 5.2 8.9 9.3 
Total wholesale funding1
Total wholesale funding1
8.0 6.5 6.4 4.6 3.7 12.0 22.8 15.6 79.6 100.3 
Total wholesale funding1
4.4 5.2 2.2 3.7 2.4 9.8 19.9 15.6 63.2 79.6 
1The Group’s definition of wholesale funding aligns with that used by other international market participants; including bank deposits, debt securities and subordinated liabilities. Excludes balances relating to margins of £1.8£1.3 billion (31 December 2019: £1.62020: £1.8 billion). 2019 restated to exclude margins.
Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)Total wholesale funding by currency (audited)
Sterling
£bn
US Dollar
£bn
Euro
£bn
Other
currencies
£bn
Total
£bn
Sterling
£bn
US Dollar
£bn
Euro
£bn
Other
currencies
£bn
Total
£bn
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 202116.7 23.6 17.0 5.9 63.2 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 202021.5 28.0 23.6 6.5 79.6 At 31 December 202021.5 28.0 23.6 6.5 79.6 
At 31 December 20191
24.5 35.1 32.3 8.4 100.3 
12019 restated to exclude margins.
Analysis of 2020 term issuance (audited)
Analysis of 2021 term issuance (audited)Analysis of 2021 term issuance (audited)
Sterling
£bn
US Dollar
£bn
Euro
£bn
Other
currencies
£bn
Total
£bn
SterlingUS DollarEuroOther
currencies
Total
£bn
Medium-term notesMedium-term notes 4.2   4.2 Medium-term notes1.1 2.6 1.6  5.3 
Covered bondsCovered bonds1.0    1.0 Covered bonds     
Private placements1
Private placements1
 0.1   0.1 
Private placements1
     
Subordinated liabilities2
Subordinated liabilities2
1.3 0.4 1.0  2.7 
Subordinated liabilities2
1.6 3.3   4.9 
Total issuanceTotal issuance2.3 4.7 1.0  8.0 Total issuance2.7 5.9 1.6  10.2 
1Private placements include structured bonds.
2Subordinated liabilities include AT1s.

5467

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Liquidity Portfolioportfolio
At 31 December 2020,2021, the banking business had £113.4£114.7 billion of highly liquid unencumbered LCR eligible assets, based on a monthly rolling average over the previous 12 months post any liquidity haircuts (31 December 2019: £112.22020: £113.4 billion), of which £112.0£113.2 billion is LCR level 1 eligible (31 December 2019: £111.02020: £112.0 billion) and £1.4£1.5 billion is LCR level 2 eligible (31 December 2019: £1.22020: £1.4 billion). These assets are available to meet cash and collateral outflows and regulatory requirements.
LCR eligible assetsLCR eligible assetsLCR eligible assets
AverageAverageAverageAverage
20201
20191
20211
20201
£bn£bn£bn£bn
Level 1Level 1Level 1
Cash and central bank reservesCash and central bank reserves46.5 37.8 Cash and central bank reserves50.3 46.5 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds2
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds2
62.6 71.4 
High quality government/MDB/agency bonds2
60.6 62.6 
High quality covered bondsHigh quality covered bonds2.9 1.8 High quality covered bonds2.3 2.9 
TotalTotal112.0 111.0 Total113.2 112.0 
Level 23
Level 23
1.4 1.2 
Level 23
1.5 1.4 
Total LCR eligible assetsTotal LCR eligible assets113.4 112.2 Total LCR eligible assets114.7 113.4 
1Based on 12 months rolling average to 31 December. Eligible assets are calculated as an average of month-end observations over the previous 12 months post any liquidity haircut. 2019 assets have been restated accordingly.haircuts.
2Designated multilateral development bank (MDB).
3Includes Level 2A and Level 2B.
LCR eligible assets by currencyLCR eligible assets by currencyLCR eligible assets by currency
Sterling
£bn
US Dollar
£bn
Euro
£bn
Other
currencies
£bn
Total
£bn
Sterling
£bn
US Dollar
£bn
Euro
£bn
Other
currencies
£bn
Total
£bn
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Level 1Level 192.4 7.9 12.9  113.2 
Level 2Level 20.7 0.4  0.4 1.5 
Total1
Total1
93.1 8.3 12.9 0.4 114.7 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Level 1Level 194.4 7.3 10.3  112.0 Level 194.4 7.3 10.3 — 112.0 
Level 2Level 20.9 0.3 0.2  1.4 Level 20.9 0.3 0.2 — 1.4 
Total1
Total1
95.3 7.6 10.5  113.4 
Total1
95.3 7.6 10.5 — 113.4 
At 31 December 2019
Level 192.2 9.2 9.6 — 111.0 
Level 20.7 0.5 — — 1.2 
Total1
92.9 9.7 9.6 — 112.2 
1Based on 12 months rolling average to 31 December. Eligible assets are calculated as an average of month-end observations over the previous 12 months post any liquidity haircut. 2019 assets have been restated accordinglyhaircuts.
The banking business also has a significant amount of non-LCR eligible liquid assets which are eligible for use in a range of central bank or similar facilities, including the Bank of England's Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME).facilities. Future use of such facilities will be based on prudent liquidity management and economic considerations, having regard for external market conditions.
Stress testing results
Internal liquidity stress testing results at 31 December 20202021 (calculated as an average of month end observations over the previous 12 months) showed that Lloyds Bank Groupthe banking business had liquidity resources representing 129131 per cent of modelled outflows over a three month period from all wholesale funding sources, retail and corporate deposits, intraday requirements and rating dependent contracts under Lloyds Bankthe Group’s most severe liquidity stress scenario.
This scenario includes a two notch downgrade of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s current long-term debt rating and accompanying one notch short-term downgrade implemented instantaneously by all major rating agencies.
5568

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CAPITAL RISK
DEFINITION
Capital risk is defined as the risk that Lloyds Bankthe Group has a sub-optimal quantity or quality of capital or that capital is inefficiently deployed across Lloyds Bankthe Group.
EXPOSURES
A capital risk exposureevent arises when Lloyds Bankthe Group has insufficient capital resources to support its strategic objectives and plans, and to meet both regulatory and external stakeholder requirements and expectations. This could arise due to a depletion of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital resources as a result of the crystallisation of any of the risks to which it is exposed, or through a significant increase in risk-weighted assets as a result of rule changes or economic deterioration. Alternatively a shortage of capital could arise from an increase in the minimum requirements for capital, leverage or MREL either at Lloyds Bank Group level or regulated entity level. The Lloyds Bank GroupGroup's capital management approach is focused on maintaining sufficient and appropriate capital resources across all regulated levels of its structure in order to prevent such exposures.
MEASUREMENT
In accordance with UK ring-fencing legislation, Lloyds Bankthe Group has beenwas appointed as the Ring-Fenced Bank sub-group (‘RFB sub-group’) under Lloyds Banking Group plc. As a result Lloyds Bankthe Group is subject to separate supervision by the UK Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) on a sub-consolidated basis (as the RFB sub-group) in addition to the existing supervision applied to Lloyds Bank plc on an individual basis.
Lloyds BankThe Group maintains capital levels on a consolidated and individual basis commensurate with a prudent level of solvency to achieve financial resilience and market confidence. To support this, capital risk appetite on both a consolidated and individual basis is calibrated by taking into consideration both an internal view of the amount of capital to hold as well as external regulatory requirements.
Lloyds BankUnder UK law, EU capital rules that existed on 31 December 2020 continue to apply to the Group measuresfollowing the end of the transition period for the UK’s withdrawal from the European Union, subject to the temporary transitional powers (TTP) granted to the PRA which extend until 31 March 2022. The Group continues to therefore measure both its capital requirements and the amount of capital resources it holds to meet those requirements through applying the regulatory framework defined by the Capital Requirements Directive and Regulation (CRD IV), as amended by revisions to the Capital Requirements Directive implemented in December 2020 (CRD V) and by those provisions of the revised Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR II) that came into force in June 2019 and December 2020. The requirements are implemented in the UK by the PRA and supplemented through additional regulation under the PRA Rulebook.
During 2020 regulators undertook a seriesRulebook and associated statements of measures in response to the coronavirus pandemic. This included supportive revisions made to the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements for capital, which Lloyds Bank Group applies in full. Over the short to medium-term, these arrangements will provide some stability in capital requirements against the increased provisioningpolicy, supervisory statements and subsequent volatility connected to the impact of IFRS 9. This is particularly evident from the current application of the arrangements which has seen the significant increase in Stage 1 and Stage 2 expected credit losses during the first half of 2020 partially offset for capital purposes.other guidance.
The UK left the EU on 31 January 2020 but remained subject to changes to EU capital regulation until the end of the transition period on 31 December 2020. Under temporary transitional powers (TTP) granted to the PRA, EU capital rules that existed on 31 December 2020 will continue to generally apply until 31 March 2022. This is subject to revision following any significant changes introduced by UK regulators, including changes which implement the remaining partsprovisions of CRR II that are not yetwill apply in force.the UK from 1 January 2022 and have been largely enacted via the PRA Rulebook.
The minimum amount of total capital, under Pillar 1 of the regulatory capital framework, is set at 8 per cent of total risk-weighted assets. At least 4.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital and at least 6 per cent of risk-weighted assets are required to be covered by tier 1 capital. These minimum Pillar 1 requirements are supplemented by additional minimum requirements under Pillar 2A of the regulatory capital framework, the aggregate of which is referred to as the Group's Total Capital Requirement (TCR), and a number of regulatory buffers as described below.
Under Pillar 2A, additional minimum requirements are set through the issuance of an Individual Capital Requirement (ICR), which adjusts the Pillar 1 minimum requirement for those risks not covered or not fully covered under Pillar 1. A key input into the PRA’s ICR process is Lloyds Bankthe Group’s own assessment of the amount of capital it needs, a process known as the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). During the year the Lloyds Bank GroupPRA reduced the Group’s nominal Pillar 2A capital requirement, reduced from c.4.9 per cent to c.4.0which was the equivalent of around 4.0 per cent of risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2020,2021, of which c.2.3the minimum amount to be met by CET1 capital was the equivalent of around 2.2 per cent must be metof risk-weighted assets. During 2022, the PRA will revert to setting a variable amount for the Group’s Pillar 2A capital requirement (being a set percentage of risk-weighted assets), with CET1 capital.fixed add-ons for certain risk types.
A range of additional regulatory capital buffers apply under the capital rules, which are required to be met with CET1 capital. These include a capital conservation buffer (2.5 per cent of risk-weighted assets) and a time-varying countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB) which is currently around 0 per cent of risk-weighted assets following the decision by UK regulators to reduce the UK countercyclical bufferCCyB rate to nil during the first half of 2020 as part of the series of regulatory measures introduced in response to the coronavirus pandemic. In December 2021 the Bank of England's Financial Policy Committee announced that the UK CCyB rate will increase to 1 per cent in December 2022, with an expectation that it will increase to 2 per cent in Q2 2023 if the economy continues to recover broadly in line with the Bank of England’s central projections and upon the assumption there is no significant change to the financial stability outlook. This would represent an equivalent increase in the Group's CCyB to 0.9 per cent in December 2022 and 1.9 per cent in Q2 2023, based upon the position of the Group at 31 December 2021.
In addition, Lloyds Bankthe Group in its capacity as the RFB sub-group is subject to an other systemically important institution (O-SII) buffer of 2.0 per cent of risk-weighted assets (formerly referred to as the systemic risk buffer) which is designed to hold systemically important banks to higher capital standards so that they can withstand a greater level of stress before requiring resolution. The next review of the RFB sub-group’s O-SII buffer will take place in December 2023, based upon year-end 2022 financial results, with any changes applying from 1 January 2025. The FPC is proposing to amend the O-SII buffer framework in order to change the metric for determining the buffer rate from total assets to the UK leverage exposure measure.
As part of the Group's capital planning process, forecast capital positions are subjected to stress testing to determine the adequacy of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital resources against minimum requirements, including the ICR. The PRA considers outputs from Lloyds Bankthe Group’s stress tests, in conjunction with other information, as part of the process for informing the setting of a capital buffer for Lloyds Bankthe Group, known as the PRA Buffer. The PRA requires this buffer to remain confidential.
All buffers are required to be met by CET1 capital. Usage of the PRA Buffer would trigger a dialogue between Lloyds Bankthe Group and the PRA to agree what action is required whereas a breach of the combined capital buffer (all other regulatory buffers, as referenced above) would give rise to mandatory restrictions upon any discretionary capital distributions. As part of the regulatory response to the coronavirus pandemic theThe PRA has previously communicated its expectation that banks' capital and liquidity buffers can be drawn down as necessary to support the real economy through thea shock and that sufficient time willwould be made available to restore buffers in a gradual manner.
In addition to the risk-based capital framework outlined above, Lloyds Bankthe Group is also subject to minimum capital requirements under the UK Leverage Ratio Framework. The leverage ratio is calculated by dividing fully loaded tier 1 capital resources by the leverage exposure which is a defined measure of on-balance sheet assets and off-balance sheet items.
The minimum leverage ratio requirement under the UK Leverage Ratio Framework is 3.25 per cent. This is supplemented by a time-varying countercyclical leverage buffer (currently(CCLB), which is currently 0 per cent of the leverage exposure measure)measure, and an additional leverage ratio buffer (0.7of 0.7 per cent of the leverage exposure measure)measure which reflects the application of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s O-SII buffer. Following the FPC’s announcements on
5669

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
the planned increase of the UK CCyB rate, the Group’s CCLB would be expected to increase to 0.3 per cent in December 2022 and 0.7 per cent in Q2 2023, based upon the position of the Group at 31 December 2021.
At least 75 per cent of the 3.25 per cent minimum leverage ratio requirement as well as 100 per cent of regulatory leverage buffers must be met by CET1 capital.
The leverage ratio framework does not currently give rise to higher regulatory capital requirements for Lloyds Bankthe Group than the risk-based capital framework.
MITIGATION
The Lloyds Bank GroupGroup's capital management framework is part of a comprehensive capital management framework within Lloyds Banking Group that includes the setting of capital risk appetite and capital planning and stress testing activities. Close monitoring of capital and leverage ratios is undertaken to ensure Lloyds Bankthe Group meets regulatory requirements and risk appetite levels and deploys its capital resources efficiently.
Lloyds BankThe Group monitors early warning indicators and maintains a Capital Contingency Framework as part of the Lloyds Banking Group Recovery Plan which are designed to identify emerging capital concerns at an early stage, so that mitigating actions can be taken, if needed. The Recovery Plan sets out a range of potential mitigating actions that Lloyds Bankthe Group could take in response to a stress, including as part of the wider Lloyds Banking Group response. For example Lloyds Bankthe Group is able to accumulate additional capital through the retention of profits over time, which can be enhanced through reducing or cancelling dividend payments upstreamed to its parent (Lloyds Banking Group plc), by raising new equity via an injection of capital from its parent and by issuing additional tier 1 or tier 2 capital securities to its parent. The cost and availability of additional capital from its parent is dependent upon market conditions and perceptions at the time.
Lloyds BankThe Group is also able to manage the demand for capital through management actions including adjusting its lending strategy, risk hedging strategies and through business disposals.
Capital policies and procedures are well established and subject to independent oversight.
MONITORING
Lloyds BankThe Group’s capital is actively managed and monitoring capital ratios is a key factor in Lloyds Bankthe Group’s planning processes and stress testing. Multi-year base case forecasts of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital position, based upon the Lloyds Bank GroupGroup's operating plan, are produced at least annually to inform the Lloyds Bank Group capital plan whilst shorter term forecasts are undertaken to understand and respond to variations of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s actual performance against the plan. This has been a particular focus recently given the significant uncertainties caused by the coronavirus pandemic. Lloyds BankThe Group’s capital plan is tested for capital adequacy using relevant stress scenarios and sensitivities covering adverse economic conditions as well as other adverse factors that could impact Lloyds Bankthe Group.
Regular monitoring of the capital position for Lloyds Bankthe Group and its key regulated entities is undertaken by a range of committees, including Group Capital Risk Committee (GCRC), Group Financial Risk Committee (GFRC), Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committees (GALCO), Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Risk Committees (GRC), Board Risk Committee (BRC) and the Board. This includes reporting of actual ratios against forecasts and risk appetite, base case and stress scenario projected ratios, and review of early warning indicators and assessment against the Capital Contingency Framework.
The regulatory framework within which Lloyds Bankthe Group operates continues to be developed at a global level through the Financial Stability Board (FSB) and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) and within the UK by the PRA and through directions from the Financial Policy Committee (FPC). Lloyds BankThe Group continues to monitor these developments very closely, analysing the potential capital impacts to ensure that, through organic capital generation and management actions, that Lloyds Bankthe Group continues to maintain a strong capital position that exceeds both minimum regulatory requirements and Lloyds Bankthe Group's risk appetite and is consistent with market expectations.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENT FOR OWN FUNDS AND ELIGIBLE LIABILITIES (MREL)
In 2015, the Financial Stability Board establishedGlobal systemically important banks (G-SIBs) are subject to an international standard for theon total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC) of global systemically important banks (G-SIBs). The standard, which first applied from 1 January 2019, is designed to enhance the resilience of the global financial system by ensuring that failing G-SIBs have sufficient capital to absorb losses and recapitalise under resolution, whilst continuing to provide critical banking services. The minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) framework reflects the European implementation of the global TLAC standard.
In the UK, the Bank of England has implemented MRELthe requirements of the international TLAC standard through the Banking Actestablishment of a framework which sets out minimum requirements for own funds and a statement of policy on MREL (the MREL SoP)eligible liabilities (MREL). The purpose of MREL is to require firms to maintain sufficient own funds and eligible liabilities that are capable of credibly bearing losses or recapitalising a bank whilst in resolution. MREL can be satisfied by a combination of regulatory capital and certain unsecured liabilities (which must be subordinate to a firm’s operating liabilities).
The Bank of England's MREL SoPstatement of policy (MREL SoP) sets out the Bank of England’sits approach to setting external MREL and the distribution of MREL resources internally within groups. Internal MREL resources are intended to enable a material subsidiary to be recapitalised as part of a group resolution strategy without the need for the Bank of England to apply its resolution powers directly to the subsidiary itself.
Lloyds BankThe Group’s parent, Lloyds Banking Group plc, is subject to the Bank of England’s MREL SoP and must therefore maintain a minimum level of external MREL resources. Lloyds Banking Group plc operates a single point of entry (SPE) resolution strategy, with Lloyds Banking Group plc as the designated resolution entity. Under this strategy, Lloyds Bankthe Group has been identified as a material subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc and must therefore maintain a minimum level of internal MREL resources. As at 31 December 2020, Lloyds Bank2021, the Group's internal MREL resources exceeded the interim minimum required.
The Bank of England has commencedcompleted a review of the current MREL framework and expects to consult on proposed changes during the year with a viewits existing approach to setting final end-state requirements forMREL in December 2021 and has published a revised approach which became effective and binding on the Group from 1 January 2022. There has been no change to the basis for determining the Group’s internal MREL.

70

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
ANALYSIS OF CAPITAL POSITION
Lloyds BankThe Group’s common equity tier 1 (CET1) capital ratio has increased to 16.7 per cent (31 December 2020: 15.5 per cent from 14.3 per cent at 31 December 2019cent) largely reflecting profits for the year with the impactand a reduction in risk-weighted assets, partially offset by dividends paid (net of the impairment charge partially mitigated throughbrought forward foreseeable dividend accrual), pension contributions made to the increase indefined benefit pension schemes and a release of IFRS 9 transitional relief for capital. The introduction of the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets also resulted in a significant reduction in intangible assets deducted from capital. In addition, risk-weighted assets reduced and excess expected losses reduced to nil as they absorbed part of the increase in IFRS 9 expected credit losses. The resultant increases in capital were offset in part by pension contributions made during the year, an increase in deferred tax assets deducted from capital and the accrual for foreseeable dividends.
The tier 1 capital ratio increased to 19.8 per cent from 18.3 per cent at 31 December 2019, primarily reflecting the increase in common equity tier 1 capital and new AT1 issuances, offset in part by the annual reduction in the transitional limit applied to grandfathered AT1 capital.
The total capital ratio increased to 23.5 per cent from 22.1 per cent at 31 December 2019, which largely reflectedoffset the increase in tier 1 capital.
57

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
impairment credit through profits.
Risk-weighted assets reduced by £1,078£9,286 million, or 15 per cent, tofrom £170,862 million at 31 December 2020 compared to £171,940£161,576 million at 31 December 2019. Increases reflecting the impact2021. This was primarily as a result of credit migrations, model calibrations and updates, the full implementation of the new securitisation framework and the introduction of the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets were more than offset by reductions in lending balances outside Government-backed schemes, optimisation activity undertaken in Commercial Banking, partially offset by balance sheet growth in the business. Credit migrations have had a limited impact on the risk-weighted asset position, in part due to the increase in house prices.
The Group continues to apply the revised IFRS 9 transitional arrangements for capital which provide for temporary capital relief for the increase in accounting impairment provisions following the initial implementation of IFRS 9 (‘static’ relief) and subsequent relief for any increases in Stage 1 and Stage 2 expected credit losses since 1 January 2020 (‘dynamic’ relief). The transitional arrangements do not cover Stage 3 expected credit losses.
On 1 January 2022, the CET1 capital ratio reduced by around 250 basis points to 14.1 per cent, reflecting the following:
An increase in risk-weighted assets to £178 billion, in addition to other related modelled impacts on CET1 capital, following the implementation of new CRD IV mortgage, retail unsecured and commercial banking models to meet revised regulatory standards for modelled outputs and the UK implementation of the remainder of CRR II which includes a new standardised approach for measuring counterparty credit risk. These were partially offset by the removal of risk-weighted assets linked to the reversal of the revised treatment that had previously been applied to intangible software assets. The new CRD IV models are subject to finalisation and approval by the PRA and therefore uncertainty over the final impacts remains
An increase in intangible software assets deducted from CET1 capital following the reversal of the revised treatment
A reduction in IFRS 9 relief reflecting both phasing under the transitional arrangements and the impact of the revised SME supporting factor. In addition operationalnew CRD IV models
The transitional total capital ratio remained at 23.5 per cent, with the benefit of the increase in CET1 capital and reduction in risk-weighted assets have reduced.broadly offset by reductions in Additional Tier 1 (AT1) and Tier 2 capital instruments. The latter largely reflected the reduction in transitional limits applied to legacy tier 1 and tier 2 capital instruments and calls made on both AT1 and tier 2 capital instruments, partially offset by new issuances.
The PRA is consulting onUK leverage ratio reduced to 5.3 per cent from 5.5 percent at 31 December 2020, as a proposal to reverse the revised capital treatment of intangible software assets (which currently follows EU capital regulations), thereby reinstating the original requirement to deduct in full. Excluding the impactresult of the revised capital treatment Lloyds Bank Group's common equityreduction in the fully loaded total tier 1 capital ratio would be 15.0 per cent.position which was partially offset by the reduction in the leverage exposure measure, the latter primarily reflecting movements in securities financing transactions and off-balance sheet items, net of increased balance sheet lending.
TOTAL CAPITAL REQUIREMENT
Lloyds BankThe Group’s total capital requirement (TCR) as at 31 December 2020,2021, being the aggregate of itsthe Group's Pillar 1 and current Pillar 2A capital requirements, was £20,567£19,364 million (31 December 2019: £22,1772020: £20,567 million).

5871

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CAPITAL RESOURCES
An analysis of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital position as at 31 December 20202021 is presented in the following section on both a transitional arrangements basis and a fully loaded basis in respect of legacy capital securities that were subject to current grandfathering provisions.provisions prior to 1 January 2022. In addition Lloyds Bankthe Group’s capital position under both bases reflects the application of the separate transitional arrangements for IFRS 9.

Capital resources (audited)
The table below summarises the consolidated capital position of Lloyds Bankthe Group. Lloyds BankThe Group’s Pillar 3 Reportdisclosures will provide a comprehensive analysis of the own funds of the Group.
TransitionalFully loadedTransitionalFully loaded
At 31 Dec 2020At 31 Dec 2019At 31 Dec 2020At 31 Dec 2019At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020At 31 Dec 2021At 31 Dec 2020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Common equity tier 1Common equity tier 1Common equity tier 1
Shareholders’ equity per balance sheetShareholders’ equity per balance sheet35,10533,97335,10533,973Shareholders’ equity per balance sheet36,410 35,105 36,410 35,105 
Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividendsAdjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends(1,000)(1,000)Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends (1,000) (1,000)
Adjustment for own creditAdjustment for own credit81268126Adjustment for own credit133 81 133 81 
Cash flow hedging reserveCash flow hedging reserve(1,507)(1,556)(1,507)(1,556)Cash flow hedging reserve451 (1,507)451 (1,507)
Other adjustments1
Other adjustments1
1,8943971,894397
Other adjustments1
637 1,894 637 1,894 
34,57332,84034,57332,84037,631 34,573 37,631 34,573 
less: deductions from common equity tier 1less: deductions from common equity tier 1less: deductions from common equity tier 1
Goodwill and other intangible assetsGoodwill and other intangible assets(2,986)(4,050)(2,986)(4,050)Goodwill and other intangible assets(2,870)(2,986)(2,870)(2,986)
Prudent valuation adjustmentPrudent valuation adjustment(173)(220)(173)(220)Prudent valuation adjustment(159)(173)(159)(173)
Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustmentsExcess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments(195)(195)Excess of expected losses over impairment provisions and value adjustments —  — 
Removal of defined benefit pension surplusRemoval of defined benefit pension surplus(1,322)(531)(1,322)(531)Removal of defined benefit pension surplus(3,200)(1,322)(3,200)(1,322)
Deferred tax assetsDeferred tax assets(3,525)(3,207)(3,525)(3,207)Deferred tax assets(4,498)(3,525)(4,498)(3,525)
Common equity tier 1 capitalCommon equity tier 1 capital26,56724,63726,56724,637Common equity tier 1 capital26,904 26,567 26,904 26,567 
Additional tier 1Additional tier 1Additional tier 1
Additional tier 1 instrumentsAdditional tier 1 instruments7,2956,9055,9354,865Additional tier 1 instruments4,949 7,295 4,268 5,935 
Total tier 1 capitalTotal tier 1 capital33,86231,54232,50229,502Total tier 1 capital31,853 33,862 31,172 32,502 
Tier 2Tier 2Tier 2
Tier 2 instrumentsTier 2 instruments6,8256,9145,4544,620Tier 2 instruments6,322 6,825 5,635 5,454 
Other adjustmentsOther adjustments(524)(480)(524)(480)Other adjustments(266)(524)(266)(524)
Total tier 2 capitalTotal tier 2 capital6,3016,4344,9304,140Total tier 2 capital6,056 6,301 5,369 4,930 
Total capital resourcesTotal capital resources40,16337,97637,43233,642Total capital resources37,909 40,163 36,541 37,432 
Risk-weighted assets (unaudited)Risk-weighted assets (unaudited)170,862171,940170,862171,940Risk-weighted assets (unaudited)161,576 170,862 161,576 170,862 
Common equity tier 1 capital ratioCommon equity tier 1 capital ratio15.5 %14.3 %15.5 %14.3 %Common equity tier 1 capital ratio16.7%15.5%16.7%15.5%
Tier 1 capital ratioTier 1 capital ratio19.8 %18.3 %19.0 %17.2 %Tier 1 capital ratio19.7%19.8%19.3%19.0%
Total capital ratioTotal capital ratio23.5 %22.1 %21.9 %19.6 %Total capital ratio23.5%23.5%22.6%21.9%
1Includes an adjustment applied to reserves to reflect the application of the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements for capital.
Risk-weighted assets
At 31 Dec
2020
At 31 Dec
2019
£m£m
Foundation Internal Ratings Based (IRB) Approach43,781 46,500 
Retail IRB Approach65,207 63,192 
Other IRB Approach11,916 11,722 
IRB Approach120,904 121,414 
Standardised (STA) Approach21,673 22,074 
Credit risk142,577 143,488 
Counterparty credit risk2,133 1,830 
Credit valuation adjustment risk355 271 
Operational risk23,307 24,413 
Market risk210 171 
Underlying risk-weighted assets168,582 170,173 
Threshold risk-weighted assets1
2,280 1,767 
Total risk-weighted assets170,862 171,940 
















72

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Movements in capital resources
The key difference between the transitional capital calculation as at 31 December 2021 and the fully loaded equivalent is primarily related to legacy capital securities that previously qualified as tier 1 or tier 2 capital, but that do not fully qualify under the regulation, which can be included in additional tier 1 (AT1) or tier 2 capital (as applicable) up to specified limits which reduced by 10 per cent per annum until 2022. From 1 January 2022, legacy capital securities will cease to be recognised as eligible regulatory capital, with the exception of securities that qualify for the extended transitional rules under CRR II. As of 31 December 2021, the Group has a single legacy capital security that qualifies for the extension which will allow it to be recognised as tier 2 capital until June 2025.
The key movements on a transitional capital basis are set out in the table below.
Common
equity tier 1
Additional
tier 1
Tier 2Total
capital
£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 202026,567 7,295 6,301 40,163 
Profit for the year5,202   5,202 
Interim dividends paid out on ordinary shares during the year1
(1,900)  (1,900)
IFRS 9 transitional adjustment to retained earnings(1,254)  (1,254)
Pension contributions(944)  (944)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve196   196 
Deferred tax asset(973)  (973)
Goodwill and other intangible assets116   116 
Movements in other equity, subordinated liabilities, other tier 2 items and related adjustments (2,346)(245)(2,591)
Distributions on other equity instruments(344)  (344)
Other movements2
238   238 
At 31 December 202126,904 4,949 6,056 37,909 
1Net of the brought forward foreseeable dividend accrual of £1,000 million.
2Includes other pension movements.
CET1 capital resources have increased by £337 million over the year, primarily reflecting profits, with the impairment credit more than offset by the partial unwind of IFRS 9 transitional relief. Further offsets comprised of the following:
the interim ordinary dividend paid out in October 2021
distributions on other equity instruments
pension contributions made to the defined benefit pension schemes
an increase in deferred tax assets deducted from capital which primarily reflects the remeasurement of deferred tax assets following the announced increase in the UK corporation tax rate from 1 April 2023. The remeasurement has a limited overall capital benefit as the tax credit through profits is largely offset by the increase in the deferred tax asset deduction.
AT1 capital resources have reduced by £2,346 million during the year, reflecting the reduced transitional limit applied to legacy tier 1 capital instruments and the net impact of the derecognition of called AT1 capital instruments and subsequent issuance of new AT1 capital instruments.
Tier 2 capital resources have reduced by £245 million during the year, largely reflecting the reduced transitional limit applied to legacy tier 2 capital instruments, the derecognition of called tier 2 capital instruments, regulatory amortisation and the impact of movements in rates, partially offset by the issuance of new tier 2 capital instruments.
73

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Risk-weighted assets
At 31 Dec
2021
At 31 Dec
2020
£m£m
Foundation Internal Ratings Based (IRB) Approach39,548 43,781 
Retail IRB Approach65,435 65,207 
Other IRB Approach11,028 11,916 
IRB Approach116,011 120,904 
Standardised (STA) Approach19,005 21,673 
Credit risk135,016 142,577 
Counterparty credit risk1,257 2,133 
Credit valuation adjustment risk207 355 
Operational risk22,575 23,307 
Market risk203 210 
Risk-weighted assets159,258 165,582 
Threshold risk-weighted assets1
2,318 2,280 
Total risk-weighted assets161,576 170,862 
1Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of being deducted from CET1 capital.
Risk-weighted assets movement by key driver
Credit risk
IRB
Credit risk
STA
Credit risk
total1
Counterparty
credit risk2
Market riskOperational
risk
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Total risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2020170,862 
Less: total threshold risk-weighted assets3
(2,280)
Risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2020120,904 21,673 142,577 2,488 210 23,307 168,582 
Asset size(3,645)(628)(4,273)(557)  (4,830)
Asset quality221 (213)8 (431)  (423)
Model updates    16  16 
Methodology and policy(1,335)(1,757)(3,092) 1  (3,091)
Movement in risk levels (Market risk only)    (24) (24)
Foreign exchange movements(134)(70)(204)(36)  (240)
Other     (732)(732)
Risk-weighted assets at 31 December 2021116,011 19,005 135,016 1,464 203 22,575 159,258 
Threshold risk-weighted assets3
2,318 
Total risk-weighted assets as at 31 December 2021161,576 
1Credit risk includes securitisation risk-weighted assets.
2Counterparty credit risk includes movements in contributions to the default funds of central counterparties and movements in credit valuation adjustment risk.
3Threshold risk-weighted assets reflect the element of deferred tax assets that are permitted to be risk-weighted instead of being deducted from CET1 capital.

The risk-weighted assets movement table provides analysis of the movement in risk-weighted assets in the period by risk type and an insight into the key drivers of the movements.
Credit risk, risk weighted assets:
Asset size reduction of £4.3 billion predominantly reflects increased levels of optimisation in Commercial Banking and lower unsecured balances, partially offset by increased mortgage lending.
Asset quality mainly reflects the impact of retail model calibrations with limited credit migration in part due to the benefit of House Price Index increases.
Methodology and policy changes of £3.1 billion include reductions in risk-weighted assets through securitisation activity, other optimisation activity and enhanced identification of SME exposures.
Counterparty credit risk, risk-weighted assets: reduced by £1.0 billion predominantly due to movements in market rates during the period.
Operational risk, risk-weighted assets: reduced by £0.7 billion due to a reduction in 3 year average income levels.
59
74

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Leverage ratio
Analysis of leverage movements
Lloyds BankThe Group’s fully loaded UK leverage ratio increasedreduced to 5.55.3 per cent (31 December 2019: 5.12020: 5.5 per cent), primarily driven by the increaseimpact of the reduction in the fully loaded total tier 1 capital. Thecapital position. This was offset in part by the reduction in the leverage exposure measure increasedwhich reduced by £10.6£8.9 billion during the year, largely reflecting the increasemovements in the SFTsecurities financing transactions and off-balance sheet exposure measures.items, net of increased balance sheet lending. Following a direction received from the PRA Lloyds Bankduring 2020 the Group is permitted to exclude lending under the UK Government’s Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) from the leverage exposure measure.
The average UK leverage ratio was 5.45.2 per cent over the quarter, with the actual ratio increasing slightly across the quarter to 5.5 per cent which largely reflected a higher average exposure measure compared to the growth inposition at the end of the quarter, partially offset by a higher average fully loaded total tier 1 capital position.
Leverage ratio
The table below summarises the component parts of Lloyds Bankthe Group's leverage ratios.ratio.
Fully loadedFully loaded
At 31 Dec
2020
At 31 Dec
2019
At 31 Dec
2021
At 31 Dec
2020
£m£m£m£m
Total tier 1 capital for leverage ratioTotal tier 1 capital for leverage ratioTotal tier 1 capital for leverage ratio
Common equity tier 1 capitalCommon equity tier 1 capital26,567 24,637 Common equity tier 1 capital26,904 26,567 
Additional tier 1 capitalAdditional tier 1 capital5,935 4,865 Additional tier 1 capital4,268 5,935 
Total tier 1 capitalTotal tier 1 capital32,502 29,502 Total tier 1 capital31,172 32,502 
Exposure measureExposure measureExposure measure
Statutory balance sheet assetsStatutory balance sheet assetsStatutory balance sheet assets
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments8,341 8,494 Derivative financial instruments5,511 8,341 
Securities financing transactionsSecurities financing transactions56,073 52,032 Securities financing transactions49,708 56,073 
Loans and advances and other assetsLoans and advances and other assets535,525 520,842 Loans and advances and other assets547,630 535,525 
Total assetsTotal assets599,939 581,368 Total assets602,849 599,939 
Qualifying central bank claimsQualifying central bank claims(43,973)(33,408)Qualifying central bank claims(50,824)(43,973)
Deconsolidation adjustmentsDeconsolidation adjustmentsDeconsolidation adjustments
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments16 32 Derivative financial instruments2 16 
Securities financing transactions — 
Loans and advances and other assetsLoans and advances and other assets(139)(1,326)Loans and advances and other assets(612)(139)
Total deconsolidation adjustments1
Total deconsolidation adjustments1
(123)(1,294)
Total deconsolidation adjustments1
(610)(123)
Derivatives adjustmentsDerivatives adjustmentsDerivatives adjustments
Adjustments for regulatory nettingAdjustments for regulatory netting(2,225)(2,430)Adjustments for regulatory netting(2,584)(2,225)
Adjustments for cash collateralAdjustments for cash collateral(5,601)(6,869)Adjustments for cash collateral(905)(5,601)
Net written credit protectionNet written credit protection145 148 Net written credit protection22 145 
Regulatory potential future exposureRegulatory potential future exposure5,744 8,186 Regulatory potential future exposure3,652 5,744 
Total derivatives adjustmentsTotal derivatives adjustments(1,937)(965)Total derivatives adjustments185 (1,937)
Securities financing transactions adjustmentsSecurities financing transactions adjustments1,060 689 Securities financing transactions adjustments1,321 1,060 
Off-balance sheet itemsOff-balance sheet items53,350 44,172 Off-balance sheet items49,349 53,350 
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments3
(14,770)(7,641)
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments2
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments2
(17,620)(14,770)
Total exposure measureTotal exposure measure593,546 582,921 Total exposure measure584,650 593,546 
Average exposure measure2
603,330 
UK Leverage ratio5.5%5.1%
Average UK leverage ratio2
5.4%
Average exposure measure3
Average exposure measure3
598,563 
UK leverage ratioUK leverage ratio5.3%5.5%
Average UK leverage ratio3
Average UK leverage ratio3
5.2%
1Deconsolidation adjustments relate to the deconsolidation of certain Lloyds Bank Group entities that fall outside the scope of Lloyds Bankthe Group’s regulatory capital consolidation.
2Includes adjustments to exclude lending under the UK Government’s Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) and the netting of regular-way purchases and sales awaiting settlement in accordance with CRR Article 500d.
3The average UK leverage ratio is based on the average of the month end tier 1 capital position and average exposure measure over the quarter (1 October 20202021 to 31 December 2020)2021). The average of 5.45.2 per cent compares to 5.45.2 per cent at the start and 5.55.3 per cent at the end of the quarter.
3Includes adjustments to exclude lending under the UK Government’s Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS) and the accelerated implementation for the netting of regular-way purchases and sales awaiting settlement in accordance with CRR Article 500d.
6075

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Application of IFRS 9 on a full impact basis for capital and leverageApplication of IFRS 9 on a full impact basis for capital and leverageApplication of IFRS 9 on a full impact basis for capital and leverage
IFRS 9 full impactIFRS 9 full impact
At 31 Dec
2020
At 31 Dec
2019
At 31 Dec
2021
At 31 Dec
2020
Common equity tier 1 (£m)Common equity tier 1 (£m)24,59124,185Common equity tier 1 (£m)26,25324,591
Transitional tier 1 (£m)Transitional tier 1 (£m)31,88631,090Transitional tier 1 (£m)31,20231,886
Transitional total capital (£m)Transitional total capital (£m)39,42238,004Transitional total capital (£m)38,03939,422
Total risk-weighted assets (£m)Total risk-weighted assets (£m)171,015172,324Total risk-weighted assets (£m)161,805171,015
Common equity tier 1 ratio (%)Common equity tier 1 ratio (%)14.4 %14.0 %Common equity tier 1 ratio (%)16.2 %14.4 %
Transitional tier 1 ratio (%)Transitional tier 1 ratio (%)18.6 %18.0 %Transitional tier 1 ratio (%)19.3 %18.6 %
Transitional total capital ratio (%)Transitional total capital ratio (%)23.1 %22.1 %Transitional total capital ratio (%)23.5 %23.1 %
UK leverage ratio exposure measure (£m)UK leverage ratio exposure measure (£m)591,570582,900UK leverage ratio exposure measure (£m)584,000591,570
UK leverage ratio (%)UK leverage ratio (%)5.2 %5.0 %UK leverage ratio (%)5.2 %5.2 %
Lloyds BankThe Group applies the full extent of the IFRS 9 transitional arrangements for capital as set out under CRR Article 473a (as amended via the CRR 'Quick Fix' revisions published in June 2020). Specifically, Lloyds Bankthe Group has opted to apply both paragraphs 2 and 4 of CRR Article 473a (static and dynamic relief) and in addition to apply a 100 per cent risk weight to the consequential Standardised credit risk exposure add-back as permitted under paragraph 7a of the revisions.
As at 31 December 2020,2021, static relief under the transitional arrangements amounted to £370£264 million (31 December 2019: £4522020: £370 million) and dynamic relief under the transitional arrangements amounted to £1,606£387 million (31 December 2019: £nil).2020: £1,606 million) through CET1 capital.
6176

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CHANGE/EXECUTION RISK
DEFINITION
Change/execution risk is defined as the risk that, in delivering its change agenda, the Group fails to ensure compliance with laws and regulation, maintain effective customer service and availability, and/or operationoperate within the Group’s risk appetite.
EXPOSURES
Change/execution risks arise when Lloyds Bankthe Group undertakes activities which require products, processes, people, systems or controls to change. These changes can be as a result of external drivers (for example, a new piece of regulation that requires Lloyds Bankthe Group to put in place a new process or reporting) andand/or internal drivers (such as theincluding business process changes, technology upgrades and strategic transformation that is outlined in Lloyds Banking Group's Strategic Review 2021).business or technology transformation.
MEASUREMENT
The Group currently measures change/execution risk against a defined risk appetite metricmetrics which isare a combination of leading, quality and delivery indicators across the investment portfolio. These indicators are reported through defined internal governance structures in the form of aand monthly execution risk dashboard. An associated measure, based on the aggregate performancemetrics; which forms part of the dashboard is included inBoard risk appetite metrics, and are under ongoing evolution and enhancement to ensure ongoing support of the Group balanced scorecard.Group's change agenda.
MITIGATION
The Group takes a range of mitigating actions with respect to change/execution risk. These include the following:
The Board establishes a Group-wide risk appetite and metric for change/execution risk
Ensuring compliance with the Changechange policy and associated policies and procedures, which set out the principles and key controls that apply across the business and are aligned to the Group risk appetite
Businesses assess the potential impacts of undertaking any change activity on their ability to execute effectively, on customers and colleagues and on the potential consequences for existing business risk profiles
The implementation of effective governance and control frameworks to ensure adequate controls are in place to manage change activity and act to mitigate the change/execution risks identified. These controls are monitored in line with the Changechange policy and any additional monitoring that is deemed necessaryenterprise risk management framework
Events and incidents related to change activities are escalated and managed appropriately in line with risk framework guidance
Ensuring there are sufficient, appropriately skilled resources to support the safe delivery of the Group's current and future change portfolio
MONITORING
Change/execution risks from across the Group are monitored and reported through to the Board and Group Governance Committees in accordance with the Group's enterprise risk management framework and aligned to Lloyds Banking Group's Strategic Review 2021 activities.framework. Risk exposures are discussedassessed monthly through established governance through toin both the Lloyds Banking Group Transformation and Business Risk CommitteeCommittees with upwards reportingescalation to Board Risk and Executive Committees. In addition, oversight, challenge and reporting are completed at Risk Division level to provide oversight management of risks and the effectiveness of controls, recommending follow up remedial action ifCommittees where required. All materialMaterial change/execution related risk events or incidents are escalated in accordance with the formal Lloyds Banking Group Operational Riskoperational risk policy and Changechange policy. In addition there is oversight, challenge and reporting at Risk division level to support overall management of risks and ongoing effectiveness of controls.
6277

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CONDUCT RISK
DEFINITION
Conduct risk is defined as the risk of customer detriment across the customer lifecycle including: failures in product management, distribution and servicing activities; from other risks materialising, or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure, reputational damage or financial loss.
EXPOSURES
The Group faces significant conduct risks, which affect all aspects of the Group’s operations and all types of customers.
Conduct risks can impact directly or indirectly on the Group's customers and could materialise from a number of areas across the Group, including:
Business and strategic planning that does not sufficiently consider customer needs
Ineffective development, management and monitoring of products, their distribution (including the sales process)process, fair value assessment and responsible lending criteria) and post- sales service (including the management of customers in financial difficulties)
Unclear, unfair, misleading or untimely customer communications
A culture that is not sufficiently customer-centric
Poor governance of colleagues’ incentives and rewards and approval of schemes which drive unfair customer outcomes
Ineffective identification, management and oversight of legacy conduct issues
Ineffective management and resolution of customers’ complaints or claims
Outsourcing of customer service and product delivery to third-partiesthird parties that do not have the same level of control, oversight and culture as the Group
The risks associated with becoming a more digitised bank
Poor management, governance and control of data
There is a high level of scrutiny regarding financial institutions' treatment of customers, including those in vulnerable circumstances, from regulatory bodies, the media, politicians and consumer groups. The COVID-19 pandemic has magnified existing challenges, and brought new challenges for customers, affecting health, income and relationships. The Group continues to apply significant focus to its treatment of customers in financial difficulties and ensuringto ensure fair outcomes.
The Group is also exposed to the risk of engaging in activities or failing to manage conduct which could constitute market abuse, undermine the integrity of a market in which it is active, distort competition or create conflicts of interest.
There continues to be a significant focus on market misconduct, resulting from previous issues such asand action has been taken to move to risk-free rates following the ending of the majority of London Inter-bank Offered Rate (LIBOR) and foreign exchange (FX).measures on 1st January 2022.
DueThe Group continuously adapts to market developments that could pose heightened conduct risk, including: the level of enhanced focus on conduct, there is a risk that certain aspects of the Group's current or legacy business may be determinedpotential for more customers in financial difficulties driven by the Financial Conduct Authority, other regulatory bodies or the courts as not being conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, in a manner that fails to deliver fair and reasonable customer treatment, or is inconsistent with market integrity or competition requirements.
The increased cost of living/evolving COVID-19 situation, meansongoing scrutiny in ensuring transparency and fairness of pricing communications, increased uncertainty surroundingexpectation regarding fair customer treatment due to the future, which posesintroduction of the risk that increasingly more customers face difficulties, become vulnerable and/or struggle to manage their existing commitments.FCA's Consumer Duty in 2022, and ensuring victims of Authorised Push Payment Fraud receive fair outcomes.
MEASUREMENT
To articulate its conduct risk appetite, the Group has sought more granularity through the use of suitable Conduct Risk Appetite Metrics (CRAMs) and tolerances that indicate where it may be operating outside its conduct risk appetite. These include Board-level conduct risk metrics covering an assessment of overall CRAMs performance, out of appetite CRAMs, Financial Ombudsman Service (FoS) change rates and complaints.
CRAMs have been designed for services and product familiesproducts offered by the Group and are measured by a consistent set of common metrics. These contain a range of product design, sales and process metrics (including outcome testing outputs) to provide a more holistic view of conduct risks; some products also have a suite of additional bespoke metrics.
Each of the tolerances for the metrics are agreed for the individual product or service and are regularly tracked. At a consolidated level these metrics are part of the Board risk appetite. The Group has, and continues to, evolve its approach to conduct risk measurements, including those supporting customer vulnerability, process delivery and otherto include emerging conduct themes.
MITIGATION
The Group takes a range of mitigating actions with respect to conduct risk and remains focused on delivering a leading customer experience.
All three retail brands have now received Accessibility Standards accreditation from the Money and Mental Health Policy Institute in recognition of the Group's work to make services more accessible for customers with mental health problems. The Group’s ongoing commitment to goodfair customer outcomes sets the tone from the top and supports the development ofour values-led culture with customers at the right customer-centric culture,heart, strengthening links between actions to support conduct, culture and customer and enabling more effective control management. Actions to encourage good conduct include:
Conduct risk appetite established at Group and business area level, with metrics included in the Group risk appetite to ensure ongoing focus
Simplified and enhanced conduct policies and procedures in place to ensure appropriate controls and processes that deliver fair customer outcomes, and support market integrity and competition requirements
Customer needs considered through divisional customer plans, with integral conduct lens reviewed and challenged by the Lloyds Banking Group Customer First Committee (GCFC)
Cultural transformation: achieving a values-led culture through a consistent focus on behaviours to ensure the Group is transforming its culture for success in a digital world. This is supported by strong direction and tone from senior executives and the Board
Continuous embedding of the customer vulnerability framework aligned with the FCA guidance on fair treatment of vulnerable customers launched in January 2021. Development and continued oversight of the implementation of the vulnerability strategy continues through the Lloyds Banking Group Customer Vulnerability Committee (GCVC) operating at a senior level to prioritise change, drive implementation and ensure consistency across Lloyds Bankingthe Group
63

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
EnhancedRobust product governance framework to ensure products continue to offer customers fair value, and consistently meet their needs throughout their product life cycle; reviewed and challenged by the Lloyds Banking Group Product Governance Committee (GPGC)lifecycle
EnhancedEffective complaints management through effectively responding to, and learning from, root causes of complaint volumes and Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) change rates
Review and oversight of thematic conduct agenda items at senior committees, ensuring holistic consideration of key Lloyds Banking Group-wide conduct risks
78

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
Robust recruitment and training, with a continued focus on how the Group manages colleagues’ performance with clear customer accountabilities
Ongoing engagement with third-partiesthird parties involved in serving the Group’s customers to ensure consistent delivery
Monitoring and testing of customer outcomes to ensure the Group delivers fair outcomes for customers throughout the product and service lifecycle, and make continuous improvements to products, services and processes
Continued focus on market conduct and member of the Fixed Income, Currencies and Commodities Markets Standard Board and committed to conducting its market activities consistent with the principles of the UK Money Markets code, the Global Precious Metals Code and the FX Global Code
Adoption of robust change delivery methodology to enable prioritisation and delivery of initiatives to address conduct challenges
Continued focus on proactive identification and mitigation of conduct risk in the Lloyds Banking Group's Strategic Review 2021strategy
Active engagement with regulatory bodies and other stakeholders to develop understanding of concerns related to customer treatment, effective competition and market integrity, to ensure that the Group’s strategic conduct focus continues to meet evolving stakeholder expectations
Adapting quickly to the evolving COVID-19 situation, being swift to offer the new to market products (BBILs, CBILs) and new regulatory requirements (payment holidays). The Group also continuesclosely monitors the outcomes of business banking customers, particularly those with COVID-19 response products (BBLS, CBILS) to ensure the appropriate support customersis in challenging times by adapting support, proactively contacting vulnerable customers, and using insight to understand who may become vulnerable and what their needs could beplace
MONITORING
Conduct risk is governed through divisional risk committees and significant issues are escalated to the Lloyds Banking Group Risk Committee, in accordance with the Lloyds Banking Group's enterprise risk management framework, as well as through the monthly Consolidated Risk Report. Risk exposures are discussed at divisional risk committees, where oversight, challenge and reporting are completed to assess the effectiveness controls. Remedial action is recommended, if required. All material conduct risk events are escalated in accordance with the Lloyds Banking Group's Operational RiskGroup operational risk policy to the respective divisionalBusiness Managing Directors and Conduct, Compliance and Operational Risk.
GCFC acts as the guardianDirector/Head of customer experience and has responsibility for monitoring and reviewing plans and actions to improve it, providing oversight of customer outcomes and customer experience and providing challenge to divisions to make changes to support the delivery of Lloyds Banking Group's vision and foster a customer-centric culture.Business.
A number of activities support the close monitoring of conduct risk including:
The use of CRAMs across the Group, with a clear escalation route to Board
Second line oversight activities
Horizon Scanningscanning
6479

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
DATA RISK
DEFINITION
Data risk is defined as the risk of the Group failing to effectively govern, manage and control its data (including data processed by third party suppliers), leading to unethical decisions, poor customer outcomes, loss of value to the Group and mistrust.
EXPOSURES
Data risk is present in all aspects of the business where data is processed, both within the Group and by third parties including colleague and contractor, prospective and existing customer lifecycle and insight processes. Data risk manifests:
When personal data is not gathered legally, for a legitimate purpose, or is not managed or protected from misuse and/or processed in a way that complies with General Data Protection Regulations (GDPR) and other data privacy regulatory obligations
When data quality (accuracy, completeness, consistency, uniqueness, validity and timeliness) is not managed, resulting in data used in systems, processes and products not being fit for the intended purpose
When data records are not created, retained, protected, destroyed, or retrieved appropriately
When data governance fails to provide robust oversight of data decision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively
When data standards are not maintained across core data, data management risks are not managed and data relateddata-related issues are not remediated as a result of poor data management, resulting in inaccurate, incomplete data that is not available at the right time, to the right people, to enable business decisions to be made, and regulatory reporting requirements to be fulfilled
When critical data mapping and data information standards are not followed, impacting compliance, traceability and understanding of data
MEASUREMENT
Data risk is measured through a series of quantitative and qualitative indicators, aligned to key sources of data risk for the Group covering data governance, data management and data privacy and ethics. In addition to risk appetite measures and limits, data risks and controls are monitored and governed through Group and Sub-Group Committeessub-group committees on a monthlyregular basis. Significant issues are escalated to the Group Risk Committee.
MITIGATION
Data risk is a key component of the Group's enterprise risk management framework, where the focus is on the end to endend-to-end management of data risk. This ensures that risks are identified, assessed, managed, monitored and reported using the risk and control self-assessment process.
Investment continues to be made to enhance the maturity of data risk management. Examples including:include:
Delivering a data strategy and data risk and control library to ensure data risks are managed within appetite
Enhancing data quality, capability and awareness in data management and privacy
Enhancing assurance of suppliers
Delivering enhanced controls and processes for data retention and destruction, deleting large volumes of historic over-retained data
Embedding data by design and ethics principles into the data science lifecycle and progressing opportunities to simplify the completion of privacy records impact assessments
MONITORING
Data risk is governed through Group and Sub-Groupsub-group committees and significant issues are escalated to Group Risk Committee, in accordance with the Lloyds Banking Group’s enterprise risk management framework. Risk exposures are discussed at Group and Sub-Groupsub-group committees, where oversight, challenge and reporting are completed to assess the effectiveness of controls and agree remedial actions. All material data risk events are escalated in accordance with the Lloyds Banking Group's Operational RiskGroup operational risk policy and Datadata risk policies and, where personal data is concerned, the Group Data Protection Officer. In addition, Group-wide data risk issues and the top data risks that the Group faces are discussed at the Data Cross Divisional Committee and Group Data Committee.
A number of activities support the close monitoring of data risk, including:
Implementation of the data risk and control library to ensure greater coverage and insight of data risk, and ensuring data risks are managed within appetite
Design and monitoring of data risk appetite metrics, including key risk indicators and key performance indicators
Monitoring and reporting of progress against the Data Capability Assessment Model
Monitoring of significant data relateddata-related issues, complaints, events and breaches
Identification and effective mitigation of data risk when planning and implementing transformation or business change
Implementation of effective controls to mitigate data risk, including data privacy, ethics, data management and records management
Effective monitoring and testing of compliance with data privacy and data management regulatory requirements. For example GDPR and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS 239) requirements
Horizon scanning for changes in the external environment, including, but not limited to, changes to laws, rules and regulations,regulations; for example, arising from the UK's exit from the EU and ensuring data flows remain unaffectedeffective
6580

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
GOVERNANCE RISK
DEFINITION
Governance risk is defined as the risk that the Group’s organisational infrastructure fails to provide robust oversight of decision-making and the control mechanisms to ensure strategies and management instructions are implemented effectively.
EXPOSURES
The internal and corporate governance arrangements of major financial institutions continue to be subject to a high level of regulatory and public scrutiny. The Group’s exposure to governance risk is also reflective of the significant volume of existing and proposed legislation and regulation, both within the UK and across the multiple jurisdictions within which it operates, with which it must comply.
MEASUREMENT
The Group’s governance arrangements are assessed against new or proposed legislation and regulation and best practice among peer organisations in order to identify any areas of enhancement required.
MITIGATION
Lloyds Banking Group enterprise risk management framework (ERMF) establishes robust arrangements for risk governance, in particular by:
Defining individual and collective accountabilities for risk management, risk oversight and risk assurance through a three lines of defence model which supports the discharge of responsibilities to customers, shareholders and regulators
Outlining governance arrangements which articulate the enterprise-wide approach to risk management
Supporting a consistent approach to Group-wide behaviour and risk decision-making through a Group policy framework which helps everyone understand their responsibilities by clearly articulating and communicating rules, standards, boundaries and risk appetite measures which can be controlled, enforced and monitored
Under the banner of the ERMF, training modules are in place to support all colleagues in understanding and fulfilling their risk responsibilities.
Lloyds Banking Group Code of Responsibility embodies its values and reflect its commitment to operating responsibly and ethically both at a business and an individual level. All colleagues are required to adhere to the code in all aspects of their roles.
Effective implementation of the ERMF mutually reinforces and is reinforced by the Group’s risk culture, which is embedded in its approach to recruitment, selection, training, performance management and reward.
MONITORING
A review of Lloyds Banking Group ERMF, which includes the status of Lloyds Bank Group's principles and policy framework, and the design and operational effectiveness of key governance committees, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board.
For further information on corporate governance see pages 77 to 82.
66

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
PEOPLE RISK
DEFINITION
People risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to provide an appropriate colleague and customer-centric culture, supported by robust reward and wellbeing policies and processes; effective leadership to manage colleague resources; effective talent and succession management; and robust control to ensure all colleague-related requirements are met.
EXPOSURES
The Group’s management of material people risks is critical to its capacity to deliver against its strategic objectives, particularly in the context of increasing volumes of organisational, political and external market change and increasing digitisation. The Group is exposed to the following key people risks:
Failure to recruit, develop and retain colleagues, includinga diverse workforce, with the appropriate mix and required level of skills and capabilities to meet the current and future needs of the Group
Non-inclusive culture, ineffective management ofleadership, poor communication, weak performance, inappropriate remuneration policies and poor colleague conduct
Ineffective succession planning or failure to identify appropriate talent pipeline
Failure to manage capacity, colleagues having excessive demands placed on them resulting in wellbeing issues and business objectives not being met
Failure to meet all colleague-related legal and regulatory requirements
Inadequately designed people processes that are not resilient to withstand unexpected events
The increasing digitisation of the business is changing the capability mix required and may impact the Group's ability to attract and retain talent
Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SM&CR) and additional regulatory constraints on remuneration structures may impact the Group’sGroup's ability to attract and retain talent
Failure to manage capacity, colleagues having excessive demands placed on them resulting in wellbeing issues and business objectives not being met
Failure to meet all colleague-related legal and regulatory requirements
Ineffective leadership, poor communication, weak performance, inappropriate remuneration policies
Colleague engagement may continue to be challenged by a number of factors ranging from adjustment to new ways of working, dissatisfaction with reward; and ongoing media attention on culture within the banking sector conduct and ethical considerations
Inadequately designed people processes that are not resilient to withstand unexpected events
MEASUREMENT
People risk is measured through a series of quantitative and qualitative indicators, aligned to key sources of people risk for the Group such as succession, diversity, retention, colleague engagement and wellbeing. In addition to risk appetite measures and limits, people risks and controls are monitored on a monthly basis via the Group’s risk governance framework and reporting structures.
MITIGATION
The Group takes many mitigating actions with respect to people risk. Key areas of focus include:
Focusing on leadership and colleague engagement, through delivery of strategies to attract, retain and develop high calibre people together with implementation of rigorous succession planning
Continued focus on the Group’s culture and inclusivity strategy by developing and delivering initiatives that reinforce the appropriate behaviours which generate the best possible long-term outcomes for customers and colleagues
Managing organisational capability and capacity through divisional people strategies to ensure there are the right skills and resources to meet customers’ needs and deliver the Group's strategic plan
Maintaining effective remuneration arrangements to ensure they promote an appropriate culture and colleague behaviours that meet customer needs and regulatory expectations
Ensuring colleague wellbeing strategies and support are in place to meet colleague needs, and that the skills and capability growth required to build a workforce formaximise the Bankpotential of the Future are achievedour people
Ensuring compliance with legal and regulatory requirements related to SM&CR, embedding compliant and appropriate colleague behaviours in line with Group policies, values and its people risk priorities
Ongoing consultation with the Group’s recognised unions on changes which impact their members
Reviewing and enhancing people processes to ensure they are fit for purpose and operationally resilient
MONITORING
Monitoring and reporting is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Key people risk metrics are reported and discussed monthly at the Group People Risk Committee with escalation to Group Risk and Executive Committees and the Board where required.
All material people risk events are escalated in accordance with Lloyds Banking Group's Operational Risk Policy.operational risk policy.
6781

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
OPERATIONAL RESILIENCE RISK
DEFINITION
Operational resilience risk is defined as the risk that the Group fails to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and controls (people, process, technology) so that it is able to withstand external or internal events which could impact the continuation of operations, and fails to respond in a way which meets customer and stakeholder expectations and needs when the continuity of operations is compromised.
EXPOSURES
Ineffective operational resilience risk management could lead to vital services not being available to customers, and in extreme circumstances, bank failure could result. The Group has in place a transparent and effective operating model to identify and monitor critical business processes from a customer, Group and financial industry perspective. The failure to adequately build resilience into a critical business process may occur in a variety of ways, including:
The Group being overly reliant on one location to deliver a critical business process
The Group not having an adequate succession plan in place for designated subject matter experts
The Group being overly reliant on a supplier which fails to provide a service
A weakness in the Group’s cyber or security defences leaving it vulnerable to an attack
The Group failing to upgrade its IT systems and leaving them vulnerable to failure
Operational resilience and damage to physical assets including: terrorist acts, other acts of war or hostility, geopolitical, pandemic or other such events
Effective operational resilience ensures the Group designs resilience into its systems, is able to withstand and/or recover from a significant unexpected event occurring and can continue to provide services to its customers. A significant outage could result in customers being unable to access accounts or conduct transactions, which as well as presenting significant reputational risk for the Group would negatively impact the Group’s purpose of Helping Britain Prosper.purpose. Operational resilience is also an area of continued regulatory and industry focus, similar in importance to financial resilience.
Failure to manage operational resilience effectively could impact the following other risk categories:
Regulatory compliance: non-compliance with new/existing operational resilience regulations, for example, through failure to identify emerging regulation or not embedding regulatory requirements within the Group’s policies, processes and procedures or identify further future emerging regulation
Operational risk: being unable to safely provide customers with business services
Conduct risk: an operational resilience failure may render the Group liable to fines from the FCA for poor conduct
Market risk: the Group being unable to provide key services could have ramifications for the wider market and could impact share price
MEASUREMENT
Operational resilience risk is managed across the Group through the Group’s enterprise risk management framework and Operationaloperational risk policies. The Group’s enterprise risk management framework includes a risk and control self-assessment process, risk impact likelihood matrix, key risk and control indicators, risk appetite, a robust incident management and escalation process, scenario analysis and an operational losses process. Board risk appetite metrics for operational resilience are in place and are well understood. These specific measures are subject to ongoing monitoring and reporting, including a mandatory review of thresholds on at least an annual basis. To strengthen the management of operational resilience risk, the Group mobilised an operational resilience enhancement programme which is designed to focus on end to endend-to-end resilience and the management of key risks to critical processes.
MITIGATION
The Group has increased its focus on operational resilience and has updated its operational resilience strategy to reflect changing priorities of both customers and regulators. TheFurthermore, the Group has carefully considered and provided a responseis in the process of responding to the publication of the consultation paper by the FCA, PRA and Bank of England (December 2019).regulatory policy statements. Focus will behas been given to ensure thatcompliance, and further consideration to how the Group’s strategyexisting framework will be adapted including consideration of important business services and approach to operational resilience aligns with industry thinking, expectation and anticipated regulatory policy.impact tolerances. At the core of its approach to operational resilience are the Group’s critical business processes which drive all activity, including further mapping of the processes to identify any additional resilience requirements such as impact tolerances in the event of a service outage. The Group continues to maintain and develop playbooks that guide its response to a range of interruptions from internal and external threats and tests these through scenario-based testing and exercising.
Lloyds Banking Group's Strategic Review 2021new strategy considers the changing risk management requirements, adapting the change delivery model to be more agile and develop the people skills and capabilities needed to be a Bank of the Future.needed. The Group continues to review and invest in its control environment to ensure it addresses the risks it faces. Risks are reported and discussed at local governance forums and escalated to executive management and the Board as appropriate. The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance. Where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services, the Lloyds Banking Group’sGroup's sourcing policy ensures that outsourcing initiatives follow a defined process including due diligence, risk evaluation and ongoing assurance.
During the COVID-19 pandemic, business continuity plans have provedcontinued to prove resilient, with particular attention applied to heightened risks in the supply chain.
Mitigating actions to the principal operational resilience risk are:
Cyber: the threat landscape associated with cyber risk continues to evolve and there is significant regulatory attention on this subject. The Board continues to invest heavily to protect the Group from cyber-attacks. Investment continues to focus on improving the Group’s approach to identity and access management, improving capability to detect and respond to cyber-attacks and improved ability to manage vulnerabilities across the estate. With effect from 1 January 2021, the Group has entered in tointo a cyber insurance policy, which provides cover for specified information security risks.
IT resilience: the Group continues to optimise its approach to IT and operational resilience by investing in technology improvements and enhancing the resilience of systems that support the Group’s critical business processes, primarily through the technology resilience programme, with independent verification of progress on an annual basis. The Board recognises the role that resilient technology plays in building the UK's preferred financial partner and in maintaining banking services across the wider industry. As such, the Board dedicates considerable time and focus to this subject at both the Board and the Board Risk Committee, and continues to sponsor key investment programmes that enhance resilience.
6882

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
People: the Group acknowledges the risks associated to the failure to maintain appropriately skilled and available colleagues. The Group continues to optimise its approach to ensure that, where applicable, colleagues are capable of supporting a critical business process. Key controls and processes are regularly reported to committee(s) and alignment towith Lloyds Banking Group's Strategic Review 2021strategy is closely monitored.
Property: the Group's property portfolio remains a key focus in ensuring resilience requirements are appropriately maintained. Processes are in place to identify key buildings where a critical business process is performed. Depending on criticality, a number of mitigating controls are in place to manage the risk of severe critical business process disruption. The Group remains committed to investment in the upkeep of the property portfolio, primarily through the Group Propertyproperty upkeep investment programme.
Sourcing: the threat landscape associated with third-party suppliers and the critical services they provide continues to receive a significant amount of regulatory attention. The Group acknowledges the importance of demonstrating control and responsibility for those critical business services which could cause significant harm to the Group's customers. The Group segments its suppliers by criticality and has processes in place to support ongoing vendor management.
MONITORING
Monitoring and reporting of operational resilience risk is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Each committee monitors key risks, control effectiveness, key risk and control indicators, events, operational losses, risk appetite metrics and the results of independent testing conducted by the Risk division and/or the internal audit function.Group Internal Audit.
The Group maintains a formal approach to operational resilience risk event escalation, whereby material events are identified, captured and escalated. Root causes are determined, and action plans put in place to ensure an optimum level of control to keep customers and the business safe, reduce costs, and improve efficiency.
6983

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
OPERATIONAL RISK
DEFINITION
Operational risk is defined as the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events.
EXPOSURES
The principal operational risks to the Group which could result in customer detriment, unfair customer outcomes, financial loss, disruption and/or reputational damage are:
A cyber-attack
Failure of IT systems, due to volume of change, and/or aged infrastructure
Internal and/or external fraud or financialeconomic crime
Failure to ensure compliance with increasingly complex and detailed regulation including anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, counter-terrorist financing, and financial sanctions and prohibitions laws and regulations
A number of these risks could increase where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services to the Group or its customers.
MEASUREMENT
Operational risk is managed across Lloyds Bankthe Group through an operational risk framework and operational risk policies. The operational risk framework includes a risk and control self-assessment process, risk impact likelihood matrix, key risk and control indicators, risk appetite, a robust operational event management and escalation process, scenario analysis and an operational lossesloss process.
The table below shows high level loss and event trends for the Group using Basel II categories. Based on data captured on the Group’s One Risk and Control Self-Assessment, in 20202021 the highest frequency of events occurred in external fraud (79.10(80.19 per cent) and clients, productsexecution, delivery and business practices (10.88process management (10.68 per cent). Clients, products and business practices accounted for 60.3094.70 per cent of losses by value, driven by legacy issues where impacts materialised in 20202021 (excluding PPI).
Operational risk events by risk category (losses greater than or equal to £10,000), excluding PPI1
Operational risk events by risk category (losses greater than or equal to £10,000), excluding PPI1
Operational risk events by risk category (losses greater than or equal to £10,000), excluding PPI1
% of total volume% of total losses% of total volume% of total losses
20202019202020192021202020212020
Business disruption and system failures0.25 0.57 0.04 0.25 
Business disruption and system failures2
Business disruption and system failures2
0.49 0.83 (0.64)0.47 
Clients, products and business practicesClients, products and business practices10.88 14.64 60.30 73.62 Clients, products and business practices8.32 12.43 94.70 52.07 
Damage to physical assetsDamage to physical assets0.15 0.17 17.56 0.06 Damage to physical assets0.08 0.41 0.00 14.39 
Employee practices and workplace safetyEmployee practices and workplace safety0.30 0.29 0.05 0.03 Employee practices and workplace safety 0.29 0.00 0.04 
Execution, delivery and process managementExecution, delivery and process management9.12 13.89 13.71 20.22 Execution, delivery and process management10.68 13.09 1.05 26.33 
External fraudExternal fraud79.10 70.21 8.25 5.75 External fraud80.19 72.78 4.79 6.59 
Internal fraudInternal fraud0.20 0.23 0.09 0.07 Internal fraud0.24 0.17 0.10 0.11 
TotalTotal100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 Total100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 
120192020 breakdowns have been restated to reflect a number of events that have been reclassified following an internal review.
2Business disruption and system failures benefitted from a recovery in 2021, which related to a 2019 event.
Operational risk losses and scenario analysis is used to inform the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP). The Group calculates its minimum (Pillar I) operational risk capital requirements using The Standardised Approach (TSA). Pillar II is calculated using internal and external loss data and extreme but plausible scenarios that may occur in the next 12 months.
MITIGATION
The Group continues to focus on changing risk management requirements, adapting the change delivery model to be more agile and developing the people skills and capabilities needed to be a Bank of the Future.needed. Risks are reported and discussed at local governance forums and escalated to executive management and the Board as appropriate to ensure the correct level of visibility and engagement. The Group employs a range of risk management strategies, including: avoidance, mitigation, transfer (including insurance) and acceptance. Where there is a reliance on third-party suppliers to provide services, Lloyds Banking Group’s sourcing policy ensures that outsourcing initiatives follow a defined process including due diligence, risk evaluation and ongoing assurance.
Mitigating actions to the principal operational risks are:
The threat landscape associated with cyber risk continues to evolve and there is significant regulatory attention on this subject. The Board continues to invest heavily to protect the Group from cyber-attacks. Investment continues to focus on improving the Group’s approach to identity and access management, improving capability to detect and respond to cyber-attacks and improved ability to manage vulnerabilities across the estate
The Group continues to optimise its approach to IT and operational resilience by investing in technology improvements and enhancing the resilience of systems that support the Group's critical business processes, primarily through the technology resilience programme, with independent verification of progress on an annual basis
The Group adopts a risk-based approach to mitigate the internal and external fraud risks it faces, reflecting the current and emerging fraud risks within the market. Fraud risk appetite metrics holistically cover the impacts of fraud in terms of losses to the Group, costs of fraud systems and operations, and customer experience of actual and attempted fraud. Oversight of the appropriateness and performance of these metrics is undertaken regularly through business area and Group-level committees. This approach drives a continual programme of prioritised enhancements to the Group’s technology and process and people relatedpeople-related controls; with an emphasis on preventative controls supported by real time detective controls wherever feasible. Group-wide policies and operational control frameworks are maintained and designed to provide customer confidence, protect the Group’s commercial interests and reputation, comply with legal requirements and meet regulatory requirements. The Group’s fraud awareness programme remains a key component of its fraud control environment, and awareness of fraud risk is supported by mandatory training for all colleagues. This is further strengthened by material annual investment into both technology and the personal development needs of colleagues. The Group also plays an active role with other financial institutions, industry bodies and law enforcement agencies in identifying and combatting fraud
7084

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
The Group has adopted policies and procedures designed to detect and prevent the use of its banking network for money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery, tax evasion, human trafficking, modern-day slavery and wildlife trafficking, and activities prohibited by legal and regulatory sanctions. Against a background of complex and detailed laws and regulations, and of continued criminal and terrorist activity, the Group regularly reviews and assesses its policies, procedures and organisational arrangements to keep them current, effective and consistent across markets and jurisdictions. The Group requires mandatory training on these topics for all employees. Specifically, the anti-money laundering procedures include ‘know-your-customer’ requirements, transaction monitoring technologies, reporting of suspicions of money laundering or terrorist financing to the applicable regulatory authorities, and interaction between the Group’s Financial Intelligence Unit and external agencies and other financial institutions. The Anti-Bribery PolicyGroup economic crime prevention policy prohibits the payment, offer, acceptance or request of a bribe, including ‘facilitation payments’ by any employee or agent and provides a confidential reporting service for anonymous reporting of suspected or actual bribery activity. The Sanctions and the Related Prohibitions PolicyGroup economic crime prevention policy also sets out a framework of controls for compliance with legal and regulatory sanctions
In addition to its efforts internally, the Group also contributes to fraud and financialeconomic crime prevention by supporting and championing industry levelindustry-level activity, including:
BeingWorking with the Lending Standards Board to improve customer outcomes related to Authorised Push Payment (APP) fraud. The Group remains a signatory to the industry code for Authorised Push Payment (APP)APP fraud, which has greatly increased consumerimproved customer protection and the reimbursement of funds to victims
Co-sponsorshipCo-chairing the inaugural Public Private Threat Group with National Economic Crime Centre (NECC). This builds on the success of the Fusion Cell in 2020, which was established in response to the changing economic crime threat related to COVID-19
Maintaining partnerships with key partners such as City of London Police, Trading Standards, Global Cyber Alliance and the North East Business Resilience Centre
Active membership of Stop Scams UK (SSUK), designed to stop scams at source by bringing together partnershippartnerships from various industry sectorssectors. The Group is involved in a new SSUK pilot, Project 159, which aims to provide consumers with a secure connection to their bank
Operational resilience risk, pages 82 to 83, provides further information on the mitigating actions for cyber and IT resilience.
MONITORING
Monitoring and reporting of operational risk is undertaken at Board, Group, entity and divisional committees. Each committee monitors key risks, control effectiveness, key risk and control indicators, events, operational losses, risk appetite metrics and the results of independent testing conducted by the Risk Divisiondivision and/or Group Internal Audit.
The Group maintains a formal approach to operational risk event escalation, whereby material events are identified, captured and escalated. Root causes of events are determined, and action plans put in place to ensure an optimum level of control to keep customers and the business safe, reduce costs, and improve efficiency.
The insurance programme is monitored and reviewed regularly, with recommendations being made to the Group’s senior management annually prior to each renewal. Insurers are monitored on an ongoing basis, to ensure counterparty risk is minimised. A process is in place to manage any insurer rating changes or insolvencies.
7185

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
MODEL RISK
DEFINITION
Model risk is defined as the risk of financial loss, regulatory censure, reputational damage or customer detriment, as a result of deficiencies in the development, application or ongoing operation of models and rating systems.
Models are defined as quantitative methods that process input data into quantitative outputs, or qualitative outputs (including ordinal letter output) which have a quantitative measure associated with them. Model Governance Policygovernance policy is restricted to specific categories of application of models, principally financial risk, treasury and valuation, with certain exclusions, such as prescribed calculations and project appraisal calculations.
EXPOSURES
There are over 300 models in theThe Group performingmakes extensive use of models. They perform a variety of functions including:
capitalCapital calculation
creditCredit decisioning, including fraud
pricingPricing models
impairmentImpairment calculation
stressStress testing and forecasting
marketMarket risk measurement
As a result of the wide scope and breadth of coverage, there is exposure to model risk across a number of the Group’s principal risk categories.
Model risk has increased in 2020 due to the nature and uncertainty of the economic outlook, a result of the COVID-19 pandemic.remains above pre-pandemic levels. The effect of government-led customer support initiatives haveschemes weakened established relationships between model inputs and outputs, reducingand there remains a reliance on the ability to forecast using models alone. While underlyinguse of judgement, particularly in the areas for forecasting and impairment. However, recent months have seen more stable patterns for model outputs, and model drivers are expected to remain valid in the longer term, year-end impairment reporting containsterm.
In addition, in common with the rest of the industry, changes required to capital models following new regulations will create a greater elementtemporary increase in the risk relating to these models during the period of governed judgement that reflects current conditions.transition. Further information on capital impacts are detailed in the capital risk section on pages 69 to 76.
MEASUREMENT
The GroupBoard risk appetite frameworkmetric is the key component for measuring the Group’s model risk. Reportedmost material models; performance is reported monthly to the Group Risk Committee and Board focus is placed on the performance of the Group’s most material models.Risk Committees.
MITIGATION
The model risk management framework, established by and with continued oversight from an independent team in the Risk division, provides the foundation for managing and mitigating model risk within the Group. Accountability is cascaded from the Board and senior management via the Group enterprise risk management framework.
This provides the basis for Lloyds Banking Group's Model Governance Policy,model governance policy, which defines the mandatory requirements for models across Lloyds Bank Group, including:
theThe scope of models covered by the policy
modelModel materiality
rolesRoles and responsibilities, including ownership, independent oversight and approval
keyKey principles and controls regarding data integrity, development, validation, implementation, ongoing maintenance and revalidation, monitoring, and the process for non-compliance
The model owner takes responsibility for ensuring the fitness for purpose of the models and rating systems, supported and challenged by the independent specialist Group function.
The above ensures all models in scope of policy, including those involved in regulatory capital calculation, are developed consistently and are of sufficient quality to support business decisions and meet regulatory requirements.
MONITORING
The Lloyds Banking Group Model Governance Committee is the primary body for overseeing model risk. Policy requires that key performance indicators are monitored for every model to ensure they remain fit for purpose and all issues are escalated appropriately. Material model issues are reported to the Group and Board Risk Committees monthly, with more detailed papers as necessary to focus on key issues.
7286

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
REGULATORY AND LEGAL RISK
DEFINITION
Regulatory and legal risk is defined as the risk of financial penalties, regulatory censure, criminal or civil enforcement action or customer detriment as a result of failure to identify, assess, correctly interpret, comply with, or manage regulatory and/or legal requirements.
EXPOSURES
Whilst theThe Group has a zero risk appetite for material legal or regulatory breaches or material legal incidents,breaches. However, due to the wide scope and breadth of its regulatory permissions, the Group remains exposed to them, driven by significant ongoingthe evolving UK legal and new legislation, regulationregulatory landscape, such as changes to the Regulatory Framework due to the UK's exit from the EU and court proceedings inother changing regulatory standards as well as uncertainty arising from the UKcurrent and overseas which in each case needs to be interpreted, implemented and embedded into day-to-day operational and business practices across the Group.future litigation landscape.
MEASUREMENT
Regulatory and legal risks are measured against a defined risk appetite metric, which is an assessment of material regulatory breaches and material legal incidents.
MITIGATION
The Group undertakes a range of key mitigating actions to manage regulatory and legal risk. These include the following:
The Board has established a Group-wide risk appetite and metric for regulatory and legal risk
Lloyds Banking Group policies and procedures set out the principles and key controls that should apply across Lloyds Bank Group which are aligned to the Lloyds Bank Group risk appetite. Mandated policies and processes require appropriate control frameworks, management information, standards and colleague training to be implemented to identify and manage regulatory and legal risk
Business units identify, assess and implement policy and regulatory requirements and establish local controls, processes, procedures and resources to ensure appropriate governance and compliance
Business units regularly produce management information to assist in the identification of issues and test management controls are working effectively
Risk and Legal departments provide oversight, proactive support and constructive challenge to the business in identifying and managing regulatory and legal issues
Risk departmentdivision conducts thematic reviews of regulatory compliance and provides oversight of regulatory compliance assessments across businesses and divisions where appropriate
Business units, with the support of divisional and Group-level teams, conduct ongoing horizon scanning to identify and address changes in regulatory and legal requirements
The Group engages with regulatory authorities and industry bodies on forthcoming regulatory changes, market reviews and investigations, ensuring programmes are established to deliver new regulation and legislation
The Group has adapted quickly to evolving regulatory expectations during the COVID-19 pandemic and has engaged with regulatory authorities throughout
MONITORING
Material risks are managed through the relevant divisional-level committees, with review and escalation through Group levelGroup-level committees where appropriate, including the escalation of any material regulatory breaches or material legal incidents.
7387


OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
STRATEGIC RISK
DEFINITION
Strategic risk is defined as the risk which results from:
Incorrect assumptions about internal or external operating environments
Failure to understand the potential impact of strategic responses and business plans on existing risk types
Failure to respond or the inappropriate strategic response to material changes in the external or internal operating environments
Failure to understand the potential impact of strategic responses and business plans on existing risk types
EXPOSURES
The Group faces significant risks due to the changing regulatory and competitive environments in the financial services sector, with an increased pace, scale and complexity of change. Customers, shareholdersCustomer, shareholder and employeesemployee expectations continue to evolve and current societal trends are likely to bebeing accelerated byfollowing the COVID-19 pandemic.
Strategic risks can manifest themselves in existing principal risks or as new exposures which could adversely impact the Group and its businesses.
In considering strategic risks, a key focus is the interconnectivity of individual risks and the cumulative effect of different risks on the Group’s overall risk profile.
The Group is working actively to implementhas invested in implementing a robust framework for the identification, assessment and quantification of strategic risks. Thisrisks and their incorporation into business planning and strategic investment decisions. With Board support, the Group will continue to invest in evolving the strategic risk management framework has been deployed as part of the recent strategic review and is being embeddedembedding it into the Group's day to dayday-to-day business operations.
MEASUREMENT
The Group assesses and monitors strategic risk implications as part of business planning and in its day to dayday-to-day activities, ensuring they respond appropriately to internal and external factors including changes to regulatory, macroeconomic and competitive environments. An assessment is made of the key strategic risks that are considered to impact the Group, leveraging internal and external information and the key mitigants or actions that could be taken in response.
Through 2021 a clear setsaw development of strategic risks, mitigants and controls will be embedded to meet divisional, legal entity and Group-wide objectives. The assessment and measurement will be supported by athe Group’s quantitative risk assessment approach, and underpinned by the One Risk and Control Self-Assessment (One RCSA) framework. The Group's quantitative risk assessment will focus specifically on assessing the connectivitythe:
Connectivity of inherent risks, which can magnify their impact and severity.severity
Time horizons in respect of the crystallisation of impacts, should risks manifest
MITIGATION
The range of mitigating actions includes:includes the following:
Horizon scanning is conducted across the Group to identify potential threats, risks, emerging issues and opportunities and to explore future trends
The Group’s business planning processes includesinclude formal assessment of the strategic risk implications of new business, product entries and other strategic initiatives
The Group’s governance framework mandates individual'sindividuals' and committee’scommittees' responsibilities and decision makingdecision-making rights, to ensure that strategic risks are appropriately reported and escalated
MONITORING
A review of the Group’s strategic risks which includes the risks to the current strategic review and the mitigating actions, is undertaken on an annual basis and the findings are reported to the Group and Board Risk Committees.
Risks, alongside their control effectiveness, are articulated and reported regularly to Group and Board Risk Committees.
7488

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
CLIMATE RISK
DEFINITION
Climate risk is defined as the risk that the Group experiences losses and/or reputational damage as a result of physical events, transition risk, or as a consequence of the responses to managing these changes, either directly or through our customers.
EXPOSURES
Climate risk can arise from:
Physical risks - changes in climate or weather patterns which are acute, event driven (e.g. flood or storms), or chronic, longer-term shifts (e.g. rising sea levels or droughts)
Transition risks - changes associated with the move towards a low carbon economy, including changes to policy, legislation and regulation, technology and changes to customer preferences; or legal risks from failing to manage these changes
Climate risk manifests through, and has the potential to impact, the Group’s existing principal financial and non-financial risks. The Group has adopted a comprehensive approach to embedding climate risk into its enterprise risk management framework, establishing climate risk as its own principal risk, as well as its integration into our existing principal risks.
The Group has undertaken an analysis of the main physical and transition risk which may impact the Group and our customers, as well as how these may impact across the different principal risks within the Group’s enterprise risk management framework. For further information see page 55 in the 2021 Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report.
The Group has identified loans and advances to customers in sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change, see page 59 in the 2021 Lloyds Banking Group Climate Report.
MEASUREMENT
In order to identify the main physical and transition risks which could impact the Group, a number of workshops have been held with subject matter experts across the divisions and Risk division. These workshops have taken into account the sectors most exposed to the risks from climate change and also the impacts across the other principal risks in the Group’s enterprise risk management framework. These outputs have been used to establish the key risks impacting the Group to inform where updates are required to the Group’s risk management processes to ensure suitable management of climate risk.
The Group is continuing to develop a number of metrics to track key areas of climate risk across its main portfolios. In Commercial Banking, the Group has continued to enhance our internal climate risk assessment methodologies and tools to assess the physical and transition risks relevant to our clients, developing and launching a bespoke qualitative climate risk assessment tool with a focus on transition risks and readiness, which will be completed at least annually as part of regular client engagements for our large corporate portfolio.
Initial consideration of climate risks was included within Lloyds Banking Group’s financial planning process, considering the key impacts for the Group across key business areas where detailed sector reviews have been undertaken.
The Group has continued to develop its scenario modelling capabilities and Lloyds Banking Group participated in the Bank of England’s Climate Biennial Exploratory Scenario on the Financial Risks for Climate Change. Commentary on climate-related risks was included in the Group’s annual Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process. Work continues to improve our scenario analysis capabilities and other analytical tools.
MITIGATION
In 2021, the Lloyds Banking Group climate risk policy was established to provide an overarching framework for the management of climate risks, intended to support appropriate consideration of climate risks across key activities. The policy also supports Lloyds Banking Group’s climate-related external ambitions and progress against the relevant regulatory requirements, including the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) recommendations.
The Group is continuing to integrate consideration of climate risk as part of its activity and processes for managing other principal risks in our enterprise risk management framework. Lloyds Banking Group’s credit risk policy includes mandatory requirements to consider environmental risks in key risk management activities. In Commercial Banking, Relationship Managers must ensure that climate risk is considered for all new and renewal facilities, and specifically commented on for customers who bank with us where total limits exceed £500,000 (excluding automated renewal process). In Retail, Lloyds Banking Group’s credit risk policies require due regard to be paid to energy efficiency (EPC controls) and physical risks (such as flood assessments) in our mortgages business, and transition risks (pace and growth of electric vehicles) within our motor portfolio.
The Group has undertaken sector deep dives where there is lending to customers in sectors at increased risk from the impacts of climate change, considering both risks and opportunities as the Group looks to support its customers’ responses to climate change.
Lloyds Banking Group has twelve external sector statements that help articulate appropriate areas of climate-related risk appetite and the Group's approach to the risk assessment of its customers. Lloyds Banking Group is continuing to refine and enhance these statements.
MONITORING
Governance for climate risk is embedded into the Group’s existing governance structure and is complementary to governance of the Group’s sustainability strategy.
Climate risk is included as part of regular risk reporting to the Lloyds Banking Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Board Risk Committees. This is currently focused on a qualitative assessment against external expectations and Lloyds Banking Group's external commitments. A Board-approved risk appetite statement for climate risk is also in place, supported by an initial metric to ensure the Group continues to progress activities at pace.
The Group is continuing to develop its approach to measuring and monitoring climate risk and will enhance reporting going forward as understanding and capabilities increase, which will also be used to set further quantitative and qualitative risk appetite metrics as appropriate.
89

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
INVESTMENT PORTFOLIO, MATURITIES, DEPOSITS
MATURITIES AND WEIGHTED AVERAGE YIELDS OF INTEREST-BEARING SECURITIES
The weighted average yield for each range of maturities is calculated by dividing the annualised interest income prevailing at 31 December 20202021 by the book value of securities held at that date.
Maturing within
one year
Maturing after one
but within five years
Maturing after five
but within ten years
Maturing after
ten years
Maturing within
one year
Maturing after one
but within five years
Maturing after five
but within ten years
Maturing after
ten years
Amount
£m
Yield
%
Amount
£m
Yield
%
Amount
£m
Yield
%
Amount
£m
Yield
%
Amount
£m
Average
yield
%
Amount
£m
Average
yield
%
Amount
£m
Average
yield
%
Amount
£m
Average
yield
%
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
US treasury and US government agenciesUS treasury and US government agencies  626 0.2 1,373 5.8   US treasury and US government agencies245 0.1 1,556 4.6 179 2.5   
Other government securitiesOther government securities36 5.6 4,279 1.4 6,519 1.3 1,434 2.9 Other government securities845 2.0 1,100 2.0 7,964 0.9 2,710 3.2 
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securities      65 4.6 Asset-backed securities      55 4.1 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities1,398 2.1 9,807 1.2 1,723 2.0   Corporate and other debt securities1,748 1.5 9,229 1.2 2,154 1.2   
1,434 14,712 9,615 1,499 2,838 11,885 10,297 2,765 
Debt securities held at amortised costDebt securities held at amortised costDebt securities held at amortised cost
Mortgage-backed securitiesMortgage-backed securities  1,645 0.8   401 0.6 Mortgage-backed securities1,457 0.9       
Other asset-backed securitiesOther asset-backed securities12    1,594 0.8 7 3.9 Other asset-backed securities65 0.6   1,525 0.7 18 1.9 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities15  1,089 3.0 374 2.0 1  Corporate and other debt securities  1,434 2.7 64 2.1 1  
27 2,734 1,968 409 1,522 1,434 1,589 19 
MATURITY ANALYSIS AND INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY OF LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS AND BANKS
The following table analyses the maturity profile and interest rate sensitivity of loans by type on a contractual repayment basis at 31 December 2020.2021. All amounts are before deduction of impairment allowances. Demand loans are included in the ‘maturing in one year or less’ category; balances with no fixed maturity are included in the 'maturing after fifteen years' category.
Maturing
in one
year
or less
£m
Maturing
after one
but within
five years
£m
Maturing
after five
but within
fifteen years
£m
Maturing
after
fifteen
years
£m
Total
£m
Maturing
in one
year
or less
£m
Maturing
after one
but within
five years
£m
Maturing
after five
but within
 fifteen years
£m
Maturing
after
 fifteen
years
 £m
Total
£m
Loans and advances to banks4,872 1,080 2  5,954 
Loans and advances to customers:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements5,288 2,184 2  7,474 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:
MortgagesMortgages14,985 51,959 128,381 110,641 305,966 Mortgages15,142 53,750 141,591 107,939 318,422 
Other personal lendingOther personal lending1,680 7,181 1,519 14,915 25,295 Other personal lending4,508 5,556 193 14,289 24,546 
Property companies and constructionProperty companies and construction5,486 12,227 9,217 3,208 30,138 Property companies and construction7,092 13,536 5,485 1,368 27,481 
Financial, business and other servicesFinancial, business and other services60,589 7,935 7,038 1,709 77,271 Financial, business and other services53,296 8,194 3,523 836 65,849 
Transport, distribution and hotelsTransport, distribution and hotels4,640 3,747 5,477 365 14,229 Transport, distribution and hotels5,514 6,084 1,629 140 13,367 
ManufacturingManufacturing1,739 1,487 1,110 119 4,455 Manufacturing1,515 1,666 243 81 3,505 
OtherOther6,589 14,826 4,395 2,678 28,488 Other6,622 15,531 3,585 2,437 28,175 
Total loansTotal loans100,580 100,442 157,139 133,635 491,796 Total loans98,977 106,501 156,251 127,090 488,819 
Of which:Of which:Of which:
Fixed interest rateFixed interest rate71,377 53,339 97,865 91,010 313,591 Fixed interest rate67,812 61,814 100,816 100,695 331,137 
Variable interest rateVariable interest rate29,203 47,103 59,274 42,625 178,205 Variable interest rate31,165 44,687 55,435 26,395 157,682 
100,580 100,442 157,139 133,635 491,796 98,977 106,501 156,251 127,090 488,819 
DEPOSITS
The following tables show the details of the Group’s average customer deposits in each of the past three years.
202020192018202120202019
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
Closing
balance
Average
balance
Average
rate
£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%£m%
Non-interest bearing demand depositsNon-interest bearing demand deposits116,214 95,629  80,247 74,130 — 73,364 72,428 — Non-interest bearing demand deposits131,014 119,712  116,214 95,629 — 80,247 74,130 — 
Interest-bearing demand depositsInterest-bearing demand deposits244,119 246,100 0.41 229,437 237,495 0.68 235,475 239,629 0.51 Interest-bearing demand deposits263,392 265,468 0.19 244,119 246,100 0.41 229,437 237,495 0.68 
Other depositsOther deposits64,819 69,971 0.38 77,625 78,222 0.57 80,594 91,377 0.84 Other deposits54,967 58,590 0.22 64,819 69,971 0.38 77,625 78,222 0.57 
Total customer depositsTotal customer deposits425,152 411,700 0.31 387,309 389,847 0.53 389,433 403,434 0.50 Total customer deposits449,373 443,770 0.15 425,152 411,700 0.31 387,309 389,847 0.53 
7590

OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS
UNINSURED DEPOSITS
The following table gives details of the Group’s customer deposits at 31 December 2020 which were not covered by any deposit protection scheme by time remaining to maturity.
3 months
or less
£m
Over 3
months
but within
6 months
£m
Over 6
months
but within
12 months
£m
Over
12 months
£m
Total
£m
Uninsured customer deposits184,575 832 1,078 2,092 188,577 
3 months
or less
£m
Over 3
months
but within
6 months
£m
Over 6
months
but within
12 months
£m
Over
12 months
£m
Total
£m
At 31 December 2021184,420 538 686 1,761 187,405 
At 31 December 2020184,575 832 1,078 2,092 188,577 
Total uninsured customer deposits have been calculated as the aggregate carrying value of the Group’s customer deposits less the insured deposit amounts as determined for regulatory purposes by the Group’s licensed deposit-takers, being those deposits eligible for protection under deposit protection schemes (principally the Financial Services Compensation Scheme in the UK). The maturity analysis for uninsured deposits has been estimated using the weighted-average maturity profile of the total customer deposits of each of the Group’s licensed deposit-takers.
7691

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
STATEMENT ON US CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STANDARDS
The Board is committed to the delivery of Lloyds Bank Group’s strategy which is underpinned by high standards of corporate governance designed to ensure consistency and rigour in its decision making. This report explains how those standards, in particular those laid down by the Financial Reporting Council in the Wates Corporate Governance Principles for Large Private Companies (the ‘Wates Code’), apply in practice to ensure that the Board and management work together for the long-term benefit of the Bank. The Wates Code can be found at www.frc.org.uk.
To assist the Board in carrying out its functions and to provide independent oversight of internal control and risk management, certain responsibilities are delegated to the Board’s Committees. The Board is kept up to date on the activities of the Committees through reports from each of the Committee Chairs. Terms of Reference for each of the Committees are available on the website www.lloydsbankinggroup.com. Information on the membership, role and activities of the Nomination Committee, the Audit Committee, the Board Risk Committee and the Remuneration Committee can be found on pages 7792 and 79.94.
As a non-US company with securities listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) the Bank is required to disclose any significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by domestic US companies listed on the NYSE. Key differences are set out below.
The NYSE corporate governance listing standards require domestic US companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance policies. For the Bank, the Nomination Committee sets the appropriate corporate governance principles and oversees the annual evaluation of the performance of the Board, its Committees and its individual members.
Under the NYSE corporate governance listing standards, the remuneration, nomination and governance committees of domestic US companies must be comprised of entirely independent directors. However for the Bank, the Remuneration Committee and the Nomination Committee include the Chair, with all other members being independent non-executive directors.
Board and Committee Compositioncomposition and Board Attendanceattendance in 20202021112
Board MemberDate of
appointment to Board
BoardNomination
Committee
Audit
Committee
Board Risk
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
Lord Blackwell (C)June 201213/137/7 C8/87/7
António Horta–OsórioJanuary 201113/13
William ChalmersAugust 201913/13
Juan Colombás1
November 201310/10
Robin Budenberg21
October 20203/310/10 (C)1/16/6 (C)2/22/6/6
Charlie Nunn2
August 20214/4
Sir António Horta–Osório3
January 20113/3
William Chalmers4
August 201910/10
Alan Dickinson5
September 201410/106/66/68/86/6 (C)
Sarah BentleyJanuary 2019
12/1310/1012
2/26/6
7/812
6/712
Alan Dickinson3
September 201413/137/77/78/87/7
Anita Frew4
December 2010
6/710
3/34/44/4
3/410
Brendan GilliganJanuary 201913/1310/107/76/68/8
Simon Henry5
June 201411/116/6
5/612
Nigel HinshelwoodJanuary 201913/1310/10
6/7612
6/7612
8/87/76/6
Sarah Legg6
December 201913/1310/107/7 C6/6 (C)8/8
Lord Lupton1
June 201713/1310/102/28/8
Amanda Mackenzie1,6
October 201813/1310/104/42/26/6
Harmeen Mehta7
November 20218/82/27/7
Nick Prettejohn78
June 20147/74/45/56/6
12/13Stuart Sinclair1,5,9
January 2016
8/1011
5/611
7/78/8 C
Stuart SinclairJanuary 20162/2
12/134/61011
6/712
8/87/7 C
Sara Weller81,10
February 201213/134/4
5/72/211 12
2/2
7/812
7/74/4
Catherine Woods7 9
March 202011/1110/101/16/65/58/8 (C)6/6
C(C)Chair
1Juan ColombásThe Board Risk Committee was reconstituted with effect from 29 March 2021 to streamline that Committee’s membership. With effect from 29 March 2021, the Committee comprised Catherine Woods (Chair), Alan Dickinson, Sarah Legg and, until his retirement from the Board, Nick Prettejohn.
2Charlie Nunn joined the Board on 16 August 2021.
3Sir António Horta-Osório retired from the Board on 18 September 2020.30 April 2021.
24Robin Budenberg joinedWilliam Chalmers, Chief Financial Officer, was acting Group Chief Executive from when Sir António Horta-Osório retired on 30 April 2021 and until Charlie Nunn’s appointment to the Board and respective Committees on 1 October 2020 and became16 August 2021.
5Alan Dickinson succeeded Stuart Sinclair as Chair of the Remuneration Committee on 24 November 2021.
6Amanda Mackenzie joined the Nomination Committee on 1 January23 June 2021.
37Alan Dickinson succeeded Anita Frew as Deputy Chair on 21 May 2020.
4Anita Frew retired fromHarmeen Mehta joined the Board on 21 May 2020.1 November 2021.
58Simon HenryNick Prettejohn retired from the Board on 30 September 2020.
6Sarah Legg succeeded Simon Henry as Chair of the Audit Committee with effect from 1 October 2020.
7Nick Prettejohn succeeded Alan Dickinson as Chair of the Board Risk Committee on 21 May 2020 and was succeeded in that role by Catherine Woods on 1 January 2021.
8Sara Weller plans to retire as a Non-Executive Director at the time of Lloyds Banking Group's AGM in May 2021.
9Catherine Woods joinedStuart Sinclair plans to retire from the Board andat the Board Risk and Remuneration Committees on 1 March 2020 and the Audit Committee on 10 September 2020.AGM in May 2022.
10Unable to attend due to illness.Sara Weller retired from the Board on 20 May 2021.
11Unable to attend ad hoc meeting scheduled on a Sunday evening at short notice.some meetings due to medical reasons.
12Unable to attend due to another business commitment.
13Where a Director is unable to attend a meeting s/hehe/she receives papers in advance and has the opportunity to provide comments to the Chair of the Board or to the relevant Committee Chair.

92
77

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
UK CORPORATE GOVERNANCE STATEMENT
In accordance with the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (as amended by the Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018) (the ‘Regulations’), for the year ended 31 December 2020,2021, the Bank has in its corporate governance arrangements applied the Wates Corporate Governance Principles for Large Private Companies (the ‘Principles’), which are available at frc.org.uk. The following section explains the Bank’s approach to corporate governance, and its application of the Principles.
Fundamental to the Bank’s strategy are high standards of corporate governance. A Corporate Governance Framework is in place for Lloyds Banking Group, the Bank, Bank of Scotland plc and HBOS plc, with all four companies sharing a common approach to governance. The framework is designed to meet the specific needs of each company, setting the wider approach and applicable standards in respect of the Bank’s corporate governance practices, including addressing the matters set out in the Principles and the governance requirements of the operation of the Bank as part of Lloyds Banking Group’s Ring Fenced Bank.
This includes the matters reserved to the Board, and the matters the Board has chosen to delegate to management, including decision making on operational matters such as those relating to credit, liquidity, and the day-to-day management of risk. Governance arrangements, including the Corporate Governance Framework, are reviewed at least annuallyperiodically to ensure they remain fit for purpose. The Board delegates further responsibilities to the Group Chief Executive, who is supported by the Group Executive Committee. The Corporate Governance Framework of the Bank further addresses the requirements of the Principles as discussed below.
Principle One – Purpose and Leadership
The Board is collectively responsible for the long term success of the Bank. It achieves this by agreeing the Bank’s strategy, within the wider strategy of Lloyds Banking Group, and overseeing delivery against it. The Bank’s strategy is discussed further on page 3.3. The Board also assumes responsibility for the management of the culture, values and wider standards of the Bank, within the equivalent standards set by Lloyds Banking Group. The Board’s understanding of stakeholders’ interests is central to these responsibilities and informs key aspects of Board decision making.
Consideration ofAcknowledging the needs of all stakeholders is fundamental to the way the Bank operates, as is maintaining the highest standards of business conduct, which along with ensuring delivery for customers is a vital part of the corporate culture. The Bank’s approach is further influenced by the need to build a culture in which everyone feels included, empowered and inspired to do the right thing for customers. To this end, the Board plays a lead role in establishing, promoting, and monitoring the Bank’s corporate culture and values, with the Corporate Governance Framework ensuring such matters receive the level of prominence in Board and Executive decision making which they require. The Bank’s corporate culture and values align to those of Lloyds Banking Group.
Principle Two – Board Composition
The Bank is led by a Board comprising a Non-Executive Chair, independent Non-Executive Directors and Executive Directors. The Board considers its composition regularly and is committed to ensuring it has the right balance of skills and experience. The Board considers its current size and composition is appropriate to the Bank’s circumstances. The Board places great emphasis on ensuring its membership reflects diversity in its broadest sense. New appointments are made on merit, taking account of the specific skills and experience, independence and knowledge needed to ensure a rounded board and the diversity benefits each candidate can bring overall. There are a range of initiatives across Lloyds Banking Group to help ensure unbiased career progression opportunities. Progress on diversity objectives is monitored by the Board and built into its assessment of executive performance.
The Board is supported by its committees, the operation of which are discussed below, which make recommendations to the Board on matters delegated to them, in particular in relation to internal control, risk, financial reporting and remuneration matters. Each committee has written terms of reference setting out its delegated responsibilities. Each committee comprises Non-Executive Directors with appropriate skills and experience and is chaired by an experienced chairman. The committee Chairs report to the Board at the next Board meeting. The Board undertakes an annuala periodic review of its effectiveness, which provides an opportunity to consider ways of identifying greater efficiencies, ways to maximise strengths and highlights areas of further development. The 2020 effectiveness review was commissioned byGiven the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive in August 2021 and the development of the Bank’s ongoing strategy within the wider Lloyds Banking Group, the Board overseen byagreed that an evaluation of its effectiveness would be conducted in 2022 to allow the Nomination Committee and conducted internally byreview to cover the Company Secretary between November 2020 and January 2021. In addition to considering theBoard’s effectiveness of the Board, the effectiveness of the Board committees and individual Directors was also considered, with individual performance evaluation conducted for each of the members of the Board.in overseeing these developments.
Principle Three – Director Responsibilities
The Directors assume ultimate responsibility for all matters, and along with senior management are committed to maintaining a robust control framework as the foundation for the delivery of good governance, including the effective management of delegation through the Corporate Governance Framework. Policies are also in place in relation to potential conflicts of interest which may arise. All Directors have access to the services of the Company Secretary, and independent professional advice is available to the Directors at the expense of Lloyds Banking Group, where they judge it necessary to discharge their duties as directors.
The Board is supported by its committees which make recommendations on matters delegated to them under the Corporate Governance Framework. The management of all committees is in keeping with the basis on which meetings of the Board are managed, with open debate, and adequate time for members to consider proposals which are put forward. The Chair of the Board and each Board committee assumes responsibility with support from the Company Secretary for the provision to each meeting of accurate and timely information.
Principle Four – Opportunity and Risk
The Board oversees the development and implementation of the Bank’s strategy, within the context of the wider strategy of Lloyds Banking Group, which includes consideration of all strategic opportunities. The Board is also responsible for the long term sustainable success of the Bank, generating value for its shareholders and ensuring a positive contribution to society. The Board agrees the Bank’s culture, purpose, values and strategy, within that of Lloyds Banking Group, and agrees the related standards of the Bank, again within the relevant standards of Lloyds Banking Group. Further specific aims and objectives of the Board are formalised within the Corporate Governance Framework, which also sets out the matters reserved for the Board.
Strong risk management is central to the strategy of the Bank, which along with a robust risk control framework acts as the foundation for the delivery of effective management of risk. The Board agrees the Bank’s risk appetite and ensures the Bank manages risk effectively, delegating related authorities to individuals through the Corporate Governance Framework and the further management hierarchy. Board level engagement coupled with the direct involvement of senior management in risk issues ensures that escalated issues are promptly addressed, and remediation plans are initiated where required. The Bank’s risk appetite, principles, policies, procedures, controls and reporting are managed in conjunction with those of Lloyds Banking Group, and as such are regularly reviewed to ensure they remain fully in line with regulations, law, corporate governance and industry best practice. The Bank’s principal risks are discussed further on page 23.32 to 34.
7893

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Principle Five – Remuneration
The Remuneration Committee of the Board, in conjunction with the Remuneration Committee of Lloyds Banking Group (the ‘Remuneration Committees’), assume responsibility for the Bank’s approach to remuneration. This includes reviewing and making recommendations on remuneration policy as relevant to the Bank, ranging from the remuneration of Directors and members of the Executive to that of all other colleagues employed by the Bank. This includes colleagues where the regulators require the Bank to implement a specific approach to their remuneration, such as Senior Managers and other material risk takers. The activities of the Remuneration Committees extend to matters of remuneration relevant to subsidiaries of the Bank, where such subsidiary does not have its own remuneration committee. Certain members of the Lloyds Banking Group Executive, including the Group People and Property Director, are authorised to act upon the decisions made by the Remuneration Committees, and to undertake such other duties relevant to remuneration as delegated to them.
Principle Six – Stakeholders
The COVID-19 pandemic has during the year had a profoundcontinued to have an effect on the way we live, including on the Bank’s many stakeholders. The Board has monitored the impact of the pandemic on the Group’s and Bank’s business and its stakeholders, seeking to ensure that the challenges posed by the pandemic were addressed. The Board considered related updates from management as events unfolded, covering matters including the continued impact on customers, colleagues, suppliers and other stakeholders, approving suitable action as required.
The Bank as part of Lloyds Banking Group operates under Lloyds Banking Group’s wider Responsible Business approach, which acknowledges that the Bank has a responsibility to help address the economic, social and environmental challenges which the UK faces, and as part of this understand the needs of the Bank’s external stakeholders, including in the development and implementation of strategy. Central to this is Lloyds Banking Group’s Helping Britain Prosper plan, in which the Bank participates, which duringparticipates. During the year has focusedthere was a focus on the response to COVID, and Helping Britain Recover. This involved bringing together many of the Board’s key stakeholders, to determine how the Bank could best support the recovery from the pandemic.
In 20202021 the Responsible Business Committee of Lloyds Banking Group provided further oversight and support of Lloyds Banking Group’s and the Bank’s strategy and plans for embedding responsible business in the Banks’ core purpose. The Responsible Business Committee determined that the Bank and Lloyds Banking Group continued to demonstrate responsibility as a key priority.
Committees of the Board
The Board operates a number of Committees, composed of Non-Executive Directors, with the responsibilities set out below.
Nomination Committee
Responsible for reviewing and making recommendations to the Board on the composition of the Bank’s Board and its Committees, taking into account the principles, policies and governance requirements of Lloyds Banking Group.
Audit Committee
Responsible for monitoring and reviewing the formal arrangements established by the Board in respect of the financial reporting and narrative reporting of the Bank, the effectiveness of the internal controls and the risk management framework, whistleblowing arrangements, internal and external audit process.
Board Risk Committee
Responsible for reviewing and reporting its conclusions to the Board on Lloyds Bank Group’s current and future risk appetite (the extent and categories of risk which the Board regards as acceptable for the Bank to bear), the Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management framework (setting out the procedures to manage risk, embracing principles, policies, methodologies, systems, processes, procedures and people), and Lloyds Bank Group’s risk culture to ensure that it supports Lloyds Bank Group’s risk appetite.
Remuneration Committee
Responsible for reviewing and making recommendations to the Board on the remuneration policy for the Bank and for performing such other duties as may be prescribed for remuneration committees by the Regulators of the Bank, taking into account the principles, policies and governance requirements of Lloyds Banking Group.
Service Agreements
The Service contracts of all current Executive Directors are terminable on 12 months’ notice from Lloyds Bank Group and six months’ notice from the individual. The Chair also has a letter of appointment. His engagement may be terminated on six months’ notice by the Group or him.
Letters of Appointment
The Non-Executive Directors all have letters of appointment and are appointed for an initial term of three years after which their appointment may continue subject to an annual review. Non-Executive Directors may have their appointment terminated, in accordance with statute, regulation and the articles of association, at any time with immediate effect and without compensation.
The service contracts and letters of appointments are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.
Termination payments
It is the Group’s policy that where compensation on termination is due, it should be paid on a phased basis, mitigated in the event that alternative employment is secured. Where it is appropriate to make a bonus payment ( known(known as Group Performance Share) to the individual, this should relate to the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period. Any Group Performance Share payment will be determined on the basis of performance as for all continuing employees and will remain subject to performance adjustment (malus and clawback) and deferral. Generally, on termination of employment, Group Performance Share awards, in flight Group Ownership Share awards, Long Term Share Plan awards and other rights to payments will lapse except where termination falls within one of the reasons set out below. In the event of redundancy, the individual may receive a payment in line with statutory entitlements at that time. If an Executive Director is dismissed for gross misconduct, the Executive Director will receive normal contractual entitlements until the date of termination and all deferred Group Performance Share, Group Ownership Share and Long Term Share Plan awards will lapse.
7994

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Base salary

Fixed share award
Pension, Benefits and
other fixed remuneration
ResignationIn the case of resignation to take up new employment, paid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In the case of resignation for other reasons, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments for the notice period (or any balance of it), offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination unless, in the case of mutual agreement, the Remuneration Committee (‘the Committee’) determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disability/deathPaid until date of retirement/death. For ill health, injury or permanent disability which results in the loss of employment, paid for the applicable notice period (including any period of leave required by the Group).Awards will normally continue and be released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination except for (i) death where shares are released on the date of termination; or (ii) in the case of permanent disability the Committee determines that exceptional circumstances apply in which case shares may be released on the date of termination.Paid until date of death/ retirement (subject to individual benefit scheme rules). For ill health, injury, permanent disability, paid for the notice period including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Change of control or merger2
N/AAwards will be payable on the date of the Change of Control and the number of shares subject to the award will be reduced to reflect the shorter accrual period. The Committee may decide that vested awards will be exchanged for (and future awards made over) shares in the acquiring company or other relevant company.N/A
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverPaid until date of termination (including any period of leave required by the Group). In respect of the balance of any notice period, base salary will be paid in monthly instalments, offset by earnings from new employment during this period.Awards continue and are released at the normal time and the number of shares subject to the award in the current year will be reduced to reflect the date of termination.Paid until date of termination including any period of leave required by the Group (subject to individual benefit scheme rules).
Group Performance Share
(Annual bonus plan)1
Long Term Share Plan
(Long term variable reward plan)2
Chairman and Non-Executive
Directors Fees3
ResignationUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are forfeited and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier) unless the Committee determines otherwise (in exceptional circumstances), in which case such awards are subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards lapse on date of leaving (or on notice of leaving) unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances that they will vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Where award is to vest it will be subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Redundancy or termination by mutual agreementFor cases of redundancy, unvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback. For termination by mutual agreement, the same approach as for resignation would apply.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
8095

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Group Performance Share
(Annual bonus plan)1
Long Term Share Plan
(Long term variable reward plan)2
Chairman and Non-Executive
Directors Fees3
Retirement/ill health, injury, permanent disabilityUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Such awards would be subject to deferral, malus and clawback.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). Vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
DeathUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination. Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest on death in cash, unless the Committee determines otherwise.Awards vest in full on the date of death unless in exceptional circumstances the Remuneration Committee determines that the underpins or pre- vest test do not support full vesting.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Change of control or merger2
In-year Group Performance Share accrued up until date of change of control or merger (current year). Where there is a Corporate Event, deferred Group Performance Share awards vest to the extent and timing determined by the Committee in its absolute discretion.Awards vest on date of event. vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period unless determined otherwise). Malus and clawback will normally apply. Instead of vesting, awards may be exchanged for equivalent awards over the shares of the acquiring company or another company or equivalent cash based awards.Paid until date of leaving Board.
Other reason where the Committee determines that the executive should be treated as a good leaverUnvested deferred Group Performance Share awards are retained and in-year Group Performance Share awards are accrued until the date of termination (or the commencement of garden leave if earlier). Deferred Group Performance Share awards vest in line with normal timeframes and are subject to malus and clawback. The Committee may allow awards to vest early if it considers it appropriate.Awards vest on the original vesting date (or exceptionally on the date of leaving). vesting is subject to the underpins and time pro-rating (for months worked in underpin period). Malus and clawback will apply.Paid until date of leaving Board.
1If any Group Performance Share is to be paid to the Executive Director for the current year, this will be determined on the basis of performance for the period of actual service, rather than the full notice period (and so excluding any period of leave required by the Group).
2Reference to change of control or merger includes a compromise or arrangement under section 899 of the Companies Act 2006 or equivalent. Fixed share awards may also be released/ exchanged in the event of a resolution for the voluntary winding up of the Company; a demerger, delisting, distribution (other than an ordinary dividend) or other transaction, which, in the opinion of the Committee, might affect the current or future value of any award; or a reverse takeover, merger by way of a dual listed company or other significant corporate event, as determined by the Committee. In the event of a demerger, special dividend or other transaction which would in the Committee’s opinion affect the value of awards, the Committee may allow a deferred Group Performance Share award or a long term incentive award to vest to the extent relevant performance conditions are met to that date and if the Committee so determined, on a time pro-rated basis (unless determined otherwise) to reflect the number of months of the underpin period worked.
3The Chairman is entitled to six months’ notice.
On termination, the Executive Director will be entitled to payment for any accrued but untaken holiday calculated by reference to base salary and fixed share award.
The cost of legal, tax or other advice incurred by an Executive Director in connection with the termination of their employment and/or the cost of support in seeking alternative employment may be met up to a maximum of £100,000. Additional payments may be made where required to settle legal disputes, or as consideration for new or amended post-employment restrictions.
Where an Executive Director is in receipt of expatriate or relocation expenses at the time of termination (as at the date of the AGM no current Executive Directors are in receipt of such expenses), the cost of actual expenses incurred may continue to be reimbursed for up to 12 months after termination or, at the Group’s discretion, a one-off payment may be made to cover the costs of premature cancellation. The cost of repatriation may also be covered.
8196

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
INTERNAL CONTROL
Board responsibility
The Board is responsible for Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management and internal control systems, which are designed to facilitate effective and efficient operations and to ensure the quality of internal and external reporting and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. The Directors and senior management are committed to maintaining a robust control framework as the foundation for the delivery of effective risk management. The Directors acknowledge their responsibilities in relation to the Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management and internal control systems and for reviewing their effectiveness.
In establishing and reviewing the risk management and internal control systems, the Directors carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the Bank, including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity, the likelihood of a risk event occurring and the costs of control. The process for identification, evaluation and management of the principal risks faced by Lloyds Bank Group is integrated into Lloyds Bank Group’s overall framework for risk governance. The Lloyds Bank Group is forward-looking in its risk identification processes to ensure emerging risks are identified. The risk identification, evaluation and management process also identifies whether the controls in place result in an acceptable level of risk. At the Lloyds Bank Group level, a consolidated risk report and risk appetite dashboard are reviewed and regularly debated by the executive Lloyds Bank Group Risk Committee, Board Risk Committee and the Board to ensure that they are satisfied with the overall risk profile, risk accountabilities and mitigating actions. The report and dashboard provide a monthly view of Lloyds Bank Group’s overall risk profile, key risks and management actions, together with performance against risk appetite and an assessment of emerging risks which could affect Lloyds Bank Group’s performance over the life of the operating plan. Information regarding the main features of the internal control and risk management systems in relation to the financial reporting process is provided within the risk management report on pages 2436 to 74.89. The Board concluded that Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management arrangements are adequate to provide assurance that the risk management systems put in place are suitable with regard to Lloyds Bank Group’s profile and strategy.
Control Effectiveness Review
An annualAll material controls are recorded and assessed on a regular basis in response to triggers or at least annually. Control assessments consider both the adequacy of the design and operating effectiveness. Where a control is not effective, the root cause is established and action plans implemented to improve control design or performance. Control Effectiveness Review (CER)against all residual risks are aggregated by risk category, reported and monitored via the monthly Consolidated Risk Report (CRR). The CRR is undertaken to evaluate the effectiveness of Lloyds Bank Group’s control framework with regard to its material risks, and to ensure management actions are in place to address key gaps or weaknesses in the control framework. Business areas and head office functions assess the controls in place to address all material risk exposures across all risk types. The CER considers all material controls, including financial, operational and compliance controls. Senior management approve the CER findings which are reviewed and independently challenged by the Risk Division and provided to the Risk Division Executive Committee and Lloyds Bank Group Internal AuditRisk Committee. On an annual basis, a point in time assessment is made for control effectiveness against each risk category. The CRR data is the primary source used for this point in time assessment and a year on year comparison on control effectiveness is reported to the Board. Action plans are implemented to address any control deficiencies.
Reviews by the Board
The effectiveness of the risk management and internal control systems is reviewed regularly by the Board and the Audit Committee, which also receives reports of reviews undertaken by the Risk Division and Lloyds Bank Group Internal Audit. The Audit Committee also considers reports received from the Bank’s external auditor, Deloitte LLP (which include details of significant internal control matters that they have identified), and has a discussion with itthe auditor at least once a year without executives present.present, to ensure that there are no unresolved issues of concern.
Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management and internal control systems are regularly reviewed by the Board and are consistent with the guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting issued by the Financial Reporting Council and compliant with the requirements of CRD IV. They have been in place for the year under review and up to the date of the approval of the Annual Report. Lloyds Bank Group has determined a pathway toachieved full compliance with BCBS 239 risk data aggregation and risk reporting requirements, and continues to actively manage enhancements.maintain this status.
Auditor independence
Both the Lloyds Banking Group Board and the external auditor have policies and procedures designed to protect the independence and objectivity of the external auditor for Lloyds Banking Group plc and all of its subsidiary undertakings, including those entities within the Lloyds Bank Group. In 2020,2021, the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee amended its policy to reflect the process for PwC resigning as auditor from each of the Lloyds Banking Group’s legal entities. No other substantive changes were made to the Financial Reporting Council’s rules on auditor independence and to require Deloitte LLP, who will be appointed as the Bank’s auditors during 2021, to comply with the policy. To ensure that there is an appropriate level of oversight the Lloyds Banking Group Audit Committee approves the nature of services that the external auditor is permitted to perform and the policy sets a financial threshold above which it must approve in advance all non-audit engagements of the external auditor; the policy permits senior management to approve certain engagements for permitted services with fees for amounts below the threshold. The policy also details those services that the external auditor is prohibited from providing; these are consistent with the non-audit services which the FRC considers to be prohibited. The total amount of fees paid to the auditor for both audit and non-audit related services in 20202021 is disclosed in note 10 to the financial statements.
8297

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
DISCLOSURE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES
As of 31 December 2020,2021, the Lloyds Bank Group, under the supervision and with the participation of the Lloyds Bank Group’s management, including the Group Chief Executive and the Chief Financial Officer, performed an evaluation of the effectiveness of the Lloyds Bank Group’s disclosure controls and procedures. Based on this evaluation, the Group Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer concluded that the Bank’s disclosure controls and procedures, at 31 December 2020,2021, were effective for gathering, analysing and disclosing with reasonable assurance the information that the Lloyds Bank Group is required to disclose in the reports it files under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms. The Lloyds Bank Group’s management necessarily applied its judgement in assessing the costs and benefits of such controls and procedures, which by their nature can provide only reasonable assurance regarding management’s control objectives.
CHANGES IN INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
There have been no changes in the Lloyds Bank Group’s internal control over financial reporting during the year ended 31 December 20202021 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Group’s internal control over financial reporting.
MANAGEMENT REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING
The management of Lloyds Bank plc is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Lloyds Bank plc’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with IFRS.
The Bank’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of Lloyds Bank plc; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the Bank’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.
The management of Lloyds Bank plc assessed the effectiveness of the Bank’s internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 20202021 based on the criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework 2013 issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Based on this assessment, management concluded that, at 31 December 2020,2021, the Bank’s internal control over financial reporting was effective.
Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies and procedures may deteriorate.
GOING CONCERN
The going concern of the Bank and the Lloyds Bank Group is dependent on successfully funding their respective balance sheets and maintaining adequate levels of capital. In order to satisfy themselves that the Bank and the Lloyds Bank Group have adequate resources to continue to operate for the foreseeable future, the Directors have considered a number of key dependencies which are set out in the risk management section under the Lloyds Bank Group’s principal risks: funding and liquidity on page 2333 and pages 5265 to 5568 and capital position on pages 5669 to 61.76. Additionally, the Directors have considered capital and funding projections for the Bank and the Lloyds Bank Group. Accordingly, the Directors conclude that the Bank and the Lloyds Bank Group have adequate resources to continue in operational existence for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements and therefore it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the accounts.
CHANGE IN THE BANK'S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT
In 2018, Lloyds Banking Group concluded a tender process for the statutory audit of Lloyds Banking Group plc and its subsidiaries. Following the completion of the audit of the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc (the ‘Bank’) and its subsidiaries (together the ‘Lloyds Bank Group’) for the year ended 31 December 2020, Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) are expected to be appointed as the Bank’s statutory auditor for the year ending 31 December 2021, subject to approval by shareholders at the 2021 Annual General Meeting of the Bank. This change of auditor was recommended to the Board of Directors by the Audit Committee. Accordingly, the engagement of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) will not be renewed in 2021.
During the years ended 31 December 2019 and 2020:
PwC has not issued any reports on the consolidated financial statements of the Lloyds Bank Group that contained an adverse opinion or a disclaimer of opinion, or was qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles;
there has not been any disagreement, as that term is used in Item 16(F)(a)(1)(iv) of Form 20-F, over any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure or auditing scope or procedure, which disagreement if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction would have caused it to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with its auditor’s reports; and
PwC has not advised the Lloyds Bank Group of any of the kinds of events described in Item 16(F)(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F.
The Lloyds Bank Group has provided PwC with a copy of the foregoing disclosure and has requested that it furnish the Lloyds Bank Group with a letter addressed to the SEC stating whether or not it agrees with the above statements. A copy of such letter, dated 11 March 2021, in which PwC states that it agrees with such disclosure, is filed as Exhibit 15.2 to this 2020 Form 20-F.
During the years ended 31 December 2019 and 2020, the Lloyds Bank Group has not consulted with Deloitte regarding either:
the application of accounting principles to a specific transaction, either completed or proposed, or the type of audit opinion that might be rendered with respect to the consolidated financial statements of the Lloyds Bank Group and either a written report was provided to the Bank or oral advice was provided that Deloitte concluded was an important factor considered by the Bank in reaching a decision as to the accounting, auditing or financial reporting issue; or
any matter that was the subject of a disagreement, as that term is used in Item 16(F)(a)(1)(iv) of Form 20-F, or a reportable event as described in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F.
8398

REGULATION
APPROACH OF THE FINANCIAL CONDUCT AUTHORITY (“FCA”)
As per the Financial Services and Markets ActUnder FSMA (amended(as amended by the Financial Services Act 2012), the FCA has a strategic objective to ensure that the relevant markets function well. In support of this, the FCA has three operational objectives: to secure an appropriate degree of protection for consumers; to protect and enhance the integrity of the UK financial system and to promote effective competition in the interests of consumers.
The FCA Handbook sets out rules and guidance across a range of conduct issues with which financial institutions are required to comply including high level principles of business and detailed conduct of business standards and reporting standards.
APPROACH OF THE PRUDENTIAL REGULATION AUTHORITY (“PRA”)
The PRA is part of the Bank of England, with responsibility for the prudential regulation and supervision of circa 1,500 banks, building societies, credit unions, insurers and major investment firms. Theirsupervision. The PRA's strategy is to deliver a resilient financial sector by seeking: an appropriate quantity and quality of capital and liquidity; effective risk management; robust business models; and sound governance including clear accountability of firms’ management. This strategy supports theirits two statutory objectives: to promote the safety and soundness of these firms; and to contribute to the securing of an appropriate degree of protection for policyholders (for insurers).
Through regulation, theThe PRA Rulebook sets standards/policiesout rules and guidance across a range of prudential matters which it expects firms to meet, and monitors firm’s compliance. The supervision approach includes three key characteristics:
Use of judgement to determine whether financial firms are saferequired to comply with including areas such as fundamental rules; ring-fencing requirements; reporting and sound, whether insurers provide appropriate protection for policyholders and whether firms continue to meet the Threshold Conditions (including maintaining appropriate capital and liquidity, and having suitable management arrangements).
A forward looking approach to assess firms against risks which may arise in the future.
Focus on those issues and those firms that pose the greatest risk to the stability of the UK financial system and policyholders.
prudential treatments. The PRA will change a firm’sfirm's business model if they judgeit judges that mitigating risk measures are insufficient. Further to the UK implementation of CRD V a legal requirement has been established in the FSMA that requires the PRA to authorise UK parent financial holding companies (FHC) or mixed financial holding companies (MFHC) that have at least one bank or designated relevant investment firm as a subsidiary. As a result Lloyds Banking Group PLC ("the Company") has received authorisation to be recognised as the UK parent MFHC of the Group and is therefore responsible for ensuring prudential capital requirements are applied on a consolidated basis.
OTHER BODIES IMPACTING THE REGULATORY REGIME
THE BANK OF ENGLAND AND HM TREASURY
The agreed framework for co-operation in the field of financial stability in the financial markets is detailed in the Memorandum of Understanding published jointly by HM Treasury, the FCA and the Bank of England (now including the PRA) (together, the “Tripartite Authorities”). The Bank of England has specific responsibilities in relation to financial stability, including: (i) ensuring the stability of the monetary system; (ii) oversight of the financial system infrastructure, in particular payments systems in the UK and abroad; and (iii) maintaining a broad overview of the financial system through its monetary stability role.
HM TREASURY
HM Treasury is the government's economic and finance ministry, setting the direction of the UK's economic policy and working to achieve strong and sustainable economic growth. Its responsibilities include financial services policy such as banking and financial services regulation, financial stability, and ensuring competitiveness in the City: strategic oversight of the UK tax system: delivery of infrastructure projects across the public sector; and ensuring the economy is growing sustainably.
HMT is consulting on the Future Regulatory Framework, setting out proposals for adapting the UK financial services regulatory framework to ensure it remains fit for the future, and reflects position outside the EU.
UK FINANCIAL OMBUDSMAN SERVICE (“FOS”)
The FOS provides consumers with a free and independent service designed to resolve disputes where the customer is not satisfied with the response received from the regulated firm. The FOS resolves disputes for eligible persons that cover most financial products and services provided in (or from) the UK. The jurisdiction of the FOS extends to include firms conducting activities under the Consumer Credit Act 1974. Although the FOS takes account of relevant regulation and legislation, its guiding principle is to resolve cases individually on merit on the basis of what is fair and reasonable; in this regard, the FOS is not bound by law or even its own precedent. The final decisions made by the FOS are legally binding on regulated firms who also have a requirement under the FCA rules to ensure that lessons learned as a result of determinations by the FOS are effectively applied in future complaint handling.
BRITISH BANKERS RESOLUTION SERVICE
Lloyds Banking Group is also a member of the British Banking Resolution Service (BBRS). BBRS is a non-profit organisation set up to resolve disputes between eligible larger SME's and participating banks.
THE FINANCIAL SERVICES COMPENSATION SCHEME (“FSCS”)
The FSCS was established under the FSMA and is the UK’s statutory fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms. Companies within Lloyds Bankthe Group are responsible for contributing to compensation schemes in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers. The FSCS can pay compensation to customers if a firm is unable, or likely to be unable, to pay claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on firms authorised by the PRA and the FCA, including companies within Lloyds Bankthe Group.
LENDING STANDARDS BOARD (''LSB'')
The Lending Standards BoardLSB is responsible for overseeing the Standards of Lending Practice (for both personal and business customers). The Standards of Lending Practice for personal customers cover six main areas: Financial promotionsproduct and communications;service design; product sales; account maintenance and servicing; money management; financial difficulty; and customer vulnerability across key lending (current account overdrafts, credit cards, loans and chargecards) to consumers and charities with an income of less than £1 million.consumers. The Standards of Lending Practice for business customers apply to business customers (including Asset Finance), which at the point of lending have an annual turnover of up to £25 million. The standards cover nine main areas: product information; product sale; declined applications; product execution; credit monitoring; treatment of customers in financial difficulty; business support units; portfolio management; and customers in vulnerable circumstances for products including loans, overdrafts, commercial mortgages, credit cards, and chargecards. LSB is also responsible for overseeing the Contingent Reimbursement Model, Access to Banking Standard and Credit Card Market Study Remedies.
UK COMPETITION AND MARKETS AUTHORITY (“CMA”)
The objective of the CMA is to promote competition to ensure that markets work well for consumers, businesses and the economy. Since 1 April 2014 the CMA has, with the FCA, exercised the competition functions previously exercised by the Office of Fair Trading and the Competition Commission. Through its five strategic goals (delivering effective enforcement; extending competition frontiers; refocusing competition protection; achieving professional excellence; and, developing integrated performance) the CMA impacts the banking sector in a number of ways, including powers to investigate and prosecute a number of criminal offences under competition law. In addition, the CMA is now the lead enforcer under the Unfair Terms in Consumer Contracts Regulations 1999. The Government is consulting on "reforming competition and consumer policy" which intends to provide new powers to the CMA.
99

REGULATION
UK INFORMATION COMMISSIONER’S OFFICE ("ICO")
The UK Information Commissioner’s Office is the UK's independent authority set up to uphold information rights in the public interest, promoting openness by public bodies and data privacy for individuals. The ICO is responsible for overseeing implementation of the Data Protection Act 2018 which enshrines the General Data Protection Regulation. This Act regulates, among other things, the lawful use of data relating to individual customers. The Freedom of Information Act 2000 (the “FOIA”) sets out a scheme under which any person can obtain information held by, or on behalf of, a “public authority” without needing to justify the request. A public authority will not be required to disclose information if certain exemptions set out in the FOIA apply.
84

REGULATION
THE PAYMENTS SYSTEM REGULATOR (“PSR”)
The PSR is an independent economic regulator for the payment systems industry, which was launched in April 2015. Payment systems form a vital part of the UK’s financial system – they underpin the services that enable funds to be transferred between people and institutions. The purpose of PSR is to make payment systems work well for those that use them. The PSR is a subsidiary of the FCA, but has its own statutory objectives, Managing Director and Board. In summary its objectives are: (i) to ensure that payment systems are operated and developed in a way that considers and promotes the interests of all the businesses and consumers that use them; (ii) to promote effective competition in the markets for payment systems and services between operators, payment services providers and infrastructure providers; and (iii) to promote the development of and innovation in payment systems, in particular the infrastructure used to operate those systems.
REGULATORY HORIZON SCANNING
The Financial Services Regulatory Initiatives Forum launched in 2020 with the aim of improving coordination among UK regulatory authorities and assisting firms that are subject to financial services regulation to keep track of forthcoming initiatives. The Forum is comprised of the Bank of England, Prudential Regulation Authority, Financial Conduct Authority, Payment Systems Regulator and Competition and Markets Authority, with HM Treasury as an observer. On 7 May 2020, the Forum launched the Regulatory Initiatives Grid, which lists regulatory initiatives whose implementation is expected to have a significant operational impact on regulated firms. The Grid is published at least twice a year and includes information such as key milestones and an indicative impact score in relation to each initiative.
COMPETITION REGULATION
The FCA obtained concurrent competition powers with the CMA on 1 April 2015 in relation to the provision of financial services in the UK, in addition to supplementing its existing competition objective. The FCA has been undertaking a programme of work to assessassesses markets across financial services to ascertain whether or not competition is working effectively in the best interests of consumers. In addition, the PRA also has a secondary objective under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act to, so far as reasonably possible, act in a way which facilitates effective competition. In July 2019, the CMA signed memoranda of understanding with the FCA and the PSR, which sets out the arrangements for allocating cases, sharing information, dealing with confidentiality constraints, and pooling resources in relation to their concurrent objectives to promote competition. On 22nd December, the CMA signed memoranda of understanding with the FCA and the PSR, which sets out the arrangements for allocating cases, sharing information, dealing with confidentiality constraints and pooling resources in relation to their concurrent objectives to promote competition.
The FCA announced on 3 November 2016 that it will take action to improve competition in the current account market, following the CMA’s recommendations in the publication of its competition investigation into personal current account (PCA) and SME Banking (9 August 2016). The FCA has publishedIn its final report intofrom the ‘Strategic2021 "Strategic Review of Retail Banking Business Models’ (18 December 2018) recognising that PCAsModels" the FCA builds on the 2018 work and has found evidence of greater competition in Retail Banking, driving choice and lower prices for consumers and SMEs despite the pandemic. From its findings the FCA believes there remains significant room for further interventions to increase competition and innovation in retail banking, which are likely to be future areas of focus. The FCA also has an important source of competitive advantage for major banks. Theongoing focus on high cost credit, continues with the FCA publishingand introduced new rules on overdraft pricing effective April 2020 (these aim to make overdrafts simpler, fairer and easier to manage), and new rules for credit card customers in June 2019 to simplify the pricingpersistent debt, where they are paying more in interest, fees and charges than they are paying of all overdrafts and end higher prices for unarranged overdrafts and enable consumers to compare pricing by including annual percentage rates in advertising.their balance. The FCA implemented reforms inis currently evaluating the overdraft markets, which came into force in December 2019effectiveness of both new rules sets and April 2020, which amongst other things required simplified overdraft pricing via an annual interest rate, prices advertised using APRs banning of fixed charges, firms canmay make further changes if the improved customer outcomes it set out to achieve are not charge more for unarranged overdraft compared with an arranged.being delivered.
In February 2020 the CMA published a state of competition report to raise the collective understanding of the level of, and the trends in, competition across the UK economy. The main aim of this work is to better measure and understand the state of the UK competition now and in the future. Thus, Competitioncompetition can directly benefit individual consumers and the economy as a whole through offering services and encouraging innovation and promoting efficiency, all of which can contribute to economic growth and productivity. This is particularly important given the need to support recovery in the economy following the COVID 19COVID-19 pandemic.
The HM Treasury has launched the first phase ( a call for evidence on regulatory coordination) in its future Regulatory Framework Review (" the Review"). The Review as a whole has been triggered primarily by the UK's withdrawal from the EU which will require a recalibration of the regulatory framework.
The FCA continues to act as an observer on the "Open Banking" Steering Group and be involved in developing and testing "prompts" to encourage customers to consider their banking arrangements. The UK Government has a continuing interest in competition.
The current regulatory regime may lead to greater UK Government and regulatory scrutiny or intervention in the future, ranging from enforced product and service developments and payment system changes to significant structural changes. For example, HM Treasury are proposing the introduction of secondary objectives for the FCA and the PRA around international competitiveness, as part of the future Regulatory Framework Review. This could have a significant effect on Lloyds Bankthe Group’s operations, financial condition or the business of Lloyds Bankthe Group.
EU REGULATION
Following the UK’s withdrawalUK's withdraw from the EU, financial institutions operating in the UK are no longer directly subject to EU legislation. However,legislation, however, much of the EU derived legislation that previously applied to UK financial institutions has been incorporated into UK law through a process known as on shoring.on-shoring. It is possible that over time the UK will depart from EU derivedEU-derived financial regulatory standards. The Group will continue to monitor changes to legislation, providing specialist input on their drafting and assess the likely impact on its business.
See also “Regulatory and Legal Risks – Lloyds Bank Group faces risks associated with its compliance with a wide range of laws and regulations”, “Regulatory and Legal Risks - Legal and regulatory risk arising from the UK’s exit from the EU could adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s business, operations, financial condition and prospects” and “Regulatory and Legal Risks – Lloyds Banking Group and its subsidiaries, including Lloyds Bank Group, are subject to resolution planning requirements.
U.S. REGULATION
The existence ofLBCM maintains a branch of LBCM in the U.S. subjects LBCM,and Lloyds Bank maintains a representative office in the U.S. As a result, the Company and its subsidiaries doing business or conducting activities in the U.S. are subject to oversight by the Federal Reserve Board.
Each of the Lloyds Banking Group plc,Company, the Bank, HBOS and Bank of Scotland plc as well as the Bank's sister company and LBCM are treated as a financial holding company under the U.S. Bank Holding Company Act.Act of 1956. Financial holding companies may engage in a broader range of financial and related activities than are permitted to bank holding companies that do not maintain financial holding company status, including underwriting and dealing in all types of securities. A financial holding company and its depository institution subsidiaries must meet certain capital ratios and be deemed to be “well managed” for purposes of the Federal Reserve Board’s regulations. A financial holding company’s direct and indirect activities and investments in the United StatesU.S. are limited to those that are “financial in nature” or “incidental” or “complementary” to a financial activity, as determined by the Federal Reserve Board.
Financial holding companies may engage in a broader range of financial and related activities than are permitted to bank holding companies that do not maintain financial holding company status, including underwriting and dealing in all types of securities. A financial holding company and its depository institution subsidiaries must meet certain capital ratios and be deemed to be “well managed” for purposes of the Federal Reserve Board’s regulations. A financial holding company’s direct and indirect activities and investments in the United States are limited to those that are “financial in nature” or “incidental” or “complementary” to a financial activity, as determined by the Federal Reserve Board.
85

REGULATION
Financial holding companies are also subject to approval requirements in connection with certain acquisitions or investments. For example, Lloyds Banking Group plcthe Company is required to obtain the prior approval of the Federal Reserve Board before acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5 per cent of any class of the voting shares of any U.S. bank or bank holding company.
100

REGULATION
A major focus of U.S. governmental policy relating to financial institutions in recent years has been combating money laundering and terrorist financing and enforcing compliance with U.S. economic sanctions, with serious legal and reputational consequences for any failures arising in these areas. Lloyds Bank Group engages, or has engaged, in a limited amount of business with counterparties in certain countries which the U.S. State Department designated during the reporting period as state sponsors of terrorism, including Iran, Syria, SudanCuba and North Korea. Lloyds Bank Group intends to engage in new business in such jurisdictions only in very limited circumstances where the Group is satisfied concerning legal, compliance and reputational issues. At 31 December 2020,2021, Lloyds Bank Group did not believe that its business activities relating to countries designated as state sponsors of terrorism in 20202021 were material to its overall business.
Lloyds Bank Group estimates that the value of its business in respect of such states represented less than 0.01 per cent of its total assets and, for the year ended December 2020,2021, Lloyds Bank Group believes that itsthe Group’s revenues from all activities relating to such states were less than 0.001 per cent of its total income. This information has been compiled from various sources within Lloyds Bank Group, including information manually collected from relevant business units, and this has necessarily involved some degree of estimate and judgement.
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (the “Dodd-Frank Act”), established a regulatory framework for swap dealers and major swap participants including the requirement for entities that are swap dealers and major swap participants to register with the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”). The Bank was registered as a swap dealer and as such, wasis subject to regulation and supervision by the CFTCCommodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”) and the National Futures Association (''NFC'') with respect to certain of its swap activities, including risk management practices, trade documentation and reporting, business conduct and recordkeeping, among others. On 8th January 2020, the Bank filed an NFA Form 7-W with the NFA to deregister
A new United States Congress and Presidential administration took office in 2021, and as a swap dealer withresult, the CFTC, effective 7 February 2020. The NFA has confirmed to usnew administration could impose new or modified requirements that Lloyds Bank plc status is "in transition",materially impact the Company and confirmation of deregistration is anticipated imminently.its U.S. operations.
DISCLOSURE PURSUANT TO SECTION 219 OF THE IRAN THREAT REDUCTION AND SYRIA HUMAN RIGHTS ACT (ITRA)
Since the introduction of an enhanced financial sanctions policy, the Lloyds Bank Group has been proactive in reducing its dealings with Iran and individuals and entities associated with Iran. There remain a small number of historic Iran-related business activities which the Lloyds Bank Group has not yet been able to terminate for legal or contractual reasons.
Pursuant to ITRA Section 219, the Lloyds Bank Group notes that during 2020,2021, its non-US affiliates, Lloyds Bank plc and Bank of Scotland plc, received or made payments involving entities owned or controlled by the Government of Iran as defined under section 560.304 of title 31, Code of Federal Regulations, and/or designated under Executive Order 13382 or 13224. In all cases, the payment was permitted under UK and EU sanctions legislation, specific authority was sought from and granted by HM Treasury, the UK’s Competent Authority to provide such authorisations or the payment(s) were credited to a blocked account, held in the name of the entity, in accordance with UK and EC sanctions legislation.
Gross revenues from these activities were approximately £4,000.£12,000. Net profits from these activities were approximately £4,000.£12,000.
The Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses, being reported below, are conducted in compliance with applicable laws in respect of Iran and Syria sanctions and, except as noted below, the Lloyds Bank Group intends to continue these historic activities until it is able to legally terminate the contractual relationships or to maintain/ manage them in accordance with prevailing sanctions obligations. The nature of these activities is as follows:
1.Limited and infrequent payments made to and received from entities directly or indirectly linked to the Government of Iran. Such payments are only made if they comply with UK regulation and legislation and/or licence from the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control.
2.Payments made to a blocked account in the name of Commercial Bank of Syria related to historic guarantees, entered into by the Lloyds Bank Group between 1997 and 2008, the majority of which relate to Bail Bonds for vessels. The Commercial Bank of Syria is designated under Executive Order 13382.
3.Lloyds Bank Group continues to provide payment clearing services to a UK based and UK authorised bank, one of whose account holders is an entity designated under Executive Order 13224 (although not by the UK or EU authorities). Lloyds Bank Group concludes from the nature of such payment clearing services that revenue and profit (if any) arising from indirectly providing such services to the designated entity is negligible and not material to the Lloyds Bank Group’s activities and in any event does not flow directly from the designated entity. To the extent that the activities of the designated entity and its UK authorised bank continue to comply with UK regulation and legislation, Lloyds Bank Group intends to continue its activities and keep them under review.
86101

LISTING INFORMATION
TRADING MARKETS
The ordinary shares of Lloyds Bank plc are not listed or traded on any stock exchange.

DIVIDENDS

Lloyds Bank plc’s ability to pay dividends is restricted under UK company law. Dividends may only be paid if distributable profits are available for that purpose. In the case of a public limited company, a dividend may only be paid if the amount of net assets is not less than the aggregate of the called-up share capital and undistributable reserves and if the payment of the dividend will not reduce the amount of the net assets to less than that aggregate. In addition, as a regulated entity, the Bank cannot pay a dividend if the payment of such dividend would result in regulatory capital requirements not being met. Similar restrictions exist over the ability of the Bank’s subsidiary companies to pay dividends to their immediate parent companies. Furthermore, in the case of Lloyds Bank plc, dividends may only be paid if sufficient distributable profits are available for distributions due in the financial year on certain preferred securities. The board has the discretion to decide whether to pay a dividend and the amount of any dividend.
The table below sets out the interim and final dividends paid by the Bank for fiscal years 20162017 through 2020.
The directors have proposed an interim dividend of £1,000 million to be paid in May 2021.
Final dividends
for previous
year paid during
current year
£ million
Interim
dividends
£ million
Total
dividends
£ million
Final dividends
for previous
year paid during
current year
£ million
Interim
dividends
£ million
Total
dividends
£ million
2016— 3,040 3,040 
20172017— 2,650 2,650 2017— 2,650 2,650 
20182018— 11,022 11,022 2018— 11,022 11,022 
20192019— 4,100 4,100 2019— 4,100 4,100 
20202020   2020— — — 
20212021 2,900 2,900 

87102

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANK PLC
For information regardingLloyds Bank plc is incorporated in England and Wales under the UK Companies Acts with registered number 2065.
Lloyds Banking Group plc (registered in Scotland under number SC 095000) is the holding company of Lloyds Bank plc.
Lloyds Bank plc adopted amended Articles of Association on 1 March 2022. A summary of certain provisions of such amended Articles of Association (being the Articles of Association please referin effect at the date of this Annual Report) and certain relevant provisions of the Companies Act 2006 (the “2006 Act”) where appropriate and as relevant to the discussionholders of any class of share are set out below. The following summary description is qualified in its entirety by reference to the terms and provisions of the Articles of Association which appears at Exhibit 1.
RIGHTS ATTACHING TO SHARES
Any share in Lloyds Bank plc may be issued with such rights or restrictions as Lloyds Bank plc may from time to time determine by ordinary resolution or as otherwise provided in the Articles of Association.
Lloyds Bank plc may issue any shares which are, or at Lloyds Bank plc or the holder’s option are, liable to be redeemed. The directors of Lloyds Bank plc may determine the terms and conditions and manner of such redemption.
VOTING RIGHTS
For the purposes of determining which persons are entitled to attend or vote at a meeting and how many votes such persons may cast, every holder of ordinary shares is entitled to be present and to vote at a general meeting of Lloyds Bank plc. Every holder of ordinary shares who is present (either in person or by electronic means, including any corporation by its duly authorised representative) at a general meeting of Lloyds Bank plc and is entitled to vote will have one vote on a show of hands and, on a poll, if present in person or by proxy, will have one vote for every such share held by them. No voting rights attach to the preference shares.
There are no limitations imposed by UK law or the Articles of Association restricting the rights of non-residents of the UK or non-citizens of the UK to hold or vote shares of Lloyds Bank plc.
GENERAL MEETINGS
Annual general meetings of Lloyds Bank plc are to be held at a place, date and time as may be determined by the directors. All other general meetings may be convened whenever the directors think fit and shall be requisitioned in accordance with the requirements of the Articles of Association.
Lloyds Bank plc must prepare a notice of meeting in respect of a general meeting in accordance with the requirements of the Articles of Association and the 2006 Act. Lloyds Bank plc must give at least 21 clear days’ notice in writing of an annual general meeting, or a general meeting called for the passing of a special resolution or a resolution appointing a person as a director. All other general meetings may be called by at least 14 clear days’ notice in writing. Should there be a requirement to call an annual general meeting on short notice, consent is required from all shareholders entitled to attend and vote in order to hold the annual general meeting on short notice. For other general meetings, consent to short notice is required from a majority in number of shareholders entitled to attend and vote at the meeting. This majority must together hold at least 95% of the shares giving the right to attend and vote at the meeting.
The directors may decide to hold any general meeting as a combined physical and electronic general meeting or an electronic-only general meeting. In such case, the directors will provide details of the means for members to attend and participate in the meeting, including the physical place or places of meeting and the electronic platforms to be used. The directors and the chair of a combined physical and electronic general meeting, or an electronic-only general meeting, may make any arrangement and impose any requirement or restriction as is: (i) necessary to ensure the identification of those taking part and the security of the electronic communication; and (ii) proportionate to achieving these objectives.
The processes and procedures for the conduct of a general meeting (including adjourning meetings, voting, amending resolutions and appointing proxies) is established under the corresponding sectionArticles of Association and the 2006 Act.
At any general meeting which is held only as a physical meeting, a resolution put to the vote of the Annual Reportmeeting will be decided on Form 20-Fa poll unless the chair determines that the resolution will be decided on a show of hands. At any general meeting which is held as a combined physical and electronic meeting, any resolution and any proposed amendments to it put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a poll.
As Lloyds Bank plc is a wholly-owned subsidiary, the quorum necessary for the year ended 31 December 2019, filedtransaction of business at a general meeting is one member present at the general meeting or represented by proxy and entitled to vote.
DIVIDENDS AND OTHER DISTRIBUTIONS AND RETURN OF CAPITAL
Under the 2006 Act, before Lloyds Bank plc can lawfully make a distribution, it must ensure that it has sufficient distributable reserves (accumulated, realised profits, so far as not previously utilised by distribution or capitalisation, less accumulated, realised losses, so far as not previously written off in a reduction or reorganisation of capital duly made). Under the Articles of Association (and subject to statute) the directors are entitled to set aside out of the profits of Lloyds Bank plc any sums as they think proper which, at their discretion, shall be applicable for any purpose to which the profits of Lloyds Bank plc may be applied.
The shareholders in general meeting may by ordinary resolution declare dividends to be paid to members of Lloyds Bank plc, but no dividends shall be declared in excess of the amount recommended by the directors. The directors may pay fixed dividends on any class of shares carrying a fixed dividend and may also from time to time pay dividends, interim or otherwise, on shares of any class as they think fit. Except in so far as the rights attaching to any shares otherwise provide, all dividends shall be apportioned and paid pro rata according to the amounts paid up thereon.
Subject to any rights which may be attached to any other class of shares, the profits of the company available for dividend and resolved to be distributed shall be distributed by way of dividend among the holders of the ordinary shares.
In addition, Lloyds Bank plc may by ordinary resolution direct the payment of a dividend in whole or in part by the distribution of specific assets (a non-cash distribution).
On any distribution by way of capitalisation, the amount to be distributed will be appropriated amongst the persons who would have been entitled to it if it were distributed by way of dividend and in the same proportions. Any capitalised sum may be applied in paying up new shares of a nominal amount equal to the capitalised sum which are then allotted credited as fully paid to the persons entitled or as they may direct.
Any dividend or other moneys payable to a member that has not been cashed or claimed after a period of 12 years from the date of declaration of such dividend or other moneys payable to a member will be forfeited and revert to Lloyds Bank plc. Lloyds Bank plc shall be entitled to use such unclaimed dividend or other moneys payable to a member for its benefit in any manner that the directors may think fit. The payment of any such dividend or other moneys into a separate account does not make Lloyds Bank plc a trustee in respect of such sum.
103

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANK PLC
On a return of assets, whether in a winding-up, the assets of the company available for distribution among the members shall be applied first in repaying the holders of any preference shares from time to time issued by the company ranking equally therewith in the amounts paid up plus any accrued but unpaid dividend thereon (or credited as paid up) on such share (or as otherwise provided in terms of such shares). On a return of assets on a winding up, the balance of such assets, subject to any other class of shares, shall be distributed to each holder of the ordinary shares rateably by reference to the proportion of ordinary share capital held by that holder, relative to the aggregate total issued ordinary share capital.
Lloyds Bank plc’s ordinary shares do not confer any rights of redemption. Rights of redemption in respect of Lloyds Bank plc’s preference shares shall be at the option of the company at such time and date as the directors may determine.
Under the Articles of Association and the 2006 Act, the liability of shareholders is limited to the amount (if any) for the time being unpaid on the shares held by that shareholder.
VARIATION OF RIGHTS AND ALTERATION OF CAPITAL
Subject to the provisions of the 2006 Act and every other statute for the time being in force or any judgment or order of any court of competent jurisdiction concerning companies and affecting Lloyds Bank plc (the statutes), the rights attached to any class of shares for the time being in issue may be varied or abrogated with the SECsanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of shares of that class. At any such separate meeting, the provisions of the Articles of Association relating to general meetings will apply, as may be amended by the terms of the relevant share class.
Any special rights attached to any class of shares having preferential rights will not be deemed to be varied by the creation or issue of further shares ranking in some or all respects equally to such class (but not in priority thereto).
As a matter of UK law, Lloyds Bank plc may, by ordinary resolution, increase its share capital, consolidate and divide all or any of its shares into shares of larger amount, sub-divide all or any of its shares into shares of smaller amount and cancel any shares not taken or agreed to be taken by any person. Where a consolidation or subdivision of shares would result in fractions of a share, the directors may sell the shares representing the fractions for the best price reasonably obtainable, and distribute the net proceeds of such sale to the relevant members entitled to such proceeds.
Subject to the provisions of the statutes, Lloyds Bank plc may, by special resolution, reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve, share premium account or other undistributable reserve in any way.
TRANSFER OF SHARES
All transfers of shares may be effected by transfer in writing in any usual form or in any other form approved by the directors and must be executed by or on 23 March 2020,behalf of the transferor. The transferor will remain the holder of the shares transferred until the name of the transferee is entered in the register of members of Lloyds Bank plc in respect thereof.
Any share may at any time be transferred to Lloyds Banking Group plc or to any subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc. Otherwise, the directors may in their absolute discretion and without assigning any reason therefor, refuse to register any transfer of shares (whether fully paid or not). If the directors refuse to register a transfer of a share, the instrument of transfer must be returned to the transferee with the notice of the refusal unless they suspect that the proposed transfer may be fraudulent. No fee may be charged for registering any instrument of transfer or other document relating to or affecting the title to any share. Lloyds Bank plc may retain any instrument of transfer which discussion is hereby incorporatedregistered.
UNTRACED MEMBERS
Lloyds Bank plc is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc. As such, there are no specific provisions in its Articles of Association regarding untraced members.
WINDING-UP
Any winding up of Lloyds Banking plc shall be undertaken in accordance with relevant insolvency legislation, the 2006 Act, regulation, rules or as otherwise required by reference intolaw.
DIRECTORS
Subject to any other provision of the Articles of Association, the number of directors of Lloyds Bank plc shall be no fewer than two and is not subject to any maximum. The directors may elect from them a chair and may at any time remove them from that office.
The business and affairs of Lloyds Bank plc shall be managed by the directors, who may exercise all such powers of Lloyds Bank plc (including its borrowing powers) as are not by the statutes or by the Articles of Association required to be exercised by Lloyds Bank plc in general meeting, subject to the Articles of Association, to the provisions of the statutes and to such regulations as may be set by special resolution of Lloyds Bank plc, but no regulation so made by Lloyds Bank plc will invalidate any prior act of the directors which would have been valid if such regulation had not been made.
The directors may confer upon any director holding any executive office any of the powers exercisable by them on such terms and conditions, and with such restrictions, as they think fit. The directors may also delegate any of their powers to committees. Any such committee shall have power to sub-delegate to sub-committees or to any person any of the powers delegated to it. The directors may make regulations in relation to the procedures of committees or sub-committees to whom their powers or discretions have been delegated or sub-delegated. Subject to any such regulations, the meetings and procedures of any committee or sub-committee shall be governed by the provisions of the Articles of Association regulating the meetings and procedures of Director. The directors may also grant powers of attorney to appoint a company, firm or person (or body of persons) to be the attorneys for Lloyds Bank plc with such powers, authorities and discretions and for such period and subject to such conditions as the directors think fit.
The directors may meet to consider this document.business of Lloyds Bank plc as they think fit. Any director, and secretary at the request of a director, may summon a meeting on request. The quorum necessary for the transaction of business of the directors may be fixed from time to time by the directors and unless so fixed at any other number shall be two. Questions arising at any meeting of the directors shall be determined by a majority of votes. In the case of an equality of votes, the chair of the meeting shall have a casting vote (unless the chair of the meeting is not to be counted as participating in the decision-making process for quorum or voting purposes).
https://www.lloydsbankinggroup.com/assets/pdfs/investors/financial-performance/lloyds-bank-plc/2019/2019-lb-form-20f.pdfDIRECTORS’ APPOINTMENT
The Articles of Association provide that a director may be appointed: (i) by ordinary resolution of Lloyds Bank plc; (ii) by a decision of the directors; and/or (iii) by a shareholder or shareholders holding in aggregate a majority of the nominal value of the shares giving notice to Lloyds Bank plc. The Articles of Association do not require retirement by rotation.

104

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANK PLC
REMOVAL OF A DIRECTOR AND VACATION FROM OFFICE
Subject to statute, Lloyds Bank plc may remove any director from office by ordinary resolution of which special notice has been given. The officer of a director will be vacated in the following circumstances:
the director becomes prohibited by law from acting as a director;
the director creases to be a directors by virtue of any provision of the 2006 Act;
the director resigns in writing to Lloyds Bank plc and the directors resolve to accept such offer of resignation;
if a bankruptcy order is made against such director;
if a composition is made with that person’s creditors generally in satisfaction of that person’s debts;
if a registered medical practitioner who is treating that person gives a written opinion to Lloyds Bank plc stating that that person has become physically or mentally incapable of acting as a director and may remain so for more than three months;
if notice of termination is served or deemed served upon the director and that notice is given by all the other directors for the time being;
if notice of the directors removal is given by shareholders; or
if the director is absent from meetings of directors for six months without permission and the directors resolve that such director’s office be vacated.
DIRECTORS’ SHARE QUALIFICATION
A director is not required to hold any shares of Lloyds Bank plc by way of qualification.
DIRECTORS’ INDEMNITY/INSURANCE
So far as may be permitted by the statutes, any person who is or was at any time a director, may be indemnified by Lloyds Bank plc against any liability incurred by them in connection with any negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust by them in relation to Lloyds Bank plc and all costs, charges, losses, expenses and liabilities incurred in the execution of their duties, the actual or purported exercise of their powers or otherwise in connection with their duties, powers or offices. The directors of Lloyds Bank plc may also purchase and maintain insurance in respect of such liabilities.
AUTHORISATION OF DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS
Subject to the provisions of the statutes, the directors can authorise any matter which would or might otherwise constitute or cause a breach of the duty of a director to avoid a situation in which they have or can have a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of Lloyds Bank plc.
Any authorisation of a matter under the Articles of Association shall extend to any actual or potential conflict of interest which may reasonably be expected to arise out of the matter so authorised.
A director shall not, save as otherwise agreed by them, be accountable to Lloyds Bank plc for any benefit which they (or a person connected with them) derives from any matter authorised by the directors and any contract, transaction or arrangement relating thereto shall not be liable to be avoided on the grounds of any such benefit.
Lloyds Bank plc may by ordinary resolution ratify any contract, transaction or arrangement, or other proposal, not properly authorised under the Articles of Association.
MATERIAL INTERESTS
In general, the 2006 Act requires that a director disclose to Lloyds Bank plc any personal interest that they may have and all related material information and documents known to them, in connection with any existing or proposed transaction by Lloyds Bank plc. The disclosure is required to be made promptly and in any event, no later than at the board of directors meeting in which the transaction is first discussed.
Subject to the provisions of the statutes, the director (or a person connected with them), provided that the director has declared the nature and extent of any interest as required under the Articles of Association:
may be a director or other officer of, or be employed by, or otherwise interested (including by the holding of shares) in Lloyds Bank plc, a subsidiary undertaking of Lloyds Bank plc, any holding company of Lloyds Bank plc, a subsidiary undertaking of any such holding company, or any body corporate promoted by Lloyds Bank plc or in which Lloyds Bank plc is otherwise interested (a relevant company);
may be a party to, or otherwise interested in, any contract, transaction or arrangement with a relevant company (or in which the company is otherwise interested);
may have an interest which cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest;
may have an interest, or a transaction or arrangement giving rise to such an interest, of which the director is not aware; and
may have any other interest authorised under the Articles of Association or by an ordinary shareholder resolution.
A director shall not be entitled to vote on any resolution in respect of any contract, transaction or arrangement, or any other proposal, in which the director (or a person connected with the director) has an interest, unless the interest is solely of a kind by the Articles of Association as set out above.
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
If a director, otherwise than by virtue of their position as director, receives information in respect of which they owe a duty of confidentiality to a person other than Lloyds Bank plc, they shall not be required to disclose such information to Lloyds Bank plc or otherwise use or apply such confidential information for the purpose of or in connection with the performance of their duties as a director, provided that such an actual or potential conflict of interest arises from a permitted or authorised interest under the Articles of Association. This is without prejudice to any equitable principle or rule of law which may excuse or release the director from disclosing information, in circumstances where disclosure may otherwise be required under the Articles of Association.

105

ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF LLOYDS BANK PLC
REMUNERATION
The directors shall be entitled to such remuneration as Lloyds Bank plc as the directors may determine, except that such remuneration shall not exceed £4,000,000 per annum in aggregate or such higher amount as may from time to time be determined by ordinary resolution. Unless the resolution provides otherwise, the remuneration shall be divisible among the directors as they may agree, or, failing agreement, equally, except that any director who shall hold office for part only of the period in respect of which such remuneration is payable shall be entitled only to remuneration in proportion to the period during which such Director has held office.
Any director who holds an executive office, or who serves on any committee of the directors, or who otherwise performs services which in the opinion of the directors are outside the scope of the ordinary duties of a director, may be paid extra remuneration by way of salary, commission or otherwise or may receive such other benefits as the directors may determine in their discretion. Such extra remuneration or other benefits are in addition to, or in substitution for, any or all of a director’s entitlement to ordinary remuneration.
Lloyds Bank plc may pay to any director any reasonable expenses as they may properly incur in connection with attending meetings of the directors or of any committee of the directors or general meetings or separate meetings of the holders of any class of shares or debentures of Lloyds Bank plc or otherwise in connection with the exercise of their powers and the discharge of their responsibilities in relation to Lloyds Bank plc. The directors have the power to pay and agree to pay gratuities, pensions or other retirement, superannuation, death or disability benefits to, or to any person in respect of, any director or ex-director.

106

EXCHANGE CONTROLS

There are no UK laws, decrees or regulations that restrict Lloyds Bank plc’s import or export of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by the Lloyds Bank Group; or that affect the remittance of dividends, interest or other payments to non-UK holders of its securities.


TAXATION

Lloyds Bank plc does not have any listed shares or American Depositary Shares (ADSs). The Bank’s holding company, Lloyds Banking Group plc, has listed shares and ADSs, and includes in its Form 20-F a discussion intended as a general guide to current UK and US federal income tax considerations relevant to US holders of Lloyds Banking Group plc ordinary shares or ADSs.


WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

The SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov which contains, in electronic form, each of the reports and other information that the Group has filed electronically with the SEC.
References herein to Lloyds Banking Group and Lloyds Bank Group websites are textual references only and information on or accessible through such websites does not form part of and is not incorporated into this Form 20-F.


ENFORCEABILITY OF CIVIL LIABILITIES

Lloyds Bank plc is a public limited company incorporated under the laws of England. Most of Lloyds Bank plc’s directors and executive officers and certain of the experts named herein are residents of the UK. A substantial portion of the assets of Lloyds Bank plc, its subsidiaries and such persons, are located outside the United States. As a result, it may not be possible for investors to effect service of process within the United States upon all such persons or to enforce against them in US courts judgments obtained in such courts, including those predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the federal securities laws of the United States. Furthermore, Lloyds Bank plc has been advised by its solicitors that there is doubt as to the enforceability in the UK, in original actions or in actions for enforcement of judgments of US courts, of certain civil liabilities, including those predicated solely upon the federal securities laws of the United States.
88107

RISK FACTORS
Set out below is a summary of certain risk factors which could affect the Lloyds Bank Group’s future results and may cause them to differ from expected results materially. The factors discussed below should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties that the Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses face. This section should be read in conjunction with the more detailed information contained in this document, including as set forth in sections entitled “Business”, “Regulation” and “Operating and financial review and prospects”. For information on the Lloyds Bank Group’s risk management policies and procedures, (including the elevation of climate risk to a principal risk during 2020), see “Lloyds Bank Group — Operating“Operating and financial review and prospects — Risk Management”.
ECONOMIC AND FINANCIAL RISKS
1.Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macroeconomic conditions in the UK in particular, but also in the Eurozone, the U.S., Asia and globally
Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general and sector-specific economic conditions in the markets in which it operates, particularly the UK, where Lloyds Bank Group’s earnings are predominantly generated, and its operations are increasingly concentrated following the strategic reduction of its international presence.concentrated. Whilst Lloyds Bank Group’s revenues are predominantly generated in the UK, Lloyds Bank Group does have some credit exposure in countries outside the UK even if it does not have a presence in suchall of these countries. Any further significant macroeconomic deterioration in the UK and/or other economies as a result of the COVID-19, pandemic, or otherwise could lead to increased unemployment, reduced corporate profitability, reduced personal income levels, inflationary pressures, including those arising from sterling’sSterling’s depreciation, reduced UK Government and/or consumer expenditure, increased corporate, SMEsmall and medium-sized enterprises (“SME”) or personal insolvency rates, increased tax rates, borrowers’ reduced ability to repay loans, increased tenant defaults, fluctuations in commodity prices and changes in foreign exchange rates, which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of Lloyds Bank Group.
The effects on the UK, European and global economies following the UK’s exit from the EU and the impact of the EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement signed on 30 December 2020 (the “EU-UK TCA”) remain difficult to predict but may include economic and financial instability in the UK, Europe and the global economy, constitutional instability in the UK (including the possibility of a further Scottish independence referendum and a decision in favour of Scotland leaving the UK), and the other types of risks described in “Regulatory and Legal Risks — Legal and regulatory risk arising from the UK’s exit from the EU could adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects”. In
The recent and persistent acceleration of inflation in the UK which has been triggered by a number of factors including interruptions to the global supply chain, caused by measures taken by various governments to control the spread of COVID-19; labour shortages, absences and mismatches in skills resulting from the disruption of the pandemic, and from workers leaving the UK following the UK’s exit from the EU; and rising energy costs; could adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s retail and corporate customers and their ability to service their contractual obligations, including to Lloyds Bank Group (see "Lloyds Bank Group's business is subject to risks relating to the COVID-19 pandemic" and the "Lloyds Bank Group's businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning borrower and counterparty credit quality which have affected and may adversely impact the recoverability and value of assets on the Lloyds Bank Group's balance sheet").
Increases in the UK’s interest rates, necessitated by accelerating inflation may put pressure on household incomes and business costs, and could potentially adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group's profitability and prospects. Furthermore, such market conditions may result in an increase in Lloyds Bank Group's pension deficit. Conversely, in the event of any further substantial weakening in the UK’s economic growth, the possibility of decreases in interest rates by the Bank of England (the "BoE) or sustained low or negative interest rates would put further pressure on the Lloyds Bank Group’s interest margins and potentially adversely affect its profitability and prospects. Furthermore, such market conditions may also result in an increase in Lloyds Bank Group’s pension deficit.
In the Eurozone, the economic outlook is also remains uncertain. High levels of private and public debt, continued weakness in the financial sector and reform fatigue remain a concern. Conversely, furtherFurther monetary policy stimulus from the European Central Bank could undermine financial stability by encouraging a further build-up of unsustainable debt. In addition, political uncertainty in the Eurozone, and fragmentation risk in the EU, could create financial instability and have a negative impact on the Eurozone and global economies. Any default on the sovereign debt of a Eurozone country and the resulting impact on other Eurozone countries, including the potential that some countries could leave the Eurozone, could materially affect the capital and the funding position of participants in the banking industry, including Lloyds Bank Group.
Moreover, the effects on the European, the UK European and global economies of the exit of one or more EU member states from the Economic and Monetary Union, or the redenomination of financial instruments from the Euro to a different currency, are extremely uncertain and very difficult to predict and protect fully against in view of: (i) the potential for economic and financial instability in the Eurozone and possibly in the UK; (ii) the lasting impact on governments’ financial positions of the global financial crisis and the COVID-19 pandemic; (iii) the uncertain legal position; and (iv) the fact that many of the risks related to the business are totally, or in part, outside the control of Lloyds Bank Group. If any such events were to occur, they may result in: (a) significant market dislocation; (b) heightened counterparty risk; (c) an adverse effect on the management of market risk and, in particular, asset and liability management due, in part, to redenomination of financial assets and liabilities; (d) an indirect risk of counterparty failure; or (e) further political uncertainty in the UK or other countries, any of which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of Lloyds Bank Group.
U.S. economic policies may have an adverse effect on both U.S. and global growth as well as global trade prospects. In addition, concerns remain around theThe expected continued tightening of US monetary policy may also have an adverse impact of increased tariffs on trade between the U.S. and other nations including China, Canada and the EU. The potential for escalation of trade disputes and any retaliatory actions taken may adversely impact the global economic outlook.economy
Macroeconomic uncertainty in emerging markets in the wake of the COVID-19 pandemic, in particular the slowdown of international trade and industrial production, as well as the high and growing level of debt in China may be exacerbated by attempts to de-risk its highly leveraged economy, or a devaluation of the Renminbi. External debt levels are higher now in emerging markets than before the global financial crisis, which could lead to higher levels of defaults and non-performing loans. The exit from highly accommodative U.S. monetary policy could intensify financial pressures on emerging markets.
Any adverse changes affecting the economies of the countries in which the Lloyds Bank Group has significant direct and indirect credit exposures and any further deterioration in global macroeconomic conditions, including as a result of geopolitical events, global health issues, including the COVID-19 pandemic (see "Economic and Financial Risks - RisksLloyds Bank Group's business is subject to risks relating to the impact of COVID-19"COVID-19 pandemic") or acts of war or terrorism, could have a material adverse effect on the Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects. Increased tensions between members of the North Atlantic Treaty Organisation (NATO) and Russia over Ukraine and the imposition of sanctions, could have significant adverse economic effects on financial markets and on energy costs, and may also result in increased cyber attacks and an increase in costs associated with such cyber attacks, all of which could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects. Any further deterioration in the relationship between the U.S. and China could also lead to an increase in tensions, with adverse economic effects for the global economy.
108

RISK FACTORS
2.TheLloyds Bank Group's business is subject to risks relating to the COVID-19 pandemic
Whilst it is possible that the UK may be showing early signs of COVID-19 becoming more endemic, the highly contagious nature of COVID-19 variants such as Delta and Omicron, show that new and even more harmful variants of COVID-19 may continue to adversely impact public health and the economy for the foreseeable future. Furthermore, other countries are at varying stages of the pandemic, and any further deterioration in macroeconomic conditions (both globally and in the UK) as a result of COVID-19 and any restrictions imposed to address COVID-19 related developments, could continue to adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects for a number of years.
The global pandemic from the outbreak of COVID-19 continues to cause widespread disruption to normal patterns of business activity across the world, including in the UK, and volatility in financial markets. Measures taken to contain the health impact of the COVID-19 pandemic have resulted in an adverse impact on economic activity across the world and the duration of these measures remains uncertain. Monetary policy loosening has supported asset valuations across many financial markets, but longer-term impacts on consumer demand and behaviours, inflation, interest rates, credit spreads, foreign exchange rates and commodity, equity and bond prices remain unclear.
Synchronisation of emergencyEmergency measures to slow the spread of COVID-19 across the world hashave brought about rapid deterioration in economic growth across all countries and regions, directly adversely impacting the UK through many channels, including trade and capital flows. The recession willThis is likely to have a lasting negative impact on the future path of global GDP, through its impact on human and physical capital accumulation, and supply chain disruption. The UK experienced a deep contraction in economic activity during 2020 as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, andwith activity rebounding in 2021, but both private and public sector debt have risen significantly. If the economic downturn damage were to be prolonged significantly by inability to control COVID-19 spread with vaccines, public finances would likely continue to deteriorate and could result in a sovereign downgrade that could also impact the credit ratings of Lloyds Bank Group. Rating downgrades could have a material adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to raise funding in the wholesale markets (see “Economic and Financial Risks - A reduction in the Bank and its rated
89

RISK FACTORS
subsidiaries' longer-term credit rating could materially adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects").
Further,Furthermore, the economic impact of the COVID-19 pandemic, including increased levels of unemployment, corporate insolvencies and business failures, and other disruptions as a result of COVID-19, including labour shortages, could adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s retail or corporate customers and their ability to service their contractual obligations, including to the Lloyds Bank Group. Adverse changes in the credit quality of Lloyds Bank Group’s borrowers and counterparties or collateral held in support of exposures, or in their behaviour, may reduce the value of Lloyds Bank Group’s assets and materially increase its write-downs and allowances for impairment losses. This could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
As a result of recent monetary policy actions, interest rates have declined substantially and financial markets are applying an increased probability to a wider use of unconventional policy tools such as negativewith rising inflation, real interest rates.rates have become negative. In many countries, interest rates have already turned negative or are very close to zero and governments including the UK, are borrowing at negative yields and negative real yields. If negativeWhile the direction of policy has now moved to increasing interest rates, werethey remain negative in real terms and so could have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group's net income and profitability. Similarly, if interest rates rise too fast and/or are increased to be applied in the UK and U.S.,a relatively high level, they couldcan also have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s net income and profitability.
The effect of the COVID-19 viruspandemic on emerging markets increases the risks already identified from the slowdown of growth and trade, with limited capacity to respond effectively to the crisis, impacting growth and potentially increasing the risk of default on debt.
Governments, central banks and regulators across the world are takinghave taken significant action to address this economic impact, which has led to a deep recession in the UK and globally.globally, from which (as at the date of publication of this Annual Report on 20-F), there has yet to be a complete recovery. Governments are likely to continue to be judged for their policy responses and success in vaccine rollouts whichagainst existing and new variants. This could result in political upheaval and destabilise governments and political movements even after the pandemic has passed. There is also the possibility that vaccines are not as effective as expected against current or future strains of coronavirus, which could result in significantlyfurther extended lockdowns or restrictions.
In addition to providing support under government support schemes, theLloyds Bank Group has taken specific measures to alleviate the impact on Lloyds Bank Group's customers or borrowers, including payment holidays which, taken together with lower interest rates and restrictions on fees associated with certain products, may have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial conditions or prospects. Additionally, although the UK Government and the Bank of England have provided certain guarantees to banks relating to lending schemes that have been initiated to support businesses through the current COVID-19 pandemic, there is a risk that in some circumstances, Lloyds Bank Group may not be able to claim under the guarantees, or the claim may be rejected, if, for example, it later transpires that all terms and conditions under the relevant guarantee scheme were not met when the lending was originated.
As a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, the potential for conduct and compliance risks (see “Business and Operational Risks – Lloyds Bank Group is exposed to conduct risk”) as well as operational risks materialising has increased, notably in the areas of cyber, fraud, people, technology, operational resilience and where there is reliance on third-party suppliers. In addition to the key operational risks, new risks are likely to arise as Lloyds Bank Group may need to change its ways of working whilst managing any instances of COVID-19 among its employees and locations to ensure continuity and support to colleagues and customers.
Any and all such events described above could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s business, financial condition, results of operations, prospects, liquidity, capital position and credit ratings (including potential changes of outlooks or ratings), as well as on its customers, borrowers, counterparties, employees and suppliers.
3.Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning borrower and counterparty credit quality which have affected and may adversely impact the recoverability and value of assets on Lloyds Bank Group’s balance sheet
Lloyds Bank Group has exposures to many different products, counterparties, obligors and other contractual relationships and the credit quality of its exposures can have a significant impact on its earnings. Credit risk exposures are categorised as either “retail” or “corporate” and reflect the risks inherent in Lloyds Bank Group’s lending and lending-related activities.
Adverse changes in the credit quality of Lloyds Bank Group’s UK and/or international borrowers and counterparties or collateral held in support of exposures, or in their behaviour or businesses, may reduce the value of Lloyds Bank Group’s assets and materially increase its write-downs and allowances for impairment losses. Credit risk can be affected by a range of factors outside Lloyds Bank Group’s control, which include but are not limited to an adverse economic environment, the effect of the UK’s withdrawal from the EU and the operation of the EU-UK TCA, any adverse consequences resulting from the unwinding of the UK Government's COVID-19 support measures, increased unemployment, reduced UK and global consumer and/or government spending and benefits and changes in consumer and customer demands and requirements, reduced income levels, reduced corporate profits, high and persistent inflation (including that driven by supply chain issues, labour shortages and rising energy costs), increasing and / or sustained high interest rates, changes in the credit rating of individual counterparties, over-
109

RISK FACTORS
indebtedness and the debt levels of individual contractual counterparties, increased unemployment or reduced income, reduced asset values, increased personal or corporate insolvency levels, falling stock and bond/other financial markets, reduced corporate profits, over-indebtedness, changes in interest rates or foreign exchange rates, counterparty challenges to the interpretation or validity of contractual arrangements, an increase in credit spreads, changes to insolvency regimes which make it harder to enforce against counterparties, counterparty challenges to the interpretation or validity of contractual arrangements, reduced asset values, falling stock and bond/other financial markets, changes in consumer and customer demands and requirements,interest rates or foreign exchange rates, an increase in credit spreads, negative reputational impact or direct campaigns which adversely impact customers, industries or sectors and any external factors of a political, legislative, environmental or regulatory nature, including changes in accounting rules and changes to tax legislation and rates,rates; noting that some of which arethe above factors have been materially heightened by the current COVID-19 pandemic.
In particular, Lloyds Bank Group has exposure to concentration risk where its business activities focus particularly on a single obligor, related/connected group of obligors or a similar type of customer (borrower, sovereign, financial institution or central counterparty), product, industrial sector or geographic location, including the UK.
Lloyds Bank Group’s credit exposure includes residential mortgage lending (in the UK and, to a lesser extent, the Netherlands) and commercial real estate lending, including lending secured against secondary and tertiary commercial property assets in the UK. As a result, decreases in residential or commercial property values, reduced rental payments and/or increases in tenant defaults are likely to lead to higher impairment charges, which could materially affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects. The COVID-19 pandemic initially led to an initial reduction in property transactions and hence, some uncertainty in propertyasset valuations as well as increasingand, whilst this may persist for some time, policy support and a sharp rise in accumulated private sector savings may be contributing to unsustainable asset valuation growth in some markets. Growth in UK house prices has been especially strong; raising the risk of loss or reduced rental payments.that subsequent revaluations could have potentially negative consequences for Lloyds Bank Group. Additionally, COVID-19 has led to, and may lead to as yet unknown, structural changes in the risk profile of a number of sectorscounterparties and/or counterparties.sectors, including but not limited to commercial real estate, retail, hospitality, leisure and transportation, driven largely by evolving changes in consumer behaviour, working patterns, supply chains, government policy and infrastructure. Lloyds Bank Group also has significant credit exposure to certain individual counterparties in higher risk and cyclical asset classes and sectors (such as commercial real estate, financial intermediation, manufacturing, leveraged lending, oil and gas and related sectors, hotels, commodities trading, automotive and related sectors, construction, agriculture, consumer-related sectors (such as retail, passenger transport and leisure), house builders and outsourcing services). TheLloyds Bank Group’s retail customer portfolios will remain strongly linked to the UK economic environment, with house price deterioration, unemployment increases, inflationary pressures, consumer over-indebtedness and prolonged low or rising interest rates among the factors that may impact secured and unsecured retail credit exposures. Deterioration in used vehicle prices, including as a result of changing consumer demand or the transition of the motor sector from vehicles with internal combustion engines to electric vehicles, could result in increased provisions and/or losses and/or accelerated depreciation charges.
90

RISK FACTORS
In addition, climate change is likely to have a significant impact on many of Lloyds Bank Group’s customers, as well as on various industry sectors that Lloyds Bank Group operates in. There is a risk that borrower and counterparty credit quality and collateral / asset valuations could be adversely affected as a result of these changes. See also “Business and Operational Risks - Lloyds Bank Group is subject to the emerging risks associated with climate change”.
Lloyds Bank Group’s corporate lending portfolio also contains substantial exposure to large and mid-sized, public and private companies. In addition to exposures to sectors that have experienced cyclical weakness in recent years, the portfolio also contains exposures in key coronavirusto sectors that have been significantly impacted sectors,by the COVID-19 pandemic, most notably consumer facing sectors such as travel, transportation, non-essential retail and hospitality. These exposures along with a historic strategy of taking large single name concentrations to non-listed companies and entrepreneurs, and taking exposure at various levels of the capital structure, may give rise to single name concentration and risk capital exposure. TheLloyds Bank Group's corporate and financial institution portfolios are also susceptible to "fallen angel" risk, that is, the probability of significant default increases following material unexpected events, and to risks related to the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic, resulting in the potential for large losses. As in the UK, Lloyds Bank Group’s lending business overseas is also exposed to a small number of long-term customer relationships and these single name concentrations place Lloyds Bank Group at risk of loss should default occur.
Any disruption to the liquidity or transparency of the financial markets may result in Lloyds Bank Group’s inability to sell or syndicate securities, loans or other instruments or positions held (including through underwriting), thereby leading to concentrations in these positions. These concentrations could expose Lloyds Bank Group to losses if the mark-to-market value of the securities, loans or other instruments or positions declines causing Lloyds Bank Group to take write-downs. Moreover, the inability to reduce Lloyds Bank Group’s positions not only increases the market and credit risks associated with such positions, but also increases the level of risk-weighted assets on Lloyds Bank Group’s balance sheet, thereby increasing its capital requirements and funding costs, all of which could materially adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
Providing support to customers under the COVID-19 government schemes meansmeant that Lloyds Bank Group has extended its lending risk appetite in line with the various scheme guidelines duringat the crisistime and, despite the protection offered by the UK Government’s or by the Bank of England’s guarantees, as applicable, in respect of the schemes, this may lead to additional losses. These schemes (Bounce Back Loans Scheme ("BBLS"), Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme ("CBILS") and Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme ("CLBILS")) closed to new applications on 31 March 2021.
Repayments on government lending scheme loans commenced from the second quarter of 2021. However, BBLS benefit from Pay As You Grow options which may materially delay repayments through, for example, extended payment holidays, and have the potential to delay recognition of customer financial difficulties.
With the exception of COVID-19 related payment holidays provided to retail customers and lending provided through certain government support schemes, including the Bounce Back Loan SchemeBBLS (which provideprovided support of up to £50,000 for smaller businesses), in respect of which no credit assessment iswas undertaken, all lending decisions, and decisions related to other exposures (including, but not limited to, undrawn commitments, derivative, equity, contingent and/or settlement risks), are dependent on Lloyds Bank Group’s assessment of each customer’s ability to repay and the value of any underlying security. Such assessments may also take into account future forecasts, which may be less reliable due to the uncertainty of their likely accuracy and probability as a result of the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic. There is an inherent risk that Lloyds Bank Group has incorrectly assessed the credit quality and/or the ability or willingness of borrowers to repay, possibly as a result of incomplete or inaccurate disclosure by those borrowers or as a result of the inherent uncertainty that is involved in the exercise of constructing and using models to estimate the risk of lending to counterparties.
In addition, observed credit quality of the portfolios is likely to behave been influenced by the significant temporary support provided in light ofduring the COVID-19 pandemic, including the government lending schemes, payment holidays and furlough arrangements, which may have the potential to distortdistorted underlying credit risks in the portfolio and may lead to increases in arrears and/or defaults which remain unidentified. This may result in additional impairment charges if the forward looking economic scenarios used to raise expected credit loss allowances have not adequately captured the impact of the withdrawal of the temporary support measures.
110

RISK FACTORS
4.Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning liquidity and funding, particularly if the availability of traditional sources of funding such as retail deposits or the access to wholesale funding markets becomes more limited
Liquidity and funding continues to remain a key area of focus for Lloyds Bank Group and the industry as a whole. Like all major banks, Lloyds Bank Group is dependent on confidence in the short and long-term wholesale funding markets. Lloyds Bank Group relies on customer savings and transmission balances, as well as ongoing access to the global wholesale funding markets to meet its funding needs. The ability of Lloyds Bank Group to gain access to wholesale and retail funding sources on satisfactory economic terms is subject to a number of factors outside its control, such as liquidity constraints, general market conditions, regulatory requirements, the encouraged or mandated repatriation of deposits by foreign wholesale or central bank depositors and the level of confidence in the UK banking system.
Lloyds Bank Group’s profitability or solvency could be adversely affected if access to liquidity and funding is constrained, made more expensive for a prolonged period of time or if Lloyds Bank Group experiences an unusually high and unforeseen level of withdrawals. In such circumstances, Lloyds Bank Group may not be in a position to continue to operate or meet its regulatory minimum liquidity requirements without additional funding support, which it may be unable to access (including government and central bank facilities).
Lloyds Bank Group is also subject to the risk of deterioration of the commercial soundness and/or perceived soundness of other financial services institutions within and outside the UK. Financial services institutions that deal with each other are interrelated as a result of trading, investment, clearing, counterparty and other relationships. This presents systemic risk and may adversely affect financial intermediaries, such as clearing agencies, clearing houses, banks, securities firms and exchanges with which Lloyds Bank Group interacts on a daily basis, any of which could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to raise new funding. A default by, or even concerns about the financial resilience of, one or more financial services institutions could lead to further significant systemic liquidity problems, or losses or defaults by other financial institutions, which could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
Corporate and institutional counterparties may also seek to reduce aggregate credit exposures to Lloyds Bank Group (or to all banks) which could increase Lloyds Bank Group’s cost of funding and limit its access to liquidity. The funding structure employed by Lloyds Bank Group may also prove to be inefficient, thus giving rise to a level of funding cost where the cumulative costs are not sustainable over the longer term.
In addition, medium-term growth in Lloyds Bank Group’s lending activities will rely, in part, on the availability of retail deposit funding on appropriate terms, which is dependent on a variety of factors outside Lloyds Bank Group’s control, such as general macroeconomic conditions and market volatility, the confidence of retail depositors in the economy, the financial services industry and Lloyds Bank Group, as well as the availability and extent of deposit guarantees. Increases in the cost of retail deposit funding will impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s margins and affect profit, and a lack of availability of retail deposit funding could have a material adverse effect on its future growth. Any loss in consumer confidence in Lloyds Bank Group could significantly increase the amount of retail deposit withdrawals in a short period of time. See “Economic and Financial Risks - Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent and indirect risks arising from general macroeconomic conditions in the UK in particular, but also in the Eurozone, the U.S., Asia and globally."globally"
Lloyds Bank Group makes use of central bank funding schemes such as the Bank of England’s Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME)(the "TFSME"). Following the closure of this scheme in 2021, Lloyds Bank Group will have to replace matured central bank scheme funding,drawings in 2025-2027, which could cause an increased dependence on term funding issuances. If the wholesale funding markets were to suffer stress or central bank provision of liquidity to the financial markets is abruptly curtailed, or Lloyds Bank Group’s credit ratings are downgraded, it is likely that wholesale funding will prove more difficult to obtain.
91

RISK FACTORS
Any of the refinancing or liquidity risks mentioned above, in isolation or in concert, could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results or operations and its ability to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.
5.A reduction in the Bank and its rated subsidiaries' longer-term credit rating could materially adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects
Rating agencies regularly evaluate Lloyds Banking Group plc, the Bank and itstheir respective rated subsidiaries, and their ratings of longer-term debt are based on a number of factors which can change over time, including Lloyds Banking Group or Lloyds Bank Group’s financial strength as well as factors not entirely within its control, includingsuch as conditions affecting the financial services industry generally, and the legal and regulatory frameworks affecting its legal structure, business activities and the rights of its creditors. In light of the difficulties in the financial services industry and the financial markets, there can be no assurance that Lloyds Bank Group or the Bank or its rated subsidiaries will maintain their current ratings. The credit rating agencies may also revise the ratings methodologies applicable to issuers within a particular industry or political or economic region. If credit rating agencies perceive there to be adverse changes in the factors affecting an issuer’s credit rating, including by virtue of change to applicable ratings methodologies, the credit rating agencies may downgrade, suspend or withdraw the ratings assigned to an issuer and/or its securities. Downgrades of either Lloyds Banking Group plc's longer-term credit rating or the Bank and its rated subsidiaries’ longer-term credit rating could lead to additional collateral posting and cash outflow, significantly increase itsthe Bank's borrowing costs, limit its issuance capacity in the capital markets and weaken Lloyds Bank Group’s competitive position in certain markets.
6.Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are inherently subject to the risk of market fluctuations, which could have a material adverse effect on the results of operations, financial condition or prospects of Lloyds Bank Group
Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are inherently subject to risks in financial markets including changes in, and increased volatility of, interest rates, inflation rates, credit spreads, foreign exchange rates, commodity, equity, bond and property prices and the risk that its customers act in a manner which is inconsistent with Lloyds Bank Group’s business, pricing and hedging assumptions. Movements in these markets will continue to have a significant impact on Lloyds Bank Group in a number of key areas.
For example, adverse market movements have had, and will likely continue to have, an adverse effect, upon the financial condition of the defined benefit pension schemes of Lloyds Bank Group. The schemes’ main exposures are to real rate risk and credit spread risk. These risks arise from two main sources: the “AA” corporate bond liability discount rate and asset holdings.
In addition, Lloyds Bank Group’s banking and trading activities are also subject to market movements. For example, changes in interest rate levels, interbank margins over official rates, yield curves and spreads affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains. Competitive pressures on fixed rates or product terms in existing loans and deposits may restrict Lloyds Bank Group in its ability to change interest rates applying to customers in response to changes in official and wholesale market rates.
Changes in foreign exchange rates, including with respect to the U.S. dollar and the Euro, may also have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s financial position and/or forecasted earnings.
111

RISK FACTORS
7.Market conditions have resulted, and are expected to result in the future, in material changes to the estimated fair values of financial assets of Lloyds Bank Group, including negative fair value adjustments
Lloyds Bank Group has exposures to securities, derivatives and other investments, including asset-backed securities, structured investments and private equity investments that are recorded by Lloyds Bank Group at fair value, which may be subject to further negative fair value adjustments in view of the volatile global markets and challenging economic environment, including as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic. See (“Economic and Financial Risks - Lloyds Bank Group's business is subject to risks relating to the impact of COVID-19”).COVID-19 pandemic.
In volatile markets, hedging and other risk management strategies (including collateralisation and the purchase of credit default swaps) may not be as effective as they are in normal market conditions, due in part to the decreasing credit quality of hedge counterparties, and general illiquidity in the markets within which transactions are executed.
In circumstances where fair values are determined using financial valuation models, Lloyds Bank Group’s valuation methodologies may require it to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair value. These valuation models are complex and the assumptions used are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. This uncertainty may be amplified during periods of market volatility and illiquidity. Any consequential impairments, write-downs or adjustments could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, capital ratios, financial condition or prospects.
Any of these factors could cause the value ultimately realised by Lloyds Bank Group for its securities and other investments to be lower than their current fair value or require Lloyds Bank Group to record further negative fair value adjustments, which may have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
8.Any tightening of monetary policy in jurisdictions in which Lloyds Bank Group operates could affect the financial condition of its customers, clients and counterparties, including governments and other financial institutions
Quantitative easing measures implemented by major central banks, adopted alongside record low interest rates to support recovery from the global financial crisis and, more recently, the COVID-19 pandemic, have helped loosen financial conditions and reduced borrowing costs. These measures may have supported liquidity and valuations for asset classes that are vulnerable to rapid price corrections as financial conditions tighten, potentially causing losses to investors and increasing the risk of default on Lloyds Bank Group’s exposure to these sectors.
Monetary policy in the UK and in the markets in which Lloyds Bank Group operates has been highly accommodative in recent years and even more so as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, however, there remains considerable uncertainty as to the direction of interest rates and the pace of change in withdrawing monetary stimulus and increasing interest rates as set by the Bank of England and other major central banks. If recent rises in inflation in developed countries prove to be more than transitory, this may prompt an earlier and/or larger than expected tightening of monetary policy with the associated risk of slowing economic recovery.
In the UK, monetary policy has further been supported by the Bank of England and HM Treasury “Funding for Lending” scheme (which closed in January 2018), the “Help to Buy” scheme (which closed in November 2019), the “Term Funding Scheme” (which closed in February 2018) and the purchase of corporate bonds in the UK. In response to the COVID-19 pandemic, the UK Government and the Bank of England have adopted a series of financial measures to help offset the economic disruption caused by efforts to contain the spread of the virus. These includeincluded a package of government-backed and guaranteed loans to support businesses, announced on 17 March 2020, and which made available an initial £330 billion of guarantees (equivalent to approximately 15 per cent of the UK’s current GDP).businesses. These included a joint HM Treasury and Bank of England lending facility, the Covid Corporate Financing Facility (CCFF),("CCFF") designed to support liquidity among larger firms, as well as the Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS)CBILS for small and medium-sized enterprises run by the British Business Bank. Further support is beingwas also provided through the Coronavirus Large Business InterruptionCLBILS and the BBLS. The CCFF scheme closed to new applications on 31 December 2020, whilst the CBILS, CLBILS and BBLS closed to new applications on 31 March 2021. The Recovery Loan Scheme (CLBILS) and("RLS") was subsequently launched on 6 April 2021, providing access to finance for businesses recovering from the Bounce Back Loans Scheme (BBLS).effects of the pandemic. Further measures may be introduced depending on the length and severity of the crisis. However, such a long period of stimulus and support has increased uncertainty over the impact of its future reduction, which could lead to a risk of higher borrowing costs in wholesale markets, higher interest rates for retail borrowers, generally weaker than
92

RISK FACTORS
expected growth, or even contracting GDP, reduced business and consumer confidence, higher levels of unemployment or underemployment, adverse changes to levels of inflation and falling property prices in the markets in which Lloyds Bank Group operates, and consequently to an increase in delinquency rates and default rates among its customers. SimilarRapid increases in inflation and reduced monetary stimulus and the actions and commercial soundness of other financial institutions have the potential to impact market liquidity. Conversely similar risks may result from the low level of underlying inflation in developed economies which, in Europe particularly, could deteriorate into sustained deflation if policy measures prove ineffective and economic growth weakens. Reduced monetary stimulus and the actions and commercial soundness of other financial institutions have the potential to impact market liquidity. The adverse impact on the credit quality of Lloyds Bank Group’s customers and counterparties, coupled with a decline in collateral values, could lead to a reduction in recoverability and value of Lloyds Bank Group’s assets and higher levels of expected credit loss allowances, which could have an adverse effect on its operations, financial condition or prospects.
9.Lloyds Bank Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are subject to longevity risks
Lloyds Bank Group’s defined benefit pension schemes are exposed to longevity risk. Increases in life expectancy (longevity) beyond current allowances will increase the period over which pension scheme benefits are paid pension scheme benefits and may adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s financial condition and results of operations.
10.Lloyds Bank Group may be required to record credit value adjustments, funding value adjustmentsCredit Value Adjustments, Funding Value Adjustments and debit value adjustmentsDebit Value Adjustments on its derivative portfolio, which could have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects
Lloyds Bank Group continually seeks to limit and manage counterparty credit risk exposure to market counterparties. Credit value adjustmentValue Adjustment (“CVA”) and funding value adjustmentFunding Value Adjustment (“FVA”) reserves are held against uncollateralised derivative exposures and a risk management framework is in place to mitigate the impact on income of reserve value changes. CVA is an expected loss calculation that incorporates current market factors including counterparty credit spreads. FVA reserves are held to capitalise the cost of funding uncollateralised derivative exposures. Lloyds Bank Group also calculates a debit value adjustmentDebit Value Adjustment to reflect own credit spread risk as part of the fair value of derivative liabilities.
Deterioration in the creditworthiness of financial counterparties, or large adverse financial market movements could impact the size of CVA and FVA reserves and result in a material charge to Lloyds Bank Group’s profit and loss account which could have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
11.Lloyds Bank Group is exposed to risks related to the uncertainty surrounding the integrity and continued existence of reference rates
Reference rates and indices, including interest rate benchmarks, such as the London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) and the Euro Interbank Offered Rate (“EURIBOR”), which are used to determine the amounts payable under financial instruments or the value of such financial instruments (“Benchmarks”), have, in recent years,
112

RISK FACTORS
been the subject of political and regulatory scrutiny as to how they are created and operated. This has resulted in regulatory reform and changes to existing Benchmarks, the progressive transition of existing and future activity to reference different rates and indices, with further changes anticipated.
These reforms and changes may cause a Benchmark to perform differently than it has done in the past or to be discontinued.
At this time, it is not possible to predict the overall effectfinal impact (including conduct, operational and financial impacts) of any such reforms and changes, any establishment of alternative reference rates or any other reforms to these reference rates that may be enacted, including the potential or actual discontinuance of LIBOR publication, any transition away from LIBOR or ongoing reliance on LIBOR for some legacy products.
Uncertainty as to the nature of such potential changes, alternative reference rates (including, without limitation, SONIA, €STER€STR, SARON and SOFR or term versions of those rates) or other reforms may adversely affect a broad array of financial products, including any LIBOR-based or EURIBOR-based securities, loans and derivatives that are included in Lloyds Bank Group’s financial assets and liabilities, that use these reference rates and may impact the availability and cost of hedging instruments and borrowings. If any ofDuring the transition to the new reference rates and/or when these reference rates are no longer available, Lloyds Bank Group may incur additional expenses in effecting the transition from such reference rates, and may be subject to disputes, which could have an adverse effect on its results of operations. In addition, it can have important operational impacts through Lloyds Bank Group’s systems and infrastructure as all systems will need to account for the changes in the reference rates. Any of these factors may have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
REGULATORY AND LEGAL RISKS
1.Lloyds Bank Group and its businesses are subject to substantial regulation and oversight. Adverse legal or regulatory developments could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition or prospects
Lloyds Bank Group and its businesses are subject to legislation, regulation, court proceedings, policies and voluntary codes of practice in the UK, the EU and the other markets in which it operates which are impacted by factors beyond its control, including:
(i)general changes in government, central bank or regulatory policy, or changes in regulatory regimes that may influence investor decisions in particular markets in which Lloyds Bank Group operates and which may change the structure of those markets and the products offered or may increase the costs of doing business in those markets;
(ii)external bodies applying or interpreting standards, laws, regulations or contracts differently to Lloyds Bank Group;
(iii)an uncertain and rapidly evolving prudential regulatory environment;
(iv)changes in competitive and pricing environments, including markets investigations, or one or more of Lloyds Bank Group’s regulators intervening to mandate the pricing of Lloyds Bank Group’s products as a consumer protection measure;
(v)one or more of Lloyds Bank Group’s regulators intervening to prevent or delay the launch of a product or service, or prohibiting an existing product or service;
(vi)further requirements relating to financial reporting, corporate governance, corporate structure and conduct of business and employee compensation;
(vii)expropriation, nationalisation, confiscation of assets and changes in legislation relating to foreign ownership;
(viii)changes to regulation and legislation relating to economic and trading sanctions, money laundering and terrorist financing;
(ix)developments in the international or national legal environment resulting in regulation, legislation and/or litigation targeting entities such as Lloyds Bank Group for investing in, or lending to, organisations deemed to be responsible for, or contributing to, climate change; and
(x)regulatory changes which influence business strategy, particularly the rate of growth of the business, or which impose conditions on the sales and servicing of products which have the effect of making such products unprofitable or unattractive to sell.
These laws and regulations include increased regulatory oversight, particularly in respect of conduct issues, data protection, product governance and prudential regulatory developments, including ring-fencing.
93

RISK FACTORS
Unfavourable developments across any of these areas, both in and outside the UK, as a result of the factors above could materially affect Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to maintain appropriate liquidity, increase its funding costs, constrain the operation of its business and/or have a material adverse effect on its business, results of operations and financial condition.
2.Lloyds Bank Group faces risks associated with its compliance with a wide range of laws and regulations
Lloyds Bank Group is exposed to risk associated with compliance with laws and regulations, including:
(i)certain aspects of Lloyds Bank Group’s activities and business may be determined by the relevant authorities, the Financial Ombudsman Service (the “FOS”), or the courts, to have not been conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the Ombudsman’s opinion;
(ii)the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products or the mishandling of complaints related to the sale of such products by or attributed to a member of Lloyds Bank Group, resulting in disciplinary action or requirements to amend sales processes, withdraw products, or provide restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions;provisions and significant time and attention;
(iii)risks relating to compliance with, or enforcement actions in respect of, existing and/or new regulatory or reporting requirements, including as a result of a change in focus of regulation or a transfer of responsibility for regulating certain aspects of Lloyds Bank Group’s activities and business to other regulatory bodies;
(iv)contractual and other obligations may either not be enforceable as intended or may be enforced against Lloyds Bank Group in an adverse way;
(v)the intellectual property of Lloyds Bank Group (such as trade names) may not be adequately protected;
(vi)Lloyds Bank Group may be liable for damages to third-parties harmed by the conduct of its business; and
(vii)the risk of regulatory proceedings, enforcement actions and/or private litigation, arising out of regulatory investigations or otherwise (brought by individuals or groups of plaintiffs) in the UK and other jurisdictions.
Regulatory and legal actions pose a number of risks to Lloyds Bank Group, including substantial monetary damages or fines, the amounts of which are difficult to predict and may exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks. See “Regulatory and Legal Risks - The financial impact of legal proceedings and regulatory risks mightmay be material butand is difficult to quantify. Amounts eventually paid may materially exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks, or existing provisions may need to be materially increased in response to changing circumstances, as has been the case in respect of payment protection insurance redress payments”.circumstances." In addition, Lloyds Bank Group may be subject, including as a result of regulatory actions, to other penalties and
113

RISK FACTORS
injunctive relief, civil or private litigation arising out of a regulatory investigation or otherwise, the potential for criminal prosecution in certain circumstances and regulatory restrictions on Lloyds Bank Group’s business, all of which can have a negative effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s reputation as well as taking a significant amount of management time and resources away from the implementation of its strategy.
Lloyds Bank Group may settle litigation or regulatory proceedings prior to a final judgement or determination of liability to avoid the cost, management efforts or negative business, regulatory or reputational consequences of continuing to contest liability, even when Lloyds Bank Group believes that it has no liability or when the potential consequences of failing to prevail would be disproportionate to the costs of settlement. Furthermore, Lloyds Bank Group may, for similar reasons, reimburse counterparties for their losses even in situations where Lloyds Bank Group does not believe that it is legally compelled to do so. Failure to manage these risks adequately could materially affect Lloyds Bank Group, both financially and reputationally.
3.Legal and regulatory risk arising fromrelating to the UK’s exit from the EU could adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s business, operations, financial condition and prospects
The EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement ("EU-UK TCA")TCA provides a structure for the futurecontinuing EU and UK relationship following the UK's exit from the EU.relationship. The EU-UK TCA applies provisionally from 1 January 2021 pending formal ratification by the EU parliament (with the UK having ratified the TCA on 30 December 2020).
The passporting of financial services between the UK and the EU ended on 31 December 2020, with the end of the Brexit transition period. However, the EU-UK TCA leaves open the possibility for future equivalence decisions being made by the UK and/or the EU on a unilateral basis (in addition to certain equivalence decisions already made by the UK and limited temporary equivalence decisions already made by the EU in relation to clearing and central securities depositaries). A short Joint Declarationdoes not lay down any binding commitments on financial services, which accompanies the EU-UK TCA, also sets out the intention ofservices.
In March 2021, the EU and the UK to agreeagreed a Memorandum of Understanding by March 2021(the"MoU") on regulatory cooperation on financial servicesFinancial Services Regulatory Cooperation to help preserve financial stability, market integrity and the protection of investors and consumers. However, at this time, there can be no assurance as to the content of any such Memorandum of Understanding or the making of any further equivalence decisions (including as tofinal MoU has not yet been formally approved and the extent, duration and conditionality of any such decisions). The EU-UK TCA does not lay down any binding commitments on financial services and itregulatory equivalence decisions remains unclear. It also remains uncertain if the UK and the EU financial regulatory regimes will diverge substantially in the future or not. This uncertainty may be exacerbated by the possible re-emergence of calls for a further Scottish independence referendum and/or the differential arrangements underfor the EU-UK TCA and the EU withdrawal agreement for Northern Ireland relative to the rest of the UK.protocol.
Lloyds Bank Group is subject to substantial EU-derived laws, regulation and oversight, which will be impacted as a result of the UK’s exit from the EU. Lloyds Bank Group and its subsidiaries in the UK will ceasehave ceased to be subject to EU law; but EU law will continuecontinues to apply to its EU subsidiaries. DivergenceAny divergence between UK law and EU law will increase the burden of associated compliance costs on Lloyds Bank Group. Moreover, Lloyds Bank Group and its counterparties will no longer be ableSince losing the ability to rely on the European passporting framework for financial services. Theservices, Lloyds Bank Group continues to service existing products in certain EU jurisdictions, except where its legal and regulatory outreach deemed that this was no longer permitted. A change to any EU jurisdiction's acceptance of continued servicing could potentially result in the loss of customers and/or the requirement for Lloyds Bank Group to apply for authorisation in EU jurisdictions where it is to continue business, with associated costs and operational considerations. Any new or amended legislation and regulation may have a significant impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s operations, profitability and business model.
4.Lloyds Banking Group and its subsidiaries, including Lloyds Bank Group, are subject to resolution planning requirements, which could have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group's business
In July 2019, the Bank of England and the PRA have published final rules for a resolvability assessment framework (the “Resolvability Assessment Framework”), withand full implementation of the framework required bybecame effective from 1 January 2022. This requires Lloyds Banking Group to carry out a detailed assessment of its preparations for resolution. These rules onThe outcome of the detailed assessment as part of the Resolvability Assessment Framework may affect the way in which Lloyds Banking Group manages its business or result in further direction from the BoE to remove impediments to the exercise of stabilisation powers and ultimately impact the profitability of Lloyds Bank Group. Further, the publication of the outcome of such assessment may affect the way Lloyds BankBanking Group is perceived by the market which, in turn, may affect the secondary market value of securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plc’s securities.
94

RISK FACTORS
Group.
5.Lloyds Banking Group and its subsidiaries, including Lloyds Bank Group, are subject to regulatory actions which may be taken in the event of a bank or parent Groupgroup failure
Under the Banking Act 2009, as amended, (the “Banking Act”), substantial powers have been granted to HM Treasury, the Bank of EnglandBoE, the Prudential Regulation Authority (the "PRA") and the PRAFinancial Conduct Authority (the "FCA" and FCA (together,together with the HM Treasury, the BoE and the PRA, the “Authorities”) as part of the special resolution regime (the “SRR”). These powers enable the Authorities to deal with and stabilise UK-incorporated institutions with permission to accept deposits (including Lloydsthe Bank plc and members of its group)Lloyds Bank Group) if they are failing or are likely to fail to satisfy certain threshold conditions.
The SRR consists of five stabilisation options: (i) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity or the shares of the relevant entity to a private sector purchaser; (ii) transfer of all or part of the business of the relevant entity to a “bridge bank” established and wholly owned by the Bank of England;BoE; (iii) transfer of all or part of the relevant entity or “bridge bank” to an asset management vehicle; (iv) makingbail-in of one or more resolutionthe relevant entity's equity, capital instruments by the Bank of England;and liabilities; and (v) temporary public ownership of the relevant entity. HM Treasury may also take a parent company of a relevant entity into temporary public ownership where certain conditions are met. Certain ancillary powers include the power to modify contractual arrangements in certain circumstances.
Under the Banking Act, powers are granted to the Authorities which include, but are not limited to: (i) a “write-down"write down and conversion power”power" relating to Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instrumentsinstruments; and (ii) a “bail-in”"bail-in" power relating to the majority of unsecured liabilities (including the capital instruments and senior unsecured debt securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plc)Group). While Lloyds Banking Group plc is currently the resolution entity for Lloyds Banking Group pursuant to the Bank of England’s “singleBoE's "single point of entry”entry" resolution model, bail-in is capable of being applied to all of the Bank's and members of Lloyds Bank plc’sGroup's senior unsecured and subordinated debt instruments with a remaining maturity of greater than seven days. Such loss absorption powers give resolution authorities the ability to write-down or write-off all or a portion of the claims of certain unsecured creditorssecurities of a failing institution or group and/or to convert certain debt claims into another security, including ordinary shares of the surviving group entity, if any. Such resulting ordinary shares may be subject to severe dilution, transfer for no consideration, write-down or write-off. The Banking Act specifies the order in which the bail-in tool should be applied, reflecting the hierarchy of capital instruments under CRDRegulation (EU) No 575/2013 (as amended) as it forms part of domestic law by virtue of the EUWA and related legislation, with certain amendments (the "Capital Requirements Regulation") and otherwise respecting the hierarchy of claims in an ordinary insolvency. Moreover, the Banking Act and secondary legislation made thereunder provides certain limited safeguards for creditors in specific circumstances. For example, a holder of debt securities issued by Lloydsthe Bank plc should not suffer a worse outcome than it would in insolvency proceedings. However, this “no creditor worse off” safeguard may not apply in relation to an application of the write-down and conversion power in circumstances where a stabilisation power is not also used; holders of debt instruments which are subject to the power may, however, have ordinary shares transferred to or issued to them by way of compensation. The exercise of mandatory write-down and conversion power under the Banking Act or any suggestion of such exercise could, therefore, materially adversely affect the rights of the holders of equity and debt securities and the price or value of their investment and/or the ability of Lloyds Bank Group to satisfy its obligations under such debt securities.
Resolution authorities also have powers to amend the terms of contracts (for example, varying the maturity of a debt instrument) and to override events of default or termination rights that might be invoked as a result of the exercise of the resolution powers, which could have a material adverse effect on the rights of holders of the debt securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plc,Group, including through a material adverse effect on the price of such securities. The Banking Act also gives the Bank of EnglandBoE the power to override, vary or impose contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings for reasonable consideration, in order to enable any transferee
114

RISK FACTORS
or successor bank to operate effectively. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use the regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.
The determination that securities and other obligations issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plcGroup will be subject to loss absorption is likely to be inherently unpredictable and may depend on a number of factors which may be outside of Lloyds Bank Group’s control. This determination will also be made by the relevant UK resolution authority and there may be many factors, including factors not directly related to Lloyds Bank Group, which could result in such a determination. Because of this inherent uncertainty and given that the relevant provisions of the Banking Act remain largely untested in practice, it will be difficult to predict when, if at all, the exercise of a loss absorption power may occur which would result in a principal write-off or conversion to other securities. Moreover, as the criteria that the relevant UK resolution authority will be obliged to consider in exercising any loss absorption power provide it with considerable discretion, holders of the securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plcGroup may not be able to refer to publicly available criteria in order to anticipate a potential exercise of any such power and consequently its potential effect on Lloyds Bank Group and the securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plc.Group.
Potential investors in the securities issued by the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plcGroup should consider the risk that a holder may lose some or all of its investment, including the principal amount plus any accrued interest, if such statutory loss absorption measures are acted upon. The Banking Act provides that, other than in certain limited circumstances set out in the Banking Act, extraordinary governmental financial support will only be available to Lloydsthe Bank plc as a last resort once the write-down and conversion powers and resolution tools referred to above have been exploited to the maximum extent possible. Accordingly, it is unlikely that investors in securities issued by the CompanyLloyds Bank plc and members of Lloyds Bank Group will benefit from such support even if it were provided.
Holders of the Bank and members of Lloyds Bank plc’sGroup’s securities may have limited rights or no rights to challenge any decision of the relevant UK resolution authority to exercise the UK resolution powers or to have that decision reviewed by a judicial or administrative process or otherwise. Accordingly, trading behaviour in respect of such securities is not necessarily expected to follow the trading behaviour associated with other types of securities that are not subject to such resolution powers. Further, the introduction or amendment of such recovery and resolution powers, and/or any implication or anticipation that they may be used, may have a significant adverse effect on the market price of such securities, even if such powers are not used.
The minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (“MREL”) applies to UK financial institutions and covers own funds and debt instruments that are capable of being written-down or converted to equity in order to prevent a financial institution or its group from failing in a crisis. The BankBoE completed a review of Englandits existing approach to setting MREL in December 2021 and has setpublished a final MREL conformance date for larger banks of 1 January 2022 with interim compliance requiredrevised approach which became effective and binding on Lloyds Banking Group and its material subsidiaries from 1 January 2020.2022. There has been no change to the basis for determining Lloyds Banking Group's MREL. The Bank Group has been identified as a material subsidiary of Lloyds Banking Group plc and must therefore maintain internal MREL resources from 1 January 2020 at the higher of minimum requirements calculated on a sub consolidated basis and on an individual basis.
In addition, Lloyds Bank Group’s costs of doing business may increase by amendments made to the Banking Act in relation to deposits covered by the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the “FSCS”). Lloyds Banking Group contributes to compensation schemes such as the FSCS in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers. Further provisions in respect of these costs are likely to be necessary in the future. The ultimate cost to the industry, which will also include the cost of any compensation payments made by the FSCS and, if necessary, the cost of meeting any shortfall after recoveries on the borrowings entered into by the FSCS, remains uncertain but may be significant and may have a material effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s business, results of operations or financial condition.
95

RISK FACTORS
6.Lloyds Bank Group is subject to the risk of having insufficient capital resources and/or not meeting liquidity requirements
Under PRA requirements, Lloyds Bank Group (as the ring-fenced bank sub-group) became subject to prudential requirements on a sub-consolidated basis from 1 January 2019. These requirements are in addition to the requirements that Lloydsthe Bank plc must meet under the existing prudential regime on an individual basis.
If Lloydsthe Bank plc and/or Lloyds Bank Group has, or is perceived to have, a shortage of regulatory capital or to be unable to meet its regulatory minimum liquidity requirements, then it may be subject to regulatory interventions and sanctions and may suffer a loss of confidence in the market with the result that access to sources of liquidity and funding may become constrained, more expensive or unavailable. This, in turn, may affect Lloyds Bank Group’s capacity to continue its business operations, pay future dividends to its parent and make other distributions or pursue acquisitions or other strategic opportunities, impacting future growth potential.
See also the risk factor above entitled “Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are subject to inherent risks concerning liquidity and funding, particularly if the availability of traditional sources of funding such as retail deposits or the access to wholesale funding markets becomes more limited”.
A shortage of capital could arise from (i) a depletion of Lloyds Bank Group and/or Lloyds Bank plc’sthe Bank’s capital resources through increased costs or liabilities and reduced asset values which could arise as a result of the crystallisation of credit-related risks, regulatory and legal risks, business and economic risks, operational risks, financial soundness-related risks and other risks; and/or (ii) an increase in the amount of capital that is needed to be held; and/or (iii) changes in the manner in which Lloyds Bank Group and/or Lloydsthe Bank plc is required to calculate its capital and/or the risk-weightings applied to its assets. This might be driven by a change to the actual level of risk faced by Lloyds Bank Group or to changes in the minimum capital required by legislation or by the regulatory authorities. For example, an aggregated risk weighted asset output floor has been proposed by the Basel Committee, with an expected transitional period from 2023 to 2028. The application of Basel 3.1, including the output floor, will be a matter for the UK legislature and Lloyds Bank Group and Lloyds Bank plc’s prudential regulators and there remains uncertainty until such rules translate into UK legislation.
Lloyds Bank Group and/or Lloydsthe Bank plc may address a shortage of capital by acting to reduce leverage exposures and/or risk-weighted assets, for example by way of business disposals. Such actions may impact the profitability of Lloyds Bank Group.
Whilst Lloyds Bank Group monitors current and expected future capital, internal MREL and liquidity requirements, including having regard to both leverage and risk weighted assets-based requirements, and seeks to manage and plan the prudential position accordingly and on the basis of current assumptions regarding future regulatory capital and liquidity requirements, there can be no assurance that the assumptions will be accurate in all respects or that it will not be required to take additional measures to strengthen its capital or liquidity position. Market expectations as to capital and liquidity levels may also increase, driven by, for example, the capital and liquidity levels (or targets) of peer banking groups.
Lloyds Bank Group’s borrowing costs and access to capital markets, as well as its ability to lend or carry out certain aspects of its business, could also be affected by future prudential regulatory developments more generally, including: (i) evolving UK and global prudential and regulatory changes, for example the UKexpected consultation on the remaining changes to implement CRRII, and the final phase of implementation ofimplementing Basel reforms (Basel 3.1)3.1 in the UK;UK and (ii) regulatory changes in other jurisdictions to which Lloyds Bank Group has exposure and (iii) the evolving regulatory and legal impacts of the UK’s exit from the EU.exposure.
115

RISK FACTORS
Any of the risks mentioned above could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s capital resources and/or liquidity, results of operations, its ability to continue its business operations and its financial condition.
7.The financial impact of legal proceedings and regulatory risks may be material and is difficult to quantify. Amounts eventually paid may materially exceed the amount of provisions set aside to cover such risks, or existing provisions may need to be materially increased in response to changing circumstances as has been the case in respect of payment protection insurance (“PPI”) redress payments
Where provisions have already been taken in published financial statements of Lloyds Bank Group or results announcements for ongoing legal or regulatory matters, these have been recognised, in accordance with IAS 37 (“Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets”) (“IAS 37”), as the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation as at the reporting date. Such estimates are inherently uncertain and it is possible that the eventual outcomes may differ materially from current estimates, resulting in future increases or decreases to the required provisions, or actual losses that exceed or fall short of the provisions taken.
Excluding MBNA Limited (“MBNA”), Lloyds Bank Group increasedhas made provisions for expected PPI costs byover a further £0.1 billion recognised in the final quarternumber of the year ended 31 December 2020. Of the approximately six million enquiries received pre-deadline, more than 99 per cent have now been processed. The £0.1 billion charge in the fourth quarter was driven by the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic delaying operational activities during 2020, the final stages of workyears totalling £21,906 million. Good progress continues to ensurebe made towards ensuring operational completeness, ahead of an orderly programme close and final validationclose. At 31 December 2021, a provision of information requests and complaints£20 million remained outstanding (excluding amounts related to MBNA), with third parties that resulted in a limited numbertotal cash payments of additional complaints to be handled. A small part of the costs incurred£178 million during the year also reflectyear.
In addition to the above provision, Lloyds Bank Group continues to challenge PPI litigation cases, with mainly legal fees and operational costs associated with litigation activity to date.
This brings the total amount provided for at the end of 2020 to £21.9 billion, of which £0.2 billion remains unutilised relating to complaintsrecognised within regulatory and associated administration costs.
With regard to MBNA, as announced in December 2016, Lloyds Bank Group's exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under the terms of the MBNA sale and purchase agreement. No additionallegal provisions, including a charge has been made by MBNA to its PPI provision in the year ended 31 December 2020.fourth quarter. PPI litigation remains inherently uncertain, with a number of key Court judgements due to be delivered in 2022.
Provisions have not been taken where no obligation (as defined in IAS 37) has been established, whether associated with a known or potential future litigation or regulatory matter. Accordingly, an adverse decision in any such matters could result in significant losses to Lloyds Bank Group which have not been provided for. Such losses would have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s financial condition and operations.
In November 2014, the UK Supreme Court ruled in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited 2014[2014] UKSC 61 (“Plevin”) that failure to disclose to a customer a “high” commission payment on a single premium PPI policy sold with a consumer credit agreement created an unfair relationship between the lender and the borrower under s140 of the Consumer Credit Act 1974. It did not define a tipping point above which commission was deemed “high”. The disclosure of commission was not a requirement of the FSA’s (now FCA’s) Insurance: Conduct of Business sourcebook rules for the sale of general insurance (including PPI). Permission to appeal the redress outcome in the Plevin case was refused by the Court of Appeal in July 2015 and by the President of the Family Division in November 2015.
In November 2015 and August 2016, the FCA consulted on the introduction of a two year industry deadline by which consumers would need to make their PPI complaints or lose their right to have them assessed, and proposed rules and guidance about how firms should handle PPI
96

RISK FACTORS
complaints fairly in light of the Plevin judgment discussed above. On 2 March 2017, the FCA confirmed an industry deadline of 29 August 2019. The FCA’s rules to address Plevin commenced on 29 August 2017. The industry deadline also applies to the handling of these complaints. The FCA’s rules, issued on 2 March 2017, could have a material adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s reputation, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects. The courts are not bound by the FCA's complaints deadline or redress methodology. Customers therefore can and may wish to continue to bring litigation claims beyond the FCA's deadline for complaints.
Further, no assurance can be given that Lloyds Bank Group will not incur liability in connection with any past, current or future non-compliance with legislation or regulation, and any such non-compliance could be significant and materially adversely affect its reputation, business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects.
8.Lloyds Bank Group must comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations, and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could negatively impact customers and expose Lloyds Bank Group to liability
Lloyds Bank Group is required to comply with applicable anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, sanctions, anti-bribery and other laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which it operates. These extensive laws and regulations require Lloyds Bank Group, amongst other things, to adopt and enforce “know-your-customer” policies and procedures and to report suspicions of money laundering and terrorist financing, and in some countries specific transactions to the applicable regulatory authorities. These laws and regulations have become increasingly complex and detailed, require improved systems and sophisticated monitoring and compliance personnel, and have become the subject of enhanced government and regulatory supervision.
Lloyds Bank Group has adopted policies and procedures aimed at detecting and preventing the use of its banking network and services for money laundering, financing terrorism, bribery, tax evasion, human trafficking, modern day slavery, wildlife trafficking and related activities. These controls, however, may not eliminate instances where third parties seek to use Lloyds Bank Group’s products and services to engage in illegal or improper activities. In addition, while Lloyds Bank Group reviews its relevant counterparties’ internal policies and procedures with respect to such matters, Lloyds Bank Group, to a large degree, relies upon its relevant counterparties to maintain and properly apply their own appropriate anti-money laundering procedures. Such measures, procedures and compliance may not be effective in preventing third parties from using Lloyds Bank Group (and its relevant counterparties) as a conduit for money laundering and terrorist financing (including illegal cash operations) without Lloyds Bank Group’s (and its relevant counterparties’) knowledge. If Lloyds Bank Group is associated with, or even accused of being associated with, or becomes a party to, money laundering or terrorist financing, its reputation could suffer and it could become subject to fines, sanctions and/or legal enforcement (including being added to any “black lists” that would prohibit certain parties from engaging in transactions with Lloyds Bank Group), any one of which could have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition and prospects.
Furthermore, failure to comply with trade and economic sanctions, both primary and secondary (which are frequently subject to change by relevant governments and agencies in the jurisdictions in which Lloyds Bank Group operates), and failure to comply fully with other applicable compliance laws and regulations, may result in the imposition of fines and other penalties on Lloyds Bank Group, including the revocation of licences. In addition, Lloyds Bank Group’s business and reputation could suffer if customers use its banking network for money laundering, financing terrorism, or other illegal or improper purposes.
9.Failure to manage the risks associated with changes in taxation rates or applicable tax laws, or misinterpretation of such tax laws, could materially adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects
Tax risk is the risk associated with changes in taxation rates, applicable tax laws, misinterpretation of such tax laws, disputes with relevant tax authorities in relation to historic transactions, or conducting a challenge to a relevant tax authority. Failure to manage this risk adequately could cause Lloyds Bank Group to suffer losses due to additional tax charges and other financial costs including penalties. Such failure could lead to adverse publicity, reputational damage and potentially costs materially exceeding current provisions, in each case to an extent which could have an adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
116

RISK FACTORS
BUSINESS AND OPERATIONAL RISKS
1.Operational risks, including the risk that the Lloyds Bank Group fails to design resilience into business operations, underlying infrastructure and controls, including weaknesses or failures in the Lloyds Bank Group’s processes, systems and security, and risks due to reliance on third party services and products could materially adversely affect the Lloyds Bank Group’sGroup's operations
Operational risks, through inadequate or failed internal processes, systems (including financial reportingpeople and risk monitoring processes) or security,systems or from people-related or external events including the risk of fraud and other criminal acts carried out against Lloyds Bank Group, are present in Lloyds Bank Group’sGroup's businesses. Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are dependent on processing and reporting accurately and efficiently a high volume of complex transactions across numerous and diverse products and services, in different currencies and subject to a number of different legal and regulatory regimes. Any weakness or errors in these processes, systems or security could have an adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results, reporting of such results, and on the ability to deliver appropriate customer outcomes during the affected period which may lead to an increase in complaints and damage to the reputation of Lloyds Bank Group.
Specifically, failure to develop, deliver or maintain effective IT solutions in line with Lloyds Bank Group’s operating environment could have a material adverse impact on customer service and business operations. Any prolonged loss of service availability could damage Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to service its customers, could result in compensation costs and could cause long-term damage to its business and brand. See “Business and Operational Risks - Lloyds Bank Group’s business is subject to risks related to cybercrime”.
Third parties such as suppliers and vendors upon which Lloyds Bank Group relies for important products and services, including IT solutions, could also be sources of operational risk, specifically with regard to security breaches affecting such parties. Lloyds Bank Group may be required to take steps to protect the integrity of its operational systems, thereby increasing its operational costs. Additionally, any problems caused by these third parties, including as a result of their not providing Lloyds Bank Group their services for any reason, their performing their services poorly, or employee misconduct, could adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to deliver products and services to customers and otherwise to conduct business. Replacing these third party vendors or moving critical services from one provider to another could also entail significant delays and expense.
Lloyds Bank Group is also exposed to risk of fraud and other criminal activities (both internal and external) due to the operational risks inherent in banking operations. These risks are also present when Lloyds Bank Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to Lloyds Bank Group and its customers. Fraudsters may target any of Lloyds Bank Group’s products, services and delivery channels, including lending, internet banking, payments, bank accounts and cards. This may result in financial loss to Lloyds Bank Group and/or Lloyds Bank Group’s customers, poor customer experience, reputational damage, potential litigation and regulatory proceedings. Industry reported gross fraud losses have continued to increase as both financial institutions and their customers are targeted.
97

RISK FACTORS
Fraud losses and their impacts on customers and the wider society are now an increasing priority for consumer groups, regulators and the UK Government. Any weakness or errors in Lloyds Bank Group’s processes, systems or security could have an adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s results and on the ability to deliver appropriate customer responses, which may lead to an increase in complaints and damage to Lloyds Bank Group’s reputation. Please seeSee “Regulatory and Legal Risks - Lloyds Bank Group must comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations, and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could negatively impact customers and expose Lloyds Bank Group to liability”.
In addition, the COVID-19 pandemic has resulted in heightened operational risk as Lloyds Bank Group responds to the pandemic, including in the areas of cyber, fraud, people, technology and operational resilience. Cyber criminals continue to exploit COVID-19, seeking to mislead customers and colleagues. The impact of COVID-19 has required the reprioritising of planned activities and provided a challenge on colleagues’ ability to absorb increased workloads, whilst adapting to new ways of working. As a result, there has been heightened focus on colleague wellbeing and resilience. There has also been significant levels of stress on supplier business models and the possibility of multiple supplier failures. Despite anticipated heightened operational risks, the volume of operational loss events has remained broadly consistent in 2020 compared to 2019. As with other businesses, how Lloyds Bank Group is perceived to have supported its clients, employees and suppliers through the challenges presented by the COVID-19 pandemic could have a material effect on its reputation.
2.Lloyds Bank Group is exposed to conduct risk
Lloyds Bank Group is exposed to various forms of conduct risk in its operations. Conduct risk is the risk of customer detriment across the customer lifecycle including: failures in product management,due to poor design, distribution and servicing activities; from other risks materialising,execution of products or services, or other activities which could undermine the integrity of the market or distort competition, leading to unfair customer outcomes, regulatory censure, or reputational damage or financial loss. Such risks are inherent in banking services. Forms of conduct risk include business and strategic planning, processes and systems that does not sufficiently consider customer need (leadingneeds which could lead to customers not receiving the best outcome to meet their needs, products and services that do not offer fair value (which could lead to financial detriment for customers) products being offered beyond target markets and mis-selling of financial products),to customers that are not sustainable (which could lead to customers unfairly falling into arrears) ineffective management and monitoring of products and their distribution (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), customer communications that are unclear, unfair, misleading or untimely (which could impact customer decision-making and result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), a culture that is not sufficiently customer-centric (potentially driving improper decision-making and unfair outcomes for customers), outsourcing of customer service and product delivery via third-parties that do not have the same level of control, oversight and customer-centric culture as Lloyds Bank Group (which could result in potentially unfair or inconsistent customer outcomes), the possibility of alleged mis-selling of financial products (which could require amendments to sales processes, withdrawal of products or the provision of restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions in Lloyds Bank Group’s financial accounts), ineffective management of customer complaints or claims (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes), ineffective processes or procedures to support customers, including those in potentially vulnerable circumstances (which could result in customers receiving unfair outcomes or treatments which do not support their needs), and poor governance of colleagues’ incentives and rewards and approval of schemes which drive unfair customer outcomes. Ineffective management and oversight of legacy conduct issues can also result in customers who are undergoing remediation being unfairly treated and therefore further rectification being required.required, including at the direction of regulators. Lloyds Bank Group is also exposed to the risk of engaging in, or failing to manage, conduct which could constitute market abuse, undermine the integrity of a market in which it is active, distort competition or create conflicts of interest. Each of these risks can lead to regulatory censure, reputational damage, regulatory intervention/enforcement, the imposition of lengthy remedial redress programmes and financial penalties or other loss for Lloyds Bank Group, all of which could have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
3.Lloyds Bank Group’s business is subject to risks related to cybercrime
Lloyds Bank Group holds personally identifiable informationpersonal data on its systems aligned to product and services delivered to customers. Protection is delivered in accordance with data protection legislation, including Regulation (EU) 2016/679 (the "GDPR"), the General Data Protection Regulation,GDPR as it forms part of the domestic law of the UK by virtue of the EUWA, Data Protection Act 2018 and the PrivateData Protection, Privacy and Electronic Communication Regulation.(Amendments etc.) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019. In certain international locations, there are additional regulatory requirements that must be followed for business conducted in that jurisdiction. In the U.S., for example, the company's U.S. entityNew York branch of Lloyds Bank Corporate Markets plc is required to formally attest that it complies with specific cyber security requirements put forth by the New York State Department of Financial Services in Part 500 of Title 23 of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York.
Lloyds Bank Group’s IT infrastructure, and that of third parties on whom it relies, may be vulnerable to cyber-attacks, malware, denial of services, unauthorised access and other events that have a security impact. Such an event may impact the confidentiality or integrity of Lloyds Bank Group’s or its clients’, employees’ or counterparties’ information or the availability of services to customers. As a result of such an event or a failure in Lloyds Bank Group’s cyber security policies, Lloyds Bank Group could experience a disruption in operations, material financial loss, loss of competitive position, regulatory actions, breach of client contracts, reputational harm or legal liability, which, in turn, could have a material adverse effect on its results of operations, financial condition or prospects. Lloyds Bank Group may be required to spend additional resources to
117

RISK FACTORS
modify its protective measures or to investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures, and it may be subject to litigation and financial losses that are either not insured against fully or not fully covered through any insurance that it maintains. Lloyds Bank Group is committed to continued participation in industry-wide activity relating to cyber risk. This includes working with relevant regulatory and government departments to evaluate the approach Lloyds Bank Group is taking to mitigate this risk and sharing relevant information across the financial services sector.
4.Lloyds Bank Group is subject to the emerging risks associated with climate change
The risks associated with climate change are coming under an increasing focus, both in the UK and internationally, from governments, regulators and large sections of society. These risks include: physical risks, arising from climate and weather-related events of increasing severity and/or frequency; transition risks resulting from the process of adjustment towards a lower carbon economy (including stranded, redundant or prohibited assets); and liability risks arising from Lloyds Bank Group or clients experiencing litigation or reputational damage as a result of sustainability issues.
Physical risks from climate change arise from a number of factors and relate to specific weather events and longer term shifts in the climate. The nature and timing of extreme weather events are uncertain but they are increasing in frequency and their impact on the economy is predicted to be more acute in the future. The potential impact on the economy includes, but is not limited to, lower GDP growth, higher unemployment and significant changes in asset prices and profitability of industries. The physical risks could also lead to the disruption of business activity at clients' locations. In addition, Lloyds Bank Group’s premises and resilience may also suffer physical damage due to weather events leading to increased costs for Lloyds Bank Group.
The move towards a low-carbon economy will also create transition risks, due to potential significant and rapid developments in the expectations of policymakers, regulators and society resulting in policy, regulatory and technological changes which could impact Lloyds Bank Group. These risks may cause the impairment of asset values, impact the creditworthiness of clients of Lloyds Bank Group, and impact defaults among retail customers (including through the ability of customers to repay their mortgages, as well as the impact on the value of the underlying property), which could result in currently profitable business deteriorating over the term of agreed facilities.
98

RISK FACTORS
In 2020, Lloyds Banking Group announced an ambitious goal to work with customers, government and the market to help reduce the emissions Lloyds Banking Group finances by more than 50 percentper cent by 2030 on the path to net zero greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 or sooner, supporting both the UK Government's ambition and the 2015 Paris Agreement. Achieving this goal will require, among other things: customers and clients to change their behaviours;transition to a low carbon economy; governments to introduce new policies, incentives and to invest in infrastructure; new market developments; and technological advancements. If these changes, most of which are out of Lloyds Banking Group’s control, do not occur, Lloyds Banking Group (of(a large part of which is formed by Lloyds Bank Group forms a large part)Group) may have difficulty achieving its targets. Furthermore, in order to reach its targets, Lloyds Banking Group will need to further develop sustainable finance products and may be required to alter its business model. In April 2021, Lloyds Banking Group joined, as a founding member, the Net Zero Banking Alliance, committing to aligning its lending portfolios with net-zero emissions by 2050.
Additionally in 2021, Lloyds Banking Group announced three new operational pledges which accelerate Lloyds Banking Group's plan to tackle climate change and apply across Lloyds Banking Group operations: Lloyds Banking Group aims to achieve net zero carbon operations by 2030; Lloyds Banking Group aims to reduce its total energy consumption by 50 per cent by 2030; and Lloyds Banking Group aims to maintain travel carbon emissions below 50 per cent of pre-COVID levels.
If Lloyds Bank Group does not adequately embed the risks associated with climate change identified above into its risk framework to appropriately measure, manage and disclose the various financial and operational risks it faces as a result of climate change, or fails to adapt its strategy and business model to the changing regulatory requirements and market expectations on a timely basis, this could have an adverse impact on Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Furthermore, inadequate climate risk disclosure could result in the loss of Lloyds Banking Group's investor base as it will not be perceived to be a green investment. Implications of inadequately managing or disclosing climate-related risk or evidencing progress in line with expectations, could also result in potential reputational damage, customer attrition or loss of investor confidence. In particular, failure to deliver or sufficiently implement the Lloyds Banking Group’s net zero strategy and external commitments, relating to the emissions Lloyds Banking Group finances and Lloyds Banking Group's operations, could result in reputational risks such as increased stakeholder concern or negative feedback, and increased scrutiny around Lloyds Bank Group's activities relating to high emissions sectors and products.
5.Lloyds Bank Group’s businesses are conducted in competitive environments, with increased competition scrutiny, and Lloyds Bank Group’s financial performance depends upon management’s ability to respond effectively to competitive pressures and scrutiny
The markets for UK financial services, and the other markets within which Lloyds Bank Group operates, areremain competitive, and management expects suchthe competition to continue orto intensify. This expectation is due to a range of factors including: competitor behaviour, new entrants to the market (including a number of new retail banks as well as non-traditional financial services providers), consumer demand,changes in customer needs, technological changesdevelopments such as the growth of digital banking, new business models such as buy now pay later and the impact of regulatory actions and other factors.actions. Lloyds Bank Group’s financial performance and its ability to maintain existing or capture additional market share depends significantly upon the competitive environment and management’s response thereto.
In its recent final report as part of the Strategic Review of Retail Banking, the FCA recognised that the greater competition in retail banking is driving greater choice and lower prices for consumers and small businesses, despite the financial impact of the pandemic. This has particularly been seen in the mortgage and consumer credit markets where competition has intensified leading to lower yields.
Additionally, the internet and mobile technologies are changing customer behaviour and the competitive environment. There has been a steep rise in customer use of mobile banking over the last several years. Lloyds Bank Group faces competition from established providers of financial service as well as from banking business developed by non-financial companies, including technology companies with strong brand recognition.
The competitive environment can be, and is, influenced by intervention by the UK Government competition authorities and/or European regulatory bodies and/or governments of other countries in which Lloyds Bank Group operates, including in response to any perceived lack of competition within these markets. This may significantly impact the competitive position of Lloyds Bank Group relative to its international competitors, which may be subject to different forms of government intervention.
The Competition and Markets Authority (the “CMA”) launched a full market investigation into competition in the SME banking and personal current account (“PCA”) markets in Novemberbetween 2014 and published its final report on 9 August 2016 followed by the Retail Banking Market Investigation Order 2017 on 2in February 2017. The key final remedies include:This led to a number of changes which have impacted the competitive environment, including the introduction of “Open Banking”,open banking, the publication of service quality information and customer information prompts. Recommendations were also made regarding improvements to current account switching, monthly maximum charges for PCA overdraft users, overdraft notifications and additional measures to assist small business in comparing the different products available.accounts switching. The FCA has also undertaken market reviews in each of the major retail product markets and introduced remedies to help customers compare products and switch betweenproducts. For example, the FCA’s over draft pricing remedies which came into force in April 2020, required all firms to price their overdraft products using a simple comparable interest rate. In
118

RISK FACTORS
addition to this, the implementation of ring-fencing regulations in 2019 has had direct and product providers.
Additionally, the internet and mobile technologies are changing customer behaviourindirect impacts on UK mortgage providers and the competitive environment. Theremortgage market. For some firms (who have historically utilised their retail deposits to fund activities outside of traditional retail banking) , ring-fencing has impacted their ability to fund such non-retail banking resulting in additional access deposits which may have been directed to the mortgage market- increasing competition and driving down prices.
HM Treasury is reviewing the regulatory Framework post the UK exit from the European Union, as part of the Future Regulatory Framework Review. As part of this work, HMT are proposing that the FCA and the PRA have
a steep rise in customer use of mobile banking over the last several years. Lloyds Bank Group faces competition from established providerssecondary objective focused on international competitiveness of financial services as well as from banking business developed by non-financial companies, including technology companies with strong brand recognition.firms and the industry.
As a result of any restructuring or evolution in the market there may emerge one or more new viable competitors in the UK banking market or a material strengthening of one or more of Lloyds Bank Group’s existing competitors in that market. Any of these factors or a combination thereof could result in a significant reduction inhave an impact on the profitprofitability of Lloyds Bank Group.
6.Lloyds Bank Group could fail to attract or retain senior management or other key employees
Lloyds Bank Group’s success depends on its ability to attract, retain and develop high calibre talent. If Lloyds Bank Group was to unexpectedly lose a key member of its keythe management or fail to maintain one of the strategic relationships of its key management team, its business and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.
In addition, Lloyds Bank Group also relies upon the services of other third-party providers for certain services and it may exercise limited control over the activities and business practices of these providers and any inability on Lloyds Bank Group’s part to maintain satisfactory commercial relationships with them or their failure to provide quality services could adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s business.
Attracting additional and retaining existing skilled personnel is fundamental to the continued growth of Lloyds Bank Group’s business. Personnel costs, including salaries, are increasingcontinue to increase as the general level of prices and the standard of living increases in the countries in which Lloyds Bank Group does business and as industry-wide demand for suitably qualified personnel increases. No assurance can be given that Lloyds Bank Group will successfully attract new personnel or retain existing personnel required to continue to expand its business and to successfully execute and implement its business strategy. In addition, while the uncertainty resulting fromUK Government has provided clear guidance on residency permission for EU workers in the UK’sUK, post the UK's exit from the EU, on foreign nationals’ long-term residency permissions inthe numbers of EU workers coming to the UK has decreased due to the COVID-19 pandemic and UK's exit from the EU, which may make it more challenging for Lloyds Bank Group to retainrecruit and recruitretain colleagues with the relevant skills and experience.
7.Lloyds Bank Group may fail to execute its ongoing strategic change initiatives, and the expected benefits of such initiatives may not be achieved on time or as planned
In order to maintain and enhance Lloyds Bank Group’s strategic position, it continues to invest in new initiatives and programmes. Lloyds Bank Group acknowledges the challenges faced with delivering these initiatives and programmes alongside the extensive agenda of regulatory and legal changes whilst safely operating existing systems and controls.
The successful completion of these programmes and Lloyds Bank Group’s other strategic initiatives requires ongoing subjective and complex judgements, including forecasts of economic conditions in various parts of the world, and can be subject to significant risks. For example, Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to execute its strategic initiatives successfully may be adversely impacted by a significant global macroeconomic downturn, legacy issues, limitations in its management or operational capacity and capability or significant and unexpected regulatory change in countries in which it operates.
Failure to execute Lloyds Bank Group’s strategic initiatives successfully could have an adverse effect on Lloyds Bank Group’s ability to achieve the stated targets and other expected benefits of these initiatives, and there is also a risk that the costs associated with implementing such initiatives may be higher than expected or benefits may be lesser than expected. Both of these factors could materially adversely impact Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects.
99

RISK FACTORS
8.Lloyds Bank Group may be unable to fully capture the expected value from acquisitions, which could materially and adversely affect its results of operations, financial condition or prospects
Lloyds Bank Group may from time to time undertake acquisitions as part of its growth strategy, which could subject it to a number of risks, such as: (i) the rationale and assumptions underlying the business plans supporting the valuation of a target business may prove inaccurate, in particular with respect to synergies and expected commercial demand; (ii) Lloyds Bank Group may fail to successfully integrate any acquired business, including its technologies, products and personnel; (iii) Lloyds Bank Group may fail to retain key employees, customers and suppliers of any acquired business; (iv) Lloyds Bank Group may be required or wish to terminate pre-existing contractual relationships, which could prove costly and/or be executed at unfavourable terms and conditions; (v) Lloyds Bank Group may fail to discover certain contingent or undisclosed liabilities in businesses that it acquires, or its due diligence to discover any such liabilities may be inadequate; and (vi) it may be necessary to obtain regulatory and other approvals in connection with certain acquisitions and there can be no assurance that such approvals will be obtained and even if granted, that there will be no burdensome conditions attached to such approvals, all of which could materially and adversely affect Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial conditions or prospects.
9.Lloyds Bank Group could be exposed to industrial action and increased labour costs resulting from a lack of agreement with trade unions
Within Lloyds Bank Group, there are currently two recognised unions for the purposes of collective bargaining. Combined, these collective bargaining arrangements apply to around 9597 per cent of Lloyds Bank Group’s total workforce.
Where Lloyds Bank Group or its employees or their unions seek to change any of their contractual terms, a consultation and negotiation process is undertaken. Such a process could potentially lead to increased labour costs or, in the event that any such negotiations were to be unsuccessful and result in formal industrial action, Lloyds Bank Group could experience a work stoppage that could materially adversely impact its business, financial condition and results of operations.
10.Lloyds Bank Group’s financial statements are based, in part, on assumptions and estimates
The preparation of Lloyds Bank Group’s financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.
Lloyds Bank Group and the Bank’s financial statements are prepared using judgements, estimates and assumptions based on information available at the reporting date. If one or more of these judgements, estimates and assumptions is subsequently revised as a result of new factors or circumstances emerging, there could be a material adverse effect on the Bank and/or Lloyds Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition or prospects and a corresponding impact on its funding requirements and capital ratios.
100119

FORWARD LOOKING STATEMENTS
This document contains certain forward looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the business, strategy, plans and/or results of Lloyds Bank plc together with its subsidiaries (the Lloyds Bank Group) and its current goals and expectations relating to its future financial condition and performance.expectations. Statements that are not historical or current facts, including statements about the Lloyds Bank Group's or its directors' and/or management's beliefs and expectations, are forward looking statements.
Words such as, without limitation, ‘believes’, ‘achieves’, ‘anticipates’, ‘estimates’, ‘expects’, ‘targets’, ‘should’, ‘intends’, ‘aims’, ‘projects’, ‘plans’, ‘potential’, ‘will’, ‘would’, ‘could’, ‘considered’, ‘likely’, ‘may’, ‘seek’, ‘estimate’ and variations of these words, ‘probability’, ‘goal’, ‘objective’, ‘deliver’, ‘endeavour’, ‘prospects’, ‘optimistic’ and similar futureexpressions or conditionalvariations on these expressions are intended to identify forward looking statements. These statements concern or may affect future matters, including but are not the exclusive means of identifying such statements.
Examples of such forward looking statements include, but are not limited to, statements or guidance relating to: projections or expectations of the Lloyds Bank Group’s future financial position, including profit attributable to shareholders, provisions, economic profit, dividends, capital structure, portfolios, net interest margin, capital ratios, liquidity, risk-weighted assets (RWAs), expenditures or any other financial items or ratios; litigation, regulatory and governmental investigations; the Lloyds Bank Group’s future financial performance; the level and extent of future impairments and write-downs; the Lloyds Bank Group’s ESG targets and/or commitments; statements of plans, objectives or goals of the Lloyds Bank Group or its management including in respect ofand other statements that are not historical fact; expectations about the future business and economic environments in the UK and elsewhere including, but not limited to, future trends in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, credit and equity market levels and demographic developments; statements about competition, regulation, disposals and consolidation or technological developments in the financial services industry;impact of COVID-19; and statements of assumptions underlying such statements.
By their nature, forward looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend upon circumstances that will or may occur in the future.
Factors that could cause actual business, strategy, plans and/or results (including but not limited to the payment of dividends) to differ materially from forward looking statements made by the Lloyds Bank Group or on its behalf include, but are not limited to: general economic and business conditions in the UK and internationally; market related risks, trends and developments; risks concerning borrower and counterparty credit quality; fluctuations in interest rates, inflation, exchange rates, stock markets and currencies; volatility in credit markets; volatility in the price of our securities; any impact of the transition from IBORs to alternative reference rates; the ability to access sufficient sources of capital, liquidity and funding when required; changes to the Lloyds Bank Group’s or Lloyds Banking Group plc’s credit ratings; the ability to derive cost savings and other benefits including, but without limitation, as a result of any acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions; inability to capture accurately the expected value from acquisitions; potential changes in dividend policy; the ability to achieve strategic objectives; the Lloyds Bank Group’s ESG targets and/or commitments; changing customer behaviour including consumer spending, saving and borrowing habits; changes to borrower or counterparty credit quality impacting the recoverability and value of balance sheet assets; concentration of financial exposure;insurance risks; management and monitoring of conduct risk; exposure to counterparty risk (including but not limited to third parties conducting illegal activities withoutrisk; credit rating risk; tightening of monetary policy in jurisdictions in which the Lloyds Bank Group’s knowledge);Group operates; instability in the global financial markets, including within the Eurozone, instability, instabilityand as a result of ongoing uncertainty surroundingfollowing the exit by the UK from the European Union (EU), and the effects of the EU-UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement, and as a result of such exit and the potential for other countries to exit the EU or the Eurozone and the impact of any sovereign credit rating downgrade or other sovereign financial issues;Agreement; political instability including as a result of any UK general election and any further possible referendum on Scottish independence; operational risks; conduct risk; technological changes and risks to the security of IT and operational infrastructure, systems, data and information resulting from increased threat of cyber and other attacks; natural pandemic (including but not limited to the COVID-19 pandemic) and other disasters, adverse weather and similar contingencies outside the Lloyds Bank Group’s or Lloyds Banking Group plc’s control;disasters; inadequate or failed internal or external processes or systems; acts of war, other acts of hostility terrorist actsor terrorism and responses to those acts, or other such events; geopolitical unpredictability; risks relating to sustainability and climate change;change (and achieving climate change ambitions), including the Lloyds Bank Group’s or the Lloyds Banking Group’s ability along with the government and other stakeholders to measure, manage and mitigate the impacts of climate change effectively; changes in laws, regulations, practices and accounting standards or taxation, including as a result of the UK's exit from the EU;taxation; changes to regulatory capital or liquidity requirements (including regulatory measures to restrict distributions to address potential capital and liquidity stress) and similar contingencies outsidecontingencies; assessment related to resolution planning requirements; the Lloyds Bank Group’s or Lloyds Banking Group plc’s control; the policies decisions and actions of governmental or regulatory authorities or courts in the UK, the EU, the US or elsewhere including the implementation and interpretation of key laws, legislation and regulation together with any resulting impact on the future structure of the Lloyds Bank Group; failure to comply with anti-money laundering, counter terrorist financing, anti-bribery and sanctions regulations; failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities; projected employee numbers and key person risk; increased labour costs; assumptions and estimates that form the ability to attract and retain senior management and other employees and meet its diversity objectives; actions or omissions bybasis of our financial statements; the Lloyds Bank Group's directors, management or employees including industrial action; changes to the Lloyds Bank Group's post-retirement defined benefit scheme obligations; the extentimpact of any future impairment charges or write-downs caused by, but not limited to, depressed asset valuations, market disruptions and illiquid markets; the value and effectiveness of any credit protection purchased by the Lloyds Bank Group; the inability to hedge certain risks economically; the adequacy of loss reserves; the actions of competitors, including non-bank financial services, lending companies and digital innovators and disruptive technologies;competitive conditions; and exposure to regulatory or competition scrutiny, legal, regulatory or competition proceedings, investigations or complaints. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Lloyds Bank Group’s control. Please refer to the latest Annual Report on Form 20-F filed by Lloyds Bank plc with the US Securities and Exchange Commission (the SEC), which is available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, for a discussion of certain factors and risks.
Lloyds Banking GroupBank plc may also make or disclose written and/or oral forward lookingforward-looking statements in reports filed with or furnished to the US Securities and Exchange Commission, Lloyds Banking Group annual reviews, half-year announcements, proxy statements, offering circulars, prospectuses, press releases and other written materials and in oral statements made by the directors, officers or employees of Lloyds Banking GroupBank plc to third parties, including financial analysts.
Except as required by any applicable law or regulation, the forward lookingforward-looking statements contained in this document are made as of today's date, and the Lloyds Bank Group expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward looking statements contained in this document to reflect any change in the Lloyds Bank Group’s expectations with regard theretowhether as a result of new information, future events or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based.otherwise. The information, statements and opinions contained in this document do not constitute a public offer under any applicable law or an offer to sell any securities or financial instruments or any advice or recommendation with respect to such securities or financial instruments.

101
120

LLOYDS BANK GROUP STRUCTURE
The following are significant subsidiaries of Lloyds Bank plc as at 31 December 2020.2021.
Name of subsidiary undertakingCountry of
registration/
incorporation
Percentage of equity share
capital and voting
rights held
Nature of businessRegistered office
HBOS plcScotland100%Holding companyThe Mound
Edinburgh EH1 1YZ
Bank of Scotland plcScotland100%*Banking and financial servicesThe Mound
Edinburgh EH1 1YZ
*Indirect interest
102121

INDEX TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
F-5
F-9
Throughout these financial statements, references to the ‘Bank’ are to Lloyds Bank plc; references to the ‘Group’ are to Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary and associated undertakings.
F-1

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
To the boardshareholders and the Board of directors and shareholderDirectors of Lloyds Bank plc
OPINION ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTSOpinion on the Financial Statements
We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the "Group") at 31 December 2021, the related consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, statement of changes in equity, and cash flow statement, for the year ended 31 December 2021, and the related notes included in Item 8 and the tables marked as “Audited” within the Operating and financial review and prospects section on pages 23 to 91 (collectively referred to as the "financial statements"). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Group at 31 December 2021, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year ended 31 December 2021, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.
Basis for Opinion
These financial statements are the responsibility of the Group's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Group's financial statements based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. The Group is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. As part of our audit, we are required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion.
Our audit included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audit also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
Critical Audit Matters
The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current-period audit of the financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that (1) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgements. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.

Expected Credit Losses
Impairment of loans and advances
Refer to notes 2, 3, 11, 15 and 44 in the financial statements
Critical Audit Matter Description
The Group has recognised £4.0bn of expected credit losses (“ECL”) at 31 December 2021. The determination of ECL consists of a number of assumptions that require a high degree of complex and subjective auditor judgement, specialised skills and knowledge and a high degree of estimation uncertainty. The key areas we identified as having the most significant level of management judgement were in respect of:
Multiple Economic Scenarios;
Collectively Assessed ECL; and
Model Adjustments.
Multiple Economic Scenarios
The measurement of expected credit losses is required to reflect an unbiased probability-weighted range of possible future outcomes.
The Group’s economics team develops the future economic scenarios. Firstly, a base case forecast is produced based on a set of conditioning assumptions, which are designed to reflect the Group’s best view of future events. A full distribution of economic scenarios around this base case is produced using a Monte Carlo simulation and scenarios within that distribution are ranked using estimated relationships with industry-wide historical loss data.
Four scenarios are derived from the distribution and weighted into an upside, a downside and a severe downside, respectively. These four scenarios are then used as key assumptions in the determination of the ECL allowance.
The principal consideration for our determination that performing procedures relating to the multiple economic scenarios is a critical audit matter was the high degree of management judgement which required specialised auditor knowledge and a high degree of audit effort in areas such as evaluating the forward-looking information used by management, and the weighting applied.

F-2

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Collectively Assessed ECL
The ECL is determined on a collective basis using impairment models to calculate a probability weighted estimate by applying an appropriate probability of default, estimated exposure at default and taking account of collateral held or other loss mitigants, discounted using the effective interest rate. Complex models and significant judgements are used to develop the probability of default, loss given default and exposure at default as well as applying the staging criteria under IFRS 9.
For individually assessed exposures, the significant judgements used in determining ECL includes the completeness and appropriateness of the expected recovery strategies identified; the probability assigned to each identified expected recovery strategy; and the valuation assumptions used in determining the expected recovery strategies.
Complex and subjective auditor judgement including specialised knowledge is required in evaluating the methodology, models and inputs that are inherently uncertain.
Model Adjustments
Adjustments are made to models to address known model limitations and data limitations, and emerging or non-modelled risks. Further the global pandemic has increased the uncertainty of future events used to develop the base case and, to address the limitations in the conditioning assumptions used in the multiple economic scenarios model, the Group have recognised an adjustment to their multiple economic scenarios model to account for the significant downside uncertainty.
Complex and subjective auditor judgement including specialised knowledge is required in evaluating the methodology, models and inputs of the adjustments, including the adjustment to the multiple economic scenarios, that are inherently uncertain.
How the Critical Audit Matter Was Addressed in the Audit
Multiple Economic Scenarios
We performed the following procedures:
Tested the controls over the generation of the multiple economic scenarios including those over the Group’s governance processes to determine the base case and outer scenarios;
Working with our internal economic specialists, challenged and evaluated economic forecasts in the base scenario such as the unemployment rate, House Price Index and Gross Domestic Product through comparison to an independent economic outlook, external analysts and market data;
Working with our internal modeling specialists:
We challenged and evaluated the appropriateness of the methodology applied to generate outer economic scenarios, including associated weightings, and assumptions;
Tested whether the methodology has been appropriately reflected in the model code by producing an independent version of the model generating outer economic scenarios and reconciling its outputs to the Group’s model;
Tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used by the model;
Performed a stand back assessment of the appropriateness of the weightings applied to each of the scenarios based on publicly available data; and
Evaluated the adequacy of disclosures in respect of significant judgements and sources of estimation uncertainty.
Collectively Assessed ECL
We have tested the relevant controls to determine the ECL provision referred to above including the model governance, model validation and monitoring, model assumptions, allocation of assets into stages and data accuracy and completeness.
Working with our internal modelling specialists and valuation specialists, where appropriate, we performed the following procedures:
Evaluated the appropriateness of modelling approach and assumptions used;
Independently replicated the models for the most material portfolios and compared outputs of our instances of the models to the Group’s;
Evaluated whether the models operate consistent with their specification through inspecting and re-performing the model code designed by the Group;
Assessed model performance by evaluating variations between observed data and model predictions;
Developed an understanding of assessed model limitations and remedial actions; and
Tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used in model execution and calibration.
Model Adjustments
In respect of the adjustment to models including the multiple economic scenarios model, we performed the following procedures in conjunction with our specialists:
Tested the controls over the adjustments to the models;
Evaluated the methodology, approach and assumptions in developing the adjustments, and evaluated the Group’s selection of approach;
Tested the completeness and accuracy of the data used;
Performed a recalculation of the adjustments;
Evaluated the completeness of adjustments based on our understanding of model and data limitations, including those highlighted by the COVID-19 pandemic; and
Evaluated the adequacy of the disclosures of the adjustment, including the sensitivity analysis.



F-3

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
Regulatory and litigation matters
Other provisions
Refer to notes 2, 3 and 29 in the financial statements
Critical Audit Matter Description
The Group operates in an environment where it is subject to regulatory investigations, litigation and customer remediation. The Group is currently exposed to a number of regulatory and litigation matters. The Group’s provision for these matters is £1.1bn at 31 December 2021, the most significant of which is the HBOS Reading matter.
Significant judgement is required by the Group in determining whether, under IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets:
a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation, particularly where the information available is limited as is the case with HBOS Reading; and
any contingent liabilities and underlying significant estimation uncertainties are adequately disclosed.
How the Critical Audit Matter Was Addressed in the Audit
We performed the following audit procedures:
Tested the Group’s controls over the completeness of provisions, the robustness of the assessment of the provision against the requirements of IAS 37, the appropriateness of judgements used to determine a ‘best estimate’ and the completeness and accuracy of data used in the process;
Evaluated the assessment of the provisions, associated probabilities, and potential outcomes in accordance with IAS 37;
Verified and evaluated whether the methodology, data and significant judgements and assumptions used in the valuation of the provisions are appropriate in the context of the applicable financial reporting framework;
In respect of HBOS Reading, we inspected information available for the limited number of awards made by the Foskett panel and tested the methodology applied to determine the provision;
Inspected correspondence and, where appropriate, made direct enquiry with the Group’s regulators and internal and external legal counsel;
Where no provision was made, we critically assessed and challenged the conclusion in the context of the requirements of IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets; and
Evaluated whether the disclosures made in the financial statements appropriately reflect the facts and key sources of estimation uncertainty.

Defined benefit obligations
Retirement benefit obligations
Refer to notes 2, 3 and 27 in the financial statements
Critical Audit Matter Description
The Group operates a number of defined benefit retirement schemes, the obligations for which totalled £47.1bn at 31 December 2021. Their valuation is determined with reference to key actuarial assumptions including mortality assumptions, discount rates and inflation rates. Due to the size of these schemes, small changes in these assumptions can have a material impact on the value of the defined benefit obligation and therefore, the assessment of these assumptions are a key judgement.
How the Critical Audit Matter Was Addressed in the Audit
We performed the following audit procedures:
Tested the Group’s controls over the valuation the defined benefit obligations, including controls over the assumptions setting process; and
Challenged the key actuarial assumptions used by comparing these against ranges and expectations determined by our internal actuarial experts, which are calculated with reference to the central assumptions adopted by the actuarial firms for whom we have reviewed and accepted their methodologies.

/s/ Deloitte LLP

London, United Kingdom
8 March 2022

The first accounting period we audited was 31 December 2021. In 2020, we commenced our audit planning procedures.
F-4

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
To the board of directors and shareholders of Lloyds Bank plc,
Opinion on the Financial Statements
We have audited the accompanyingconsolidated balance sheetssheet of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of 31 December 2020, and 31 December 2019, and the related consolidated income statements, statementsstatement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, statementsconsolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statementsstatement for each of the threetwo years in the period ended 31 December 2020, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31 December 2020, and 31 December 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the threetwo years in the period ended 31 December 2020 in conformity with international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.
CHANGES IN ACCOUNTING PRINCIPLES
As discussed in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed the manner in which it accountsBasis for leases , income taxes and hedge accounting in 2019.
BASIS FOR OPINIONOpinion
These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’sCompany's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.
We conducted our audits of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. As part of our audits we are required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion.
Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
CRITICAL AUDIT MATTERS
The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that (i) relate to accounts or disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (ii) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or complex judgments.
The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.
ALLOWANCE FOR EXPECTED CREDIT LOSSES
As described in notes 2, 3 and 16 to the consolidated financial statements, the allowance for expected credit losses (ECL) was £6,132 million as of 31 December 2020. The calculation of the allowance for ECL required management to make a number of judgments, assumptions and estimates. The most significant included probability of default, lifetime of an exposure, significant increase in credit risk, certain post-model adjustments, the accuracy of borrower credit risk ratings, and the determination of the base case and multiple economic scenarios assumptions. The allowance for ECL for individual exposures takes into account the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the allowance for ECL is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management in determining the allowance, which in turn led to a high degree of auditor subjectivity in performing procedures related to the impairment models, key assumptions, including the probability of default and significant increase in credit risk, the determination of certain post-model adjustments, the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss for individual exposures, the accuracy of borrower credit risk ratings, and the determination of the base case scenario, (ii) there was significant judgment and effort in evaluating audit evidence related to these models, judgments and assumptions used to determine the allowance and (iii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the estimation process, which included controls over the data, models and assumptions used in determining the allowance for ECL. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in testing management’s process to estimate the allowance for ECL including evaluating the appropriateness of methodology and models, evaluating the reasonableness of significant assumptions used in the impairment models including the probability of default and significant increase in credit risk, and testing certain post -model adjustments. It also included evaluating the reasonableness of key assumptions in the base case scenario. Evaluating the base case scenario assumptions involved assessing their reasonableness against external data and economic events that have occurred. We also assessed the reasonableness of the accuracy of borrower credit risk ratings and the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss for individual exposures.
F-2

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
DEFINED BENEFIT OBLIGATION
As described in notes 2, 3 and 28 to the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of the defined benefit obligation was £49,549 million as of 31 December 2020. The valuation of the defined benefit obligation required management to make a number of assumptions. The key assumptions include the discount rate applied to future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. The discount rate is set by management with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the currency of and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The rate of inflation is set by management with reference to market indices. The expected lifetime of the schemes’ members is set by management by considering latest market practice and actual experience in determining both current mortality expectations and the rate of future mortality improvement.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the defined benefit obligation is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management to determine the discount rate to be applied to the future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members, which in turn led to significant auditor judgment and audit effort to evaluate the evidence obtained related to the valuation models and assumptions and (ii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill or knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the estimation process, which included controls over models and key assumptions including the discount rate applied to future cash flows, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members, used to calculate the defined benefit obligation. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in testing management’s process to estimate the defined benefit obligation, including evaluating the appropriateness of methodology and models, and evaluating the reasonableness of key assumptions, including the discount rate, the rate of inflation and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members. Evaluating the assumptions used in the models involved assessing their reasonableness and comparing them to our own independently determined benchmarks.
VALUATION OF CERTAIN LEVEL 3 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENT ASSETS
As described in notes 2, 3 and 42 to the consolidated financial statements, the carrying value of the level 3 financial instrument assets held at fair value was £1,576 million as of 31 December 2020. Within this balance, the Loans and advances to customers includes a certain loan portfolio which is a concentration of similar, non-traded assets. The fair value of these assets is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from market observable interest rates, a risk margin that reflects loan credit ratings and an incremental illiquidity premium based on historical spreads at origination on similar loans.
The principal considerations for our determination that performing procedures relating to the valuation of certain level 3 financial instrument assets is a critical audit matter are (i) there was significant judgment by management to determine the fair value of the level 3 financial instrument assets using valuation models which relied upon unobservable inputs, (ii) there was judgment required to evaluate the audit evidence obtained related to the valuation models and key assumptions including loan credit ratings, and (iii) the audit effort involved the use of professionals with specialised skill or knowledge.
Addressing the matter involved performing procedures and evaluating audit evidence in connection with forming our overall opinion on the consolidated financial statements. These procedures included testing the effectiveness of controls relating to the valuation of the financial instrument assets, including controls over the methodology and key assumptions including loan credit ratings. These procedures also included, among others, the involvement of professionals with specialised skill and knowledge to assist in reviewing the methodology, and assessing the reasonableness of key assumptions, including loan credit ratings.



/s/PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
London, United Kingdom
11 March 2021

We have served as the Company’sCompany's auditor since 1995.from 1995 to 2021.
F-3F-5

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENTSSTATEMENT
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
202020192018
Note£ million£ million£ million
Interest income13,866 16,098 16,216 
Interest expense(3,096)(3,878)(3,462)
Net interest income510,770 12,220 12,754 
Fee and commission income1,924 2,363 2,497 
Fee and commission expense(909)(1,027)(1,228)
Net fee and commission income61,015 1,336 1,269 
Net trading income7750 360 408 
Other operating income82,050 2,692 2,543 
Other income3,815 4,388 4,220 
Total income14,585 16,608 16,974 
Regulatory provisions30(414)(2,190)(1,956)
Other operating expenses(8,782)(8,933)(9,812)
Total operating expenses9(9,196)(11,123)(11,768)
Impairment11(4,060)(1,362)(926)
Profit before tax – continuing operations1,329 4,123 4,280 
Tax credit (expense)12137 (1,287)(1,377)
Profit after tax – continuing operations1,466 2,836 2,903 
Profit after tax – discontinued operations130 1,314 
Profit for the year1,466 2,836 4,217 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders1,023 2,515 3,907 
Profit attributable to other equity holders417 281 275 
Profit attributable to equity holders1,440 2,796 4,182 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests26 40 35 
Profit for the year1,466 2,836 4,217 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-4

STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
for the years ended 31 December 2020, 31 December 2019 and 31 December 2018
The Group202020192018
£ million£ million£ million
Profit for the year1,466 2,836 4,217 
Other comprehensive income
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements1:
Remeasurements before tax138 (1,433)167 
Tax(25)316 (47)
113 (1,117)120 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value0 (98)
Tax(16)12 22 
(16)12 (76)
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk:
(Losses) gains before tax(75)(419)533 
Tax20 113 (144)
(55)(306)389 
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures0 
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value46 (34)(31)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals(145)(196)(268)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment5 (1)
Tax74 72 115 
(20)(159)(184)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income709 1,166 91 
Net income statement transfers(727)(580)(691)
Tax(31)(140)137 
(49)446 (463)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve:
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)0 (2)(15)
Transfers to income statement (tax: £NaN)0 108 
0 (2)93 
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax(27)(1,126)(113)
Total comprehensive income for the year1,439 1,710 4,104 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders arising from continuing operations996 1,389 2,450 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders arising from discontinued operations1
0 1,344 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders996 1,389 3,794 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders417 281 275 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders1,413 1,670 4,069 
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests26 40 35 
Total comprehensive income for the year1,439 1,710 4,104 
1 2018 included post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements in the Group’s discontinued operations of £37 million (£30 million after tax).
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-5

STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
for the years ended 31 December 2020, 31 December 2019 and 31 December 2018
The Bank202020192018
£ million£ million£ million
Profit for the year641 2,446 6,141 
Other comprehensive income:
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:
Remeasurements before tax(133)(776)(206)
Tax31 200 44 
(102)(576)(162)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value0 (102)
Tax4 12 
4 12 (102)
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk:
(Losses) gains before tax(75)(419)533 
Tax20 113 (144)
(55)(306)389 
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value12 (50)(58)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals(138)(201)(258)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment1 (1)
Tax36 74 114 
(89)(178)(202)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income85 892 255 
Net income statement transfers(355)(448)(628)
Tax30 (105)87 
(240)339 (286)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve:
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)1 
Transfers to income statement (tax: £NaN)0 (84)
1 (82)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax(481)(703)(445)
Total comprehensive income for the year160 1,743 5,696 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders(257)1,462 5,421 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders417 281 275 
Total comprehensive income for the year160 1,743 5,696 
202120202019
Note£ million£ million£ million
Interest income12,920 13,866 16,098 
Interest expense(1,884)(3,096)(3,878)
Net interest income511,036 10,770 12,220 
Fee and commission income2,195 1,924 2,363 
Fee and commission expense(942)(909)(1,027)
Net fee and commission income61,253 1,015 1,336 
Net trading income7385 750 360 
Other operating income81,999 2,050 2,692 
Other income3,637 3,815 4,388 
Total income14,673 14,585 16,608 
Operating expenses9(10,206)(9,196)(11,123)
Impairment credit (charge)111,318 (4,060)(1,362)
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 4,123 
Tax (expense) credit12(583)137 (1,287)
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 2,836 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders4,826 1,023 2,515 
Profit attributable to other equity holders344 417 281 
Profit attributable to equity holders5,170 1,440 2,796 
Profit attributable to non-controlling interests32 26 40 
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 2,836 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-6

BALANCE SHEETSSTATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
atfor the years ended 31 December 2021, 31 December 2020 and 31 December 2019
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
Note£ million£ million£ million£ million
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks49,888 38,880 45,753 35,741 
Items in the course of collection from banks300 292 257 252 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss141,674 2,284 1,724 703 
Derivative financial instruments158,341 8,494 12,595 13,638 
Loans and advances to banks165,950 4,852 5,656 4,453 
Loans and advances to customers16480,141 474,470 178,269 177,569 
Debt securities165,137 5,325 4,315 5,241 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings16738 1,854 128,771 202,277 
Financial assets at amortised cost491,966 486,501 317,011 389,540 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income1827,260 24,617 24,647 22,160 
Goodwill19470 474 0 
Other intangible assets204,112 3,781 2,960 2,618 
Property, plant and equipment218,317 9,467 3,098 3,594 
Current tax recoverable537 440 
Deferred tax assets293,468 3,366 2,109 2,029 
Investment in subsidiary undertakings220 33,353 34,084 
Retirement benefit assets281,714 681 765 386 
Other assets231,892 2,527 754 998 
Total assets599,939 581,368 445,466 505,750 
The Group202120202019
£ million£ million£ million
Profit for the year5,202 1,466 2,836 
Other comprehensive income
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:
Remeasurements before tax1,720 138 (1,433)
Tax(658)(25)316 
1,062 113 (1,117)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value — — 
Tax1 (16)12 
1 (16)12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk:
Losses before tax(86)(75)(419)
Tax34 20 113 
(52)(55)(306)
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value137 46 (34)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals116 (145)(196)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment(2)(1)
Tax(55)74 72 
196 (20)(159)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income(2,138)709 1,166 
Net income statement transfers(584)(727)(580)
Tax764 (31)(140)
(1,958)(49)446 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve:
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)(19)— (2)
Transfers to income statement (tax: £nil) — — 
(19)— (2)
Total other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax(770)(27)(1,126)
Total comprehensive income for the year4,432 1,439 1,710 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders4,056 996 1,389 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders344 417 281 
Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders4,400 1,413 1,670 
Total comprehensive income attributable to non-controlling interests32 26 40 
Total comprehensive income for the year4,432 1,439 1,710 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-7

BALANCE SHEETSSTATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
atfor the years ended 31 December 2021, 31 December 2020 and 31 December 2019
Equity and liabilitiesThe GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
Note£ million£ million£ million£ million
Liabilities
Deposits from banks24,997 23,593 10,304 7,122 
Customer deposits434,569 396,839 264,473 239,762 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings6,875 4,893 39,836 109,771 
Items in course of transmission to banks302 354 199 198 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss246,831 7,702 7,907 7,697 
Derivative financial instruments158,228 9,831 11,072 14,211 
Notes in circulation1,305 1,079 0 
Debt securities in issue2559,293 76,431 48,109 61,509 
Other liabilities275,181 5,600 2,573 2,792 
Retirement benefit obligations28245 257 106 124 
Current tax liabilities31 166 0 
Other provisions301,722 3,138 968 1,436 
Subordinated liabilities319,242 12,586 7,751 9,909 
Total liabilities558,821 542,469 393,298 454,531 
Equity
Share capital321,574 1,574 1,574 1,574 
Share premium account33600 600 600 600 
Other reserves347,181 7,250 1,382 1,710 
Retained profits3525,750 24,549 42,677 42,470 
Shareholders’ equity35,105 33,973 46,233 46,354 
Other equity instruments365,935 4,865 5,935 4,865 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests41,040 38,838 52,168 51,219 
Non-controlling interests78 61 0 
Total equity41,118 38,899 52,168 51,219 
Total equity and liabilities599,939 581,368 445,466 505,750 
The Bank202120202019
£ million£ million£ million
Profit for the year3,593 641 2,446 
Other comprehensive income
Items that will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements:
Remeasurements before tax951 (133)(776)
Tax(395)31 200 
556 (102)(576)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value — — 
Tax1 12 
1 12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk:
Losses before tax(86)(75)(419)
Tax34 20 113 
(52)(55)(306)
Items that may subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss:
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income:
Change in fair value139 12 (50)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals(2)(138)(201)
Income statement transfers in respect of impairment1 (1)
Tax(47)36 74 
91 (89)(178)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve:
Effective portion of changes in fair value taken to other comprehensive income(438)85 892 
Net income statement transfers(399)(355)(448)
Tax190 30 (105)
(647)(240)339 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve:
Currency translation differences (tax: £nil)(2)
Transfers to income statement (tax: £nil) — — 
(2)
Total other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax(53)(481)(703)
Total comprehensive income for the year3,540 160 1,743 
Total comprehensive income attributable to ordinary shareholders3,196 (257)1,462 
Total comprehensive income attributable to other equity holders344 417 281 
Total comprehensive income for the year3,540 160 1,743 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm included within this Form 20-F covers the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the ‘Group’) only.
F-8

BALANCE SHEETS
at 31 December 2021 and 31 December 2020
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
Note£ million£ million£ million£ million
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks54,279 49,888 49,618 45,753 
Items in the course of collection from banks147 300 99 257 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss131,798 1,674 4,529 1,724 
Derivative financial instruments145,511 8,341 6,898 12,595 
Loans and advances to banks1
4,478 4,324 4,291 4,030 
Loans and advances to customers1
430,829 425,694 116,716 123,822 
Reverse repurchase agreements1
49,708 56,073 49,708 56,073 
Debt securities4,562 5,137 3,756 4,315 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 738 108,424 128,771 
Financial assets at amortised cost15490,316 491,966 282,895 317,011 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income1727,786 27,260 25,529 24,647 
Goodwill18470 470  — 
Other intangible assets194,144 4,112 3,096 2,960 
Current tax recoverable220 537 245 440 
Deferred tax assets284,048 3,468 2,434 2,109 
Investment in subsidiary undertakings20 — 30,588 33,353 
Retirement benefit assets274,531 1,714 2,420 765 
Other assets219,599 10,209 3,473 3,852 
Total assets602,849 599,939 411,824 445,466 
Liabilities
Deposits from banks1
3,363 6,230 2,768 5,217 
Customer deposits1
449,373 425,152 268,683 255,056 
Repurchase agreements1
30,106 28,184 78 14,504 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 6,875 22,872 39,836 
Items in course of transmission to banks308 302 207 199 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss236,537 6,831 9,821 7,907 
Derivative financial instruments144,643 8,228 6,102 11,072 
Notes in circulation1,321 1,305  — 
Debt securities in issue2448,724 59,293 38,439 48,109 
Other liabilities265,391 5,181 3,128 2,573 
Retirement benefit obligations27230 245 101 106 
Current tax liabilities 31  — 
Other provisions291,933 1,722 771 968 
Subordinated liabilities308,658 9,242 7,907 7,751 
Total liabilities562,077 558,821 360,877 393,298 
Equity
Share capital311,574 1,574 1,574 1,574 
Share premium account32600 600 600 600 
Other reserves335,400 7,181 824 1,382 
Retained profits3428,836 25,750 43,681 42,677 
Ordinary shareholders’ equity36,410 35,105 46,679 46,233 
Other equity instruments354,268 5,935 4,268 5,935 
Total equity excluding non-controlling interests40,678 41,040 50,947 52,168 
Non-controlling interests94 78  — 
Total equity40,772 41,118 50,947 52,168 
Total equity and liabilities602,849 599,939 411,824 445,466 
1See note 1 regarding change to presentation.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm included within this Form 20-F covers the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the ‘Group’) only.
F-9

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
The GroupThe GroupAttributable to ordinary shareholdersThe GroupAttributable to ordinary shareholders
Share
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
TotalShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20202,174 7,250 24,549 33,973 4,865 61 38,899 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20212,174 7,181 25,750 35,105 5,935 78 41,118 
Comprehensive incomeComprehensive incomeComprehensive income
Profit for the yearProfit for the year  1,023 1,023 417 26 1,466 Profit for the year  4,826 4,826 344 32 5,202 
Other comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of taxPost-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax  113 113   113 Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax  1,062 1,062   1,062 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securitiesDebt securities (20) (20)  (20)Debt securities 196  196   196 
Equity sharesEquity shares (16) (16)  (16)Equity shares 1  1   1 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of taxGains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax  (55)(55)  (55)Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax  (52)(52)  (52)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of taxMovements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax (49) (49)  (49)Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax (1,958) (1,958)  (1,958)
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN) 0  0   0 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of taxMovements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax (19) (19)  (19)
Total other comprehensive incomeTotal other comprehensive income (85)58 (27)  (27)Total other comprehensive income (1,780)1,010 (770)  (770)
Total comprehensive income1
Total comprehensive income1
 (85)1,081 996 417 26 1,439 
Total comprehensive income1
 (1,780)5,836 4,056 344 32 4,432 
Transactions with ownersTransactions with ownersTransactions with owners
Dividends     (7)(7)
Dividends (note 36)Dividends (note 36)  (2,900)(2,900) (14)(2,914)
Distributions on other equity instrumentsDistributions on other equity instruments    (417) (417)Distributions on other equity instruments    (344) (344)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 36)    1,070  1,070 
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)  (1)(1)1,550  1,549 
Redemptions of other equity instruments (note 35)Redemptions of other equity instruments (note 35)  (9)(9)(3,217) (3,226)
Capital contributions receivedCapital contributions received  140 140   140 Capital contributions received  164 164   164 
Return of capital contributionsReturn of capital contributions  (4)(4)  (4)Return of capital contributions  (4)(4)  (4)
Changes in non-controlling interests     (2)(2)
Change in non-controlling interestsChange in non-controlling interests  (1)(1) (2)(3)
Total transactions with ownersTotal transactions with owners  136 136 653 (9)780 Total transactions with owners  (2,751)(2,751)(2,011)(16)(4,778)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRealised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income 16 (16)   0 Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income (1)1     
At 31 December 20202,174 7,181 25,750 35,105 5,935 78 41,118 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20212,174 5,400 28,836 36,410 4,268 94 40,772 
1Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent was £4,400 million (2020: £1,413 million (2019:million; 2019: £1,670 million; 2018: £4,069 million).
Further details of movements in the Group’s share capital and reserves are provided in notes 31, 32, 33, 34 35 and 36.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-9

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2020, 31 December 2019 and 31 December 2018
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
The GroupShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20192,174 6,965 27,321 36,460 3,217 73 39,750 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year— — 2,515 2,515 281 40 2,836 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (1,117)(1,117)— — (1,117)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities— (159)— (159)— — (159)
Equity shares— 12 — 12 — — 12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (306)(306)— — (306)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— 446 — 446 — — 446 
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)— (2)— (2)— — (2)
Total other comprehensive income— 297 (1,423)(1,126)— — (1,126)
Total comprehensive income— 297 1,092 1,389 281 40 1,710 
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 37)— — (4,100)(4,100)— (38)(4,138)
Distributions on other equity instruments— — — — (281)— (281)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 36)— — — — 1,648 — 1,648 
Capital contributions received— — 229 229 — — 229 
Return of capital contributions— — (5)(5)— — (5)
Changes in non-controlling interests— — — — — (14)(14)
Total transactions with owners— — (3,876)(3,876)1,367 (52)(2,561)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— (12)12 — — — 
At 31 December 20192,174 7,250 24,549 33,973 4,865 61 38,899 
35.
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-10

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
Attributable to ordinary shareholdersAttributable to ordinary shareholders
The GroupThe GroupShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
TotalThe GroupShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20182,174 7,484 36,749 46,407 3,217 379 50,003 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20202,174 7,250 24,549 33,973 4,865 61 38,899 
Comprehensive incomeComprehensive incomeComprehensive income
Profit for the yearProfit for the year— — 3,907 3,907 275 35 4,217 Profit for the year— — 1,023 1,023 417 26 1,466 
Other comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of taxPost-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — 120 120 — — 120 Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — 113 113 — — 113 
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures— — — — 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securitiesDebt securities— (184)— (184)— — (184)Debt securities— (20)— (20)— — (20)
Equity sharesEquity shares— (76)— (76)— — (76)Equity shares— (16)— (16)— — (16)
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of taxGains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — 389 389 — — 389 Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (55)(55)— — (55)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of taxMovements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— (463)— (463)— — (463)Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— (49)— (49)— — (49)
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)— 93 — 93 — — 93 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of taxMovements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax— — — — — — — 
Total other comprehensive incomeTotal other comprehensive income— (630)517 (113)— — (113)Total other comprehensive income— (85)58 (27)— — (27)
Total comprehensive incomeTotal comprehensive income— (630)4,424 3,794 275 35 4,104 Total comprehensive income— (85)1,081 996 417 26 1,439 
Transactions with ownersTransactions with ownersTransactions with owners
Dividends (note 37)— — (11,022)(11,022)— (36)(11,058)
Dividends (note 36)Dividends (note 36)— — — — — (7)(7)
Distributions on other equity instrumentsDistributions on other equity instruments— — — — (275)— (275)Distributions on other equity instruments— — — — (417)— (417)
Capital repayment to parent— — (2,975)(2,975)— — (2,975)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)— — — — 1,070 — 1,070 
Capital contributions receivedCapital contributions received— — 265 265 — — 265 Capital contributions received— — 140 140 — — 140 
Return of capital contributionsReturn of capital contributions— — (9)(9)— — (9)Return of capital contributions— — (4)(4)— — (4)
Changes in non-controlling interests— — — — — (305)(305)
Change in non-controlling interestsChange in non-controlling interests— — — — — (2)(2)
Total transactions with ownersTotal transactions with owners— (13,741)(13,741)(275)(341)(14,357)Total transactions with owners— — 136 136 653 (9)780 
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRealised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— 111 (111)— — — Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— 16 (16)— — — — 
At 31 December 20182,174 6,965 27,321 36,460 3,217 73 39,750 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20202,174 7,181 25,750 35,105 5,935 78 41,118 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-11

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
The BankShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20202,174 1,710 42,470 46,354 4,865 51,219 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year  224 224 417 641 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax  (102)(102) (102)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities (89) (89) (89)
Equity shares 4  4  4 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax  (55)(55) (55)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax (240) (240) (240)
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN) 1  1  1 
Total other comprehensive income (324)(157)(481) (481)
Total comprehensive income1
 (324)67 (257)417 160 
Transactions with owners
Distributions on other equity instruments    (417)(417)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 36)    1,070 1,070 
Capital contributions received  140 140  140 
Return of capital contributions  (4)(4) (4)
Total transactions with owners  136 136 653 789 
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income (4)4   0 
At 31 December 20202,174 1,382 42,677 46,233 5,935 52,168 
1Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent was £160 million (2019:£1,743 million; 2018: £5,696 million).
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
The GroupShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Non-
controlling
interests
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20192,174 6,965 27,321 36,460 3,217 73 39,750 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year— — 2,515 2,515 281 40 2,836 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (1,117)(1,117)— — (1,117)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities— (159)— (159)— — (159)
Equity shares— 12 — 12 — — 12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (306)(306)— — (306)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— 446 — 446 — — 446 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax— (2)— (2)— — (2)
Total other comprehensive income— 297 (1,423)(1,126)— — (1,126)
Total comprehensive income— 297 1,092 1,389 281 40 1,710 
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 36)— — (4,100)(4,100)— (38)(4,138)
Distributions on other equity instruments— — — — (281)— (281)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)— — — — 1,648 — 1,648 
Capital contributions received— — 229 229 — — 229 
Return of capital contributions— — (5)(5)— — (5)
Change in non-controlling interests— — — — — (14)(14)
Total transactions with owners— — (3,876)(3,876)1,367 (52)(2,561)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— (12)12 — — — — 
At 31 December 20192,174 7,250 24,549 33,973 4,865 61 38,899 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
F-12

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
Attributable to ordinary shareholdersAttributable to ordinary shareholders
The BankThe BankShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
TotalThe BankShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20182,174 2,071 52,843 57,088 3,217 60,305 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20212,174 1,382 42,677 46,233 5,935 52,168 
Comprehensive incomeComprehensive incomeComprehensive income
Profit for the yearProfit for the year— — 5,866 5,866 275 6,141 Profit for the year  3,249 3,249 344 3,593 
Other comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive incomeOther comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of taxPost-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (162)(162)— (162)Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax  556 556  556 
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securitiesDebt securities— (202)— (202)— (202)Debt securities 91  91  91 
Equity sharesEquity shares— (102)— (102)— (102)Equity shares 1  1  1 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of taxGains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — 389 389 — 389 Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax  (52)(52) (52)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of taxMovements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— (286)— (286)— (286)Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax (647) (647) (647)
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)— (82)— (82)— (82)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of taxMovements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax (2) (2) (2)
Total other comprehensive incomeTotal other comprehensive income— (672)227 (445)— (445)Total other comprehensive income (557)504 (53) (53)
Total comprehensive income— (672)6,093 5,421 275 5,696 
Total comprehensive income1
Total comprehensive income1
 (557)3,753 3,196 344 3,540 
Transactions with ownersTransactions with ownersTransactions with owners
Dividends (note 37)— — (11,022)(11,022)— (11,022)
Dividends (note 36)Dividends (note 36)  (2,900)(2,900) (2,900)
Distributions on other equity instrumentsDistributions on other equity instruments— — — — (275)(275)Distributions on other equity instruments    (344)(344)
Capital repayment to parent— — (2,975)(2,975)— (2,975)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)  (1)(1)1,550 1,549 
Redemptions of other equity instruments (note 35)Redemptions of other equity instruments (note 35)  (9)(9)(3,217)(3,226)
Capital contributions receivedCapital contributions received— — 265 265 — 265 Capital contributions received  164 164  164 
Return of capital contributionsReturn of capital contributions— — (9)(9)— (9)Return of capital contributions  (4)(4) (4)
Total transactions with ownersTotal transactions with owners— (13,741)(13,741)(275)(14,016)Total transactions with owners  (2,750)(2,750)(2,011)(4,761)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRealised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— 144 (144)— — Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income (1)1    
At 31 December 20182,174 1,543 45,051 48,768 3,217 51,985 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year— — 2,165 2,165 281 2,446 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (576)(576)— (576)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities— (178)— (178)— (178)
Equity shares— 12 — 12 — 12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (306)(306)— (306)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— 339 — 339 — 339 
Currency translation differences (tax: £NaN)— — — 
Total other comprehensive income— 179 (882)(703)— (703)
Total comprehensive income— 179 1,283 1,462 281 1,743 
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 37)— — (4,100)(4,100)— (4,100)
Distributions on other equity instruments(281)(281)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 36)— — — — 1,648 1,648 
Capital contributions received— — 229 229 — 229 
Return of capital contributions— — (5)(5)— (5)
Total transactions with owners— — (3,876)(3,876)1,367 (2,509)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— (12)12 — — 
At 31 December 20192,174 1,710 42,470 46,354 4,865 51,219 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20212,174 824 43,681 46,679 4,268 50,947 
1Total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent was £3,540 million (2020:£160 million; 2019: £1,743 million).
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm included within this Form 20-F covers the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the ‘Group’) only.
F-13

STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the years ended 31 December 2021, 31 December 2020 and 31 December 2019
Attributable to ordinary shareholders
The BankShare
capital and
premium
Other
reserves
Retained
profits
TotalOther
equity
instruments
Total
£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
At 1 January 20192,174 1,543 45,051 48,768 3,217 51,985 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year— — 2,165 2,165 281 2,446 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (576)(576)— (576)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities— (178)— (178)— (178)
Equity shares— 12 — 12 — 12 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (306)(306)— (306)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— 339 — 339 — 339 
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax— — — 
Total other comprehensive income— 179 (882)(703)— (703)
Total comprehensive income— 179 1,283 1,462 281 1,743 
Transactions with owners
Dividends (note 36)— — (4,100)(4,100)— (4,100)
Distributions on other equity instruments— — — — (281)(281)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)— — — — 1,648 1,648 
Capital contributions received— — 229 229 — 229 
Return of capital contributions— — (5)(5)— (5)
Total transactions with owners— — (3,876)(3,876)1,367 (2,509)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— (12)12 — — — 
At 31 December 20192,174 1,710 42,470 46,354 4,865 51,219 
Comprehensive income
Profit for the year— — 224 224 417 641 
Other comprehensive income
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements, net of tax— — (102)(102)— (102)
Movements in revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets held at fair value through other comprehensive income, net of tax:
Debt securities— (89)— (89)— (89)
Equity shares— — — 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk, net of tax— — (55)(55)— (55)
Movements in cash flow hedging reserve, net of tax— (240)— (240)— (240)
Movements in foreign currency translation reserve, net of tax— — — 
Total other comprehensive income— (324)(157)(481)— (481)
Total comprehensive income— (324)67 (257)417 160 
Transactions with owners
Distributions on other equity instruments— — — — (417)(417)
Issue of other equity instruments (note 35)— — — — 1,070 1,070 
Capital contributions received— — 140 140 — 140 
Return of capital contributions— — (4)(4)— (4)
Total transactions with owners— — 136 136 653 789 
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income— (4)— — — 
At 31 December 20202,174 1,382 42,677 46,233 5,935 52,168 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm included within this Form 20-F covers the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the ‘Group’) only.
F-14

CASH FLOW STATEMENTS
for the years ended 31 December 2020,2021, 31 December 20192020 and 31 December 20182019
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
Note£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
Profit before tax1
1,329 4,123 5,660 444 3,091 6,898 
Adjustments for:
Change in operating assets46(a)(6,856)12,904 34,184 71,662 (31,543)46,534 
Change in operating liabilities46(b)17,841 (5,630)(61,433)(61,993)39,301 (76,719)
Non-cash and other items46(c)3,484 1,469 (743)1,820 (950)(3,610)
Tax paid(616)(1,232)(1,616)(194)(596)(393)
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities15,182 11,634 (23,948)11,739 9,303 (27,290)
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of financial assets(8,539)(9,108)(12,309)(7,793)(7,748)(11,699)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of financial assets6,225 8,847 26,863 5,599 8,664 25,927 
Purchase of fixed assets(2,815)(3,552)(3,450)(1,186)(1,638)(1,486)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets1,063 1,258 1,262 12 91 113 
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries0 (1,055)(1,766)(13)
Dividends received from subsidiaries0 44 1,331 4,867 
Distributions on other equity instruments received0 167 103 101 
Capital repayments and redemptions0 1,801 212 210 
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired46(e)0 (26)0 (98)
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed46(f)0 107 8,604 0 20 7,704 
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities(4,066)(2,448)20,944 (2,411)(731)25,626 
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders0 (4,100)(11,022)0 (4,100)(11,022)
Distributions on other equity instruments(417)(281)(275)(417)(281)(275)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests(7)(38)(36)0 
Return of capital contributions(4)(5)(9)(4)(5)(9)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities(852)(906)(1,022)(759)(674)(659)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities303 780 201 496 780 
Proceeds from issue of other equity instruments1,070 1,648 1,070 1,648 
Return of capital to parent company0 (2,975)0 (2,975)
Repayment of subordinated liabilities(4,156)(762)(2,256)(2,726)(184)
Borrowings from parent company4,799 916 9,860 4,799 916 9,860 
Repayments to parent company(1,403)(7,357)(10,354)(1,403)(7,357)(10,354)
Interest paid on borrowing from parent company(98)(187)(370)(98)(187)(370)
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities(765)(10,292)(18,258)958 (9,444)(15,804)
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents1 (3)0 
Change in cash and cash equivalents10,352 (1,109)(21,259)10,286 (872)(17,466)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year38,614 39,723 60,982 37,782 38,654 56,120 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year46(d)48,966 38,614 39,723 48,068 37,782 38,654 
1The Group profit before tax in 2018 comprised £4,280 million in respect of continuing operations and £1,380 million in respect of discontinued operations.
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
Note£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million£ million
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 4,123 3,301 444 3,091 
Adjustments for:
Change in operating assets45(A)5,060 (6,856)12,904 38,804 71,662 (31,543)
Change in operating liabilities45(B)8,110 17,841 (5,630)(28,015)(61,993)39,301 
Non-cash and other items45(C)(661)3,484 1,469 (2,059)1,820 (950)
Tax paid (net)(715)(616)(1,232)(11)(194)(596)
Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities17,579 15,182 11,634 12,020 11,739 9,303 
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of financial assets(8,885)(8,539)(9,108)(8,775)(7,793)(7,748)
Proceeds from sale and maturity of financial assets8,134 6,225 8,847 7,730 5,599 8,664 
Purchase of fixed assets(3,102)(2,815)(3,552)(1,255)(1,186)(1,638)
Proceeds from sale of fixed assets1,028 1,063 1,258 5 12 91 
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries — — (11)(1,055)(1,766)
Dividends received from subsidiaries — — 1,391 44 1,331 
Distributions on other equity instruments received — — 112 167 103 
Capital repayments and redemptions — — 2,576 1,801 212 
Acquisition of businesses, net of cash acquired(3)— —  — — 
Disposal of businesses, net of cash disposed — 107  — 20 
Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities(2,828)(4,066)(2,448)1,773 (2,411)(731)
Cash flows from financing activities
Dividends paid to ordinary shareholders36(2,900)— (4,100)(2,900)— (4,100)
Distributions on other equity instruments(344)(417)(281)(344)(417)(281)
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests(14)(7)(38) — — 
Return of capital contributions(4)(4)(5)(4)(4)(5)
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities(525)(852)(906)(423)(759)(674)
Proceeds from issue of subordinated liabilities3,262 303 780 3,262 496 780 
Proceeds from issue of other equity instruments1,549 1,070 1,648 1,549 1,070 1,648 
Repayment of subordinated liabilities(3,745)(4,156)(762)(3,049)(2,726)(184)
Redemptions of other equity instruments(3,226)— — (3,226)— — 
Borrowings from parent company543 4,799 916 543 4,799 916 
Repayments of borrowings to parent company(4,896)(1,403)(7,357)(4,813)(1,403)(7,357)
Interest paid on borrowings from parent company(226)(98)(187)(226)(98)(187)
Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities(10,526)(765)(10,292)(9,631)958 (9,444)
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents(1)(3) — — 
Change in cash and cash equivalents4,224 10,352 (1,109)4,162 10,286 (872)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year48,966 38,614 39,723 48,068 37,782 38,654 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year45(D)53,190 48,966 38,614 52,230 48,068 37,782 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of the financial statements.
The Report of the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm included within this Form 20-F covers the consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc and its subsidiary undertakings (the ‘Group’) only.
F-14
F-15

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

1NOTE 1: BASIS OF PREPARATION
TheseThe consolidated financial statements of Lloyds Bank plc (the Bank) and its subsidiary undertakings (the Group) have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). IFRS comprises accounting standards prefixed IFRSas issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and those prefixed IAS issued by the IASB’s predecessor body as well as interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee and its predecessor body. On adoption of IFRS 9 in 2018, the Bank (Lloyds Bank plc) and the Group (the Bank and its subsidiary undertakings) elected to continue applying hedge accounting under IAS 39..
The financial information has been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by the revaluation of investment properties, financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, trading securities and certain other financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and all derivative contracts.
The directorsDirectors consider that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. In reaching this assessment, the directorsDirectors have considered the implications of the short-term impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic and climate change upon the Group'sGroup’s performance and projected funding and capital position andposition. The Directors have also taken into account the impact of further stress scenarios. On this basis, the directors are satisfied that the Group will maintain adequate levels of funding and capital for the foreseeable future.
Details of those IFRS pronouncements which will be relevant to the Group but which were not effective at 31 December 20202021 and which have not been applied in preparing these financial statements are given in note 47.46.
In 2019 the Group adopted IFRS 16 and amendments to IAS 12 and early-adopted the hedge accounting amendments Interest Rate Benchmark Reform issued by the IASB. In 2021, the Group has adopted the Interest Rate Benchmark Reform Phase 2 amendments issued by the IASB. These amendments require that changes to expected future cash flows that both arise as a direct result of IBOR Reform and are economically equivalent to the previous cash flows are accounted for as a change to the effective interest rate with no adjustment to the asset’s or liability’s carrying value; no immediate gain or loss is recognised. The new requirements also provide relief from the requirements to discontinue hedge accounting as a result of amending hedge documentation if the changes are required solely as a result of IBOR Reform. The amendments do not have a material impact on the Group’s comparatives, which have not been restated.
The following changes have been made to the presentation of the Group’s assets and liabilities on the face of the balance sheet:
Property, plant and equipment is included in other assets (note 21)
Reverse repurchase agreements with banks and customers are shown separately from loans and advances to banks and loans and advances to customers respectively; and repurchase agreements with banks and customers are shown separately from deposits from banks and customer deposits respectively
There has been no change in the basis of accounting for any of the underlying transactions. Comparatives have been presented on a consistent basis for all of the above.
2NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The accounting policies are set out below. These accounting policies have been applied consistently.
(A)Consolidation
The assets, liabilities and results of Group undertakings (including structured entities) are included in the financial statements on the basis of accounts made up to the reporting date. Group undertakings include subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.
(1)Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it has power over the entity, is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity, and has the ability to affect those returns through the exercise of its power. This generally accompanies a shareholding of more than one half of the voting rights although in certain circumstances a holding of less than one half of the voting rights may still result in the ability of the Group to exercise control. The existence and effect of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing whether the Group controls another entity. The Group reassesses whether or not it controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to any of the above elements. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group; they are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.
Structured entities are entities that are designed so that their activities are not governed by way of voting rights. In assessing whether the Group has power over such entities in which it has an interest, the Group considers factors such as the purpose and design of the entity; its practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the entity; the nature of the relationship with the entity; and the size of its exposure to the variability of returns of the entity.
The treatment of transactions with non-controlling interests depends on whether, as a result of the transaction, the Group loses control of the subsidiary. Changes in the parent’s ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity transactions; any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received is recognised directly in equity and attributed to the owners of the parent entity. Where the Group loses control of the subsidiary, at the date when control is lost the amount of any non-controlling interest in that former subsidiary is derecognised and any investment retained in the former subsidiary is remeasured to its fair value; the gain or loss that is recognised in profit or loss on the partial disposal of the subsidiary includes the gain or loss on the remeasurement of the retained interest.
Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are eliminated.
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for business combinations by the Group. The consideration for the acquisition of a subsidiary is the fair value of the assets transferred, the liabilities incurred and the equity interests issued by the Group. The consideration includes the fair value of any asset or liability resulting from a contingent consideration arrangement. Acquisition relatedAcquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred except those relating to the issuance of debt instruments (see (E)(4) below) or share capital (see (O) below). Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair value at the acquisition date.
(2)Joint ventures and associates
Joint ventures are joint arrangements over which the Group has joint control with other parties and has rights to the net assets of the arrangements. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement and only exists when decisions about the relevant activities require the unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence. Significant influence is the power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the entity, but is not control or joint control of those policies, and is generally achieved through holding between 20 per cent and 50 per cent of the voting share capital of the entity.
F-16

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
The Group utilises the venture capital exemption for investments where significant influence or joint control is present and the business unit operates as a venture capital business. These investments are designated at initial recognition at fair value through profit or loss. Otherwise, the Group’s investments in joint ventures and associates are accounted for by the equity method of accounting.
F-15

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
(B)Goodwill
Goodwill arises on business combinations and represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities acquired. Where the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired entity is greater than the cost of acquisition, the excess is recognised immediately in the income statement.
Goodwill is recognised as an asset at cost and is tested at least annually for impairment. If an impairment is identified the carrying value of the goodwill is written down immediately through the income statement and is not subsequently reversed. At the date of disposal of a subsidiary, the carrying value of attributable goodwill is included in the calculation of the profit or loss on disposal.
(C)Other intangible assets
Intangible assets which have been determined to have a finite useful life are amortised on a straight linestraight-line basis over their estimated useful life as follows: up to 7 years for capitalised software; 10 to 15 years for brands and other intangible assets.
Intangible assets with finite useful lives are reviewed at each reporting date to assess whether there is any indication that they are impaired. If any such indication exists the recoverable amount of the asset is determined and in the event that the asset’s carrying amount is greater than its recoverable amount, it is written down immediately. Certain brands have been determined to have an indefinite useful life and are not amortised. Such intangible assets are reassessedassessed annually to determine whether the asset is impaired and to reconfirm that an indefinite useful life remains appropriate. In the event that an indefinite life is inappropriate, a finite life is determined and ana further impairment review is performed on the asset.
(D)Revenue recognition
(1)Net interest income
Interest income and expense are recognised in the income statement using the effective interest method for all interest-bearing financial instruments, except for those classified at fair value through profit or loss. The effective interest method is a method of calculating the amortised cost of a financial asset or liability and of allocating the interest income or interest expense over the expected life of the financial instrument. The effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of the financial instrument to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset (before adjusting for expected credit losses) or to the amortised cost of the financial liability, including early redemption fees, and related penalties,other fees, and premiums and discounts that are an integral part of the overall return. In the case of financial assets that are purchased or originated credit-impaired, the effective interest rate is the rate that discounts the estimated future cash flows to the amortised cost of the instrument. Direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition, issue or disposal of a financial instrument are also taken into account. Interest income from non-credit impaired financial assets is recognised by applying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of the asset; for credit impaired financial assets, the effective interest rate is applied to the net carrying amount after deducting the allowance for expected credit losses. Impairment policies are set out in (H) below.
(2)Fee and commission income and expense
Fees and commissions receivable which are not an integral part of the effective interest rate are recognised as income as the Group fulfils its performance obligations. The Group’s principal performance obligations arising from contracts with customers are in respect of value added current accounts, credit cards and debit cards. These fees are received, and the Group’sGroup provides the service, monthly; the fees are recognised in income on this basis. The Group also receives certain fees in respect of its asset finance business where the performance obligations are typically fulfilled towards the end of the customer contract; these fees are recognised in income on this basis. Where it is unlikely that the loan commitments will be drawn, loan commitment fees are recognised in fee and commission income over the life of the facility, rather than as an adjustment to the effective interest rate for loans expected to be drawn. Incremental costs incurred to generate fee and commission income are charged to fees and commissions expense as they are incurred.
(3)Other
Dividend income is recognised when the right to receive payment is established.
Revenue recognition policies specific to trading income are set out in (E)(3) below; those relating to leases are set out in (J)(1) below.
(E)Financial assets and liabilities
On initial recognition, financial assets are classified as measured at amortised cost, fair value through other comprehensive income or fair value through profit or loss, depending on the Group’s business model for managing the financial assets and whether the cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest. The Group assesses its business models at a portfolio level based on its objectives for the relevant portfolio, how the performance of the portfolio is managed and reported, and the frequency of asset sales. Financial assets with embedded derivatives are considered in their entirety when considering their cash flow characteristics. The Group reclassifies financial assets when and only when its business model for managing those assets changes. A reclassification will only take place when the change is significant to the Group’s operations and will occur at a portfolio level and not for individual instruments; reclassifications are expected to be rare. Equity investments are measured at fair value through profit or loss unless the Group elects at initial recognition to account for the instruments at fair value through other comprehensive income. For these instruments, principally strategic investments, dividends are recognised in profit or loss but fair value gains and losses are not subsequently reclassified to profit or loss following derecognition of the investment.
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities when the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. Regular way purchases and sales of securities and other financial assets and trading liabilities are recognised on trade date, being the date that the Group is committed to purchase or sell an asset.
Financial assets are derecognised when the contractual right to receive cash flows from those assets has expired or when the Group has transferred its contractual right to receive the cash flows from the assets and either: substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred; or the Group has neither retained nor transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards, but has transferred control.
Financial liabilities are derecognised when the obligation is discharged, cancelled or expires.
F-16

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
(1)Financial instruments measured at amortised cost
Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest are measured at amortised cost. A basic lending arrangement results in contractual cash flows that are solely payments of principal and interest on the principal amount outstanding. Where the contractual cash flows introduce exposure to risks or volatility unrelated to a basic lending arrangement such as changes in equity prices or commodity prices, the payments do not comprise solely principal and interest. Financial assets measured at amortised cost are predominantly loans and advances to customers and banks together with certain debt securities used by the
F-17

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
Group to manage its liquidity. Loans and advances are initially recognised when cash is advanced to the borrower at fair value inclusive of transaction costs. Interest income is accounted for using the effective interest method (see (D) above).
Financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost, except for trading liabilities and other financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition which are held at fair value.
Where changes are made to the contractual cash flows of a financial asset or financial liability that are economically equivalent and arise as a direct consequence of interest rate benchmark reform, the Group updates the effective interest rate and does not recognise an immediate gain or loss.
(2)Financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income
Financial assets that are held to collect contractual cash flows and for subsequent sale, where the assets’ cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest, are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value, inclusive of transaction costs. Interest calculated using the effective interest method and foreign exchange gains and losses on assets denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement. All other gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are recognised directly in other comprehensive income, until the financial asset is either sold or matures, at which time the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement other than in respect of equity shares, for which the cumulative revaluation amount is transferred directly to retained profits. The Group recognises a charge for expected credit losses in the income statement (see (H) below). As the asset is measured at fair value, the charge does not adjust the carrying value of the asset, it is reflected in other comprehensive income.
(3)Financial instruments measured at fair value through profit or loss
Financial assets are classified at fair value through profit or loss where they do not meet the criteria to be measured at amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income or where they are designated at fair value through profit or loss to reduce an accounting mismatch. All derivatives are carried at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are carried on the balance sheet as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative. Refer to note 41(3) (Financial instruments: Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value) for details of valuation techniques and significant inputs to valuation models.
Derivatives embedded in a financial asset are not considered separately; the financial asset is considered in its entirety when determining whether its cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. Derivatives embedded in financial liabilities are treated as separate derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract and the host contract is not carried at fair value through profit or loss. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.
Trading securities, which are debt securities and equity shares acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the short-termshort term or which are part of a portfolio which is managed for short-term gains, do not meet these criteria and are also measured at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets measured at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. Fair value gains and losses together with interest coupons and dividend income are recognised in the income statement within net trading income.
Financial liabilities are measured at fair value through profit or loss where they are trading liabilities or where they are designated at fair value through profit or loss in order to reduce an accounting mismatch; where the liabilities are part of a group of liabilities (or assets and liabilities) which is managed, and its performance evaluated, on a fair value basis; or where the liabilities contain one or more embedded derivatives that significantly modify the cash flows arising under the contract and would otherwise need to be separately accounted for. Financial liabilities measured at fair value through profit or loss are recognised in the balance sheet at their fair value. Fair value gains and losses are recognised in the income statement within net trading income in the period in which they occur, except that gains and losses attributable to changes in own credit risk are recognised in other comprehensive income.
The fair values of assets and liabilities traded in active markets are based on current bid and offer prices, respectively.respectively, which include the expected effects of potential changes to laws and regulations, risks associated with climate change and other factors. If the market is not active the Group establishes a fair value by using valuation techniques. The fair values of derivative financial instruments are adjusted where appropriate to reflect credit risk (via credit valuation adjustments (CVAs), debit valuation adjustments (DVAs) and funding valuation adjustments (FVAs)), market liquidity and other risks.
(4)Borrowings
Borrowings (which include deposits from banks, customer deposits, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) are recognised initially at fair value, being their issue proceeds net of transaction costs incurred. These instruments are subsequently stated at amortised cost using the effective interest method.
Preference shares and other instruments which carry a mandatory coupon or are redeemable on a specific date are classified as financial liabilities. The coupon on these instruments is recognised in the income statement as interest expense. Securities which carry a discretionary coupon and have no fixed maturity or redemption date are classified as other equity instruments. Interest payments on these securities are recognised as distributions from equity in the period in which they are paid. An exchange of financial liabilities on substantially different terms is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability. The difference between the carrying amount of a financial liability extinguished and the new financial liability is recognised in profit or loss together with any related costs or fees incurred.
When a financial liability is exchanged for an equity instrument, the new equity instrument is recognised at fair value and any difference between the carrying value of the liability and the fair value of the new equity is recognised in profit or loss.
(5)Sale and repurchase agreements (including securities lending and borrowing)
Securities sold subject to repurchase agreements (repos) continue to be recognised on the balance sheet where substantially all of the risks and rewards are retained. Funds received under these arrangementsfor repos carried at fair value are included in deposits from banks, customer deposits, orwithin trading liabilities. Conversely, securities purchased under agreements to resell (reverse repos), where the Group does not acquire substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership, are recorded as loans and advances measured at amortised cost or at fair value. Those measured at fair value are recognised within trading securities. The difference between sale and repurchase price is treated as interest and accrued over the life of the agreements using the effective interest method.
Securities borrowing and lending transactions are typically secured; collateral takes the form of securities or cash advanced or received. Securities lent to counterparties are retained on the balance sheet. Securities borrowed are not recognised on the balance sheet, unless these are sold to third parties, in which case the obligation to return them is recorded at fair value as a trading liability. Cash collateral given or received is treated as a loan and advance measured at amortised cost or customer deposit.
F-18

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
(F)Derivative financial instruments and hedgeHedge accounting
As permitted by IFRS 9, the Group continues to apply the requirements of IAS 39 to its hedging relationships. All derivatives are recognised at their fair value. Derivatives are carried on the balance sheet as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative. Refer to note 42(3) (Financial instruments: Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value) for details of valuation techniques and significant inputs to valuation models.
F-17

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
Changes in the fair value of all derivative instruments, other than those in effective cash flow and net investment hedging relationships, are recognised immediately in the income statement. As noted in (2) and (3) below, the change in fair value of a derivative in an effective cash flow or net investment hedging relationship is allocated between the income statement and other comprehensive income.
Derivatives embedded in a financial asset are not considered separately; the financial asset is considered in its entirety when determining whether its cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest. Derivatives embedded in financial liabilities treated as separate derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract and the host contract is not carried at fair value through profit or loss. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.
Hedge accounting allows one financial instrument, generally a derivative such as a swap, to be designated as a hedge of another financial instrument such as a loan or deposit or a portfolio of such instruments. At the inception of the hedge relationship, formal documentation is drawn up specifying the hedging strategy, the hedged item, the hedging instrument and the methodology that will be used to measure the effectiveness of the hedge relationship in offsetting changes in the fair value or cash flow of the hedged risk. The effectiveness of the hedging relationship is tested both at inception and throughout its life and if at any point it is concluded that it is no longer highly effective in achieving its documented objective, hedge accounting is discontinued. Note 1514 provides details of the types of derivatives held by the Group and presents separately those designated in hedge relationships.
Where there is uncertainty arising from interest rate benchmark reform, the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged cash flows and/or the hedged risk are based, or the interest rate benchmark on which the cash flows of the hedging instrument are based, are not altered as a result of interest rate benchmark reform. The Group does not discontinue a hedging relationship during the period of uncertainty arising from the interest rate benchmark reform solely because the actual results of the hedge are not highly effective.
Where the contractual terms of a financial asset, financial liability or derivative are amended, on an economically equivalent basis, as a direct consequence of interest rate benchmark reform, the uncertainty arising from the reform is no longer present. In these circumstances, the Group amends the hedge documentation to reflect the changes required by the reform; these changes to the documentation do not in and of themselves result in the discontinuation of hedge accounting or require the designation of a new hedge relationship.
(1)Fair value hedges
Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk; this also applies if the hedged asset is classified as a financial asset at fair value through other comprehensive income. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are no longer recognised in the income statement. The cumulative adjustment that has been made to the carrying amount of the hedged item is amortised to the income statement using the effective interest method over the period to maturity.
(2)Cash flow hedges
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in other comprehensive income in the cash flow hedging reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.
(3)Net investment hedges
Hedges of net investments in foreign operations are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges. Any gain or loss on the hedging instrument relating to the effective portion of the hedge is recognised in other comprehensive income, the gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. Gains and losses accumulated in equity are included in the income statement when the foreign operation is disposed of. The hedging instrument used in net investment hedges may include non-derivative liabilities as well as derivative financial instruments.
(G)Offset
Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right of offset and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. Cash collateral on exchange traded derivative transactions is presented gross unless the collateral cash flows are always settled net with the derivative cash flows. In certain situations, even though master netting agreements exist, the lack of management intention to settle on a net basis results in the financial assets and liabilities being reported gross on the balance sheet.
(H)Impairment of financial assets
The impairment charge in the income statement includesreflects the change in expected credit losses, and including those arising from fraud. Expected credit losses are recognised for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets (other than equity investments) measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, and certain loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. Expected credit losses are calculated as an unbiased and probability-weighted estimate using an appropriate probability of default, adjusted to take into account a range of possible future economic scenarios, and applying this to the estimated exposure of the Group at the point of default after taking into account the value of any collateral held, repayments, or other mitigants of loss and including the impact of discounting using the effective interest rate.
At initial recognition, allowance (or provision in the case of some loan commitments and financial guarantees) is made for expected credit losses resulting from default events that are possible within the next 12 months (12-month expected credit losses). In the event of a significant increase in credit risk since origination, allowance (or provision) is made for expected credit losses resulting from all possible default events over the expected life of the financial instrument (lifetime expected credit losses). Financial assets where 12-month expected credit losses are recognised are considered to be Stage 1; financial assets which are considered to have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition are in Stage 2; and financial assets which have defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impairedcredit-impaired are allocated to Stage 3. Some Stage 3 assets, mainly in Commercial Banking, are subject to individual rather than collective assessment. Such cases are subject to a risk-based impairment sanctioning process, and these are reviewed and updated at least quarterly, or more frequently if there is a significant change in the credit profile. The collective assessment of impairment aggregates financial instruments with similar risk characteristics, such as whether the facility is revolving in nature or secured and the type of security against financial assets.
F-18

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
An assessment of whether credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition considers the change in the risk of default occurring over the remaining expected life of the financial instrument. In determining whether there has been a significant increase in credit risk, the Group uses quantitative tests based on relative and absolute probability of default (PD) movements linked to internal credit ratings together with qualitative indicators such as watchlists and other indicators of historical delinquency, credit weakness or financial difficulty. The use of internal credit ratings
F-19

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
and qualitative indicators ensureensures alignment between the assessment of staging and the Group’s management of credit risk which utilises these internal metrics within distinct retail and commercial portfolio risk management practices. However, unless identified at an earlier stage, the credit risk of financial assets is deemed to have increased significantly when more than 30 days past due. The use of a payment holiday in and of itself has not been judged to indicate a significant increase in credit risk, with the underlying long-term credit risk deemed to be driven by economic conditions and captured through the use of forward-looking models. These portfolio levelportfolio-level models are capturing the anticipated volume of increased defaults and therefore an appropriate assessment of staging and expected credit loss. Where the credit risk subsequently improves such that it no longer represents a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition, the asset is transferred back to Stage 1.
Assets are transferred to Stage 3 when they have defaulted or are otherwise considered to be credit impaired.credit-impaired. Default is considered to have occurred when there is evidence that the customer is experiencing financial difficulty which is likely to affect significantly the ability to repay the amount due. IFRS 9 contains a rebuttable presumption that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due. The Group uses this 90 day backstop for all its products except for UK mortgages. For UK mortgages, the Group uses a backstop of 180 days past due as mortgage exposures more than 90 days past due, but less than 180 days, typically show high cure rates and this aligns with the Group’s risk management practices. Key differences between Stage 3 balances and non-performing loans relate to the use of 180 days past due for Stage 3 mortgages and to the cure periods applied to forbearance exposures. The use of payment holidays is not considered to be an automatic trigger of regulatory default and therefore does not automatically trigger Stage 3. Days past due will also not accumulate on any accounts that have taken a payment holiday including those already past due.
In certain circumstances, the Group will renegotiate the original terms of a customer’s loan, either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to adverse changes in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter circumstances, the loan will remain classified as either Stage 2 or Stage 3 until the credit risk has improved such that it no longer represents a significant increase since origination (for a return to Stage 1), or the loan is no longer credit impairedcredit-impaired (for a return to Stage 2). On renegotiation the gross carrying amount of the loan is recalculated as the present value of the renegotiated or modified contractual cash flows, which are discounted at the original effective interest rate. Renegotiation may also lead to the loan and associated allowance being derecognised and a new loan being recognised initially at fair value.
Purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets (POCI) include financial assets that are purchased or originated at a deep discount that reflects incurred credit losses. At initial recognition, POCI assets do not carry an impairment allowance; instead, lifetime expected credit losses are incorporated into the calculation of the effective interest rate. All changes in lifetime expected credit losses subsequent to the assets’ initial recognition are recognised as an impairment charge.
A loan or advance is normally written off, either partially or in full, against the related allowance when the proceeds from realising any available security have been received or there is no realistic prospect of recovery and the amount of the loss has been determined. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off decrease the amount of impairment losses recorded in the income statement. For both secured and unsecured retail balances, the write-off takes place only once an extensive set of collections processes has been completed, or the status of the account reaches a point where policy dictates that continuing attempts to recover are no longer appropriate. For commercial lending, a write-off occurs if the loan facility with the customer is restructured, the asset is under administration and the only monies that can be received are the amounts estimated by the administrator, the underlying assets are disposed and a decision is made that no further settlement monies will be received, or external evidence (for example, third partythird-party valuations) is available that there has been an irreversible decline in expected cash flows.
(I)Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment (other than investment property) is included at cost less accumulated depreciation. The value of land (included in premises) is not depreciated. Depreciation on other assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the difference between the cost and the residual value over their estimated useful lives, as follows: the shorter of 50 years and the remaining period of the lease for freehold/long and short leasehold premises; the shorter of 10 years and, if lease renewal is not likely, the remaining period of the lease for leasehold improvements; 10 to 20 years for fixtures and furnishings; and 2 to 8 years for other equipment and motor vehicles.
The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, taking into account considerations such as potential changes to legislation, including those that are climate-related, as well as other factors, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.
Assets are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. In assessing the recoverable amount of assets the Group considers the effects of potential or actual changes in legislation, customer behaviour, climate-related risks and other factors. In the event that an asset’s carrying amount is determined to be greater than its recoverable amount it is written down immediately. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use.
Investment property comprises freehold and long leasehold land and buildings that are held either to earn rental income or for capital accretion or both. In accordance with the guidance published by the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors, investment property is carried at fair value based on current prices for similar properties, adjusted for the specific characteristics of the property (such as location or condition). If this information is not available, the Group uses alternative valuation methods such as discounted cash flow projections or recent prices in less active markets. These valuations are reviewed at least annually by independent professionally qualified valuers. Investment property being redeveloped for continuing use as investment property, or for which the market has become less active, continues to be valued at fair value.
(J)Leases
Under IFRS 16, a lessor is required to determine whether a lease is a finance or operating lease. A lessee is not required to make this determination.
(1)As lessor
Assets leased to customers are classified as finance leases if the lease agreements transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the lessee but not necessarily legal title. All other leases are classified as operating leases. When assets are subject to finance leases, the present value of the lease payments, together with any unguaranteed residual value, is recognised as a receivable, net of allowances for expected credit losses and residual value impairment, within loans and advances to banks and customers. The difference between the gross receivable and the present value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance lease income. Finance lease income is recognised in interest income over the term of the lease using the net investment method (before tax) so as to give a constant rate of return on the net investment in the leases. Unguaranteed residual values are reviewed regularly to identify any impairment.
F-19

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
Operating lease assets are included within property, plant and equipmentother assets at cost and depreciated over their estimated useful lives, which equates to the lives of the leases, after taking into account anticipated residual values. Operating lease rental income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the lease.
The Group evaluates non-lease arrangements such as outsourcing and similar contracts to determine if they contain a lease which is then accounted for separately.
F-20

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
(2)As lessee
Leases are recognised as a right-of-use asset and a corresponding liability at the date at which the leased asset is available for use by the Group. Assets and liabilities arising from a lease are initially measured on a present value basis. The lease payments are discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease, if that rate can be determined, or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate appropriate for the right-of-use asset arising from the lease.lease and the liability recognised within other liabilities.
Lease payments are allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to profit or loss over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability for each period. The right-of-use asset is depreciated over the shorter of the asset's useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis.
Payments associated with short-term leases and leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as an expense in profit or loss. Short-term leases are leases with a lease term of twelve months or less. Low-value assets comprise IT equipment and small items of office furniture.
(K)Employee benefits
Short-term employee benefits, such as salaries, paid absences, performance-based cash awards and social security costs, are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the related services.
(1)Pension schemes
The Group operates a number of post-retirement benefit schemes for its employees including both defined benefit and defined contribution pension plans. A defined benefit scheme is a pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on retirement, dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and salary. A defined contribution plan is a pension plan into which the Group pays fixed contributions; there is no legal or constructive obligation to pay further contributions.
Scheme assets are included at their fair value and scheme liabilities are measured on an actuarial basis using the projected unit credit method. The defined benefit scheme liabilities are discounted using rates equivalent to the market yields at the balance sheet date on high-quality corporate bonds that are denominated in the currency in which the benefits will be paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating to the terms of the related pension liability. The Group’s income statement charge includes the current service cost of providing pension benefits, past service costs, net interest expense (income), and plan administration costs that are not deducted from the return on plan assets. Past service costs, which represents the change in the present value of the defined benefit obligation resulting from a plan amendment or curtailment, are recognised when the plan amendment or curtailment occurs. Net interest expense (income) is calculated by applying the discount rate at the beginning of the period to the net defined benefit liability or asset.
Remeasurements, comprising actuarial gains and losses, the return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense (income) and net of the cost of managing the plan assets), and the effect of changes to the asset ceiling (if applicable) are reflected immediately in the balance sheet with a charge or credit recognised in other comprehensive income in the period in which they occur. Remeasurements recognised in other comprehensive income are reflected immediately in retained profits and will not subsequently be reclassified to profit or loss.
The Group’s balance sheet includes the net surplus or deficit, being the difference between the fair value of scheme assets and the discounted value of scheme liabilities at the balance sheet date. Surpluses are only recognised to the extent that they are recoverable through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the schemes. In assessing whether a surplus is recoverable, the Group considers (i) its current right to obtain a refund or a reduction in future contributions and (ii) the rights of other parties existing at the balance sheet date. In determining the rights of third parties existing at the balance sheet date, the Group does not anticipate any future acts by other parties.
The costs of the Group’s defined contribution plans are charged to the income statement in the period in which they fall due.
(2)Share-based compensation
Lloyds Banking Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans in respect of services received from certain of its employees. The value of the employee services received in exchange for equity instruments granted under these plans is recognised as an expense over the vesting period of the instruments, with a corresponding increase in equity. This expense is determined by reference to the fair value of the number of equity instruments that are expected to vest. The fair value of equity instruments granted is based on market prices, if available, at the date of grant. In the absence of market prices, the fair value of the instruments at the date of grant is estimated using an appropriate valuation technique, such as a Black-Scholes option pricing model or a Monte Carlo simulation. The determination of fair values excludes the impact of any non-market vesting conditions, which are included in the assumptions used to estimate the number of options that are expected to vest. At each balance sheet date, this estimate is reassessed and if necessary revised. Any revision of the original estimate is recognised in the income statement, together with a corresponding adjustment to equity. Cancellations by employees of contributions to the Group’s Save As You Earn plans are treated as non-vesting conditions and the Group recognises, in the year of cancellation, the amount of the expense that would have otherwise been recognised over the remainder of the vesting period. Modifications are assessed at the date of modification and any incremental charges are charged to the income statement.
(L)Taxation
Tax expense comprises current and deferred tax. Current and deferred tax are charged or credited in the income statement except to the extent that the tax arises from a transaction or event which is recognised, in the same or a different period, outside the income statement (either in other comprehensive income, directly in equity, or through a business combination), in which case the tax appears in the same statement as the transaction that gave rise to it. The tax consequences of the Group's dividend payments (including distributions on other equity instruments), if any, are charged or credited to the statement in which the profit distributed originally arose.
Current tax is the amount of corporate income taxes expected to be payable or recoverable based on the profit for the period as adjusted for items that are not taxable or not deductible, and is calculated using tax rates and laws that were enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.
F-20

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
Current tax includes amounts provided in respect of uncertain tax positions when management expects that, upon examination of the uncertainty by Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (HMRC) or other relevant tax authority, it is more likely than not that an economic outflow will occur. Provisions reflect management’s best estimate of the ultimate liability based on their interpretation of tax law, precedent and guidance, informed by external tax advice as necessary. Changes in facts and circumstances underlying these provisions are reassessed at each balance sheet date, and the provisions are remeasured as required to reflect current information.
Deferred tax is recognised on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the balance sheet. Deferred tax is calculated using tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and which are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.
F-21

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 2: ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)
Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences but not recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries where the reversal of the temporary difference can be controlled and it is probable that the difference will not reverse in the foreseeable future. Deferred tax liabilities are not recognised on temporary differences that arise from goodwill which is not deductible for tax purposes.
Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which the deductible temporary differences can be utilised, and are reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not recognised in respect of temporary differences that arise on initial recognition of assets and liabilities acquired other than in a business combination. Deferred tax is not discounted.
(M)Foreign currency translation
Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (the functional currency). Foreign currency transactions are translated into the appropriate functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement, except when recognised in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow or net investment hedges. Non-monetary assets that are measured at fair value are translated using the exchange rate at the date that the fair value was determined. Translation differences on equities and similar non-monetary items held at fair value through profit and loss are recognised in profit or loss as part of the fair value gain or loss. Translation differences on non-monetary financial assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, such as equity shares, are included in the fair value reserve in equity unless the asset is a hedged item in a fair value hedge.
The results and financial position of all Group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency are translated into the presentation currency as follows: the assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on the acquisition of a foreign entity, are translated into sterling at foreign exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date; and the income and expenses of foreign operations are translated into sterling at average exchange rates unless these do not approximate to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions.
Foreign exchange differences arising on the translation of a foreign operation are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a separate component of equity together with exchange differences arising from the translation of borrowings and other currency instruments designated as hedges of such investments (see (F)(3) above). On disposal or liquidation of a foreign operation, the cumulative amount of exchange differences relating to that foreign operation areis reclassified from equity and included in determining the profit or loss arising on disposal or liquidation.
(N)Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised in respect of present obligations arising from past events where it is probable that outflows of resources will be required to settle the obligations and they can be reliably estimated.
Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence depends on the outcome of uncertain future events or those present obligations where the outflows of resources are uncertain or cannot be measured reliably. Contingent liabilities are not recognised in the financial statements but are disclosed unless they are remote.
Provision is made for expected credit losses in respect of irrevocable undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts (see (H) above).
(O)Share capital
Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options or to the acquisition of a business are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds. Dividends paid on the Group’s ordinary shares are recognised as a reduction in equity in the period in which they are paid.
(P)Cash and cash equivalents
For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash and non-mandatory balances with central banks and amounts due from banks with aan original maturity of less than three months.
(Q)Investment in subsidiaries
Investments in subsidiaries are carried at historical cost, less any provisions for impairment.
(R)Discontinued operations
A discontinued operation is a cash generating unit or a group of cash generating units that has been disposed of, or is classified as held for sale, and (a) represents a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations, (b) is part of a single co-ordinated plan to dispose of a separate major line of business or geographical area of operations or (c) is a subsidiary acquired exclusively with a view to resale. The results after tax of discontinued operations are shown as a single line item on the face of the income statement.
F-21F-22

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
3NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATESKEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY
The preparation of the Group’s financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions in applying the accounting policies that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Due to the inherent uncertainty in making estimates, actual results reported in future periods may be based upon amounts which differ from those estimates. Estimates, judgements and assumptions are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. In preparing the financial statements, the Group has considered the impact of climate-related risks on its financial position and performance. While the effects of climate change represent a source of uncertainty, the Group does not consider there to be a material impact on its judgements and estimates from the physical, transition and other climate-related risks in the short to medium term.
The significant judgements, apart from those involving estimation, made by management in applying the Group’s accounting policies in these financial statements (key judgements) and the key sources of estimation uncertainty in thesethat may have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities within the next financial statements,year (key estimates), which together are deemedconsidered critical to the Group’s results and financial position, are as follows:
Allowance for expected credit losses
Key judgements:Determining an appropriate definition of default against which a probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default parameter can be evaluated
The appropriate lifetime of an exposure to credit risk for the assessment of lifetime losses, notably on revolving products
Establishing the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk (SICR)
The use of management judgement alongside impairment modelling processes to adjust inputs, parameters and outputs to reflect risks not captured by models
Key estimates:Base case and Multiple Economic Scenariosmultiple economic scenarios (MES) assumptions, including the rate of unemployment and the rate of change of house prices, required for creation of MES scenarios and forward lookingforward-looking credit parameters
These judgements and estimates are subject to significant uncertainty.
The Group recognises an allowance for expected credit losses (ECLs) for loans and advances to customers and banks, other financial assets held at amortised cost, financial assets (other than equity investments) measured at fair value through other comprehensive income and certain loan commitment and financial guarantee contracts. At 31 December 20202021, the Group’s expected credit loss allowance was £6,132£4,000 million (2019: £3,380(2020: £6,132 million), of which £5,706£3,806 million (2019: £3,207(2020: £5,706 million) was in respect of drawn balances; and the Bank’s expected credit loss allowance was £2,558£1,311 million (2019: £1,336(2020: £2,558 million), of which £2,313£1,197 million (2019: £1,246(2020: £2,313 million) was in respect of drawn balances.
The calculation of the Group’s expected credit loss (ECL) allowances and provisions against loan commitments and guarantees under IFRS 9 requires the Group to make a number of judgements, assumptions and estimates. The most significant are set out below.
Definition of default
The probability of default (PD) of an exposure, both over a 12 month12-month period and over its lifetime, is a key input to the measurement of the ECL allowance. Default has occurred when there is evidence that the customer is experiencing significant financial difficulty which is likely to affect the ability to repay amounts due. The definition of default adopted by the Group is described in note 2(H) Impairment of financial assets. The Group has rebutted the presumption in IFRS 9 that default occurs no later than when a payment is 90 days past due for UK mortgages. As a result, at 31 December 2020, approximately £0.62021, £0.5 billion of UK mortgages (2019:(2020: £0.6 billion) were classified as Stage 2 rather than Stage 3; the impact on the Group’s ECL allowance was not material.
Lifetime of an exposure
A range of approaches, segmented by product type, has been adopted by the Group to estimate a product’s expected life. These include using the full contractual life and taking into account behavioural factors such as early repayments, extensions and refinancing. For non-revolving retail assets, the Group has assumed the expected life for each product to be the time taken for all significant losses to be observed. For retail revolving products, the Group has considered the losses beyond the contractual term over which the Group is exposed to credit risk. For commercial overdraft facilities, the average behavioural life has been used. Changes to the assumed expected lives of the Group’s assets could impact the ECL allowance recognised by the Group. The assessment of SICR and corresponding lifetime loss, and the PD, of a financial asset deemed to bedesignated as Stage 2, or Stage 3, is dependent on its expected life.
Significant increase in credit risk
Performing assets are classified as either Stage 1 or Stage 2. An ECL allowance equivalent to 12 monthsmonths' expected losses is established against assets in Stage 1; assets classified as Stage 2 carry an ECL allowance equivalent to lifetime expected losses. Assets are transferred from Stage 1 to Stage 2 when there has been a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) since initial recognition. Credit impairedCredit-impaired assets are transferred to Stage 3 with a lifetime expected losses allowance. The Group uses both quantitative and qualitative indicators to determine whether there has been a SICR for an asset. For Retail, the following tables set out the Retail Master Scaleretail master scale (RMS) grade triggers which result in a SICR for financial assets and the PD boundaries for each RMS grade. Credit cardsLoans and overdrafts SICR triggers have been refined in 20202021 following a review of sensitivity to changes in economic assumptions, 2019 triggers were previously alignedaligning to Loans and overdrafts.Credit cards (refined in 2020). The impact of this has been approximately £1.4£0.3 billion of additional assets being classified as Stage 2 at 31 December 2020,2021, with a corresponding increase in the ECL of £48£15 million resulting from the transfer to a lifetime expected loss.
SICR Triggers for key Retail portfolios
Origination grade1234567
Mortgages SICR grade55678910
Credit cards SICR grade45678910
Loans and overdrafts SICR grade567891011
SICR triggers for key Retail portfolios
Origination grade1234567
Mortgages SICR grade55678910
Credit cards, loans and overdrafts SICR grade45678910
RMS gradeRMS grade1234567891011121314RMS grade1234567891011121314
PD boundary %0.100.400.801.202.504.507.5010.0014.0020.0030.0045.0099.99100.00
PD boundary %1
PD boundary %1
0.100.400.801.202.504.507.5010.0014.0020.0030.0045.0099.99100.00
1Probability-weighted annualised lifetime probability of default.
F-23

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
For Commercial a doubling of PD with a minimum increase in PD of 1 per cent and a resulting change in the underlying grade is treated as a SICR.
F-22

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES (continued)
The Group uses the internal credit risk classification and watchlist as qualitative indicators to identify a SICR. The Group does not use the low credit risk exemption in its staging assessments. The use of a payment holiday in and of itself has not been judged to indicate a significant increase in credit risk, nor forbearance, with the underlying long-term credit risk deemed to be driven by economic conditions and captured through the use of forward-looking models. These portfolio level models are capturing the anticipated volume of increased defaults and therefore an appropriate assessment of staging and expected credit loss. During 2020, the Group has granted payment holidays on Retail loans and advances, £6.4 billion remained in place at 31 December 2020, £4.3 billion of these balances were classified as Stage 1. If all of these assets were classified as Stage 2, the Group's ECL would have been less than £50 million higher.
All financial assets are assumed to have suffered a SICR if they are more than 30 days past due; non-mortgage Retailcredit cards, loans and overdrafts financial assets are also assumed to have suffered a SICR if they are in arrears on three or more separate occasions in a rolling twelve month12-month period. Financial assets are classified as credit impairedcredit-impaired if they are 90 days past due, except for UK mortgages where a 180 days backstop is used.
A Stage 3 asset that is no longer credit-impaired is transferred back to Stage 2 as no cure period is applied to Stage 3. If an exposure that is classified as Stage 2 no longer meets the SICR criteria, which in some cases include a minimum cure period,capture customer behaviour in previous periods, it is moved back to Stage 1.
The setting of precise trigger points combined with risk indicators requires judgement. The use of different trigger points may have a material impact upon the size of the ECL allowance. The Group monitors the effectiveness of SICR criteria on an ongoing basis.
Generation of Multiple Economic Scenarios (MES)multiple economic scenarios
The measurementestimate of expected credit losses is required to reflectbe based on an unbiased probability-weighted rangeexpectation of possible future outcomes.economic scenarios. The Group considers the choice of approach used to generate the range of future economic outcomesscenarios depends on the methodology and judgements adopted. The Group’s approach is to be judgemental, given several methods can be adopted. In addition tostart from a defined base case asscenario, used for planning the Group’s approach relies on model-generatedpurposes, and to generate alternative economic scenarios reducing scope for bias in the selectionaround this base case. The base case scenario is a conditional forecast underpinned by a number of scenarios and their weightings. The conditioning assumptions underpinning the base case scenariothat reflect the Group’s best view of key future events. Where outcomesdevelopments. If circumstances appear likely to materially divergedeviate from the conditioning assumptions, adopted,then the base case scenario is updated.
The base case scenario is therefore central to thea range of outcomes created as no alternativefuture economic scenarios generated by simulation of an economic model, for which the same conditioning assumptions are factored intoapply as in the model-generated scenarios.
The Group models a full distribution of economic scenarios around this base case ranking themscenario. These scenarios are ranked by using estimated relationships with industry-wide historical loss data. With the base case already pre-defined, three other scenarios are identified as averages of constituent scenarios located around the 15th, 75th and 95th percentiles of the distribution. The full distribution is therefore summarised by a practical number of scenarios to run through ECL models representing four sections: an upside, the base case, and a downside scenario weighted at 30 per cent each, together with a severe downside scenario weighted at 10 per cent. With the base case already pre-defined, the other three scenarios are constructed as averages of constituent modelled scenarios around the 15th, 75th and 95th percentiles of the distribution. The scenario weights therefore represent the allocation to each summary segmentdistribution of the distributioneconomic scenarios and not a subjective viewviews on likelihood. The inclusion of a severe downside scenario with a smaller weighting but relatively large credit losses, ensures that the non-linearity of losses in the tail of the distribution is captured when ECL basedadequately captured. The Group does not apply any reversion techniques within scenario generation, noting that data after the five-year forecast period shown has a relatively immaterial effect on the weighted result of the four scenarios is calculated.ECL provision.
A committeeforum under the chairmanship of the Chief Economist meets at least quarterly to review and, if appropriate, recommend changes to the method by which economic scenarios are generated;generated, for approval by the Chief Financial Officer and Chief Risk Officer. In 2020, a change wasWhile no material changes were made to the waymodel in which2021, the distribution of scenarios is created. This change allows forforum identified the need to consider an alternative approach to address interest rate risks not captured within the downside scenarios. The forum recommended that a greater dispersal of economic outcomes in the early periods of the forecast, to recognise the increased near-term profile of risks present since the onset of the coronavirus pandemic. This change allows for a wider distribution of losses both on the upside and downside, although is most evident in thenon-modelled severe downside scenario given it representswas evaluated for potential incremental losses. This resulted in a more adverse segment of the distribution. The change is estimated to have driven an additional £200 million ofmanagement adjustment for UK mortgages which exhibited a sufficient uplift in ECL resulting from the inclusion of more adverse economic outcomes.in a high rate scenario.
Base Casecase and MES Economic Assumptionseconomic assumptions
The Group’s base case economic scenario has continued to bebeen revised in light of the continuing impact of the coronavirus pandemic, in the UKintensifying global inflation pressures, and globally. The scenario reflects judgementsa shift towards a more restrictive stance of the net effect of government-mandated restrictions on economic activity, large-scale government interventions, and behavioural changesmonetary policy by households and businesses that may persist beyond the rollout of coronavirus vaccination programmes.
Despite large-scale vaccination efforts commencing in the UK and globally, there remains considerable uncertainty about the pace and eventual extent of the post-pandemic recovery.central banks. The Group’s currentupdated base case scenario buildsbuilt in three key conditioning assumptions. First, the UK vaccine rollout successfully protects the elderly, key workers and the clinically vulnerable by mid-2021. Second, national lockdowns end by April 2021, allowing a phased returncurrent wave of coronavirus infections does not lead to a tiered systemre-imposition of lockdown restrictions that are progressively eased in the second quarter and second halfUK, although greater household caution is expected amid increased hospitalisation rates. Second, the rise in wholesale energy prices is passed on to consumers through a 50 per cent increase in retail energy prices in April 2022. Third, inflation expectations rise in response to increasing headline inflation but subsequently revert to levels consistent with the Bank of 2021, leaving only limited restrictions in place by the end of 2021. Third, government policy measures including specifically the furlough scheme continue to provide support for the duration of severe economic restrictions, through to mid-2021.England’s 2 per cent inflation target.
ConditionedBased on the abovethese assumptions and despiteincorporating the recoveryimproved economic data in economic activity resuming from the secondfourth quarter, of 2021, the Group’s base case outlook assumesis for a modest rise in the unemployment rate and weaknessalongside a deceleration in residential and commercial property prices.price growth, as the UK Bank Rate is raised in response to increasing inflationary pressures. Risks around this base case economic view lie in both directions and are partly captured by the MES generated. But uncertaintiesgeneration of alternative economic scenarios described above. Uncertainties relating to the key conditioning assumptions, including epidemiological developments, andnotably the efficacy of vaccine rollouts,possibility that a vaccine-resistant strain could emerge, are not specifically captured by the MESthese scenarios. These specific risks have beenare recognised outside of the modelled scenarios published below.with a central adjustment.
The Group has accommodated the latest available information at the reporting date in defining its base case scenario and generating the MES.alternative economic scenarios. The scenarios include forecasts for key variables in the fourth quarter of 2020,2021, for which actuals may have since emerged prior to publication.

F-23
F-24

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
3NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATESKEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
Base case scenario by quarter1
First
quarter
2020
Second
quarter
2020
Third
quarter
2020
Fourth
quarter
2020
First
quarter
2021
Second
quarter
2021
Third
quarter
2021
Fourth
quarter
2021
Base case%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product(3.0)(18.8)16.0 (1.9)(3.8)5.6 3.6 1.5 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 
Unemployment rate4.0 4.1 4.8 5.0 5.2 6.5 8.0 7.5 
House price growth2.8 2.6 7.2 5.9 5.5 4.7 (1.6)(3.8)
Commercial real estate price growth(5.0)(7.8)(7.8)(7.0)(6.1)(2.9)(2.2)(1.7)
1Gross domestic product presented quarter on quarter, house price growth and commercial real estate growth presented year on year - i.e. from the equivalent quarter the previous year. Bank Rate is presented end quarter.
Scenarios by year
Key annual assumptions made by the Group are shown below. Gross domestic product is presented as an annual change, house price growth and commercial real estate price growth are presented as the growth in the respective indices within the period. UK Bank Rate and unemployment rate are averages for the period.
20202021202220232024
%%%%%
Upside
Gross domestic product(10.5)3.7 5.7 1.7 1.5 
UK Bank Rate0.10 1.14 1.27 1.20 1.21 
Unemployment rate4.3 5.4 5.4 5.0 4.5 
House price growth6.3 (1.4)5.2 6.0 5.0 
Commercial real estate price growth(4.6)9.3 3.9 2.1 0.3 
Base case
Gross domestic product(10.5)3.0 6.0 1.7 1.4 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.21 0.25 
Unemployment rate4.5 6.8 6.8 6.1 5.5 
House price growth5.9 (3.8)0.5 1.5 1.5 
Commercial real estate price growth(7.0)(1.7)1.6 1.1 0.6 
Downside
Gross domestic product(10.6)1.7 5.1 1.4 1.4 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.06 0.02 0.02 0.03 
Unemployment rate4.6 7.9 8.4 7.8 7.0 
House price growth5.6 (8.4)(6.5)(4.7)(3.0)
Commercial real estate price growth(8.7)(10.6)(3.2)(0.8)(0.8)
Severe downside
Gross domestic product(10.8)0.3 4.8 1.3 1.2 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.01 
Unemployment rate4.8 9.9 10.7 9.8 8.7 
House price growth5.3 (11.1)(12.5)(10.7)(7.6)
Commercial real estate price growth(11.0)(21.4)(9.8)(3.9)(0.8)
F-24

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES (continued)
Economic assumptions - five year average
The key UK economic assumptions made by the Group averaged over a five-year period are also shown below. The five-year period reflects movements within the current reporting year such that 31 December 20202021 reflects the five years 20202021 to 2024.2025. The prior year comparative data has been re-presented to align to the equivalent period, 20192020 to 2023.2024. The inclusion of the reporting year within the five-year period reflects the need to predict variables which remain unpublished at the reporting date, and recognises that credit models utilise both level and annual change in calculating ECL. The use of calendar years also maintains a comparability between tables disclosed.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019202120222023202420252021-2025 average
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
%%
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021%
UpsideUpside
Gross domestic productGross domestic product0.3 0.1 (0.4)(0.8)1.6 1.3 1.0 0.3 Gross domestic product7.1 4.0 1.4 1.3 1.4 3.0 
UK Bank RateUK Bank Rate0.98 0.15 0.05 0.02 1.87 1.15 0.51 0.17 UK Bank Rate0.14 1.44 1.74 1.82 2.03 1.43 
Unemployment rateUnemployment rate5.0 5.9 7.1 8.8 3.9 4.3 5.5 6.7 Unemployment rate4.4 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.7 3.7 
House price growthHouse price growth4.2 1.1 (3.5)(7.5)5.1 1.4 (2.5)(7.0)House price growth10.1 2.6 4.9 4.7 3.6 5.1 
Commercial real estate price growthCommercial real estate price growth2.1 (1.1)(4.9)(9.7)1.6 (0.3)(3.9)(7.3)Commercial real estate price growth12.4 5.8 0.7 1.0 (0.6)3.7 
Base caseBase case
Gross domestic productGross domestic product7.1 3.7 1.5 1.3 1.3 2.9 
UK Bank RateUK Bank Rate0.14 0.81 1.00 1.06 1.25 0.85 
Unemployment rateUnemployment rate4.5 4.3 4.4 4.4 4.5 4.4 
House price growthHouse price growth9.8 0.0 0.0 0.5 0.7 2.1 
Commercial real estate price growthCommercial real estate price growth10.2 (2.2)(1.9)0.1 0.6 1.2 
DownsideDownside
Gross domestic productGross domestic product7.1 3.4 1.3 1.1 1.2 2.8 
UK Bank RateUK Bank Rate0.14 0.45 0.52 0.55 0.69 0.47 
Unemployment rateUnemployment rate4.7 5.6 5.9 5.8 5.7 5.6 
House price growthHouse price growth9.2 (4.9)(7.8)(6.6)(4.7)(3.1)
Commercial real estate price growthCommercial real estate price growth8.6 (10.1)(7.0)(3.4)(0.3)(2.6)
Severe downsideSevere downside
Gross domestic productGross domestic product6.8 0.9 0.4 1.0 1.4 2.1 
UK Bank RateUK Bank Rate0.14 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.09 0.08 
Unemployment rateUnemployment rate4.9 7.7 8.5 8.1 7.6 7.3 
House price growthHouse price growth9.1 (7.3)(13.9)(12.5)(8.4)(6.9)
Commercial real estate price growthCommercial real estate price growth5.8 (19.6)(12.1)(5.3)(0.5)(6.8)
Probability-weightedProbability-weighted
Gross domestic productGross domestic product7.0 3.4 1.3 1.2 1.3 2.8 
UK Bank RateUK Bank Rate0.14 0.82 0.99 1.04 1.20 0.83 
Unemployment rateUnemployment rate4.6 4.7 5.0 5.0 4.9 4.8 
House price growthHouse price growth9.6 (1.4)(2.3)(1.7)(1.0)0.6 
Commercial real estate price growthCommercial real estate price growth9.9 (3.9)(3.7)(1.2)(0.1)0.1 
Economic assumptions - start to peak
Base case scenario by quarter1
First
quarter
2021
Second
quarter
2021
Third
quarter
2021
Fourth
quarter
2021
First
quarter
2022
Second
quarter
2022
Third
quarter
2022
Fourth
quarter
2022
At 31 December 2021%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product(1.3)5.4 1.1 0.4 0.1 1.5 0.5 0.3 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.00 
Unemployment rate4.9 4.7 4.3 4.3 4.4 4.3 4.3 4.3 
House price growth6.5 8.7 7.4 9.8 8.4 6.1 3.2 (0.0)
Commercial real estate price growth(2.9)3.4 7.5 10.2 8.4 5.2 0.9 (2.2)
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product1.4 0.8 (1.7)(3.0)8.4 6.6 5.5 1.8 
UK Bank Rate1.44 0.25 0.10 0.10 2.56 1.75 0.75 0.75 
Unemployment rate6.5 8.0 9.3 11.5 4.4 4.6 6.9 8.3 
House price growth22.6 5.9 5.6 5.3 28.3 7.1 2.7 2.7 
Commercial real estate price growth11.0 (2.7)(2.7)(2.7)8.8 (0.8)(0.8)(0.8)
1Gross domestic product presented quarter-on-quarter, house price growth and commercial real estate growth presented year-on-year – i.e. from the equivalent quarter the previous year. UK Bank Rate and unemployment rate are presented as at end of quarter.
Economic assumptions - start to trough
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019

UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product(21.2)(21.2)(21.2)(21.2)0.3 0.3 0.3 (2.4)
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.01 0.00 0.75 0.75 0.35 0.01 
Unemployment rate4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.4 3.8 3.8 3.8 
House price growth(0.5)(0.5)(16.4)(32.4)1.5 0.0 (12.0)(30.3)
Commercial real estate price growth(6.9)(9.0)(22.2)(39.9)(1.4)(2.3)(17.9)(31.4)

F-25

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
3NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATESKEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
202020212022202320242020-2024 average
At 31 December 2020%%%%%%
Upside
Gross domestic product(10.5)3.7 5.7 1.7 1.5 0.3 
UK Bank Rate0.10 1.14 1.27 1.20 1.21 0.98 
Unemployment rate4.3 5.4 5.4 5.0 4.5 5.0 
House price growth6.3 (1.4)5.2 6.0 5.0 4.2 
Commercial real estate price growth(4.6)9.3 3.9 2.1 0.3 2.1 
Base case
Gross domestic product(10.5)3.0 6.0 1.7 1.4 0.1 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.21 0.25 0.15 
Unemployment rate4.5 6.8 6.8 6.1 5.5 5.9 
House price growth5.9 (3.8)0.5 1.5 1.5 1.1 
Commercial real estate price growth(7.0)(1.7)1.6 1.1 0.6 (1.1)
Downside
Gross domestic product(10.6)1.7 5.1 1.4 1.4 (0.4)
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.06 0.02 0.02 0.03 0.05 
Unemployment rate4.6 7.9 8.4 7.8 7.0 7.1 
House price growth5.6 (8.4)(6.5)(4.7)(3.0)(3.5)
Commercial real estate price growth(8.7)(10.6)(3.2)(0.8)(0.8)(4.9)
Severe downside
Gross domestic product(10.8)0.3 4.8 1.3 1.2 (0.8)
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.00 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.02 
Unemployment rate4.8 9.9 10.7 9.8 8.7 8.8 
House price growth5.3 (11.1)(12.5)(10.7)(7.6)(7.5)
Commercial real estate price growth(11.0)(21.4)(9.8)(3.9)(0.8)(9.7)
Probability-weighted
Gross domestic product(10.6)2.6 5.5 1.6 1.4 (0.1)
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.39 0.42 0.43 0.45 0.36 
Unemployment rate4.5 7.0 7.3 6.7 6.0 6.3 
House price growth5.9 (5.2)(1.5)(0.2)0.3 (0.2)
Commercial real estate price growth(7.2)(3.0)(0.3)0.3 (0.1)(2.1)
Base case scenario by quarter1
First
quarter
2020
Second
quarter
2020
Third
quarter
2020
Fourth
quarter
2020
First
quarter
2021
Second
quarter
2021
Third
quarter
2021
Fourth
quarter
2021
At 31 December 2020%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product(3.0)(18.8)16.0 (1.9)(3.8)5.6 3.6 1.5 
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 
Unemployment rate4.0 4.1 4.8 5.0 5.2 6.5 8.0 7.5 
House price growth2.8 2.6 7.2 5.9 5.5 4.7 (1.6)(3.8)
Commercial real estate price growth(5.0)(7.8)(7.8)(7.0)(6.1)(2.9)(2.2)(1.7)
1Gross domestic product presented quarter-on-quarter, house price growth and commercial real estate growth presented year-on-year – i.e. from the equivalent quarter the previous year. UK Bank Rate and unemployment rate are presented as at end of quarter.
Economic assumptions – start to peak1
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product12.6 12.3 11.4 7.6 1.4 0.8 (1.7)(3.0)
UK Bank Rate2.04 1.25 0.71 0.25 1.44 0.25 0.10 0.10 
Unemployment rate4.9 4.9 6.0 8.5 6.5 8.0 9.3 11.5 
House price growth28.5 11.0 9.2 9.1 22.6 5.9 5.6 5.3 
Commercial real estate price growth20.9 10.2 8.6 6.9 11.0 (2.7)(2.7)(2.7)
1Reflects five year period from 2021 to 2025.

F-26

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
Economic assumptions – start to trough1
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020

UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
%%%%%%%%
Gross domestic product(1.3)(1.3)(1.3)(1.3)(21.2)(21.2)(21.2)(21.2)
UK Bank Rate0.10 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.10 0.10 0.01 0.00 
Unemployment rate3.2 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 
House price growth1.2 1.2 (14.8)(30.2)(0.5)(0.5)(16.4)(32.4)
Commercial real estate price growth0.8 0.8 (12.8)(30.0)(6.9)(9.0)(22.2)(39.9)
1Reflects five year period from 2021 to 2025.
ECL sensitivity to economic assumptions
The table below shows the extent to which a higher ECL allowance has been recognised to take account of forward looking information from the weighted multiple economic scenarios. A significant difference between these bases arises on UK mortgages as the probability-weighted ECL includes the impact of house price movements on the loss given default (LGD). Commercial Banking also reflects movements in the loss given default, whereas for Other Retail portfolios only the probability of default responds to changes in the economic outlook. ECL applied through individual assessments and post-model adjustments is reported flat against each economic scenario, reflecting the basis on which they are evaluated. Judgements applied through changes to inputs are reflected in the scenario sensitivities.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019
Base caseProbability
weighted
DifferenceBase caseProbability
weighted
Difference
Impact of multiple economic scenarios£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK mortgages803 1,027 224 464 569 105 
Other Retail2,310 2,368 58 1,492 1,521 29 
Commercial Banking2,102 2,315 213 1,206 1,263 57 
Other422 422 0 27 27 
5,637 6,132 495 3,189 3,380 191 
The table below shows the Group’s ECL for the upside, base case, downside and severe downside scenarios. The stage allocation for an asset is based on the overall scenario probability-weighted PD and, hence, the Stage 2 allocationstaging of assets is constant across all the scenarios. In each economic scenario the ECL applied throughfor individual assessments and post-model adjustments is reported flat against each economic scenario,constant reflecting the basis on which they are evaluated. Judgements applied through changes to inputs are reflected in the scenario sensitivities. The probability-weighted view shows the extent to which a higher ECL allowance has been recognised to take account of multiple economic scenarios relative to the base case; the uplift being £221 million compared to £495 million at 31 December 2020, noting that if the impact of MES staging was also included, as shown in the table below, this would increase to £228 million compared to £536 million at 31 December 2020.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020
Probability-
weighted
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
Probability-
weighted
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
Probability-
weighted
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
Probability-
weighted
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
£m£m£m£m
UK mortgagesUK mortgages1,027 614 803 1,237 2,306 569 317 464 653 1,389 UK mortgages837 637 723 967 1,386 1,027 614 803 1,237 2,306 
Other Retail2,368 2,181 2,310 2,487 2,745 1,521 1,443 1,492 1,564 1,712 
Retail excluding UK mortgagesRetail excluding UK mortgages1,429 1,286 1,392 1,516 1,706 2,368 2,181 2,310 2,487 2,745 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking2,315 1,853 2,102 2,575 3,554 1,263 1,163 1,206 1,327 1,535 Commercial Banking1,316 1,182 1,246 1,384 1,728 2,315 1,853 2,102 2,575 3,554 
OtherOther422 420 422 422 428 27 27 27 27 27 Other418 416 418 419 421 422 420 422 422 428 
ECL allowanceECL allowance6,132 5,068 5,637 6,721 9,033 3,380 2,950 3,189 3,571 4,663 ECL allowance4,000 3,521 3,779 4,286 5,241 6,132 5,068 5,637 6,721 9,033 
The table below shows the Group’s ECL for the upside, base case, downside and severe downside scenarios, with stage allocationstaging of assets based on each specific scenario.scenario probability of default. ECL applied through individual assessments and post-model adjustments is reported flat against each economic scenario, reflecting the basis on which they are evaluated. Judgements applied through changes to inputs are reflected in the scenario sensitivities. A probability-weighted scenario is not shown as this does not reflect the basis on which ECL is reported.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
UpsideBase caseDownsideSevere
downside
£m£m£m£m
UK mortgagesUK mortgages602 797 1,269 2,578 311 461 670 1,667 UK mortgages636 722 973 1,448 602 797 1,269 2,578 
Other Retail2,154 2,299 2,509 2,819 1,435 1,486 1,570 1,740 
Retail excluding UK mortgagesRetail excluding UK mortgages1,270 1,388 1,535 1,767 2,154 2,299 2,509 2,819 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking1,842 2,079 2,629 3,985 1,154 1,202 1,335 1,573 Commercial Banking1,180 1,244 1,397 1,976 1,842 2,079 2,629 3,985 
OtherOther420 421 422 429 27 27 27 27 Other416 418 419 422 420 421 422 429 
ECL allowanceECL allowance5,018 5,596 6,829 9,811 2,927 3,176 3,602 5,007 ECL allowance3,502 3,772 4,324 5,613 5,018 5,596 6,829 9,811 
The impact of changes in the UK unemployment rate and House Price Index (HPI) have also been assessed. Although such changes would not be observed in isolation, as economic indicators tend to be correlated in a coherent scenario, this gives insight into the sensitivity of the Group’s ECL to gradual changes in these two critical economic factors. The assessment has been made against the base case with the reported staging unchanged.
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL in respect of UK mortgages resulting from a decrease/increase in loss given default for a 10 percentage point (pp) increase or decrease in the UK House Price Index (HPI). The increase/decrease is presented based on the adjustment phased evenly over the first ten quarters of the base case scenario.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
ECL impact, £m(206)284 (110)147 
F-26

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES (continued)
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL resulting from a 1 percentage point (pp) increase or decrease in the UK unemployment rate. The increase or decrease is presented based on the adjustment phased evenly over the first ten10 quarters of the base case scenario. An immediate increase or decrease would drive a more material ECL impact as it would be fully reflected in both 12 month12-month and lifetime PDs.
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2019At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
1pp increase in
unemployment
1pp decrease in
unemployment
£m£m£m£m
UK mortgagesUK mortgages25 (23)33 (34)UK mortgages23 (18)25 (23)
Other Retail54 (54)39 (54)
Retail excluding UK mortgagesRetail excluding UK mortgages34 (34)54 (54)
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking123 (110)68 (54)Commercial Banking49 (42)123 (110)
OtherOther1 (1)(1)Other1 (1)(1)
ECL impactECL impact203 (188)141 (143)ECL impact107 (95)203 (188)
F-27

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
The table below shows the impact on the Group’s ECL in respect of UK mortgages of an increase or decrease in loss given default for a 10 percentage point (pp) increase or decrease in the UK House Price Index (HPI). The increase or decrease is presented based on the adjustment phased evenly over the first 10 quarters of the base case scenario.
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2020
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
10pp increase
in HPI
10pp decrease
in HPI
ECL impact, £m(112)162 (206)284 
Individual assessments
Stage 3 ECL in Commercial Banking is largely assessed on an individual basis using bespoke assessment of loss for each specific client. These assessments are carried out by the Business Support Unit based on detailed reviews and expected recovery strategies. While these assessments are based on the Group’s latest economic view, the use of group-wideGroup-wide multiple economic scenarios and weightings is not considered appropriate for these cases due to their individual characteristics. In place of this, a range of case specificcase-specific outcomes are considered with any alternative better or worse outcomes that carry a 25 per cent likelihood taken into account in establishing a probability-weighted ECL. At 31 December 20202021, individually assessed provisions for Commercial Banking were £1,215£905 million (2019: £812(2020: £1,215 million) which reflected a range of £741 million to £1,023 million (2020: £977 million to £1,536 million (2019: £438 million to £1,095 million), based on the range of alternative outcomes considered.
Application of judgement in adjustments to modelled ECL
Impairment models fall within the Group’s Model Riskmodel risk framework with model monitoring, periodic validation and back testing performed on model components (i.e. probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default). Limitations in the Group’s impairment models or data inputs may be identified through the ongoing assessment and validation of the output of the models. In these circumstances, management make appropriate adjustments to the Group’s allowance for impairment losses to ensure that the overall provision adequately reflects all material risks. These adjustments are determined by considering the particular attributes of exposures which have not been adequately captured by the impairment models and range from changes to model inputs and parameters, at account level, through to more qualitative post-model overlays.adjustments.
Judgements are not typically assessed under each distinct economic scenario used to generate ECL, but instead are applied on the basis of final modelled ECL which reflects the probability weightedprobability-weighted view of all scenarios. All adjustments are reviewed quarterly and are subject to internal review and challenge, including by the Audit Committee, to ensure that amounts are appropriately calculated and that there are specific release criteria within a reasonable timeframe.identified.
At 31 December 2020 theThe coronavirus pandemic and the various support measures that have been put in place have resulted in an economic environment which differs significantly from the historical economic conditions upon which the impairment models have been built. As a result there ishas been a greater need for management judgements to be applied alongside the use of models. At 31 December 20202021 management judgement resulted in additional ECL allowances totalling £1,333£1,278 million (2019: £153(2020: £1,333 million). This comprises judgements added due to COVID-19 in the year and other judgements not directly linked to COVID-19 but which have increased in size underduring the current outlook.pandemic. The table below analyses total ECL allowance at 31 December 2020 by portfolio, separately identifying the amounts that have been modelled, those that have been individually assessed and those arising through the application of management judgement.
Modelled
ECL
Individually
assessed
Judgements
due to
COVID-19
1
Other
judgements
Total ECLModelled
ECL
Individually
assessed
Judgements
due to
COVID-19
1
Other
judgements
Total ECL
£m£m
At 31 December 2020
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
UK mortgagesUK mortgages481 0 36 510 1,027 UK mortgages292  67 478 837 
Credit cardsCredit cards436  94 (9)521 
Other RetailOther Retail2,060 0 321 (13)2,368 Other Retail801  57 50 908 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking1,021 1,215 81 (2)2,315 Commercial Banking270 905 155 (14)1,316 
OtherOther22 0 400 0 422 Other18  400  418 
TotalTotal3,584 1,215 838 495 6,132 Total1,817 905 773 505 4,000 
At 31 December 2019
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
UK mortgagesUK mortgages386 183 569 UK mortgages481 — 36 510 1,027 
Credit cardsCredit cards851 — 128 (56)923 
Other RetailOther Retail1,531 (10)1,521 Other Retail1,209 — 193 43 1,445 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking471 812 (20)1,263 Commercial Banking1,021 1,215 81 (2)2,315 
OtherOther27 27 Other22 — 400 — 422 
TotalTotal2,415 812 153 3,380 Total3,584 1,215 838 495 6,132 
1Judgements introduced in 2020 due to address the impact that COVID-19 and resulting interventions have had on the Group’s economic outlook and observed loss experience, which have required additional model limitations to be addressed.
F-27

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES (continued)
Judgements due to COVID-19
UK mortgages: £67 million (2020: £36 million)
These adjustments principally comprise:
Increase in time to repossession: £52 million (2020: £36 million)
This reflects an adjustment made to reflectallow for an increase in the time assumed between default and repossession as a result of the Group temporarily suspending the repossession of properties to support customers during the pandemic.
F-28

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
Credit cards: £94 million (2020: £128 million) and Other Retail: £321£57 million (2020: £193 million)
These adjustments principally comprise:
Recognition of impact of support measures: £218Credit cards: £94 million (2020: £100 million) Other Retail: £40 million (2020: £118 million)
The use of payment holidays along withGovernment support and subdued levels of consumer spending isare judged to have temporarilycontributed to the reduced the flow of accounts into arrears and default and to have also improved average credit scores across portfolios. Management believes that the resulting position does not fully reflect the underlying credit risk in the portfolios.portfolios although there is no longer an expectation that the reduced level of defaults experienced in 2020 was temporary. Adjustments have therefore beencontinue to be made to increase expected future rates of default and remove the impact of the observed improvement in average credit scores.
Incorporation of forward-looking LGDs: £86 million
Modelled LGDs in non-mortgage Retail portfolios are predominantly based on observed customer behaviour and resulting incurred losses. Management believes that this may not be representative of future experience, given the current economic outlook, and consequently an adjustment has been madepredicted exposures at default relative to increase forward-looking LGDs to reflect a deterioration in cure and recovery rates. The impact has been estimated by using experience of losses in previous downturns and management’s view of relative comparability of anticipated economic scenarios.modelled ECL.
Commercial Banking: £155 million (2020: £81 millionmillion)
This adjustmentThese adjustments principally comprises:comprise:
Adjustment to economic variables used as inputs to models: £88 million (2020: £91 millionmillion)
Management does not believe thatObserved reductions in the observedrate of UK corporate insolvency ratesinsolvencies, used as an input to Commercialcommercial default models, adequately reflect the current economic situation and outlook given the temporary government support. As a result, the observed reductions in the rate of insolvencies have been replacedcontinue to be substituted with an increase proportionate to that seen in unemployment to generate a level of predicted defaults. As anticipated, the rate of recoveries has returned to pre-pandemic levels towards the end of 2021 and, with model outputs based on 12 months observed insolvency data, management believe the historically low levels of insolvencies seen during early 2021 do not reflect the underlying credit risk.
Specific sector risks: £80 million (2020: £nil)
At 31 December 2020 modelled ECL incorporated an economic outlook containing a material reduction in corporate profits. This is no longer assumed, which generates a reduction in modelled ECL and therefore leaves potential risk on specific sectors. An updated assessment of risks including COVID-driven restrictions, inflation and interest rate pressures has been undertaken which continues to suggest that a number of specific industries remain more exposed. Judgement has therefore been raised in place of this to ensure a more targeted stress on likelihood and severity of loss in sectors which are considered to face an elevated risk incorporating any impact on SICR through the increased likelihood of loss.
Other: £400 million (2020: £400 million)
Central overlay in respect of economic uncertainty:
COVID risk to base case conditioning assumptions: £400 million (2020: £400 million)
An important element of the methodology used to calculate the Group’s ECL allowance is the determination of a base case economic scenario, predicated on certain conditioning assumptions, from which is then used to derive alternative economic scenarios are derived using stochastic shocks. The rapid evolution ofWhile the pandemicbase case outlook has improved throughout the year, unexpected and significant changes that this has brought about could continue into 2021 andadverse COVID-19 mutations may partially invalidate the base case conditioning assumptions that underpinand therefore the Group’spotential range of losses considered. The base case scenario. Managementrepresents the Groups most likely view, however management believes that in the risks tocontext of the pandemic, the possibility that the conditioning assumptions aroundare invalidated is firmly to the downside. In particular, the possibility that a future virus mutation has vaccine resistance leading to serious social and economic disruption. Such a possibility lies outside of the Group’s current methodology because it would invalidate one of the key assumptions behind the base case scenario are markedlyforecast. The likelihood and impact of a vaccine resistant mutation is difficult to estimate with any precision therefore the Group has considered a number of approaches to create a reasonable estimate of this additional downside reflecting notably the potential for a material delay in the vaccination programme or reduction in its effectiveness from further virus mutation and the corresponding delayed withdrawal of restrictions on social interaction or introduction of further lockdowns. The Group's ECL allowances are required to reflect an unbiased probability-weighted view of all possible future outcomes and therefore management believes that an adjustment is required to capture these additional risks.risk.
An adjustment of £400 million (31 December 2020: £400 million) has been made to increase the Group’s ECL allowances to reflect the increased downside risk and the potential for the severity of losses to stretch beyond the Group’s severe scenario. One approach used to quantify this increased uncertainty aroundamount is to apply a 15 per cent re-weighting from the stated upside to the stated severe downside scenario, a larger re-weight than at 31 December 2020 given that the current severe scenario reflects the improved conditioning assumptions. This equatesassumptions of the base case, whereas the downside risk remains constant. Another approach is to apply a 1 percentage point increase in unemployment allied with a 510 per cent lower HPI in 2021,2022, reflecting a broader assessment of a more immediate and therefore greater ECL impact than the gradual increase reflected in the stated univariate sensitivity. Itsensitivities. Such an increase is proportionate to the level of volatility seen in forecasts every six months as the pandemic has unfolded and is also equivalent to a 10 per cent re-weighting fromunfolded.
As the upside to the severe downside scenario. The adjustment whichhas been calculated centrally it has not been allocated to a specific portfolio,portfolios. It has therefore been allocated against Stage 1 assets given that the downside risks are largely considered to relate to non-defaulted exposures, with currently low default probabilities, the majority of which are in Stage 1. Through 2021Detailed portfolio level disclosures continue to reflect the scaleGroup’s economic assumptions at the Group’s stated weightings. An indicative allocation to allow users to understand where the Group believes that the additional losses could arise is as follows: UK mortgages: c.£200 million, Credit cards and Other Retail: c.£100 million, Commercial Banking c.£100 million. The Group continues to monitor and assess the likelihood and consequences of the uncertainty is expected to diminish and the need for this adjustment will then be reassessed.its current conditioning assumptions.
Other judgements
UK mortgages: £510£478 million (2019: £183(2020: £510 million)
These adjustments principally comprise:
Adjustment to modelled forecast parameters: £65 million (2020: £193 million (2019: £NaN)million)
Adjustments have been required to the estimated defaults used within the ECL calculation for UK mortgages were introduced in 2020 following the adoption of new default forecast models. Forecast modelsWork has progressed through the year to embed the new model, including updates to model design choices through the implementation of formal model changes or through in-model adjustments, which predict quarterly defaults based on several economic variables have been developed usingare considered judgemental pending final evaluation and model governance. These remaining in-model adjustments now target a combination of specific enhancements which will continue to be progressed through to model changes. The reduction in the response from the previous recession, as per usual modelling best practice. However, management believe further adjustments are necessary when the results of these models have been benchmarked to observed levels, given the atypical nature of the current economic outlook. These were derived using historical observed default rates under previous downturn conditions to ensure that the resulting forecast best reflected management’s view given the current economic outlook. The adjustment to forward looking parameters prior to their use in ECL calculations ensures that all downstream account level calculations reflect the Group’s best view of credit losses in respect of the economic scenarios stated. As such this in-model adjustment is reflected within all scenarios, assessmentalso partly due to the improved economic outlook which reduces the impact of staging and in subsequent assessment of all post-model adjustments.adopting the new forecast model.
End-of-term interest only:interest-only: £174 million (2020: £179 million (2019: £132 million)
The current definition of default used in the UK mortgages impairment model excludes past term interest onlyinterest-only accounts that continue to make interest payments but have missed their capital payment upon maturity of the loan. This adjustment therefore mitigates the risk that the model understates the credit losses associated with interest-only accounts which have missed, or will potentially miss, their final capital payment. For those accounts that have reached end of term this adjustment manually overwrites PDs to 70 per cent or 100 per cent, thereby moving them into Stage 2, or Stage 3, depending on whether they are deemedconsidered performing or non-performing respectively. For interest-only accounts with six years or less to maturity an appropriate incremental PD uplift is made to PDs based on the probability of missing a future capital payment, assessed through segmentation of behaviour score, debt-to-value and worst ever arrears status. The increase in the judgement in 2020 is primarily driven by an increase in the stock of long-term defaults following COVID-19 related litigation suspension.
F-28F-29

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
3NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATESKEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
Long-term defaults: £87 million (2019: £33(2020: £87 million)
The Group suspended mortgage litigation activity between late 2014 and mid 2018 as changes were implemented to the treatment of amounts in arrears, interrupting the natural flow of accounts to possession. An adjustment is made to ensure adequate provision coverage considering the resulting build-up of accounts in long termlong-term default. Coverage is uplifted to the equivalent levels of those accounts already in repossession on an estimated shortfall of balances expected to flow to possession. A further adjustment is made to mitigate for the risk that credit model provision understates the probability of possession for accounts which have been in default for more than 24 months, with an arrears balance increase in the last 6 months. These accounts have their probability of possession set to 95 per cent based on observed historical losses incurred on accounts that were of an equivalent status.
Adjustment for specific segments: £54 million (2020: £20 million)
The Group monitors risks across specific segments of its portfolios which may not be fully captured through wider collective models. Along with continued judgmental increases to probability of default on forborne accounts, £18 million (2020: £20 million), the Group has taken an additional £36 million judgement for fire safety and cladding uncertainty. This captures risks within the assessment of affordability and asset valuations, not captured by underlying models. Though experience remains limited the risk is now considered sufficiently material to address through judgement, given that more cases have been assessed as having defective cladding, or other fire safety issues, together with emerging evidence of higher arrears and weaker sales values relative to the wider portfolio.
Inflation and interest rate risk: £52 million (2020: £nil)
The Group’s approach to MES modelling incorporates a range of interest rate scenarios, however it is recognised that given current inflationary pressures the risk of a very rapid increase in interest rates may not be fully captured in the range of economic assumptions used to assess credit losses. Therefore an additional management judgement for the mortgage portfolio, for which default rates are most sensitive to interest rates, has been taken to reflect this heightened risk. The quantification of this risk adopts an alternative severe downside scenario which leverages the Group’s internal stress testing exercise. The increase in ECL therefore reflects the incremental losses from adopting a severe downside scenario with interest rates increasing to 4 per cent, with peak unemployment and house price falls broadly consistent with the Group’s stated severe downside scenario. The Group will continue to reassess inflationary risks and whether this additional judgement in 2020 is primarily driven by an increase in the stock of long-term defaults following COVID-19 related litigation suspension.required.
Credit cards: £(9) million (2020: £(56) million) and Other Retail: £(13)£50 million (2019: £(10)(2020: £43 million)
These adjustments principally comprise:
Lifetime extension on revolving products: £81Credit cards: £41 million (2019: £36(2020: £71 million) and Other Retail: £5 million (2020: £10 million)
Unsecured revolving products use a model lifetime definition of three years based on historic data which shows that substantially all accounts resolve in this time. An adjustment is made to extend the lifetime used for Stage 2 exposures to six years by adding incremental probability ofincreasing default probabilities through the extrapolation of the default trajectory observed throughout the three years and beyond. The resulting additional ECL allowance is added to Stage 2 accounts proportionate to the modelled three-year PD. The decrease in this judgement during 2021 is primarily due to the Group's improved economic outlook, meaning that the model view of lifetime three year PD. The increase in the judgement in 2020losses is driven by growth in Stage 2 assets and their coverage, rather than any change to the lifetime assumption.
Unsecured non-scored accounts: £(72) million (2019: £NaN)
Due to a shortcoming in the models, it is not possible to retrieve relevant credit data for a number of accountslower and therefore no PDthis extrapolation to six years is available and no assessment of whether there has been a SICR can be carried out. The model defaults these accounts to Stage 2 and a proxy ECL allowance is calculated based on similar accounts within the portfolio. The deterioration in the economic outlook and growth in the number of accounts subject to this proxy have resulted in this approach having a more significant effect and an exercise has been carried out to identify and adjust those accounts which should not have been allocated to Stage 2.proportionally lower.
Credit Card LGD alignment:card loss given default alignment (LGD): £(37) million (2020: £(55) million (2019: £(22) million)
The MBNA impairment model was developed using historical MBNA data. Following the acquisition of the business and the subsequent migration of this portfolio to Lloyds Banking GroupGroup's collections strategies, an adjustment is required to reflect the recent improvement in cure rates now evident as collections strategies harmonise, which are not captured by the original MBNA model development data. The reduction in the judgement reflects a lower level of anticipated defaults, now expected from an improved economic outlook, against which the LGD adjustments would be applied.
Defined benefit pension scheme obligations
Key judgement:Determination of an appropriate yield curve
Key estimates:Discount rate applied to future cash flows
Expected lifetime of the schemes' members
Expected rate of future inflationary increases
The net asset recognised in the balance sheet at 31 December 20202021 in respect of the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme obligations was £4,404 million comprising an asset of £4,531 million and a liability of £127 million (2020: a net asset of £1,578 million comprising an asset of £1,714 million and a liability of £136 million (2019: a net asset of £550 million comprising an asset of £681 million and a liability of £131 million); and for the Bank was £2,384 million (comprising an asset of £2,420 million and a liability of £36 million) (2020: a net asset of £727 million (comprisingcomprising an asset of £765 million and a liability of £38 million) (2019: a net asset of £347 million comprising an asset of £386 million and a liability of £39 million). The Group’s accounting policy for its defined benefit pension scheme obligations is set out in note 2(K).
The accounting valuation of the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes’ liabilities requires management to make a number of assumptions. The key areas of estimation uncertainty are the discount rate applied to future cash flows, and the expected lifetime of the schemes’ members.members and the expected rate of future inflationary increases.
The discount rate is required to be set with reference to market yields at the end of the reporting period on high quality corporate bonds in the currency of and with a term consistent with the defined benefit pension schemes’ obligations. The average duration of the schemes’ obligations is approximately 1917 years. The market for bonds with a similar duration is limited and, as a result, significant management judgement is required to determine an appropriate yield curve on which to base the discount rate. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the value of the schemes' assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 20202021 of a decrease of 10 basis points in the discount rate would be a reduction of £890£795 million (2019: £784(2020: £890 million). To the extent that changes in the discount rate arise from changes in gilt yields, rather than credit spreads, the impact is largely mitigated by the schemes' asset-liability matching strategies.
The cost of the benefits payable by the schemes will also depend upon the life expectancy of the members. The mortality assumptions used by the Group are based on standard industry tables for both current mortality rates and the rate of future mortality improvement, adjusted in line with the actual experience of the Group's schemes. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the value of the schemes' assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 20202021 of an increase of one year in the average life of scheme members would be a reduction of £2,146£1,934 million (2019: £1,636(2020: £2,146 million). The Group has in place a longevity swap, as described in note 28,27, to partially mitigate mortality risk.

F-30

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 3: CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND KEY SOURCES OF ESTIMATION UNCERTAINTY (continued)
The majority of the Group’s plans provide benefits linked to inflation both in deferment and in payment and the Group sets its inflation assumption with reference to an implied inflation curve. Assuming that there is no change in other assumptions or in the value of the schemes’ assets, the effect on the net accounting surplus at 31 December 2021 of an increase of 10 basis points in the expected rate of inflation would be a decrease of £481 million (2020: £531 million). This impact would be offset by gains recognised on the pension schemes’ holding of index linked gilts and inflation linked swaps.
Further sensitivities and the balance sheet impact of changes in the principal actuarial assumptions are provided in part (v) of note 28.27.
Recoverability of deferred tax assets and uncertainUncertain tax positions
Key judgements:judgement:Assessing the likely level of future taxable profits taking into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans
Interpreting tax rules on the Group’s open tax matters
At 31 December 2020 the Group carried deferred tax assets on its balance sheet of £3,468 million (2019: £3,366 million) and the Bank carried deferred tax assets of £2,109 million (2019: £2,029 million) principally relating to tax losses carried forward. Further information on the Group's deferred tax assets and uncertain tax positions is provided in notes 29 and 40 respectively.
Estimation of income taxes includes the assessment of recoverability of deferred tax assets. Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the extent that they are considered more likely than not to be recoverable based on existing tax laws and forecasts of future taxable profits against which the underlying tax deductions can be utilised. The Group has recognised a deferred tax asset of £4,054 million (2019: £3,600 million), and the Bank £2,507 million (2019: £2,198 million) in respect of trading losses carried forward. Substantially all of these losses have arisen in Bank of Scotland plc and Lloyds Bank plc, and they will be utilised as taxable profits arise in those legal entities in future periods.
F-29

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
3 CRITICAL ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENTS AND ESTIMATES (continued)
The Group’s expectations of future UK taxable profits require management judgement, and take into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans and anticipated future tax-adjusting items. In making this assessment, account is taken of business plans, the Board-approved operating plan and the expected future economic outlook as set out in the strategic report, as well as the risks associated with future regulatory change, in order to produce a base case forecast of future UK taxable profits. Under current law there is no expiry date for UK trading losses not yet utilised, and given the forecast of future profitability and the Group’s commitment to the UK market, it is more likely than not that the value of the losses will be recovered at some point in the future. Banking tax losses that arose before 1 April 2015 can only be used against 25 per cent of taxable profits arising after 1 April 2016, and they cannot be used to reduce the surcharge on banking profits. These restrictions in utilisation mean that the value of the deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses is only expected to be fully recovered by 2049 (2019: 2039) in the base case forecast. The rate of recovery of the Group’s tax loss asset is not a straight line, being affected by the relative profitability of the legal entities in future periods, and the relative size of their tax losses carried forward. It is expected in the base case that 60 per cent of the value will be recovered by 2034, when Bank of Scotland plc will have utilised all of its available tax losses. It is possible that future tax law changes could materially affect the timing of recovery and the value of these losses ultimately realised by the Group. The value of the deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses increased by £420 million in 2020 as a result of the change in UK tax rates (see note 29).
As disclosed in note 40, the Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary, wherewhich ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013, HMRC informed the Lloyds Banking Group that its interpretation of the UK rules means that the group relief is not available. In 2020, HMRC concluded their enquiry into the matter and issued a closure notice. The Lloyds Banking Group's interpretation of the UK rules has not changed and hence it has appealed to the First Tier Tax Tribunal, with a hearing expected in 2022. If the final tax position will remain uncertain untildetermination of the matter by the judicial process is finally determined by judicial process.that HMRC’s position is correct, management estimate that this would result in an increase in current tax liabilities of approximately £730 million (including interest) and a reduction in deferred tax assets of approximately £330 million. The Lloyds Banking Group, having taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due.
The Group makes other estimates in relation to tax which do not require significant judgements, see further discussion in note 28.
Regulatory and legal provisions
Key judgements:Determining the scope of reviews required by regulators
The impact of legal decisions that may be relevant to claims received
Determining whether a reliable estimate is available for obligations arising from past events
Key estimates:The number of future complaints
The proportion of complaints that will be upheld
The average cost of redress
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group carried provisions of £520£1,054 million (2019: £2,269(2020: £520 million) and the Bank £140£146 million (2019: £783(2020: £140 million) against the cost of making redress payments to customers and the related administration costs in connection with historical regulatory breaches.
Determining the amount of the provisions, which represent management’s best estimate of the cost of settling these issues, requires the exercise of significant judgement and estimation. It will often be necessary to form a view on matters which are inherently uncertain, such as the scope of reviews required by regulators, and to estimate the number of future complaints, the extent to which they will be upheld, the average cost of redress and the impact of decisions reached by legal and other review processes that may be relevant to claims received. Consequently the continued appropriateness of the underlying assumptions is reviewed on a regular basis against actual experience and other relevant evidence and adjustments made to the provisions where appropriate.
Management has applied significant judgement in determining the provision required for HBOS Reading; further details are provided in note 29.
Fair value of financial instruments
Key estimates:estimate:Interest rate spreads, earnings multiples and interest rate volatility
At 31 December 2020,2021, the carrying value of the Group’s financial instrument assets held at fair value was £37,275£35,095 million (2019: £35,395(2020: £37,275 million), and its financial instrument liabilities held at fair value was £15,059£11,180 million (2019: £17,533(2020: £15,059 million). The carrying value of the Bank’s financial instrument assets held at fair value was £38,966£36,956 million (2019: £36,501(2020: £38,966 million) and financial instrument liabilities held at fair value was £18,979£15,923 million (2019: £21,908(2020: £18,979 million).
The Group’s valuation control framework and a description of level 1, 2 and 3 financial assets and liabilities is set out in note 41(2). The valuation techniques for level 3 financial instruments involve management judgement and estimates, the extent of which depends on the complexity of the instrument and the availability of market observable information. In addition, in line with market practice, the Group applies credit, debit and funding valuation adjustments in determining the fair value of its uncollateralised derivative positions. A description of these adjustments is set out in note 42.41.
Recoverability of other intangible assetsCapitalised software enhancements
Key judgements:judgement:Assessing future trading conditions that could affect the Group’s business operations
Assessing whether certain of the Group’s purchased brands have an indefinite life
Key estimates:estimate:The value-in-use calculations require management to estimate future cash flows, appropriate discount rates for those cash flows and long-term sustainable growth rates
Estimated useful life of internally generated capitalised software
At 31 December 2020,2021, the carrying value of the Group’s other intangible assets was £4,112 million (2019: £3,781 million), including capitalised software enhancements ofwas £3,383 million (2020: £3,281 million (2019: £2,880 million) and brands of £380 million (2019: £380 million).
In determining the estimated useful life of capitalised software enhancements, management consider the product's lifecycle and the Group's technology strategy; assets are reviewed annually to assess whether there is any indication of impairment and to confirm that the remaining estimated useful life is still appropriate. For the year ended 31 December 2020,2021, the amortisation charge was £583£884 million, including a software write-off as the Group invests in new technology and systems infrastructure, and at 31 December 2020,2021, the weighted-average remaining estimated useful life of the Group’s capitalised software enhancements was 4.94.7 years (2019: 4.7(2020: 4.9 years). If the Group reduced by one year the estimated useful life of those assets with a remaining estimated useful life of more than two years at 31 December 2020,2021, the 20212022 amortisation charge would be approximately £175£200 million higher.
Brands arising from the acquisition of Bank of Scotland in 2009 are recognised on the Group's balance sheet and have been determined to have an indefinite useful life. The carrying value at 31 December 2020 was £380 million (2019: £380 million). The recoverable amount has been based on a value-in-use calculation. The calculation uses post-tax projections of the income generated by the brands, a discount rate of 9.31 per cent and a future growth rate of 2.5 per cent . Management estimates that if the growth rate were decreased by 1 per cent there would have been an impairment charge of £50 million.
F-30F-31

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
4NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS
The Group provides a wide range of banking and financial services in the UK and in certain locations overseas. The Group Executive Committee (GEC) of the Lloyds Banking Group has been determined to be the chief operating decision makerdecision-maker, as defined by IFRS 8 Operating Segments, for the Group. The Group’s operating segments reflect its organisational and management structures. The GEC reviews the Group’s internal reporting based around these segments in order to assess performance and allocate resources. GEC considersThey consider interest income and expense on a net basis and consequently the total interest income and expense for all reportable segments is presented net. The segments are differentiated by the type of products provided and by whether the customers are individuals or corporate entities.
During 2020, the Group migrated certain customer relationships from the SME business within Commercial Banking to Business Banking within Retail; the Group has also revised its approach to internal funding charges, including the adoption of the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) interest rate benchmark in place of LIBOR. Comparatives have been restated accordingly.
The Group’s activities are organised into 2 financial reporting segments: Retail and Commercial Banking.
Retail offers a broad range of financial service products, including current accounts, savings, mortgages, motor finance and unsecured consumer lending to personal and small business customers.
Commercial Banking provides a range of products and services such as lending, transactional banking, working capital management, risk management and debt capital markets services to SMEs, corporates and financial institutions.
IncomeOther comprises income and expenditure not attributed to thesethe Group's financial reporting segments, includingsegments. These amounts include the costs of certain central and head office functions, is disclosed as Other.functions.
Inter-segment services are generally recharged at cost, although some attract a margin. Inter-segment lending and deposits are generally entered into at market rates, except that non-interest bearing balances are priced at a rate that reflects the external yield that could be earned on such funds.
For the majority of those derivative contracts entered into by business units for risk management purposes, the business unit recognises the net interest income or expense on an accrual accounting basis and transfers the remainder of the movement in the fair value of the derivative to the central function where the resulting accounting volatility is managed where possible through the establishment of hedge accounting relationships. Any change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk is also recorded within the central function. This allocation of the fair value of the derivative and change in fair value of the hedged instrument attributable to the hedged risk avoids accounting asymmetry in segmental results and leads to accounting volatility, which is managed centrally and reported within Other.
F-31

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
4 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (continued)

RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherGroup
£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2020
Net interest income8,321 2,300 149 10,770 
Other income1,735 673 1,407 3,815 
Total income10,056 2,973 1,556 14,585 
Costs(5,816)(1,673)(1,707)(9,196)
Impairment charge(2,384)(1,280)(396)(4,060)
Profit (loss) before tax1,856 20 (547)1,329 
External income11,859 2,496 230 14,585 
Inter-segment income(1,803)477 1,326 0 
Segment income10,056 2,973 1,556 14,585 
Segment external assets359,171 83,155 157,613 599,939 
Segment external liabilities295,216 126,008 137,597 558,821 
Analysis of segment other income:
Current accounts497 109 4 610 
Credit and debit card fees517 231 0 748 
Commercial banking fees0 169 0 169 
Private banking and asset management0 0 1 1 
Factoring0 76 0 76 
Other fees and commissions63 157 100 320 
Fees and commissions receivable1,077 742 105 1,924 
Fees and commissions payable(571)(195)(143)(909)
Net fee and commission income506 547 (38)1,015 
Operating lease rental income1,104 16 0 1,120 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income0 0 145 145 
Other income125 110 1,300 1,535 
Segment other income1,735 673 1,407 3,815 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:
Depreciation and amortisation1,760 242 668 2,670 
Defined benefit scheme charges97 28 122 247 
Other segment items:
Additions to fixed assets1,684 89 1,042 2,815 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year4 0 0 4 
F-32

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
4NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (continued)

RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherGroup
£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 20191
Net interest income9,129 2,691 400 12,220 
Other income2,025 870 1,493 4,388 
Total income11,154 3,561 1,893 16,608 
Costs(7,912)(1,818)(1,393)(11,123)
Impairment charge(1,038)(313)(11)(1,362)
Profit before tax2,204 1,430 489 4,123 
External income13,111 2,773 724 16,608 
Inter-segment income(1,957)788 1,169 
Segment income11,154 3,561 1,893 16,608 
Segment external assets351,301 89,630 140,437 581,368 
Segment external liabilities261,019 125,240 156,210 542,469 
Analysis of segment other income:
Current accounts518 133 656 
Credit and debit card fees634 327 961 
Commercial banking fees166 166 
Private banking and asset management38 38 
Factoring103 103 
Other fees and commissions68 219 152 439 
Fees and commissions receivable1,220 948 195 2,363 
Fees and commissions payable(571)(299)(157)(1,027)
Net fee and commission income649 649 38 1,336 
Operating lease rental income1,225 22 1,247 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(5)201 196 
Other income151 204 1,254 1,609 
Segment other income2,025 870 1,493 4,388 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:
Depreciation and amortisation1,712 315 575 2,602 
Defined benefit scheme charges108 43 94 245 
Other segment items:
Additions to fixed assets2,208 247 1,097 3,552 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year
1Restated, see page F-31.
RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherGroup
£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2021
Net interest income8,581 2,240 215 11,036 
Other income1,754 753 1,130 3,637 
Total income10,335 2,993 1,345 14,673 
Operating expenses(5,766)(2,314)(2,126)(10,206)
Impairment credit455 857 6 1,318 
Profit before tax5,024 1,536 (775)5,785 
External income11,706 2,643 324 14,673 
Inter-segment (expense) income(1,371)350 1,021  
Segment income10,335 2,993 1,345 14,673 
Segment external assets371,746 77,451 153,652 602,849 
Segment external liabilities322,146 120,049 119,882 562,077 
Analysis of segment other income:
Fee and commission income:
Current accounts504 126 4 634 
Credit and debit card fees614 264  878 
Commercial banking fees 247 37 284 
Factoring 76  76 
Other fees and commissions57 167 99 323 
Fee and commission income1,175 880 140 2,195 
Fee and commission expense(577)(230)(135)(942)
Net fee and commission income598 650 5 1,253 
Operating lease rental income1,046 13  1,059 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income  (116)(116)
Other income110 90 1,241 1,441 
Segment other income1,754 753 1,130 3,637 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:
Depreciation and amortisation1,525 273 979 2,777 
Defined benefit scheme charges89 29 118 236 
Other segment items:
Additions to fixed assets1,922 168 1,012 3,102 
F-33

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
4NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (continued)

RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherContinuing
operations
RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherGroup
£m£m
Year ended 31 December 20181
Year ended 31 December 2020Year ended 31 December 2020
Net interest incomeNet interest income9,379 2,893 482 12,754 Net interest income8,321 2,300 149 10,770 
Other incomeOther income1,922 1,447 851 4,220 Other income1,735 673 1,407 3,815 
Total incomeTotal income11,301 4,340 1,333 16,974 Total income10,056 2,973 1,556 14,585 
Costs(7,709)(2,160)(1,899)(11,768)
Impairment (charge) credit(861)(80)15 (926)
Operating expensesOperating expenses(5,816)(1,673)(1,707)(9,196)
Impairment chargeImpairment charge(2,384)(1,280)(396)(4,060)
Profit (loss) before taxProfit (loss) before tax2,731 2,100 (551)4,280 Profit (loss) before tax1,856 20 (547)1,329 
External incomeExternal income12,924 3,722 328 16,974 External income11,859 2,496 230 14,585 
Inter-segment income(1,623)618 1,005 
Inter-segment (expense) incomeInter-segment (expense) income(1,803)477 1,326 — 
Segment incomeSegment income11,301 4,340 1,333 16,974 Segment income10,056 2,973 1,556 14,585 
Segment external assetsSegment external assets349,755 115,444 128,325 593,524 Segment external assets359,171 83,155 157,613 599,939 
Segment external liabilitiesSegment external liabilities261,457 137,172 155,145 553,774 Segment external liabilities295,216 126,008 137,597 558,821 
Analysis of segment other income:Analysis of segment other income:Analysis of segment other income:
Fee and commission income:Fee and commission income:
Current accountsCurrent accounts503 139 647 Current accounts497 109 610 
Credit and debit card feesCredit and debit card fees646 328 974 Credit and debit card fees517 231 — 748 
Commercial banking feesCommercial banking fees271 271 Commercial banking fees— 169 — 169 
Private banking and asset managementPrivate banking and asset management92 94 Private banking and asset management— — 
FactoringFactoring83 83 Factoring— 76 — 76 
Other fees and commissionsOther fees and commissions57 248 123 428 Other fees and commissions63 157 100 320 
Fees and commissions receivable1,206 1,071 220 2,497 
Fees and commissions payable(757)(310)(161)(1,228)
Fee and commission incomeFee and commission income1,077 742 105 1,924 
Fee and commission expenseFee and commission expense(571)(195)(143)(909)
Net fee and commission incomeNet fee and commission income449 761 59 1,269 Net fee and commission income506 547 (38)1,015 
Operating lease rental incomeOperating lease rental income1,305 36 1,341 Operating lease rental income1,104 16 — 1,120 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeGains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income268 268 Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — 145 145 
Other incomeOther income168 650 524 1,342 Other income125 110 1,300 1,535 
Segment other incomeSegment other income1,922 1,447 851 4,220 Segment other income1,735 673 1,407 3,815 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:Other segment items reflected in income statement above:Other segment items reflected in income statement above:
Depreciation and amortisationDepreciation and amortisation1,573 278 498 2,349 Depreciation and amortisation1,760 242 668 2,670 
Defined benefit scheme chargesDefined benefit scheme charges121 48 231 400 Defined benefit scheme charges97 28 122 247 
Other segment items:Other segment items:Other segment items:
Additions to fixed assetsAdditions to fixed assets2,092 208 1,078 3,378 Additions to fixed assets1,684 89 1,042 2,815 
Investments in joint ventures and associates at end of year
F-34

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
1NOTE 4: SEGMENTAL ANALYSISRestated, see page F-31. (continued)

RetailCommercial
Banking
OtherGroup
£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2019
Net interest income9,129 2,691 400 12,220 
Other income2,025 870 1,493 4,388 
Total income11,154 3,561 1,893 16,608 
Operating expenses(7,912)(1,818)(1,393)(11,123)
Impairment charge(1,038)(313)(11)(1,362)
Profit before tax2,204 1,430 489 4,123 
External income13,111 2,773 724 16,608 
Inter-segment (expense) income(1,957)788 1,169 — 
Segment income11,154 3,561 1,893 16,608 
Segment external assets351,301 89,630 140,437 581,368 
Segment external liabilities261,019 125,240 156,210 542,469 
Analysis of segment other income:
Fee and commission income:
Current accounts518 133 656 
Credit and debit card fees634 327 — 961 
Commercial banking fees— 166 — 166 
Private banking and asset management— — 38 38 
Factoring— 103 — 103 
Other fees and commissions68 219 152 439 
Fee and commission income1,220 948 195 2,363 
Fee and commission expense(571)(299)(157)(1,027)
Net fee and commission income649 649 38 1,336 
Operating lease rental income1,225 22 — 1,247 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— (5)201 196 
Other income151 204 1,254 1,609 
Segment other income2,025 870 1,493 4,388 
Other segment items reflected in income statement above:
Depreciation and amortisation1,712 315 575 2,602 
Defined benefit scheme charges108 43 94 245 
Other segment items:
Additions to fixed assets2,208 247 1,097 3,552 
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis between UK and non-UK activities is not provided.
The Group’s discontinued operations in 2018 were previously in its Insurance segment (see note 13).
F-34F-35

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

5NOTE 5: NET INTEREST INCOME
Weighted average
effective interest rate
Weighted average
effective interest rate
202020192018202020192018202120202019202120202019
%%£m£m%%£m£m
Interest income:Interest income:Interest income:
Loans and advances to customers2.76 3.21 3.23 13,358 15,281 15,049 
Loans and advances to banks0.20 0.57 0.76 114 269 462 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements0.11 0.20 0.57 70 114 269 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements2.55 2.76 3.21 12,334 13,358 15,281 
Debt securitiesDebt securities1.82 2.26 1.61 92 118 66 Debt securities1.57 1.82 2.26 74 92 118 
Interest income on financial assets held at amortised cost2.48 2.97 2.93 13,564 15,668 15,577 
Financial assets held at amortised costFinancial assets held at amortised cost2.27 2.48 2.97 12,478 13,564 15,668 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income1.12 1.64 1.98 302 430 639 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income1.69 1.12 1.64 442 302 430 
Total interest income1
Total interest income1
2.42 2.90 2.88 13,866 16,098 16,216 
Total interest income1
2.24 2.42 2.90 12,920 13,866 16,098 
Interest expense:Interest expense:Interest expense:
Deposits from banks, excluding liabilities under sale and repurchase transactions1.19 1.39 1.36 (82)(87)(81)
Customer deposits, excluding liabilities under sale and repurchase transactions0.40 0.65 0.60 (1,270)(2,054)(1,997)
Deposits from banksDeposits from banks1.34 1.19 1.39 (66)(82)(87)
Customer depositsCustomer deposits0.12 0.40 0.65 (386)(1,270)(2,054)
Repurchase agreementsRepurchase agreements0.10 0.36 1.08 (22)(117)(301)
Debt securities in issue2
Debt securities in issue2
1.13 0.71 0.10 (761)(476)(66)
Debt securities in issue2
1.37 1.13 0.71 (746)(761)(476)
Lease liabilitiesLease liabilities2.01 2.36 2.41 (30)(39)(39)
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities7.19 9.89 10.18 (827)(921)(1,072)Subordinated liabilities7.01 7.19 9.89 (634)(827)(921)
Lease liabilities2.36 2.41 2.44 (39)(39)(1)
Liabilities under sale and repurchase agreements0.36 1.08 0.87 (117)(301)(245)
Total interest expense3
Total interest expense3
0.71 0.91 0.78 (3,096)(3,878)(3,462)
Total interest expense3
0.45 0.71 0.91 (1,884)(3,096)(3,878)
Net interest incomeNet interest income10,770 12,220 12,754 Net interest income11,036 10,770 12,220 
1Includes £10 million (2019:(2020: £10 million; 2019: £26 million; 2018: £31 million) of interest income on liabilities with negative interest rates and £38 million (2020: £42 million (2019:million; 2019: £39 million; 2018: £45 million) in respect of interest income on finance leases.
2The impact of the Group’s hedging arrangements is included on this line; excluding this impact the weighted average effective interest rate in respect of debt securities in issue would be 2.30 per cent (2020: 2.42 per cent (2019:cent; 2019: 2.25 per cent; 2018: 2.74 per cent).
3Includes £2 million (2020: £23 million (2019:million; 2019: £119 million; 2018: £10 million) of interest expense on assets with negative interest rates.
Included within interest income is £173 million (2020: £170 million (2019:million; 2019: £196 million; 2018: £222 million) in respect of credit-impaired financial assets. Net interest income also includes a credit of £727£584 million (2019:(2020: credit of £580£727 million; 2018:2019: credit of £691£580 million) transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve (see note 34)33).
6NOTE 6: NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
Fee and commission income:Fee and commission income:Fee and commission income:
Current accountsCurrent accounts610 656 647 Current accounts634 610 656 
Credit and debit card feesCredit and debit card fees748 961 974 Credit and debit card fees878 748 961 
Commercial banking feesCommercial banking fees169 166 271 Commercial banking fees284 169 166 
Private banking and asset managementPrivate banking and asset management1 38 94 Private banking and asset management 38 
FactoringFactoring76 103 83 Factoring76 76 103 
Other fees and commissionsOther fees and commissions320 439 428 Other fees and commissions323 320 439 
Total fee and commission incomeTotal fee and commission income1,924 2,363 2,497 Total fee and commission income2,195 1,924 2,363 
Fee and commission expenseFee and commission expense(909)(1,027)(1,228)Fee and commission expense(942)(909)(1,027)
Net fee and commission incomeNet fee and commission income1,015 1,336 1,269 Net fee and commission income1,253 1,015 1,336 
Fees and commissions which are an integral part of the effective interest rate form part of net interest income shown in note 5. Fees and commissions relating to instruments that are held at fair value through profit or loss are included within net trading income shown in note 7.
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group held on its balance sheet £76 million (31 December 2019: £1052020: £76 million) in respect of services provided to customers and £83£70 million (31 December 2019: £1202020: £83 million) in respect of amounts received from customers for services to be provided after the balance sheet date. Current unsatisfied performance obligations amount to £172£143 million (31 December 2019: £2502020: £172 million); the Group expects to receive substantially all of this revenue by 2023.2024.
F-35F-36

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
6NOTE 6: NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME (continued)
Income recognised during the year included £18£13 million (31 December 2019: £54(2020: £18 million) in respect of amounts included in the contract liability balance at the start of the year and £NaN (31 December 2019: £9 million)£nil (2020: £nil) in respect of amounts from performance obligations satisfied in previous years.
The most significant performance obligations undertaken by the Group are in respect of current accounts, the provision of other banking services for commercial customers and credit and debit card services.
In respect of current accounts, the Group receives fees for the provision of bank account and transaction services such as ATM services, fund transfers, overdraft facilities and other value-added offerings.
For commercial customers, alongside its provision of current accounts, the Group provides other corporate banking services including factoring and commitments to provide loan financing. Loan commitment fees are included in fees and commissions where the loan is not expected to be drawn down by the customer.
The Group receives interchange and merchant fees, together with fees for overseas use and cash advances, for provision of card services to cardholders and merchants.
7NOTE 7: NET TRADING INCOME
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
Foreign exchange translation gains (losses)Foreign exchange translation gains (losses)74 (203)132 Foreign exchange translation gains (losses)10 74 (203)
Gains on foreign exchange trading transactionsGains on foreign exchange trading transactions326 336 235 Gains on foreign exchange trading transactions329 326 336 
Total foreign exchangeTotal foreign exchange400 133 367 Total foreign exchange339 400 133 
Investment property losses (note 21)(20)(8)
Investment property lossesInvestment property losses (20)(8)
Securities and other gains (see below)Securities and other gains (see below)370 235 41 Securities and other gains (see below)46 370 235 
Net trading incomeNet trading income750 360 408 Net trading income385 750 360 
Securities and other gains comprise net gains (losses) arising on assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss as follows:
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Net income arising on assets and liabilities mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:Net income arising on assets and liabilities mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:Net income arising on assets and liabilities mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:
Financial instruments held for trading440 427 127 
Financial instruments held for trading1
Financial instruments held for trading1
94 440 427 
Other financial instruments mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:Other financial instruments mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:Other financial instruments mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss:
Debt securities, loans and advancesDebt securities, loans and advances37 25 11 Debt securities, loans and advances6 37 25 
Equity sharesEquity shares9 (3)86 Equity shares11 (3)
486 449 224 111 486 449 
Net expense arising on assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or lossNet expense arising on assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss(116)(214)(183)Net expense arising on assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss(65)(116)(214)
Securities and other gainsSecurities and other gains370 235 41 Securities and other gains46 370 235 
1Includes hedge ineffectiveness in respect of fair value hedges (2021: gain of £195 million; 2020: gain of £546 million; 2019: gain of £153 million) and cash flow hedges (2021: loss of £58 million; 2020: gain of £259 million; 2019: gain of £131 million).
8NOTE 8: OTHER OPERATING INCOME
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
Operating lease rental incomeOperating lease rental income1,120 1,247 1,341 Operating lease rental income1,059 1,120 1,247 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (note 34)145 196 268 
Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (note 33)Gains less losses on disposal of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (note 33)(116)145 196 
Liability managementLiability management(216)(101)Liability management(39)(216)(101)
Share of results of joint ventures and associates0 
Intercompany recharges and otherIntercompany recharges and other1,001 1,350 929 Intercompany recharges and other1,095 1,001 1,350 
Total other operating incomeTotal other operating income2,050 2,692 2,543 Total other operating income1,999 2,050 2,692 
F-36F-37

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

9NOTE 9: OPERATING EXPENSES
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Staff costs:Staff costs:Staff costs:
SalariesSalaries2,382 2,370 2,379 Salaries2,260 2,382 2,370 
Performance-based compensationPerformance-based compensation106 340 485 Performance-based compensation282 106 340 
Social security costsSocial security costs271 308 330 Social security costs290 271 308 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 28)552 518 688 
Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 27)Pensions and other post-retirement benefit schemes (note 27)523 552 518 
Restructuring costsRestructuring costs161 89 247 Restructuring costs88 161 89 
Other staff costsOther staff costs143 360 444 Other staff costs249 143 360 
3,615 3,985 4,573 3,692 3,615 3,985 
Premises and equipment:Premises and equipment:Premises and equipment:
Rent and ratesRent and rates115 114 364 Rent and rates116 115 114 
Repairs and maintenanceRepairs and maintenance172 182 189 Repairs and maintenance161 172 182 
Other1
Other1
138 150 126 
Other1
(62)138 150 
425 446 679 215 425 446 
Other expenses:Other expenses:Other expenses:
Communications and data processingCommunications and data processing996 1,022 1,116 Communications and data processing1,154 996 1,022 
Advertising and promotionAdvertising and promotion184 173 192 Advertising and promotion161 184 173 
Professional feesProfessional fees128 144 230 Professional fees150 128 144 
Regulatory and legal provisions (note 29)Regulatory and legal provisions (note 29)1,177 414 2,190 
OtherOther760 561 673 Other880 760 561 
2,068 1,900 2,211 3,522 2,482 4,090 
Depreciation and amortisation:Depreciation and amortisation:Depreciation and amortisation:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 21)2,017 2,040 1,849 
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 20)653 562 500 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment2
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment2
1,823 2,017 2,040 
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 19)Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 19)954 653 562 
2,670 2,602 2,349 2,777 2,670 2,602 
Goodwill impairment (note 19)4 
Total operating expenses, excluding regulatory provisions8,782 8,933 9,812 
Regulatory provisions:
Payment protection insurance provision (note 30)85 1,795 1,395 
Other regulatory provisions (note 30)329 395 561 
414 2,190 1,956 
Goodwill impairment (note 18)Goodwill impairment (note 18) — 
Total operating expensesTotal operating expenses9,196 11,123 11,768 Total operating expenses10,206 9,196 11,123 
1Net of profits on disposal of operating lease assets of £249 million (2020: £127 million; 2019: £41 million).
2Comprising depreciation in respect of premises £121 million (2019: £41(2020: £124 million; 2018: £602019: £121 million), equipment £777 million (2020: £676 million; 2019: £710 million), operating lease assets £709 million (2020: £1,002 million; 2019: £1,006 million) and right-of-use assets £216 million (2020: £215 million; 2019: £203 million).
The average number of persons on a headcount basis employed by the Group during the year was as follows:
202020192018202120202019
UKUK67,11569,32171,017UK63,64967,11569,321
OverseasOverseas515762769Overseas512515762
TotalTotal67,63070,08371,786Total64,16167,63070,083
F-37F-38

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

10NOTE 10: AUDITORS’ REMUNERATION
Fees payable to the Bank’sBank's auditors1 are as follows:
During
202120202019
£m£m£m
Fees payable for the:
– audit of the Bank's current year Annual report4.7 4.5 4.2 
– audits of the Bank's subsidiaries9.5 8.9 8.6 
– total audit fees in respect of the statutory audit of Group entities2
14.2 13.4 12.8 
– services normally provided in connection with statutory and regulatory filings or engagements0.7 1.6 1.3 
Total audit fees3
14.9 15.0 14.1 
Other audit-related fees3
0.4 0.3 0.2 
All other fees3
0.5 0.9 0.3 
Total non-audit services4
0.9 1.2 0.5 
Total fees payable to the Bank’s auditors by the Group15.8 16.2 14.6 
1Deloitte LLP became the yearGroup's statutory auditor in 2021. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP was the auditors earnedstatutory auditor during 2020.
2As defined by the following fees:Financial Reporting Council (FRC).
202020192018
£m£m£m
Fees payable for the audit of the Bank’s current year annual report4.5 4.2 3.8 
Fees payable for other services:
Audit of the Bank’s subsidiaries pursuant to legislation8.9 8.6 10.2 
Other services supplied pursuant to legislation1.6 1.3 1.5 
Other services – audit-related fees0.3 0.2 
All other services0.9 0.3 0.1 
Total fees payable to the Bank’s auditors16.2 14.6 15.6 
3As defined by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC).
Audit4As defined by the SEC. Total non-audit services as defined by the FRC include all fees payableother than audit fees in respect of the statutory audit of Group entitiesentities. These fees totalled £13.4£1.6 million (2019: £12.8in 2021 (2020: £2.8 million; 2018: £14.02019: £1.8 million) and non-audit fees, as defined by the Financial Reporting Council's Ethical Guidance, totalled £2.8 million (2019: £1.8 million; 2018: £1.6 million).
The following types of services are included in the categories listed above:
Audit fees: This category includes fees in respect of the audit of the Group’s annual financial statements and other services in connection with regulatory filings. Other services supplied pursuant to legislation relate primarily to costs incurred in connection with client asset assurance and with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requirements associated with the audit of the financial statements of Lloyds Banking Group filed on Form 20-F.
Audit relatedOther audit-related fees: This category includes fees in respect of services for assurance and related services that are reasonably related to the performance of the audit or review of the financial statements, for example acting as reporting accountants in respect of debt prospectuses required by the listing rules.Listing Rules.
Other non-auditAll other fees: This category includes other assurance services not related to the performance of the audit or review of the financial statements, for example the review of controls operated by the Group on behalf of a third party. The auditors are not engaged to provide tax services.
It is the Group’s policy to use the auditors only on assignments in cases where their knowledge of the Group means that it is neither efficient nor cost effective to employ another firm of accountants.
Lloyds Banking Group has procedures that are designed to ensure auditor independence for Lloyds Banking Group plc and all of its subsidiaries, including prohibiting certain non-audit services. All audit and non-audit assignments must be pre-approved by the Lloyds Banking Group audit committeeAudit Committee (the Audit Committee) on an individual engagement basis; for certain types of non-audit engagements where the fee is ‘de minimis’ the Audit Committee has pre-approved all assignments subject to confirmation by management. On a quarterly basis, the Audit Committee receives and reviews a report detailing all pre-approved services and amounts paid to the auditors for such pre-approved services.
During the year the auditors1 also earned fees payable by entities outside the consolidated Lloyds Bank Group in respect of the following:
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
Audits of Group pension schemesAudits of Group pension schemes0.1 0.1 0.1 Audits of Group pension schemes0.3 0.1 0.1 
Audits of the unconsolidated Open Ended Investment Companies managed by the Group0 0.1 
Reviews of the financial position of corporate and other borrowersReviews of the financial position of corporate and other borrowers1.3 0.4 Reviews of the financial position of corporate and other borrowers 1.3 — 
1Deloitte LLP became the Group's statutory auditor in 2021. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP was the statutory auditor during 2020.
F-38F-39

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

11NOTE 11: IMPAIRMENT
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2020
Impact of transfers between stages(168)925 699 0 1,456 
Other changes in credit quality909 6 1,164 167 2,246 
Additions (repayments)77 173 (52)(30)168 
Methodology and model changes(31)170 26 0 165 
Other items0 0 25 0 25 
955 349 1,163 137 2,604 
Total impairment787 1,274 1,862 137 4,060 
In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks4 0 0 0 4 
Loans and advances to customers678 1,130 1,853 137 3,798 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings0 0 0 0 0 
Financial assets at amortised cost682 1,130 1,853 137 3,802 
Other assets0 0 0 0 0 
Impairment charge on drawn balances682 1,130 1,853 137 3,802 
Loan commitments and financial guarantees100 144 9 0 253 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income5 0 0 0 5 
Total impairment787 1,274 1,862 137 4,060 
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2021
Impact of transfers between stages74 (474)339  (61)
Other changes in credit quality(313)(307)252 (48)(416)
Additions and repayments(231)(379)(97)(87)(794)
Methodology and model changes(63)15 6  (42)
Other items2 4 (11) (5)
(605)(667)150 (135)(1,257)
Total impairment (credit) charge(531)(1,141)489 (135)(1,318)
In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements(4)   (4)
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements(436)(1,008)498 (135)(1,081)
Financial assets at amortised cost(440)(1,008)498 (135)(1,085)
Impairment (credit) charge on drawn balances(440)(1,008)498 (135)(1,085)
Loan commitments and financial guarantees(89)(133)(9) (231)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)   (2)
Total impairment (credit) charge(531)(1,141)489 (135)(1,318)
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2019
Year ended 31 December 2020Year ended 31 December 2020
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(17)89 532 604 Impact of transfers between stages(168)925 699 — 1,456 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality939 (106)841 Other changes in credit quality909 1,164 167 2,246 
Additions (repayments)93 (41)(60)(87)(95)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments77 173 (52)(30)168 
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes33 (27)14 Methodology and model changes(31)170 26 — 165 
Other itemsOther items(5)(2)Other items— — 25 — 25 
127 (66)890 (193)758 955 349 1,163 137 2,604 
Total impairment110 23 1,422 (193)1,362 
Total impairment chargeTotal impairment charge787 1,274 1,862 137 4,060 
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers141 10 1,382 (193)1,340 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings(1)41 40 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements678 1,130 1,853 137 3,798 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost140 10 1,423 (193)1,380 Financial assets at amortised cost682 1,130 1,853 137 3,802 
Other assets
Impairment charge on drawn balancesImpairment charge on drawn balances140 10 1,423 (193)1,380 Impairment charge on drawn balances682 1,130 1,853 137 3,802 
Loan commitments and financial guaranteesLoan commitments and financial guarantees(29)13 (1)(17)Loan commitments and financial guarantees100 144 — 253 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(1)(1)Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — — 
Total impairment110 23 1,422 (193)1,362 
Total impairment chargeTotal impairment charge787 1,274 1,862 137 4,060 
F-39F-40

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
11NOTE 11: IMPAIRMENT (continued)
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Year ended 31 December 2018
Year ended 31 December 2019Year ended 31 December 2019
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(10)18 445 453 Impact of transfers between stages(17)89 532 — 604 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality(23)(14)545 69 577 Other changes in credit quality939 (106)841 
Additions (repayments)19 (84)27 (69)(107)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments93 (41)(60)(87)(95)
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes(71)(21)72 (20)Methodology and model changes33 (27)— 14 
Other itemsOther items(13)36 23 Other items(5)— — (2)
(88)(119)680 473 127 (66)890 (193)758 
Total impairment(98)(101)1,125 926 
Total impairment charge (credit)Total impairment charge (credit)110 23 1,422 (193)1,362 
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers(65)(53)1,129 1,011 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — — — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements141 10 1,382 (193)1,340 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings(1)— 41 — 40 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost(64)(53)1,129 1,012 Financial assets at amortised cost140 10 1,423 (193)1,380 
Impairment charge on drawn balances(64)(53)1,129 1,012 
Impairment charge (credit) on drawn balancesImpairment charge (credit) on drawn balances140 10 1,423 (193)1,380 
Loan commitments and financial guaranteesLoan commitments and financial guarantees(20)(48)(4)(72)Loan commitments and financial guarantees(29)13 (1)— (17)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(14)(14)Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(1)— — — (1)
Total impairment(98)(101)1,125 926 
Total impairment charge (credit)Total impairment charge (credit)110 23 1,422 (193)1,362 
The impairment charge includes a release of £77 million (2020: charge of £41 million (2019:million; 2019: charge of £134 million; 2018: £29 million) in respect of residual value impairment and voluntary terminations within the Group’s UK motor finance business.
The Group’s impairment charge comprises the following items:
TransfersImpact of transfers between stages
The net impact on the impairment charge of transfers between stages.
Other changes in credit quality
Changes in loss allowance as a result of movements in risk parameters that reflect changes in customer quality, but which have not resulted in a transfer to a different stage. This also contains the impact on the impairment charge as a result of write-offs and recoveries, where the related loss allowances are reassessed to reflect ultimate realisable or recoverable value.
Additions (repayments)and repayments
Expected loss allowances are recognised on origination of new loans or further drawdowns of existing facilities. Repayments relate to the reduction of loss allowances as a result ofresulting from the repayments of outstanding balances.balances that have been provided against.
Methodology and model changes
Increase or decrease in impairment charge as a result of adjustments to the models used for expected credit loss calculations; either as changes to the model inputs or to the underlying assumptions, as well as the impact of changing the models used.
Movements in the Group's impairment allowances are shown in note 16.
F-40

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020

12 TAX EXPENSE
(a)Analysis of tax credit (expense) for the year
202020192018
£m£m£m
UK corporation tax:
Current tax on profit for the year(423)(1,279)(1,108)
Adjustments in respect of prior years336 98 (10)
(87)(1,181)(1,118)
Foreign tax:
Current tax on profit for the year(18)(58)(24)
Adjustments in respect of prior years24 
6 (54)(24)
Current tax expense(81)(1,235)(1,142)
Deferred tax:
Current year508 (110)(234)
Adjustments in respect of prior years(290)58 (1)
Deferred tax credit (expense)218 (52)(235)
Tax credit (expense)137 (1,287)(1,377)
(b)Factors affecting the tax credit (expense) for the year
The UK corporation tax rate for the year was 19.0 per cent (2019: 19.0 per cent; 2018: 19.0 per cent). An explanation of the relationship between tax credit (expense) and accounting profit is set out below:
202020192018
£m£m£m
Profit before tax from continuing operations1,329 4,123 4,280 
UK corporation tax thereon(253)(783)(813)
Impact of surcharge on banking profits(122)(377)(388)
Non-deductible costs: conduct charges(24)(283)(189)
Non-deductible costs: bank levy(30)
Other non-deductible costs(62)(77)(74)
Non-taxable income37 36 25 
Tax relief on coupons on other equity instruments79 53 52 
Tax-exempt gains on disposals0 25 11 
Tax losses where no deferred tax recognised(3)(7)(9)
Remeasurement of deferred tax due to rate changes435 (25)18 
Differences in overseas tax rates10 (9)
Adjustments in respect of prior years70 160 (11)
Tax credit (expense) on profit from continuing operations137 (1,287)(1,377)
In 2020, the Group submitted claims to HMRC to accelerate tax deductions in respect of certain capitalised software enhancement costs incurred in 2018 and 2019. The Group has recognised a net prior year tax impact of £NaN in respect of these claims, being a current tax credit of £215 million in respect of the reduced cash tax liability for those years, a deferred tax charge of £261 million in respect of the future amortisation of those costs, plus a deferred tax credit of £46 million in respect of tax losses carried forward. No other items included in the net prior year tax adjustments credit of £70 million were of individual significance.


15.
F-41

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

13 DISCONTINUED OPERATIONSNOTE 12: TAX EXPENSE
(A)Analysis of tax (expense) credit for the year
202120202019
£m£m£m
UK corporation tax:
Current tax on profit for the year(1,349)(423)(1,279)
Adjustments in respect of prior years83 336 98 
(1,266)(87)(1,181)
Foreign tax:
Current tax on profit for the year(21)(18)(58)
Adjustments in respect of prior years22 24 
1 (54)
Current tax expense(1,265)(81)(1,235)
Deferred tax:
Current year851 508 (110)
Adjustments in respect of prior years(169)(290)58 
Deferred tax (expense) credit682 218 (52)
Tax (expense) credit(583)137 (1,287)
(B)Factors affecting the tax (expense) credit for the year
The Group completed the sale of the Scottish Widows Group to its ultimate holding company, Lloyds Banking Group plc, in May 2018. Scottish Widows represented the entirety of the Group’s insurance business and consequently these operations were classified as discontinued and the profit afterUK corporation tax from these activities reported as a single line on the Group’s income statement.
In order to fairly reflect the results and financial position of the Group’s continuing operations and its discontinued operations, transactions that the continuing operations had with the discontinued operations were reported on the relevant line in the Group’s income statement, with the matching transaction similarly reported in the discontinued operations income statement. All such transactions fully eliminated within the Group’s statutory consolidation and there was no net impact on profit before tax.
The results of the discontinued operations in 2018 were as follows:
2018
£ million
Interest and similar income14 
Interest and similar expense(3)
Net interest income11 
Fee and commission income106 
Fee and commission expense(180)
Net fee and commission income(74)
Net trading income (see (a) below)(790)
Insurance premium income (see (b) below)2,714 
Other operating income205 
Other income2,055 
Total income2,066 
Insurance claims (see (c) below)(1,363)
Total income, net of insurance claims703 
Operating expenses(333)
Profit on disposal of the discontinued operations1,010 
Profit before tax1,380 
Taxation(66)
Profit after tax from discontinued operations1,314 
(a)Net trading income
2018
£m
Foreign exchange translation gains31 
Gains on foreign exchange trading transactions
Total foreign exchange31 
Investment property gains45 
Securities and other gains (see below)(866)
Net trading income(790)
Securities and other gains comprised net gains arising on assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss and for trading as follows:
2018
£m
Net income arising on assets designated at fair value through profit or loss:
Debt securities, loans and advances(426)
Equity shares(535)
Total net gains arising on assets designated at fair value through profit or loss(961)
Net gains on financial instruments held for trading95 
Securities and other gains(866)
F-42

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
rate for the year ended 31 December 2020was 19.0 per cent (2020: 19.0 per cent; 2019: 19.0 per cent). An explanation of the relationship between tax (expense) credit and accounting profit is set out below:
13 DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS (continued)
(b)Insurance premium income
2018
£m
Life insurance
Gross premiums:
Life and pensions2,198 
Annuities366 
2,564 
Ceded reinsurance premiums(73)
Net earned premiums2,491 
Non-life insurance
Net earned premiums223 
Total net earned premiums2,714 
(c)Insurance claims
2018
Insurance claims comprise:£m
Life insurance and participating investment contracts
Claims and surrenders(2,788)
Change in insurance and participating investment contracts1,533 
Change in non-participating investment contracts(73)
(1,328)
Reinsurers’ share86 
(1,242)
Change in unallocated surplus14 
Total life insurance and participating investment contracts(1,228)
Non-life insurance
Total non-life insurance claims, net of reinsurance(135)
Total insurance claims(1,363)
Life insurance and participating investment contracts gross claims and surrenders can also be analysed as follows:
Deaths(267)
Maturities(393)
Surrenders(1,734)
Annuities(336)
Other(58)
Total life insurance gross claims and surrenders(2,788)
202120202019
£m£m£m
Profit before tax5,785 1,329 4,123 
UK corporation tax thereon(1,099)(253)(783)
Impact of surcharge on banking profits(415)(122)(377)
Non-deductible costs: conduct charges(167)(24)(283)
Non-deductible costs: bank levy(19)(30)— 
Other non-deductible costs(59)(62)(77)
Non-taxable income22 37 36 
Tax relief on coupons on other equity instruments65 79 53 
Tax-exempt gains on disposals2 — 25 
Tax losses where no deferred tax recognised (3)(7)
Remeasurement of deferred tax due to rate changes1,168 435 (25)
Differences in overseas tax rates(17)10 (9)
Adjustments in respect of prior years(64)70 160 
Tax (expense) credit(583)137 (1,287)
The tax expense in 2021 included the impact of non-deductible conduct charges which were significantly greater than in 2020, reflecting the discontinued operations onGroup's best estimate of tax-deductibility of provisions made in the Group’s cash flow statements was as follows:
2018
£m
Net cash used in operating activities(1,715)
Net cash from investing activities60 
Net cash used in financing activities(682)
Change in cash and cash equivalents(2,337)
F-43

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020year.

14NOTE 13: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Trading assets0 290 0 290 
Other financial assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss1,674 1,994 1,724 413 
Total1,674 2,284 1,724 703 
These comprise financial assets are comprisedmandatorily at fair value through profit or loss as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
Trading
assets
Other
financial
assets
mandatorily
at fair value
through
profit or loss
Trading
assets
Other
financial
assets
mandatorily
at fair value
through
profit or loss
Trading
assets
Other
financial
assets
mandatorily
at fair value
through
profit or loss
Trading
assets
Other
financial
assets
mandatorily
at fair value
through
profit or loss
£m£m£m£m
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to customers0 1,511 1,782 0 517 362 Loans and advances to customers1,559 1,511 1,121 517 
Debt securities:
Government securities0 0 290 0 0 290 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities0 0 47 0 1,203 47 Corporate and other debt securities — 3,404 1,203 
0 0 290 47 0 1,203 290 47 
Equity sharesEquity shares0 163 165 0 4 Equity shares239 163 4 
TotalTotal0 1,674 290 1,994 0 1,724 290 413 Total1,798 1,674 4,529 1,724 
At 31 December 20202021 £1,500 million (2020: £1,099 million (2019: £1,943 million) of trading and other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss of the Group and £1,600£3,116 million (2019: £665(2020: £1,600 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
For amounts included above which are subject to repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements see note 45.44.
F-44F-42

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments are set out in the following table:
2020201920212020
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading and otherTrading and otherTrading and other
Exchange rate contracts:Exchange rate contracts:Exchange rate contracts:
Spot, forwards and futuresSpot, forwards and futures15,055 360 124 11,066 272 142 Spot, forwards and futures12,243 144 156 15,055 360 124 
Currency swapsCurrency swaps147,303 1,314 1,650 156,224 1,184 2,492 Currency swaps155,190 693 595 147,303 1,314 1,650 
Options purchasedOptions purchased12 0 0 681 Options purchased5   12 — — 
Options writtenOptions written12 0 0 681 Options written5   12 — — 
162,382 1,674 1,774 168,652 1,465 2,643 167,443 837 751 162,382 1,674 1,774 
Interest rate contracts:Interest rate contracts:Interest rate contracts:
Interest rate swapsInterest rate swaps1,312,974 5,872 5,421 1,822,407 5,779 5,685 Interest rate swaps931,834 4,525 3,300 1,312,974 5,872 5,421 
Forward rate agreementsForward rate agreements81,305 0 3 30,192 Forward rate agreements21   81,305 — 
Options purchasedOptions purchased3,745 55 0 4,124 77 Options purchased2,128 19  3,745 55 — 
Options writtenOptions written3,064 0 62 3,682 78 Options written1,229  10 3,064 — 62 
1,401,088 5,927 5,486 1,860,405 5,857 5,765 935,212 4,544 3,310 1,401,088 5,927 5,486 
Credit derivativesCredit derivatives5,362 65 120 7,546 39 99 Credit derivatives4,390 64 101 5,362 65 120 
Equity and other contractsEquity and other contracts50 1 258 338 16 295 Equity and other contracts44 11 166 50 258 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - trading and otherTotal derivative assets/liabilities - trading and other1,568,882 7,667 7,638 2,036,941 7,377 8,802 Total derivative assets/liabilities - trading and other1,107,089 5,456 4,328 1,568,882 7,667 7,638 
HedgingHedgingHedging
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
Interest rate and other swapsInterest rate and other swaps147,724 41 307 185,958 336 255 
Currency swapsCurrency swaps36 11 0 34 Currency swaps34 7  36 11 — 
Interest rate swaps185,958 336 255 160,942 696 229 
185,994 347 255 160,976 704 229 147,758 48 307 185,994 347 255 
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:
Interest rate swapsInterest rate swaps316,776 290 262 417,718 343 736 Interest rate swaps97,942   316,776 290 262 
Currency swapsCurrency swaps4,030 37 73 7,593 70 64 Currency swaps571 7 8 4,030 37 73 
320,806 327 335 425,311 413 800 98,513 7 8 320,806 327 335 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - hedgingTotal derivative assets/liabilities - hedging506,800 674 590 586,287 1,117 1,029 Total derivative assets/liabilities - hedging246,271 55 315 506,800 674 590 
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilitiesTotal recognised derivative assets/liabilities2,075,682 8,341 8,228 2,623,228 8,494 9,831 Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities1,353,360 5,511 4,643 2,075,682 8,341 8,228 
The notional amount of the contract does not represent the Group’s exposure to credit risk, which is limited to the current cost of replacing contracts with a positive value to the Group should the counterparty default. To reduce credit risk the Group uses a variety of credit enhancement techniques such as netting and collateralisation, where security is provided against the exposure; a large proportion of the Group's derivatives are held through exchanges such as London Clearing House and are collateralised through those exchanges. Further details are provided in note 4544 Credit risk.
F-45

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
15 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
The Group holds derivatives as part of the following strategies:
Customer driven, where derivatives are held as part of the provision of risk management products to Group customers;customers
To manage and hedge the Group’s interest rate and foreign exchange risk arising from normal banking business. The hedge accounting strategy adopted by the Group is to utilise a combination of fair value and cash flow hedge approaches as described in note 45.44
The principal derivatives used by the Group are as follows:
Interest rate related contracts include interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements and options. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed and floating interest payments, based upon interest rates defined in the contract, without the exchange of the underlying principal amounts. Forward rate agreements are contracts for the payment of the difference between a specified rate of interest and a reference rate, applied to a notional principal amount at a specific date in the future. An interest rate option gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to fix the rate of interest on a future loan or deposit, for a specified period and commencing on a specified future date.date
Exchange rate related contracts include forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and options. A forward foreign exchange contract is an agreement to buy or sell a specified amount of foreign currency on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involve the exchange of interest payment obligations denominated in different currencies; the exchange of principal can be notional or actual. A currency option gives the buyer, on payment of a premium, the right, but not the obligation, to sell specified amounts of currency at agreed rates of exchange on or before a specified future date.date
Credit derivatives, principally credit default swaps, are used by the Group as part of its trading activity and to manage its own exposure to credit risk. A credit default swap is a swap in which one counterparty receives a premium at pre-set intervals in consideration for guaranteeing to make a specific payment should a negative credit event take place.place
F-43

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Equity derivatives are also used by the Group as part of its equity-based retail product activity to eliminate the Group’s exposure to fluctuations in various international stock exchange indices. Index-linked equity options are purchased which give the Group the right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell a specified amount of equities, or basket of equities, in the form of published indices on or before a specified future date.date
Details of the Group’s hedging instruments are set out below:
MaturityMaturity
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
The Group - At 31 December 2020£m
The Group
At 31 December 2021
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Cross currency swapCross currency swapCross currency swap
NotionalNotional0 0 0 0 36 36 Notional    34 34 
Average fixed interest rateAverage fixed interest rate0 0 0 0 1.28%Average fixed interest rate    1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rateAverage EUR/GBP exchange rate0 0 0 0 1.38 Average EUR/GBP exchange rate    1.38 
Interest rate swapInterest rate swapInterest rate swap
NotionalNotional6,032 6,031 37,531 116,487 19,877 185,958 Notional283 1,684 15,631 105,666 24,460 147,724 
Average fixed interest rateAverage fixed interest rate2.01%1.69%1.49%1.23%2.07%Average fixed interest rate2.21%2.13%0.94%0.62%1.87%
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Currency swapCurrency swapCurrency swap
NotionalNotional28 102 408 941 2,551 4,030 Notional31 117 325 98  571 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rateAverage EUR/GBP exchange rate1.14 1.16 1.15 1.13  
Average USD/GBP exchange rateAverage USD/GBP exchange rate1.30 1.31 1.30 1.32 1.32 Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.36 1.35 1.37 1.34 1.34 
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Interest rate swapInterest rate swapInterest rate swap
NotionalNotional5,026 11,449 41,348 164,893 94,060 316,776 Notional1,000 500 9,542 51,186 35,714 97,942 
Average fixed interest rateAverage fixed interest rate1.09%1.05%1.18%1.57%2.36%Average fixed interest rate0.00%0.17%0.56%0.88%0.67%
Maturity
The Group
At 31 December 2020
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional— — — — 36 36 
Average fixed interest rate— — — — 1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate— — — — 1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional6,032 6,031 37,531 116,487 19,877 185,958 
Average fixed interest rate2.01%1.69%1.49%1.23%2.07%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional28 102 408 941 2,551 4,030 
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.30 1.31 1.30 1.32 1.32 
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional5,026 11,449 41,348 164,893 94,060 316,776 
Average fixed interest rate1.09%1.05%1.18%1.57%2.36%
F-46F-44

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Maturity
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
The Group - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional34 34 
Average fixed interest rate1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional331 9,305 37,948 91,535 21,823 160,942 
Average fixed interest rate2.58%1.74%1.22%1.78%2.72%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional364 390 1,766 5,073 7,593 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate1.21 1.10 
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.33 1.36 1.30 1.30 
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional9,395 23,424 57,950 205,603 121,346 417,718 
Average fixed interest rate1.06%1.23%1.29%1.48%2.43%
The carrying amounts of the Group’s hedging instruments are as follows:
Carrying amount of the hedging instrumentCarrying amount of the hedging instrument
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
The Group - At 31 December 2020£m
The Group
At 31 December 2021
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Currency swapsCurrency swaps36 11 0 1 Currency swaps34 7  (2)
Interest rate swapsInterest rate swaps185,958 336 255 (88)Interest rate swaps147,724 41 307 1,887 
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Currency swapsCurrency swaps4,030 37 73 (64)Currency swaps571 7 8 (26)
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Interest rate swapsInterest rate swaps316,776 290 262 527 Interest rate swaps97,942   (2,444)
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
The Group
At 31 December 2020
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps36 11 — 
Interest rate swaps185,958 336 255 (88)
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps4,030 37 73 (64)
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps316,776 290 262 527 
All amounts are held within derivative financial instruments.
F-47F-45

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
The Group - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps34 
Interest rate swaps160,942 696 229 351 
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps7,593 70 64 (141)
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps417,718 343 736 920 
All amounts are held within Derivative financial instruments.
The Group’s hedged items are as follows:
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedge reserveCarrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedging reserve
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilities
The Group - At 31 December 2020£m£m£m£m
The Group
At 31 December 2021
The Group
At 31 December 2021
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilitiesChange in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgages1
Fixed rate mortgages1
125,183 0 661 0 355 
Fixed rate mortgages1
88,791  (872) (2,081)
Fixed rate issuance2
Fixed rate issuance2
0 37,323 0 1,357 (179)
Fixed rate issuance2
 33,128  411 1,149 
Fixed rate borrowings3
Fixed rate borrowings3
0 1,404 0 304 (184)
Fixed rate borrowings3
     
Fixed rate bonds4
Fixed rate bonds4
24,111 0 1,178 0 641 
Fixed rate bonds4
25,019  342  (758)
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuance2
Foreign currency issuance2
(8)(40)64 
Foreign currency issuance2
5 (19)17 
Customer deposits5
Customer deposits5
74 13 (41)
Customer deposits5
21   
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loans1
Customer loans1
(508)1,918 (2)
Customer loans1
1,842 (711)453 
Central bank balances6
Central bank balances6
(71)19 270 
Central bank balances6
588 (235)(109)
Customer deposits5
Customer deposits5
38 (233)97 
Customer deposits5
(89)32 (85)
F-48

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
15 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedge reserveCarrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedging reserve
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilities
The Group - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m
The Group
At 31 December 2020
The Group
At 31 December 2020
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilitiesChange in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgages1
Fixed rate mortgages1
83,818 154 (73)
Fixed rate mortgages1
125,183 — 661 — 355 
Fixed rate issuance2
Fixed rate issuance2
47,689 1,590 (326)
Fixed rate issuance2
— 37,323 — 1,357 (179)
Fixed rate borrowings3
Fixed rate borrowings3
1,272 136 (206)
Fixed rate borrowings3
— 1,404 — 304 (184)
Fixed rate bonds4
Fixed rate bonds4
21,354 660 405 
Fixed rate bonds4
24,111 — 1,178 — 641 
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuance2
Foreign currency issuance2
28 (20)90 
Foreign currency issuance2
(8)(40)64 
Customer deposits5
Customer deposits5
116 18 (48)
Customer deposits5
74 13 (41)
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loans1
Customer loans1
(657)1,226 531 
Customer loans1
(508)1,918 (2)
Central bank balances6
Central bank balances6
(220)85 163 
Central bank balances6
(71)19 270 
Customer deposits5
Customer deposits5
(1)(40)
Customer deposits5
38 (233)97 
1Included within loans and advances to customers.
2Included within debt securities in issue.
3Included within amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings.
4Included within financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
5Included within customer deposits.
6Included within cash and balances at central banks.
The accumulated amount of fair value hedge adjustments remaining in the balance sheet for hedged items that have ceased to be adjusted for hedging gains and losses is a liability of £360£548 million (fixed(relating to fixed rate issuanceissuances of £270 million and mortgages of £278 million) (2020: liability of £360 million relating to fixed rate bonds and mortgages £NaN) (2019: liability of £315 million (fixed rate issuance liability of £344 million, fixed rate bonds asset of £29 million and fixed rate mortgages of £NaN))issuances only).
F-49F-46

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Gains and losses arising from hedge accounting are summarised as follows:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
1
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
The Group - At 31 December 2020£m
The Group
At 31 December 2021
The Group
At 31 December 2021
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgagesFixed rate mortgages571 Fixed rate mortgages206 
Fixed rate issuanceFixed rate issuance(35)Fixed rate issuance(4)
Fixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowings1 Fixed rate borrowings 
Fixed rate bondsFixed rate bonds9 Fixed rate bonds(7)
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuanceForeign currency issuance(45)0 (6)(47)Interest expenseForeign currency issuance(27) (3)(18)Interest expense
Customer depositsCustomer deposits3 0 0 9 Interest expenseCustomer deposits28    Interest expense
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loansCustomer loans23 262 0 (633)Interest incomeCustomer loans(2,173)(42) (454)Interest income
Central bank balancesCentral bank balances28 (3)0 (95)Interest incomeCentral bank balances(633)(17) (134)Interest income
Customer depositsCustomer deposits(27)0 0 45 Interest expenseCustomer deposits83 1  25 Interest expense
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
1
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
The Group - At 31 December 2019£m
The Group
At 31 December 2020
The Group
At 31 December 2020
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgagesFixed rate mortgages186 Fixed rate mortgages571 
Fixed rate issuanceFixed rate issuance(28)Fixed rate issuance(35)
Fixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowings
Fixed rate bondsFixed rate bonds(11)Fixed rate bonds
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuanceForeign currency issuance(202)(101)(73)Interest expenseForeign currency issuance(45)— (6)(47)Interest expense
Customer depositsCustomer deposits(22)Interest expenseCustomer deposits— — Interest expense
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loansCustomer loans616 99 (367)Interest incomeCustomer loans23 262 — (633)Interest income
Central bank balancesCentral bank balances194 32 (52)Interest incomeCentral bank balances28 (3)— (95)Interest income
Customer depositsCustomer depositsInterest expenseCustomer deposits(27)— — 45 Interest expense
1Comprising the change in fair value of the hedging derivatives (a loss of £2,138 million; 2020: gain of £709 million) and the amounts reclassified from reserves to the income statement (negative £584 million; 2020: negative £727 million).
2Hedge ineffectiveness is included in the income statement within net trading income.
There was a gain of £6£3 million (2019:(2020: gain of £101£6 million) reclassified from the cash flow hedging reserve for which hedge accounting had previously been used but for which the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur.
At 31 December 2020 £7,3932021 £4,861 million of total recognised derivative assets of the Group and £7,064£4,031 million of total recognised derivative liabilities of the Group (2019: £7,569(2020: £7,393 million of assets and £9,213£7,064 million of liabilities) had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
F-47

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
20212020
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading and other
Exchange rate contracts:
Spot, forwards and futures12,235 143 158 14,117 268 83 
Currency swaps158,448 965 625 168,605 1,683 1,960 
Options purchased5   12 — — 
Options written5   11 — — 
170,693 1,108 783 182,745 1,951 2,043 
Interest rate contracts:
Interest rate swaps1,160,782 5,710 4,897 1,762,919 10,287 8,562 
Forward rate agreements21   84,245 — 
Options purchased2,138 20  3,824 56 — 
Options written1,220  10 3,025 — 75 
1,164,161 5,730 4,907 1,854,013 10,343 8,641 
Credit derivatives4,439 23 102 5,407 59 99 
Equity and other contracts   — — 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - trading and other1,339,293 6,861 5,792 2,042,168 12,353 10,783 
Hedging
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
Interest rate and other swaps56,698 22 307 58,030 217 221 
Currency swaps34 7  36 11 — 
56,732 29 307 58,066 228 221 
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:
Interest rate swaps26,876   93,353 11 42 
Currency swaps415 8 3 616 26 
27,291 8 3 93,969 14 68 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - hedging84,023 37 310 152,035 242 289 
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities1,423,316 6,898 6,102 2,194,203 12,595 11,072 
F-48

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Details of the Bank’s hedging instruments are set out below:
Maturity
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional    34 34 
Average fixed interest rate    1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate    1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional189 1,656 5,271 25,525 24,057 56,698 
Average fixed interest rate1.67%2.09%1.71%1.65%1.83%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional24 33 301 57  415 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate  1.16 1.16  
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.36 1.35 1.37 1.33  
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional  8,571 10,115 8,190 26,876 
Average fixed interest rate  0.56%0.96%0.74%
Maturity
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional— — — — 36 36 
Average fixed interest rate— — — — 1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate— — — — 1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional2,421 489 3,386 31,239 20,495 58,030 
Average fixed interest rate1.94%1.67%2.13%1.82%1.89%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional25 130 296 165 — 616 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate— — 1.13 1.11 — 
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.30 1.30 1.31 1.34 — 
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional844 4,363 9,375 67,534 11,237 93,353 
Average fixed interest rate1.40%1.07%1.00%1.47%2.33%
F-49

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
The carrying amounts of the Bank’s hedging instruments are as follows:
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps34 7  (2)
Interest rate swaps56,698 22 307 (294)
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps415 8 3 (2)
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps26,876   (548)
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps36 11 — 
Interest rate swaps58,030 217 221 (226)
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps616 26 
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps93,353 11 42 130 
All amounts are held within derivative financial instruments.
F-50

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
15 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
20202019
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
Contract/
notional
amount
Fair value
assets
Fair value
liabilities
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading and other
Exchange rate contracts:
Spot, forwards and futures14,117 268 83 8,564 154 123 
Currency swaps168,605 1,683 1,960 183,675 1,401 2,748 
Options purchased12 0 0 682 
Options written11 0 0 682 
182,745 1,951 2,043 193,603 1,564 2,880 
Interest rate contracts:
Interest rate swaps1,762,919 10,287 8,562 2,370,877 11,714 10,776 
Forward rate agreements84,245 0 4 30,192 
Options purchased3,824 56 0 4,176 78 
Options written3,025 0 75 3,697 89 
1,854,013 10,343 8,641 2,408,942 11,793 10,867 
Credit derivatives5,407 59 99 4,618 59 182 
Equity and other contracts3 0 0 368 15 15 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - trading and other2,042,168 12,353 10,783 2,607,531 13,431 13,944 
Hedging
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges:
Currency swaps36 11 0 34 
Interest rate swaps58,030 217 221 66,833 153 213 
58,066 228 221 66,867 161 213 
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:
Interest rate swaps93,353 11 42 130,477 35 
Currency swaps616 3 26 1,101 37 19 
93,969 14 68 131,578 46 54 
Total derivative assets/liabilities - hedging152,035 242 289 198,445 207 267 
Total recognised derivative assets/liabilities2,194,203 12,595 11,072 2,805,976 13,638 14,211 
Details of the Bank’s hedging instruments are set out below:
Maturity
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
The Bank - At 31 December 2020£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional0 0 0 0 36 36 
Average fixed interest rate0 0 0 0 1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate0 0 0 0 1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional2,421 489 3,386 31,239 20,495 58,030 
Average fixed interest rate1.94%1.67%2.13%1.82%1.89%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional25 130 296 165 0 616 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate0 0 1.13 1.11 0 
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.30 1.30 1.31 1.34 0 
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional844 4,363 9,375 67,534 11,237 93,353 
Average fixed interest rate1.40%1.07%1.00%1.47%2.33%
F-51

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
15 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Maturity
Up to 1 month1-3 months3-12 months1-5 yearsOver 5 yearsTotal
The Bank - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Cross currency swap
Notional34 34 
Average fixed interest rate1.28%
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate1.38 
Interest rate swap
Notional331 1,445 8,378 34,930 21,749 66,833 
Average fixed interest rate2.58%2.39%1.49%1.82%2.24%
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swap
Notional53 210 539 299 1,101 
Average EUR/GBP exchange rate1.15 1.11 
Average USD/GBP exchange rate1.37 1.38 1.36 1.36 
Interest rate
Interest rate swap
Notional3,473 6,771 22,444 66,892 30,897 130,477 
Average fixed interest rate1.10%1.58%1.57%1.41%1.93%
The carrying amounts of the Bank’s hedging instruments are as follows:
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
The Bank - At 31 December 2020£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps36 11 0 1 
Interest rate swaps58,030 217 221 (226)
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps616 3 26 4 
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps93,353 11 42 130 
Carrying amount of the hedging instrument
Contract/
notional
amount
AssetsLiabilitiesChanges in fair
value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness
The Bank - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedges
Interest rate
Currency swaps34 
Interest rate swaps66,833 153 213 118 
Cash flow hedges
Foreign exchange
Currency swaps1,101 37 19 (31)
Interest rate
Interest rate swaps130,477 35 777 
All amounts are held within Derivative financial instruments.
F-52

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
The Bank’s hedged items are as follows:
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedge reserveCarrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedging reserve
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilities
The Bank - At 31 December 2020£m£m£m£m
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilitiesChange in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
Fixed rate issuance1
0 32,044 0 793 (243)
Fixed rate issuance1
 28,870  65 1,018 
Fixed rate borrowings2
Fixed rate borrowings2
0 1,404 0 304 (184)
Fixed rate borrowings2
     
Fixed rate bonds3
Fixed rate bonds3
23,239 0 1,158 0 625 
Fixed rate bonds3
24,358  344  (736)
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuance1
Foreign currency issuance1
(4)(49)16 
Foreign currency issuance1
2 (12)(2)
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loans4
Customer loans4
(119)1,486 281 
Customer loans4
510 (117)1,014 
Central bank balances5Central bank balances50 0 324 Central bank balances5  211 
Customer deposits6
Customer deposits6
15 (189)3 
Customer deposits6
(42)10 (67)
Carrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedge reserveCarrying amount of
the hedged item
Accumulated amount of
fair value adjustment on
the hedged item
Change in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Cash flow hedging reserve
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilities
The Bank - At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
AssetsLiabilitiesAssetsLiabilitiesChange in
fair value of
hedged item for
ineffectiveness
assessment
Continuing
hedges
Discontinued
hedges
£m£m£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate issuance1
Fixed rate issuance1
— 40,557 565 (357)
Fixed rate issuance1
— 32,044 — 793 (243)
Fixed rate borrowings2
Fixed rate borrowings2
1,272 136 (206)
Fixed rate borrowings2
— 1,404 — 304 (184)
Fixed rate bonds3
Fixed rate bonds3
20,632 655 400 
Fixed rate bonds3
23,239 — 1,158 — 625 
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuance1
Foreign currency issuance1
31 (38)
Foreign currency issuance1
(4)(49)16 
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loans4
Customer loans4
(344)1,037 881 
Customer loans4
(119)1,486 281 
Central bank balances5
Central bank balances5
(388)441 
Central bank balances5
— — 324 
Customer deposits6
Customer deposits6
(1)(126)(58)
Customer deposits6
15 (189)
1Included within debt securities in issue.
2Included within amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings.
3Included within financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
4Included within loans and advances to customers.
5Included within cash and balances at central banks.
6Included within customer deposits.
The accumulated amount of fair value hedge adjustments remaining in the balance sheet for hedged items that have ceased to be adjusted for hedging gains and losses is an asset of £9£71 million (fixed rate issuance(2020: asset of £9 million,million) relating to fixed rate bonds and mortgages £NaN) (2019: asset of £54 million (fixed rate issuance asset of £25 million, fixed rate bonds asset of £29 million and fixed rate mortgages of £NaN)).issuances.
F-53F-51

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
15NOTE 14: DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Gains and losses arising from hedge accounting are summarised as follows:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
1
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
The Bank - At 31 December 2020£m
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
The Bank
At 31 December 2021
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgagesFixed rate mortgages0 Fixed rate mortgages 
Fixed rate issuanceFixed rate issuance(35)Fixed rate issuance(7)
Fixed rate bondsFixed rate bonds8 Fixed rate bonds(7)
Fixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowings0 Fixed rate borrowings0
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuanceForeign currency issuance(1)0 (1)(4)Interest expenseForeign currency issuance18   21 Interest expense
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loansCustomer loans(166)(31)0 (324)Interest incomeCustomer loans(871)(26) (325)Interest income
Central bank balancesCentral bank balances(111)0 0 (60)Interest incomeCentral bank balances(113)  (113)Interest income
Customer depositsCustomer deposits8 4 0 34 Interest expenseCustomer deposits129 2  18 Interest expense
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
1
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Amounts reclassified from reserves
to income statement as:
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
The Bank - At 31 December 2019£m
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
The Bank
At 31 December 2020
Gain (loss)
recognised
in other
comprehensive
income
1
Hedge
ineffectiveness
recognised in the
income statement
2
Hedged cash
flows will no
longer occur
Hedged item
affected income
statement
Income
statement line
item that includes
reclassified amount
£m£m
Fair value hedgesFair value hedgesFair value hedges
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Fixed rate mortgagesFixed rate mortgages(15)Fixed rate mortgages— 
Fixed rate issuanceFixed rate issuance(38)Fixed rate issuance(35)
Fixed rate bondsFixed rate bondsFixed rate bonds
Fixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowingsFixed rate borrowings— 
Cash flow hedgesCash flow hedgesCash flow hedges
Foreign exchangeForeign exchangeForeign exchange
Foreign currency issuanceForeign currency issuance(67)(25)(11)Interest expenseForeign currency issuance(1)— (1)(4)Interest expense
Interest rateInterest rateInterest rate
Customer loansCustomer loans125 27 (363)Interest incomeCustomer loans(166)(31)— (324)Interest income
Central bank balancesCentral bank balances361 35 (84)Interest incomeCentral bank balances(111)— — (60)Interest income
Customer depositsCustomer deposits25 35 Interest expenseCustomer deposits— 34 Interest expense
1Comprising the change in fair value of the hedging derivatives (a loss of £438 million; 2020: gain of £85 million) and the amounts reclassified from reserves to the income statement (negative £399 million; 2020: negative £355 million).
2Hedge ineffectiveness is included in the income statement within net trading income.
ThereDuring 2021 there was ano gain or loss (2020: gain of £1 million (2019: gain of £25 million) reclassified from the cash flow hedging reserve for which hedge accounting had previously been used but for which the hedged future cash flows are no longer expected to occur.
At 31 December 2020 £11,7552021 £6,277 million of total recognised derivative assets of the Bank and £10,009£5,492 million of total recognised derivative liabilities of the Bank (2019: £4,256(2020: £11,755 million of assets and £5,101£10,009 million of liabilities) had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
F-54F-52

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST
Year ended 31 December 20202021
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit lossesGross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 1 January 20204,852 0 0 0 4,852 0 0 0 0 0 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20215,954    5,954 4    4 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(25)0 0 0 (25)0 0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments15    15      
Additions (repayments)1,127 0 0 0 1,127 0 0 0 0 0 
Charge to the income statement4 0 0 0 4 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality(3)   (3)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments1,505    1,505 (1)   (1)
Credit to the income statementCredit to the income statement(4)   (4)
At 31 December 20205,954 0 0 0 5,954 4 0 0 0 4 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20217,474    7,474      
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(4)0 0 0 (4)Allowance for impairment losses     
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount5,950 0 0 0 5,950 Net carrying amount7,474    7,474 
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2020429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
Loans and advances to customers
and reverse repurchase agreements
Loans and advances to customers
and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 2021415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
Exchange and other adjustments1
Exchange and other adjustments1
1,013 24 (198)(8)831 0 2 43 21 66 
Exchange and other adjustments1
(2,506)(31)(82)68 (2,551)(2)(5)5 121 119 
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 14,970 (4,954)(16)0 144 (141)(3)0 Transfers to Stage 118,662 (18,623)(39) 562 (551)(11) 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(28,516)29,128 (612)0 (217)267 (50)0 Transfers to Stage 2(11,995)12,709 (714) (48)155 (107) 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(1,615)(2,001)3,616 0 (9)(156)165 0 Transfers to Stage 3(872)(1,818)2,690  (13)(220)233  
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(25,161)22,173 2,988 0 (84)880 570 1,366 Impact of transfers between stages5,795 (7,732)1,937  (426)193 221 (12)
(166)850 682 1,366 75 (423)336 (12)
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality838 (33)1,183 167 2,155 Other changes in credit quality(239)(256)254 (48)(289)
Additions (repayments)9,989 578 (754)(1,156)8,657 37 143 (38)(30)112 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments10,181 (8,633)(994)(1,565)(1,011)(209)(344)(98)(87)(738)
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes(31)170 26 0 165 Methodology and model changes(63)15 6  (42)
Charge to the income statement678 1,130 1,853 137 3,798 
(Credit) charge to the income statement(Credit) charge to the income statement(436)(1,008)498 (135)(1,081)
Advances written offAdvances written off(1,490)(39)(1,529)(1,490)(39)(1,529)Advances written off(1,057)(37)(1,094)(1,057)(37)(1,094)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous yearsRecoveries of advances written off in previous years250 0 250 250 0 250 Recoveries of advances written off in previous years159  159 159  159 
Discount unwind(47)0 (47)
At 31 December 2020415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 909 1,112 1,573 210 3,804 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)Allowance for impairment losses(909)(1,112)(1,573)(210)(3,804)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 Net carrying amount428,169 33,772 4,833 10,767 477,541 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities
At 1 January 20205,325 0 1 0 5,326 0 0 1 0 1 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20215,137  1  5,138   1  1 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(17)0 0 0 (17)0 0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments(20)   (20)1    1 
Additions (repayments)(171)0 0 0 (171)0 0 0 0 0 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(6)6       
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(6)6       
At 31 December 20205,137 0 1 0 5,138 0 0 1 0 1 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments(557)3   (554)     
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement     
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20214,554 9 1  4,564 1  1  2 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses0 0 (1)0 (1)Allowance for impairment losses(1) (1) (2)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount5,137 0 0 0 5,137 Net carrying amount4,553 9   4,562 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings738 0 0 0 738 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021739    739 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses0 0 0 0 0 Allowance for impairment losses     
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount738 0 0 0 738 Net carrying amount739    739 
Total financial assets at amortised costTotal financial assets at amortised cost426,086 49,155 4,475 12,250 491,966 Total financial assets at amortised cost440,935 33,781 4,833 10,767 490,316 
1Exchange and other adjustments includes the impact of movements in exchange rates, discount unwind, derecognising assets as a result of modifications and adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.
During the year, the economic outlook deteriorated markedly asassets (POCI). Where a consequence of the COVID-19 pandemic. The Group's economic assumptions are outlined in note 3 and these have resulted in a significant increase in thePOCI asset’s expected credit loss (ECL)is less than its expected credit loss on purchase or origination, the increase in its carrying value is recognised within gross loans, rather than as a negative impairment allowance.
The total allowance for impairment losses includes £192£95 million (2019: £201(2020: £192 million) in respect of residual value impairment and voluntary terminations within the Group’s UK motor finance business.
Movements in UK retail mortgage balances were as follows:
F-55F-53

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK retail mortgages
At 1 January 2020257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 23 281 122 142 568 
Exchange and other adjustments1
0 0 0 (8)(8)0 0 0 21 21 
Transfers to Stage 12,418 (2,414)(4)0 17 (17)0 0 
Transfers to Stage 2(16,463)16,882 (419)0 (4)22 (18)0 
Transfers to Stage 3(199)(974)1,173 0 0 (35)35 0 
Impact of transfers between stages(14,244)13,494 750 0 (15)198 66 249 
(2)168 83 249 
Other changes in credit quality63 (26)(23)167 181 
Additions (repayments)8,619 (1,411)(375)(1,156)5,677 14 (15)(13)(30)(44)
Methodology and model changes6 60 24 0 90 
Charge to the income statement81 187 71 137 476 
Advances written off(37)(39)(76)(37)(39)(76)
Recoveries of advances written
off in previous years
15 0 15 15 0 15 
Discount unwind20 0 20 
At 31 December 2020251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 104 468 191 261 1,024 
Allowance for impairment losses(104)(468)(191)(261)(1,024)
Net carrying amount251,314 28,550 1,668 12,250 293,782 
Movements in Retail UK mortgage balances were as follows:
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Retail – UK mortgages
At 1 January 2021251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 104 468 191 261 1,024 
Exchange and other adjustments1
   68 68   18 121 139 
Transfers to Stage 110,109 (10,105)(4) 66 (66)  
Transfers to Stage 2(6,930)7,425 (495) (5)37 (32) 
Transfers to Stage 3(147)(942)1,089   (35)35  
Impact of transfers between stages3,032 (3,622)590  (58)84 48 74 
3 20 51 74 
Other changes in credit quality(14)(32)(30)(48)(124)
Additions and repayments19,179 (3,598)(490)(1,565)13,526 8 (52)(33)(87)(164)
Methodology and model changes(53)(10)6  (57)
Credit to the income statement(56)(74)(6)(135)(271)
Advances written off(28)(37)(65)(28)(37)(65)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years9  9 9  9 
At 31 December 2021273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 48 394 184 210 836 
Allowance for impairment losses(48)(394)(184)(210)(836)
Net carrying amount273,581 21,404 1,756 10,767 307,508 
1Exchange and other adjustments includes the impact of movements in exchange rates, discount unwind, derecognising assets as a result of modifications and adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.assets (POCI). Where a POCI asset’s expected credit loss is less than its expected credit loss on purchase or origination, the increase in its carrying value is recognised within gross loans, rather than as a negative impairment allowance.
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m
Undrawn balancesUndrawn balancesUndrawn balances
At 1 January 202091 77 5 0 173 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 2021191 221 14  426 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments0 0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments1 (2)  (1)
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 119 (19)0 0 Transfers to Stage 173 (73)  
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(10)10 0 0 Transfers to Stage 2(8)8   
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(1)(6)7 0 Transfers to Stage 3(1)(6)7  
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(10)90 10 90 Impact of transfers between stages(65)20 (4)(49)
(2)75 17 90 (1)(51)3 (49)
Other items charged to the income statement102 69 (8)0 163 
Charge to the income statement100 144 9 0 253 
At 31 December 2020191 221 14 0 426 
Other items credited to the income statementOther items credited to the income statement(88)(82)(12) (182)
Credit to the income statementCredit to the income statement(89)(133)(9) (231)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021103 86 5  194 
The Group's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks4 0 0 0 4 
Loans and advances to customers1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements     
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements909 1,112 1,573 210 3,804 
Debt securitiesDebt securities0 0 1 0 1 Debt securities1  1  2 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings0 0 0 0 0 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost1,351 2,125 1,969 261 5,706 Financial assets at amortised cost910 1,112 1,574 210 3,806 
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guaranteesProvisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees191 221 14 0 426 Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees103 86 5  194 
TotalTotal1,542 2,346 1,983 261 6,132 Total1,013 1,198 1,579 210 4,000 
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)0 0 0 0 0 Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)3    3 

F-56F-54

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Year ended 31 December 20192020
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit lossesGross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 1 January 20193,691 3,693 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20204,852 — — — 4,852 — — — — — 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(125)(125)(1)(1)Exchange and other adjustments(25)— — — (25)— — — — — 
Additions (repayments)1,286 (2)1,284 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments1,127 — — — 1,127 — — — — — 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement— — — 
At 31 December 20194,852 4,852 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20205,954 — — — 5,954 — — — 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(4)— — — (4)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount4,852 4,852 Net carrying amount5,950 — — — 5,950 
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2019420,968 25,308 5,397 15,391 467,064 518 992 1,432 78 3,020 
Loans and advances to customers
and reverse repurchase agreements
Loans and advances to customers
and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
Exchange and other adjustments1
Exchange and other adjustments1
(312)(44)26 283 (47)10 (9)28 283 312 
Exchange and other adjustments1
1,013 24 (198)(8)831 — (4)21 19 
Acquisition of portfolios3,694 3,694 
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 16,318 (6,286)(32)229 (222)(7)Transfers to Stage 14,970 (4,954)(16)— 144 (141)(3)— 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(13,052)13,484 (432)(53)92 (39)Transfers to Stage 2(28,516)29,128 (612)— (217)267 (50)— 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(1,539)(1,437)2,976 (15)(140)155 Transfers to Stage 3(1,615)(2,001)3,616 — (9)(156)165 — 
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(8,273)5,761 2,512 (175)353 420 598 Impact of transfers between stages(25,161)22,173 2,988 — (84)880 570 1,366 
(14)83 529 598 (166)850 682 1,366 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality31 905 (106)832 Other changes in credit quality838 (33)1,183 167 2,155 
Additions (repayments)13,690 (2,520)(857)(1,934)8,379 91 (48)(60)(87)(104)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments9,989 578 (754)(1,156)8,657 37 143 (38)(30)112 
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes33 (27)14 Methodology and model changes(31)170 26 — 165 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement141 10 1,382 (193)1,340 Charge to the income statement678 1,130 1,853 137 3,798 
Advances written offAdvances written off(1,827)(54)(1,881)(1,827)(54)(1,881)Advances written off(1,490)(39)(1,529)(1,490)(39)(1,529)
Recoveries of advances written
off in previous years
Recoveries of advances written
off in previous years
396 28 424 396 28 424 Recoveries of advances written off in previous years250 — 250 250 — 250 
Discount unwind(52)(52)
At 31 December 2019429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(669)(993)(1,359)(142)(3,163)Allowance for impairment losses(1,347)(2,125)(1,968)(261)(5,701)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount429,098 27,512 4,288 13,572 474,470 Net carrying amount414,261 49,155 4,475 12,250 480,141 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities
At 1 January 20195,095 5,097 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20205,325 — — 5,326 — — — 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(90)(1)(91)(1)(1)Exchange and other adjustments(17)— — — (17)— — — — — 
Additions (repayments)320 320 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments(171)— — — (171)— — — — — 
At 31 December 20195,325 5,326 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20205,137 — — 5,138 — — — 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(1)(1)Allowance for impairment losses— — (1)— (1)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount5,325 5,325 Net carrying amount5,137 — — — 5,137 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,854 43 1,897 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020738 — — — 738 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(43)(43)Allowance for impairment losses— — — — — 
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount1,854 1,854 Net carrying amount738 — — — 738 
Total financial assets at amortised costTotal financial assets at amortised cost441,129 27,512 4,288 13,572 486,501 Total financial assets at amortised cost426,086 49,155 4,475 12,250 491,966 
1Exchange and other adjustments includes the impact of movements in exchange rates, discount unwind, derecognising assets as a result of modifications and adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.assets (POCI). Where a POCI asset’s expected credit loss is less than its expected credit loss on purchase or origination, the increase in its carrying value is recognised within gross loans, rather than as a negative impairment allowance.
Movements in UK retail mortgage balances were as follows:
F-57F-55

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
UK retail mortgages
At 1 January 2019257,797 13,654 1,393 15,391 288,235 37 226 118 78 459 
Exchange and other adjustments1
(1)283 284 283 283 
Acquisition of portfolios3,694 3,694 
Transfers to Stage 13,060 (3,057)(3)17 (17)— 
Transfers to Stage 2(7,879)8,242 (363)(13)33 (20)
Transfers to Stage 3(427)(472)899 (5)(21)26 
Impact of transfers between stages(5,246)4,713 533 (15)104 39 128 
(16)99 45 128 
Other changes in credit quality10 (33)(106)(123)
Additions (repayments)799 (1,432)(416)(1,934)(2,983)(4)(20)(16)(87)(127)
Methodology and model changes(34)(10)(44)
Charge to the income statement(14)55 (14)(193)(166)
Advances written off(35)(54)(89)(35)(54)(89)
Recoveries of advances written
off in previous years
29 28 57 29 28 57 
Discount unwind24 24 
At 31 December 2019257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 23 281 122 142 568 
Allowance for impairment losses(23)(281)(122)(142)(568)
Net carrying amount257,020 16,654 1,384 13,572 288,630 
Movements in Retail UK mortgage balances were as follows:
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Retail – UK mortgages
At 1 January 2020257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 23 281 122 142 568 
Exchange and other adjustments1
— — — (8)(8)— — 20 21 41 
Transfers to Stage 12,418 (2,414)(4)— 17 (17)— — 
Transfers to Stage 2(16,463)16,882 (419)— (4)22 (18)— 
Transfers to Stage 3(199)(974)1,173 — — (35)35 — 
Impact of transfers between stages(14,244)13,494 750 — (15)198 66 249 
(2)168 83 249 
Other changes in credit quality63 (26)(23)167 181 
Additions and repayments8,619 (1,411)(375)(1,156)5,677 14 (15)(13)(30)(44)
Methodology and model changes60 24 — 90 
Charge to the income statement81 187 71 137 476 
Advances written off(37)(39)(76)(37)(39)(76)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous years15 — 15 15 — 15 
At 31 December 2020251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 104 468 191 261 1,024 
Allowance for impairment losses(104)(468)(191)(261)(1,024)
Net carrying amount251,314 28,550 1,668 12,250 293,782 
1Exchange and other adjustments includes the impact of movements in exchange rates, discount unwind, derecognising assets as a result of modifications and adjustments in respect of purchased or originated credit-impaired financial assets.assets (POCI). Where a POCI asset’s expected credit loss is less than its expected credit loss on purchase or origination, the increase in its carrying value is recognised within gross loans, rather than as a negative impairment allowance.
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses


Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal

Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m
Undrawn balancesUndrawn balancesUndrawn balances
At 1 January 2019121 63 190 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 202091 77 — 173 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(1)Exchange and other adjustments— — — — — 
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 119 (19)Transfers to Stage 119 (19)— — 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(4)Transfers to Stage 2(10)10 — — 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(1)(3)Transfers to Stage 3(1)(6)— 
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(17)24 (1)Impact of transfers between stages(10)90 10 90 
(3)(2)75 17 90 
Other items charged to the income statementOther items charged to the income statement(26)(4)(23)Other items charged to the income statement102 69 (8)— 163 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement(29)13 (1)(17)Charge to the income statement100 144 — 253 
At 31 December 201991 77 173 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020191 221 14 — 426 
The Group's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities— — — 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings43 43 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost669 993 1,403 142 3,207 Financial assets at amortised cost1,351 2,125 1,969 261 5,706 
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guaranteesProvisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees91 77 173 Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees191 221 14 — 426 
TotalTotal760 1,070 1,408 142 3,380 Total1,542 2,346 1,983 261 6,132 
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)— — — — — 
F-58F-56

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Year ended 31 December 20202021
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit lossesGross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 1 January 20204,453 0 0 4,453 0 0 0 0 
Loans and advances to banks and
reverse repurchase agreements
Loans and advances to banks and
reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20215,660   5,660 4   4 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(19)0 0 (19)0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments20   20     
Additions (repayments)1,226 0 0 1,226 0 0 0 0 
Charge to the income statement4 0 0 4 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality    (3)  (3)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments1,607   1,607 (1)  (1)
Credit to the income statementCredit to the income statement(4)  (4)
At 31 December 20205,660 0 0 5,660 4 0 0 4 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20217,287   7,287     
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(4)0 0 (4)Allowance for impairment losses    
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount5,656 0 0 5,656 Net carrying amount7,287   7,287 
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2020165,676 10,681 2,385 178,742 238 435 500 1,173 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 2021156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments40 (1)(220)(181)0 0 23 23 Exchange and other adjustments(111)(12)(45)(168)(1) (10)(11)
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 11,974 (1,967)(7)0 73 (72)(1)0 Transfers to Stage 18,555 (8,529)(26) 273 (267)(6) 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(11,777)12,089 (312)0 (49)66 (17)0 Transfers to Stage 2(4,514)4,834 (320) (14)61 (47) 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(955)(900)1,855 0 (10)(59)69 0 Transfers to Stage 3(416)(651)1,067  (7)(89)96  
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(10,758)9,222 1,536 0 (49)340 311 602 Impact of transfers between stages3,625 (4,346)721  (224)43 62 (119)
(35)275 362 602 28 (252)105 (119)
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality382 (43)479 818 Other changes in credit quality(107)(125)59 (173)
Additions (repayments)1,231 1,592 (212)2,611 35 137 (19)153 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments(9,881)(5,052)(403)(15,336)(88)(208)(22)(318)
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes(31)170 26 165 Methodology and model changes(63)15 6 (42)
Charge to the income statement351 539 848 1,738 
(Credit) charge to the income statement(Credit) charge to the income statement(230)(570)148 (652)
Advances written offAdvances written off(708)(708)(708)(708)Advances written off(490)(490)(490)(490)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
86 86 86 86 Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
48 48 48 48 
Discount unwind(31)(31)
At 31 December 2020156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021149,822 12,084 2,698 164,604 358 404 414 1,176 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(589)(974)(718)(2,281)Allowance for impairment losses(358)(404)(414)(1,176)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount155,600 20,520 2,149 178,269 Net carrying amount149,464 11,680 2,284 163,428 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities
At 1 January 20205,241 0 0 5,241 0 0 0 0 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 20214,316   4,316 1   1 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(16)0 0 (16)0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments12   12 (1)  (1)
Additions (repayments)(909)0 0 (909)1 0 0 1 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments(572)  (572)    
At 31 December 20204,316 0 0 4,316 1 0 0 1 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20213,756   3,756     
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(1)0 0 (1)Allowance for impairment losses    
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount4,315 0 0 4,315 Net carrying amount3,756   3,756 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings128,791 0 7 128,798 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021108,445   108,445 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(20)0 (7)(27)Allowance for impairment losses(21)  (21)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount128,771 0 0 128,771 Net carrying amount108,424   108,424 
Total financial assets at amortised costTotal financial assets at amortised cost294,342 20,520 2,149 317,011 Total financial assets at amortised cost268,931 11,680 2,284 282,895 
F-59F-57

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m
Undrawn balancesUndrawn balancesUndrawn balances
At 1 January 202044 42 4 90 
At 1 January 2021At 1 January 2021102 135 8 245 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments0 0 0 0 Exchange and other adjustments 3  3 
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 19 (9)0 0 Transfers to Stage 146 (46)  
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(5)5 0 0 Transfers to Stage 2(4)4   
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 30 (3)3 0 Transfers to Stage 3(1)(3)4  
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(5)58 0 53 Impact of transfers between stages(41)9 (2)(34)
(1)51 3 53  (36)2 (34)
Other items charged to the income statementOther items charged to the income statement59 42 1 102 Other items charged to the income statement(45)(49)(6)(100)
Charge to the income statement58 93 4 155 
At 31 December 2020102 135 8 245 
Credit to the income statementCredit to the income statement(45)(85)(4)(134)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 202157 53 4 114 
The Bank's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks4 0 0 4 
Loans and advances to customers589 974 718 2,281 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements    
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements358 404 414 1,176 
Debt securitiesDebt securities1 0 0 1 Debt securities    
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings20 0 7 27 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings21   21 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost614 974 725 2,313 Financial assets at amortised cost379 404 414 1,197 
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guaranteesProvisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees102 135 8 245 Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees57 53 4 114 
TotalTotal716 1,109 733 2,558 Total436 457 418 1,311 
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)0 0 0 0 Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)2   2 
F-60F-58

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Year ended 31 December 20192020
Gross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit lossesGross carrying amountAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks
At 1 January 20193,154 3,154 
Loans and advances to banks and
reverse repurchase agreements
Loans and advances to banks and
reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20204,453 — — 4,453 — — — — 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(105)(105)(1)00(1)Exchange and other adjustments(19)— — (19)— — — — 
Additions (repayments)1,404 1,404 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments1,226 — — 1,226 — — — — 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement— — 
At 31 December 20194,453 4,453 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20205,660 — — 5,660 — — 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(4)— — (4)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount4,453 4,453 Net carrying amount5,656 — — 5,656 
Loans and advances to customers
At 1 January 2019160,379 11,006 2,464 173,849 209 502 823 1,534 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020165,676 10,681 2,385 178,742 238 435 500 1,173 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(325)(14)(339)(33)(32)Exchange and other adjustments40 (1)(220)(181)— — (8)(8)
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 12,805 (2,782)(23)113 (109)(4)Transfers to Stage 11,974 (1,967)(7)— 73 (72)(1)— 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(4,236)4,455 (219)(17)33 (16)Transfers to Stage 2(11,777)12,089 (312)— (49)66 (17)— 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(649)(560)1,209 (7)(68)75 Transfers to Stage 3(955)(900)1,855 — (10)(59)69 — 
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(2,080)1,113 967 (96)127 227 258 Impact of transfers between stages(10,758)9,222 1,536 — (49)340 311 602 
(7)(17)282 258 (35)275 362 602 
Other changes in credit qualityOther changes in credit quality(11)18 226 233 Other changes in credit quality382 (43)479 818 
Additions (repayments)7,702 (1,424)(287)5,991 13 (41)(15)(43)
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments1,231 1,592 (212)2,611 35 137 (19)153 
Methodology and model changesMethodology and model changes33 (27)14 Methodology and model changes(31)170 26 165 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement28 (67)501 462 Charge to the income statement351 539 848 1,738 
Advances written offAdvances written off(911)(911)(911)(911)Advances written off(708)(708)(708)(708)
Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
152 152 152 152 Recoveries of advances written off in previous
years
86 86 86 86 
Discount unwind(32)(32)
At 31 December 2019165,676 10,681 2,385 178,742 238 435 500 1,173 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(238)(435)(500)(1,173)Allowance for impairment losses(589)(974)(718)(2,281)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount165,438 10,246 1,885 177,569 Net carrying amount155,600 20,520 2,149 178,269 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities
At 1 January 20194,960 4,960 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20205,241 — — 5,241 — — — — 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments(91)(91)Exchange and other adjustments(16)— — (16)— — — — 
Additions (repayments)372 372 
Additions and repaymentsAdditions and repayments(909)— — (909)— — 
At 31 December 20195,241 5,241 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20204,316 — — 4,316 — — 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(1)— — (1)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount5,241 5,241 Net carrying amount4,315 — — 4,315 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group
undertakings
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group
undertakings
202,295 55 202,350 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020128,791 — 128,798 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(18)(55)(73)Allowance for impairment losses(20)— (7)(27)
Net carrying amountNet carrying amount202,277 202,277 Net carrying amount128,771 — — 128,771 
Total financial assets at amortised costTotal financial assets at amortised cost377,409 10,246 1,885 389,540 Total financial assets at amortised cost294,342 20,520 2,149 317,011 

F-61F-59

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
16NOTE 15: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST (continued)
Movements in allowance for expected credit losses in respect of undrawn balances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m
Undrawn balancesUndrawn balancesUndrawn balances
At 1 January 201941 32 76 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 202044 42 90 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments— — — — 
Transfers to Stage 1Transfers to Stage 1(8)Transfers to Stage 1(9)— — 
Transfers to Stage 2Transfers to Stage 2(2)Transfers to Stage 2(5)— — 
Transfers to Stage 3Transfers to Stage 3(2)Transfers to Stage 3— (3)— 
Impact of transfers between stagesImpact of transfers between stages(7)15 (1)Impact of transfers between stages(5)58 — 53 
(1)(1)51 53 
Other items charged to the income statementOther items charged to the income statementOther items charged to the income statement59 42 102 
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement10 14 Charge to the income statement58 93 155 
At 31 December 201944 42 90 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020102 135 245 
The Bank's total impairment allowances were as follows:
Allowance for expected credit lossesAllowance for expected credit losses


Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total

Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
Loans and advances to banks
Loans and advances to customers238 435 500 1,173 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements589 974 718 2,281 
Debt securitiesDebt securitiesDebt securities— — 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings18 55 73 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings20 — 27 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost256 435 555 1,246 Financial assets at amortised cost614 974 725 2,313 
Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guaranteesProvisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees44 42 90 Provisions in relation to loan commitments and financial guarantees102 135 245 
TotalTotal300 477 559 1,336 Total716 1,109 733 2,558 
Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)Expected credit loss in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (memorandum item)— — — — 
The movement tables are compiled by comparing the position at 31 December to that at the beginning of the year. Transfers between stages are deemed to have taken place at the start of the reporting period, with all other movements shown in the stage in which the asset is held at 31 December, with the exception of those held within purchased or originated credit-impaired, which are not transferrable.transferable.
Additions (repayments)and repayments comprise new loans originated and repayments of outstanding balances throughout the reporting period. Loans which are written off in the period are first transferred to Stage 3 before acquiring a full allowance and subsequent write-off.
At 31 December 2020 £385,5172021 £2,186 million (2019: £378,457(2020: £1,082 million) of loans and advances to customersbanks and reverse repurchase agreements of the Group and £105,738£2,142 million (2019: £103,042(2020: £1,024 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
At 31 December 2020 £1,0822021 £384,766 million (2019: £1,498(2020: £385,517 million) of loans and advances to bankscustomers and reverse repurchase agreements of the Group and £1,024£92,907 million (2019: £1,231(2020: £105,738 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
At 31 December 20202021 £3,042 million (2020: £5,110 million (2019: £5,314 million) of debt securities of the Group and £4,300£2,541 million (2019: £5,241(2020: £4,300 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
For amounts included above which are subject to reverse repurchase agreements see note 45.44.
F-62F-60

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

17NOTE 16: FINANCE LEASE RECEIVABLES
The Group’s financeFinance lease receivables are classified as loans and advances to customers and accounted for at amortised cost. The balance is analysed as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Gross investment in finance leases, receivable:
Not later than 1 yearNot later than 1 year308 484 18 70 Not later than 1 year339 308 3 18 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 yearsLater than 1 year and not later than 2 years180 340 2 Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years135 180 2 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 yearsLater than 2 years and not later than 3 years143 174 2 Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years222 143 15 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 yearsLater than 3 years and not later than 4 years191 138 7 Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years110 191  
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 yearsLater than 4 years and not later than 5 years110 201 2 Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years46 110  
Later than 5 yearsLater than 5 years571 695 0 Later than 5 years150 571  — 
1,503 2,032 31 93 
Gross investment in finance leasesGross investment in finance leases1,002 1,503 20 31 
Unearned future finance income on finance leasesUnearned future finance income on finance leases(440)(478)0 Unearned future finance income on finance leases(147)(440) — 
Rentals received in advanceRentals received in advance(16)(18)(1)Rentals received in advance(12)(16) (1)
Net investment in finance leasesNet investment in finance leases1,047 1,536 30 93 Net investment in finance leases843 1,047 20 30 
The net investment in finance leases represents amounts recoverable as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Not later than 1 yearNot later than 1 year237 404 17 70 Not later than 1 year280 237 3 17 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 yearsLater than 1 year and not later than 2 years135 322 2 Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years108 135 2 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 yearsLater than 2 years and not later than 3 years104 126 2 Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years198 104 15 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 yearsLater than 3 years and not later than 4 years159 98 7 Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years94 159  
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 yearsLater than 4 years and not later than 5 years86 166 2 Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years35 86  
Later than 5 yearsLater than 5 years326 420 0 Later than 5 years128 326  — 
Net investment in finance leasesNet investment in finance leases1,047 1,536 30 93 Net investment in finance leases843 1,047 20 30 
Equipment leased to customers under finance leases primarily relates to structured financing transactions to fund the purchase of aircraft, ships and other large individual value items. There was an allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables included in the allowance for impairment losses for the Group of £22£18 million (2019: £12(2020: £22 million).
18NOTE 17: FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Debt securities:Debt securities:Debt securities:
Government securitiesGovernment securities14,267 13,082 14,114 12,938 Government securities14,599 14,267 14,445 14,114 
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securities65 60 0 Asset-backed securities55 65  — 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities12,928 11,036 10,533 8,783 Corporate and other debt securities13,131 12,928 11,084 10,533 
27,260 24,178 24,647 21,721 27,785 27,260 25,529 24,647 
Treasury and other bills0 439 0 439 
Equity sharesEquity shares1 —  — 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeTotal financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,260 24,617 24,647 22,160 Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,786 27,260 25,529 24,647 
At 31 December 20202021 £24,947 million (2020: £25,826 million (2019: £23,385 million) of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income of the Group and £23,494£23,081 million (2019: £21,052(2020: £23,494 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
All assets were assessed at Stage 1 at 31 December 20192020 and 2020.2021.
F-63F-61

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

19NOTE 18: GOODWILL OF THE GROUP
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January474 474 At 1 January470 474 
Impairment charged to the income statementImpairment charged to the income statement(4)Impairment charged to the income statement (4)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December470 474 At 31 December470 470 
Cost1
Cost1
814 814 
Cost1
814 814 
Accumulated impairment lossesAccumulated impairment losses(344)(340)Accumulated impairment losses(344)(344)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December470 474 At 31 December470 470 
1For acquisitions made prior to 1 January 2004, the date of transition to IFRS, cost is included net of amounts amortised up to 31 December 2003.
The goodwill held in the Group’s balance sheet is tested at least annually for impairment. For the purposes of impairment testing the goodwill is allocated to the appropriate cash generating unit; of the total balance of £470 million (2019: £474(2020: £470 million), £302 million, or 64 per cent (2019:(2020: £302 million, 64 per cent) has been allocated to Cards and £166 million, or 35 per cent (2019: £170(2020: £166 million, 3635 per cent) has been allocated to Motor Finance, both in the Group’s Retail division.
The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Motor Financethe Cards business has been based on a value-in-use calculation using pre-taxpost-tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets and plans approved by management covering a four-year period and a discount rate (post-tax) of 1410.25 per cent. The cash flows beyond the four-year period are extrapolated using a growth rate of 0.5assume 3.5 per cent which does not exceed the long-term average growth rates for the markets in which Motor Finance participates. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions above would not cause the recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Motor Finance to fall below the balance sheet carrying value. The impairment charge of £4 million related to the goodwill arising on a small, separable acquisition a number of years ago.
The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to the Cards business has been based on a value-in-use calculation using pre-tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets and plans approved by management covering a five-year period and a discount rate of 13 per cent. The cash flows beyond the five year period assume no growth. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions above would not cause the recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to the Cards business to fall below the balance sheet carrying value.
The recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Motor Finance has also been based on a value-in-use calculation using post-tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets and plans approved by management covering a four-year period and a discount rate (post-tax) of 10.25 per cent. The cash flows beyond the four-year period are extrapolated using a growth rate of 3.5 per cent which does not exceed the long-term average growth rates for the markets in which Motor Finance participates. Management believes that any reasonably possible change in the key assumptions, including from the impacts of climate change or climate-related legislation, would not cause the recoverable amount of the goodwill relating to Motor Finance to fall below the balance sheet carrying value. The impairment charge of £4 million in 2020 related to the goodwill arising on a small, separable acquisition a number of years ago.
20
NOTE 19: OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
BrandsCore deposit
intangible
Purchased
credit card
relationships
Customer-
related
intangibles
Capitalised
software
enhancements
TotalCapitalised
software
enhancements
BrandsCore deposit
intangible
Purchased
credit card
relationships
Customer-
related
intangibles
Capitalised
software
enhancements
TotalCapitalised
software
enhancements
£m£m£m£m
Cost:Cost:Cost:
At 1 January 2019584 2,770 1,002 50 3,907 8,313 3,306 
Additions1,029 1,029 978 
Disposals(10)(10)(4)
At 31 December 2019584 2,770 1,002 50 4,926 9,332 4,280 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020584 2,770 1,002 50 4,926 9,332 4,280 
AdditionsAdditions0 0 0 0 984 984 857 Additions— — — — 984 984 857 
DisposalsDisposals0 0 0 0 (55)(55)(6)Disposals— — — — (55)(55)(6)
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020584 2,770 1,002 50 5,855 10,261 5,131 At 31 December 2020584 2,770 1,002 50 5,855 10,261 5,131 
AdditionsAdditions    986 986 886 
Disposals and write-offsDisposals and write-offs    (460)(460)(321)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021584 2,770 1,002 50 6,381 10,787 5,696 
Accumulated amortisation:Accumulated amortisation:Accumulated amortisation:
At 1 January 2019204 2,770 411 50 1,556 4,991 1,244 
Charge for the year (note 9)70 492 562 420 
Disposals(2)(2)(2)
At 31 December 2019204 2,770 481 50 2,046 5,551 1,662 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020204 2,770 481 50 2,046 5,551 1,662 
Charge for the year (note 9)Charge for the year (note 9)0 0 70 0 583 653 515 Charge for the year (note 9)— — 70 — 583 653 515 
DisposalsDisposals0 0 0 0 (55)(55)(6)Disposals— — — — (55)(55)(6)
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020204 2,770 551 50 2,574 6,149 2,171 At 31 December 2020204 2,770 551 50 2,574 6,149 2,171 
Charge for the year (note 9)Charge for the year (note 9)  70  884 954 750 
Disposals and write-offsDisposals and write-offs    (460)(460)(321)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021204 2,770 621 50 2,998 6,643 2,600 
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2021
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2021
380  381  3,383 4,144 3,096 
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2020
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2020
380 0 451 0 3,281 4,112 2,960 Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2020
380 — 451 — 3,281 4,112 2,960 
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2019
380 521 2,880 3,781 2,618 
Brands arising from the acquisition of Bank of Scotland in 2009 are recognised on the Group's balance sheet and have been determined to have an indefinite useful life. The carrying value at 31 December 20202021 was £380 million (2019:(2020: £380 million). The Bank of Scotland name has been in existence for over 300 years and there are no indications that the brand should not have an indefinite useful life. The recoverable amount has been based on a value-in-use calculation. The calculation uses post-tax projections for a six-year period of the income generated by the brands,Bank of Scotland cost generating unit, a discount rate of 9.3110.25 per cent and a future growth rate of 2.53.5 per cent. Management estimatesbelieves that ifany reasonably possible change in the growth rate were decreased by 1 per cent therekey assumptions would have been impairment chargenot cause the recoverable amount of £50 million.the Bank of Scotland brand to fall below its balance sheet carrying value.
F-64F-62

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020

2021
21 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
The GroupThe Bank
Investment
properties
PremisesEquipmentOperating
lease assets
Right-of-use asset1
TotalPremisesEquipment
Right-of-use asset1
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Cost or valuation:
At 1 January 201935 1,180 4,966 6,642 1,655 14,478 1,275 6,267 883 8,425 
Exchange and other adjustments21 021 
Additions118 518 1,693 183 2,512 62 484 114 660 
Expenditure on investment properties (see below)11 11 
Change in fair value of investment properties (note 7)(8)(8)
Disposals(23)(243)(231)(1,681)(25)(2,203)(271)(210)(16)(497)
At 31 December 201915 1,058 5,257 6,654 1,813 14,797 1,087 6,541 981 8,609 
Exchange and other adjustments0 1 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 7 
Additions0 72 314 1,436 122 1,944 42 287 104 433 
Expenditure on investment properties (see below)9 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 
Change in fair value of investment properties (note 7)(20)0 0 0 0 (20)0 0 0 0 
Disposals0 (184)(501)(1,914)(124)(2,723)(113)(472)(103)(688)
At 31 December 20204 947 5,070 6,176 1,811 14,008 1,023 6,356 982 8,361 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment:
At 1 January 2019199 2,270 1,839 4,308 687 3,915 4,602 
Exchange and other adjustments(1)(33)(33)11 
Depreciation charge for the year (note 9)121 710 1,006 203 2,040 67 648 110 825 
Disposals(225)(176)(584)(985)(257)(166)(423)
At 31 December 201995 2,803 2,228 204 5,330 505 4,397 113 5,015 
Exchange and other adjustments0 (1)2 0 0 1 0 2 0 2 
Depreciation charge for the year (note 9)0 124 676 1,002 215 2,017 70 619 121 810 
Disposals0 (137)(466)(1,012)(42)(1,657)(93)(441)(30)(564)
At 31 December 20200 81 3,015 2,218 377 5,691 482 4,577 204 5,263 
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2020
4 866 2,055 3,958 1,434 8,317 541 1,779 778 3,098 
Balance sheet amount at
31 December 2019
15 963 2,454 4,426 1,609 9,467 582 2,144 868 3,594 
1Primarily premises.
Expenditure on investment properties is comprised as follows:
20202019
£m£m
Acquisitions of new properties9 11 
Additional expenditure on existing properties0 
9 11 
F-65

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
21 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (continued)
The table above analyses movements in investment properties, all of which are categorised as level 3. See note 42 for details of levels in the fair value hierarchy.
At 31 December the future minimum rentals receivable by the Group under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:
20202019
£m£m
Receivable within 1 year864 977 
1 to 2 years548 620 
2 to 3 years274 312 
3 to 4 years78 102 
4 to 5 years7 12 
Over 5 years0 
Total future minimum rentals receivable1,771 2,025 
Equipment leased to customers under operating leases primarily relates to vehicle contract hire arrangements.
22NOTE 20: INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS OF THE BANK
20202019
£m£m
At 1 January34,084 32,656 
Additions and capital injections1,055 1,766 
Capital contributions33 53 
Capital repayments(1,801)(212)
Disposals(18)(20)
Impairment1
0 (159)
At 31 December33,353 34,084 
1During the year ended 31 December 2019 the Bank wrote-down the carrying value of its investments in certain subsidiaries, following a review of their financial position and anticipated future activities.
20212020
£m£m
At 1 January33,353 34,084 
Additions and capital injections11 1,055 
Capital contributions36 33 
Capital repayments(2,576)(1,801)
Disposals(236)(18)
At 31 December30,588 33,353 
Certain subsidiary companies currently have insufficient distributable reserves to make dividend payments, however, there were no further significant restrictions on any of the Bank’s subsidiaries in paying dividends or repaying loans and advances. All regulated banking subsidiaries are required to maintain capital at levels agreed with the regulators; this may impact those subsidiaries’ ability to make distributions.
23NOTE 21: OTHER ASSETS
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Property, plant and equipment:Property, plant and equipment:
Investment propertiesInvestment properties4  — 
PremisesPremises803 866 509 541 
EquipmentEquipment1,627 2,055 1,372 1,779 
Operating lease assets (see below)Operating lease assets (see below)4,196 3,958  — 
Right-of-use assets (note 22)Right-of-use assets (note 22)1,268 1,434 690 778 
£m£m£m£m7,898 8,317 2,571 3,098 
Settlement balancesSettlement balances202 490 100 437 Settlement balances52 202 51 100 
PrepaymentsPrepayments1,030 1,229 443 469 Prepayments905 1,030 488 443 
Other assetsOther assets660 808 211 92 Other assets744 660 363 211 
Total other assetsTotal other assets1,892 2,527 754 998 Total other assets9,599 10,209 3,473 3,852 
Operating lease assets
At 31 December the future minimum rentals receivable by the Group under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:
20212020
£m£m
Within 1 year848 864 
1 to 2 years561 548 
2 to 3 years288 274 
3 to 4 years86 78 
4 to 5 years8 
Over 5 years — 
Total future minimum rentals receivable1,791 1,771 
Operating lease assets at 31 December 2021 of £4,196 million included £728 million relating to electric vehicles, an increase of 128 per cent on 2020, £2,531 million relating to internal combustion engine vehicles, a decrease of 15 per cent on 2020, £928 million relating to hybrid vehicles, an increase of 41 per cent on 2020 and £9 million of other assets.
F-66F-63

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020

2021
24NOTE 22: LESSEE DISCLOSURES
The table below sets out the movement in right-of-use assets, which are primarily in respect of premises, and are recognised within other assets (note 21).
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
At 1 January1,434 1,609 778 868 
Exchange and other adjustments(9)— (9)— 
Additions71 122 54 104 
Disposals(12)(82)(4)(73)
Depreciation charge for the year(216)(215)(129)(121)
At 31 December1,268 1,434 690 778 
Lease liabilities are recognised within other liabilities (note 26). The maturity analysis of lease liabilities on an undiscounted basis is set out in the liquidity risk section of note 44.
The total cash outflow for leases in the year ended 31 December 2021 was £243 million. The amount recognised within interest expense in respect of lease liabilities is disclosed in note 5.
NOTE 23: FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss: debt securities in issueLiabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss: debt securities in issue6,828 7,531 7,905 7,484 Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss: debt securities in issue6,537 6,828 9,821 7,905 
Trading liabilities:Trading liabilities:Trading liabilities:
Other depositsOther deposits2 98 2 140 Other deposits  
Short positions in securitiesShort positions in securities1 73 0 73 Short positions in securities  — 
3 171 2 213   
Total financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossTotal financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,831 7,702 7,907 7,697 Total financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,537 6,831 9,821 7,907 
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group had £6,682£6,258 million (2019: £7,376(2020: £6,682 million) and the Bank had £7,758£9,543 million (2019: £7,328(2020: £7,758 million) of trading and other liabilities at fair value through profit or loss with a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss primarily represent debt securities in issue which either contain substantive embedded derivatives which would otherwise need to be recognised and measured at fair value separately from the related debt securities, or which are accounted for at fair value to significantly reduce an accounting mismatch.
For the Group, the amount contractually payable on maturity of the debt securities held at fair value through profit or loss at 31 December 20202021 was £10,558 million, which was £4,021 million higher than the balance sheet carrying value (2020: £11,503 million, which was £4,675 million higher than the balance sheet carrying value (2019: £14,365 million. which was £6,834 million higher than the balance sheet carrying value). At 31 December 20202021 there was a cumulative £109£195 million increase in the fair value of these liabilities attributable to changes in credit spread risk; this is determined by reference to the quoted credit spreads of the Bank. Of the cumulative amount, an increase of £86 million arose in 2021 and an increase of £75 million arose in 2020 and an increase of £419 million arose in 2019.2020.
In addition, the Bank has £3,317 million (2020: £1,122 million (2019: £NaN)million) of debt securities in issue which are accounted for at fair value to significantly reduce an accounting mismatch. The changes in the credit risk of these liabilities are linked to the changes in credit risk on corresponding assets that the Bank holds at fair value through profit or loss, representing debt securities issued by subsidiaries. Given the economic relationship between these assets and liabilities, the Bank presents changes in the credit risk of these liabilities in profit or loss in order to avoid creating or enlarging an accounting mismatch.
For the fair value of collateral pledged in respect of repurchase agreements see note 45.44.
25NOTE 24: DEBT SECURITIES IN ISSUE
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Medium-term notes issuedMedium-term notes issued21,501 26,628 19,546 25,603 Medium-term notes issued23,820 21,501 19,916 19,546 
Covered bonds (note 26)23,977 29,818 20,895 25,359 
Covered bonds (note 25)Covered bonds (note 25)17,407 23,977 15,809 20,895 
Certificates of deposit issuedCertificates of deposit issued3,597 4,925 3,597 4,925 Certificates of deposit issued290 3,597 290 3,597 
Securitisation notes (note 26)4,436 7,329 0 
Securitisation notes (note 25)Securitisation notes (note 25)3,672 4,436 176 — 
Commercial paperCommercial paper5,782 7,731 4,071 5,622 Commercial paper3,535 5,782 2,248 4,071 
Total debt securities in issueTotal debt securities in issue59,293 76,431 48,109 61,509 Total debt securities in issue48,724 59,293 38,439 48,109 
At 31 December 20202021 £33,369 million (2020: £40,765 million (2019: £41,762 million) of debt securities in issue of the Group and £33,582£26,967 million (2019: £32,152(2020: £33,582 million) of the Bank had a contractual residual maturity of greater than one year.
F-67F-64

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
26NOTE 25: SECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS
Securitisation programmes
The Group’s balance sheet includes loans securitised under the Group’s securitisation programmes, the majority of which have been sold by Group companies to bankruptcy remote structured entities. As the structured entities are funded by the issue of debt on terms whereby the majority of the risks and rewards of the portfolio are retained by the Group company, the structured entities are consolidated fully and all of these loans are retained on the Group’s balance sheet, with the related notes in issue included within debt securities in issue.
Covered bond programmes
Certain loans and advances to customers have been assigned to bankruptcy remote limited liability partnerships to provide security for issues of covered bonds by the Group. The Group retains all of the risks and rewards associated with these loans and the partnerships are consolidated fully with the loans retained on the Group’s balance sheet, and the related covered bonds in issue included within debt securities in issue.
The Group’s principal securitisation and covered bond programmes, together with the balances of the advances subject to these arrangements and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December, are listed below. The notes in issue are reported in note 25.24.
2020201920212020
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes in
issue
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes in
issue
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes
in issue
Loans and
advances
securitised
Notes
in issue
£m£m£m£m
Securitisation programmesSecuritisation programmesSecuritisation programmes
UK residential mortgagesUK residential mortgages23,984 21,640 25,815 23,505 UK residential mortgages18,300 16,214 23,984 21,640 
Commercial loansCommercial loans2,884 4,004 5,116 6,038 Commercial loans388 1,839 2,884 4,004 
Credit card receivablesCredit card receivables5,890 4,340 8,164 5,767 Credit card receivables11,615 8,474 5,890 4,340 
Motor vehicle financeMotor vehicle finance1,826 1,915 3,450 3,462 Motor vehicle finance235 251 1,826 1,915 
Dutch residential mortgagesDutch residential mortgages427 448 — — 
34,584 31,899 42,545 38,772 30,965 27,226 34,584 31,899 
Less held by the GroupLess held by the Group(27,418)(31,396)Less held by the Group(23,521)(27,418)
Total securitisation programmes (notes 24 and 25)1
4,481 7,376 
Total securitisation programmes (notes 23 and 24)1
Total securitisation programmes (notes 23 and 24)1
3,705 4,481 
Covered bond programmesCovered bond programmesCovered bond programmes
Residential mortgage-backedResidential mortgage-backed33,980 23,477 37,579 29,318 Residential mortgage-backed35,896 16,907 33,980 23,477 
Social housing loan-backedSocial housing loan-backed980 600 1,552 600 Social housing loan-backed833 500 980 600 
34,960 24,077 39,131 29,918 36,729 17,407 34,960 24,077 
Less held by the GroupLess held by the Group(100)(100)Less held by the Group (100)
Total covered bond programmes (note 25)23,977 29,818 
Total covered bond programmes (note 24)Total covered bond programmes (note 24)17,407 23,977 
Total securitisation and covered bond programmesTotal securitisation and covered bond programmes28,458 37,194 Total securitisation and covered bond programmes21,112 28,458 
1Includes £45£33 million (2019: £47(2020: £45 million) of securitisation notes held at fair value through profit or loss.
Cash deposits of £3,930£3,455 million (2019: £4,703(2020: £3,930 million) which support the debt securities issued by the structured entities, the term advances related to covered bonds and other legal obligations, are held by the Group. Additionally, the Group has certain contractual arrangements to provide liquidity facilities to some of these structured entities. At 31 December 20202021 these obligations had not been triggered; the maximum exposure under these facilities was £52 million (2019: £56(2020: £52 million).
The Group has a number of covered bond programmes, for which limited liability partnerships have been established to ring-fence asset pools and guarantee the covered bonds issued by the Group. At the reporting date the Group had over-collateralised these programmes as set out in the table above to meet the terms of the programmes, to secure the rating of the covered bonds and to provide operational flexibility. From time-to-time,time to time, the obligations of the Group to provide collateral may increase due to the formal requirements of the programmes. The Group may also voluntarily contribute collateral to support the ratings of the covered bonds.
The Group recognises the full liabilities associated with its securitisation and covered bond programmes within debt securities in issue, although the obligations of the Group in respect of its securitisation issuances are limited to the cash flows generated from the underlying assets. The Group could be required to provide additional support to a number of the securitisation programmes to support the credit ratings of the debt securities issued, in the form of increased cash reserves and the holding of subordinated notes. Further, certain programmes contain contractual obligations that require the Group to repurchase assets should they become credit impairedcredit-impaired or as otherwise required by the transaction documents.
The Group has not provided financial or other support by voluntarily offering to repurchase assets from any of its public securitisation programmes during 2020 (2019:2021 (2020: none).
NOTE 26: OTHER LIABILITIES
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Settlement balances110 36 51 11 
Lease liabilities1,411 1,592 777 885 
Other creditors and accruals3,870 3,553 2,300 1,677 
Total other liabilities5,391 5,181 3,128 2,573 
The maturity analysis of the lease liabilities on an undiscounted basis is set out in the liquidity risk section of note 44.
F-68
F-65

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
27 OTHER LIABILITIES
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Settlement balances36 274 11 
Lease liabilities1,592 1,755 885 975 
Other creditors and accruals3,553 3,571 1,677 1,808 
5,181 5,600 2,573 2,792 
The maturity of the lease liabilities was as follows:
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Not later than 1 year227 238 125 132 
Later than 1 year and not later than 2 years192 220 102 124 
Later than 2 years and not later than 3 years157 192 80 106 
Later than 3 years and not later than 4 years146 156 74 84 
Later than 4 years and not later than 5 years117 156 57 84 
Later than 5 years753 793 447 445 
1,592 1,755 885 975 
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS
202020192018The Group
£m£m202120202019
Charge to the Group income statement
£m£m
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement
Defined benefit pension schemesDefined benefit pension schemes244 241 396 Defined benefit pension schemes234 244 241 
Other post-retirement benefit schemesOther post-retirement benefit schemes3 Other post-retirement benefit schemes2 
Total defined benefit schemesTotal defined benefit schemes247 245 400 Total defined benefit schemes236 247 245 
Defined contribution pension schemesDefined contribution pension schemes305 273 288 Defined contribution pension schemes287 305 273 
Total charge to the income statement – continuing operations (note 9)552 518 688 
Total charge to the income statement (note 9)Total charge to the income statement (note 9)523 552 518 
In addition, in 2018 there was charge of £8 million within discontinued operations (see note 13).
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Amounts recognised in the balance sheetAmounts recognised in the balance sheetAmounts recognised in the balance sheet
Retirement benefit assetsRetirement benefit assets1,714 681 765 386 Retirement benefit assets4,531 1,714 2,420 765 
Retirement benefit obligationsRetirement benefit obligations(245)(257)(106)(124)Retirement benefit obligations(230)(245)(101)(106)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheetTotal amounts recognised in the balance sheet1,469 424 659 262 Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet4,301 1,469 2,319 659 
The total amounts recognised in the balance sheet relate to:
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Defined benefit pension schemes1,578 550 727 347 
Other post-retirement benefit schemes(109)(126)(68)(85)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet1,469 424 659 262 
F-69

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
28 RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Defined benefit pension schemes4,404 1,578 2,384 727 
Other post-retirement benefit schemes(103)(109)(65)(68)
Total amounts recognised in the balance sheet4,301 1,469 2,319 659 
Pension schemes
Defined benefit schemes
(i)Characteristics of and risks associated with the Group’s schemes
The Group has established a number of defined benefit pension schemes in the UK and overseas. All significant schemes are based in the UK, with the three most significant being the main sections of the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 1, the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 2 and the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme. At 31 December 2020,2021, these schemes represented 94 per cent of the Group’s total gross defined benefit pension assets (2019:(2020: 94 per cent). These schemes provide retirement benefits calculated as a percentageproportion of final pensionable salary depending upon the length of pensionable service; the minimum retirement age under the rules of the schemes at 31 December 20202021 is generally 55, although certain categories of member are deemed to have a contractualprotected right to retire at 50.
The Group operates both funded and unfunded pension arrangements; the majority, including the three most significant schemes, are funded schemes in the UK. All of these UK funded schemes are operated as separate legal entities under trust law, are in compliance with the Pensions Act 2004 and are managed by a Trustee Board (the Trustee) whose role is to ensure that their Schemescheme is administered in accordance with the Schemescheme rules and relevant legislation, and to safeguard the assets in the best interests of all members and beneficiaries. The Trustee is solely responsible for setting investment policy and for agreeing funding requirements with the employer through the funding valuation process. The Board of Trustees must be composed of representatives of the Companyscheme membership along with a combination of independent and plan participants in accordanceemployer appointed trustees to comply with the Scheme’s regulations.legislation and scheme rules.
A valuation to determine the funding status of each scheme is carried out at least every three years, whereby scheme assets are measured at market value and liabilities (technical provisions) are measured using prudent assumptions. If a deficit is identified a recovery plan is agreed between the employer and the scheme Trustee and sent to the Pensions Regulator for review. The Group has not provided for these deficit contributions as the future economic benefits arising from these contributions are expected to be available to the Group. The Group’s overseas defined benefit pension schemes are subject to local regulatory arrangements.
Terms have now been agreed in principle with the Trustee in respect of theThe most recent triennial funding valuations of the Group's three main defined benefit pension schemes. The valuationsschemes showed an aggregate ongoing funding deficit of approximately £7.3 billion as at 31 December 2019 (a funding level of 85.7 per cent) compared to a £7.3 billion deficit at 31 December 2016 (a funding level of 85.9 per cent).The. The revised deficit now includes an allowance for the impact of RPI reform announced by the Chancellor of the Exchequer in November 2020.2020, and which is subject to judicial review in 2022. The latest annual update as at 31 December 2020 showed the funding deficit had improved to £6.0 billion. Under the old recovery plan deficit contributions of approximately £0.8 billion were paid in 2020 and £1.3 billion was committed from 2021 to 2024. Under the newagreed recovery plan, £0.8 billion plus a further 30 per cent of Lloyds Banking Group plc's in-year capital distributions to ordinary shareholders, up to a limit on total deficit contributions of £2.0 billion per annum, is payable from 2021 until thisthe 2019 deficit has been removed. The deficit contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet benefits accruing over the year, and to cover the expenses of running the schemes. £1.1 billion of deficit contributions were paid to these schemes in 2021. The Group expects to pay contributions of at least £1.1 billion to its defined benefit schemes in 2021.2022.
During 2009, the Group made one-off contributions to the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 1 and Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 2 in the form of interests in limited liability partnerships for each of the two schemes which hold assets to provide security for the Group’s obligations to the two schemes. At 31 December 2020,2021, the limited liability partnerships held assets of approximately £6.7£7.4 billion. The limited liability partnerships are consolidated fully in the Group’s balance sheet.
The Group has also established three private limited companies which hold assets to provide security for the Group’s obligations to the HBOS Final Salary Pension Scheme, a section of the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 1 and the Lloyds Bank Offshore Pension Scheme. At 31 December 20202021 these held assets of approximately £4.7£5.8 billion in aggregate. The private limited companies are consolidated fully in the Group’s balance sheet.
F-66

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

The terms of these arrangements require the Group to maintain assets in these vehicles to agreed minimum values in order to secure obligations owed to the relevant Group pension schemes. The Group has satisfied this requirement during 2020.2021.
The last funding valuations of other Group schemes were carried out on a number of different dates. In order to report the position under IAS 19 as at 31 December 20202021, the most recent valuation results for all schemes have been updated by qualified independent actuaries. The funding valuations use a more prudent approach to setting the discount rate and more conservative longevity assumptions than the IAS 19 valuations.
In Julya judgment in 2018, a decision was sought from the High Court in respect ofconfirmed the requirement to equalise the Guaranteed Minimum Pension (GMP) benefits accruedof men and women accruing between 1990 and 1997 from contracting out of the State Earnings Related Pension Scheme. In its judgment handed down on 26 October 2018 the High Court confirmed the requirement to treat men and women equally with respect to these benefits and a range of methods that the Trustee is entitled to adopt to achieve equalisation. The Group recognised a past service cost of £108 million in respect of equalisation in 2018 and, following agreement of the detailed implementation approach with the Trustee, a further £33 million was recognised in 2019. A further hearing was held during 2020 which confirmed the extent of the Trustee's obligation to revisit past transfers out of the Schemes.schemes. The amount of any additional liability as a result of this judgment is still being reviewed but is not considered likely to be material.
(ii)Amounts in the financial statements
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Amount included in the balance sheetAmount included in the balance sheetAmount included in the balance sheet
Present value of funded obligationsPresent value of funded obligations(49,549)(45,241)(30,597)(28,072)Present value of funded obligations(47,130)(49,549)(29,222)(30,597)
Fair value of scheme assetsFair value of scheme assets51,127 45,791 31,324 28,419 Fair value of scheme assets51,534 51,127 31,606 31,324 
Net amount recognised in the balance sheetNet amount recognised in the balance sheet1,578 550 727 347 Net amount recognised in the balance sheet4,404 1,578 2,384 727 
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet
At 1 January1,578 550 727 347 
Net defined benefit pension charge(234)(244)(113)(119)
Actuarial gains (losses) on defined benefit obligation1,267 (5,443)553 (3,365)
Return on plan assets449 5,565 397 3,217 
Employer contributions1,344 1,149 821 647 
Exchange and other adjustments (1)— 
At 31 December4,404 1,578 2,384 727 
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Movements in the defined benefit obligation
At 1 January(49,549)(45,241)(30,597)(28,072)
Current service cost(213)(206)(100)(97)
Interest expense(704)(914)(435)(568)
Remeasurements:
Actuarial (losses) gains – experience(426)493 (431)441 
Actuarial losses – demographic assumptions(146)(218)(82)(282)
Actuarial gains (losses) – financial assumptions1,839 (5,718)1,066 (3,524)
Benefits paid2,034 2,254 1,361 1,504 
Past service cost(11)(5)(4)(2)
Settlements22 20 1 — 
Exchange and other adjustments24 (14)(1)
At 31 December(47,130)(49,549)(29,222)(30,597)
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Analysis of the defined benefit obligation
Active members(5,837)(6,550)(3,085)(3,415)
Deferred members(16,167)(17,647)(9,527)(10,493)
Pensioners(23,171)(23,409)(15,238)(15,311)
Dependants(1,955)(1,943)(1,372)(1,378)
At 31 December(47,130)(49,549)(29,222)(30,597)
F-70F-67

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Net amount recognised in the balance sheet
At 1 January550 1,146 347 667 
Net defined benefit pension charge(244)(241)(119)(129)
Actuarial losses on defined benefit obligation(5,443)(4,958)(3,365)(3,473)
Return on plan assets5,565 3,531 3,217 2,700 
Employer contributions1,149 1,062 647 558 
Exchange and other adjustments1 10 0 24 
At 31 December1,578 550 727 347 
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Movements in the defined benefit obligation
At 1 January(45,241)(41,092)(28,072)(25,198)
Current service cost(206)(201)(97)(98)
Interest expense(914)(1,172)(568)(737)
Remeasurements:
Actuarial gains (losses) – experience493 (29)441 35 
Actuarial (losses) gains – demographic assumptions(218)471 (282)304 
Actuarial losses – financial assumptions(5,718)(5,400)(3,524)(3,812)
Benefits paid2,254 2,174 1,504 1,436 
Past service cost(5)(44)(2)(33)
Settlements20 17 0 
Exchange and other adjustments(14)35 3 31 
At 31 December(49,549)(45,241)(30,597)(28,072)
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Analysis of the defined benefit obligation:
Active members(6,550)(6,413)(3,415)(3,433)
Deferred members(17,647)(16,058)(10,493)(9,679)
Pensioners(23,409)(21,032)(15,311)(13,714)
Dependants(1,943)(1,738)(1,378)(1,246)
At 31 December(49,549)(45,241)(30,597)(28,072)
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Changes in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January45,791 42,238 28,419 25,865 
Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest income5,565 3,531 3,217 2,700 
Interest income937 1,220 581 765 
Employer contributions1,149 1,062 647 558 
Benefits paid(2,254)(2,174)(1,504)(1,436)
Settlements(22)(18)0 
Administrative costs paid(54)(43)(33)(26)
Exchange and other adjustments15 (25)(3)(7)
At 31 December51,127 45,791 31,324 28,419 
F-71

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
28 RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Changes in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January51,127 45,791 31,324 28,419 
Return on plan assets excluding amounts included in interest income449 5,565 397 3,217 
Interest income733 937 450 581 
Employer contributions1,344 1,149 821 647 
Benefits paid(2,034)(2,254)(1,361)(1,504)
Settlements(23)(22)(1)— 
Administrative costs paid(38)(54)(24)(33)
Exchange and other adjustments(24)15  (3)
At 31 December51,534 51,127 31,606 31,324 
The expense recognised in the income statement for the year ended 31 December comprises:
The GroupThe Group
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
Current service costCurrent service cost206 201 257 Current service cost213 206 201 
Net interest amountNet interest amount(23)(48)(22)Net interest amount(29)(23)(48)
Past service credits and curtailments0 12 
SettlementsSettlements2 Settlements1 
Past service cost – plan amendmentsPast service cost – plan amendments5 44 108 Past service cost – plan amendments11 44 
Plan administration costs incurred during the yearPlan administration costs incurred during the year54 43 40 Plan administration costs incurred during the year38 54 43 
Total defined benefit pension expenseTotal defined benefit pension expense244 241 396 Total defined benefit pension expense234 244 241 
(iii)Composition of scheme assets
2020201920212020
QuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotal
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m
Equity instrumentsEquity instruments616 45 661 555 39 594 Equity instruments617 36 653 616 45 661 
Debt instruments1:
Debt instruments1:
Debt instruments1:
Fixed interest government bondsFixed interest government bonds11,328 0 11,328 8,893 8,893 Fixed interest government bonds10,512  10,512 11,328 — 11,328 
Index-linked government bondsIndex-linked government bonds21,058 0 21,058 18,207 18,207 Index-linked government bonds23,969  23,969 21,058 — 21,058 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities12,736 0 12,736 10,588 10,588 Corporate and other debt securities13,399  13,399 12,736 — 12,736 
45,122 0 45,122 37,688 37,688 47,880  47,880 45,122 — 45,122 
PropertyProperty0 136 136 158 158 Property 139 139 — 136 136 
Pooled investment vehiclesPooled investment vehicles650 13,022 13,672 4,773 10,585 15,358 Pooled investment vehicles1,192 13,346 14,538 650 13,022 13,672 
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives, and other assets and liabilities812 (9,276)(8,464)204 (8,211)(8,007)
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
319 (11,995)(11,676)812 (9,276)(8,464)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December47,200 

3,927 

51,127 

43,220 

2,571 

45,791 At 31 December50,008 1,526 51,534 47,200 3,927 51,127 
1Of the total debt instruments, £39,439£42,568 million (2019: £33,134(2020: £39,439 million) were investment grade (credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’).
2020201920212020
QuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotalQuotedUnquotedTotal
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Equity instrumentsEquity instruments423 34 457 385 26 411 Equity instruments424 24 448 423 34 457 
Debt instruments1:
Debt instruments1:
Debt instruments1:
Fixed interest government bondsFixed interest government bonds4,591 0 4,591 3,198 3,198 Fixed interest government bonds4,346  4,346 4,591 — 4,591 
Index-linked government bondsIndex-linked government bonds12,638 0 12,638 11,254 11,254 Index-linked government bonds14,407  14,407 12,638 — 12,638 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities7,878 0 7,878 6,791 6,791 Corporate and other debt securities8,105  8,105 7,878 — 7,878 
25,107 0 25,107 21,243 21,243 26,858  26,858 25,107 — 25,107 
Pooled investment vehiclesPooled investment vehicles124 8,569 8,693 2,527 7,203 9,730 Pooled investment vehicles800 8,942 9,742 124 8,569 8,693 
Money market instruments, derivatives, cash and other assets and liabilities365 (3,298)(2,933)(145)(2,820)(2,965)
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
Money market instruments, cash, derivatives
and other assets and liabilities
(154)(5,288)(5,442)365 (3,298)(2,933)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December26,019 

5,305 

31,324 

24,010 

4,409 

28,419 At 31 December27,928 3,678 31,606 26,019 5,305 31,324 
1Of the total debt instruments, £21,938£23,627 million (2019: £18,724(2020: £21,938 million) were investment grade (credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’).
The assets of all the funded plans are held independently of the Group’s assets in separate trustee administeredtrustee-administered funds.
F-72F-68

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

The pension schemes’ pooled investment vehicles comprise:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Equity fundsEquity funds3,169 2,429 2,044 1,706 Equity funds3,696 3,169 2,616 2,044 
Hedge and mutual fundsHedge and mutual funds2,181 2,886 1,427 1,818 Hedge and mutual funds1,407 2,181 934 1,427 
Alternative credit fundsAlternative credit funds4,072 4,716 2,620 3,061 Alternative credit funds3,884 4,072 2,476 2,620 
Property fundsProperty funds1,551 1,536 1,100 1,127 Property funds1,541 1,551 1,151 1,100 
Infrastructure fundsInfrastructure funds1,405 1,648 620 827 Infrastructure funds1,389 1,405 645 620 
Liquidity fundsLiquidity funds847 1,126 598 980 Liquidity funds2,031 847 1,488 598 
Bond and debt fundsBond and debt funds396 971 284 211 Bond and debt funds561 396 432 284 
OtherOther51 46 0 Other29 51  — 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December13,672 15,358 8,693 9,730 At 31 December14,538 13,672 9,742 8,693 
The Trustee’s approach to investment is focused on acting in the members’ best financial interests, with the integration of ESG (Environmental,(Environmental, Social and Governance) considerations into investment management processes and practices. This policy is reviewed annually (or more frequently as required) and has been shared with the schemes’ investment managers for implementation.
(iv)Assumptions
The principal actuarial and financial assumptions used in valuations of the defined benefit pension schemes were as follows:
2020201920212020
%%%%
Discount rateDiscount rate1.44 2.05 Discount rate1.94 1.44 
Rate of inflation:Rate of inflation:Rate of inflation:
Retail Price Index (RPI)Retail Price Index (RPI)2.80 2.94 Retail Price Index (RPI)3.21 2.80 
Consumer Price Index (CPI)Consumer Price Index (CPI)2.41 1.99 Consumer Price Index (CPI)2.92 2.41 
Rate of salary increasesRate of salary increases0.00 0.00 Rate of salary increases0.00 0.00 
Weighted-average rate of increase for pensions in paymentWeighted-average rate of increase for pensions in payment2.61 2.57 Weighted-average rate of increase for pensions in payment2.88 2.61 
On 25 November 2020 the Chancellor of the Exchequer announced the outcome of a consultation into a reform of the calculation of RPI. It is now expected that from 2030 RPI will be aligned with CPIH (the Consumer Price Index including owner-occupiers' housing costs). To determine the RPI assumption a term-dependent inflation curve has been used adjusting for an assumed inflation risk premium. In the period to 2030 a gap of 100 basis points has been assumed between RPI and CPI; thereafter no gap has been assumed. The RPI reform is subject to judicial review in 2022, and its outcome may impact these assumptions in the future.
2020201920212020
YearsYearsYearsYears
Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:Life expectancy for member aged 60, on the valuation date:
MenMen27.027.5Men27.127.0
WomenWomen29.029.2Women29.129.0
Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:Life expectancy for member aged 60, 15 years after the valuation date:
MenMen28.128.5Men28.128.1
WomenWomen30.230.3Women30.330.2
The mortality assumptions used in the UK scheme valuations are based on standard tables published by the Institute and Faculty of Actuaries which were adjusted in line with the actual experience of the relevant schemes. The table shows that a member retiring at age 60 at 31 December 20202021 is assumed to live for, on average, 27.027.1 years for a male and 29.029.1 years for a female. In practice there will be much variation between individual members but these assumptions are expected to be appropriate across all members. It is assumed that younger members will live longer in retirement than those retiring now. This reflects the expectation that mortality rates will continue to fall over time as medical science and standards of living improve. To illustrate the degree of improvement assumed, the table also shows the life expectancy for members aged 45 now, when they retire in 15 years’ time at age 60. The Group has considered the impact of COVID-19 and whilst a higher number of deaths have been experienced in 2020,evidence to date indicates that this doesdid not have a material impact on the defined benefit obligation. The Group uses the CMI mortality projections model and in line with actuarial industry recommendations has placed no weight on 2020 mortality experience.
F-73F-69

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

(v)Amount, timing and uncertainty of future cash flows
Risk exposure of the defined benefit schemes
WhilstWhile the Group is not exposed to any unusual, entity specificentity-specific or scheme specificscheme-specific risks in its defined benefit pension schemes, it is exposed to a number of significant risks, detailed below:
Inflation rate risk: theThe majority of the plans’ benefit obligations are linked to inflation both in deferment and once in payment. Higher inflation will lead to higher liabilities although this will be materially offset by holdings of inflation-linked gilts and, in most cases, caps on the level of inflationary increases are in place to protect against extreme inflation.
Interest rate risk: The defined benefit obligation is determined using a discount rate derived from yields on AA-rated corporate bonds. A decrease in corporate bond yields will increase plan liabilities although this will be materially offset by an increase in the value of bond holdings and through the use of derivatives.
Longevity risk: The majority of the schemesschemes' obligations are to provide benefits for the life of the members so increases in life expectancy will result in an increase in the plans’ liabilities.
Investment risk: Scheme assets are invested in a diversified portfolio of debt securities, equities and other return-seeking assets. If the assets underperform the discount rate used to calculate the defined benefit obligation, it will reduce the surplus or increase the deficit. Volatility in asset values and the discount rate will lead to volatility in the net pension asset on the Group’s balance sheet and in other comprehensive income. To a lesser extent this will also lead to volatility in the pension expense in the Group’s income statement.
The ultimate cost of the defined benefit obligations to the Group will depend upon actual future events rather than the assumptions made. The assumptions made are unlikely to be borne out in practice and as such the cost may be higher or lower than expected.
Sensitivity analysis
The effect of reasonably possible changes in key assumptions on the value of scheme liabilities and the resulting pension charge in the Group’s income statement and on the net defined benefit pension scheme asset, for the Group’s three most significant schemes, is set out below. The sensitivities provided assume that all other assumptions and the value of the schemes’ assets remain unchanged, and are not intended to represent changes that are at the extremes of possibility. The calculations are approximate in nature and full detailed calculations could lead to a different result. It is unlikely that isolated changes to individual assumptions will be experienced in practice. Due to the correlation of assumptions, aggregating the effects of these isolated changes may not be a reasonable estimate of the actual effect of simultaneous changes in multiple assumptions.
The GroupThe BankEffect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptionsEffect of reasonably possible alternative assumptionsThe GroupThe Bank
Increase (decrease) in the
income statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
Increase (decrease) in the
income statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
Increase (decrease)
in the income
statement charge
(Increase) decrease in the
net defined benefit
pension scheme surplus
2020201920202019202020192020201920212020202120202021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Inflation (including pension increases)1:
Inflation (including pension increases)1:
Inflation (including pension increases)1:
Increase of 0.1 per centIncrease of 0.1 per cent11 12 531 467 6 337 302 Increase of 0.1 per cent12 11 481 531 7 309 337 
Decrease of 0.1 per centDecrease of 0.1 per cent(11)(12)(522)(460)(6)(7)(332)(296)Decrease of 0.1 per cent(12)(11)(475)(522)(7)(6)(306)(332)
Discount rate2:
Discount rate2:
Discount rate2:
Increase of 0.1 per centIncrease of 0.1 per cent(20)(20)(866)(763)(12)(11)(534)(471)Increase of 0.1 per cent(24)(20)(774)(866)(14)(12)(480)(534)
Decrease of 0.1 per centDecrease of 0.1 per cent19 21 890 784 11 12 548 484 Decrease of 0.1 per cent23 19 795 890 13 11 492 548 
Expected life expectancy of members:Expected life expectancy of members:Expected life expectancy of members:
Increase of one yearIncrease of one year39 40 2,146 1,636 23 24 1,370 1,038 Increase of one year44 39 1,934 2,146 27 23 1,253 1,370 
Decrease of one yearDecrease of one year(37)(39)(2,052)(1,575)(23)(23)(1,310)(1,000)Decrease of one year(42)(37)(1,852)(2,052)(26)(23)(1,200)(1,310)
1At 31 December 2020,2021, the assumed rate of RPI inflation is 3.21 per cent and CPI inflation 2.92 per cent (2020: RPI 2.80 per cent and CPI inflation 2.41 per cent (2019: RPI 2.94 per cent and CPI 1.99 per cent).
2At 31 December 2020,2021, the assumed discount rate is 1.441.94 per cent (2019: 2.05(2020: 1.44 per cent).
Sensitivity analysis method and assumptions
The sensitivity analysis above reflects the impact on the liabilities of the Group’s three most significant schemes which account for over 90 per cent of the Group’s defined benefit obligations. WhilstWhile differences in the underlying liability profiles for the remainder of the Group’s pension arrangements mean they may exhibit slightly different sensitivities to variations in these assumptions, the sensitivities provided above are indicative of the impact across the Group as a whole.
The inflation assumption sensitivity applies to both the assumed rate of increase in both the Consumer Price Index (CPI) and the Retail Price Index (RPI), and includes the impact on the rate of increases to pensions, both before and after retirement. These pension increases are linked to inflation (either CPI or RPI) subject to certain minimum and maximum limits.
The sensitivity analysis (including the inflation sensitivity) does not include the impact of any change in the rate of salary increases as pensionable salaries have been frozen since 2 April 2014.
The life expectancy assumption has been applied by allowing for an increase/decrease in life expectation from age 60 of one year, based upon the approximate weighted average age for each scheme. WhilstWhile this is an approximate approach and will not give the same result as a one year increase in life expectancy at every age, it provides an appropriate indication of the potential impact on the schemes from changes in life expectancy.
There was no change in the methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analysis from the prior year.

F-74F-70

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

Asset-liability matching strategies
The main schemes’ assets are invested in a diversified portfolio, consisting primarily of debt securities. The investment strategy is not static and will evolve to reflect the structure of liabilities within the schemes. Specific asset-liability matching strategies for each pension plan are independently determined by the responsible governance body for each scheme and in consultation with the employer.
A significant goal of the asset-liability matching strategies adopted by Group schemes is to reduce volatility caused by changes in market expectations of interest rates and inflation. In the main schemes, this is achieved by investing scheme assets in bonds, primarily fixed interest gilts and index linked gilts, and by entering into interest rate and inflation swap arrangements. These investments are structured to take into account the profile of scheme liabilities and actively managed to reflect both changing market conditions and changes to the liability profile. At 31 December 2021 the asset-liability matching strategy mitigated around 117 per cent of the liability sensitivity to interest rate movements and around 126 per cent of the liability sensitivity to inflation movements. In addition, a small amount of interest rate sensitivity arises through holdings of corporate and other debt securities. The higher level of hedging provides greater protection to the funding position of the schemes.
On 28 January 2020, the main schemes entered into a £10 billion longevity insurance arrangement to hedge around 20 per centpart of the schemes’ exposure to unexpected increases in life expectancy. This arrangement forms part of the schemes’ investment portfolio and will provide income to the schemes in the event that pensions are paid out for longer than expected. The transaction iswas structured as a pass-through with Scottish Widows as the insurer, and onwards reinsurance to Pacific Life Re Limited. The valuation of the swap was NaN£nil at inception and whilstwhile there has been a slightly higher than expected number of deaths in the population covered by the arrangement, this has not had a material impact on the value of the swap.
At 31 December 20202021 the asset-liability matching strategy mitigatedvalue of these swaps was £0.6 million, and is reflected in the value of scheme assets.
On 28 January 2022, the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No 1 entered into an additional £5.5 billion longevity insurance arrangement. The transaction is structured as a pass-through with Scottish Widows as the insurer, and onwards reinsurance to SCOR SE – UK Branch. The valuation of the swap was £nil at inception. In total the schemes have now hedged around 10525 per cent of the liability sensitivity to interest rate movements and around 100 per cent of the liability sensitivity to inflation movements. In addition a small amount of interest rate sensitivity arises through holdings of corporate and other debt securities.their longevity risk exposure.
Maturity profile of defined benefit obligation
The following table provides information on the weighted average duration of the defined benefit pension obligation and the distribution and timing of benefit payments:
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
YearsYearsYearsYears
Duration of the defined benefit obligation19181716
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
YearsYearsYearsYears
Duration of the defined benefit obligation17191617
The GroupThe Bank
2020201920202019
£m£m£m£m
Maturity analysis of benefits expected to be paid:
Within 12 months1,293 1,274 914 892 
Between 1 and 2 years1,350 1,373 940 963 
Between 2 and 5 years4,347 4,455 2,989 3,086 
Between 5 and 10 years8,301 8,426 5,547 5,673 
Between 10 and 15 years9,093 9,229 5,796 5,962 
Between 15 and 25 years17,485 17,400 10,590 10,603 
Between 25 and 35 years13,479 13,999 7,709 8,044 
Between 35 and 45 years7,162 8,291 3,645 4,266 
In more than 45 years2,287 3,160 874 1,208 
Maturity analysis of benefits expected to be paid:
The GroupThe Bank
2021202020212020
£m£m£m£m
Within 12 months1,352 1,293 940 914 
Between 1 and 2 years1,450 1,350 1,013 940 
Between 2 and 5 years4,651 4,347 3,188 2,989 
Between 5 and 10 years8,993 8,301 6,029 5,547 
Between 10 and 15 years9,668 9,093 6,170 5,796 
Between 15 and 25 years18,671 17,485 11,499 10,590 
Between 25 and 35 years13,846 13,479 7,925 7,709 
Between 35 and 45 years6,987 7,162 3,485 3,645 
In more than 45 years2,116 2,287 774 874 
Maturity analysis method and assumptions
The projected benefit payments are based on the assumptions underlying the assessment of the obligations, including allowance for expected future inflation. They are shown in their undiscounted form and therefore appear large relative to the discounted assessment of the defined benefit obligations recognised in the Group’s balance sheet. They are in respect of benefits that have been accrued prior to the respective year-end date only and make no allowance for any benefits that may have been accrued subsequently.
Defined contribution schemes
The Group operates a number of defined contribution pension schemes in the UK and overseas, principally Your Tomorrow and the defined contribution sections of the Lloyds Bank Pension Scheme No. 1.
During the year ended 31 December 20202021 the charge to the continuing operations income statement in respect of defined contribution schemes was £287 million (2020: £305 million (2019:million; 2019: £273 million; 2018: £288 million), representing the contributions payable by the employer in accordance with each scheme’s rules. In addition, in 2018 £3 million was charged within discontinued operations (see note 13).

F-75F-71

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
28NOTE 27: RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS (continued)

Other post-retirement benefit schemes
The Group operates a number of schemes which provide post-retirement healthcare benefits to certain employees, retired employees and their dependants. The principal scheme relates to former Lloyds Bank staff and under this scheme the Group has undertaken to meet the cost of post-retirement healthcare for all eligible former employees (and their dependants) who retired prior to 1 January 1996. The Group has entered into an insurance contract to provide these benefits and a provision has been made for the estimated cost of future insurance premiums payable.
For the principal post-retirement healthcare scheme, the latest actuarial valuation of the liability was carried out at 31 December 20202021 by qualified independent actuaries. The principal assumptions used were as set out above, except that the rate of increase in healthcare premiums has been assumed at 6.406.82 per cent (2019: 6.54(2020: 6.40 per cent).
Movements in the other post-retirement benefits obligation:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January(126)(124)(85)(84)At 1 January(109)(126)(68)(85)
Actuarial gains (losses)16 (6)15 (3)
Actuarial gainsActuarial gains4 16 1 15 
Insurance premiums paidInsurance premiums paid4 3 Insurance premiums paid3 2 
Charge for the yearCharge for the year(3)(4)(2)(2)Charge for the year(2)(3)(1)(2)
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments0 1 (1)Exchange and other adjustments1 — 1 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December(109)(126)

(68)(85)At 31 December(103)(109)

(65)(68)
29NOTE 28: DEFERRED TAX
The Group’s and the Bank’s deferred tax assets and liabilities are as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Statutory positionStatutory positionStatutory position
Deferred tax assetsDeferred tax assets3,468 3,366 2,109 2,029 Deferred tax assets4,048 3,468 2,434 2,109 
Deferred tax liabilitiesDeferred tax liabilities0 0 Deferred tax liabilities —  — 
Net deferred tax asset3,468 3,366 2,109 2,029 
Net deferred tax asset at 31 DecemberNet deferred tax asset at 31 December4,048 3,468 2,434 2,109 
Tax disclosureTax disclosureTax disclosure
Deferred tax assetsDeferred tax assets5,327 4,731 3,042 2,734 Deferred tax assets6,377 5,327 3,861 3,042 
Deferred tax liabilitiesDeferred tax liabilities(1,859)(1,365)(933)(705)Deferred tax liabilities(2,329)(1,859)(1,427)(933)
Net deferred tax asset3,468 3,366 2,109 2,029 
Net deferred tax asset at 31 DecemberNet deferred tax asset at 31 December4,048 3,468 2,434 2,109 
The statutory position reflects the deferred tax assets and liabilities as disclosed in the consolidated balance sheet and takes into account the ability of the Group and the Bank to net assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right of offset. The tax disclosure of deferred tax assets and liabilities ties to the amounts outlined in the tables below which splits the deferred tax assets and liabilities by type, before such netting.
As a result of legislation enacted in 2016, the UK corporation tax rate had been expected to reduce from 19 per cent to 17 per cent on 1 April 2020. The Group measures its deferred tax assets and liabilities at the value expected to be recoverable or payable in future periods, and so at 31 December 2019 substantially all of its deferred tax was measured using the 17 per cent tax rate. During the December 2019 election campaign, however, the UK government stated its intention to maintain the corporation tax rate at 19 per cent, and this tax rateFinance Act 2021, which was substantively enacted on 17 March 2020. The Group therefore remeasured its deferred tax assets and liabilities at 19 per cent. The deferred tax impact of this remeasurement in 2020 is a credit of £435 million in the income statement and a charge of £50 million in other comprehensive income.
On 3 March24 May 2021, the UK Government announced its intention to increaseincreases the rate of corporation tax from 19 per cent to 25 per cent with effect from 1 April 2023. The impact of this rate change is an increase in the Group’s net deferred tax asset as at 31 December 2021 of £942 million, comprising a £1,168 million credit included in the income statement and a £226 million charge included in equity. The tax credit in 2020 included an uplift in deferred tax assets following the announcement by the UK Government that it would maintain the corporation tax rate at 19 per cent.
On 27 October 2021, the UK Government announced its intention to decrease the rate of banking surcharge from 8 per cent to 3 per cent with effect from 1 April 2023. This change was substantively enacted on 2 February 2022 and its impact on deferred tax is therefore not included in these financial statements. Had this change in corporation taxbanking surcharge rate been substantively enacted onat 31 December 2020,2021, the impact would have been to increase netrecognise a £3 million deferred tax assets by approximately £900 million. The UK Government also announced that in 2021 it will undertake a review of the surcharge on banking companies, its intention being to ensure that the combined rate of corporation tax and banking surcharge on bank profits does not increase substantially from its current level. The results of this review are expected to be announced later in 2021.
On 29 October 2018, the UK government announced its intention to restrict the use of capital tax losses to 50 per cent of any future gains arising. This restriction was substantively enacted on 2 July 2020 and as a result additional deferred tax liabilities of £16 million for the Group and £3 million for the Bank were recognised, with an impact of £NaNcharge in the income statement and £16an £83 million incredit within other comprehensive income, forincreasing the Group and £7 million in the income statement and a credit of £4 million in other comprehensive income for the Bank, in respect of unrealised gains at that date.Group's net deferred tax asset by £80 million.

F-76F-72

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
29NOTE 28: DEFERRED TAX (continued)
Movements in deferred tax liabilitiesassets and assetsliabilities (before taking into consideration the offsetting of balances within the same taxing jurisdiction) can be summarised as follows:
The GroupTax lossesProperty,
plant and
equipment
Pension
liabilities
ProvisionsShare-based
payments
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
Deferred tax assets£m £m£m
At 1 January 20193,783 682 79 196 28 4,774 
(Charge) credit to the income statement(183)(12)(100)(87)19 126 (233)
Credit to other comprehensive income74 116 190 
At 31 December 20193,600 670 53 225 32 19 132 4,731 
(Charge) credit to the income statement454 8 6 4 (5)(12)28 94 577 
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income0 0 (3)22 0 0 0 0 19 
The Group
Deferred tax assets
The Group
Deferred tax assets
Tax lossesProperty,
plant and
equipment
ProvisionsShare-based
payments
Pension
liabilities
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m £m£m £m£m
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20203,600 670 225 32 53 19 — 132 4,731 
Credit (charge) to the income statementCredit (charge) to the income statement454 (5)(12)28 94 577 
Credit (charge) to other comprehensive incomeCredit (charge) to other comprehensive income— — 22 — (3)— — — 19 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20204,054 678 56 251 27 7 28 226 5,327 At 31 December 20204,054 678 251 27 56 28 226 5,327 
Credit (charge) to the income statementCredit (charge) to the income statement964 82 13 (10)15 30 (28)(50)1,016 
Credit (charge) to other comprehensive incomeCredit (charge) to other comprehensive income  36  (2)   34 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20215,018 760 300 17 69 37  176 6,377 
Capitalised
software
enhancements
Acquisition
fair value
Pension
assets
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
Deferred tax liabilities£m
At 1 January 2019(36)(698)(273)(388)(101)(56)(1,552)
(Charge) credit to the income statement15 215 59 (34)(21)(53)181 
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income64 (140)84 
Exchange and other adjustments(2)(2)
At 31 December 2019(21)(483)(150)(562)(38)(111)(1,365)
The Group
Deferred tax liabilities
The Group
Deferred tax liabilities
Capitalised
software
enhancements
Acquisition
fair value
Pension
assets
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020(21)(483)(150)(562)(38)(111)(1,365)
(Charge) credit to the income statement(Charge) credit to the income statement(207)147 (77)(106)(22)(94)(359)(Charge) credit to the income statement(207)147 (77)(106)(22)(94)(359)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income0 0 (165)(31)60 0 (136)(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income— — (165)(31)60 — (136)
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Exchange and other adjustments— — — — — 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020(228)(336)(392)(699)0 (204)(1,859)At 31 December 2020(228)(336)(392)(699)— (204)(1,859)
(Charge) credit to the income statement(Charge) credit to the income statement(47)(16)(93)(65)2 (115)(334)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income  (846)764 (54) (136)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021(275)(352)(1,331) (52)(319)(2,329)
1Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.
The BankTax lossesProperty,
plant and
equipment
Pension
liabilities
ProvisionsShare-based
payments
Other
temporary
differences
Total
Deferred tax assets£m
At 1 January 20192,284 375 30 53 20 2,763 
(Charge) credit to the income statement(86)(32)(57)(41)(1)12 (205)
The Bank
Deferred tax assets
The Bank
Deferred tax assets
Tax lossesProperty,
plant and
equipment
ProvisionsShare-based
payments
Pension
liabilities
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20202,198 343 128 19 33 13 2,734 
Credit (charge) to the income statementCredit (charge) to the income statement309 (38)10 (1)290 
Credit (charge) to other comprehensive incomeCredit (charge) to other comprehensive income— — 22 — (4)— 18 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20202,507 305 160 18 30 22 3,042 
Credit (charge) to the income statementCredit (charge) to the income statement683 101 14 (8)6 (13)783 
Credit to other comprehensive incomeCredit to other comprehensive income60 116 0176 Credit to other comprehensive income  36    36 
At 31 December 20192,198 343 33 128 19 13 2,734 
(Charge) credit to the income statement309 (38)1 10 (1)9 290 
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income0 0 (4)22 0 0 18 
At 31 December 20202,507 305 30 160 18 22 3,042 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20213,190 406 210 10 36 9 3,861 
Capitalised
software
enhancements
Pension
assets
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
Deferred tax liabilities£m £m£m
At 1 January 2019(31)(176)(431)(103)(38)(779)
(Charge) credit to the income statement12 59 0(19)17 69 
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income20 (105)86 (1)
Exchange and other adjustments
At 31 December 2019(19)(97)(536)(36)(17)(705)
The Bank
Deferred tax liabilities
The Bank
Deferred tax liabilities
Capitalised
software
enhancements
Pension
assets
Derivatives
Asset
revaluations
1
Other
temporary
differences
Total
£m £m£m
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 2020(19)(97)(536)(36)(17)(705)
(Charge) credit to the income statement(Charge) credit to the income statement(193)(5)1 (9)12 (194)(Charge) credit to the income statement(193)(5)(9)12 (194)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income0 (105)30 40 0 (35)(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income— (105)30 40 — (35)
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments0 0 0 0 1 1 Exchange and other adjustments— — — — 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020(212)(207)(505)(5)(4)(933)At 31 December 2020(212)(207)(505)(5)(4)(933)
Charge to the income statementCharge to the income statement(44)(8)(1)(1)0(54)
(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income(Charge) credit to other comprehensive income (584)190 (46) (440)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021(256)(799)(316)(52)(4)(1,427)
1Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

F-77F-73

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
29NOTE 28: DEFERRED TAX (continued)
At 31 December 2021 the Group carried net deferred tax assets on its balance sheet of £4,048 million (2020: £3,468 million) and the Bank carried deferred tax assets of £2,434 million (2020: £2,109 million) principally relating to tax losses carried forward.
Estimation of income taxes includes the assessment of recoverability of deferred tax assets. Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the extent that they are considered more likely than not to be recoverable based on existing tax laws and forecasts of future taxable profits against which the underlying tax deductions can be utilised. The Group has recognised a deferred tax asset of £5,018 million (2020: £4,054 million), and the Bank £3,190 million (2020: £2,507 million) in respect of trading losses carried forward. Substantially all of these losses have arisen in Bank of Scotland plc and Lloyds Bank plc, and they will be utilised as taxable profits arise in those legal entities in future periods.
The Group’s expectations of future UK taxable profits require management judgement, and take into account the Group’s long-term financial and strategic plans and anticipated future tax-adjusting items. In making this assessment, account is taken of business plans, the Board-approved operating plan and the expected future economic outlook as set out in the strategic report, as well as the risks associated with future regulatory, climate-related and other change, in order to produce a base case forecast of future UK taxable profits. Under current law there is no expiry date for UK trading losses not yet utilised, and given the forecast of future profitability and the Group’s commitment to the UK market, in management's judgement it is more likely than not that the value of the losses will be recovered by the Group while still operating as a going concern. Banking tax losses that arose before 1 April 2015 can only be used against 25 per cent of taxable profits arising after 1 April 2016, and they cannot be used to reduce the surcharge on banking profits. These restrictions in utilisation mean that the value of the deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses is only expected to be fully recovered by 2047 (2020: 2049) in the base case forecast. The rate of recovery of the Group’s tax loss asset is not a straight line, being affected by the relative profitability of the legal entities in future periods, and the relative size of their tax losses carried forward. It is expected in the base case that 60 per cent of the value will be recovered by 2034, when Bank of Scotland plc will have utilised all of its available tax losses. It is possible that future tax law changes could materially affect the timing of recovery and the value of these losses ultimately realised by the Group. The value of the deferred tax asset in respect of tax losses increased by £1,156 million in 2021 as a result of the change in UK tax rates.
Deferred tax not recognised
Deferred tax assets of approximately£151 million (2020: £104 million (2019: £111 million) for the Group and £90£116 million (2019: £84(2020: £90 million) for the Bank have not been recognised in respect of £532£593 million for the Group and £460£453 million for the Bank of UK tax losses and other temporary differences which can only be used to offset future capital gains. UK capital losses can be carried forward indefinitely.
In addition, 0No deferred tax asset iswas recognised in 2020 in respect of unrelieved foreign tax credits of £46 million (2019: £46 million) for the Group and £7 million (2019: £7 million) for the Bank, as there arewere no expected future taxable profits against which the credits cancould be utilised. TheseThe formal closure of the branches in respect of which these credits can be carried forward indefinitely.arose means that the credits have now been extinguished.
No deferred tax has been recognised in respect of foreign trade losses where it is not more likely than not that we will be able to utilise them in future periods. Of the asset not recognised, £34 million for the Group and £NaNNaN for the Bank (2019: £35(2020: £34 million for the Group and £NaN£nil for the Bank) relates to losses that will expire if not used within 20 years, and £5 million for the Group and £3 million for the Bank (2020: £43 million for the Group and £4 million for the Bank (2019: £45 million for the Group and £5 million for the Bank) relates to losses with no expiry date.
As a result of parent company exemptions on dividends from subsidiaries and on capital gains on disposal there are no significant taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, branches, associates and joint arrangements.
F-74
30

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 29: OTHER PROVISIONS
The GroupProvisions
for financial
commitments
and guarantees
Payment
protection
insurance
Other
regulatory
provisions
OtherTotal
£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January 2020173 1,874 395 696 3,138 
Exchange and other adjustments0 0 2 0 2 
Provisions applied0 (1,700)(465)(190)(2,355)
Charge for the year253 85 329 270 937 
At 31 December 2020426 259 261 776 1,722 
The BankProvisions
for financial
commitments
and guarantees
Payment
protection
insurance
Other
regulatory
provisions
OtherTotal
£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January 202090 622 161 563 1,436 
Exchange and other adjustments0 0 4 2 6 
Provisions applied0 (726)(233)(148)(1,107)
Charge for the year155 169 143 166 633 
At 31 December 2020245 65 75 583 968 
The GroupThe Bank
Provisions
for financial
commitments
and guarantees
Regulatory
and legal
provisions
OtherTotalProvisions
for financial
commitments
and guarantees
Regulatory
and legal
provisions
OtherTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January 2021426 520 776 1,722 245 140 583 968 
Exchange and other adjustments(1)37 (9)27 3  (1)2 
Provisions applied (680)(260)(940) (190)(213)(403)
(Release) charge for the year(231)1,177 178 1,124 (134)196 142 204 
At 31 December 2021194 1,054 685 1,933 114 146 511 771 
Provisions for financial commitments and guarantees
Provisions are recognised for expected credit losses on undrawn loan commitments and financial guarantees. See also note 16.15.
Payment protection insurance (excluding MBNA)
The Group has madeRegulatory and legal provisions for PPI costs totalling £21,906 million; of which £85 million was recognised in the final quarter of the year ended 31 December 2020. Of the approximately six million enquiries received pre-deadline, more than 99 per cent have now been processed. The £85 million charge in the fourth quarter was driven by the impact of coronavirus delaying operational activities during 2020, the final stages of work to ensure operational completeness ahead of an orderly programme close and final validation of information requests and complaints with third parties that resulted in a limited number of additional complaints to be handled. A small part of the costs incurred during the year also reflect the costs associated with litigation activity to date.
At 31 December 2020, a provision of £198 million remained unutilised relating to complaints and associated administration costs excluding amounts relating to MBNA. Total cash payments were £1,459 million during the year ended 31 December 2020.
Payment protection insurance (MBNA)
As announced in December 2016, the Group's exposure continues to remain capped at £240 million under the terms of the MBNA sale and purchase agreement. NaN additional charge has been made by MBNA to its PPI provision in the year ended 31 December 2020; total cash payments in the year were £241 million and the remaining provision at 31 December 2020 was £61 million (31 December 2019: £302 million).
Other provisions for legal actions and regulatory matters
In the course of its business, the Group is engaged in discussions with the PRA, FCA and other UK and overseas regulators and other governmental authorities on a range of matters. The Group also receives complaints in connection with its past conduct and claims brought by or on behalf of current and former employees, customers, investors and other third parties and is subject to legal proceedings and other legal actions. Where significant, provisions are held against the costs expected to be incurred in relation to these matters and matters arising from related internal reviews. During the year ended 31 December 20202021 the Group charged a further £329£1,177 million in respect of legal actions and other regulatory matters, including a charge in respect of HBOS Reading and thecharges for other legacy programmes.
The unutilised balance at 31 December 20202021 was £261£1,054 million (31 December 2019: £3952020: £520 million). The most significant items are as follows.
F-78

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
30 OTHER PROVISIONS (continued)
HBOS Reading – review
The Group completed its compensation assessment for those within the Customer Review in 2019 with more than £109 million of compensation paid, in addition to £15 million for ex-gratia payments and £6 million for the reimbursement of legal fees. The Group is now applying the recommendations from Sir Ross Cranston’s review, issued in December 2019, including a reassessment of direct and consequential losses by an independent panel (the Foskett Panel), an extension of debt relief and a wider definition of de facto directors. The appeal process for the further assessment of debt relief and de facto director status is now nearing completion. Further details of the panelFoskett Panel were announced on 3 April 2020 and the panel'sFoskett Panel's full scope and methodology was published on 7 July 2020. The panel’sFoskett Panel’s stated objective is to consider cases via a non-legalistic and fair process and to make their decisions in a generous, fair and common-sense manner. Detailscommon sense manner, assessing claims against an expanded definition of an appeal process for the further assessmentsfraud and on a lower evidential basis.
Following the emergence of debt relief and de facto director status have also been announced. The Group continues to make progress on its assessmentthe first outcomes of claims for further debt relief and de facto director status, completing preliminary assessments for 98 per cent of claims on both debt relief and de facto directors. As part of these activitiesthe Foskett Panel through 2021, the Group has recorded chargescharged a further £790 million in the year ended 31 December 2021, of which £600 million was recognised in the fourth quarter. This includes operational costs in relation to compensation paymentsDame Linda Dobbs' review, which is considering whether the issues relating to HBOS Reading were investigated and associated costs (projectedappropriately reported by the Group during the period from January 2009 to January 2017, and other programme costs. A significant proportion of the fourth quarter of 2021) in 2020 in applyingcharge relates to the recommendations, in respect of debt relief and de facto director status. During 2021, decisionsestimated future awards from the independent panelFoskett Panel. To date the Foskett Panel has shared outcomes on a limited subset of the total population which covers a wide range of businesses and different claim characteristics. The estimated awards provision recognised is therefore materially dependent on the assumption that the limited number of awards to date are representative of the full population of cases. The 2021 charge increases the lifetime cost to £1,225 million. The final outcome could be significantly different from the current provision once the re-review on direct and consequential losses will start to be issued, which is likely to result in further charges but itconcluded by the Foskett Panel. There is not possible to estimateno confirmed timeline for the potential impact at this stage.completion of the Foskett Panel re-review process. The Group is committed to implementing Sir Ross'Ross's recommendations in full.
Payment protection insurance
The Dame Linda Dobbs review, which is consideringGroup has made provisions for PPI costs over a number of years totalling £21,906 million. Good progress continues to be made towards ensuring operational completeness, ahead of an orderly programme close. At 31 December 2021, a provision of £20 million remained outstanding (excluding amounts related to MBNA), with total cash payments of £178 million during the Group’s handling of HBOS Reading between January 2009year.
In addition to the above provision, the Group continues to challenge PPI litigation cases, with mainly legal fees and January 2017, is now expected to complete towards the end of 2021. The cost of undertaking the review is includedoperational costs associated with litigation activity recognised within regulatory and legal provisions, including a charge in the revised provision.
The 2020 chargefourth quarter. PPI litigation remains inherently uncertain, with a number of £159 million, and lifetime cost of £435 million, includes both compensation payments and operational costs.key Court judgments due to be delivered in 2022.
Arrears handling related activities
TheTo date the Group has provided an additional £35a total of £1,026 million in the year ended 31 December 2020 for arrears handling related activities, bringing the total provided to date to £1,016 million; theactivities. The unutilised balance at 31 December 20202021 was £62£26 million.
Other
Following the sale of TSB Banking Group plc, the Group raised a provision of £665 million in relation to various ongoing commitments; £111 millioncommitments in respect of this provision remained unutilised atthe divestment. At 31 December 2020.£90 million remained unutilised; the Group expects the majority of the remaining provision to be utilised in the next twelve months and the provision to be fully utilised by 31 December 2025.
The Group carries provisions of £114 million in respect of dilapidations, rent reviews and other property-related matters. Provisions are also made for staff and other costs related to Group restructuring initiatives at the point at which the Group becomes committed to the expenditure. Atexpenditure; at 31 December 20202021 provisions of £196£187 million (31 December 2019: £1142020: £196 million) were held.
The Group carries provisions of £112£78 million (2019: £118(2020: £112 million) for indemnities and other matters relating to legacy business disposals in prior years. Whilst there remains significant uncertainty as to the timing of the utilisation of the provisions, the Group expects the majority of the remaining provisions to have been utilised by 31 December 2026.
F-79F-75

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
31NOTE 30: SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES
The movement in subordinated liabilities during the year was as follows:
Preferred
securities
Undated
subordinated
liabilities
Dated
subordinated
liabilities
TotalPreferred
securities
Undated
subordinated
liabilities
Dated
subordinated
liabilities
Total
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m
At 1 January 20193,210 529 9,006 12,745 
Issued during the year:
4.1378% Dated Subordinated Notes due 2026492 492 
2.68229% Dated Subordinated Notes due 203870 70 
2.0367% Dated Subordinated Notes due 2028218 218 
780 780 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
13% Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2019(49)(49)
10.375% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2024 callable 2019(135)(135)
9.375% Subordinated Bonds 2021(328)(328)
6.375% Subordinated Instruments 2019(250)(250)
(49)(713)(762)
Foreign exchange movements(83)(36)(276)(395)
Other movements (all non-cash)189 23 218 
At 31 December 20193,267 516 8,803 12,586 
Issued during the year:
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20203,267 516 8,803 12,586 
Issued during the year1:
Issued during the year1:
2.6787% Fixed rate bond due 20252.6787% Fixed rate bond due 20250 0 303 303 2.6787% Fixed rate bond due 2025— — 303 303 
£914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035£914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 20350 0 471 471 £914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035— — 471 471 
£393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035£393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 20350 0 293 293 £393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035— — 293 293 
0 0 1,067 1,067 — — 1,067 1,067 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)(119)0 0 (119)12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)(119)— — (119)
13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)(519)0 0 (519)13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)(519)— — (519)
7.281% Perpetual Regulatory Tier One Securities (Series B) (£150 million)7.281% Perpetual Regulatory Tier One Securities (Series B) (£150 million)(123)0 0 (123)7.281% Perpetual Regulatory Tier One Securities (Series B) (£150 million)(123)— — (123)
6.85% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (US$1,000 million)6.85% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (US$1,000 million)(580)0 0 (580)6.85% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (US$1,000 million)(580)— — (580)
7.881% Guaranteed Non-voting Non-cumulative Preferred Securities (£245 million)7.881% Guaranteed Non-voting Non-cumulative Preferred Securities (£245 million)(289)0 0 (289)7.881% Guaranteed Non-voting Non-cumulative Preferred Securities (£245 million)(289)— — (289)
6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)0 0 (1,464)(1,464)6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)— — (1,464)(1,464)
4.50% Fixed Rate Step-up Subordinated Notes due 2030 (€309 million)4.50% Fixed Rate Step-up Subordinated Notes due 2030 (€309 million)0 0 (276)(276)4.50% Fixed Rate Step-up Subordinated Notes due 2030 (€309 million)— — (276)(276)
5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)0 0 (370)(370)5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)— — (370)(370)
6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)0 0 (674)(674)6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)— — (674)(674)
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)0 0 (90)(90)Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)— — (90)(90)
9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)0 0 (240)(240)9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)— — (240)(240)
7.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 20207.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 20200 0 (4)(4)7.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020— — (4)(4)
(1,630)0 (3,118)(4,748)(1,630)— (3,118)(4,748)
Foreign exchange movementsForeign exchange movements(59)15 105 61 Foreign exchange movements(59)15 105 61 
Other movements (all non-cash)194 (26)108 276 
Other movements (cash and non-cash)Other movements (cash and non-cash)194 (26)108 276 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20201,772 505 6,965 9,242 At 31 December 20201,772 505 6,965 9,242 
Issued during the year1:
Issued during the year1:
3.916% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2048 (US$1,500 million)3.916% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2048 (US$1,500 million)  1,074 1,074 
3.724% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes 2041 (£500 million)3.724% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes 2041 (£500 million)  888 888 
2.754% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes 2032 (US$1,750 million)2.754% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes 2032 (US$1,750 million)  1,300 1,300 
  3,262 3,262 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
7.754% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (Class B) (£150 million)7.754% Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Securities (Class B) (£150 million)(156)  (156)
Series 2 (US$500 million)Series 2 (US$500 million) (94) (94)
Series 3 (US$600 million)Series 3 (US$600 million) (120) (120)
Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes (US$250 million)Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes (US$250 million) (24) (24)
Series 1 (US$750 million)Series 1 (US$750 million) (97) (97)
9.375% Subordinated Bonds 2021 (£500 million)9.375% Subordinated Bonds 2021 (£500 million)  (200)(200)
5.374% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (€160 million)5.374% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (€160 million)  (145)(145)
4.553% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$1,500 million)4.553% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$1,500 million)  (1,122)(1,122)
6% Subordinated Notes 2033 (US$750 million)6% Subordinated Notes 2033 (US$750 million)  (216)(216)
4.293% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$824 million)4.293% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$824 million)  (612)(612)
4.503% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$1,353 million)4.503% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2021 (US$1,353 million)00(1,004)(1,004)
(156)(335)(3,299)(3,790)
Foreign exchange movementsForeign exchange movements17  (80)(63)
Other movements (cash and non-cash)Other movements (cash and non-cash)28  (21)7 
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20211,661 170 6,827 8,658 
1TheIssuances in the year generated cash inflows of £3,262 million (2020: £303 million); the repurchases and redemptions resulted in cash outflows of £3,745 million (2020: £4,156 million). Cash payments in respect of interest on subordinated liabilities in the year amounted to £525 million (2019: £762(2020: £852 million).
Certain of the above securities were issued or redeemed under exchange offers, which did not result in an extinguishment of the original financial liability for accounting purposes.

F-80F-76

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
31NOTE 30: SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES (continued)

Preferred
securities
Undated
subordinated
liabilities
Dated
subordinated
liabilities
TotalPreferred
securities
Undated
subordinated
liabilities
Dated
subordinated
liabilities
Total
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m
At 1 January 20192,312 437 6,779 9,528 
Issued in the year:
4.1378% Dated Subordinated Notes due 2026492 492 
2.68229% Dated Subordinated Notes due 203870 70 
2.0367% Dated Subordinated Notes due 2028218 218 
780 780 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
13% Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2019(49)(49)
10.375% Subordinated Fixed to Fixed Rate Notes 2024 callable 2019(135)(135)
(49)(135)(184)
Foreign exchange movements(57)(12)(206)(275)
Other movements (all non-cash)28 32 60 
At 31 December 20192,234 

425 

7,250 

9,909 
At 1 January 2020At 1 January 20202,234 425 7,250 9,909 
Issued in the year:Issued in the year:Issued in the year:
2.6787% Fixed rate bond due 20252.6787% Fixed rate bond due 20250 0 303 303 2.6787% Fixed rate bond due 2025— — 303 303 
£914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035£914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 20350 0 517 517 £914,633,000 2.73% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035— — 517 517 
£393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035£393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 20350 0 394 394 £393,939,000 2.61% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset Notes due 2035— — 394 394 
0 0 1,214 1,214 — — 1,214 1,214 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:

Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)(119)0 0 (119)12% Fixed to Floating Rate Perpetual Tier 1 Capital Securities callable 2024 (US$2,000 million)(119)— — (119)
13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)(519)0 0 (519)13% Sterling Step-up Perpetual Capital Securities callable 2029 (£700 million)(519)— — (519)
6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)0 0 (1,464)(1,464)6.5% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020 (€1,500 million)— — (1,464)(1,464)
5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)0 0 (370)(370)5.75% Subordinated Fixed to Floating Rate Notes 2025 callable 2020 (£350 million)— — (370)(370)
6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)0 0 (674)(674)6.50% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2020 (US$2,000 million)— — (674)(674)
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)0 0 (90)(90)Subordinated Floating Rate Notes 2020 (€100 million)— — (90)(90)
9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)0 0 (240)(240)9.625% Subordinated Bonds 2023 (£300 million)— — (240)(240)
7.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 20207.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 20200 0 (4)(4)7.375% Dated Subordinated Notes 2020— — (4)(4)
(638)0 (2,842)(3,480)(638)— (2,842)(3,480)
Foreign exchange movementsForeign exchange movements(43)(10)50 (3)Foreign exchange movements(43)(10)50 (3)
Other movements (all non-cash)19 (1)93 111 
Other movements (cash and non-cash)Other movements (cash and non-cash)19 (1)93 111 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 20201,572 

414 

5,765 

7,751 At 31 December 20201,572 

414 

5,765 

7,751 
Issued in the year:Issued in the year:
3.916% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2048 (US$1,500 million)3.916% Subordinated Fixed Rate Notes 2048 (US$1,500 million)  1,074 1,074 
3.724% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset notes 2041 (£500 million)3.724% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset notes 2041 (£500 million)  888 888 
2.754% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset notes 2032 (US$1,750 million)2.754% Dated Subordinated Fixed Rate Reset notes 2032 (US$1,750 million)  1,300 1,300 
  3,262 3,262 
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Repurchases and redemptions during the year1:
Series 2 (US$500 million)Series 2 (US$500 million) (94) (94)
Series 3 (US$600 million)Series 3 (US$600 million) (120) (120)
Series 1 (US$750 million)Series 1 (US$750 million) (96) (96)
4.553% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$1,500 million)4.553% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$1,500 million)  (1,122)(1,122)
4.293% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$824 million)4.293% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$824 million)  (612)(612)
4.503% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$1,353 million)4.503% Subordinated Fixed Rate Note 2021 (US$1,353 million)  (1,004)(1,004)
 (310)(2,738)(3,048)
Foreign exchange movementsForeign exchange movements17 (1)(40)(24)
Other movements (cash and non-cash)Other movements (cash and non-cash)37 (1)(70)(34)
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 20211,626 102 6,179 7,907 
1TheIssuances in the year generated cash inflows of £3,262 million (2020: £496 million); the repurchases and redemptions resulted in cash outflows of £3,049 million (2020: £2,726 million). Cash payments in respect of interest on subordinated liabilities in the year amounted to £423 million (2019: £184(2020: £759 million).
Certain of the above securities were issued or redeemed under exchange offers, which did not result in an extinguishment of the original financial liability for accounting purposes.
These securities will, in the event of the winding-up of the issuer, be subordinated to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the issuer, other than creditors whose claims rank equally with, or are junior to, the claims of the holders of the subordinated liabilities. The subordination of specific subordinated liabilities is determined in respect of the issuer and any guarantors of that liability. The claims of holders of preference shares and preferred securities are generally junior to those of the holders of undated subordinated liabilities, which in turn are junior to the claims of holders of the dated subordinated liabilities. Neither the Group nor the Bank has had any defaults of principal, interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated liabilities during 2020 (2019:2021 (2020: none).
F-81F-77

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

32NOTE 31: SHARE CAPITAL
(1)Authorised share capital
The Group and Bank
202020192018
£m£m£m
Sterling
1,650 million ordinary shares of £1 each1,650 1,650 1,650 
1 cumulative floating rate Preference share of £10 
100 6 per cent Non-Cumulative Redeemable Preference shares of £1 each0 
175 million Preference shares of 25p each44 44 44 
1,694 1,694 1,694 
US dollarsUS$mUS$mUS$m
160 million Preference shares of 25 cents each40 40 40 
Euro€m€m€m
160 million Preference shares of 25 cents each40 40 40 
Japanese yen¥m¥m¥m
50 million Preference shares of ¥25 each1,250 1,250 1,250 
As permitted by the Companies Act 2006, the Bank has removed references to authorised share capital from its articles of association.
(2)Issued and fully paid ordinary shares
202020192018202020192018The Group and the Bank
Number of
shares
Number of
shares
£m£m202120202019202120202019
Sterling
Number of sharesNumber of shares£m£m
Ordinary shares of £1 eachOrdinary shares of £1 eachOrdinary shares of £1 each
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January1,574,285,751 1,574,285,751 1,574,285,751 1,574 1,574 1,574 At 1 January1,574,285,752 1,574,285,751 1,574,285,751 1,574 1,574 1,574 
Issued in the yearIssued in the year1 0 Issued in the year —  — — 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December1,574,285,752 1,574,285,751 1,574,285,751 1,574 1,574 1,574 At 31 December1,574,285,752 1,574,285,752 1,574,285,751 1,574 1,574 1,574 
(3)Share capital and control
There are no limitations on voting rights or restrictions on the transfer of shares in the Bank other than as set out in the articles of association, and certain restrictions which may from time to time be imposed by law and regulations (for example, insider trading laws).
Ordinary shares
The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive the Bank’s report and accounts, attend, speak and vote at general meetings and appoint proxies to exercise voting rights. Holders of ordinary shares may also receive a dividend (subject to the provisions of the Bank’s articles of association) and on a winding up may share in the assets of the Bank.
Issued and fully paid preference shares
The Bank has in issue various classes of preference shares which are all classified as liabilities under accounting standards.
33NOTE 32: SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT
The Group and Bank
202020192018
£m£m£m
At 1 January and 31 December600 600 600 
F-82
The Group and the Bank
202120202019
£m£m£m
At 1 January and 31 December600 600 600 

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
34NOTE 33: OTHER RESERVES
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Other reserves comprise:
Merger reserve6,348 6,348 6,348 0 
Merger reserve1
Merger reserve1
6,348 6,348 6,348  — — 
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRevaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income(558)(538)(379)14 103 281 Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income(362)(558)(538)105 14 103 
Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRevaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income0 0 Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income — —  — — 
Cash flow hedging reserveCash flow hedging reserve1,507 1,556 1,110 1,367 1,607 1,268 Cash flow hedging reserve(451)1,507 1,556 720 1,367 1,607 
Foreign currency translation reserveForeign currency translation reserve(116)(116)(114)1 (6)Foreign currency translation reserve(135)(116)(116)(1)— 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December7,181 7,250 6,965 1,382 1,710 1,543 At 31 December5,400 7,181 7,250 824 1,382 1,710 
1There has been no movements in this reserve in 2021, 2020 or 2019.
The merger reserve arose on the transfer of HBOS plc from the Bank’s ultimate holding company in January 2010.
The revaluation reservereserves in respect of debt securities and equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income representsrepresent the cumulative after taxafter-tax unrealised change in the fair value of financial assets so classified since initial recognition; or in the case of financial assets obtained on acquisitions of businesses, since the date of acquisition.
The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative after-tax gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss.
The foreign currency translation reserve represents the cumulative after-tax gains and losses on the translation of foreign operations and exchange differences arising on financial instruments designated as hedges of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations.
Movements in other reserves were as follows:
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Merger reserve
At 1 January and 31 December6,348 6,348 6,348 0 
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income
At 1 January(538)(379)(195)103 281 483 
Change in fair value46 (34)(31)12 (50)(58)
Deferred tax29 11 31 (8)13 34 
Current tax(2)0 
73 (23)4 (37)(24)
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals (note 8)(145)(196)(268)(138)(201)(258)
Deferred tax47 61 84 44 61 80 
(98)(135)(184)(94)(140)(178)
Impairment recognised in the income statement5 (1)1 (1)
At 31 December(558)(538)(379)14 103 281 
F-83F-78

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
34NOTE 33: OTHER RESERVES (continued)
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income
At 1 January0 (35)0 (42)
Change in fair value0 (98)0 (102)
Deferred tax(16)12 22 4 12 
Current tax0 0 
(16)12 (76)4 12 (102)
Realised gains and losses transferred to retained profits0 132 0 144 
Deferred tax16 (12)(21)(4)(12)
Current tax0 0 
16 (12)111 (4)(12)144 
At 31 December0 0 
Movements in other reserves were as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
Revaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRevaluation reserve in respect of debt securities held at fair value through other comprehensive income202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January(558)(538)(379)14 103 281 
Change in fair valueChange in fair value137 46 (34)139 12 (50)
Deferred taxDeferred tax(44)29 11 (47)(8)13 
Current taxCurrent tax (2)—  — — 
20202019201820202019201893 73 (23)92 (37)
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Cash flow hedging reserve
At 1 January1,556 1,110 1,573 1,607 1,268 1,554 
Change in fair value of hedging derivatives709 1,166 91 85 892 255 
Income statement transfers in respect of disposals (note 8)Income statement transfers in respect of disposals (note 8)116 (145)(196)(2)(138)(201)
Deferred taxDeferred tax(229)(290)(43)(66)(217)(72)Deferred tax(11)47 61  44 61 
480 876 48 19 675 183 105 (98)(135)(2)(94)(140)
Income statement transfers(727)(580)(691)(355)(448)(628)
Deferred tax198 150 180 96 112 159 
(529)(430)(511)(259)(336)(469)
Impairment recognised in the income statementImpairment recognised in the income statement(2)(1)1 (1)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December1,507 1,556 1,110 1,367 1,607 1,268 At 31 December(362)(558)(538)105 14 103 
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Foreign currency translation reserve
At 1 January(116)(114)(207)0 (6)76 
Currency translation differences arising in the year0 (2)(15)1 
Income statement transfers0 108 0 (84)
At 31 December(116)(116)(114)1 (6)
The GroupThe Bank
Revaluation reserve in respect of equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January — —  — — 
Change in fair value — —  — — 
Deferred tax1 (16)12 1 12 
1 (16)12 1 12 
Realised gains and losses transferred to retained profits — —  — — 
Deferred tax(1)16 (12)(1)(4)(12)
(1)16 (12)(1)(4)(12)
At 31 December — —  — — 
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
Cash flow hedging reserve£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January1,507 1,556 1,110 1,367 1,607 1,268 
Change in fair value of hedging derivatives(2,138)709 1,166 (438)85 892 
Deferred tax606 (229)(290)82 (66)(217)
(1,532)480 876 (356)19 675 
Net income statement transfers(584)(727)(580)(399)(355)(448)
Deferred tax158 198 150 108 96 112 
(426)(529)(430)(291)(259)(336)
At 31 December(451)1,507 1,556 720 1,367 1,607 
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
Foreign currency translation reserve£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January(116)(116)(114)1 — (6)
Currency translation differences arising in the year(19)— (2)(2)
Income statement transfers — —  — — 
At 31 December(135)(116)(116)(1)— 
F-84F-79

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
35NOTE 34: RETAINED PROFITS
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January24,549 27,321 36,749 42,470 45,051 52,843 At 1 January25,750 24,549 27,321 42,677 42,470 45,051 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (see below for the Bank)Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (see below for the Bank)1,023 2,515 3,907 224 2,165 5,866 Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders (see below for the Bank)4,826 1,023 2,515 3,249 224 2,165 
Capital transactions with parent
Dividends paid (note 37)0 (4,100)(11,022)0 (4,100)(11,022)
Capital repayments0 (2,975)0 (2,975)
Dividends paid (note 36)Dividends paid (note 36)(2,900)— (4,100)(2,900)— (4,100)
Capital contributions receivedCapital contributions received140 229 265 140 229 265 Capital contributions received164 140 229 164 140 229 
Return of capital contributionsReturn of capital contributions(4)(5)(9)(4)(5)(9)Return of capital contributions(4)(4)(5)(4)(4)(5)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive incomeRealised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income1 (16)12 1 12 
Issue of other equity instrumentsIssue of other equity instruments(1)— — (1)— — 
Redemptions of other equity instrumentsRedemptions of other equity instruments(9)— — (9)— — 
Change in non-controlling interestsChange in non-controlling interests(1)— —  — — 
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurementsPost-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements1,062 113 (1,117)556 (102)(576)
136 (3,876)(13,741)136 (3,876)(13,741)
Realised gains and losses on equity shares held at fair value through other comprehensive income(16)12 (111)4 12 (144)
Post-retirement defined benefit scheme remeasurements113 (1,117)120 (102)(576)(162)
Share of other comprehensive income of associates and joint ventures0 0 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk (net of tax)1
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk (net of tax)1
(55)(306)389 (55)(306)389 
Gains and losses attributable to own credit risk (net of tax)1
(52)(55)(306)(52)(55)(306)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December25,750 24,549 27,321 42,677 42,470 45,051 At 31 December28,836 25,750 24,549 43,681 42,677 42,470 
1During 2020 the Group derecognised, on redemption, financial liabilities on which cumulative fair value movements relating to own credit of £1 million net of tax (2019: £NaN; 2018: £NaN)(2021: £nil; 2019: £nil), had been recognised directly in retained profits.
The profit after tax of the Bank was arrived at as follows:
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Net interest incomeNet interest income4,519 5,684 6,129 Net interest income4,606 4,519 5,684 
Net fee and commission incomeNet fee and commission income655 743 839 Net fee and commission income848 655 743 
Dividends receivedDividends received44 1,331 4,848 Dividends received1,391 44 1,331 
Net trading and other operating incomeNet trading and other operating income2,952 2,169 2,389 Net trading and other operating income1,956 2,952 2,169 
Other incomeOther income3,651 4,243 8,076 Other income4,195 3,651 4,243 
Total incomeTotal income8,170 9,927 14,205 Total income8,801 8,170 9,927 
Regulatory provisions(312)(996)(939)
Other operating expenses(5,516)(5,337)(5,864)
Total operating expenses(5,828)(6,333)(6,803)
Impairment(1,898)(503)(504)
Operating expensesOperating expenses(6,273)(5,828)(6,333)
Impairment credit (charge)Impairment credit (charge)773 (1,898)(503)
Profit before taxProfit before tax444 3,091 6,898 Profit before tax3,301 444 3,091 
Tax credit (expense)Tax credit (expense)197 (645)(757)Tax credit (expense)292 197 (645)
Profit for the yearProfit for the year641 2,446 6,141 Profit for the year3,593 641 2,446 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholdersProfit attributable to ordinary shareholders224 2,165 5,866 Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders3,249 224 2,165 
Profit attributable to other equity holdersProfit attributable to other equity holders417 281 275 Profit attributable to other equity holders344 417 281 
Profit for the yearProfit for the year641 2,446 6,141 Profit for the year3,593 641 2,446 
F-85F-80

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
36NOTE 35: OTHER EQUITY INSTRUMENTS
The Group and BankThe Group and the Bank
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January4,865 3,217 3,217 At 1 January5,935 4,865 3,217 
Issued in the year:Issued in the year:Issued in the year:
£500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities£500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities500 — — 
£750 million Floating Rate Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities£750 million Floating Rate Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities750 — — 
£300 million Floating Rate Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities£300 million Floating Rate Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities300 — — 
US$500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down SecuritiesUS$500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities383 US$500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities 383 — 
€750 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities€750 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities687 €750 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities 687 — 
£500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities£500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities0 496 £500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities — 496 
US$1,500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down SecuritiesUS$1,500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities0 1,152 US$1,500 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities — 1,152 
1,070 

1,648 

1,550 

1,070 

1,648 
RedemptionsRedemptions(3,217)— — 
Profit for the year attributable to other equity holdersProfit for the year attributable to other equity holders417 281 275 Profit for the year attributable to other equity holders344 417 281 
Distributions on other equity instrumentsDistributions on other equity instruments(417)(281)(275)Distributions on other equity instruments(344)(417)(281)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December5,935 

4,865 

3,217 At 31 December4,268 

5,935 

4,865 
The Bank has in issue £5,935£4,268 million of Sterling, Dollar and Euro Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities to Lloyds Banking Group plc. The AT1 securities are fixed rate resetting or floating rate Perpetual Subordinated Permanent Write-Down Securities with no fixed maturity or redemption date.
The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:
The securities rank behind the claims against the Bank of unsubordinated creditors on a Winding-Up.winding-up
The fixed rate reset securities bear a fixed rate of interest until the first call date. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the fixed rate reset AT1 securities will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance. The floating rate AT1 securities will be reset quarterly both prior to and following the first call date.date
Interest on the securities will be due and payable only at the sole discretion of the Bank and the Bank may at any time elect to cancel any Interest Paymentinterest payment (or any part thereof) which would otherwise be payable on any Interest Payment Date.interest payment date. There are also certain restrictions on the payment of interest as specified in the terms.terms
The securities are undated and are repayable, at the option of the Bank, in whole at the first call date, or at any Interest Paymentinterest payment date thereafter. In addition, the AT1 securities are repayable, at the option of the Bank, in whole for certain regulatory or tax reasons. Any repayments require the prior consent of the PRA.PRA
The securities will be subject to a Permanent Write Down should the fully Loaded Common Equity Tier 1 ratio of the Bank fall below 7.0 per cent.cent
37NOTE 36: DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES
202020192018
£m£m£m
Dividends paid during the year were as follows:
Interim dividends0 4,100 11,022 
Dividends paid during the year were as follows:
The directors have proposed an interim dividend of £1,000 million to be paid in May 2021.
202120202019
£m£m£m
Interim dividends2,900 — 4,100 
F-86F-81

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

38NOTE 37: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS
During the year ended 31 December 20202021 Lloyds Banking Group picplc operated a number of share-based payment schemes for which employees of the Lloyds Bank Group were eligible and all of which are equity settled. Details of all schemes operated by Lloyds Banking Group are set out below; these are managed and operated on a Lloyds Banking Group-wide basis. The amount charged to the Group’s income statement in respect of Lloyds Banking Group share-based payment schemes, and which is included within staff costs (note 9), was £229 million (2020: £181 million (2019:million; 2019: £337 million; 2018: £417 million) with a further £6 million in 2018 included within discontinued operations (see note 13).
During the year ended 31 December 20202021 the Lloyds Banking Group operated the following share-based payment schemes, all of which are equity settled.
Group Performance Share plan
The Group operates a Group Performance Share plan that is equity settled. No award has been madeBonuses in respect of 2020;employee service in 2021 have been recognised in the charge in line with the year relates to prior year awards for whichproportion of the deferral period has completed.
Save-As-You-Earn schemes
Eligible employees may enter into contracts through the Save-As-You-Earn (SAYE) schemes to save up to £500 per month and, at the expiry of a fixed term of three years, have the option to use these savings within six months of the expiry of the fixed term to acquire shares in the Group at a discounted price of no less than 80 per cent (90 per cent for the 2020 plan)and 2021 plans) of the market price at the start of the invitation.
Movements in the number of share options outstanding under the SAYE schemes are set out below:
2020201920212020
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Outstanding at 1 JanuaryOutstanding at 1 January1,068,094,07344.55 802,994,91849.30 Outstanding at 1 January1,120,138,91530.39 1,068,094,07344.55 
GrantedGranted779,229,79724.25 487,654,21239.87 Granted236,923,74439.40 779,229,79724.25 
ExercisedExercised(255,706,663)47.51 (27,303,963)51.23 Exercised(6,924,434)30.57 (255,706,663)47.51 
ForfeitedForfeited(6,938,102)43.30 (15,830,204)48.69 Forfeited(22,815,078)28.78 (6,938,102)43.30 
CancelledCancelled(389,767,675)42.24 (130,068,149)49.03 Cancelled(51,479,310)32.57 (389,767,675)42.24 
ExpiredExpired(74,772,515)47.26 (49,352,741)58.74 Expired(95,280,546)49.03 (74,772,515)47.26 
Outstanding at 31 DecemberOutstanding at 31 December1,120,138,91530.39 1,068,094,07344.55 Outstanding at 31 December1,180,563,29130.63 1,120,138,91530.39 
Exercisable at 31 DecemberExercisable at 31 December792,74147.49 227,13960.70 Exercisable at 31 December336,56151.03 792,74147.49 
The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 20202021 was £0.61 (2019: £0.59)£0.47 (2020: £0.61). The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 2.982.46 years (2019: 2.22(2020: 2.98 years).
The weighted average fair value of SAYE options granted during 20202021 was £0.05 (2019: £0.10)£0.09 (2020: £0.05). The fair values of the SAYE options have been determined using a standard Black-Scholes model.
Other share option plans
Lloyds Banking Group Executive Share Plan 2003
The Plan was adopted in December 2003 and under the Plan share options may be granted to senior employees. Options under this plan have been granted specifically to facilitate recruitment (to compensate new recruits for any lost share awards), and also to make grants to key individuals for retention purposes. In some instances, grants may be made subject to individual performance conditions.
Participants are not entitled to any dividends paid during the vesting period.
2020201920212020
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Number
of options
Weighted
average
exercise price
(pence)
Outstanding at 1 JanuaryOutstanding at 1 January7,634,638NaN10,263,028NaNOutstanding at 1 January6,666,372Nil7,634,638Nil
GrantedGranted1,990,449NaN2,336,171NaNGranted5,308,496Nil1,990,449Nil
ExercisedExercised(2,122,302)NaN(4,455,481)NaNExercised(5,129,115)Nil(2,122,302)Nil
VestedVested(47,337)NaN(69,005)NaNVestedNil(47,337)Nil
ForfeitedForfeited(111,100)NaN(39,250)NaNForfeited(385,184)Nil(111,100)Nil
LapsedLapsed(677,976)NaN(400,825)NaNLapsed(558,679)Nil(677,976)Nil
Outstanding at 31 DecemberOutstanding at 31 December6,666,372NaN7,634,638NaNOutstanding at 31 December5,901,890Nil6,666,372Nil
Exercisable at 31 DecemberExercisable at 31 December3,150,407NaN2,683,267NaNExercisable at 31 December708,939Nil3,150,407Nil
The weighted average fair value of options granted in the year was £0.33 (2019: £0.59)£0.45 (2020: £0.33). The fair values of options granted have been determined using a standard Black-Scholes model. The weighted average share price at the time that the options were exercised during 20202021 was £0.36 (2019: £0.60)£0.44 (2020: £0.36). The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year was 4.14.3 years (2019: 3.8(2020: 4.1 years).
F-87F-82

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
38NOTE 37: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS (continued)
Other share plans
Lloyds Banking Group Executive Group Ownership Share Plan
The plan, introduced in 2006, is aimed at delivering shareholder value by linking the receipt of shares to an improvement in the performance of the Group over a three year-year period. Awards are made within limits set by the rules of the plan, with the limits determining the maximum number of shares that can be awarded equating to three3 times annual salary. In exceptional circumstances this may increase to four4 times annual salary.
At the end of the performance period for the 20172018 grant, the targets had not been fully met and therefore these awards vested in 20202021 at a rate of 49.733.75 per cent.
2020201920212020
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Outstanding at 1 JanuaryOutstanding at 1 January459,904,745417,385,636Outstanding at 1 January533,987,527459,904,745
GrantedGranted211,214,605174,490,843Granted211,214,605
VestedVested(47,775,806)(88,318,950)Vested(39,621,415)(47,775,806)
ForfeitedForfeited(96,015,542)(55,029,439)Forfeited(144,437,243)(96,015,542)
Dividend awardDividend award6,659,52511,376,655Dividend award944,7586,659,525
Outstanding at 31 DecemberOutstanding at 31 December533,987,527459,904,745Outstanding at 31 December350,873,627533,987,527
Awards in respect of the 20182019 grant vestedare due to vest in 20212022 at a rate of 33.7541.80 per cent. In previous years participants were entitled to any dividends paid in the vesting period. However, following a regulatory change prohibiting the payment of dividend equivalents on such awards, the number of shares subject to award wasawarded has been determined by applying an adjustment factor to thea share price on grant.adjusted to exclude the value of estimated future dividends.
The weighted average fair value of the awards granted in 2020 was £0.28.
Lloyds Banking Group Long Term Share Plan
The plan, introduced in 2021, which replaced the Executive Group Ownership Share Plan, is intended to provide alignment to our aim of delivering sustainable returns to shareholders, supported by our values and behaviours.
2021
Number
of shares
Granted83,456,304
Forfeited(5,573,236)
Outstanding at 31 December77,883,068
The weighted average fair value of awards granted in the year was £0.28 (2019: £0.45).£0.36.
Chief Financial Officer Buyoutbuyout
William Chalmers joined the Group on 3 June 2019 and was appointed as Chief Financial Officer on 1 August 2019 on the retirement of George Culmer. He was granted deferred share awards over 4,086,632 shares, to replace unvested awards from his former employer, Morgan Stanley, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Group.
2020201920212020
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Number
of shares
Outstanding at 1 JanuaryOutstanding at 1 January3,268,4600Outstanding at 1 January1,810,7123,268,460
Granted04,086,632
ExercisedExercised(1,457,748)(818,172)Exercised(1,124,627)(1,457,748)
Outstanding at 31 DecemberOutstanding at 31 December1,810,7123,268,460Outstanding at 31 December686,0851,810,712
Group Chief Executive buyout
Charlie Nunn joined the Group on 16 August 2021 as Group Chief Executive. He was granted deferred share awards over 8,301,708 shares to replace unvested awards from his former employer, HSBC, that were forfeited as a result of him joining the Group.
2021
Number
of shares
Granted8,301,708
Exercised(856,921)
Outstanding at 31 December7,444,787
The weighted average fair value of awards granted in 20192021 was £0.55.£0.40.

F-83

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 37: SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS (continued)
Assumptions at 31 December 2021
The fair value calculations at 31 December 20202021 for grants made in the year, using Black-Scholes models and Monte Carlo simulation, are based on the following assumptions:
SAYEExecutive
Share Plan
2003
Executive Group Ownership Share PlanSAYEExecutive
Share Plan
2003
Long Term Share PlanGroup Chief Executive buyout
Weighted average risk-free interest rateWeighted average risk-free interest rate(0.03%)(0.01%)0.18%Weighted average risk-free interest rate0.49%0.12%0.16%0.26%
Weighted average expected lifeWeighted average expected life3.2 years1.2 years3.6 yearsWeighted average expected life3.3 years1.3 years3.4 years2.8 years
Weighted average expected volatilityWeighted average expected volatility32%42%23%Weighted average expected volatility28%30%31%
Weighted average expected dividend yieldWeighted average expected dividend yield5.3%Weighted average expected dividend yield3.1%3.2%3.1%
Weighted average share priceWeighted average share price£0.28£0.35£0.47Weighted average share price£0.45£0.47£0.40£0.44
Weighted average exercise priceWeighted average exercise price£0.24NaNWeighted average exercise price£0.39Nil
Expected volatility is a measure of the amount by which the Group’s shares are expected to fluctuate during the life of an option. The expected volatility is estimated based on the historical volatility of the closing daily share price over the most recent period that is commensurate with the expected life of the option. The historical volatility is compared to the implied volatility generated from market traded options in the Group’s shares to assess the reasonableness of the historical volatility and adjustments made where appropriate.
Share Incentive Plan
Free Sharesshares
An award of shares may be made annually to employees up to a maximum of £3,600. The shares awarded are held in trust for a mandatory period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends paid on such shares. The award is subject to a non-market based condition. If an employee leaves the Group within this three year-year period for other than a ‘good’ reason, all of the shares awarded will be forfeited.
On 20 May 2020,25 March 2021, the Group made an award of £200 (2019: £200) of1,017 (2020: 676) shares to all eligible employees. The number of shares awarded was 45,612,424 (2019: 22,422,337)67,658,976 (2020: 45,612,424), with an average fair value of £0.30 (2019: £0.62)£0.42 (2020: £0.30) based on the market price at the date of award.
F-88

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
38 SHARE-BASED PAYMENTS (continued)
Matching shares
The Group undertakes to match shares purchased by employees up to the value of £45 per month; these matching shares are held in trust for a mandatory period of three years on the employee’s behalf, during which period the employee is entitled to any dividends paid on such shares. The award is subject to a non-market based condition: if an employee leaves within this three yearthree-year period for other than a ‘good’ reason, all of the matching shares are forfeited. Similarly, if the employees sell their purchased shares within three years, their matching shares are forfeited.
The number of shares awarded relating to matching shares in 20202021 was 62,262,140 (2019: 37,346,812)46,621,026 (2020: 62,262,140), with an average fair value of £0.34 (2019: £0.56)£0.44 (2020: £0.34), based on market prices at the date of award.
Fixed share awards
Fixed share awards were introduced in 2014 in order to ensure that total fixed remuneration is commensurate with role and to provide a competitive reward package for certain Lloyds Banking Group employees, with an appropriate balance of fixed and variable remuneration, in line with regulatory requirements. The fixed share awards are delivered in Lloyds Banking Group shares, released over five years with 20 per cent being released each year following the year of award. From June 2020, the fixed share awards are released over three years with one third being released each year following the year of award. The number of shares purchased in 20202021 was 13,975,993 (2019: 8,239,332)8,320,948 (2020: 13,975,993).
The fixed share award is not subject to any performance conditions, performance adjustment or clawback. On an employee leaving the Group, there is no change to the timeline for which shares will become unrestricted.
39NOTE 38: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Key management personnel
Key management personnel are those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of an entity; the Group’s key management personnel are the members of the Lloyds Banking Group plc Group Executive Committee together with its Non-Executive Directors.
The table below details, on an aggregated basis, key management personnel compensation:
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
CompensationCompensationCompensation
Salaries and other short-term benefitsSalaries and other short-term benefits12 14 13 Salaries and other short-term benefits10 12 14 
Post-employment benefits0 
Share-based paymentsShare-based payments12 14 17 Share-based payments14 12 14 
Total compensationTotal compensation24 28 30 Total compensation24 24 28 
The aggregate of the emoluments of the directors was £10.6 million (2020: £11.8 million (2019:million; 2019: £11.7 million; 2018: £12.2 million).
Aggregate company contributions in respect of key management personnel to defined contribution pension schemes were £NaN (2019: £NaN; 2018: £NaN)£nil (2020: £nil; 2019: £nil).
The total for the highest paid director (Juan Colombás) was £4,169,000 (2019: (Antó(Sir António Horta-Osório): £4,078,000; 2018: (Antó was £3,117,000 (2020: Juan Colombás: £4,169,000; 2019: Sir António Horta-Osório): £5,472,000)rio: £4,078,000); this did not include any gain on exercise of Lloyds Banking Group plc shares in any year.
202020192018
millionmillionmillion
Share options over Lloyds Banking Group plc shares
At 1 January0 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)0 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)0 (1)
At 31 December0 
202020192018
millionmillionmillion
Share plans settled in Lloyds Banking Group plc shares
At 1 January101 84 82 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)46 46 39 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)(30)(29)(37)
At 31 December117 101 84 

F-89F-84

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
39NOTE 38: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS (continued)
202120202019
millionmillionmillion
Share options over Lloyds Banking Group plc shares
At 1 January — — 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel) — — 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel) — — 
At 31 December — — 
202120202019
millionmillionmillion
Share plans settled in Lloyds Banking Group plc shares
At 1 January117 101 84 
Granted, including certain adjustments (includes entitlements of appointed key management personnel)19 46 46 
Exercised/lapsed (includes entitlements of former key management personnel)(62)(30)(29)
At 31 December74 117 101 
The tables below detail, on an aggregated basis, balances outstanding at the year end and related income and expense, together with information relating to other transactions between the Group and its key management personnel:
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
LoansLoansLoans
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January2 At 1 January2 
Advanced (includes loans of appointed key management personnel)Advanced (includes loans of appointed key management personnel)0 Advanced (includes loans of appointed key management personnel)1 — 
Repayments (includes loans of former key management personnel)Repayments (includes loans of former key management personnel)0 (1)(1)Repayments (includes loans of former key management personnel) — (1)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December2 At 31 December3 
The loans are on both a secured and unsecured basis and are expected to be settled in cash. The loans attracted interest rates of between 0.39 per cent and 24.2022.93 per cent in 2020 (2019: 6.452021 (2020: 0.39 per cent and 24.20 per cent; 2018: 6.702019: 6.45 per cent and 24.20 per cent).
NaNNo provisions have been recognised in respect of loans given to key management personnel (2019(2020 and 2018: £NaN)2019: £nil).
202020192018202120202019
£m£m£m£m
DepositsDepositsDeposits
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January23 20 20 At 1 January11 23 20 
Placed (includes deposits of appointed key management personnel)Placed (includes deposits of appointed key management personnel)26 44 33 Placed (includes deposits of appointed key management personnel)26 26 44 
Withdrawn (includes deposits of former key management personnel)Withdrawn (includes deposits of former key management personnel)(38)(41)(33)Withdrawn (includes deposits of former key management personnel)(26)(38)(41)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December11 23 20 At 31 December11 11 23 
Deposits placed by key management personnel attracted interest rates of up to 1.0 per cent (2020: 2.0 per cent (2019:cent; 2019: 3.0 per cent; 2018: 3.5 per cent).
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group did not provide any guarantees in respect of key management personnel (2019(2020 and 2018:2019: none).
At 31 December 2020,2021, transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by the Group and its banking subsidiaries with directorsDirectors and connected persons included amounts outstanding in respect of loans and credit card transactions of £0.6 million with five directorsDirectors and two connected persons (2019:(2020: £0.6 million with five directorsDirectors and two connected persons; 2018: £0.52019: £0.6 million with five directorsDirectors and two connected persons).

F-85

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 38: RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS (continued)
Balances and transactions with fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings
Balances and transactions between members of the Lloyds Bank Group
In accordance with IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements, transactions and balances between the Bank and its subsidiary undertakings, and between those subsidiary undertakings, have all been eliminated on consolidation and thus are not reported as related party transactions of the Group.
The Bank, as a result of its position as parent of a banking group, has a large number of transactions with various of its subsidiary undertakings; these are included on the balance sheet of the Bank as follows:
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
Assets, included within:Assets, included within:Assets, included within:
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss3,404 1,203 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments7,077 8,546 Derivative financial instruments3,299 7,077 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,203 
Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsFinancial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings128,241 200,696 Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings107,907 128,241 
136,521 209,242 114,610 136,521 
Liabilities, included within:Liabilities, included within:Liabilities, included within:
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings33,170 105,075 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings21,540 33,170 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss0 43 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss — 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments4,738 7,102 Derivative financial instruments2,508 4,738 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue20 Debt securities in issue59 20 
37,928 112,220 24,107 37,928 
Due to the size and volume of transactions passing through these accounts, it is neither practical nor meaningful to disclose information on gross inflows and outflows. During 20202021 the Bank earned interest income on the above asset balances of £1,933 million (2020: £1,995 million (2019:million; 2019: £2,491 million; 2018: £2,305 million) and incurred interest expense on the above liability balances of £327 million (2020: £336 million (2019:million; 2019: £655 million; 2018: £545 million).
In addition, the Bank raised recharges of £1,609 million (2020: £1,403 million (2019:million; 2019: £1,461 million; 2018: £1,315 million) on its subsidiaries in respect of costs incurred and also received fees of £70 million (2020: £56 million (2019:million; 2019: £62 million; 2018: £146 million), and paid fees of £31 million (2020: £26 million (2019:million; 2019: £57 million; 2018: £151 million), for various services provided between the Bank and its subsidiaries.
Details of contingent liabilities and commitments entered into on behalf of fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings are given in note 40.
F-90

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
39 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS (continued)
39.
Balances and transactions with Lloyds Banking Group plc and fellow subsidiaries of the Bank
The Bank and its subsidiaries have balances due to and from the Bank’s parent company, Lloyds Banking Group plc and fellow subsidiaries of the Bank. These are included on the balance sheet as follows:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Assets, included within:Assets, included within:Assets, included within:
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments634 690 634 690 
Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsFinancial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings738 1,854 530 1,581 Financial assets at amortised cost: due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 738 517 530 
Derivative financial instruments690 591 690 591 
1,428 2,445 1,220 2,172 1,373 1,428 1,151 1,220 
Liabilities, included within:Liabilities, included within:Liabilities, included within:
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings6,875 4,893 6,666 4,696 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 6,875 1,332 6,666 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss0 1,121 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss — 3,318 1,121 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments1,424 1,986 972 1,547 Derivative financial instruments939 1,424 633 972 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue12,686 11,181 11,551 11,136 Debt securities in issue17,961 12,686 14,650 11,551 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities4,599 3,663 4,745 3,641 Subordinated liabilities5,176 4,599 5,311 4,745 
25,584 21,724 25,055 21,021 25,566 25,584 25,244 25,055 
These balances include Lloyds Banking Group plc’s banking arrangements and, due to the size and volume of transactions passing through these accounts, it is neither practical nor meaningful to disclose information on gross inflows and outflows. During 20202021 the Group earned £5£11 million and the Bank earned £5£11 million interest income on the above asset balances (2019:(2020: Group £5 million, Bank £5 million; 2019: Group £20 million, Bank £20 million; 2018: Group £166 million, Bank £142 million); the Group incurred £478£500 million and the Bank incurred £461£468 million interest expense on the above liability balances (2019:(2020: Group £478 million, Bank £461 million; 2019: Group £520 million, Bank £509 million; 2018: Group £370 million, Bank £334 million).
Other related party transactions
Pension funds
The Group provides banking services to certain of its pension funds. At 31 December 2020,2021, customer deposits of £151£480 million (2019: £169(2020: £151 million) related to the Group’s pension funds.
Joint ventures and associates
At 31 December 20202021 there were loans and advances to customers of £28£14 million (2019: £75(2020: £28 million) outstanding and balances within customer deposits of £73£22 million (2019: £5(2020: £73 million) relating to joint ventures and associates.
During the year the Group paid fees of £7 million (2019: £2(2020: £7 million) to the Lloyds Banking Group's Schroders Personal Wealth joint venture and also made a payment of £10 million (2020: £20 millionmillion) under the terms of an Operating Margin Guaranteeagreements put in place as part of the agreements foron the establishment of the joint venture.
F-86
40

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 39: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES
Interchange fees
With respect to multi-lateral interchange fees (MIFs), the Lloyds Banking Group is not involved in the ongoing litigation which involves the card schemes such as Visa and Mastercard (as described below). However, the Group is a member/licensee of Visa and Mastercard and other card schemes. The litigation in question is as follows:
litigationLitigation brought by retailers against both Visa and Mastercard continues in the English Courts, (andin which retailers are seeking damages on grounds that Visa and Mastercard's MIFs breached competition law (this includes a judgment of the Supreme Court in June 2020 upholding the Court of Appeal's finding in 2018 that historic interchange arrangements of Mastercard and Visa infringed competition law); and
litigationLitigation brought on behalf of UK consumers in the English Courts against Mastercard which the Supreme Court has now confirmed can proceed.
Any impact on the Group of the litigation against Visa and Mastercard remains uncertain at this time, such that it is not practicable for the Group to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect. Insofar as Visa is required to pay damages to retailers for interchange fees set prior to June 2016, contractual arrangements to allocate liability have been agreed between various UK banks (including the Lloyds Banking Group) and Visa Inc, as part of Visa Inc’s acquisition of Visa Europe in 2016. These arrangements cap the maximum amount of liability to which the Lloyds Banking Group may be subject and this cap is set at the cash consideration received by the Lloyds Banking Group for the sale of its stake in Visa Europe to Visa Inc in 2016. In 2016, the Group received Visa preference stockshares as part of the consideration for the sale of its shares in Visa Europe. In 2020, some of these Visa preference shares were converted into Visa Inc Class A common stock (in accordance with the provisions of the Visa Europe sale documentation) and they were subsequently sold by the Group. The sale hadhas no impact on this contingent liability.
LIBOR and other trading rates
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies, together with other panel banks, have been named as defendants in ongoing private lawsuits, including purported class action suits, in the US in connection with their roles as panel banks contributing to the setting of US Dollar, Japanese Yen and Sterling London Interbank Offered Rate and the Australian BBSW reference rate. Certain of the plaintiffs' claims have been dismissed by the US Federal Court for the Southern District of New York (subject to appeals).
Certain Lloyds Banking Group companies are also named as defendants in (i) UK basedUK-based claims; and (ii) two Dutch class actions, raising LIBOR manipulation allegations. A number of the claims against the Lloyds Banking Group in relationthe UK relating to the alleged mis-sale of interest rate hedging products also include allegations of LIBOR manipulation.
Furthermore, the Swiss Competition Commission concluded its investigation against Lloyds Bank plc in June 2019. However, the Lloyds Banking Group continues to respond to litigation arising out of the investigations into submissions made by panel members to the bodies that set LIBOR and various other interbank offered rates.
F-91

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
40 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES (continued)
It is currently not possible to predict the scope and ultimate outcome on the Lloyds Banking Group of the various outstanding regulatory investigations not encompassed by the settlements, any private lawsuits or any related challenges to the interpretation or validity of any of the Lloyds Banking Group's contractual arrangements, including their timing and scale. As such, it is not practicable to provide an estimate of any potential financial effect.
Tax authorities
The Lloyds Banking Group has an open matter in relation to a claim for group relief of losses incurred in its former Irish banking subsidiary, which ceased trading on 31 December 2010. In 2013, HMRC informed the Lloyds Banking Group that its interpretation of the UK rules means that the group relief is not available. In 2020, HMRC concluded their enquiry into the matter and issued a closure notice. The Lloyds Banking Group's interpretation of the UK rules has not changed and hence it has appealed to the First Tier Tax Tribunal, with a hearing expected in early 2022. If the final determination of the matter by the judicial process is that HMRC’s position is correct, management estimate that this would result in an increase in current tax liabilities of approximately £700£730 million (including interest) and a reduction in deferred tax assets of approximately £270£330 million. The Lloyds Banking Group, having taken appropriate advice, does not consider that this is a case where additional tax will ultimately fall due.
There are a number of other open matters on which the Group is in discussions with HMRC (including the tax treatment of certain costs arising from the divestment of TSB Banking Group plc), none of which is expected to have a material impact on the financial position of the Group.
Other legal actions and regulatory matters
In addition, during the ordinary course of business the Group is subject to other complaints and threatened or actual legal proceedings (including class or group action claims) brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, as well as legal and regulatory reviews, challenges, investigations and enforcement actions, which could relate to a number of issues, including financial, environmental or other regulatory matters, both in the UK and overseas. AllWhere material, such matters are periodically reassessed, with the assistance of external professional advisers where appropriate, to determine the likelihood of the Group incurring a liability. In those instances where it is concluded that it is more likely than not that a payment will be made, a provision is established tobased on management's best estimate of the amount required at the relevant balance sheet date. In some cases it will not be possible to form a view, for example because the facts are unclear or because further time is needed properly to assess properly the merits of the case, and no provisions are held in relation to such matters. In these circumstances, specific disclosure in relation to a contingent liability will be made where material. However, the Group does not currently expect the final outcome of any such case to have a material adverse effect on its financial position, operations or cash flows. Where there is a contingent liability related to an existing provision the relevant disclosures are included within note 29.
Contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees arising from the banking business
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Contingent liabilitiesContingent liabilitiesContingent liabilities
Acceptances and endorsementsAcceptances and endorsements73 17 73 16 Acceptances and endorsements21 73 21 73 
Other:Other:Other:
Other items serving as direct credit substitutesOther items serving as direct credit substitutes221 279 203 259 Other items serving as direct credit substitutes433 221 375 203 
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingenciesPerformance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies2,070 2,274 1,817 2,014 Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies1,886 2,070 1,681 1,817 
2,291 2,553 2,020 2,273 2,319 2,291 2,056 2,020 
Total contingent liabilitiesTotal contingent liabilities2,364 2,570 2,093 2,289 Total contingent liabilities2,340 2,364 2,077 2,093 
The Bank
20202019
£m£m
Incurred on behalf of fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1 
F-87

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 39: CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES (continued)
The Bank
20212020
£m£m
Incurred on behalf of fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings 
The contingent liabilities of the Group and the Bank arise in the normal course of banking business and it is not practicable to quantify their future financial effect.
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Commitments and guaranteesCommitments and guaranteesCommitments and guarantees
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactionsDocumentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions1 0 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions  — 
Forward asset purchases and forward deposits placedForward asset purchases and forward deposits placed124 171 96 157 Forward asset purchases and forward deposits placed60 124 55 96 
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend:
Less than 1 year original maturity:Less than 1 year original maturity:Less than 1 year original maturity:
Mortgage offers madeMortgage offers made20,128 12,647 1,720 1,120 Mortgage offers made17,757 20,128 1,001 1,720 
Other commitments and guaranteesOther commitments and guarantees82,151 78,306 32,832 29,608 Other commitments and guarantees79,830 82,151 29,871 32,832 
102,279 90,953 34,552 30,728 97,587 102,279 30,872 34,552 
1 year or over original maturity1 year or over original maturity31,194 25,310 28,118 21,664 1 year or over original maturity30,037 31,194 27,063 28,118 
Total commitments and guaranteesTotal commitments and guarantees133,598 116,434 62,766 52,549 Total commitments and guarantees127,684 133,598 57,990 62,766 
The Bank
20202019
£m£m
Incurred on behalf of fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings3,659 4,647 
F-92

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
40 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES, COMMITMENTS AND GUARANTEES (continued)
The Bank
20212020
£m£m
Incurred on behalf of fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings3,055 3,659 
Of the amounts shown above in respect of undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend, £59,240£55,690 million (2019: £46,629(2020: £59,240 million) for the Group and £32,847£30,653 million (2019: £27,672(2020: £32,847 million) for the Bank were irrevocable.
Capital commitments
Excluding commitments of the Group in respect of investment property (note 21), capital expenditure contracted but not provided for at 31 December 20202021 amounted to £501£1,034 million (2019: £405(2020: £501 million) for the Group and £NaN (2019: £2 million)£nil (2020: £nil) for the Bank. Of this amount for the Group, £501£1,034 million (2019: £400(2020: £501 million) related to assets to be leased to customers under operating leases. The Group’s management is confident that future net revenues and funding will be sufficient to cover these commitments.
41NOTE 40: STRUCTURED ENTITIES
The Group’s interests in structured entities are consolidated. Details of the Group’s interests in these structured entities are set out in note 2625 for securitisations and covered bond vehicles, note 2827 for structured entities associated with the Group’s pension schemes, and below.
Asset-backed conduits
In addition to the structured entities discussed in note 26,25, which are used for securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group sponsors an active asset-backed conduit, Cancara, which invests in client receivables and debt securities. The total consolidated exposure of Cancara at 31 December 20202021 was £2,490£1,669 million (2019: £3,735(2020: £2,490 million), comprising £1,695£889 million of loans and advances (2019: £3,670(2020: £1,695 million) and £795£780 million of debt securities (2019: £65(2020: £795 million).
All lending assets and debt securities held by the Group in Cancara are restricted in use, as they are held by the collateral agent for the benefit of the commercial paper investors and the liquidity providers only. The Group provides liquidity facilities to Cancara under terms that are usual and customary for standard lending activities in the normal course of the Group’s banking activities. During 20202021 there have continued to be planned drawdowns on certain liquidity facilities for balance sheet management purposes, supporting the programme to provide funding alongside the proceeds of the asset-backed commercial paper issuance. The Group could be asked to provide support under the contractual terms of these arrangements including, for example, if Cancara experienced a shortfall in external funding, which may occur in the event of market disruption.
The external assets in Cancara are consolidated in the Group’s financial statements.
F-93F-88

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(1)Measurement basis of financial assets and liabilities
The accounting policies in note 2 describe how different classes of financial instruments are measured, and how income and expenses, including fair value gains and losses, are recognised. The following tables analyse the carrying amounts of the financial assets and liabilities by category and by balance sheet heading.
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
TotalDerivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
OtherHeld for
trading
Other
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Financial assetsFinancial assetsFinancial assets
Cash and balances at central banksCash and balances at central banks     49,888 49,888 Cash and balances at central banks     54,279 54,279 
Items in the course of collection from banksItems in the course of collection from banks     300 300 Items in the course of collection from banks     147 147 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss 0 1,674    1,674 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  1,798    1,798 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments674 7,667     8,341 Derivative financial instruments55 5,456     5,511 
Loans and advances to banks     5,950 5,950 
Loans and advances to customers     480,141 480,141 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements     7,474 7,474 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements     477,541 477,541 
Debt securitiesDebt securities     5,137 5,137 Debt securities     4,562 4,562 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     738 738 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     739 739 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost     491,966 491,966 Financial assets at amortised cost     490,316 490,316 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income    27,260  27,260 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income    27,786  27,786 
Total financial assetsTotal financial assets674 7,667 1,674  27,260 542,154 579,429 Total financial assets55 5,456 1,798  27,786 544,742 579,837 
Financial liabilitiesFinancial liabilitiesFinancial liabilities
Deposits from banks     24,997 24,997 
Customer deposits     434,569 434,569 
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreementsDeposits from banks and repurchase agreements     33,448 33,448 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreementsCustomer deposits and repurchase agreements     449,394 449,394 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     6,875 6,875 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     1,490 1,490 
Items in course of transmission to banksItems in course of transmission to banks     302 302 Items in course of transmission to banks     308 308 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 3  6,828   6,831 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   6,537   6,537 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments590 7,638     8,228 Derivative financial instruments315 4,328     4,643 
Notes in circulationNotes in circulation     1,305 1,305 Notes in circulation     1,321 1,321 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue     59,293 59,293 Debt securities in issue     48,724 48,724 
OtherOther     1,592 1,592 Other     1,411 1,411 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities     9,242 9,242 Subordinated liabilities     8,658 8,658 
Total financial liabilitiesTotal financial liabilities590 7,641  6,828  538,175 553,234 Total financial liabilities315 4,328  6,537  544,754 555,934 
F-94F-89

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
TotalDerivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
OtherHeld for
trading
Other
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Financial assetsFinancial assetsFinancial assets
Cash and balances at central banksCash and balances at central banks— — — — — 38,880 38,880 Cash and balances at central banks— — — — — 49,888 49,888 
Items in the course of collection from banksItems in the course of collection from banks— — — — — 292 292 Items in the course of collection from banks— — — — — 300 300 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss— 290 1,994 — — — 2,284 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss— — 1,674 — — — 1,674 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments1,117 7,377 — — — — 8,494 Derivative financial instruments674 7,667 — — — — 8,341 
Loans and advances to banks— — — — — 4,852 4,852 
Loans and advances to customers— — — — — 474,470 474,470 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — — — — 5,950 5,950 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements— — — — — 480,141 480,141 
Debt securitiesDebt securities— — — — — 5,325 5,325 Debt securities— — — — — 5,137 5,137 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 1,854 1,854 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 738 738 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost— — — — — 486,501 486,501 Financial assets at amortised cost— — — — — 491,966 491,966 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — — — 24,617 — 24,617 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — — — 27,260 — 27,260 
Total financial assetsTotal financial assets1,117 7,667 1,994 — 24,617 525,673 561,068 Total financial assets674 7,667 1,674 — 27,260 542,154 579,429 
Financial liabilitiesFinancial liabilitiesFinancial liabilities
Deposits from banks— — — — — 23,593 23,593 
Customer deposits— — — — — 396,839 396,839 
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreementsDeposits from banks and repurchase agreements— — — — — 24,997 24,997 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreementsCustomer deposits and repurchase agreements— — — — — 434,569 434,569 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 4,893 4,893 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 6,875 6,875 
Items in course of transmission to banksItems in course of transmission to banks— — — — — 354 354 Items in course of transmission to banks— — — — — 302 302 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss— 171 — 7,531 — — 7,702 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss— — 6,828 — — 6,831 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments1,029 8,802 — — — — 9,831 Derivative financial instruments590 7,638 — — — — 8,228 
Notes in circulationNotes in circulation— — — — — 1,079 1,079 Notes in circulation— — — — — 1,305 1,305 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue— — — — — 76,431 76,431 Debt securities in issue— — — — — 59,293 59,293 
OtherOther— — — — — 1,755 1,755 Other— — — — — 1,592 1,592 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities— — — — — 12,586 12,586 Subordinated liabilities— — — — — 9,242 9,242 
Total financial liabilitiesTotal financial liabilities1,029 8,973 — 7,531 — 517,530 535,063 Total financial liabilities590 7,641 — 6,828 — 538,175 553,234 
F-95F-90

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
TotalDerivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
OtherHeld for
trading
Other
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Financial assetsFinancial assetsFinancial assets
Cash and balances at central banksCash and balances at central banks     45,753 45,753 Cash and balances at central banks     49,618 49,618 
Items in the course of collection from banksItems in the course of collection from banks     257 257 Items in the course of collection from banks     99 99 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss 0 1,724    1,724 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  4,529    4,529 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments242 12,353     12,595 Derivative financial instruments37 6,861     6,898 
Loans and advances to banks     5,656 5,656 
Loans and advances to customers     178,269 178,269 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements     7,287 7,287 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements     163,428 163,428 
Debt securitiesDebt securities     4,315 4,315 Debt securities     3,756 3,756 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     128,771 128,771 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     108,424 108,424 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost     317,011 317,011 Financial assets at amortised cost     282,895 282,895 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income    24,647  24,647 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income    25,529  25,529 
Total financial assetsTotal financial assets242 12,353 1,724  24,647 363,021 401,987 Total financial assets37 6,861 4,529  25,529 332,612 369,568 
Financial liabilitiesFinancial liabilitiesFinancial liabilities
Deposits from banks     10,304 10,304 
Customer deposits     264,473 264,473 
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreementsDeposits from banks and repurchase agreements     2,825 2,825 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreementsCustomer deposits and repurchase agreements     268,704 268,704 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     39,836 39,836 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings     22,872 22,872 
Items in course of transmission to banksItems in course of transmission to banks     199 199 Items in course of transmission to banks     207 207 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss 2  7,905   7,907 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss   9,821   9,821 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments289 10,783     11,072 Derivative financial instruments310 5,792     6,102 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue     48,109 48,109 Debt securities in issue     38,439 38,439 
OtherOther     885 885 Other     777 777 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities     7,751 7,751 Subordinated liabilities     7,907 7,907 
Total financial liabilitiesTotal financial liabilities289 10,785  7,905  371,557 390,536 Total financial liabilities310 5,792  9,821  341,731 357,654 
F-96F-91

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Derivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
TotalDerivatives
designated
as hedging
instruments
Mandatorily held at
fair value through
profit or loss
Designated
at fair value
through profit
or loss
At fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Held at
amortised
cost
Total
Held for
trading
OtherHeld for
trading
Other
The BankThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Financial assetsFinancial assetsFinancial assets
Cash and balances at central banksCash and balances at central banks— — — — — 35,741 35,741 Cash and balances at central banks— — — — — 45,753 45,753 
Items in the course of collection from banksItems in the course of collection from banks— — — — — 252 252 Items in the course of collection from banks— — — — — 257 257 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss— 290 413 — — — 703 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss— — 1,724 — — — 1,724 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments207 13,431 — — — — 13,638 Derivative financial instruments242 12,353 — — — — 12,595 
Loans and advances to banks— — — — — 4,453 4,453 
Loans and advances to customers— — — — — 177,569 177,569 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements— — — — — 5,656 5,656 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements— — — — — 178,269 178,269 
Debt securitiesDebt securities— — — — — 5,241 5,241 Debt securities— — — — — 4,315 4,315 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 202,277 202,277 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 128,771 128,771 
Financial assets at amortised costFinancial assets at amortised cost— — — — — 389,540 389,540 Financial assets at amortised cost— — — — — 317,011 317,011 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — — — 22,160 — 22,160 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income— — — — 24,647 — 24,647 
Total financial assetsTotal financial assets207 13,721 413 — 22,160 425,533 462,034 Total financial assets242 12,353 1,724 — 24,647 363,021 401,987 
Financial liabilitiesFinancial liabilitiesFinancial liabilities
Deposits from banks— — — — — 7,122 7,122 
Customer deposits— — — — — 239,762 239,762 
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreementsDeposits from banks and repurchase agreements— — — — — 10,304 10,304 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreementsCustomer deposits and repurchase agreements— — — — — 264,473 264,473 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 109,771 109,771 Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings— — — — — 39,836 39,836 
Items in course of transmission to banksItems in course of transmission to banks— — — — — 198 198 Items in course of transmission to banks— — — — — 199 199 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss— 213 — 7,484 — — 7,697 Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss— — 7,905 — — 7,907 
Derivative financial instrumentsDerivative financial instruments267 13,944 — — — — 14,211 Derivative financial instruments289 10,783 — — — — 11,072 
Debt securities in issueDebt securities in issue— — — — — 61,509 61,509 Debt securities in issue— — — — — 48,109 48,109 
OtherOther— — — — — 975 975 Other— — — — — 885 885 
Subordinated liabilitiesSubordinated liabilities— — — — — 9,909 9,909 Subordinated liabilities— — — — — 7,751 7,751 
Total financial liabilitiesTotal financial liabilities267 14,157 — 7,484 — 429,246 451,154 Total financial liabilities289 10,785 — 7,905 — 371,557 390,536 

F-97F-92

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(2)Fair value measurement
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. It is a measure as at a specific date and may be significantly different from the amount which will actually be paid or received on maturity or settlement date.
Wherever possible, fair values have been calculated using unadjusted quoted market prices in active markets for identical instruments held by the Group. Where quoted market prices are not available, or are unreliable because of poor liquidity, fair values have been determined using valuation techniques which, to the extent possible, use market observable inputs, but in some cases use non-market observable inputs. Valuation techniques used include discounted cash flow analysis and pricing models and, where appropriate, comparison to instruments with characteristics similar to those of the instruments held by the Group. The Group measures valuation adjustments for its derivative exposures on the same basis as the derivatives are managed.
The carrying amount of the following financial instruments is a reasonable approximation of fair value: cash and balances at central banks, items in the course of collection from banks, items in course of transmission to banks and notes in circulation.
Because a variety of estimation techniques are employed and significant estimates made, comparisons of fair values between financial institutions may not be meaningful. Readers of these financial statements are thus advised to use caution when using this data to evaluate the Group’s financial position.
Fair value information is not provided for items that are not financial instruments or for other assets and liabilities which are not carried at fair value in the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. These items include intangible assets, such as brands and acquired credit card relationships; premises and equipment; and shareholders’ equity. These items are material and accordingly the Group believes that any fair value information presented would not represent the underlying value of the Group.
Valuation control framework
The key elements of the control framework for the valuation of financial instruments include model validation, product implementation review and independent price verification. These functions are carried out by appropriately skilled risk and finance teams, independent of the business area responsible for the products.
Model validation covers both qualitative and quantitative elements relating to new models. In respect of new products, a product implementation review is conducted pre-pre and post-trading. Pre-trade testing ensures that the new model is integrated into the Group’s systems and that the profit and loss and risk reporting are consistent throughout the trade life cycle.lifecycle. Post-trade testing examines the explanatory power of the implemented model, actively monitoring model parameters and comparing in-house pricing to external sources. Independent price verification procedures cover financial instruments carried at fair value. The frequency of the review is matched to the availability of independent data, monthly being the minimum. Valuation differences in breach of established thresholds are escalated to senior management. The results from independent pricing and valuation reserves are reviewed monthly by senior management.
Formal committees, consisting of senior risk, finance and business management, meet at least quarterly to discuss and approve valuations in more judgemental areas, in particular for unquoted equities, structured credit, over-the-counter options and the Credit Valuation Adjustmentcredit valuation adjustment (CVA) reserve., funding valuation adjustment (FVA) and other valuation adjustments.
Valuation of financial assets and liabilities
Assets and liabilities carried at fair value or for which fair values are disclosed have been classified into three levels according to the quality and reliability of information used to determine the fair values.
Level 1
Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. Products classified as level 1 predominantly comprise listed equity shares, treasury bills and other government securities.
Level 2
Level 2 valuations are those where quoted market prices are not available, for example where the instrument is traded in a market that is not considered to be active or valuation techniques are used to determine fair value and where these techniques use inputs that are based significantly on observable market data. Examples of such financial instruments include most over-the-counter derivatives, financial institution issued securities, certificates of deposit and certain asset-backed securities.
Level 3
Level 3 portfolios are those where at least one input which could have a significant effect on the instrument’s valuation is not based on observable market data. Such instruments would include any unlisted equity investments which are valued using various valuation techniques that require significant management judgement in determining appropriate assumptions, including earnings multiples and estimated future cash flows. Certain of the Group’s asset-backed securities and derivatives, principally where there is no trading activity in such securities, are also classified as level 3.
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio arise when inputs that could have a significant impact on the instrument’s valuation become market observable after previously having been non-market observable. In the case of asset-backed securities this can arise if more than one consistent independent source of data becomes available. Conversely, transfers into the portfolio arise when consistent sources of data cease to be available.
F-98F-93

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(3)Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value
(A)Financial assets, excluding derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group’s financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, totalled £28,934£29,584 million (2019: £26,901(2020: £28,934 million). The table below analyses these financial assets by balance sheet classification, asset type and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-98)F-93). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Group£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers0 0 1,511 1,511 
Equity shares159 4 0 163 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss159 4 1,511 1,674 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:
Government securities14,267 0 0 14,267 
Asset-backed securities0 0 65 65 
Corporate and other debt securities491 12,437 0 12,928 
14,758 12,437 65 27,260 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income14,758 12,437 65 27,260 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives14,917 12,441 1,576 28,934 
Level 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3Total
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to customers1,782 1,782 Loans and advances to customers 1,164 395 1,559 
Debt securities:
Government securities290 290 
Corporate and other debt securities47 47 
290 47 337 
Equity sharesEquity shares161 165 Equity shares235  4 239 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or lossTotal financial assets at fair value through profit or loss451 1,829 2,284 Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss235 1,164 399 1,798 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:Debt securities:Debt securities:
Government securitiesGovernment securities12,844 238 13,082 Government securities14,599   14,599 
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securities60 60 Asset-backed securities  55 55 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities11,036 11,036 Corporate and other debt securities640 12,491  13,131 
12,844 11,274 60 24,178 15,239 12,491 55 27,785 
Treasury and other bills439 439 
Equity sharesEquity shares  1 1 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeTotal financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income13,283 11,274 60 24,617 Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income15,239 12,491 56 27,786 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivativesTotal financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives13,734 11,278 1,889 26,901 Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives15,474 13,655 455 29,584 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to customers— — 1,511 1,511 
Equity sharesEquity shares159 — 163 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or lossTotal financial assets at fair value through profit or loss159 1,511 1,674 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:Debt securities:
Government securitiesGovernment securities14,267 — — 14,267 
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securities— — 65 65 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities491 12,437 — 12,928 
14,758 12,437 65 27,260 
Equity sharesEquity shares— — — — 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeTotal financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income14,758 12,437 65 27,260 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivativesTotal financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives14,917 12,441 1,576 28,934 
F-99F-94

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers0 0 517 517 
Debt securities:
Government securities0 0 0 0 
Corporate and other debt securities0 1,203 0 1,203 
0 1,203 0 1,203 
Equity shares0 4 0 4 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss0 1,207 517 1,724 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:
Government securities14,114 0 0 14,114 
Corporate and other debt securities491 10,042 0 10,533 
14,605 10,042 0 24,647 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income14,605 10,042 0 24,647 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives14,605 11,249 517 26,371 
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers362 362 
Debt securities:
Government securities290 290 
Corporate and other debt securities47 47 
290 47 337 
Equity shares
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss290 409 703 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:
Government securities12,700 238 12,938 
Corporate and other debt securities8,783 8,783 
12,700 9,021 21,721 
Treasury and other bills439 439 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income13,139 9,021 22,160 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives13,429 9,025 409 22,863 
F-100

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers 1,088 33 1,121 
Corporate and other debt securities 3,404  3,404 
Equity shares  4 4 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 4,492 37 4,529 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:
Government securities14,445   14,445 
Corporate and other debt securities640 10,444  11,084 
15,085 10,444  25,529 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income15,085 10,444  25,529 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives15,085 14,936 37 30,058 
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customers— — 517 517 
Corporate and other debt securities— 1,203 — 1,203 
Equity shares— — 
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss— 1,207 517 1,724 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Debt securities:
Government securities14,114 — — 14,114 
Corporate and other debt securities491 10,042 — 10,533 
14,605 10,042 — 24,647 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income14,605 10,042 — 24,647 
Total financial assets carried at fair value, excluding derivatives14,605 11,249 517 26,371 
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
(continued)
Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in level 3 financial assets, excluding derivatives, carried at fair value (recurring measurement).
2020201920212020
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
The GroupThe Group£m£mThe Group£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January1,829 60 1,889 2,721 53 2,774 At 1 January1,511 65 1,576 1,829 60 1,889 
Exchange and other adjustmentsExchange and other adjustments85 3 88 (74)(3)(77)Exchange and other adjustments2 (2) 85 88 
Gains recognised in the income statement within other incomeGains recognised in the income statement within other income20  20 — Gains recognised in the income statement within other income(72) (72)20 — 20 
Gains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeGains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income 4 4 — 11 11 Gains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (2)(2)— 
Purchases/increases to customer loansPurchases/increases to customer loans303 0 303 686 686 Purchases/increases to customer loans397  397 303 — 303 
Sales/repayments of customer loansSales/repayments of customer loans(677)(2)(679)(1,956)(1)(1,957)Sales/repayments of customer loans(794)(5)(799)(677)(2)(679)
Transfers into the level 3 portfolioTransfers into the level 3 portfolio0 0 0 448 448 Transfers into the level 3 portfolio4  4 — — — 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolioTransfers out of the level 3 portfolio(49)0 (49)Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio(649) (649)(49)— (49)
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December1,511 65 1,576 1,829 60 1,889 At 31 December399 56 455 1,511 65 1,576 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 DecemberGains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December103  103 (76)— (76)Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December(60) (60)103 — 103 
20202019
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January409 0 409 890 890 
Exchange and other adjustments101 0 101 (28)(28)
Gains recognised in the income statement within other income5  5 — 
Purchases/increases to customer loans258 0 258 101 101 
Sales/repayments of customer loans(207)0 (207)(603)(603)
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio0 0 0 49 49 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio(49)0 (49)
At 31 December517 0 517 409 409 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December106  106 (28)— (28)
F-95

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
20212020
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
Financial
assets at fair
value through
profit or loss
Financial
assets at
fair value
through other
comprehensive
income
Total level 3
assets carried
at fair value,
excluding
derivatives
(recurring
basis)
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 1 January517  517 409 — 409 
Exchange and other adjustments5  5 101 — 101 
Gains recognised in the income statement within other income6  6 — 
(Losses) gains recognised in other comprehensive income within the revaluation reserve in respect of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income   — — — 
Purchases/increases to customer loans393  393 258 — 258 
Sales/repayments of customer loans(499) (499)(207)— (207)
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio4  4 — — — 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio(389) (389)(49)— (49)
At 31 December37  37 517 — 517 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets held at 31 December11  11 106 — 106 
Valuation methodology for financial assets, excluding derivatives
Loans and advances to customers and banks
The fair value of these assets is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from market observable interest rates, a risk margin that reflects loan credit ratings and an incremental illiquidity premium based on historical spreads at origination on similar loans.
Debt securities
Debt securities measured at fair value and classified as level 2 are valued by discounting expected cash flows using an observable credit spread applicable to the particular instrument.
Where there is limited trading activity in debt securities, the Group uses valuation models, consensus pricing information from third partythird-party pricing services and broker or lead manager quotes to determine an appropriate valuation. Debt securities are classified as level 3 if there is a significant valuation input that cannot be corroborated through market sources or where there are materially inconsistent values for an input. Asset classes classified as level 3 mainly comprise certain collateralised loan obligations and collateralised debt obligations.

F-101

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(B)Financial liabilities, excluding derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group’s financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives, comprised its financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and totalled £6,831£6,537 million (2019: £7,702(2020: £6,831 million). The table below analyses these financial liabilities by balance sheet classification and valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-98)F-93). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and 2 during the year.
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Group£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss0 6,783 45 6,828 
Trading liabilities:
Other deposits0 2 0 2 
Short positions in securities1 0 0 1 
1 2 0 3 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives1 6,785 45 6,831 
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Group£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss7,484 47 7,531 
Trading liabilities:
Other deposits98 98 
Short positions in securities73 73 
73 98 171 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives73 7,582 47 7,702 
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss0 7,905 0 7,905 
Trading liabilities:
Other deposits0 2 0 2 
Short positions in securities0 0 0 0 
0 2 0 2 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives0 7,907 0 7,907 
Level 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss7,484 7,484 
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or lossDebt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss 6,504 33 6,537 
Trading liabilities:Trading liabilities:Trading liabilities:
Other depositsOther deposits140 140 Other deposits    
Short positions in securitiesShort positions in securities73 73 Short positions in securities    
73 140 213     
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivativesTotal financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives73 7,624 7,697 Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives 6,504 33 6,537 
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or lossDebt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss— 6,783 45 6,828 
Trading liabilities:Trading liabilities:
Other depositsOther deposits— — 
Short positions in securitiesShort positions in securities— — 
— 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivativesTotal financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives6,785 45 6,831 
F-102F-96

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Level 1Level 2Level 3Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss 9,821  9,821 
Trading liabilities:
Other deposits    
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives 9,821  9,821 
At 31 December 2020
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss— 7,905 — 7,905 
Trading liabilities:
Other deposits— — 
Total financial liabilities carried at fair value, excluding derivatives— 7,907 — 7,907 

Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in the level 3 financial liabilities portfolio, excluding derivatives.
2020201920212020
The GroupThe Group£m£mThe Group£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January47 At 1 January45 47 
Gains recognised in the income statement within other incomeGains recognised in the income statement within other income0 Gains recognised in the income statement within other income(5)— 
RedemptionsRedemptions(2)(5)Redemptions(7)(2)
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio0 51 
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio0 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December45 47 At 31 December33 45 
Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those liabilities held at 31 DecemberGains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those liabilities held at 31 December0 Gains recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those liabilities held at 31 December(4)— 
Valuation methodology for financial liabilities, excluding derivatives
Liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss
These principally comprise debt securities in issue which are classified as level 2 and their fair value is determined using techniques whose inputs are based on observable market data. The carrying amount of the securities is adjusted to reflect the effect of changes in own credit spreads and the resulting gain or loss is recognised in other comprehensive income.
AtIn the year ended 31 December 2020,2021, the own credit adjustment arising from the fair valuation of £6,828£6,537 million (2019: £7,531(2020: £6,828 million) of the Group’s debt securities in issue designated at fair value through profit or loss resulted in a loss of £75£86 million (2019:(2020: loss of £419£75 million), before tax, recognised in other comprehensive income.
Trading liabilities in respect of securities sold under repurchase agreements
The fair value of these liabilities is determined using discounted cash flow techniques. The discount rates are derived from observable repo curves specific to the type of security sold under the repurchase agreement.
(C)Derivatives
Valuation hierarchy
All of the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are carried at fair value. At 31 December 2020,2021, such assets totalled £5,511 million for the Group and £6,898 million for the Bank (2020: £8,341 million for the Group and £12,595 million for the Bank (2019: £8,494Bank) and liabilities totalled £4,643 million for the Group and £13,638£6,102 million for the Bank) and liabilities totalledBank (2020: £8,228 million for the Group and £11,072 million for the Bank (2019: £9,831 million for the Group and £14,211 million for the Bank). The table below analyses these derivative balances by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-98)F-93). The fair value measurement approach is recurring in nature. There were no significant transfers between level 1 and level 2 during the year.
2020201920212020
Level 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3Total
The GroupThe Group£m£mThe Group£m£m
Derivative assetsDerivative assets0 8,327 14 8,341 8,494 8,494 Derivative assets 5,495 16 5,511 — 8,327 14 8,341 
Derivative liabilitiesDerivative liabilities0 (7,909)(319)(8,228)(9,534)(297)(9,831)Derivative liabilities (4,436)(207)(4,643)— (7,909)(319)(8,228)
2020201920212020
Level 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3TotalLevel 1Level 2Level 3Total
The BankThe Bank£m£mThe Bank£m£m
Derivative assetsDerivative assets0 12,581 14 12,595 13,638 13,638 Derivative assets 6,882 16 6,898 — 12,581 14 12,595 
Derivative liabilitiesDerivative liabilities0 (11,012)(60)(11,072)(14,211)(14,211)Derivative liabilities (6,071)(31)(6,102)— (11,012)(60)(11,072)
F-97

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Movements in level 3 portfolio
The table below analyses movements in level 3 derivative assets and liabilities carried at fair value.
20212020
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
The Group£m£m£m£m
At 1 January14 (319)— (297)
Exchange and other adjustments  — — 
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income2 93 — 
(Sales) redemptions 19 — 19 
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  13 (41)
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  — — 
At 31 December16 (207)14 (319)
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December2 69 — 
20212020
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 1 January14 (60)— — 
Exchange and other adjustments  — — 
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income2 29 (8)
(Sales) redemptions  — — 
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio  13 (52)
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio  — — 
At 31 December16 (31)14 (60)
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December2 29 (8)
Valuation methodology for derivatives
Where the Group’s derivative assets and liabilities are not traded on an exchange, they are valued using valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow and options pricing models, as appropriate. The types of derivatives classified as level 2 and the valuation techniques used include:
Interest rate swaps which are valued using discounted cash flow models; the most significant inputs into those models are interest rate yield curves which are developed from publicly quoted rates.rates
Foreign exchange derivatives that do not contain options which are priced using rates available from publicly quoted sources.sources
Credit derivatives which are valued using standard models with observable inputs, except for the items classified as level 3, which are valued using publicly available yield and credit default swap (CDS) curves.curves
Less complex interest rate and foreign exchange option products which are valued using volatility surfaces developed from publicly available interest rate cap, interest rate swaption and other option volatilities; option volatility skew information is derived from a market standard consensus pricing service. For more complex option products, the Group calibrates its models using observable at-the-money data; where necessary, the Group adjusts for out-of-the-money positions using a market standard consensus pricing service.service
Complex interest rate and foreign exchange products where inputs to the valuation are significant, material and unobservable are classified as level 3.
Where credit protection, usually in the form of credit default swaps, has been purchased or written on asset-backed securities, the security is referred to as a negative basis asset-backed security and the resulting derivative assets or liabilities have been classified as either level 2 or level 3 according to the classification of the underlying asset-backed security.
Certain unobservable inputs used to calculate CVA, FVA, and own credit adjustments, are not significant in determining the classification of the derivative and debt instruments. Consequently, these inputs do not form part of the level 3 sensitivities presented.

F-103
F-98

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
The table below analyses movements in level 3 derivative assets and liabilities carried at fair value.
20202019
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
The Group£m£m£m£m
At 1 January0 (297)(8)
Exchange and other adjustments0 0 
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income1 0 
(Sales) redemptions0 19 47 
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio13 (41)(344)
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio0 0 (5)
At 31 December14 (319)(297)
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December1 0 
20202019
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
Derivative
assets
Derivative
liabilities
The Bank£m£m£m£m
At 1 January0 0 (8)
Exchange and other adjustments0 0 
Losses (gains) recognised in the income statement within other income1 (8)
(Sales) redemptions0 0 
Transfers into the level 3 portfolio13 (52)
Transfers out of the level 3 portfolio0 0 (5)
At 31 December14 (60)— 
Gains (losses) recognised in the income statement, within other income, relating to the change in fair value of those assets or liabilities held at 31 December1 (8)
Derivative valuation adjustments
Derivative financial instruments which are carried in the balance sheet at fair value are adjusted where appropriate to reflect credit risk, market liquidity and other risks.
(i)Uncollateralised derivative valuation adjustments
The following table summarises the movement on this valuation adjustment account for the Group during 20192020 and 2020:2021:
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
At 1 JanuaryAt 1 January214 272 At 1 January242 214 
Income statement charge (credit)Income statement charge (credit)28 (56)Income statement charge (credit)(88)28 
TransfersTransfers0 (2)Transfers — 
At 31 DecemberAt 31 December242 214 At 31 December154 242 
Represented by:
2020201920212020
£m£m£m£m
Credit Valuation AdjustmentCredit Valuation Adjustment178 141 Credit Valuation Adjustment112 178 
Debit Valuation AdjustmentDebit Valuation Adjustment(6)(5)Debit Valuation Adjustment(4)(6)
Funding Valuation AdjustmentFunding Valuation Adjustment70 78 Funding Valuation Adjustment46 70 
242 214 154 242 
Credit and Debit Valuation Adjustments (CVA and DVA) are applied to the Group’s over-the-counter derivative exposures with counterparties that are not subject to strong interbank collateral arrangements. These exposures largely relate to the provision of risk management solutions for corporate customers within the Commercial Banking division.
A CVA is taken where the Group has a positive future uncollateralised exposure (asset). A DVA is taken where the Group has a negative future uncollateralised exposure (liability). These adjustments reflect interest rates and expectations of counterparty creditworthiness and the Group’s own credit spread respectively.
F-104

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
The CVA is sensitive to:
theThe current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised asset;asset
expectationsExpectations of future market volatility of the underlying asset; andasset
expectationsExpectations of counterparty creditworthiness.creditworthiness
Market Credit Default Swap (CDS) spreads are used to develop the probability of default for quoted counterparties. For unquoted counterparties, internal credit ratings and market sector CDS curves and recovery rates are used. The Loss Given Defaultloss given default (LGD) is based on market recovery rates and internal credit assessments.
The combination of a one notchone-notch deterioration in the credit rating of derivative counterparties and a ten per cent increase in LGD increases the CVA by £46£29 million. Current market value is used to estimate the projected exposure for products not supported by the model, which are principally complex interest rate options that are traded in very low volumes. For these, the CVA is calculated on an add-on basis (although no such adjustment was required at 31 December 2020)2021).
The DVA is sensitive to:
theThe current size of the mark-to-market position on the uncollateralised liability;liability
expectationsExpectations of future market volatility of the underlying liability; andliability
theThe Group’s own CDS spread.spread
A 1 per cent rise in the CDS spread would lead to an increase in the DVA of £14£11 million.
The risk exposures that are used for the CVA and DVA calculations are strongly influenced by interest rates. Due to the nature of the Group’s business the CVA/DVA exposures tend to be on average the same way around such that the valuation adjustments fall when interest rates rise. A one per cent rise in interest rates would lead to a £56£37 million fall in the overall valuation adjustment to £116£71 million. The CVA model used by the Group does not assume any correlation between the level of interest rates and default rates.
The Group has also recognised a Funding Valuation Adjustment to adjust for the net cost of funding uncollateralised derivative positions. This adjustment is calculated on the expected future exposure discounted at a suitable cost of funds. A ten basis points increase in the cost of funds will increase the funding valuation adjustment by approximately £12£8 million.
(ii)Market liquidity
The Group includes mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments against the expected cost of closing out the net market risk in the Group’s trading positions within a timeframetime frame that is consistent with historical trading activity and spreads that the trading desks have accessed historically during the ordinary course of business in normal market conditions.
At 31 December 2020,2021, the Group’s derivative trading business held mid to bid-offer valuation adjustments of £26£12 million (2019: £20(2020: £26 million).
F-105F-99

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(D)Sensitivity of level 3 valuations
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 201920212020
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions2
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions2
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions2
Effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions2
Valuation
techniques
Significant
unobservable inputs
1
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
Valuation
techniques
Significant
unobservable inputs
1
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
Carrying
value
Favourable
changes
Unfavourable
changes
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Loans and advances to customersLoans and advances to customersDiscounted cash flows
Interest rate spreads (bps) (-50bps/+106bps)3
1,511 47 (45)1,782 36 (39)Loans and advances to customersDiscounted cash flows
Interest rate spreads (bps) (+/-50bps)3
395 32 (30)1,511 47 (45)
Debt securitiesDiscounted cash flows
Credit spreads4
0 0 0 47 
Equity investmentsEquity investmentsn/a4 2 (2)— — — 
1,511 1,829 399 1,511 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securitiesLead manager or broker quote/consensus pricingn/a65 4 (4)60 (4)Asset-backed securitiesLead manager or broker quote/consensus pricingn/a55 4 (4)65 (4)
Equity investmentsEquity investmentsn/a1   — — — 
65 60 56 65 
Derivative financial assetsDerivative financial assetsDerivative financial assets
Interest rate derivativesInterest rate derivativesOption pricing modelInterest rate volatility (13%/128%)14 0 0 Interest rate derivativesOption pricing model
Interest rate volatility (31%/59%)4
16   14 — — 
14 
Level 3 financial assets carried at fair valueLevel 3 financial assets carried at fair value1,590 1,889 Level 3 financial assets carried at fair value471 1,590 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossFinancial liabilities at fair value through profit or lossDiscounted cash flows
Interest rate spreads (+/-50bps)5
45 1 (1)47 (1)Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
Securitisation notesSecuritisation notesDiscounted cash flows
Interest rate spreads (+/-50bps)5
33 1 (1)45 (1)
Derivative financial liabilitiesDerivative financial liabilitiesDerivative financial liabilities
Interest rate derivativesInterest rate derivativesOption pricing modelInterest rate volatility (33%/60%)48 0 0 Interest rate derivativesOption pricing model
Interest rate volatility (13%/168%)6
31   48 — — 
Shared appreciation rightShared appreciation rightMarket values – property valuation
HPI (+/-1%)6
271 24 (22)297 17 (17)Shared appreciation rightMarket values – property valuation
HPI (+/-1%)7
176 19 (18)271 24 (22)
319 297 207 319 
Level 3 financial liabilities carried at fair valueLevel 3 financial liabilities carried at fair value364 344 Level 3 financial liabilities carried at fair value240 364 
1Ranges are shown where appropriate and represent the highest and lowest inputs used in the level 3 valuations.
2Where the exposure to an unobservable input is managed on a net basis, only the net impact is shown in the table.
32019: 50bps/102bps2020: -50bps/106bps
42019:+2020: 13%/- 3%128%
52019:2020:+/- 50bps
62019:2020: 33%/60%
72020:+/- 5%1%
F-106

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Unobservable inputs
Significant unobservable inputs affecting the valuation of debt securities and derivatives are as follows:
Interest rates and inflation rates are referenced in some derivatives where the payoff that the holder of the derivative receives depends on the behaviour of those underlying references through time.time
Credit spreads represent the premium above the benchmark reference instrument required to compensate for lower credit quality; higher spreads lead to a lower fair value.value
Volatility parameters represent key attributes of option behaviour; higher volatilities typically denote a wider range of possible outcomes.outcomes
Reasonably possible alternative assumptions
Valuation techniques applied to many of the Group’s level 3 instruments often involve the use of two or more inputs whose relationship is interdependent. The calculation of the effect of reasonably possible alternative assumptions included in the table above reflects such relationships.
Debt securities
Reasonably possible alternative assumptions have been determined in respect of the Group’s structured credit investment by flexing credit spreads.
Derivatives
Reasonably possible alternative assumptions have been determined in respect of swaptions in the Group’s derivative portfolios which are priced using industry standard option pricing models. Such models require interest rate volatilities which may be unobservable at longer maturities. To derive reasonably possible alternative valuations these volatilities have been flexed within a range.

F-107F-100

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(4)Financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost
(A)Financial assets
Valuation hierarchy
The table below analyses the fair values of the financial assets of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-98)F-93). Financial assets carried at amortised cost are mainly classified as level 3 due to significant unobservable inputs used in the valuation models. Where inputs are observable, debt securities are classified as level 1 or 2.
Valuation hierarchy
Carrying valueFair valueLevel 1Level 2Level 3
The Group£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers480,141 479,518 0 54,447 425,071 
Loans and advances to banks5,950 5,949 0 1,626 4,323 
Debt securities5,137 5,129 0 5,129 0 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings738 738 0 0 738 
Reverse repos included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to customers54,447 54,447 0 54,447 0 
Loans and advances to banks1,626 1,626 0 1,626 0 
At 31 December 2019
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers474,470 475,128 51,624 423,504 
Loans and advances to banks4,852 4,849 408 4,441 
Debt securities5,325 5,317 5,317 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,854 1,854 1,854 
Reverse repos included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to customers51,624 51,624 51,624 
Loans and advances to banks408 408 408 
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3
The Group£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements7,474 7,474  2,996 4,478 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements477,541 480,992  46,712 434,280 
Debt securities4,562 4,615  4,615  
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings739 739   739 
Reverse repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements2,996 2,996  2,996  
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements46,712 46,712  46,712  
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements5,950 5,949 — 1,626 4,323 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements480,141 479,518 — 54,447 425,071 
Debt securities5,137 5,129 — 5,129 — 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings738 738 — — 738 
Reverse repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements1,626 1,626 — 1,626 — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements54,447 54,447 — 54,447 — 
Carrying valueFair valueValuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers178,269 176,523 0 54,447 122,076 
Loans and advances to banks5,656 5,655 0 1,626 4,029 
Debt securities4,315 4,315 0 4,315 0 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings128,771 128,771 0 0 128,771 
Reverse repos included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to customers54,447 54,447 0 54,447 0 
Loans and advances to banks1,626 1,626 0 1,626 0 
At 31 December 2019
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers177,569 175,200 51,624 123,576 
Loans and advances to banks4,453 4,450 408 4,042 
Debt securities5,241 5,242 5,242 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings202,277 202,277 202,277 
Reverse repos included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to customers51,624 51,624 51,624 
Loans and advances to banks408 408 408 
F-108

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements7,287 7,287  2,996 4,291 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements163,428 162,829  46,712 116,117 
Debt securities3,756 3,817  3,817  
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings108,424 108,424   108,424 
Reverse repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements2,996 2,996  2,996  
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements46,712 46,712  46,712  
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements5,656 5,655 — 1,626 4,029 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements178,269 176,523 — 54,447 122,076 
Debt securities4,315 4,315 — 4,315 — 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings128,771 128,771 — — 128,771 
Reverse repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements1,626 1,626 — 1,626 — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements54,447 54,447 — 54,447 — 
Valuation methodology
Loans and advances to customers
The Group provides loans and advances to commercial, corporate and personal customers at both fixed and variable rates. Due to their short-term nature, the carrying value of the variable rate loans and those relating to lease financing is assumed to be their fair value.
To determine the fair value of loans and advances to customers, loans are segregated into portfolios of similar characteristics. A number of techniques are used to estimate the fair value of fixed rate lending; these take account of expected credit losses based on historic trends, prevailing market interest rates and expected future cash flows. For retail exposures, fair value is usually estimated by discounting anticipated cash flows (including interest at contractual rates) at market rates for similar loans offered by the Group and other financial institutions. Certain loans secured on residential properties are made at a fixed rate for a limited period, typically two to five years, after which the loans revert to the relevant variable rate. The fair value of such loans is estimated by reference to the market rates for similar loans of maturity equal to the remaining fixed interest rate period. The fair value of commercial loans is estimated by discounting anticipated cash flows at a rate which reflects the effects of interest rate changes, adjusted for changes in credit risk.
F-101

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Loans and advances to banks
The carrying value of short-dated loans and advances to banks is assumed to be their fair value. The fair value of loans and advances to banks is estimated by discounting the anticipated cash flows at a market discount rate adjusted for the credit spread of the obligor or, where not observable, the credit spread of borrowers of similar credit quality.
Debt securities
The fair values of debt securities are determined predominantly from lead manager quotes and, where these are not available, by alternative techniques including reference to credit spreads on similar assets with the same obligor, market standard consensus pricing services, broker quotes and other research data.
Reverse repurchase agreements
The carrying amount is deemed a reasonable approximation of fair value given the short-term nature of these instruments.
F-109

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
42 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
(B)Financial liabilities
Valuation hierarchy
The table below analyses the fair values of the financial liabilities of the Group which are carried at amortised cost by valuation methodology (level 1, 2 or 3, as described on page F-98)F-93).
Valuation hierarchy
Carrying valueFair valueLevel 1Level 2Level 3
The Group£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks24,997 24,998 0 24,998 0 
Customer deposits434,569 434,740 0 427,663 7,077 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings6,875 6,875 0 6,875 0 
Debt securities in issue59,293 62,931 0 62,931 0 
Subordinated liabilities9,242 10,275 0 10,275 0 
Repos included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks18,767 18,767 0 18,767 0 
Customer deposits9,417 9,417 0 9,417 0 
At 31 December 2019
Deposits from banks23,593 23,497 23,497 
Customer deposits396,839 397,222 391,987 5,235 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings4,893 4,893 4,893 
Debt securities in issue76,431 78,632 78,632 
Subordinated liabilities12,586 14,542 14,542 
Repos included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks18,105 18,105 18,105 
Customer deposits9,530 9,530 9,530 
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3
The Group£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements33,448 33,449  33,449  
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements449,394 449,476  449,476  
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,490 1,490  1,490  
Debt securities in issue48,724 50,683  50,683  
Subordinated liabilities8,658 9,363  9,363  
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements30,085 30,085  30,085  
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements21 21  21  
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements24,997 24,998 — 24,998 — 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements434,569 434,740 — 427,663 7,077 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings6,875 6,875 — 6,875 — 
Debt securities in issue59,293 62,931 — 62,931 — 
Subordinated liabilities9,242 10,275 — 10,275 — 
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements18,767 18,767 — 18,767 — 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements9,417 9,417 — 9,417 — 
Valuation hierarchy
Carrying valueFair valueLevel 1Level 2Level 3
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks10,304 10,304 0 10,304 0 
Customer deposits264,473 264,497 0 264,497 0 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings39,836 39,836 0 39,836 0 
Debt securities in issue48,109 50,824 0 50,824 0 
Subordinated liabilities7,751 8,387 0 8,387 0 
Repos included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks5,087 5,087 0 5,087 0 
Customer deposits9,417 9,417 0 9,417 0 
At 31 December 2019
Deposits from banks7,122 7,025 7,025 
Customer deposits239,762 239,952 239,952 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings109,771 109,771 109,771 
Debt securities in issue61,509 63,483 63,483 
Subordinated liabilities9,909 10,974 10,974 
Repos included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks2,645 2,645 2,645 
Customer deposits9,530 9,530 9,530 
Carrying
value
Fair
value
Valuation hierarchy
Level 1Level 2Level 3
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements2,825 2,825  2,825  
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements268,704 268,721  268,721  
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings22,872 22,872  22,872  
Debt securities in issue38,439 40,222  40,222  
Subordinated liabilities7,907 8,333  8,333  
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements57 57  57  
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements21 21  21  
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements10,304 10,304 — 10,304 — 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements264,473 264,497 — 264,497 — 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings39,836 39,836 — 39,836 — 
Debt securities in issue48,109 50,824 — 50,824 — 
Subordinated liabilities7,751 8,387 — 8,387 — 
Repurchase agreements included in above amounts:
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements5,087 5,087 — 5,087 — 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements9,417 9,417 — 9,417 — 
F-110F-102

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
42NOTE 41: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (continued)
Valuation methodology
Deposits from banks and customer deposits
The fair value of bank and customer deposits repayable on demand is assumed to be equal to their carrying value.
The fair value for all other deposits is estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates, where applicable, or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities.
Debt securities in issue
The fair value of short-term debt securities in issue is approximately equal to their carrying value. Fair value for other debt securities is calculated based on quoted market prices where available. Where quoted market prices are not available, fair value is estimated using discounted cash flow techniques at a rate which reflects market rates of interest and the Group’s own credit spread.
Subordinated liabilities
The fair value of subordinated liabilities is determined by reference to quoted market prices where available or by reference to quoted market prices of similar instruments. Subordinated liabilities are classified as level 2, since the inputs used to determine their fair value are largely observable.
Repurchase agreements
The carrying amount is deemed a reasonable approximation of fair value given the short-term nature of these instruments.
(5)Reclassifications of financial assets
There have been no reclassifications of financial assets in 20192020 or 2020.
F-111
2021.

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
43NOTE 42: TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS
There were no significant transferred financial assets which were derecognised in their entirety, but with ongoing exposure. Details of transferred financial assets that continue to be recognised in full are as follows.
The Group and the Bank enter into repurchase and securities lending transactions in the normal course of business that do not result in derecognition of the financial assets as substantially all of the risks and rewards, including credit, interest rate, prepayment and other price risks are retained by the Group. In all cases, the transferee has the right to sell or repledge the assets concerned.
As set out in note 26,25, included within financial assets measured at amortised cost are loans transferred under the Group’s securitisation and covered bond programmes. As the Group retains all or a majority of the risks and rewards associated with these loans, including credit, interest rate, prepayment and liquidity risk, they remain on the Group’s balance sheet. Assets transferred into the Group’s securitisation and covered bond programmes are not available to be used by the Group whilstwhile the assets are within the programmes. However, the Group retains the right to remove loans from the covered bond programmes where they are in excess of the programme’s requirements. In addition, where the Group has retained some of the notes issued by securitisation and covered bond programmes, the Group has the ability to sell or pledge these retained notes.
The table below sets out the carrying values of the transferred assets and the associated liabilities. For repurchase and securities lending transactions, the associated liabilities represent the Group’s obligation to repurchase the transferred assets. For securitisation programmes, the associated liabilities represent the external notes in issue (note 26)25). Except as otherwise noted below, none of theThe liabilities shown in the table below have recourse only to the transferred assets.
The GroupThe Bank
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Repurchase and securities lending transactions
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss0 0 3,244 1,869 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income7,475 5,105 4,889 3,895 
Securitisation programmes
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers1,2
34,584 4,481 4,072 0 
The GroupThe Bank20212020
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
£m£m
At 31 December 2019
The GroupThe Group£m£m
Repurchase and securities lending transactionsRepurchase and securities lending transactionsRepurchase and securities lending transactions
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss3,123 2,668 655 21 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  — — 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income5,436 4,560 7,552 6,065 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income7,706 5,039 7,475 5,105 
Securitisation programmesSecuritisation programmesSecuritisation programmes
Financial assets at amortised cost:Financial assets at amortised cost:Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers1,2
42,545 7,376 6,433 
Loans and advances to customers1
Loans and advances to customers1
30,965 3,705 34,584 4,481 
1The carrying value of associated liabilities for the Group excludes securitisation notes held by the Group of £27,418£23,521 million (31 December 2019: £31,3962020: £27,418 million).
20212020
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
Carrying
value of
transferred
assets
Carrying
value of
associated
liabilities
The Bank£m£m£m£m
Repurchase and securities lending transactions
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss  3,244 1,869 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income8,626 5,745 4,889 3,895 
Securitisation programmes
Financial assets at amortised cost:
Loans and advances to customers1
2,847 176 4,072 — 
21The carrying value of transferred assets for the Bank includes amounts relating to assets transferred to structured entities which are fully consolidated into the Group. The liabilities associated with such assets are issued by the structured entities.
F-112F-103

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
44NOTE 43: OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
The following information relates to financial assets and liabilities which have been offset in the balance sheet and those which have not been offset but for which the Group has enforceable master netting agreements or collateral arrangements in place with counterparties.
Related amounts where set off in
the balance sheet not permitted
3
Potential
net amounts
if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
Gross amounts
of assets and
liabilities
1
Amount offset
in the balance
sheet
2
Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
Cash
collateral
received/
pledged
Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
At 31 December 2020£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:
Excluding reverse repos1,674 0 1,674 0 0 1,674 
Reverse repos0 0 0 0 0 0 
1,674 0 1,674 0  1,674 
Derivative financial instruments67,428 (59,087)8,341 (2,702)(3,555)2,084 
Loans and advances to banks:
Excluding reverse repos4,324 0 4,324 (1,023)0 3,301 
Reverse repos1,634 (8)1,626 0 (1,626)0 
5,958 (8)5,950 (1,023)(1,626)3,301 
Loans and advances to customers:
Excluding reverse repos426,104 (410)425,694 (837)(2,762)422,095 
Reverse repos59,856 (5,409)54,447 0 (54,447)0 
485,960 (5,819)480,141 (837)(57,209)422,095 
Debt securities5,137 0 5,137 0 0 5,137 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,260 0 27,260 0 (5,132)22,128 
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks:
Excluding repos6,230 0 6,230 (2,351)0 3,879 
Repos18,775 (8)18,767 0 (18,767)0 
25,005 (8)24,997 (2,351)(18,767)3,879 
Customer deposits:
Excluding repos426,874 (1,722)425,152 (350)(2,762)422,040 
Repos14,826 (5,409)9,417 0 (9,417)0 
441,700 (7,131)434,569 (350)(12,179)422,040 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:
Excluding repos6,831 0 6,831 0 0 6,831 
Repos0 0 0 0 0 0 
6,831 0 6,831 0 0 6,831 
Derivative financial instruments66,003 (57,775)8,228 (1,860)(4,849)1,519 


NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
44 OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (continued)
Related amounts where set off in
the balance sheet not permitted
3
Potential
net amounts
if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
Gross amounts
of assets and
liabilities
1
Amount offset
in the balance
sheet
2
Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
Cash
collateral
received/
pledged
Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
At 31 December 2019£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:
Excluding reverse repos2,284 2,284 (21)2,263 
Reverse repos
2,284 2,284 (21)2,263 
Derivative financial instruments61,860 (53,366)8,494 (2,186)(4,177)2,131 
Loans and advances to banks:
Excluding reverse repos4,444 4,444 (1,288)(2,792)364 
Reverse repos408 408 (408)
4,852 4,852 (1,288)(3,200)364 
Loans and advances to customers:
Excluding reverse repos422,846 422,846 (879)421,967 
Reverse repos56,089 (4,465)51,624 (51,624)
478,935 (4,465)474,470 (879)(51,624)421,967 
Debt securities5,325 5,325 (211)5,114 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income24,617 24,617 (5,948)18,669 
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks:
Excluding repos5,488 5,488 (1,684)3,804 
Repos18,105 18,105 (18,105)
23,593 23,593 (1,684)(18,105)3,804 
Customer deposits:
Excluding repos389,178 (1,869)387,309 (501)(2,792)384,016 
Repos9,530 9,530 (9,530)
398,708 (1,869)396,839 (501)(12,322)384,016 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:
Excluding repos7,702 7,702 7,702 
Repos4,465 (4,465)
12,167 (4,465)7,702 7,702 
Derivative financial instruments61,328 (51,497)9,831 (2,168)(5,020)2,643 
Related amounts where
set off in the balance
sheet not permitted
3
Potential
net amounts
if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
Gross
amounts of
assets and
liabilities
1
Amount
offset in
the balance
sheet
2
Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
Cash
collateral
received/
pledged
Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,798  1,798  (35)1,763 
Derivative financial instruments33,665 (28,154)5,511 (1,621)(2,733)1,157 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse
repurchase agreements:
Loans and advances to banks4,478  4,478 (350) 4,128 
Reverse repurchase agreements4,179 (1,183)2,996  (2,996) 
8,657 (1,183)7,474 (350)(2,996)4,128 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:
Loans and advances to customers431,994 (1,165)430,829 (102)(1,506)429,221 
Reverse repurchase agreements55,466 (8,754)46,712  (46,712) 
487,460 (9,919)477,541 (102)(48,218)429,221 
Debt securities4,562  4,562  (267)4,295 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,786  27,786  (4,981)22,805 
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements:
Deposits from banks3,363  3,363 (1,404) 1,959 
Repurchase agreements31,268 (1,183)30,085  (30,085) 
34,631 (1,183)33,448 (1,404)(30,085)1,959 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements:
Customer deposits450,538 (1,165)449,373 (217)(1,506)447,650 
Repurchase agreements8,775 (8,754)21  (21) 
459,313 (9,919)449,394 (217)(1,527)447,650 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,537  6,537   6,537 
Derivative financial instruments32,797 (28,154)4,643 (452)(4,191) 
1After impairment allowance.
2The amounts offset in the balance sheet as shown above mainly represent derivatives and repurchase agreements with central clearing houses which meet the criteria for offsetting under IAS 32.
3The Group enters into derivatives and repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with various counterparties which are governed by industry standard master netting agreements. The Group holds and provides cash and securities collateral in respective of derivative transactions covered by these agreements. The right to set off balances under these master netting agreements or to set off cash and securities collateral only arises in the event of non-payment or default and, as a result, these arrangements do not qualify for offsetting under IAS 32.
The effects of over collateralisationover-collateralisation have not been taken into account in the above table.
F-114F-104

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021

NOTE 43: OFFSETTING OF FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
(continued)
45
Related amounts where
set off in the balance
sheet not permitted
3
Potential
net amounts
if offset
of related
amounts
permitted
Gross
amounts of
assets and
liabilities
1
Amount
offset in
the balance
sheet
2
Net amounts
presented in
the balance
sheet
Cash
collateral
received/
pledged
Non-cash
collateral
received/
pledged
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,674 — 1,674 — — 1,674 
Derivative financial instruments67,428 (59,087)8,341 (2,702)(3,555)2,084 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse
repurchase agreements:
Loans and advances to banks4,324 — 4,324 (1,023)— 3,301 
Reverse repurchase agreements1,634 (8)1,626 — (1,626)— 
5,958 (8)5,950 (1,023)(1,626)3,301 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements:
Loans and advances to customers426,104 (410)425,694 (837)(2,762)422,095 
Reverse repurchase agreements59,856 (5,409)54,447 — (54,447)— 
485,960 (5,819)480,141 (837)(57,209)422,095 
Debt securities5,137 — 5,137 — — 5,137 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,260 — 27,260 — (5,132)22,128 
Financial liabilities
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements:
Deposits from banks6,230 — 6,230 (2,351)— 3,879 
Repurchase agreements18,775 (8)18,767 — (18,767)— 
25,005 (8)24,997 (2,351)(18,767)3,879 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements:
Customer deposits426,874 (1,722)425,152 (350)(2,762)422,040 
Repurchase agreements14,826 (5,409)9,417 — (9,417)— 
441,700 (7,131)434,569 (350)(12,179)422,040 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss6,831 — 6,831 — — 6,831 
Derivative financial instruments66,003 (57,775)8,228 (1,860)(4,849)1,519 
1After impairment allowance.
2The amounts offset in the balance sheet as shown above mainly represent derivatives and repurchase agreements with central clearing houses which meet the criteria for offsetting under IAS 32.
3The Group enters into derivatives and repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with various counterparties which are governed by industry standard master netting agreements. The Group holds and provides cash and securities collateral in respective of derivative transactions covered by these agreements. The right to set off balances under these master netting agreements or to set off cash and securities collateral only arises in the event of non-payment or default and, as a result, these arrangements do not qualify for offsetting under IAS 32.
The effects of over-collateralisation have not been taken into account in the above table.
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
Financial instruments are fundamental to the Group’s activities and, as a consequence, the risks associated with financial instruments represent a significant component of the risks faced by the Group.
The primary risks affecting the Group through its use of financial instruments are: credit risk; market risk, which includes interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk; credit risk; liquidity risk and capital risk. Information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks and its capital can be found on pages 24 to 74. The following additional disclosures which provide its quantitative and qualitative information about the risks within financial instruments held or issued by the Group, should be read in conjunction with that earlier information.Group's exposure to these risks.
(1)Credit risk
The Group’s credit risk exposure arises in respect of the instruments below and predominantly in the United Kingdom. Credit risk appetite is set at Board level and is described and reported through a suite of metrics devised from a combination of accounting and credit portfolio performance measures, which include the use of various credit risk rating systems as inputs and measure theassess credit risk of loans and advances to customers and banks at a counterparty level using three components: (i) the probability of default by the counterparty on its contractual obligations; (ii) the current exposures to the counterparty and their likely future development, from which the Group derives the exposure at default; and (iii) the likely loss ratio on the defaulted obligations, the loss given default. The Group uses a range of approaches to mitigate credit risk, including internal control policies, obtaining collateral, using master netting agreements and other credit risk transfers, such as asset sales and credit derivative based transactions.
F-105

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
A.NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
(A)Maximum credit exposure
The maximum credit risk exposure of the Group and the Bank in the event of other parties failing to perform their obligations is detailed below. No account is taken of any collateral held and the maximum exposure to loss is considered to be the balance sheet carrying amount or, for non-derivative off-balance sheet transactions and financial guarantees, their contractual nominal amounts.
The Group20202019
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks, net2
5,950 0 5,950 4,852 4,852 
Loans and advances to customers, net2
480,141 (2,762)477,379 474,470 (2,792)471,678 
Debt securities, net2
5,137 0 5,137 5,325 5,325 
Financial assets at amortised cost491,228 (2,762)488,466 484,647 (2,792)481,855 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,260 0 27,260 24,617 24,617 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss3:
Loans and advances1,511 0 1,511 1,782 1,782 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills0 0 0 337 337 
1,511 0 1,511 2,119 2,119 
Derivative assets8,341 (3,373)4,968 8,494 (4,177)4,317 
Off-balance sheet items:
Acceptances and endorsements73 0 73 17 17 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes221 0 221 279 279 
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies2,070 0 2,070 2,274 2,274 
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees59,240 0 59,240 46,629 46,629 
61,604 0 61,604 49,199 49,199 
589,944 (6,135)583,809 569,076 (6,969)562,107 
F-115

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Bank20202019
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Loans and advances to banks, net2
5,656 0 5,656 4,453 4,453 
Loans and advances to customers, net2
178,269 (2,156)176,113 177,569 (2,123)175,446 
Debt securities, net2
4,315 0 4,315 5,241 5,241 
Financial assets at amortised cost188,240 (2,156)186,084 187,263 (2,123)185,140 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income24,647 0 24,647 22,160 22,160 
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss3:
Loans and advances517 0 517 362 362 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills1,203 0 1,203 337 337 
1,720 0 1,720 699 699 
Derivative assets12,595 (2,752)9,843 13,638 (3,312)10,326 
Off-balance sheet items:
Acceptances and endorsements73 0 73 16 16 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes203 0 203 259 259 
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies1,817 0 1,817 2,014 2,014 
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees32,847 0 32,847 27,672 27,672 
34,940 0 34,940 29,961 29,961 
262,142 (4,908)257,234 253,721 (5,435)248,286 
The Group20212020
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss2
1,559  1,559 1,511 — 1,511 
Derivative financial instruments5,511 (2,369)3,142 8,341 (3,373)4,968 
Financial assets at amortised cost, net3:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse
repurchase agreements, net
3
7,474  7,474 5,950 — 5,950 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse
repurchase agreements, net
3
477,541 (1,506)476,035 480,141 (2,762)477,379 
Debt securities, net3
4,562  4,562 5,137 — 5,137 
489,577 (1,506)488,071 491,228 (2,762)488,466 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income2
27,785  27,785 27,260 — 27,260 
Off-balance sheet items:
Acceptances and endorsements21  21 73 — 73 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes433  433 221 — 221 
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies1,886  1,886 2,070 — 2,070 
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees55,690  55,690 59,240 — 59,240 
58,030  58,030 61,604 — 61,604 
582,462 (3,875)578,587 589,944 (6,135)583,809 
1Offset items comprise deposit amounts available for offset, and amounts available for offset under master netting arrangements, that do not meet the criteria under IAS 32 to enable loans and advances and derivative assets respectively to be presented net of these balances in the financial statements.
2Excluding equity shares.
3Amounts shown net of related impairment allowances.
The Bank20212020
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
Maximum
exposure
Offset1
Net
exposure
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss2:
Loans and advances1,121  1,121 517 — 517 
Debt securities, treasury and other bills3,404  3,404 1,203 — 1,203 
4,525  4,525 1,720 — 1,720 
Derivative financial instruments6,898 (2,019)4,879 12,595 (2,752)9,843 
Financial assets at amortised cost, net3
Loans and advances to banks and reverse
repurchase agreements, net
3
7,287  7,287 5,656 — 5,656 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse
repurchase agreements, net
3
163,428 (1,201)162,227 178,269 (2,156)176,113 
Debt securities, net3
3,756  3,756 4,315 — 4,315 
174,471 (1,201)173,270 188,240 (2,156)186,084 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income25,529  25,529 24,647 — 24,647 
Off-balance sheet items:
Acceptances and endorsements21  21 73 — 73 
Other items serving as direct credit substitutes375  375 203 — 203 
Performance bonds, including letters of credit, and other transaction-related contingencies1,681  1,681 1,817 — 1,817 
Irrevocable commitments and guarantees30,653  30,653 32,847 — 32,847 
32,730  32,730 34,940 — 34,940 
244,153 (3,220)240,933 262,142 (4,908)257,234 
31Offset items comprise deposit amounts available for offset, and amounts available for offset under master netting arrangements, that do not meet the criteria under IAS 32 to enable loans and advances and derivative assets respectively to be presented net of these balances in the financial statements.
2Excluding equity shares.
3Amounts shown net of related impairment allowances.
F-116
F-106

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
B.(B)Concentrations of exposure
The Group’s management of concentration risk includes single name, industry sector and country limits as well as controls over the Group’s overall exposure to certain products. As part of its credit risk policy, the Group considers sustainability risk (which incorporates Environmental (including climate), Social and Governance) in the assessment of Commercial Banking facilities.
At 31 December 20202021 the most significant concentrations of exposure were in mortgages (comprising 6366 per cent of total loans and advances to customers) and to financial, business and other services (comprising 1614 per cent of the total).
Loans and advances to customers
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Agriculture, forestry and fishingAgriculture, forestry and fishing7,835 7,557 3,039 2,949 Agriculture, forestry and fishing7,728 7,835 2,901 3,039 
Energy and water supplyEnergy and water supply1,274 1,423 1,189 1,328 Energy and water supply1,962 1,274 1,890 1,189 
ManufacturingManufacturing4,455 4,869 3,770 3,811 Manufacturing3,505 4,455 3,113 3,770 
ConstructionConstruction5,046 4,190 4,022 3,255 Construction4,325 5,046 3,613 4,022 
Transport, distribution and hotelsTransport, distribution and hotels14,229 12,657 10,160 8,350 Transport, distribution and hotels13,367 14,229 10,001 10,160 
Postal and telecommunicationsPostal and telecommunications2,261 1,679 1,689 1,130 Postal and telecommunications1,857 2,261 1,506 1,689 
Property companiesProperty companies25,092 26,736 21,629 22,982 Property companies23,156 25,092 19,934 21,629 
Financial, business and other servicesFinancial, business and other services77,271 73,087 73,987 68,461 Financial, business and other services65,849 77,271 63,929 73,987 
Personal:Personal:Personal:
Mortgages1
Mortgages1
305,966 298,294 49,574 52,341 
Mortgages1
318,422 305,966 46,089 49,574 
OtherOther25,295 29,165 8,502 10,060 Other24,546 25,295 8,674 8,502 
Lease financingLease financing1,047 1,536 30 93 Lease financing843 1,047 20 30 
Hire purchaseHire purchase16,071 16,440 2,959 3,982 Hire purchase15,785 16,071 2,934 2,959 
Total loans and advances to customers before allowance for impairment losses485,842 477,633 180,550 178,742 
Allowance for impairment losses (note 16)(5,701)(3,163)(2,281)(1,173)
Total loans and advances to customers480,141 474,470 178,269 177,569 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements before allowance for impairment lossesTotal loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements before allowance for impairment losses481,345 485,842 164,604 180,550 
Allowance for impairment losses (note 15)Allowance for impairment losses (note 15)(3,804)(5,701)(1,176)(2,281)
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsTotal loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements477,541 480,141 163,428 178,269 
1Includes both UK and overseas mortgage balances.
The Group’s operations are predominantly UK-based and as a result an analysis of credit risk exposures by geographical region is not provided.
C.(C)Credit quality of assets
Loans and advances
The analysis of lending has been prepared based on the division in which the asset is held; with the business segment in which the exposure is recorded reflected in the ratings system applied. The internal credit ratings systems used by the Group differ between Retail and Commercial, reflecting the characteristics of these exposures and the way that they are managed internally; these credit ratings are set out below. All probabilities of default (PDs) include forward-looking information and are based on 12 month12-month values, with the exception of credit impaired.credit-impaired.
RetailRetailCommercialRetailCommercial
Quality classificationQuality classificationIFRS 9 PD rangeQuality classificationIFRS 9 PD rangeQuality classificationIFRS 9 PD rangeQuality classificationIFRS 9 PD range
RMS 1-6RMS 1-60.00-4.50%CMS 1-100.00-0.50%RMS 1-60.00-4.50%CMS 1-100.00-0.50%
RMS 7-9RMS 7-94.51-14.00%CMS 11-140.51-3.00%RMS 7-94.51-14.00%CMS 11-140.51-3.00%
RMS 10RMS 1014.01-20.00%CMS 15-183.01-20.00%RMS 1014.01-20.00%CMS 15-183.01-20.00%
RMS 11-13RMS 11-1320.01-99.99%CMS 1920.01-99.99%RMS 11-1320.01-99.99%CMS 1920.01-99.99%
RMS 14RMS 14100%CMS 20-23100%RMS 14100.00%CMS 20-23100.00%
Stage 3 assets of the Group include balances of £179£650 million (2019: £205(2020: £179 million) (with outstanding amounts due of £732£1,279 million (2019: £1,700(2020: £732 million)) which have been subject to a partial write-off and where the Group continues to enforce recovery action.
Stage 2 and Stage 3 assets of the Group with a carrying amount of £22,200£1,540 million (2019: £219(2020: £22,200 million) were modified during the year. NaNNo material gain or loss was recognised by the Group.
As at 31 December 2020 and 2019,2021 assets that had been previously modified whilstwhile classified as Stage 2 or Stage 3 and were classified as Stage 1 were not material.amounted to £6,657 million (not material at 31 December 2020).
F-107

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
CMS 1-107,472    7,472      
CMS 11-142    2      
CMS 15-18          
CMS 19          
CMS 20-23          
7,474    7,474      
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-6273,620 18,073   291,693 48 250   298 
RMS 7-99 2,258   2,267  64   64 
RMS 10 355   355  15   15 
RMS 11-13 1,112   1,112  65   65 
RMS 14  1,940 10,977 12,917   184 210 394 
273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 48 394 184 210 836 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-611,252 1,107   12,359 67 43   110 
RMS 7-9896 623   1,519 29 71   100 
RMS 10 112   112  22   22 
RMS 11-13 235   235  82   82 
RMS 14  292  292   128  128 
12,148 2,077 292  14,517 96 218 128  442 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-67,220 501   7,721 84 23   107 
RMS 7-9938 286   1,224 39 33   72 
RMS 1018 74   92 2 14   16 
RMS 11-135 244   249 1 83   84 
RMS 14  271  271   139  139 
8,181 1,105 271  9,557 126 153 139  418 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-611,662 1,309   12,971 101 25   126 
RMS 7-9583 298   881 5 15   20 
RMS 10 69   69  7   7 
RMS 11-132 152   154  27   27 
RMS 14  201  201   116  116 
12,247 1,828 201  14,276 106 74 116  296 
Retail - other
RMS 1-614,979 754   15,733 21 10   31 
RMS 7-91,258 593   1,851 5 27   32 
RMS 10 2   2      
RMS 11-13177 610   787  21   21 
RMS 14  778  778   55  55 
16,414 1,959 778  19,151 26 58 55  139 
Total Retail322,619 28,767 3,482 10,977 365,845 402 897 622 210 2,131 
F-108

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedDrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1028,600 186   28,786 18 1   19 
CMS 11-1429,950 3,315   33,265 75 75   150 
CMS 15-18766 2,327   3,093 9 119   128 
CMS 19 255   255  18   18 
CMS 20-23  2,862  2,862   942  942 
59,316 6,083 2,862  68,261 102 213 942  1,257 
Other1
RMS 1-6898 34   932 5 2   7 
RMS 7-9          
RMS 10          
RMS 11-13          
RMS 14  62  62   9  9 
898 34 62  994 5 2 9  16 
CMS 1-1046,243    46,243      
CMS 11-14          
CMS 15-18          
CMS 192    2      
CMS 20-23          
46,245    46,245      
Central adjustment     400    400 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 909 1,112 1,573 210 3,804 
In respect of:
Retail322,619 28,767 3,482 10,977 365,845 402 897 622 210 2,131 
Commercial Banking59,316 6,083 2,862  68,261 102 213 942  1,257 
Other1
47,143 34 62  47,239 405 2 9  416 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements429,078 34,884 6,406 10,977 481,345 909 1,112 1,573 210 3,804 
1Contains mainly reverse repurchase agreement balances and certain hedging adjustments.
F-109

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-616,971 92   17,063 1    1 
RMS 7-9 3   3      
RMS 10          
RMS 11-13          
RMS 14  13 72 85      
16,971 95 13 72 17,151 1    1 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-656,666 2,241   58,907 45 24   69 
RMS 7-9457 172   629 3 3   6 
RMS 10 31   31  1   1 
RMS 11-13 58   58  3   3 
RMS 14  55  55      
57,123 2,502 55  59,680 48 31   79 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-66,303 231   6,534 9 4   13 
RMS 7-997 48   145 1 5   6 
RMS 101 11   12  2   2 
RMS 11-13 29   29  6   6 
RMS 14  18  18      
6,401 319 18  6,738 10 17   27 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-61,457    1,457 2    2 
RMS 7-9527    527      
RMS 10          
RMS 11-131    1      
RMS 14          
1,985    1,985 2    2 
Retail - other
RMS 1-61,413 25   1,438 14    6 
RMS 7-950 27   77 5 5   10 
RMS 10          
RMS 11-13 6   6  2   2 
RMS 14  1  1      
1,463 58 1  1,522 19 7   26 
Total Retail83,943 2,974 87 72 87,076 80 55   135 
F-110

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1031,757 32   31,789 7    7 
CMS 11-146,225 1,203   7,428 14 18   32 
CMS 15-18188 320   508 1 12   13 
CMS 19 27   27  1   1 
CMS 20-23  66  66   5  5 
38,170 1,582 66  39,818 22 31 5  58 
Other
RMS 1-6289    289      
RMS 7-9          
RMS 10          
RMS 11-13          
RMS 14          
289    289      
CMS 1-10501    501 1    1 
CMS 11-14          
CMS 15-18          
CMS 19          
CMS 20-23          
501 

   501 1    1 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements122,903 4,556 153 72 127,684 103 86 5  194 
In respect of:
Retail83,943 2,974 87 72 87,076 80 55   135 
Commercial Banking38,170 1,582 66  39,818 22 31 5  58 
Other790    790 1    1 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements122,903 4,556 153 72 127,684 103 86 5  194 
F-111

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
CMS 1-105,951 — — — 5,951 — — — 
CMS 11-14— — — — — — — — 
CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 19— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23— — — — — — — — — — 
5,954 — — — 5,954 — — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-6251,372 21,010 — — 272,382 103 247 — — 350 
RMS 7-946 4,030 — — 4,076 66 — — 67 
RMS 10— 907 — — 907 — 25 — — 25 
RMS 11-13— 3,071 — — 3,071 — 130 — — 130 
RMS 14— — 1,859 12,511 14,370 — — 191 261 452 
251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 104 468 191 261 1,024 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-69,619 1,284 — — 10,903 75 57 — — 132 
RMS 7-91,603 1,137 — — 2,740 66 138 — — 204 
RMS 10274 343 — — 617 14 70 — — 84 
RMS 11-13— 509 — — 509 — 193 — — 193 
RMS 14— — 340 — 340 — — 153 — 153 
11,496 3,273 340 — 15,109 155 458 153 — 766 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-65,559 291 — — 5,850 80 15 — — 95 
RMS 7-91,990 580 — — 2,570 99 66 — — 165 
RMS 10116 181 — — 297 13 36 — — 49 
RMS 11-1345 467 — — 512 178 — — 187 
RMS 14— — 307 — 307 — — 147 — 147 
7,710 1,519 307 — 9,536 201 295 147 — 643 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-612,035 1,396 — — 13,431 187 46 — — 233 
RMS 7-9738 456 — — 1,194 33 — — 40 
RMS 10— 171 — — 171 — 30 — — 30 
RMS 11-1313 193 — — 206 — 62 — — 62 
RMS 14— — 199 — 199 — — 133 — 133 
12,786 2,216 199 — 15,201 194 171 133 — 498 
Retail - other
RMS 1-614,952 482 — — 15,434 19 19 — — 38 
RMS 7-92,418 334 — — 2,752 11 39 — — 50 
RMS 10— 21 — — 21 — — — 
RMS 11-13509 467 — — 976 — 40 — — 40 
RMS 14— — 184 — 184 — — 59 — 59 
17,879 1,304 184 — 19,367 30 99 59 — 188 
Total Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 684 1,491 683 261 3,119 
F-112

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedDrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1022,218 177 — — 22,395 23 — — 25 
CMS 11-1430,023 6,662 — — 36,685 135 106 — — 241 
CMS 15-184,656 6,430 — — 11,086 96 397 — — 493 
CMS 19— 669 — — 669 — 129 — — 129 
CMS 20-23— — 3,485 — 3,485 — — 1,273 — 1,273 
56,897 13,938 3,485 — 74,320 254 634 1,273 — 2,161 
Other1
RMS 1-6822 12 — — 834 — — — 
RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 14— — 59 — 59 — — 12 — 12 
822 12 59 — 893 — 12 — 21 
CMS 1-1056,362 — — — 56,362 — — — — — 
CMS 11-14236 — — — 236 — — — — — 
CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 19— — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23— — 10 — 10 — — — — — 
56,600 — 10 — 56,610 — — — — — 
Central adjustment— — — — — 400 — — — 400 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
In respect of:
Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 684 1,491 683 261 3,119 
Commercial Banking56,897 13,938 3,485 — 74,320 254 634 1,273 — 2,161 
Other1
57,422 12 69 — 57,503 409 — 12 — 421 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
1Contains mainly reverse repurchase agreement balances and certain hedging adjustments.

F-113

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-619,347 109 — — 19,456 — — — 
RMS 7-9— — — — — — — 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14— — 10 74 84 — — — — — 
19,348 118 10 74 19,550 — — — 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-654,694 3,044 — — 57,738 67 46 — — 113 
RMS 7-9772 463 — — 1,235 11 — — 19 
RMS 10602 282 — — 884 11 — — 18 
RMS 11-13— 85 — — 85 — — — 
RMS 14— — 56 — 56 — — — — — 
56,068 3,874 56 — 59,998 85 72 — — 157 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-66,070 315 — — 6,385 14 — — 21 
RMS 7-9269 139 — — 408 14 — — 22 
RMS 1013 35 — — 48 — — 
RMS 11-1369 — — 72 — 21 — — 21 
RMS 14— — 18 — 18 — — — — — 
6,355 558 18 — 6,931 23 49 — — 72 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-61,275 — — — 1,275 — — — 
RMS 7-9381 — — 384 — — — 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14— — — — — — — — — — 
1,657 — — 1,660 — — — 
Retail - other
RMS 1-61,672 23 — — 1,695 — — 12 
RMS 7-9140 36 — — 176 13 — — 22 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— 10 — — 10 — — — 
RMS 14— — — — — — — — 
1,812 69 — 1,882 16 25 — — 41 
Total Retail85,240 4,622 85 74 90,021 130 146 — — 276 
F-114

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1029,039 — — — 29,039 13 — — — 13 
CMS 11-149,612 1,614 — — 11,226 31 16 — — 47 
CMS 15-18934 1,291 — — 2,225 16 47 — — 63 
CMS 19— 92 — — 92 — 12 — — 12 
CMS 20-23— — 195 — 195 — — 14 — 14 
39,585 2,997 195 — 42,777 60 75 14 — 149 
Other
RMS 1-6299 — — — 299 — — — 
RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — — — 
RMS 14— — — — — — — — — — 
299 — — — 299 — — — 
CMS 1-10501 — — — 501 — — — — — 
CMS 11-14— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 19— — — — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23— — — — — — — — — — 
501 — — — 501 — — 

— — — 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements125,625 7,619 280 74 133,598 191 221 14 — 426 
In respect of:
Retail85,240 4,622 85 74 90,021 130 146 — — 276 
Commercial Banking39,585 2,997 195 — 42,777 60 75 14 — 149 
Other800 — — — 800 — — — 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements125,625 7,619 280 74 133,598 191 221 14 — 426 
F-115

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
CMS 1-107,285   7,285     
CMS 11-142   2     
CMS 15-18        
CMS 19        
CMS 20-23        
7,287   7,287     
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-640,415 3,747  44,162 3 27  30 
RMS 7-9 384  384  7  7 
RMS 10 65  65  1  1 
RMS 11-13 201  201  6  6 
RMS 14  486 486   26 26 
40,415 4,397 486 45,298 3 41 26 70 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-62,779 300  3,079 16 13  29 
RMS 7-9269 204  473 8 25  33 
RMS 10 33  33  7  7 
RMS 11-13 57  57  22  22 
RMS 14  72 72   32 32 
3,048 594 72 3,714 24 67 32 123 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-63,816 306  4,122 45 14  59 
RMS 7-9528 158  686 22 18  40 
RMS 1010 41  51 1 8  9 
RMS 11-132 132  134  46  46 
RMS 14  152 152   77 77 
4,356 637 152 5,145 68 86 77 231 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-6290 11  301 1   1 
RMS 7-92 4  6     
RMS 10 1  1     
RMS 11-13 4  4     
RMS 14  26 26   13 13 
292 20 26 338 1  13 14 
Retail - other
RMS 1-64,577 375  4,952 11 3  14 
RMS 7-91,141 463  1,604 4 22  26 
RMS 10        
RMS 11-1371 544  615  19  19 
RMS 14  674 674   38 38 
5,789 1,382 674 7,845 15 44 38 97 
Total Retail53,900 7,030 1,410 62,340 111 238 186 535 
F-116

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1024,880 184  25,064 16 1  17 
CMS 11-1422,861 2,893  25,754 63 67  130 
CMS 15-18578 1,792  2,370 7 85  92 
CMS 19 178  178  13  13 
CMS 20-23  1,279 1,279   225 225 
48,319 5,047 1,279 54,645 86 166 225 477 
Other
RMS 1-6246 7  253 1   1 
RMS 7-9        
RMS 10        
RMS 11-13        
RMS 14  9 9   3 3 
246 7 9 262 1  3 4 
CMS 1-1047,356   47,356     
CMS 11-141   1     
CMS 15-18        
CMS 19        
CMS 20-23        
47,357   47,357     
Central adjustment    160   160 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements149,822 12,084 2,698 164,604 358 404 414 1,176 
In respect of:
Retail53,900 7,030 1,410 62,340 111 238 186 535 
Commercial Banking48,319 5,047 1,279 54,645 86 166 225 477 
Other1
47,603 7 9 47,619 161  3 164 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements149,822 12,084 2,698 164,604 358 404 414 1,176 
1Contains mainly reverse repurchase agreement balances.
F-117

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowanceUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks:
CMS 1-105,951 0 0 0 5,951 4 0 0 0 4 
CMS 11-143 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 20-230 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceThe Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021At 31 December 2021
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgagesRetail - UK mortgages
5,954 0 0 0 5,954 4 0 0 0 4 
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-6RMS 1-6251,372 21,010 0 0 272,382 103 247 0 0 350 RMS 1-61,002   1,002     
RMS 7-9RMS 7-946 4,030 0 0 4,076 1 66 0 0 67 RMS 7-9        
RMS 10RMS 100 907 0 0 907 0 25 0 0 25 RMS 10        
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 3,071 0 0 3,071 0 130 0 0 130 RMS 11-13        
RMS 14RMS 140 0 1,859 12,511 14,370 0 0 191 261 452 RMS 14        
251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 104 468 191 261 1,024 1,002   1,002     
Retail - credit cardsRetail - credit cardsRetail - credit cards
RMS 1-6RMS 1-69,619 1,284 0 0 10,903 75 57 0 0 132 RMS 1-615,280 596  15,876 15 11  26 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-91,603 1,137 0 0 2,740 66 138 0 0 204 RMS 7-9286 61  347 1 1  2 
RMS 10RMS 10274 343 0 0 617 14 70 0 0 84 RMS 10 9  9     
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 509 0 0 509 0 193 0 0 193 RMS 11-13 12  12     
RMS 14RMS 140 0 340 0 340 0 0 153 0 153 RMS 14  15 15     
11,496 3,273 340 0 15,109 155 458 153 0 766 15,566 678 15 16,259 16 12  28 
Retail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-6RMS 1-65,559 291 0 0 5,850 80 15 0 0 95 RMS 1-63,556 59  3,615 5 3  8 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-91,990 580 0 0 2,570 99 66 0 0 165 RMS 7-956 23  79 1 2  3 
RMS 10RMS 10116 181 0 0 297 13 36 0 0 49 RMS 101 6  7  1  1 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-1345 467 0 0 512 9 178 0 0 187 RMS 11-13 15  15  3  3 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 307 0 307 0 0 147 0 147 RMS 14  10 10     
7,710 1,519 307 0 9,536 201 295 147 0 643 3,613 103 10 3,726 6 9  15 
Retail - UK Motor FinanceRetail - UK Motor FinanceRetail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-6RMS 1-612,035 1,396 0 0 13,431 187 46 0 0 233 RMS 1-62   2     
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9738 456 0 0 1,194 7 33 0 0 40 RMS 7-9        
RMS 10RMS 100 171 0 0 171 0 30 0 0 30 RMS 10        
RMS 11-13RMS 11-1313 193 0 0 206 0 62 0 0 62 RMS 11-13        
RMS 14RMS 140 0 199 0 199 0 0 133 0 133 RMS 14        
12,786 2,216 199 0 15,201 194 171 133 0 498 2   2     
Retail - otherRetail - otherRetail - other
RMS 1-6RMS 1-614,952 482 0 0 15,434 19 19 0 0 38 RMS 1-6666 23  689 13   13 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-92,418 334 0 0 2,752 11 39 0 0 50 RMS 7-944 26  70 4 4  8 
RMS 10RMS 100 21 0 0 21 0 1 0 0 1 RMS 10        
RMS 11-13RMS 11-13509 467 0 0 976 0 40 0 0 40 RMS 11-13 6  6  2  2 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 184 0 184 0 0 59 0 59 RMS 14  1 1     
17,879 1,304 184 0 19,367 30 99 59 0 188 710 55 1 766 17 6  23 
Total RetailTotal Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 684 1,491 683 261 3,119 Total Retail20,893 836 26 21,755 39 27  66 
F-118

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedDrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial
CMS 1-1022,218 177 0 0 22,395 23 2 0 0 25 
CMS 11-1430,023 6,662 0 0 36,685 135 106 0 0 241 
CMS 15-184,656 6,430 0 0 11,086 96 397 0 0 493 
CMS 190 669 0 0 669 0 129 0 0 129 
CMS 20-230 0 3,485 0 3,485 0 0 1,273 0 1,273 
56,897 13,938 3,485 0 74,320 254 634 1,273 0 2,161 
Other
RMS 1-6822 12 0 0 834 9 0 0 0 9 
RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 140 0 59 0 59 0 0 12 0 12 
822 12 59 0 893 9 0 12 0 21 
CMS 1-1056,362 0 0 0 56,362 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 11-14236 0 0 0 236 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 192 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 20-230 0 10 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 
56,600 0 10 0 56,610 0 0 0 0 0 
Central overlay0 0 0 0 0 400 0 0 0 400 
Total loans and advances to customers415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
In respect of:
Retail301,289 37,330 2,889 12,511 354,019 684 1,491 683 261 3,119 
Commercial56,897 13,938 3,485 0 74,320 254 634 1,273 0 2,161 
Other1
57,422 12 69 0 57,503 409 0 12 0 421 
Total loans and advances to customers415,608 51,280 6,443 12,511 485,842 1,347 2,125 1,968 261 5,701 
1Principally comprises reverse repurchase agreement balances.
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1029,012 31  29,043 6   6 
CMS 11-145,014 1,050  6,064 12 15  27 
CMS 15-1862 250  312  10  10 
CMS 19 23  23  1  1 
CMS 20-23  65 65   4 4 
34,088 1,354 65 35,507 18 26 4 48 
Other
RMS 1-6227   227     
RMS 7-9        
RMS 10        
RMS 11-13        
RMS 14        
227   227     
CMS 1-10501   501     
CMS 11-14        
CMS 15-18        
CMS 19        
CMS 20-23        
501   501     
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements55,709 2,190 91 57,990 57 53 4 114 
In respect of:
Retail20,893 836 26 21,755 39 27  66 
Commercial Banking34,088 1,354 65 35,507 18 26 4 48 
Other728   728     
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements55,709 2,190 91 57,990 57 53 4 114 
F-119

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceThe Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers:
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements
CMS 1-10CMS 1-105,660 — — 5,660 — — 
CMS 11-14CMS 11-14— — — — — — — — 
CMS 15-18CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — 
CMS 19CMS 19— — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23CMS 20-23— — — — — — — — 
5,660 — — 5,660 — — 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgagesRetail - UK mortgagesRetail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-6RMS 1-619,347 109 0 0 19,456 3 0 0 0 3 RMS 1-641,423 4,152 — 45,575 24 — 32 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-91 6 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 7-91,442 — 1,444 — 11 — 11 
RMS 10RMS 100 2 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 10— 137 — 137 — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 11-13— 946 — 946 — 18 — 18 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 10 74 84 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — 568 568 — — 32 32 
19,348 118 10 74 19,550 3 0 0 0 3 41,425 6,677 568 48,670 56 32 96 
Retail - credit cardsRetail - credit cardsRetail - credit cards
RMS 1-6RMS 1-654,694 3,044 0 0 57,738 67 46 0 0 113 RMS 1-62,248 363 — 2,611 18 17 — 35 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9772 463 0 0 1,235 11 8 0 0 19 RMS 7-9290 342 — 632 14 45 — 59 
RMS 10RMS 10602 282 0 0 884 7 11 0 0 18 RMS 1094 — 96 — 22 — 22 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 85 0 0 85 0 7 0 0 7 RMS 11-13— 134 — 134 — 57 — 57 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 56 0 56 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — 88 88 — — 40 40 
56,068 3,874 56 0 59,998 85 72 0 0 157 2,540 933 88 3,561 32 141 40 213 
Retail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-6RMS 1-66,070 315 0 0 6,385 14 7 0 0 21 RMS 1-62,930 162 — 3,092 44 — 52 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9269 139 0 0 408 8 14 0 0 22 RMS 7-91,109 265 — 1,374 56 30 — 86 
RMS 10RMS 1013 35 0 0 48 1 7 0 0 8 RMS 1064 102 — 166 21 — 28 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-133 69  0 72 0 21 0 0 21 RMS 11-1322 266 — 288 102 — 106 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 18 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — 173 173 — — 84 84 
6,355 558 18 0 6,931 23 49 0 0 72 4,125 795 173 5,093 111 161 84 356 
Retail - UK Motor FinanceRetail - UK Motor FinanceRetail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-6RMS 1-61,275 0 0 0 1,275 2 0 0 0 2 RMS 1-6382 40 — 422 — 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9381 3 0 0 384 1 0 0 0 1 RMS 7-918 — 24 — — 
RMS 10RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 10— — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-131 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 11-13— 13 — 13 — — 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — 44 44 — — 26 26 
1,657 3 0 0 1,660 3 0 0 0 3 388 80 44 512 10 26 43 
Retail - otherRetail - otherRetail - other
RMS 1-6RMS 1-61,672 23 0 0 1,695 7 5 0 0 12 RMS 1-65,173 188 — 5,361 11 — 20 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9140 36 0 0 176 9 13 0 0 22 RMS 7-92,186 214 — 2,400 10 32 — 42 
RMS 10RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 10 0 0 10 0 7 0 0 7 RMS 11-13345 395 — 740 — 35 — 35 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — 123 123 — — 37 37 
1,812 69 1 0 1,882 16 25 0 0 41 7,704 797 123 8,624 19 78 37 134 
Total RetailTotal Retail85,240 4,622 85 74 90,021 130 146 0 0 276 Total Retail56,182 9,282 996 66,460 177 446 219 842 
F-120

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedThe Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Commercial
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking
CMS 1-10CMS 1-1029,039 0 0 0 29,039 13 0 0 0 13 CMS 1-1017,907 175 — 18,082 20 — — 20 
CMS 11-14CMS 11-149,612 1,614 0 0 11,226 31 16 0 0 47 CMS 11-1422,449 5,928 — 28,377 114 94 — 208 
CMS 15-18CMS 15-18934 1,291 0 0 2,225 16 47 0 0 63 CMS 15-183,722 5,548 — 9,270 76 332 — 408 
CMS 19CMS 190 92 0 0 92 0 12 0 0 12 CMS 19— 549 — 549 — 101 — 101 
CMS 20-23CMS 20-230 0 195 0 195 0 0 14 0 14 CMS 20-23— — 1,865 1,865 — — 496 496 
39,585 2,997 195 0 42,777 60 75 14 0 149 44,078 12,200 1,865 58,143 210 527 496 1,233 
OtherOtherOther
RMS 1-6RMS 1-6299 0 0 0 299 1 0 0 0 1 RMS 1-6230 12 — 242 — 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — 
RMS 10RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14RMS 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RMS 14— — — — 
230 12 248 
299 0 0 0 299 1 0 0 0 1 
CMS 1-10CMS 1-10501 0 0 0 501 0 0 0 0 0 CMS 1-1055,595 — — 55,595 — — — — 
CMS 11-14CMS 11-140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMS 11-14104 — — 104 — — — — 
CMS 15-18CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — 
CMS 19CMS 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMS 19— — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23CMS 20-230 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CMS 20-23— — — — — — — — 
501 

0 0 0 501 0 0 0 0 0 55,699 — — 55,699 — — — — 
Total loans and advances to customers125,625 7,619 280 74 133,598 191 221 14 0 426 
Central adjustmentCentral adjustment— — — — 200 — — 200 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsTotal loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
In respect of:In respect of:In respect of:
RetailRetail85,240 4,622 85 74 90,021 130 146 0 0 276 Retail56,182 9,282 996 66,460 177 446 219 842 
Commercial39,585 2,997 195 0 42,777 60 75 14 0 149 
Other800 0 0 0 800 1 0 0 0 1 
Total loans and advances to customers125,625 7,619 280 74 133,598 191 221 14 0 426 
Commercial BankingCommercial Banking44,078 12,200 1,865 58,143 210 527 496 1,233 
Other1
Other1
55,929 12 55,947 202 206 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsTotal loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
1Contains mainly reverse repurchase agreement balances.
F-121

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowanceUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Loans and advances to banks:
CMS 1-104,852 4,852 
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceThe Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowanceStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreementsLoans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements
Retail - UK mortgagesRetail - UK mortgages
4,852 4,852 
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-6RMS 1-6257,028 13,494 270,522 23 183 206 RMS 1-61,720 — — 1,720 — — — — 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-915 2,052 2,067 39 39 RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — 
RMS 10RMS 10414 414 13 13 RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-13975 975 46 46 RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14RMS 141,506 13,714 15,220 122 142 264 RMS 14— — — — — — — — 
257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 23 281 122 142 568 1,720 — — 1,720 — — — — 
Retail - credit cardsRetail - credit cards


Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-6RMS 1-614,744 729 15,473 103 25 128 RMS 1-614,814 1,081 — 15,895 17 19 — 36 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-91,355 556 1,911 49 54 103 RMS 7-9154 154 — 308 — 
RMS 10RMS 1032 105 137 19 22 RMS 1021 — 24 — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-13291 292 91 91 RMS 11-13— 24 — 24 — — 
RMS 14RMS 14385 385 125 125 RMS 14— — 13 13 — — — — 
16,132 1,681 385 18,198 155 189 125 469 14,971 1,280 13 16,264 20 26 — 46 
Retail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdraftsRetail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-6RMS 1-67,406 368 7,774 84 17 101 RMS 1-63,414 99 — 3,513 — 12 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-91,321 363 1,684 55 38 93 RMS 7-9160 74 — 234 — 12 
RMS 10RMS 1044 85 129 15 19 RMS 1022 — 30 — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-1317 315 332 102 105 RMS 11-1342 — 44 — 12 — 12 
RMS 14RMS 14293 293 108 108 RMS 14— — 10 10 — — — — 
8,788 1,131 293 10,212 146 172 108 426 3,584 237 10 3,831 13 28 — 41 
Retail - UK Motor FinanceRetail - UK Motor Finance


Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-6RMS 1-613,568 1,297 14,865 203 30 233 RMS 1-624 — — 24 — — — — 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9314 368 682 10 15 25 RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — 
RMS 10RMS 1099 99 10 10 RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-13178 180 32 33 RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14RMS 14150 150 84 84 RMS 14— — — — — — — — 
13,884 1,942 150 15,976 214 87 84 385 24 — — 24 — — — — 
Retail - otherRetail - other


Retail - other
RMS 1-6RMS 1-69,762 395 10,157 25 10 35 RMS 1-6923 18 — 941 — 
RMS 7-9RMS 7-9420 428 26 26 RMS 7-9131 31 — 162 12 — 20 
RMS 10RMS 10RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13RMS 11-13134 23 157 RMS 11-13— 10 — 10 — — 
RMS 14RMS 14150 150 51 51 RMS 14— — — — — — 
9,904 845 150 10,899 25 37 51 113 1,054 59 1,114 14 20 — 34 
Total RetailTotal Retail305,751 22,534 2,484 13,714 344,483 563 766 490 142 1,961 Total Retail21,353 1,576 24 22,953 47 74 — 121 
F-122

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedDrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Commercial
CMS 1-1043,104 356 43,460 27 29 
CMS 11-1425,341 2,312 27,653 50 37 87 
CMS 15-181,793 3,089 4,882 13 171 184 
CMS 19168 168 16 16 
CMS 20-233,135 3,135 859 859 
70,238 5,925 3,135 79,298 90 226 859 1,175 
Other
RMS 1-6768 46 814 16 17 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 1428 28 10 10 
768 46 28 842 16 10 27 
CMS 1-1053,010 53,010 
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18— 
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
53,010 53,010 
Total loans and advances to customers429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
In respect of:
Retail305,751 22,534 2,484 13,714 344,483 563 766 490 142 1,961 
Commercial70,238 5,925 3,135 79,298 90 226 859 1,175 
Other1
53,778 46 28 53,852 16 10 27 
Total loans and advances to customers429,767 28,505 5,647 13,714 477,633 669 993 1,359 142 3,163 
1Principally comprises reverse repurchase agreement balances.
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowance continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial Banking
CMS 1-1027,598 — — 27,598 14 — — 14 
CMS 11-148,105 1,239 — 9,344 26 13 — 39 
CMS 15-18829 1,057 — 1,886 13 41 — 54 
CMS 19— 54 — 54 — — 
CMS 20-23— — 189 189 — — 
36,532 2,350 189 39,071 53 61 122 
Other
RMS 1-6242 — — 242 — — 
RMS 7-9— — — — — — — — 
RMS 10— — — — — — — — 
RMS 11-13— — — — — — — — 
RMS 14— — — — — — — — 
242 — — 242 — — 
CMS 1-10500 — — 500 — — — — 
CMS 11-14— — — — — — — — 
CMS 15-18— — — — — — — — 
CMS 19— — — — — — — — 
CMS 20-23— — — — — — — — 
500 — — 500 — — — — 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements58,627 3,926 213 62,766 102 135 245 
In respect of:
Retail21,353 1,576 24 22,953 47 74 — 121 
Commercial Banking36,532 2,350 189 39,071 53 61 122 
Other742 — — 742 — — 
Total loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements58,627 3,926 213 62,766 102 135 245 
F-123

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-612,242 62 12,304 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 1479 87 
12,243 63 79 12,393 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-654,216 1,762 55,978 44 21 65 
RMS 7-9293 162 455 
RMS 1028 31 
RMS 11-1344 45 
RMS 1475 75 
54,513 1,996 75 56,584 48 29 77 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-66,437 224 6,661 12 15 
RMS 7-996 56 152 
RMS 1011 13 
RMS 11-1329 29 11 11 
RMS 14
6,535 320 6,863 14 21 35 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-61,181 1,181 
RMS 7-9193 197 
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
1,374 1,378 
Retail - other
RMS 1-61,240 1,240 11 11 
RMS 7-962 62 
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
1,240 62 1,304 11 14 
Total Retail75,905 2,445 93 79 78,522 76 53 129 
Cash and balances at central banks
F-124

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
forSignificantly all of the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The Group - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedUndrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
Stage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Commercial
CMS 1-1031,014 76 31,090 
CMS 11-145,105 850 5,955 16 
CMS 15-18258 326 584 13 14 
CMS 1943 43 
CMS 20-23
36,377 1,295 37,677 15 24 44 
Other
RMS 1-6235 235 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
235 235 
CMS 1-10
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23

Total loans and advances to customers112,517 3,740 98 79 116,434 91 77 173 
In respect of:
Retail75,905 2,445 93 79 78,522 76 53 129 
Commercial36,377 1,295 37,677 15 24 44 
Other235 235 
Total loans and advances to customers112,517 3,740 98 79 116,434 91 77 173 
F-125

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
forGroup’s cash and balances at central banks of £54,279 million (2020: £49,888 million) are due from the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to banks:
CMS 1-105,660 0 0 5,660 4 0 0 4 
CMS 11-140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 20-230 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
5,660 0 0 5,660 4 0 0 4 
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-641,423 4,152 0 45,575 8 24 0 32 
RMS 7-92 1,442 0 1,444 0 11 0 11 
RMS 100 137 0 137 0 3 0 3 
RMS 11-130 946 0 946 0 18 0 18 
RMS 140 0 568 568 0 0 32 32 
41,425 6,677 568 48,670 8 56 32 96 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-62,248 363 0 2,611 18 17 0 35 
RMS 7-9290 342 0 632 14 45 0 59 
RMS 102 94 0 96 0 22 0 22 
RMS 11-130 134 0 134 0 57 0 57 
RMS 140 0 88 88 0 0 40 40 
2,540 933 88 3,561 32 141 40 213 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-62,930 162 0 3,092 44 8 0 52 
RMS 7-91,109 265 0 1,374 56 30 0 86 
RMS 1064 102 0 166 7 21 0 28 
RMS 11-1322 266 0 288 4 102 0 106 
RMS 140 0 173 173 0 0 84 84 
4,125 795 173 5,093 111 161 84 356 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-6382 40 0 422 7 2 0 9 
RMS 7-96 18 0 24 0 1 0 1 
RMS 100 9 0 9 0 2 0 2 
RMS 11-130 13 0 13 0 5 0 5 
RMS 140 0 44 44 0 0 26 26 
388 80 44 512 7 10 26 43 
Retail - other
RMS 1-65,173 188 0 5,361 9 11 0 20 
RMS 7-92,186 214 0 2,400 10 32 0 42 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-13345 395 0 740 0 35 0 35 
RMS 140 0 123 123 0 0 37 37 
7,704 797 123 8,624 19 78 37 134 
Total Retail56,182 9,282 996 66,460 177 446 219 842 
F-126

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
forBank of England or the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial
CMS 1-1017,907 175 0 18,082 20 0 0 20 
CMS 11-1422,449 5,928 0 28,377 114 94 0 208 
CMS 15-183,722 5,548 0 9,270 76 332 0 408 
CMS 190 549 0 549 0 101 0 101 
CMS 20-230 0 1,865 1,865 0 0 496 496 
44,078 12,200 1,865 58,143 210 527 496 1,233 
Other
RMS 1-6230 12 0 242 2 1 0 3 
RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 140 0 6 6 0 0 3 3 
230 12 6 248 2 1 3 6 
CMS 1-1055,595 0 0 55,595 0 0 0 0 
CMS 11-14104 0 0 104 0 0 0 0 
CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 20-230 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
55,699 0 0 55,699 0 0 0 0 
Central overlay0 0 0 0 200 0 0 200 
Total loans and advances to customers156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
In respect of:
Retail56,182 9,282 996 66,460 177 446 219 842 
Commercial44,078 12,200 1,865 58,143 210 527 496 1,233 
Other1
55,929 12 6 55,947 202 1 3 206 
Total loans and advances to customers156,189 21,494 2,867 180,550 589 974 718 2,281 
1Principally comprises reverse repurchase agreement balances.
F-127

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-61,720 0 0 1,720 0 0 0 0 
RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
1,720 0 0 1,720 0 0 0 0 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-614,814 1,081 0 15,895 17 19 0 36 
RMS 7-9154 154 0 308 3 4 0 7 
RMS 103 21 0 24 0 1 0 1 
RMS 11-130 24 0 24 0 2 0 2 
RMS 140 0 13 13 0 0 0 0 
14,971 1,280 13 16,264 20 26 0 46 
Retail - loan and overdrafts
RMS 1-63,414 99 0 3,513 8 4 0 12 
RMS 7-9160 74 0 234 4 8 0 12 
RMS 108 22 0 30 1 4 0 5 
RMS 11-132 42 0 44 0 12 0 12 
RMS 140 0 10 10 0 0 0 0 
3,584 237 10 3,831 13 28 0 41 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-624 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 
RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
24 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 
Retail - other
RMS 1-6923 18 0 941 6 2 0 8 
RMS 7-9131 31 0 162 8 12 0 20 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 10 0 10  6 0 6 
RMS 140 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 
1,054 59 1 1,114 14 20 0 34 
Total Retail21,353 1,576 24 22,953 47 74 0 121 
F-128

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Commercial
CMS 1-1027,598 0 0 27,598 14 0 0 14 
CMS 11-148,105 1,239 0 9,344 26 13 0 39 
CMS 15-18829 1,057 0 1,886 13 41 0 54 
CMS 190 54 0 54 0 7 0 7 
CMS 20-230 0 189 189 0 0 8 8 
36,532 2,350 189 39,071 53 61 8 122 
Other
RMS 1-6242 0 0 242 2 0 0 2 
RMS 7-90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 11-130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
RMS 140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
242 0 0 242 2 0 0 2 
CMS 1-10500 0 0 500 0 0 0 0 
CMS 11-140 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 15-180 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 190 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
CMS 20-230 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
500 0 0 500 0 0 0 0 
Total loans and advances to customers58,627 3,926 213 62,766 102 135 8 245 
In respect of:
Retail21,353 1,576 24 22,953 47 74 0 121 
Commercial36,532 2,350 189 39,071 53 61 8 122 
Other742 0 0 742 2 0 0 2 
Total loans and advances to customers58,627 3,926 213 62,766 102 135 8 245 
F-129

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Loans and advances to banks:
CMS 1-104,453 4,453 
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
4,453 4,453 
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-646,904 2,972 49,876 28 30 
RMS 7-9510 510 
RMS 10116 116 
RMS 11-13291 291 0
RMS 14558 558 30 30 
46,904 3,889 558 51,351 47 30 79 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-63,568 146 3,714 22 28 
RMS 7-9363 183 546 14 20 34 
RMS 1012 38 50 
RMS 11-1390 90 30 30 
RMS 1492 92 31 31 
3,943 457 92 4,492 37 63 31 131 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-64,018 152 4,170 47 54 
RMS 7-9774 199 973 32 21 53 
RMS 1026 51 77 12 
RMS 11-13184 192 59 61 
RMS 14168 168 62 62 
4,826 586 168 5,580 84 96 62 242 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-61,076 135 1,211 21 25 
RMS 7-922 54 76 
RMS 1017 17 
RMS 11-1334 34 
RMS 1460 60 32 32 
1,098 240 60 1,398 22 16 32 70 
Retail - other
RMS 1-61,958 156 2,114 18 22 
RMS 7-9281 288 20 20 
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14105 105 35 35 
1,965 437 105 2,507 18 24 35 77 
Total Retail58,736 5,609 983 65,328 163 246 190 599 
F-130

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Drawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross drawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Commercial
CMS 1-1032,465 380 32,845 25 26 
CMS 11-1420,141 2,030 22,171 40 33 73 
CMS 15-181,462 2,519 3,981 10 145 155 
CMS 19111 111 10 10 
CMS 20-231,400 1,400 309 309 
54,068 5,040 1,400 60,508 75 189 309 573 
Other
RMS 1-6267 32 299 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
267 32 301 
CMS 1-1052,605 52,605 
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
52,605 52,605 
Total loans and advances to customers165,676 10,681 2,385 178,742 238 435 500 1,173 
In respect of:
Retail58,736 5,609 983 65,328 163 246 190 599 
Commercial54,068 5,040 1,400 60,508 75 189 309 573 
Other1
52,872 32 52,906 
Total loans and advances to customers165,676 10,681 2,385 178,742 238 435 500 1,173 
1Principally comprises reverse repurchase agreement balances.
F-131

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowancesStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Loans and advances to customers:
Retail - UK mortgages
RMS 1-61,120 1,120 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
1,120 1,120 
Retail - credit cards
RMS 1-615,052 369 15,421 12 19 
RMS 7-996 60 156 
RMS 10
RMS 11-1311 11 
RMS 1413 13 
15,149 448 13 15,610 13 22 
Retail - loans and overdrafts
RMS 1-63,619 68 3,687 
RMS 7-959 31 90 
RMS 10
RMS 11-1317 17 
RMS 14
3,679 123 3,807 14 22 
Retail - UK Motor Finance
RMS 1-684 84 
RMS 7-913 17 
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
97 101 
Retail - other
RMS 1-6839 839 10 10 
RMS 7-954 54 
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14— 
839 54 895 10 13 
Total Retail20,884 629 20 21,533 31 26 57 
F-132

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Undrawn exposuresExpected credit loss allowance
The Bank - Gross undrawn exposures and expected credit loss allowances continuedStage 1Stage 2Stage 3TotalStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Commercial
CMS 1-1025,847 44 25,891 
CMS 11-143,771 718 4,489 12 
CMS 15-18197 206 403 10 
CMS 1938 38 
CMS 20-23
29,815 1,006 30,825 13 16 33 
Other
RMS 1-6191 191 
RMS 7-9
RMS 10
RMS 11-13
RMS 14
191 191 
CMS 1-10
CMS 11-14
CMS 15-18
CMS 19
CMS 20-23
Total loans and advances to customers50,890 1,635 24 52,549 44 42 90 
In respect of:
Retail20,884 629 20 21,533 31 26 57 
Commercial29,815 1,006 30,825 13 16 33 
Other191 191 
Total loans and advances to customers50,890 1,635 24 52,549 44 42 90 
F-133

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Deutsche Bundesbank.
Debt securities held at amortised cost
An analysis by credit rating of debt securities held at amortised cost is provided below:
2020201920212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The GroupThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m
Asset-backed securities:Asset-backed securities:Asset-backed securities:
Mortgage-backed securitiesMortgage-backed securities2,046 0 2,046 2,934 2,934 Mortgage-backed securities1,457  1,457 2,046 — 2,046 
Other asset-backed securitiesOther asset-backed securities1,593 20 1,613 874 874 Other asset-backed securities1,590 18 1,608 1,593 20 1,613 
3,639 20 3,659 3,808 3,808 3,047 18 3,065 3,639 20 3,659 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities1,463 16 1,479 1,517 1,518 Corporate and other debt securities1,498 1 1,499 1,463 16 1,479 
Gross exposureGross exposure5,102 36 5,138 5,325 5,326 Gross exposure4,545 19 4,564 5,102 36 5,138 
Allowance for impairment lossesAllowance for impairment losses(1)(1)Allowance for impairment losses(2)(1)
Total debt securities held at amortised costTotal debt securities held at amortised cost5,137 5,325 Total debt securities held at amortised cost4,562 5,137 
The Bank
Asset-backed securities:
Mortgage-backed securities1,741 0 1,741 2,926 2,926 
Other asset-backed securities1,103 0 1,103 798 798 
2,844 0 2,844 3,724 3,724 
Corporate and other debt securities1,457 15 1,472 1,517 1,517 
Gross exposure4,301 15 4,316 5,241 5,241 
Allowance for impairment losses(1)
Total debt securities held at amortised cost4,315 5,241 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020:(2021: £18 million; 2020: £8 million for the Group and £NaN for the Bank; 2019: £NaN for the Group and £NaN for the Bank) and not rated (2020:(2021: £1 million; 2020: £28 million for the Groupmillion).
20212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Asset-backed securities:
Mortgage-backed securities1,151  1,151 1,741 — 1,741 
Other asset-backed securities1,115  1,115 1,103 — 1,103 
2,266  2,266 2,844 — 2,844 
Corporate and other debt securities1,490  1,490 1,457 15 1,472 
Gross exposure3,756  3,756 4,301 15 4,316 
Allowance for impairment losses (1)
Total debt securities held at amortised cost3,756 4,315 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2021: £nil; 2020: £nil) and not rated (2021: £nil; 2020: £15 million for the Bank; 2019: £1 million for the Group and £NaN for the Bank)million).
F-134F-124

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (excluding equity shares)
An analysis of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income is included in note 18.17. The credit quality of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income is set out below:
2020201920212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The GroupThe Group£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m
Debt securities
Debt securities:Debt securities:
Government securitiesGovernment securities14,267 0 14,267 13,082 13,082 Government securities14,599  14,599 14,267 — 14,267 
Asset-backed securitiesAsset-backed securities0 65 65 60 60 Asset-backed securities 55 55 — 65 65 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities12,786 142 12,928 11,036 11,036 Corporate and other debt securities13,087 44 13,131 12,786 142 12,928 
Total debt securities27,053 207 27,260 24,118 60 24,178 
27,686 99 27,785 27,053 207 27,260 
Treasury and other billsTreasury and other bills0 0 0 439 439 Treasury and other bills   — — — 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeTotal financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,053 207 27,260 24,557 60 24,617 Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income27,686 99 27,785 27,053 207 27,260 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020:(2021: £55 million; 2020: £65 million; 2019: £60 million) and not rated (2020:(2021: £44 million; 2020: £142 million; 2019: £NaN)million).
2020201920212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The BankThe Bank£m£mThe Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Debt securities
Debt securities:Debt securities:
Government securitiesGovernment securities14,114 0 14,114 12,938 12,938 Government securities14,445  14,445 14,114 — 14,114 
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities10,444 89 10,533 8,783 8,783 Corporate and other debt securities11,084  11,084 10,444 89 10,533 
Total debt securities24,558 89 24,647 21,721 21,721 
25,529  25,529 24,558 89 24,647 
Treasury and other billsTreasury and other bills0 0 0 439 439 Treasury and other bills   — — — 
24,558 89 24,647 22,160 22,160 25,529  25,529 24,558 89 24,647 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings:Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings:Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings:
Corporate and other debt securitiesCorporate and other debt securities0 Corporate and other debt securities — 
Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeTotal financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income24,647 22,160 Total financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income25,529 24,647 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020: £NaN; 2019: £NaN)(2021: £nil; 2020: £nil) and not rated (2020:(2021: £nil; 2020: £89 million; 2019: £NaN)million).
F-135F-125

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Debt securities, treasury and other bills held at fair value through profit or loss
An analysis of financial assets at fair value through profit or loss is included in note 14. Substantially all of the loans and advances to customers and banks recognised at fair value through profit or loss have a good quality rating. The credit quality of the Group’s debt securities, treasury and other bills held at fair value through profit or loss is set out below.
20202019
The Group
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading assets
Government securities0 0 0 290 290 
Total held as trading assets0 0 0 290 290 
Other assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss
Corporate and other debt securities0 0 0 47 47 
Total other assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss0 0 0 47 47 
0 0 0 337 337 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings:
Corporate and other debt securities0 
Total held at fair value through profit or loss0 337 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020: £NaN; 2019: £NaN) and not rated (2020: £NaN; 2019: £NaN).
20202019
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading assets
Government securities0 0 0 290 290 
Total held as trading assets0 0 0 290 290 
Other assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss
Corporate and other debt securities0 0 0 47 47 
Total other assets mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss0 0 0 47 47 
0 0 0 337 337 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings:
Corporate and other debt securities1,203 
Total held at fair value through profit or loss1,203 337 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020: £NaN; 2019: £NaN) and not rated (2020: £NaN; 2019: £NaN).
F-136

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Derivative assets
An analysis of derivative assets is given in note 15.14. The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid securities. In respect of the net credit risk relating to derivative assets of £3,142 million for the Group and £4,879 million for the Bank (2020: £4,968 million for the Group and £9,843 million for the Bank (2019: £4,317Bank), cash collateral of £1,642 million for the Group and £10,326£930 million for the Bank), cash collateral ofBank (2020: £2,702 million for the Group and £1,308 million for the Bank (2019: £2,186Bank) was held and a further £67 million for the Group and £786£37 million for the Bank) was held and a furtherBank (2020: £151 million for the Group and £116 million for the Bank (2019: £120 million for the Group and £66 million for the Bank) was due from OECD banks.
2020201920212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The GroupThe Group£m£mThe Group£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading and otherTrading and other5,942 1,037 6,979 5,531 1,267 6,798 Trading and other3,991 834 4,825 5,942 1,037 6,979 
HedgingHedging667 5 672 1,047 58 1,105 Hedging52  52 667 672 
6,609 1,042 7,651 6,578 1,325 7,903 4,043 834 4,877 6,609 1,042 7,651 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakingsDue from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings690 591 Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings634 690 
Total derivative financial instrumentsTotal derivative financial instruments8,341 8,494 Total derivative financial instruments5,511 8,341 
The Bank
Trading and other4,442 146 4,588 4,113 209 4,322 
Hedging237 3 240 178 179 
4,679 149 4,828 4,291 210 4,501 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings7,767 9,137 
Total derivative financial instruments12,595 13,638 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2020:(2021: £622 million; 2020: £969 million for the Group and £135 million for the Bank; 2019: £953 million for the Group and £135 million for the Bank)million) and not rated (2020:(2021: £212 million; 2020: £73 million for the Groupmillion).
20212020
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
Investment
grade1
Other2
Total
The Bank£m£m£m£m£m£m
Trading and other2,847 86 2,933 4,442 146 4,588 
Hedging32  32 237 240 
2,879 86 2,965 4,679 149 4,828 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings3,933 7,767 
Total derivative financial instruments6,898 12,595 
1Credit ratings equal to or better than ‘BBB’.
2Other comprises sub-investment grade (2021: £42 million; 2020: £135 million) and not rated (2021: £44 million; 2020: £14 million for the Bank; 2019: £372 million for the Group and £75 million for the Bank)million).
Financial guarantees and irrevocable loan commitments
Financial guarantees represent undertakings that the Group will meet a customer’s obligation to third parties if the customer fails to do so. Commitments to extend credit represent unused portions of authorisations to extend credit in the form of loans, guarantees or letters of credit. The Group is theoretically exposed to loss in an amount equal to the total guarantees or unused commitments, however, the likely amount of loss is expected to be significantly less; mostless. Most commitments to extend credit are contingent upon customers maintaining specific credit standards.
F-137

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
D.(D)Collateral held as security for financial assets
The principal types of collateral accepted by the Group include: residential and commercial properties; charges over business assets such as premises, inventory and accounts receivable; financial instruments, cash and guarantees from third-parties. The terms and conditions associated with the use of the collateral are varied and are dependent on the type of agreement and the counterparty. The Group holds collateral against loans and advances and irrevocable loan commitments; qualitative and, where appropriate, quantitative information is provided in respect of this collateral below. Collateral held as security for financial assets at fair value through profit or loss and for derivative assets is also shown below.
The Group holds collateral in respect of loans and advances to banks and customers as set out below. The Group does not hold collateral against debt securities, comprising asset-backed securities and corporate and other debt securities, which are classified as financial assets held at amortised cost.
Loans and advances to banks
There were reverse repurchase agreements which are accounted for as collateralised loans within loans and advances to banks with a carrying value of £1,626£2,996 million for the Group and the Bank (2019: £408(2020: £1,626 million for the Group and the Bank), against which the Group and the Bank held collateral with a fair value of £1,040£92 million (2019: £388(2020: £1,040 million for the Group and the Bank).
These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.
Loans and advances to customers
Retail lending
Mortgages
An analysis by loan-to-value ratio of the Group’s and the Bank’s residential mortgage lending is provided below. The value of collateral used in determining the loan-to-value ratios has been estimated based upon the last actual valuation, adjusted to take into account subsequent movements in house prices, after making allowances for indexation error and dilapidations.
In some circumstances, where the discounted value of the estimated net proceeds from the liquidation of collateral (i.e. net of costs, expected haircuts and anticipated changes in the value of the collateral to the point of sale) is greater than the estimated exposure at default, no credit losses are expected and no ECL allowance is recognised.
The GroupStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal gross
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Less than 70 per cent185,548 24,330 1,547 10,051 221,476 
70 per cent to 80 per cent43,656 3,364 187 1,303 48,510 
80 per cent to 90 per cent21,508 1,009 74 470 23,061 
90 per cent to 100 per cent555 126 21 190 892 
Greater than 100 per cent151 189 30 497 867 
Total251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 
The GroupStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal gross
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Less than 70 per cent179,566 13,147 1,174 10,728 204,615 
70 per cent to 80 per cent44,384 2,343 181 1,751 48,659 
80 per cent to 90 per cent27,056 1,057 86 677 28,876 
90 per cent to 100 per cent5,663 199 34 207 6,103 
Greater than 100 per cent374 189 31 351 945 
Total257,043 16,935 1,506 13,714 289,198 
The BankStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total gross
£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Less than 70 per cent36,418 5,639 456 42,513 
70 per cent to 80 per cent3,603 712 66 4,381 
80 per cent to 90 per cent1,298 239 30 1,567 
90 per cent to 100 per cent94 42 9 145 
Greater than 100 per cent12 45 7 64 
Total41,425 6,677 568 48,670 
The BankStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total gross
£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Less than 70 per cent39,054 3,004 424 42,482 
70 per cent to 80 per cent4,848 529 68 5,445 
80 per cent to 90 per cent2,428 264 38 2,730 
90 per cent to 100 per cent516 49 18 583 
Greater than 100 per cent58 43 10 111 
Total46,904 3,889 558 51,351 
F-138F-126

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 20202021
45NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
20212020
The GroupStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal grossStage 1Stage 2Stage 3POCITotal gross
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Less than 70 per cent217,830 19,766 1,717 9,872 249,185 185,548 24,330 1,547 10,051 221,476 
70 per cent to 80 per cent42,808 1,632 134 572 45,146 43,656 3,364 187 1,303 48,510 
80 per cent to 90 per cent12,087 253 52 184 12,576 21,508 1,009 74 470 23,061 
90 per cent to 100 per cent779 46 14 135 974 555 126 21 190 892 
Greater than 100 per cent125 101 23 214 463 151 189 30 497 867 
Total273,629 21,798 1,940 10,977 308,344 251,418 29,018 1,859 12,511 294,806 
20212020
The BankStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total grossStage 1Stage 2Stage 3Total gross
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Less than 70 per cent37,113 4,072 432 41,617 36,418 5,639 456 42,513 
70 per cent to 80 per cent2,588 246 29 2,863 3,603 712 66 4,381 
80 per cent to 90 per cent612 49 17 678 1,298 239 30 1,567 
90 per cent to 100 per cent90 10 3 103 94 42 145 
Greater than 100 per cent12 20 5 37 12 45 64 
Total40,415 4,397 486 45,298 41,425 6,677 568 48,670 
Other
The majority of non-mortgage retail lending is unsecured. At 31 December 2020,2021, Stage 3 non-mortgage lending amounted to £1,104 million, net of an impairment allowance of £438 million (2020: £538 million, net of an impairment allowance of £492 million (2019: £610 million, net of an impairment allowance of £368 million).
Stage 1 and Stage 2 non-mortgage retail lending amounted to £58,183£55,959 million (2019: £54,307(2020: £58,183 million). Lending decisions are predominantly based on an obligor’s ability to repay from normal business operations rather than reliance on the disposal of any security provided. CollateralWhere the lending is secured, collateral values are rigorously assessed at the time of loan origination and are thereafter monitored in accordance with business unit credit policy.
The Group's credit risk disclosures for unimpaired non-mortgage retail lending report assets gross of collateral and therefore disclose the maximum loss exposure. The Group believes that this approach is appropriate.
Commercial lending
Reverse repurchase transactions
At 31 December 20202021 there were reverse repurchase agreements which were accounted for as collateralised loans with a carrying value of £54,447£46,712 million for the Group and the Bank (2019: £51,624(2020: £54,447 million for the Group and the Bank) against which the Group held collateral with a fair value of £60,441£48,423 million (2019: £50,130(2020: £60,441 million) and the Bank held collateral worth £55,031£48,423 million (2019: £50,130(2020: £55,031 million) all of which the Group was able to repledge. NaN collateral in the form of cash was provided in respect of reverse repurchase agreements to the Group or the Bank (2019: £NaN for the Group and the Bank). These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.
Stage 3 secured lending
The value of collateral is re-evaluated and its legal soundness re-assessed if there is observable evidence of distress of the borrower; this evaluation is used to determine potential loss allowances and management’s strategy to try to either repair the business or recover the debt.
At 31 December 2020,2021, Stage 3 secured commercial lending amounted to £608 million, net of an impairment allowance of £198 million (2020: £704 million, net of an impairment allowance of £293 million (2019: £750 million, net of an impairment allowance of £167 million). The fair value of the collateral held in respect of impaired secured commercial lending was £753£693 million (2019: £744(2020: £753 million) for the Group. In determining the fair value of collateral, no specific amounts have been attributed to the costs of realisation. For the purposes of determining the total collateral held by the Group in respect of impaired secured commercial lending, the value of collateral for each loan has been limited to the principal amount of the outstanding advance in order to eliminate the effects of any over-collateralisation and to provide a clearer representation of the Group’s exposure.
Stage 3 secured commercial lending and associated collateral relates to lending to property companies and to customers in the financial, business and other services; transport, distribution and hotels; and construction industries.
Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured lending
For Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending, the Group reports assets gross of collateral and therefore discloses the maximum loss exposure. The Group believes that this approach is appropriate as collateral values at origination and during a period of good performance may not be representative of the value of collateral if the obligor enters a distressed state.
Stage 1 and Stage 2 secured commercial lending is predominantly managed on a cash flow basis. On occasion, it may include an assessment of underlying collateral, although, for Stage 3 lending, this will not always involve assessing it on a fair value basis. No aggregated collateral information for the entire unimpaired secured commercial lending portfolio is provided to key management personnel.
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (excluding equity shares)
Securities held as collateral in the form of stock borrowed amounted to £7,052 million for the Group and £7,090 million for the Bank (2020: £11,925 million for the Group and £17,391 million for the Bank (2019: £8,867Bank). Of this amount, £1,086 million for the Group and £8,453£1,214 million for the Bank). Of this amount,Bank (2020: £10,899 million for the Group and £16,639 million for the Bank (2019: £7,630 million for the Group and £8,178 million for the Bank) had been resold or repledged as collateral for the Group’s own transactions.
These transactions were generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard secured lending activities.
Derivative assets, after offsetting of amounts under master netting arrangements
The Group reduces exposure to credit risk by using master netting agreements and by obtaining collateral in the form of cash or highly liquid securities. In respect of the net derivative assets after offsetting of amounts under master netting arrangements of £3,142 million for the Group and £4,879 million for the Bank (2020: £4,968 million for the Group and £9,843 million for the Bank (2019: £4,317Bank), cash collateral of £1,621 million for the Group and £10,326£930 million for the Bank), cash collateral ofBank (2020: £2,702 million for the Group and £1,308 million for the Bank (2019: £2,186 million for the Group and £786 million for the Bank) was held.
F-127

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Irrevocable loan commitments and other credit-related contingencies
At 31 December 2020,2021, there were irrevocable loan commitments and other credit-related contingencies of £58,030 million for the Group and £32,730 million for the Bank (2020: £61,604 million for the Group and £34,940 million for the Bank (2019: £49,199 million for the Group and £29,961 million for the Bank). Collateral is held as security, in the event that lending is drawn down, on £17,149 million for the Group and £1,002 million for the Bank (2020: £19,548 million for the Group and £1,720 million for the Bank (2019: £12,391 million for the Group and £1,120 million for the Bank) of these balances.
Collateral repossessed
During the year, £125£86 million of collateral was repossessed (2019: £413(2020: £125 million), consisting primarily of residential property. In respect of retail portfolios, the Group does not take physical possession of properties or other assets held as collateral and uses external agents to realise the value as soon as practicable, generally at auction, to settle indebtedness. Any surplus funds are returned to the borrower or are otherwise dealt with in accordance with appropriate insolvency regulations. In certain circumstances the Group takes physical possession of assets held as collateral against commercial lending. In such cases, the assets are carried on the Group’s balance sheet and are classified according to the Group’s accounting policies.
F-139

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
E.(E)Collateral pledged as security
The Group pledges assets primarily for repurchase agreements and securities lending transactions which are generally conducted under terms that are usual and customary for standard securitised borrowing contracts.
Repurchase transactions
Deposits from banksAmortised cost
Included in deposits from banksThere are balances arising from repurchase transactions with banks of £30,085 million for the Group and £57 million for the Bank (2020: £18,767 million for the Group and £5,087 million for the Bank), which include amounts due under the Bank (2019: £18,105 millionof England's Term Funding Scheme with additional incentives for the Group and £2,645 million for the Bank)SMEs (TFSME); the fair value of the collateral provided under these agreements at 31 December 20202021 was £39,918 million for the Group and £44 million for the Bank (2020: £18,874 million for the Group and £5,197 million for the Bank (2019: £17,545 million for the Group and £2,118 million for the Bank).
Customer deposits
Included in customer depositsThere are balances arising from repurchase transactions with customers of £9,417£21 million for the Group and the Bank (2019: £9,530(2020: £9,417 million for the Group and the Bank); the fair value of the collateral provided under these agreements at 31 December 20202021 was £8,087£112 million for the Group and the Bank (2019: £9,221(2020: £8,087 million for the Group and the Bank).
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss
The fair value of collateral pledged in respect of repurchase transactions, accounted for as secured borrowing, where the secured party is permitted by contract or custom to repledge was £NaN£nil for the Group and the Bank at 31 December 2020 (2019: £NaN2021 (2020: £nil for the Group and the Bank).
Securities lending transactions
The following on balanceon-balance sheet financial assets have been lent to counterparties under securities lending transactions:
The GroupThe BankThe GroupThe Bank
20202019202020192021202020212020
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or lossFinancial assets at fair value through profit or loss0 470 1,365 634 Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss —  1,365 
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive incomeFinancial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income2,344 854 969 1,467 Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income2,724 2,344 2,946 969 
2,344 1,324 2,334 2,101 
TotalTotal2,724 2,344 2,946 2,334 
Securitisations and covered bonds
In addition to the assets detailed above, the Group also holds assets that are encumbered through the Group’s asset-backed conduits and its securitisation and covered bond programmes. Further details of these assets are provided in notes 2625 and 41.40.
Market risk
(2)(A)Market risk
Interest rate risk
Interest rate risk arises from the different repricing characteristics of the assets and liabilities. Liabilities are either insensitive to interest rate movements, for example interest free or very low interest customer deposits, or are sensitive to interest rate changes but bear rates which may be varied at the Group’s discretion and that for competitive reasons generally reflect changes in the UK Bank Rate, set by the Bank of England. The rates on the remaining deposits are contractually fixed for their term to maturity.
Many banking assets are sensitive to interest rate movements; there is a large volume of managed rate assets such as variable rate mortgages which may be considered as a natural offset to the interest rate risk arising from the managed rate liabilities. However, a significant proportion of the Group’s lending assets, for example many personal loans and mortgages, bear interest rates which are contractually fixed. Interest rate sensitivity analysis relating to the Group's banking activities is set out in the tables marked audited on pages 46 to 47.
The Group’s risk management policy is to optimise reward whilstwhile managing its market risk exposures within the risk appetite defined by the Board. The largest residual risk exposure arises from balances that are deemed to be insensitive to changes in market rates (including current accounts, a portion of variable rate deposits and investable equity), and is managed through the Group’s structural hedge. The structural hedge consists of longer-term fixed rate assets or interest rate swaps and the amount and duration of the hedging activity is reviewed regularly by the Lloyds Banking Group Asset and Liability Committee.
The Group and the Bank establish hedge accounting relationships for interest rate risk using cash flow hedges and fair value hedges. The Group and the Bank are exposed to cash flow interest rate risk on their variable rate loans and deposits together with their floating rate subordinated debt. The derivatives used to manage the structural hedge may be designated into cash flow hedges to manage income statement volatility. The economic items related to the structural hedge, for example current accounts, are not eligible hedged items under IAS 39 for inclusion into accounting hedge relationships. The Group and the Bank are exposed to fair value interest rate risk on their fixed rate customer loans, their fixed rate customer deposits and the majority of their subordinated debt. The Group and the Bank apply netting between similar risks before applying hedge accounting.

F-128

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Hedge ineffectiveness arises during the management of interest rate risk due to residual unhedged risk. Sources of ineffectiveness, which the Group may decide to not fully mitigate, can include basis differences, timing differences and notional amount differences. The effectiveness of accounting hedge relationships is assessed between the hedging derivatives and the documented hedged item, which can differ to the underlying economically hedged item.
At 31 December 20202021 the aggregate notional principal of interest rate and other swaps (predominately interest rate) designated as fair value hedges was £185,958£147,724 million (2019: £160,942(2020: £185,958 million) for the Group and £58,030£56,698 million (2019: £66,833(2020: £58,030 million) for the Bank with a net fair value liability of £266 million (2020: asset of £81 million (2019: asset of £467 million) for the Group and a net fair value liability of £4£285 million (2019:(2020: liability of £60£4 million) for the Bank (note 15)14). There were lossesgains recognised on the hedging instruments of £87£1,885 million (2019: gains(2020: losses of £353£87 million) for the Group and losses of £225£296 million (2019: gains(2020: losses of £120£225 million) for the Bank. There were gainslosses on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk of £633£1,690 million (2019: losses(2020: gains of £200£633 million) for the Group and gains of £198£282 million (2019: losses(2020: gains of £163£198 million) for the Bank. The gains and losses relating to the fair value hedges are recorded in net trading income.
In addition the Group has cash flow hedges which are primarily used to hedge the variability in the cost of funding within the commercial business. The notional principal of the interest rate swaps designated as cash flow hedges at 31 December 20202021 was £316,776£97,942 million (2019: £417,718(2020: £316,776 million) for the Group and £93,353£26,876 million (2019: £130,477(2020: £93,353 million) for the Bank with a net fair value asset of £28 million (2019: liability£nil (2020: asset of £393£28 million) for the Group and a net fair value asset of £nil (2020: liability of £31 million (2019: liability of £26 million) for the Bank (note 15)14). In 2020,2021, ineffectiveness recognised in the income statement that arises from cash flow hedges was a loss of £58 million (2020: gain of £259 million (2019: gain of £131 million) for the Group and a loss of £27£24 million (2019: gain(2020: loss of £62£27 million) for the Bank.
F-140

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
Interest Rate Benchmark Reform
For the purposes of determining whether:
a forecast transaction is highly probable;
hedged future cash flows are expected to occur;
a hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk; and
an accounting hedging relationship should be discontinued because of a failure of the retrospective effectiveness test
the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged risk or the cash flows of the hedged item or hedging instrument are based is not altered by uncertainties resulting from the proposed interest rate benchmark reform. In addition, for a fair value hedge of a non-contractually specified benchmark portion of interest rate risk, the Group assesses only at inception of the hedge relationship and not on an ongoing basis that the risk is separately identifiable and hedge effectiveness can be measured.
The Group’s most significant hedge accounting relationships are exposed to the following interest rate benchmarks: Sterling LIBOR, US Dollar LIBOR and EURIBOR.
At 31 December 2020, the Group expects that EURIBOR will continue to exist as a benchmark rate for the foreseeable future and as a result does not anticipate changing the hedged risk to a different benchmark. Accordingly, the Group does not consider its fair value or cash flow hedges of the EURIBOR benchmark interest rate to be directly affected by interest rate benchmark reform.
The notional of the hedged items that the Group has designated into cash flow hedge relationships that is directly affected by the interest rate benchmark reform is £18,107 million for the Group and £11,221 million for the Bank (2019: £26,774 million for the Group and £12,421 million for the Bank), of which £15,120 million for the Group and £11,221 million for the Bank (2019: £23,467 million for the Group and £12,421 million for the Bank) relates to Sterling LIBOR. These are principally loans and advances to customers in Commercial Banking.
The interest rate benchmark reforms also affect assets designated in fair value hedges with a notional of £107,340 million for the Group and £16,430 million for the Bank (2019: £102,969 million for the Group and £18,977 million for the Bank), of which £103,438 million for the Group and £12,535 million for the Bank (2019: £98,278 million for the Group and £14,286 million for the Bank) is in respect of Sterling LIBOR, and liabilities designated in fair value hedges with a notional of £19,567 million for the Group and £17,775 million for the Bank (2019: £45,183 million for the Group and £38,328 million for the Bank), of which £6,172 million for the Group and £5,455 million for the Bank (2019: £5,890 million for the Group and £4,824 million for the Bank) is in respect of Sterling LIBOR and £13,395 million for the Group and £12,320 million for the Bank (2019: £15,729 million for the Group and £14,517 million for the Bank) is in respect of US Dollar LIBOR. These fair value hedges principally relate to mortgages in Retail and debt securities in issue (for the Bank, principally debt securities in issue).
At 31 December 2020, the notional amount of the hedging instruments in hedging relationships to which these amendments apply was £439,139 million for the Group and £134,100 million for the Bank (2019: £576,356 million for the Group and £194,827 million for the Bank), of which £112,027 million for the Group and £21,226 million for the Bank (2019: £116,211 million for the Group and £25,070 million for the Bank) relates to Sterling LIBOR fair value hedges and £294,274 million for the Group and £93,353 million for the Bank (2019: £391,417 million for the Group and £130,477 million for the Bank) relates to Sterling LIBOR cash flow hedges.
The Group is managing the process to transition to alternative benchmark rates under its Group-wide IBOR Transition Programme. This programme has developed an implementation plan for new products and a transition plan for legacy products. The programme also encompasses the associated impacts on systems, processes, accounting and reporting and includes dealing with the impact on hedge accounting relationships of the transition to alternative reference rates.
Foreign exchange risk
The corporate and retail businesses incur foreign exchange risk in the course of providing services to their customers. All non-structural foreign exchange exposures in the non-trading book are transferred to the trading area where they are monitored and controlled. These risks reside in the authorised trading centres who are allocated exposure limits. The limits are monitored daily by the local centres and reported to the central market and liquidity risk function in London. The Group also manages foreign currency risk via cash flow hedge accounting, utilising currency swaps.
Risk arises from the Group’s investments in its overseas operations. The Group’s structural foreign currency exposure is represented by the net asset value of the foreign currency equity and subordinated debt investments in its subsidiaries and branches. Gains or losses on structural foreign currency exposures are taken to reserves.
The Group ceased all hedging of the currency translation risk of the net investment in foreign operations on 1 January 2018.
The Group has overseas operations in Europe. Structural foreign currency exposures in respect of operations with a Euro functional currency are £113 million (2019: £52 million) for the Group and £2 million (2019: £2 million) for the Bank.
F-141

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
(3)Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost. Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturity. The Group carries out monthly stress testing of its liquidity position against a range of scenarios, including those prescribed by the PRA. The Group’s liquidity risk appetite is also calibrated against a number of stressed liquidity metrics.
The tables below analyse financial instrument liabilities of the Group and the Bank on an undiscounted future cash flow basis according to contractual maturity, into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet date; balances with no fixed maturity are included in the over 5 years category. Certain balances, included in the table below on the basis of their residual maturity, are repayable on demand upon payment of a penalty.
The GroupUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks7,369 1,564 72 19,438 498 28,941 
Customer deposits413,374 9,871 5,366 5,542 595 434,748 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss40 45 141 1,702 10,110 12,038 
Debt securities in issue5,019 5,195 9,706 33,338 11,594 64,852 
Other liabilities (lease liabilities)10 51 174 626 751 1,612 
Subordinated liabilities81 69 3,609 4,261 3,601 11,621 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities425,893 16,795 19,068 64,907 27,149 553,812 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows4,358 4,818 4,390 15,787 8,397 37,750 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(3,795)(4,312)(4,272)(15,696)(8,885)(36,960)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows563 506 118 91 (488)790 
Net settled derivative liabilities4,648 7 89 216 329 5,289 
Total derivative financial liabilities5,211 513 207 307 (159)6,079 
The GroupUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Deposits from banks4,099 2,302 248 17,142 317 24,108 
Customer deposits368,331 11,440 11,861 9,271 1,276 402,179 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss30 71 298 1,330 13,213 14,942 
Debt securities in issue4,174 8,186 15,117 41,816 28,696 97,989 
Other liabilities (lease liabilities)60 187 793 935 1,977 
Subordinated liabilities245 1,472 1,711 7,593 6,513 17,534 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities376,881 23,531 29,422 77,945 50,950 558,729 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows2,492 3,053 10,815 25,935 13,884 56,179 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(968)(2,636)(10,744)(25,838)(13,829)(54,015)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows1,524 417 71 97 55 2,164 
Net settled derivative liabilities14,654 (16)129 383 15,151 
Total derivative financial liabilities16,178 401 72 226 438 17,315 
The principal amount for undated subordinated liabilities with no redemption option is included within the over five years column; interest of approximately £23 million (2019: £28 million) per annum for the Group and £16 million (2019: £21 million) for the Bank which is payable in respect of those instruments for as long as they remain in issue is not included beyond five years.
F-142

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The BankUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks7,353 1,562 15 1,108 361 10,399 
Customer deposits254,667 7,185 1,334 819 457 264,462 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss40 45 141 1,701 10,065 11,992 
Debt securities in issue4,502 4,200 6,404 27,908 9,408 52,422 
Other liabilities (lease liabilities)1 34 97 326 445 903 
Subordinated liabilities9 43 3,069 3,517 3,016 9,654 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities266,572 13,069 11,060 35,379 23,752 349,832 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows3,881 4,737 3,433 15,174 6,337 33,562 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(3,405)(4,291)(3,336)(15,076)(6,629)(32,737)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows476 446 97 98 (292)825 
Net settled derivative liabilities3,885 5 3 146 208 4,247 
Total derivative financial liabilities4,361 451 100 244 (84)5,072 
The BankUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2019
Deposits from banks3,933 2,302 144 824 317 7,520 
Customer deposits227,825 9,620 4,727 1,330 1,176 244,678 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss30 71 298 1,330 13,165 14,894 
Debt securities in issue3,323 4,341 12,569 34,779 26,628 81,640 
Other liabilities (lease liabilities)35 109 446 513 1,104 
Subordinated liabilities173 1,416 1,572 6,254 3,497 12,912 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities235,285 17,785 19,419 44,963 45,296 362,748 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows1,631 2,906 10,228 24,164 12,130 51,059 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(932)(2,523)(10,160)(24,038)(11,911)(49,564)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows699 383 68 126 219 1,495 
Net settled derivative liabilities10,539 (19)(6)59 243 10,816 
Total derivative financial liabilities11,238 364 62 185 462 12,311 
F-143

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
45 FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The following tables set out the amounts and residual maturities of off balance sheet contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees.
The GroupWithin 1
year
1-3
years
3-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Acceptances and endorsements73 0 0 0 73 
Other contingent liabilities1,302 337 69 583 2,291 
Total contingent liabilities1,375 337 69 583 2,364 
Lending commitments and guarantees102,279 18,152 9,454 3,588 133,473 
Other commitments1 44 16 64 125 
Total commitments and guarantees102,280 18,196 9,470 3,652 133,598 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees103,655 18,533 9,539 4,235 135,962 
At 31 December 2019
Acceptances and endorsements17 17 
Other contingent liabilities1,422 349 99 683 2,553 
Total contingent liabilities1,439 349 99 683 2,570 
Lending commitments and guarantees90,953 11,756 10,571 2,983 116,263 
Other commitments71 43 52 171 
Total commitments and guarantees90,958 11,827 10,614 3,035 116,434 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees92,397 12,176 10,713 3,718 119,004 
The BankWithin 1
year
1-3
years
3-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2020
Acceptances and endorsements73 0 0 0 73 
Other contingent liabilities1,144 328 68 480 2,020 
Total contingent liabilities1,217 328 68 480 2,093 
Lending commitments and guarantees34,552 16,319 9,127 2,672 62,670 
Other commitments0 27 16 53 96 
Total commitments and guarantees34,552 16,346 9,143 2,725 62,766 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees35,769 16,674 9,211 3,205 64,859 
At 31 December 2019
Acceptances and endorsements16 16 
Other contingent liabilities1,323 271 99 580 2,273 
Total contingent liabilities1,339 271 99 580 2,289 
Lending commitments and guarantees30,727 9,806 9,694 2,165 52,392 
Other commitments71 43 38 157 
Total commitments and guarantees30,732 9,877 9,737 2,203 52,549 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees32,071 10,148 9,836 2,783 54,838 
F-144

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
46 CASH FLOW STATEMENTS
a.Change in operating assets
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Change in financial assets held at amortised cost(9,688)(11,832)(10,338)(1,815)(5,482)(992)
Change in amounts due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings1,116 24 4,827 73,506 (48,692)9,875 
Change in derivative financial instruments and financial assets at fair value through profit or loss1,089 24,649 40,137 (268)22,568 37,356 
Change in other operating assets627 63 (442)239 63 295 
Change in operating assets(6,856)12,904 34,184 71,662 (31,543)46,534 
b.Change in operating liabilities
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Change in deposits from banks1,404 (2,670)(2,677)3,182 1,802 (2,219)
Change in customer deposits37,728 5,593 (11,901)24,711 10,360 (5,258)
Change in amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings(1,316)(8,142)(5,466)(73,233)28,016 (23,522)
Change in debt securities in issue(17,138)11,898 4,730 (13,400)11,722 1,442 
Change in derivative financial instruments and financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(2,549)(11,527)(45,383)(3,004)(10,776)(46,514)
Change in investment contract liabilities0 (353)0 
Change in other operating liabilities1
(288)(782)(383)(249)(1,823)(648)
Change in operating liabilities17,841 (5,630)(61,433)(61,993)39,301 (76,719)
1Includes a decrease of £163 million (2019: increase of £43 million; 2018: increase of £27 million) for the Group and a decrease of £42 million (2019: increase of £20 million; 2018: increase of £27 million) for the Bank in respect of lease liabilities.
F-145

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
46 CASH FLOW STATEMENTS (continued)
c.Non-cash and other items
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Depreciation and amortisation2,670 2,602 2,374 1,325 1,245 1,031 
Permanent diminution in value of investment in subsidiaries0 0 159 92 
Dividends and distributions on other equity instruments received from subsidiary undertakings0 (211)(1,434)(4,968)
Revaluation of investment properties20 (46)0 
Allowance for loan losses3,802 1,380 1,012 1,742 490 553 
Write-off of allowance for loan losses, net of recoveries(1,279)(1,457)(1,000)(622)(759)(608)
Impairment charge relating to undrawn balances253 (17)(72)155 14 (46)
Impairment of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income5 (1)(14)1 (1)(2)
Change in insurance contract liabilities0 (1,520)0 
Payment protection insurance provision85 1,795 1,395 169 859 628 
Other regulatory provisions329 395 561 143 137 311 
Other provision movements80 (161)(509)18 (43)(413)
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries0 (33)(53)(72)
Net charge in respect of defined benefit schemes247 245 404 121 131 196 
Unwind of discount on impairment allowances(47)(52)(39)(31)(32)(33)
Foreign exchange impact on balance sheet1
823 420 (365)491 (230)(130)
Interest expense on subordinated liabilities846 947 1,072 534 657 654 
Loss (profit) on disposal of businesses0 (107)(1,010)0 21 
Other non-cash items(1,169)(295)933 (308)(142)990 
Total non-cash items6,665 5,702 3,176 3,494 998 (1,796)
Contributions to defined benefit schemes(1,153)(1,069)(868)(650)(563)(455)
Payments in respect of payment protection insurance provision(1,700)(2,457)(2,101)(726)(1,156)(1,057)
Payments in respect of other regulatory provisions(465)(707)(956)(233)(229)(302)
Other137 (65)
Total other items(3,181)(4,233)(3,919)(1,674)(1,948)(1,814)
Non-cash and other items3,484 1,469 (743)1,820 (950)(3,610)
1When considering the movement on each line of the balance sheet, the impact of foreign exchange rate movements is removed in order to show the underlying cash impact.
d.Analysis of cash and cash equivalents as shown in the balance sheet
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Cash and balances at central banks49,888 38,880 40,213 45,753 35,741 37,632 
Less: mandatory reserve deposits1
(4,392)(3,177)(2,541)(954)(764)(803)
45,496 35,703 37,672 44,799 34,977 36,829 
Loans and advances to banks5,950 4,852 3,692 5,656 4,453 3,153 
Less: amounts with a maturity of three months or more(2,480)(1,941)(1,641)(2,387)(1,648)(1,328)
3,470 2,911 2,051 3,269 2,805 1,825 
Total cash and cash equivalents48,966 38,614 39,723 48,068 37,782 38,654 
1Mandatory reserve deposits are held with local central banks in accordance with statutory requirements; these deposits are not available to finance the Group's day-to-day operations.
F-146

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
46 CASH FLOW STATEMENTS (continued)
e.Acquisition of group undertakings and businesses
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Net assets acquired:
Intangible assets0 21 0 
Other assets0 0 
Other liabilities0 (1)0 
Cash consideration0 26 0 
Less: cash and cash equivalents acquired0 0 
Net cash outflow arising from acquisitions of subsidiaries and businesses0 26 0 
Investment in subsidiary acquired0 0 98 
Net cash outflow from acquisitions in the year0 26 0 98 
f.Disposal of group undertakings and businesses
The GroupThe Bank
202020192018202020192018
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss0 125,379 0 
Loans and advances to customers0 3,495 0 
Due from fellow group undertakings0 14,436 0 
Derivative financial instruments0 3,027 0 
Investment property0 3,639 0 
Goodwill0 1,836 0 
Value of in-force business0 4,902 0 
Property, plant and equipment0 48 0 
0 156,762 0 
Customer deposits0 (15,236)0 
Due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings0 (2,584)0 
Derivative financial instruments0 (2,762)0 
Liabilities from insurance and investment contracts0 (117,021)0 
Subordinated liabilities0 (2,494)0 
Non-controlling interests0 (305)0 
Other net liabilities0 (8,759)0 
0 (149,161)0 
Net assets disposed of0 7,601 0 
Investment in subsidiary disposed of0 0 20 7,725 
Profit (loss) on sale of businesses0 107 1,010 0 (21)
Cash consideration received on losing control of group undertakings and businesses0 107 8,611 0 20 7,704 
Cash and cash equivalents disposed0 (7)0 
Net cash inflow0 107 8,604 0 20 7,704 
F-147

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2020
47 FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
The following pronouncements are not applicable for the year ending 31 December 2020 and have not been applied in preparing these financial statements.
Interest Rate Benchmark Reform
During 2021, the Group has continued to manage the transition to alternative benchmark rates under its Group-wide IBOR transition programme including delivery of the core changes required to its technology and business processes. Through this programme, the Group has ensured that the most appropriate benchmark rate is used for new products, has transitioned the vast majority of its legacy products to new benchmark rates for IBORs ceasing immediately after 31 December 2021 and has managed the impacts and risks relating to systems, processes, accounting and reporting. The IASB’sGroup does not expect material changes to its risk management approach and strategy as a result of interest rate benchmark reform.
The material risks identified include the following:
Conduct and litigation risk. The Group may be exposed to conduct and litigation charges as a direct result of inappropriate or negligent actions taken during IBOR transition resulting in detriment to the customer. The Group is working closely with its counterparties to avoid this outcome.
Market risk. IBOR transition is expected to lead to changes in the Group’s market risk profile which will continue to be monitored and managed within the appropriate risk appetites. The key change is expected to be on the management of basis risk profile during the period when alternative benchmark rates are referenced in contracts up to the cessation of the in-scope IBOR index.
Credit risk. Clients may wish to renegotiate the terms of existing transactions as a consequence of IBOR reform. This could lead to a change in the credit risk exposure of the client depending on the outcome of the negotiations. The Group will continue to monitor and manage changes within the appropriate risk appetites.
Accounting risk. If IBOR transition is finalised in a manner that does not permit the application of the reliefs introduced in the IFRS Phase 2 amendments, the financial instrument may be required to be derecognised and a new instrument recognised. In addition, where instruments used in responsehedge accounting relationships are transitioned either at different times or to issues arisingdifferent benchmarks, this may result in additional volatility to the income statement either through hedge accounting ineffectiveness or failure of the hedge accounting relationships.
Operational risk. Additional operational risks may arise due to the IBOR transition programme impacting all businesses and functions within the Group and leading to the implementation of changes to technology, operations, client communication and the valuation of in-scope financial instruments.
At 31 December 2021, the Group had successfully transitioned all derivative products settled though the London Clearing House (LCH) that were dependent on Sterling, Euro, Japanese Yen and Swiss Franc LIBOR to alternative benchmark rates and has transitioned the majority of its commercial lending contracts from Sterling LIBOR to alternative benchmark rates. US Dollar LIBOR is not expected to cease before 30 June 2023 and the Group continues to work on its planned transition to alternative benchmark rates for those financial contracts currently referencing US dollar LIBOR.

F-129

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
At 31 December 2021, the Group and the Bank had the following significant exposures impacted by interest rate benchmark reform which have yet to transition to the replacement benchmark rate:
The GroupThe Bank
Sterling LIBORUS Dollar LIBOROther LIBORTotalSterling LIBORUS Dollar LIBOROther LIBORTotal
£m£m£m£m£m£m£m£m
Non-derivative financial assets
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss131 172  303 33 96  129 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements 3,252  3,252  3,252  3,252 
Loans and advances to customers and reverse repurchase agreements3,419 2,549  5,968 2,912 1,924  4,836 
Due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings    7 127  134 
Debt securities        
Financial assets at amortised cost3,419 5,801  9,220 2,919 5,303  8,222 
3,550 5,973  9,523 2,952 5,399  8,351 
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss (100)(3)(103) (100)(3)(103)
Debt securities in issue (54)(26)(80) (54)(6)(60)
 (154)(29)(183) (154)(9)(163)
Derivative notional/contract amount
Interest rate4,271 120,797  125,068 1,411 120,502 10 121,923 
Cross currency 22,663  22,663  21,868  21,868 
As at 31 December 2021, the Sterling LIBOR balances in the above table relate to contracts that have not converted to a risk-free rate. The balance includes both contracts that mature in 2022 with further LIBOR interest rate fixings in the period and contracts where the counterparty has not yet agreed to fallback provisions that would have effect when LIBOR ceases. In both cases, these contracts will have both cash flows and valuations determined on a ‘synthetic’ LIBOR basis for reporting periods during 2022, unless they are transitioned to alternative benchmark rates.
In respect of the Group's hedge accounting relationships, for the purposes of determining whether:
A forecast transaction is highly probable
Hedged future cash flows are expected to occur
A hedge is expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in fair value or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk
An accounting hedging relationship should be discontinued because of a failure of the retrospective effectiveness test
the Group assumes that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged risk or the cash flows of the hedged item or hedging instrument are based is not altered by uncertainties resulting from interest rate benchmark reform. In addition, for a fair value hedge of a non-contractually specified benchmark portion of interest rate benchmarks in a numberrisk, the Group assesses only at inception of jurisdictionsthe hedge relationship and not on an ongoing basis that the risk is separately identifiable and hedge effectiveness can be measured. The Group’s most significant hedge accounting relationships are effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2021.exposed to the following interest rate benchmarks: Sterling LIBOR, US Dollar LIBOR and EURIBOR.
Under these amendments, an immediate gain or loss is not recognised inAt 31 December 2021, the income statement where the contractual cash flows of a financial asset or financial liability are amendedGroup expects that EURIBOR will continue to exist as a direct consequencebenchmark rate for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, the Group does not consider its fair value or cash flow hedges of the EURIBOR benchmark interest rate to be directly affected by interest rate benchmark reform and as a result does not anticipate changing the revised contractual terms are economically equivalenthedged risk to a different benchmark.
The notional amount of the previous terms. In addition,hedged items that the Group has designated into cash flow hedge accounting is continued for relationships that areis directly affected by the reform.interest rate benchmark reform is £2,001 million for the Group and £nil for the Bank, all of which is in respect of US Dollar LIBOR (2020: £18,107 million for the Group and £11,221 million for the Bank, of which £15,120 million for the Group and £11,221 million for the Bank related to Sterling LIBOR). These are principally loans and advances to customers in Commercial Banking.
The interest rate benchmark reforms also affect assets designated in fair value hedges with a notional amount of £3,370 million for the Group and £3,370 million for the Bank all of which is in respect of US Dollar LIBOR (2020: £107,340 million for the Group and £16,430 million for the Bank, of which £103,438 million for the Group and £12,535 million for the Bank was in respect of Sterling LIBOR), and liabilities designated in fair value hedges with a notional amount of £9,094 million for the Group and £8,129 million for the Bank all of which is in respect of US Dollar LIBOR (2020: £19,567 million for the Group and £17,775 million for the Bank, of which £6,172 million for the Group and £5,455 million for the Bank was in respect of Sterling LIBOR, and £13,395 million for the Group and £12,320 million for the Bank was in respect of US Dollar LIBOR). These fair value hedges principally relate to mortgages in Retail and debt securities in issue (for the Bank, principally debt securities in issue).
At 31 December 2021, the notional amount of the hedging instruments in hedging relationships to which these amendments apply is £17,954 million for the Group and £15,462 million for the Bank, all of which relates to US Dollar LIBOR (2020: £439,139 million for the Group and £134,100 million for the Bank, of which £112,027 million for the Group and £21,226 million for the Bank related to Sterling LIBOR fair value hedges and £294,274 million for the Group and £93,353 million for the Bank related to Sterling LIBOR cash flow hedges).
F-130

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
(B)Foreign exchange risk
The corporate and retail businesses incur foreign exchange risk in the course of providing services to their customers. All non-structural foreign exchange exposures in the non-trading book are managed centrally within allocated exposure limits. Trading book exposures in the authorised trading centres are allocated exposure limits. The limits are monitored daily by the local centres and reported to the central market and liquidity risk function in London.
The Group manages foreign currency accounting exposure via cash flow hedge accounting, utilising currency swaps and forward foreign exchange trades.
Risk arises from the Group’s investments in its overseas operations. The Group’s structural foreign currency exposure is represented by the net asset value of the foreign currency equity and subordinated debt investments in its subsidiaries and branches. Gains or losses on structural foreign currency exposures are taken to reserves. The Group ceased all hedge accounting of the currency translation risk of the net investment in foreign operations in 2018.
The Group has overseas operations in Europe. Structural foreign currency exposures in respect of operations with a Euro functional currency are £115 million (2020: £113 million) for the Group and £nil (2020: £2 million) for the Bank.
Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is defined as the risk that the Group has insufficient financial resources to meet its commitments as they fall due, or can only secure them at excessive cost. Liquidity risk is managed through a series of measures, tests and reports that are primarily based on contractual maturity. The Group carries out monthly stress testing of its liquidity position against a range of scenarios, including those prescribed by the PRA. The Group’s liquidity risk appetite is also calibrated against a number of stressed liquidity metrics.
The tables below analyse financial instrument liabilities of the Group and the Bank on an undiscounted future cash flow basis according to contractual maturity, into relevant maturity groupings based on the remaining period at the balance sheet date; balances with no fixed maturity are included in the over 5 years category. Certain balances, included in the table below on the basis of their residual maturity, are repayable on demand upon payment of a penalty.
The GroupUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements1,930 477 202 32,407 223 35,239 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements439,550 1,616 3,689 5,046 569 450,470 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss81 21 242 1,572 4,677 6,593 
Debt securities in issue4,367 5,307 8,603 27,715 4,708 50,700 
Lease liabilities2 61 158 578 832 1,631 
Subordinated liabilities30 39 370 5,418 5,679 11,536 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities445,960 7,521 13,264 72,736 16,688 556,169 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows2,577 573 4,232 11,280 4,990 23,652 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(2,462)(425)(4,168)(10,945)(4,734)(22,734)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows115 148 64 335 256 918 
Net settled derivative liabilities2,654 (21)(6)145 360 3,132 
Total derivative financial liabilities2,769 127 58 480 616 4,050 
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements7,369 1,564 72 19,438 498 28,941 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements413,374 9,871 5,366 5,542 595 434,748 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss40 45 141 1,702 10,110 12,038 
Debt securities in issue5,019 5,195 9,706 33,338 11,594 64,852 
Lease liabilities10 51 174 626 751 1,612 
Subordinated liabilities81 69 3,609 4,261 3,601 11,621 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities425,893 16,795 19,068 64,907 27,149 553,812 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows4,358 4,818 4,390 15,787 8,397 37,750 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(3,795)(4,312)(4,272)(15,696)(8,885)(36,960)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows563 506 118 91 (488)790 
Net settled derivative liabilities4,648 89 216 329 5,289 
Total derivative financial liabilities5,211 513 207 307 (159)6,079 
F-131

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The principal amount for undated subordinated liabilities with no redemption option is included within the over 5 years column; interest of £19 million (2020: £23 million) per annum for the Group and £12 million (2020: £16 million) for the Bank which is payable in respect of those instruments for as long as they remain in issue is not included beyond 5 years.
The BankUp to 1
month
1-3
months
3-12
months
1-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements1,921 467 31 813 224 3,456 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements266,536 1,065 691 765 432 269,489 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss81 21 242 1,572 4,645 6,561 
Debt securities in issue3,802 4,559 5,426 22,704 3,815 40,306 
Lease liabilities1 32 83 300 434 850 
Subordinated liabilities9 17 339 4,708 5,254 10,327 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities272,350 6,161 6,812 30,862 14,804 330,989 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows2,545 544 3,827 10,416 4,343 21,675 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(2,452)(407)(3,769)(10,108)(4,095)(20,831)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows93 137 58 308 248 844 
Net settled derivative liabilities2,125 (21)(6)145 320 2,563 
Total derivative financial liabilities2,218 116 52 453 568 3,407 
At 31 December 2020
Deposits from banks and repurchase agreements7,353 1,562 15 1,108 361 10,399 
Customer deposits and repurchase agreements254,667 7,185 1,334 819 457 264,462 
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss40 45 141 1,701 10,065 11,992 
Debt securities in issue4,502 4,200 6,404 27,908 9,408 52,422 
Lease liabilities34 97 326 445 903 
Subordinated liabilities43 3,069 3,517 3,016 9,654 
Total non-derivative financial liabilities266,572 13,069 11,060 35,379 23,752 349,832 
Derivative financial liabilities:
Gross settled derivatives – outflows3,881 4,737 3,433 15,174 6,337 33,562 
Gross settled derivatives – inflows(3,405)(4,291)(3,336)(15,076)(6,629)(32,737)
Gross settled derivatives – net flows476 446 97 98 (292)825 
Net settled derivative liabilities3,885 146 208 4,247 
Total derivative financial liabilities4,361 451 100 244 (84)5,072 
The following tables set out the amounts and residual maturities of off-balance sheet contingent liabilities, commitments and guarantees.
The GroupWithin 1
year
1-3
years
3-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Acceptances and endorsements21 00021 
Other contingent liabilities1,362 242 258 457 2,319 
Total contingent liabilities1,383 242 258 457 2,340 
Lending commitments and guarantees97,587 15,506 9,853 4,678 127,624 
Other commitments 18  42 60 
Total commitments and guarantees97,587 15,524 9,853 4,720 127,684 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees98,970 15,766 10,111 5,177 130,024 
At 31 December 2020
Acceptances and endorsements73 — — — 73 
Other contingent liabilities1,302 337 69 583 2,291 
Total contingent liabilities1,375 337 69 583 2,364 
Lending commitments and guarantees102,279 18,152 9,454 3,588 133,473 
Other commitments44 16 64 125 
Total commitments and guarantees102,280 18,196 9,470 3,652 133,598 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees103,655 18,533 9,539 4,235 135,962 
F-132

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 44: FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT (continued)
The BankWithin 1
year
1-3
years
3-5
years
Over 5
years
Total
£m£m£m£m£m
At 31 December 2021
Acceptances and endorsements21    21 
Other contingent liabilities1,227 216 227 386 2,056 
Total contingent liabilities1,248 216 227 386 2,077 
Lending commitments and guarantees30,872 14,213 9,180 3,670 57,935 
Other commitments 18  37 55 
Total commitments and guarantees30,872 14,231 9,180 3,707 57,990 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees32,120 14,447 9,407 4,093 60,067 
At 31 December 2020
Acceptances and endorsements73 — — — 73 
Other contingent liabilities1,144 328 68 480 2,020 
Total contingent liabilities1,217 328 68 480 2,093 
Lending commitments and guarantees34,552 16,319 9,127 2,672 62,670 
Other commitments— 27 16 53 96 
Total commitments and guarantees34,552 16,346 9,143 2,725 62,766 
Total contingents, commitments and guarantees35,769 16,674 9,211 3,205 64,859 
Capital risk
Capital is actively managed on an ongoing basis for both the Group and its regulated banking subsidiaries, and the associated capital policies and procedures are subject to regular review. The Group measures both its capital requirements and the amount of capital resources that it holds to meet those requirements through applying capital directives and regulations as implemented in the UK by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and supplemented through additional regulation under the PRA Rulebook and associated statements of policy, supervisory statements and other guidance. Regulatory capital ratios are considered a key part of the budgeting and planning processes and forecast ratios are reviewed by the Group and Ring-Fenced Banks Asset and Liability Committee. Target capital levels take account of current and future regulatory requirements, capacity for growth and to cover uncertainties. Details of the Group's capital resources are provided in the table marked audited on page 72.
NOTE 45: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS
(A)Change in operating assets
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Change in amounts due from fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings(1)1,116 24 20,347 73,506 (48,692)
Change in other financial assets held at amortised cost3,292 (9,688)(11,832)15,167 (1,815)(5,482)
Change in financial assets at fair value through profit or loss(124)610 20,972 (2,805)(1,021)20,140 
Change in derivative financial instruments1,548 479 3,677 6,085 753 2,428 
Change in other operating assets345 627 63 10 239 63 
Change in operating assets5,060 (6,856)12,904 38,804 71,662 (31,543)
(B)Change in operating liabilities
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Change in deposits from banks and repurchase agreements8,451 1,404 (2,670)(7,479)3,182 1,802 
Change in customer deposits and repurchase agreements14,825 37,728 5,593 4,231 24,711 10,360 
Change in amounts due to fellow Lloyds Banking Group undertakings(806)(1,316)(8,142)(12,468)(73,233)28,016 
Change in financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss(380)(946)(10,447)1,828 135 (10,441)
Change in derivative financial instruments(3,585)(1,603)(1,080)(4,970)(3,139)(335)
Change in debt securities in issue(10,569)(17,138)11,898 (9,670)(13,400)11,722 
Change in other operating liabilities1
174 (288)(782)513 (249)(1,823)
Change in operating liabilities8,110 17,841 (5,630)(28,015)(61,993)39,301 
1Includes a decrease of £182 million (2020: decrease of £163 million; 2019: increase of £43 million) for the Group and a decrease of £108 million (2020: decrease of £42 million; 2019: increase of £20 million) for the Bank in respect of lease liabilities.
F-133

NOTES TO THE ACCOUNTS
for the year ended 31 December 2021
NOTE 45: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS (continued)
(C)Non-cash and other items
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Depreciation and amortisation2,777 2,670 2,602 1,671 1,325 1,245 
Permanent diminution in value of investment in subsidiaries — —  — 159 
Dividends and distributions on other equity instruments received from subsidiary undertakings — — (1,503)(211)(1,434)
Revaluation of investment properties 20  — — 
Allowance for loan losses(1,085)3,802 1,380 (648)1,742 490 
Write-off of allowance for loan losses, net of recoveries(935)(1,279)(1,457)(442)(622)(759)
Impairment (credit) charge relating to undrawn balances(231)253 (17)(134)155 14 
Impairment of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)(1)1 (1)
Regulatory and legal provisions1,177 414 2,190 196 312 996 
Other provision movements(82)80 (161)(71)18 (43)
Additional capital injections to subsidiaries — — (36)(33)(53)
Net charge in respect of defined benefit schemes236 247 245 114 121 131 
Foreign exchange impact on balance sheet1
159 823 420 (48)491 (230)
Interest expense on subordinated liabilities570 846 947 484 534 657 
Profit on disposal of businesses — (107) — — 
Other non-cash items(1,173)(1,216)(347)(867)(339)(174)
Total non-cash items1,411 6,665 5,702 (1,283)3,494 998 
Contributions to defined benefit schemes(1,347)(1,153)(1,069)(823)(650)(563)
Payments in respect of regulatory and legal provisions(680)(2,165)(3,164)(190)(959)(1,385)
Other(45)137 — 237 (65)— 
Total other items(2,072)(3,181)(4,233)(776)(1,674)(1,948)
Non-cash and other items(661)3,484 1,469 (2,059)1,820 (950)
1When considering the movement on each line of the balance sheet, the impact of foreign exchange rate movements is removed in order to show the underlying cash impact.
(D)Analysis of cash and cash equivalents as shown in the balance sheet
The GroupThe Bank
202120202019202120202019
£m£m£m£m£m£m
Cash and balances at central banks54,279 49,888 38,880 49,618 45,753 35,741 
Less mandatory reserve deposits1
(4,777)(4,392)(3,177)(963)(954)(764)
49,502 45,496 35,703 48,655 44,799 34,977 
Loans and advances to banks and reverse repurchase agreements7,474 5,950 4,852 7,287 5,656 4,453 
Less amounts with a maturity of three months or more(3,786)(2,480)(1,941)(3,712)(2,387)(1,648)
3,688 3,470 2,911 3,575 3,269 2,805 
Total cash and cash equivalents53,190 48,966 38,614 52,230 48,068 37,782 
1Mandatory reserve deposits are held with local central banks in accordance with statutory requirements; these deposits are not expectedavailable to have a significant impact onfinance the Group.Group's day-to-day operations.
Minor amendments to other accounting standards
NOTE 46: FUTURE ACCOUNTING DEVELOPMENTS
The IASB has issued a number of minor amendments to IFRSs effective 1 January 20212022 and in later years (including IFRS 9 Financial Instruments and IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets). These amendments are not applicable for the year ended 31 December 2021 and have not been applied in preparing these financial statements. They are not expected to have a significant impact on the Group.
F-148F-134

GLOSSARY
Term usedUS equivalent or brief description.
AccountsFinancial statements.
Articles of associationArticles and bylaws.
AssociatesLong-term equity investments accounted for by the equity method.
Attributable profitNet income.
Balance sheetStatement of financial position.
BrokingBrokerage.
Building societyA building society is a mutual institution set up to lend money to its members for house purchases.
Buy-to-let mortgagesBuy-to-let mortgages are those mortgages offered to customers purchasing residential property as a rental investment.
Called-up share capitalOrdinary shares, issued and fully paid.
Contract hireLeasing.
CreditorsPayables.
DebtorsReceivables.
Deferred taxDeferred income tax.
DepreciationAmortisation.
Finance leaseCapital lease.
FreeholdOwnership with absolute rights in perpetuity.
LeaseholdLand or property which is rented from the owner for a specified term under a lease. At the expiry of the term the land or property reverts back to the owner.
LienUnder UK law, a right to retain possession pending payment.
Loan capitalLong-term debt.
MembersShareholders.
National InsuranceA form of taxation payable in the UK by employees, employers and the self-employed. It is part of the UK’s national social security system and ultimately controlled by HM Revenue & Customs.
Nominal valuePar value.
Ordinary sharesCommon stock.
OverdraftA line of credit, contractually repayable on demand unless a fixed-term has been agreed, established through a customer’s current account.
Preference sharesPreferred stock.
PremisesReal estate.
Profit attributable to equity shareholdersNet income.
ProvisionsReserves.
Retained profitsRetained earnings.
Share capitalCapital stock.
Shareholders’ equityStockholders’ equity.
Share premium accountAdditional paid-in capital.
Shares in issueShares outstanding.
Specialist mortgagesSpecialist mortgages include those mortgage loans provided to customers who have self-certified their income.New mortgage lending of this type has not been offered by the Group since early 2009.
Undistributable reservesRestricted surplus.
Write-offsCharge-offs.
103122

EXHIBIT INDEX

1
2Neither Lloyds Bank plc nor any subsidiary is party to any single long-term debt instrument pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10 per cent of the Lloyds Bank Group’s total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Lloyds Bank plc hereby agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the Commission), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt issued by it or any subsidiary for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission.
2(d)
4(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)(viii)
(xi)
(xii)(ix)
(xiii)(x)
(xiv)(xi)
(xv)(xii)
(xvi)(xiii)
(xvii)(xiv)
(xviii)(xv)
(xix)(xvi)
(xx)(xvii)
(xxi)(xviii)
(xxii)(xix)
(xxiii)(xx)
(xxi)
(xxiv)(xxii)
(xxv)(xxiii)
(xxvi)(xxiv)
(xxvii)(xxv)
(xxviii)(xxvi)
(xxvii)
(xxviii)
(xxix)
12.1
12.2
13.1
15.1
15.2
Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Bank plc’s Form 20-F filed 31 July 2019.
ΔPreviously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Bank plc’s Form 20-F filed 23 March 2020.
Previously filed with the SEC on Lloyds Bank plc’s Form 20-F filed 11 March 2021.
The exhibits shown above are listed according to the number assigned to them by the Form 20–F.
104123

SIGNATURE
The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.
LLOYDS BANK plc
By:/s/ WWilliam Chalmers
Name:William Chalmers
Title:Chief Financial Officer
Dated:118 March 20212022
105124